I

UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE Research Report 1980

University of Melbourne Parkville, Victoria 3052 UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE Research Report 1980

University of Melbourne Parkville, Victoria 3052 A summary oi' research acliviiies and investigations, including published contributions to science and literature, during the research year, January 1 to December 31, 1980. CONTENTS Reports from departments connected with faculties are placed in alphabetical order under faculty headings. Each faculty area commences with a general in­ troduction on research activities in that faculty, prepared by the relevant Dean. Reports from units not connected with faculties then follow.

AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY-Dean's Introduction 1 Agriculture and Forestry 2

ARCHITECTURE, BUILDING AND TOWN & REGIONAL PLANNING-Dean's Introduction 11 Architecture and Building 12 Town and Regional Planning 14

ARTS —Dean's Introduction 17 Classical Studies 18 Criminology 19 East Asian Studies 20 English 21 Fine Arts 24 French 26 Geography 28 Germanic Studies 31 History 33 History and Philosophy of Science 37 Indian Studies 39 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 40 Italian 41 Middle Eastern Studies 42 Philosophy 44 Political Science 47 Psychology 50 Russian 57 The Horwood Language Centre 59 DENTAL SCIENCE- Dean's Introduction 60 Conservative Dentistry 61 Dental Medicine and Surgery 63 Dental Prosthetics 65

ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE- Dean's Introduction 66 Accounting 67 Economic History 69 Economic Research 71 Economics 72 Graduate School of Business Administration 76 Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research 79 Legal Studies 83 Regional and Urban Economic Studies 84

EDUCATION-Dean's Introduction 85 Education 86 Centre for the Study of Higher Education 97

ENGINEERING-Dean's Introduction 99 Chemical Engineering 100 Civil Engineering 103 Electrical Engineering 111 Industrial Science 114 Mechanical Engineering 115 Mining and Metallurgy 121 Surveying 124

LAW —Dean's Introduction 125

MEDICINE-Dean's Introduction 130 Anatomy 131 Biochemistry 133 Community Health 137 Gerontology and Geriatric Medicine 138 Medical Biology (Walter and Eliza Hall Institute) 140 Medical History 148 Medicine (Austin Hospilal and Repatriation General Hospilal) 149 Medicine (Dept. of the James Slcwart Professor, Royal Melbourne Hospital) 159 Medicine (St Vincent's Hospital) 166 Microbiology 171 Obstetrics and Gynaecology 175 Obstetrics and Gynaecology (Mercy and Austin Hospitals) 178 Ophthalmology 180 Otolaryngology 182 Paediatrics 184 Pathology 188 Pathology (Austin Hospital) 190 Pharmacology 191 Physiology 195 Howard Florey Institute of Experimental Physiology and Medicine 198 Psychiatry 202 Radiology 208 Surgery (Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital) 209 Surgery (Dept. of Thc James Stewart Professor, Royal Melbourne Hospital) 213 Surgery (Dept. of The Hugh Devine Professor, St Vincent's Hospital) 216

MUSIC—Dean's Introduction 219

SCIENCE-Dean's Introduction 221 Botany 222 Chemistry 230 Computer Science 239 Genetics 241 Geology 244 Human Movement Studies 250 Mathematics 252 Meteorology 259 Optometry 262 Physics 265 R.A.A.F Academy —Chemistry 273 — Mathematics 273 - Physics 273 Statistics 276 Zoology 278

VETERINARY SCIENCE-Dean's Introduction 283 Veterinary Clinical Sciences 284 Veterinary Paraclinical Sciences 286 Veterinary Preclinical Sciences 289

Centre for Environmental Studies 290 Social Studies 294

Archives 296 The Library 298 Student Health Service 299 University Assembly 300

ABBREVIATIONS

The abbreviations of the titles of journals used in the lists of Published Work are based on those given in World List of Scientific Periodicals published in the years 1900-1960 (4th ed., 1963). Research Report 1980

INTRODUCTION The University maintained a high level of research and research training in 1980 in cir­ cumstances which brought new opportunities and new difficulties. As the Universities Council has recognized. Universities cannot make ell'eclive use of external grams in support of particular research fields and projects unless they have the resources to maintain thc necessary level of sup­ porting activities. The steady decline in general recurrent grants in recent years has diminished our capacity to provide such support. The total funds spent by the University on 'research only' activities (as distinct from 'leaching and research') rose from SI i .4 million in 1979 to S13.4 million in 1980. In a total of $9.6 million received in 'outside' support —grants, contracts, bequests and donations—the largest items were $2,066,000 received from the National Health and Medical Research Council, $1,103,000 from thc A.R.G.C. and $404,000 from National Energy Research Development and Demonstration Coun­ cil, but there was also a substantial grant from thc Department of Productivity and useful support from thc Education Research and Development Committee and from Australian Marine Sciences and Technologies Council (A.M.S.T.A.C). Contract research continued to bc varied and substan­ tial, foundations and private individuals made very important contributions to projects which, for one reason or another, were unable to obtain sufficient support from either grams or contract1,. No researcher ever believes a grant to be truly sufficient. Unfortunately, the adoption in 1980 by thc Australian Research Grants Committee of'prospective cost adjustment' to meet salary and other cost increases, in place of thc customary post hoc supplementation, has introduced a new element of uncertainty. Thc procedure already applies to A.M.S.T.A.C. grants, and its subse­ quent adoption by thc Commonwealth Government as a prime principle in university funding will make il even more difficult for universities to undertake thc long term planning which major research projects deserve. In these circumstances, the deployment of University funds through the Committee on Research and Graduate Studies has been of increasing importance. In 1980 the Committee distributed S2.9 million, including thc Special Research Gram of S914.000 provided by the Ter­ tiary Education Commission. Grants to departments, or to specific projects, totalled $1.6 million, research fellowships and grants to visiting scholars cost S464.000, and the maintenance of the University's programme of postgraduate and travelling scholarships cost S716,000. The proportion of the University's total 'student load' enrolled for higher degrees increased slightly from 19.9% in 1979 to 20.1% in 1980. Seventy new Melbourne University Postgraduate Scholarships were awarded, and a lolal of 102 new Commonwealth Postgraduate Research and Course Awards were taken up in the University. During 1980 the decision was made to incorporate thc existing Office of Graduate Studies in a new Office of Research and Graduate Studies, partly in recognition of recent expansion in func­ tion, but also to provide new services in support of research. In 1980 ihc terms of reference of thc Biohazards Committee, the Human Experimentation Committee and the Animal Experimentation Committee —all new rcspnsibilitics of the Office —were developed and confirmed. Much work was also done in contributing information and opinion to thc continuing discussion of science and research policy in the Australian community. A major submission to the Inquiry into Marine Science undertaken by the Senate Standing Committee on Science and thc Environment was but one of several made in 1980. Such contributions to the development of research policies are no doubt almost as important as the conduct of research itself, if not often as fruitful.

J. R. Poynicr, Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Research). FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY

DEAN'S REPORT Research interests within thc School are widely diverse, making an introductory review almost impossible. A general research theme might be identified with the improvement of efficiency in Agricultural and Forest Systems. Research in Agricultural Economics has mainly centred on pricing and marketing policy, agricultural finance and income stabilization. The Section benefited greatly from the presence, for eight months, of C. B. Baker, Visiting Professor from the University of Illinois. Agricultural Extension is researching the effectiveness of on-farm education and training in rural communities. Animal Production, in addition to continuing its traditional programmes in nutrition, growth and carcase composition in domestic animals, has expanded iis interest in the behaviour of animals', especially in confined spaces. The presence of Di Wood-Gush from the University of Edinburgh has highlighted this interest. A significant development is ihc establishment of a research network in South East Asia concerned with thc utilization of fibrous agricultural residues. Of Ihe many projects undertaken in Plant Sciences, the several involving physiology, genetics and breeding of wheal have led to exciting developments which promise high protein, high yielding wheat in the future. In addition to their continuing interests, thc Forestry, Soils and Plant Sciences Sections share interests in research into aspects of salinity. Thesc are, respectively: the selection of eucalypts for growth in saline soils; nitrogen fixation under saline conditions, and selecting and breeding for salt tolerance in lucerne. Many other noteworthy and exciting projects have not been mentioned.

1 AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY

A. AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Farm financial management and payment svstems for agricultural products —A. S. Watson, N. H. Sturgess, M. Read. 2. Stabilization of farm incomes —A. G. Lloyd, M. Kent. 3. Land leasing and tenure arrangements in East .lava —N. H. Sturgess, H. Wijaya. 4. Wheal supply and risk —N. H. Sturgess, A. S. Watson, J. Brennan. 5. Price discrimination in the Australian apple industry —A. S. Waison, J. L. Council. 6. Wheal marketing arrangements in Australia —A. S. Waison. 7. Supply and demand in ihe Australian wheat industry: an econometric analysis —A. S. Waison. 8. Pricing and supply control in the Victorian egg industry —A. S. Watson. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. LLOYD, A. G. —Encrgv and Australian Agriculture. Journal of Australian Institute of Agricultural Science. 46 (3): 164-169(1980). 2. WATSON, A.S.-Wool in 1980. Australian Journal of Agricultural Economics. 24 (2): 79-93. Report 3. WATSON, A. S. — Trends in the Location of Early Stage Wool Processing in Asia: Com­ ments on a paper by R. A. Richardson, in K. Anderson and A. George (eds), Australian Agriculture and Newlv Industrialising Asia: Issues Jor Research, Australia-Japan Research Centre. Canberra, 147-148 (19S0). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Agricultural Science I. READ, P. M. — Soine Effects of Payment Systems on the Growth of Wheat Farms. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. WIJAYA, H. — Lund Leasing und Tenure Arrangements in East Java. MAgrSc Theses in Progress 2. BRENNAN, .1. P. —Price Risk in Viclorian Wheal Supply Response. 3. KENT, M.— Variable Amortisation Schemes and Farm Income Stabilization. 4. CONNELL, J. L.. — Price Discrimination in the Australian Apple Industry. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Rural Credits Development Fund, Reserve Bank: Stabilization of Farm Incomes. Rural Credits Development Fund, Reserve Bank: Wheat Supply and Risk. Australian Wheal Industry Research Council: Supply and Demand in the Australian Wheal In­ dustry: an Econometric Analysis (in association with T. .1. Ryan, Viclorian Department of Agriculture).

B. AGRICULTURAL EXTENSION

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Nature and extent of self-directed learning structure within thc rural industry—P. W. Salmon, M. Walker (leaders). 2. Thc effective management of farm labour problems and training needs — N. Barr. E. Almond (leaders). 2 AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY 3

3. Part-lime farming: a problem or resource in rural development —Ii. Almond, N. Barr (leaders). 4. Farm management experimental education project —P. W. Salmon. M. Walker (leaders). 5. Evaluation of Australian Broadcasting Commission programme on market intelligence —P. W. Salmon, li. Almond (leaders). 6. Survey of adult education literature—P. W. Salmon (leader). 7. Rural work force statistics: 1954-1976 — J. McAllister, M. Walker (leaders). 8. Psychology of personal change: implications for extension —P. W. Salmon (leader). PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. CARY, J. W. Farmers under stress: Personal coping in rural adjustment situations. N.Z. Agric. Science, 14 0): 18-26 (1980). 2. HAWKINS, H. S. Training of agricultural scientists in scientific communication. /•" Forum Inf. Doc. 5 (3): 30-35 (1980). Reports 3. PRESSER, H. A. — Hamilton Project: A Survev of Fanners' Needs. Universitv of Melbourne (1979). 4. BARR, N. F., WESTON, R. E. and CARY, J. W.-Farmers Looking lo the Future: Labour Mobility and Adjustment Strategies in ihe 1970s. University of Melbourne (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Agricultural Science (Extension) 1. HOLMES, W. E. — Economic and Management Planning. 2. NANCARROW, J. — Applying Adult Education Principles to Agricultural Extension Pro­ grammes. 3. POUSSARD, H.- Work Attitudes and Organizational Change. 4. S TEPHENS, E. — Personal Constructs of Farm Apprentices and Their Teachers. 5. UNDERWOOD, C —Self Directed Learning Processes amongst Queensland Extension OJjkers. THESI S IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. BARDSLI: Y, B. — An Interactive Procedure for Reviewing Farmers' Use of Information und Informal ion Sources. MAgrSc Theses in Progress 2. BOUWIiR, J. —,4 Systems Analysis of Organizational Learning. 3. CLARKE, L. — An Investigation of Farmers' Management Styles. 4. HESLOP. J. — An Investigation into the Use of Adult Education Principles and Methods in Agricultural Extension. 5. PHJLLIPS, T. — Self Directed Learning Processes Amongst Dairy Partners. h. SUTR1SNA, I. tt.-Impact of T. V. on Chicken Producers in liuli. 7. TRIINDALL, B. — Factors Affecting Work Efficiency in Extension Organizations. SUBSTAN TIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian Extension Services Grant (AESG): Extension Research in Management and Labour Problems. Department of Agriculture, Victoria: Support for Senior Research Fellow.

C. ANIMAL PRODUCTION

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. The growth, body composition and carcass quality of farm animals —N. M. Tulloh. 2. The genetic improvement of farm animals—R. Ci. Beilharz. 3. Genetic selection for reproduction in mice —B. Luxford, R. G. Beilharz. 4. Behaviour of sheep in yards and races —G. D. Hutson, R. G. Beilharz. 5. Thc utilization of crop and animal residues fot animal feeding —G. R. Pearce. 6. Thc use of feed supplements by grazing animals —Ci. R. Pearce. 4 FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY

7. Faciors affecting rumen function and voluntary intake —G. R. Pearce. 8. Sulphur metabolism in sheep—P. T. Doyle. 9. Management of Australian/Asian Fibrous Agricultural Residues Research Network —P. T. Doyle. 10. Influence of protein and energy intake on growth and body composition of the young pig —A. C. Dunkin, R. G. Campbell. 11. Ell'ect of nutrition in early life on the subsequent growth and body composition of growing pigs —A. C. Dunkin. R. G. Campbell. 12. Fat cell development in the growing pig —A. C. Dunkin. R. G. Campbell. 13. Nitrogen retention in the growing pig-A. C. Dunkin. 14. Behaviour of intensively housed pigs-D. Wood-Gush. R. G. Beilharz, G. D. Hutson, A. C. Dunkin. 15. Supervision of research projects in animal production in Indonesia —N. M. Tulloh, A. C. Dunkin.

PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. BEILHARZ, R. G.-Angcwandic Vcrhalicnsgcnctik. KTBL-Schrift. 240: 15-19 (1979). 2. BEILHARZ, R. G. — Behavioural genetics of domesticated agricultural animals. Anim. Res. und Development, II: 100-105(1980). 3. CAMPBELL, R. G. and DUNKIN, A. C.-Effect of nutrition in early life on subsequent growth and body composition. Proc. Aust. Soc. Anim. Prod.. 13: 131 (1980). 4. CAMPBELL, R. G. and DUNKIN, A. C. — Influence of early nutrition on the development of body fat and cellurariiv of adipose tissue in the growing pig. Proc. Nutr. Soc. Austr.. 5: 156 (1980). 5. DOYLE, P. T. and ADAMS, N. E. — Toxic ell'ects of large amounts of DL-mcihionine infused into thc rumen of sheep. Aust. Vet. J., 56: 331-334 (1980). 6. DOYLE, P. T. and EGAN, .1. K. —Intake and digestion of herbage diets by Angora goats and Merino sheep. Proc. Aust. Soc. Anim. Prod.. 13: 521 (1980). 7. DOYLE, P. T. and MOIR, R. J. —Sulphur and methionine metabolism in sheep. IV. Metabolism and absorption in the intestines. Aust. J. Biol. Sci.. 33: 303-307 (1980). 8. EGAN, J. K. and DOYLE, P. T. — The comparative intake and digestion of herbage diets by weaner and mature sheep. Proc. Aust. Soc. Anim. Prod., 13: 475 (1980). 9. HEMSWORTH, P. H. and BEILHARZ, R. G. -The influence of restricted physical contact with pigs during rearing on thc sexual behaviour of the male domestic pig. Anim. Prod., 29: 311-314 (1979). 10. HEMSWORTH, P. H., FINDLAY, J. K. and BEILHARZ, R. G.-The importance of physical contact with other pigs during rearing on thc sexual behaviour of the male domestic pig. Anim. Prod.. 27: 201-207 (1978). 11. HOLMES, J. H. G. -Animal genetic resources in Papua New Guinea. Proc. SABRAO Workshop on Anim. Genet. Resources in Asia and Oceania, Tropical Agric. Res. Centre. Tsukuba, Japan: 439-469 (1980). 12. HOLMES, .1. H. G. —Toxicity of Leucaena leucoceplwla I. Equal toxic ell'ects of two Leu- caena strains on two breeds of tropical cattle. P.N.G. Auric. J., 30: 65-69 (1979). 13. HUTSON, G. D. — Sheep behaviour and the design of sheep yards and shearing sheds. Behaviour in Relation lo Reproduction, Management and Welfare nf Farm Animals, ed. M. Wodzicka-I'omaszcwska, T. N. Hdev, and J. J. Lynch, University of New England Publishing Unit: 137-141 (1980). 14. HUTSON. G. D. —An evaluation of some traditional and contemporary views on sheep behaviour. Wool Harvesting Research and Development, ed. P. R. VV. Hudson, Australian Wool Corporation, Sydney: 377-385 (1980). 15. HUTSON, G. D. — Visual held, restricted vision and sheep movement in lancwavs. Appl. Anim. Ethol., 6: 175-187 (1980). 16. HUTSON, G. D — The effects of previous experience on sheep movement through vards. Appl. Anim. Ethol., 6: 233-240 (1980). 17. IBRAHIM, M. N. M. and PEARCE, G. R. —Effects of white rot fungi on thc composition and in vitro digestibility of crop byproducts. Agricultural Wusles, 2: 199-205 (1980). IS. IBRAHIM, M. N. M. and PEARCE, G. R.-Effects of gamma irradiation on the composi­ tion and //; vitro digestibility of crop byproducts. Agricultural Wastes, 2: 253-259 (1980). 19. LOBATO, J. F. P. and PEARCE, G. R. —Effects of some management procedures on the responses of sheep to molasses-urea blocks. Ausi. J. Exp. Agric. Anim. Husb.. 20: 422-426 (1980). 20. LOBATO, J. F. P. and PEARCE, G. R.-Responses to molasscs-urea blocks of grazing sheep and sheep in vards. Aust. J. Exp. Agric. Anim. Husb., 20: 417-421 (1980). 21. LOBATO. J. F. P.. PEARCE, G. R. and BEILHARZ, R. G.-Effect of earlv familiali/.a- AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY 5

tion with dietary supplements on the subsequent ingestion of molasses-urea blocks bv sheep. Appl. Anim. Ethol.. 6: 149-161 (1980). 22. LOHATO, J. F. P., PEARCE, G. R. and TRIBE, D. E. - Measurement ot the variability in intake by sheep of oat grain, hav and molasses-urea blocks using chromic oxide as a marker. Aust. ./. Exp. Auric. Anim. Husb.. 20: 413-416 (1980). 23. STANOGIAS, G. and PEARCE, G. R.-Elt'cct ol' source and increasing cell wall levels on the digestibility of dietary components bv pigs. Proc. 13th Biennial Conf. Aust. Soc. Anim. Prod.: 508 (1980). 24. STANOGIAS, G., T J A N D R A ATM A D J A, M. and PEARCE, G. R.-Effects of level and source of fibre in pig diets on the methane production of piggery wastes. Proc. 4th Aust. Ilioiechnolog v Conf.: 13-15 (1980). 25. TRUSCOTT, T. G., TULLOH, N. M. and WHITFIELD, D. E.-A seriatum study using ultrasonic measurements of fat depth and M. longissimus area in Hereford bulls, steers and heifers under grazing conditions. Animal Production, 30: 199-209 (19S0). 26. ZEEB, K. and BEILHARZ, R. G. — Angewandte Ethologie und artgemasse Ticrhaltung. Tierarztl. Umschau, 35: 603-610 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. GODDARD, M. E.-A Breeding Program for Guide Dogs for the Blind. 2. WILLIAMS, K. C —Utilization of Synthetic Lysine by the Growing Pig. Master of Agricultural Science 3. CROKE, to. —Energy Inputs and Outputs on Non-irrigated Dairy Farms. 4. CURRY, P. T. — The Young Emu and its Family Life in Captivity. 5. FRANKLIN, .1. R. — The Effect of Olfactory, Auditory and Visual Stimuli on the Movement of Sheep. 6. PEEL, C. i. — The induction of lactation in dairy cows. 1. TANGDILINTIN, F. K. — Utilization of Crop By-products by Ruminants. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ABERDE.EN, 1. A. — The development of better farming systems in undeveloped countries. 2. CAMPBELL, R. G. — Nutritional Influences in Early Life on Growth and Development in ihe Pig. 3. CHANDLER, D. S.- Bacteriological studies in the disposal of piggery effluent on land. 4. EGAN, .1. K. — 77ie Nutrition of Weaner Sheep. 5. IBRAHIM, M. N. M. — The Utilization by Animals of Crop Residues and By-products. 6. STANOGIAS, G.-Studies on the Utilization of Piggery Waste. MAgrSc Theses in Progress 1. ALGAR, Xi. —Growth, Body Composition and Nutrition of Emus. 8. BR I EN, 1'. D. —Nutritional und Hormonal Aspects of Reproduction Performance in Ewes. 9. COATS, S.T. — Sensory Perception of Electric Fences by Aiiiniuls. 10. DAVILS, G. T. — The Influence of Pre-Slaughter Management on Weight Changes and Meat Quality in Pigs. 11. LUXFORD, Xi. —Genetic Selection for Reproduction in Mice. 12. MeARTHUR, .1. M.-Soine Aspects of Production Recording Beef Cattle in Victoria. 13. MACLEAN, D. N. A. — Equipment for Measuring the Intake of Molasses-Urea Blocks by Cattle. 14. POLLARD. T. G.-Factors Affecting the Intake of Supplements by Cattle. 15. Van REES, H. — Cattle Behaviour in Alpine Areas of Victoria. 16. SHEPHERD, R. C. H.-Studies of Wild Rabbit Populations (Oryctolagus cuniculus) in the Mallee and Central Districts of Victoria. 17. TJANDRAATNADJA, M. — Anaerobic Fermentation of Crop By-products by Ruminants. 18. THOMAS. G. W. — Experiments with Dairy Cuttle Concerning Induced Parturition and Calf Rearing. 19. W1NUGROHO, M.-Factors Affecting the Composition and Digestibility of Crop Ry- producis. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian Meat Research Committee: Utilization of Poor Quality Roughage by Ruminants. Australian Wool Corporation, Wool Research Trust Fund: Sheep Behaviour Studies. Australian Pig Industry Research Committee: Investigation of Behaviour of Intensively Housed 6 FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY

Pigs. Fibre Components in Pig Diets and Effects on Waste Utilization. Relationships between Pro­ tein and Energy Intakes in the Grazing Pig. Effect of Nutrition in Early Life on Compensatory Growth in Pigs. Australian Development Assistance Bureau: Establishment and Management of a Research Net­ work in Asia for Utilization of Fibrous Agricultural Residues. Ministry of Conservation, Victoria: Behaviour and Diet of Free-ranging Cattle in Alpine Areas. CSIRO: Physico-chemical Treatment of Ligno-cellulosic Materials.

E. PLANT SCIENCES RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Enzymes in wheat controlling nitrogen metabolism and senescence — M. J. Dalling, E. Noble. 2. Ell'ects of temperature and other environmental influences during the pre-amhesis phase on grain yield of wheat genotypes —M. J. Dalling, R. Gleadow, G. M. Halloran, .1. H. Wilson. 3. Transference of high-protein large-grain characteristics of tetraploid Triticum turgidum var dicoccoides to hexaploid (bread) wheat —U. Kushnir, G. M Halloran. 4. Incorporation of gibberellin insensitivity and winter growth habit in Australian wheat — A. T. Pugsley. 5. Investigation of anther culture as a means of inducing haploidy in wheal — Beng Tan. 6. Detection and genetic basis of tolerance to barley yellow dwarf virus in wild and cultivated species of Triiiaim and Aegilops—L. L. Stubbs, U. Kushnir. 7. Genetic control of development responses in wheat —G. M. Halloran, A. T. Pugsley. 8. Environment-genotype studies with maize —Y. Aitken. 9. Root growth of crop plants as influenced by soil density and moisture content especially with reference-to minimum cultivation —J. II. Wilson. 10. Genetical and physiological factors influencing salt tolerance in lucerne —G. M. Halloran. 11 Mode of action of proieoid roots in Lupinus a/bus—D. G. Parbery. 12. Anatomical, physiological and genetic basis for seed shattering in rape (Brassica napus) — G. M. Halloran, U. Kushnir. 13. Role of pathogens influencing seasonal variation of oestrogen content in subterranean clover—D. G. Parbery, W. Morgan. 14. Microbial and nutritional factors influencing growth of selected species on mined areas of Groote Eylandt —M. J. Dalling. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. FRITH, Ci. .1. T. and DALLING, M. J.-Thc Role of Peptide Hydrolases in Plant Senescence, in Senescence in Plants, ed. K. V. Thimann, CRC Press Inc. Boca Raton, Florida: 117-130 (1980). 2. HALLORAN, G. M. — Crop Improvement, in Principles of Field Crop Production, ed. J. E. Pratlcv, Svdney Universitv Press: 95-161 (1980). 3. LANGKAMP, P. .1. and DALLING, M. J.-Thc Example of Groote Eylandt, in Cities and Factories, cd. M. C. Millikan and P. P. Courtcnav, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 211-214 (1980). Articles 4. AITKEN, Y. —The Early Maturing Character in Maize (Zea mays L.) in Relation to Temperature and Photoperiod. /.. Aekcr-und Pflunzcnbau, 149: 89-106(1980). 5. BERRY, G. J., SALISBURY, P. A. and HALLORAN, G. M. — Expression of Vernalization Genes in Near-lsogenic Wheal Lines: Duration of Vernalization Period. Ann. Bol., 46: 235-241 (1980). 6. DREHER, T. W., NGIAN, M. F. and HALLORAN, G. M. - Mitotic Aberrations and Leaf Spoi Induction in Soybean (Glvcine max L. (Merrill)) usinn Ethvl Methancsulphoiialc. Mula- lion Research, 71: 201-206 (1980). 7. HALLORAN, G. M.—Tetraploid Wheat Crossabilitv with Rve (Secale) species. Genetica. 51: 91-94 (1980). 8. K EL LOCK, A. W., STUBBS, L. L. and PARBERY, D. G. - Infection of Seed of Subterra­ nean Clover and Allied Species of Fusarium. Ausi. J. Agric. Res., 31: 297-306 (1980). 9. LANGKAMP, P. J., DALLING, M. J., CALDER, D. M. and FARRELL, T. P. —Studies on the Rehabilitation of Mined Areas on Groote Eylandt, Northern Territory. I. Vegetation Description. Reclam. Rev.. 2: 147-155 (1980). 10. LANGKAMP, P. J. and DALLING, M. .1.-Studies on the Rehabilitation of Mined Areas on Groote Evlandt, Northern Territory. II. Soil Characterization and Rehabilitation with Pasture. Reclam. Rev.. 2: 157-166(1980). AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY 7

11. LANGKAMP, P. J. and DALLING, M. J. - Nitrogen and Phosphorus-Kcvs to the Success of Rehabilitation on Groote Eylandt? BHP Technical Bull., 24: 79-S4 (1980). 12. LANGKAMP, P. J. and DALLING, M. .1. —Managing the Nitrogen Economies of Groote Eylandt Rehabilitation Sites. Lam/line, 4: 3-4 (19S0). 13. MORGAN. W. C. and PARBERY, D. G. — Depressed Fodder Quality and Increased Oestrogenic Activity of Lucerne Infected wilh Pseudopeziza medicaginis. Ausi. .1. Agric. Pes.. 31: 1103-1110 (1980). 14. NIK, W. Z. and PARBERY, D. G. - Seed-borne Fungi Afl'eciing Seeds of Siratro (Macrop- lilium atropurpureuin) and Slvlo (Sivlosanihes spp.). Seed Sci. & Technol, 8: 193-201 (1980). 15. PEOPLES, M. B., BEILHARZ, V.C., WATERS, S. P., SIMPSON, R. .1. and DALLING, M. .1. —Nitrogen Redistribution during Grain Growth in Wheal (Triiicum aestivum I..). 11. Chloroplast Senescence and the Degradation of Ribulose-1,5-Biphosphatc Carboxylase. Planta. 149: 241-251 (1980). 16. R1DLAND, P. M. and HALLORAN, G. M. - Population Variability in the Reaction of Alfalfa to Alfalfa Bud-Mite. Crop Sci.. 20: 755-757 (1980). 17. RIDLAND, P. M. and HALLORAN, G. M.- Influence of Alfalfa Bud Mile on Growth of Alfalfa under Different Temperatures. Crop Sci.. 20: 790-792 (1980). IS. TAN, B. H. and HALLORAN, G. M. — Some Cytological Aspecis of Diploid Wheat Anther Culture. Wheat Inf. Sen:, 51: 15-18 (1980). 19. THORNTON, I. R., EMMETT, R. W. and STUBBS, L. L.-A Further Repoit on the Grapefruit Tristcza Preimmiinizaiion Trial at Mildura, Victoria —Proc-. 81I1 Conf. Inter. Organiz. Citrus Virol., Univ. Calif., Riverside: 51-53 (1980). 20. WATERS, S. P., PEOPLES, M. B., SIMPSON, R. J. and DAI.I.ING, M. .1. - Nitrogen Redistribution during Grain Growth in Wheal (Triiicum uesiivum I,.). I. Peptide Hydrolase Activity and Protein Breakdown in the Flag Leaf, Glumes and Stem. Planta, 148: 422-428 (1980).' THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Doctor of Philosophy 1. PEOPLES, M. B. — Investigation ofthe Degradativc Processes Involved in the Turn-over of Ribulose 1.5 Diphosphate Carboxylase in Wheal Leaves. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BERRY, G. J. - 77ie Influence of Genotype and Environment on Yield of Pisum. 2. BIN YAHYA, H. A. —Crop Growth in Relation lo Soil Density and Moisture Content. 3. FLOOD, R. Ci. — Genetic Control of Developmental Responses in Wheal. 4. GARDNER, W. K. — The Soil-Root Interface of Lupinus albus and its Significance in the Uptake of Mungunese, Iron und Aluminium. 5. LANGKAMP, P. .1. — Investigation of Factors Controlling ihe Establishment, Growth and Survival of Selected Plant Species on Groote Eylandt (Northern Territory). 6. MARTIN, P. i. — Investigation of the Genetic Basis of Tolerance lo Barley Yellow Dwarf Virus in Triiicum species. 7. NOBLE, C. I.. —Genetical and Physiological Aspecis of Salt Tolerance in a Range of A gr/cultural Species. 8. SIMPSON, R. .1.-Metabolism of Remobilized Nitrogen in Wheal. 9. WATERS, S. P. — Purification and Characterization of Amino-peptidases in Wheal. MAgrSc Theses in Progress 10. BOUNDY. K. A.-Grain Legumes In Victoria. 11. COFFEY, S. G. — Introduction and Evaluation of some New Crop Species of Potential Im­ parlance for Australian Agriculture. 12. CRAIG, A. D.— Winter Productivity of Pastures in Southern Australia. 13. FARNELL, G. K. — The Establishment of Vegetation on 'Tailings Dams ai Groote Eylandt. Northern Territory. 14. RASH ID, A. W. —Effect of Environmental Factors during the Pre-unthesis Phase on Grain Set and Grain Growth in Wheal. 15. TUOHEY, C. L. — The Effect of Fertilizer Nitrogen on the Yield and Quality of Wheal Grown after Periods of Intensive Cropping and Medic-ley. 16. WARD. G. N. — Examination of the Agricultural Productivity and Characteristics of Native Pasture Grasses of the Genus Danthonia. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: ARGC: Role of Infection by Pathogens in Explaining Seasonal Variations in Subterranean Clover Oestrogen Content. 8 FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY

ARGC: Relation between Activity Levels of Proteases in Wheat Leaves and Translocation of Nitrogen in thc Grain. Wheat Industry Research Council: Incorporation of Large Grain Size and High Protein of Triiicum dicoccoicles in Bread Wheat. Wheal Industry Research Council: The Incorporation of Winter Habit and Gibberellin Insensi­ tivity in Australian Wheat Cultivars. Wheal Industry Research Council: A Study of the Physiological Basis for the Generally Observed Inverse Relation between Grain Yield and Protein Percentage. Wheat Industry Research Council: Purchase of High Pressure Liquid Chromatography System. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Wheat Improvement Programme at Ml. Derrimut. Wheal Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Mode of Action of Root Systems of Lupinus a/bus in Relation to Lupin-Wheat Rotations. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Screening of 'Wild' Progenitors of Wheat for Tolerance to Barley Yellow Dwarf Virus. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: liffect of Moderate to High Temperatures on Grain Yield in Wheat and Identification of Temperature Insensitive Genotypes. Wheal Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Induced Haploidy and Wheat Breeding. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Travel Gram for Research Workers. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Publication of Papers on Wheat Research. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Provision of Technical Assistance lor Wheal Breeding Project Involving Triiicum dicuccoides. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Contribution towards thc Cost of Research Being Conducted at Plant Breeding Institute, Cambridge, U.K. Rural Credits Development Fund (Reserve Bank of Australia): Physiological Studies in Salt Tolerance in Agricultural and Forest-Tree Species. Conimonweahh Special Research Grant: Selection for Salt Tolerance in Lucerne. Oilseeds Research Committee: Shattering Resistance in Rape Seed. Groote Eylandt Mining Company Pty. Ltd.: Revegctation Studies of Mined Areas on Groote Eylandt. Dampicr Mining Company Limited: Rehabilitation of Mined Areas at Gregory Mine Site.

D. FORESTRY

RKSKAKCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Silviculture and growth of Eucalvplus obliqua — A. B. Rudra, J. H. Chinner. 2. Management planning models —A. B. Rudra. 3. Management of native Callitris stands in thc Northern Territory —G. L. Hammer, A. B. Rudra. 4. Management information systems —A. B. Rudra. 5. Optimization of production and stock control in sawmilling —A. B. Rudra. 6. Coppicing and bud development in eucalypts —C. B. S. Perera, K. S. Rowan. 7. Ell'ects on salinity by agroforestry using coppiced eucalypts—L. A. J. Thomson. 8. Effects of salinity on eucalypt growth and development — L. A. J. Thomson. 9. Digital image analysis for the remote sensing of changes in the natural environment —W. G. Tuddenham, A. B. Rudra. 10. Root/shool relations of Eucalvplus with special reference to root physiology —C. B. S. Perera. I 1. Evolution of strategic planning policy in Victoria —R. D. Spencer. 12. Evaluation of natural-resource values and uses along the Viclorian coast —R. D. Spencer. 13. Implications of stale strategic planning for natural-resource managers—R. D. Spencer. 14. Management of fir and conifer forests of Kashmir Valley —A. R. Qazi. 15. Effects of weedicides —G. Minko. PUBLISHED WORK Articles I. RUDRA, A. B.-The Influence of Spatial Distribution of Neighbours on thc Diameter AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY 9

Growth of Individual Trees. Growth of Single Trees and Development of Stands. Mil- teilungen der Forsllichen Bundes-Versuchsanstall, Wien, 130: Heft. 19S0: 209-219 (1980). 2. RUDRA, A. B. — Review of J. A. Sindcn and A. C. Worrell, Unpriced values: Decisions Without Market Prices (Wiley Interscience Publication, John Wilcv & Sons, 1979). Australian Forestry, 42 (4): 251-252 (1979). 3. SPENCER, R. D. - Review of L. Sayn-Wingcnstein, Recognition of Tree Species on Aerial Photographs (Canadian Forest Service, Ottawa). Photograinmetria, 35: 200-201 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BAKER, T. G. — Studies on the Distribution and Cycling of Nitrogen in Forests. 2. HATELEY, R. F. — A Sampling Strategy for Vegetation Study. 3. PERERA, C. B. S. — Root/Shoot Relation of eucalyptus with special reference to Root Physiology. MForSc Theses in Progress 4. ADES, P. K. — Control of Salinity by Agroforestry using Coppiced Eucalypts. 5. MINKO, G.-Soils and Toxicity of AA Herbicide. 6. QAZI, R. A. —Management of Fir and Conifer Forests of the Kashmir Valley. 7. THOMSON, L. A. J. — Variation in Salt Tolerance and Effects of Salinity on the Growth and Physiology of Eucalyptus camaldulensis Provenances.

F. SOIL SCIENCE

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Estimation of soil erodibility—L. A. Douglas. 2. Effect of piggery waste on soil properties—L. A. Douglas. 3. Field measurement of nitrogen-fixation in some tropical grasses and legumes— P. M. Chalk. 4. Chemical dcnitrification in bonded nitrogen fertilizers in wheat-growing soils—P. M. Chalk. 5. Salinity effects on nitrogen-fixation —P. M. Chalk, L. A. Douglas. 6. Herbicide effect on soil biochemical reactions—L. A. Douglas. 7. Phosphorus loss from pasture following superphosphate application —L. A. Douglas. 8. Use of herbicides instead of cultivation for weed control in the Moree district —L. A. Douglas, P. M. Chalk. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. DOUGLAS, L. A., RIAZI, A. and SMITH, C. J.—A semi-micro method for determining total nitrogen in soils and plant material containing nitrite and nitrate. Soil Sci. Soc. Amer. J.. 44: 431-433 (1980). 2. FRASER, P. K., DOUGLAS, L. A. and WELLS, G. K. — Effect of herbicide applications and cultivation treatments on some soil biological properties and on agronomic considera­ tions relating to the wheat crop. Proc. Nal. Soils Conf. Sydnev, Mav 1980, 92-93 (1980).

3. HOPMANS, P. and DOUGLAS, L. A. - Effect of soil salinity on N2 ( - C2H2) fixation by sub-clover and barrel medic. Proc. Int. Cong. Soil Biol., Sopron, Hungary, August 1980, 135-143 (1980). 4. SMITH, C. J. and CHALK, P. M. —Factors affecting thc determination of nitric oxide and nitrogen dioxide evolution from soil. So/7 Sci., 128: 327-330 (1980). 5. SMITH, C. J. and CHALK, P. M. —Gaseous nitrogen evolution during nitrification of am­ monia fertilizer and nitrite transformations in soils. So/7 Sci. Soc. Amer. J., 44: 277-282 (1980). 6. SMITH, C. J. and CHALK, P. M. — Fixation and loss of nitrogen during transformations of nitrite in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Amer. J., 44: 288-291 (1980). 7. SMITH, C. J. and CHALK, P. M. — Comparison of the efficiency of urea, aqueous am­ monia and ammonium sulphate as nitrogen fertilizers. PI. Soil, 55: 333-337 (1980). Report 8. CHALK, P. M.—Soil fertility and forage nutrition. Consultant's report, Interamerican In­ stitute of Agricultural Sciences (1980). 10 FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Agricultural Science 1. BARROW, N. S. — Some factors affecting the availability of nutrients lo plants. Muster of Agricultural Science 2. MIKHAIL, E. H. — An investigation of soil friability and plant growth. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. HOPMANS, P.—N Fixation by Plants Growing in Salt-Affected Soil. MAgrSc Theses in Progress 2. FISHER, H. — Production of Urease by Bacteria Isolated from Piggery Effluent. 3. FRASER, P. K. — Effect of Herbicide and Cultivation Treatments on Wheat Yields and Soil Biochemical Properties. 4. GREENHILL, N. — Characteristics and Sources of Diffuse Agricultural Runoff in the Westernport Catchment. 5. REID, R.— Effect of Piggery Effluent Applications on the Elemental Contents of Soil and Plants. 6. WUSTAMADIN-£s(//;;<7r/o/i of the Aggregate Stability. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian Wheat Industry Research Council: Chemical Dcnitrification in Banded Nitrogen Fer­ tilizers in Wheat-growing Soils. Monsanto Australia, Ltd: Use of Herbicides instead of Cultivation for Weed Control. Rural Credits Development Fund (Reserve Bank of Australia): Nitrogen Fixation by Plants grow­ ing in Salt-affected Soils. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Effect of Different Cultivation Treatments on Wheat Yields and Soil Properties. FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE, BUILDING AND TOWN AND REGIONAL PLANNING

DEAN'S REPORT New areas of research have emerged within the Faculty in creative problem-solving; the pro­ blems of ihe handicapped and of the elderly in buildings; pre-design, post-occupancy evaluation, adaptability and flexibility of buildings; and the behaviour of laterally loaded concrete masonry walls. Established interest in architectural history and conservation is continuing. The TEM PAL com­ puter programme and its role in the prediction of thc thermal performance of buildings has again obtained external support. The Degree of Master of Urban Planning in the Department of Town and Regional Planning has generated research and publications in statutory planning, planning policy, landscape studies and welfare housing. Some research in planning continues to be funded bv the Ministrv of Conservation and the ARGC.

11 ARCHITECTURE AND BUILDING

In 1980 research activities continued across the fields represented by architecture and building. Opportunities arose to collaborate wilh colleagues outside the Department, particularly on the creative aspects of design and problem solving. The TEMPAL Thermal Performance Package has now been translated into Fortran language affording a greater utility of this simulative programme. The work of the Department in the predesign planning and programming of buildings and post-occupancy evaluation of buildings has been strengthened by thc arrival of Professor Brawn. Support from ARGC has allowed Professor Scrivener and his team to further their research into the behaviour of structural masonry.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Thermal performance of buildings-A. B. Coldicutt, E. B. Coldicutl. 2. Post-occupancy building evaluation — G. Brawn, R. Edmond. 3. Thc behaviour of structural masonry —J. C. Scrivener, D. Gairns. 4. Quantification of glare from windows; a factor in integration of artificial and natural light — B. Merz. 5. Thc development of industrial estates —J. Robinson, N. Flannigan. 6. Building projects organisation —J. Robinson. 7. Prc-design, particularly the acquiring, recording, management and analysis of design infor­ mation — R. Rahni. 8. Circulation and zoning of major buildings and environs —R. Rahni. 9. Posi-occupancy evaluation, particularly in regard to circulation, activity patterns and spatial arrangement — R. Rahni. 10. Adaptability and flexibility of buildings—R. Rahni, L. Rudolph. 11. Production drawing (working drawing) Manual —R. Rahni, L. Rudolph. 12. Industrialised service units—P. Williams. 13. Colonial Architecture in Indonesia; architectural links between S.E. Asia and Australia — H. O'Neill. 14. Creative problem-solving techniques in natural systems management — D. Watson and D. Le Grew (with B. Crawshaw, B. Itami and G. Seddon of the Centre for Environmental Studies). 15. Role-taking as a factor in perception of thc man-made environment — D. Waison (assisting C. Gribbin and T. Brealey of CSIRO).

PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. TURNBULL, J. and others-An Interview with William Turnbull Jnr. Transition: 6-8 (March 1980). 2. WILLIAMS, P. H. M.-Edited The Chartered Builder, 1980 official quarterly publication of Australian Institute of Building. 3. CRAWSHAW, B., LEGREW, D. and WATSON, D. -Creative Problem-Solving, Land Use Modelling Quarterly, 2 (4): 2 (Nov. 1980). 4. WATSON, J. D. — ,1am Session (a critique of Melbourne's Jam Factory Complex). Architec­ ture Australia. 68 (6): 38-41 (1980). 5. WATSON, J. D.-50 years on: interview with 1978/9 RAIA President John Davidson. Architecture Australia, 68(2): 22 (1979). 6. LEWIS, M. B.-Cob. Chartered Builder, 28: 51-53 (1980). 7. LEWIS, M. B.-Origins of Pise. Chartered Builder. 29: 39-43 (1980). 8. LEWIS, M. B.-Pise in Australia. Chartered Builder, 30: 51-57 (1980). 9. KIDD, B. J.—The Physical Environment and Communication. Proc, First National Workshop on Librarianship for Handicapped Users, Melbourne State College: 97-106 (May 1980). Reports 10. BRAWN, G. W. and JACKSON, D. - The Slate Library and National Museum of Victoria. A Study lo Define the Probable Site Area Requirements (1980). 11. KIDD, B. J. and others— Resident Funded Housing for Elderly People. Victorian Council on the Ageing (1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of A rchi tec lure I. FOX, P. — The Computer as an aid to design synthesis and evaluation. 12 ARCHITECTURE AND BUILDING 13

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BREALEY, T. B. — The identification and measurement of significant environmental variables and thc study of their interactions. 2. DOVEY, K. — User participation and environmental meaning. 3. DOWNTOWN, P. —Establishment and explication of fundamental structure in man- en vironmenlal relations. 4. LINZEY, M.-O/J the nature of form. 5. McNEILLY, T. H. — The influence of aggregates and additives on various strength and durability properties of mortar for masonry construction. 6. MISSINGHAM, G. — On Meaning and Architecture. MArch Theses in Progress 1. EVANS, D. G. — An examination of the relationship between energy consumption, built form, and social structure. 8. GAY, A.— Self help housing: A systematic approach. 8. IIAI.AFOFF, S. — Cluster grouping of operating theatres. 9. HARDW1CK, C.-Art Deco Building in Victoria. 10. 11UBBARD, T. - Viclorian Interior Decorators 1851-1900. 11. K1 DD, B. J. — I 'actors involved in community location of housing for the elderly. 12. LINDELL, M. — Study of the ways 'space' conditions behaviour, with emphasis on designing and therapeutic environment. 13. I.OWE, R. F. — Towards a conserver city. 14. MIDEGS, J.'— / ire protection in high-rise buildings. 15. MOORE, D. — Holography as a medium for architecture representation. 16. MUNRO, C. P. —Architectural criticism: Problems in the application of aesthetic theory lo architecture. 17. OGILVY, G. I:.. — Conceptions of community and the planning of urban areas. 18. PREST, D. — Computer applications in architectural practice. 19. RIGG, M. — Medium density housing. 20. ROGERS, R. — Development of a 'design to cost' target munuul. 21. SMITHSON, P. - Elaslomeric building sealants. 22. SWEETNAM, D. — A computerised package Jor space projection, simulation and allocation as a planning tool in ihc development of educational institutions. 23. WAREHAM, C. .1.-/1/; enquiry into creativity. 24. WELLINGTON, P. — Leisure facilities in Australian Antarctic. 25. WIL I. INGHAM, A. — 77ie architecture of Davidson and Henderson. MBIdg Theses in Progress 26. DYNAN, K. — Design ofa computer system for a mathematical model lo assisi in the alloca­ tion of resources in large-scale building programmes in the Victorian P. W. D. 21. MARSHALL, C^. —Programme network planning procedure. MBIdgSc Theses in Progress 28. CAMPBELL, R. — Thermal behaviour of materials, new techniques in solar energy and design of buildings lo conserve energy: 29. GA1RNS, D. - Concrete masonry walls under luierul loading. 30. HOLMES, I. — Development of prefabricated modular buildings, complete with associated services, suitable for use in remote bases in cold regions. 31. LOVELL, P. — The identification und analysis of old paints anil surface coalings. 32. McELHINNEY, K. - Design and implementation of a computerised management system for ihe building industry: 33. ROBINSON, i. —Cost/Benefit solutions Jor elements of a multistorey office building. 34. SALOMONSSON, G. — Evaluation of construction processes. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: Australian Housing Research Council: Thermal Performance of Public Housing in Queensland. Australian Housing Research Council: Energy Use, Energy Requirements, and Satisfaction of Oc­ cupants of Public Housing in Victoria. ARGC: Behaviour of Laterally Loaded Concrete Masonry Walls and the Effect of Masonry Mor­ tar Bond on this Behaviour. Concrete Masonry Association of Australia: Lateral Loading of Concrete Masonry Walls. TOWN AND REGIONAL PLANNING

INTRODUCTION During 1980 research continued in the areas of dala-manipulation, problem-solving methods, landscape assessment, housing, industrial estate and traffic route planning and regional and state policy co-ordination. New areas of focus included computerised census data retrieval, local government planning initiatives and environmental control regulations. A. Logan and E. Ogilvy contributed the statutory planning input to a book on Equity unci the City, whilst N. Low and R. Wyatt produced professional journal articles on welfare housing and complexity in policy making, respectively. The large number of Faculty Research Papers covered various planning techniques and included several indices of planning appeals decisions by A. Williams, whilst the relatively new Master of Urban Planning course began to bear fruit in the form of an extensive and high-quality range of theses, both passed and in progress. Substantial grants came from ARGC lo si tidy local government planning and thc Ministry of Conservation to study the ecology of Western Port Bay. and W. Calder received a grant from MUP to complete her book on the factors behind changing landscapes. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Environmental control in Viclorian planning —P. A. G. Alonso. 2. Acquisition and application of exogenous data by Victorian planners —P. A. G. Alonso. 3. Landscape studies methods — W. H. Calder. 4. l andscape character types within the Otway Ranges —W. B. Calder, A. Thornlcy. 5. Mapping of shoreline plant communities and human impacts in Western Port Bav — W. B. Calder. 6. Industrial estate development in Melbourne: a case study —W. J. N. Flannigan, .1. Robinson. 7. A comparative analysis of regional shopping centres in Melbourne —W. J. N. Flannigan. 8. History of urban and regional planning in Victoria since 1944 —A. Logan. 9. Local government planning initiatives in metropolitan Melbourne—A. Logan. 10. Evaluation of the Fitzroy-Collingwood Rental Housing Association —N. Low 11. Policy co-ordination in the Stale Government of Victoria- N. Low. 12. Spatial distribution of spending on teachers' salaries in metropolitan Melbourne —N. Low. 13. Relevance and application of problem-solving methods for planning practice—E. G. Oejlvv, V. M. Davies. 14. Evaluation of action methods in town planning education — B. T. Tyson. 15. Remote sensing and urban area analysis —B. T. Tyson. 16. Computerised access of census dala —A. P. W. Williams, R. Wyatt. 17. Complexity in policy dcsign-R. Wyatt. 18. Computer-search techniques for complex urban strategy selection —R. Wyatt. 19. Socially sensitive traffic route location —R. Wyatt, R. Bookman.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapler of Book 1. LOGAN, A. and OGILVY, E. Ci.—The Statutory Planning Framework, in Equilv and the City. cd. P. N. Troy, Allen & Unwin, Sydney (1980). Articles 2. CALDER, W. B.—The changing face of Ml Martha: a historv of landscape evolution. Vic. Historical./., 51 (2): 69-86 (1980). 3. (TANNINGAN, W. J. N. — Canberra. Town & Country Planning. 49(10): 349-351 (1980). 4. LOW, N. P.— Victoria's Reluctance to supply welfare housing. Roval Ausi. Planning Inst. ./.. IS (4): 147-149 (1980). 5. WILLIAMS, A. P. W. - Planning legislation reviewed. Planning News. 6 (6): 2-3 (July 1980). 6. WYATT, R. G. —Complexity: policy makers' divider and possible conqueror. Environ, anti Planning B. 7: 265-272 (1980). 7. WYATT, R. G. —Melbourne's metropolitan planning: the nature of thc beast. Polis. 7(1) 44-48 (1980) Faculty Research Papers 8. DAVIES, V. M. and OGILVY. E. G.-A Pattern I anguage: A Review and Potential Ap­ plication in Planning. Res. Paper 70. Facultv of Architecture, Building and Town & Regional Planning, Melbourne (1980). 9. DAVIES, V. M. and OGILVY, E. G. —Variety Generation Techniques: A Review and Potential Application in Planning. Res. Paper 71, Faculty of Architecture, Building and Town & Regional Planning, Melbourne (1980) 10. FLANNIGAN, W. J. N. -Shire of Shcrbrooke: Strategy and Policy for Tourism. Res. 14 TOWN AND REGIONAL PLANNING 15

Paper 69, Facullv of Archiieclure, Building and Town & Regional Planning, Melbourne (1980). 11. LOW, N. P. —Co-ordinaiion in Government, The Example of Victoria, Res. Paper 64, Faculty of Architecture, Building and Town & Regional Planning, Melbourne (19S0). 12. WILLIAMS, A. P. W. — Victorian Town Planning Appeals Tribunal, Index of Appeals Decisions (VTPA1): Consolidated Index of Appeals and Selected Appeals: 011079-311079 Res. Paper 63, and 051179-271279 Pes. Paper 67, Faculty of Architecture. Building and Town & Regional Planning, Melbourne (1980). 13. WILLIAMS, A. P. W. -Computer Program for Printing Age-Sex Pyramids. Res. Paper 66, Facultv of Architecture, Building and Town & Regional Planning., Melbourne (1980). 14. WYATT, R. G. and CRLMCKSHANK, A. N. C.-Network Analysis in Urban Planning. Res. Paper 65, Facultv of Architecture, Building and Town & Regional Planning, Melbourne (1980). Technical Report 15' ROGERS, J. A., LOW, N. P., HEADEY, B. and BENHAM. \..-Fitzroy-Collingwood Rental Housing Association, Second Annual Evaluation Repon, Department of Town & Regional Planning Paper, Melbourne (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Urban Planning 1. A RON, S. — Housing in Melbourne. 2. BAR'l LEY, M. — 7/te Multiple Use of Public Facilities in Victoria: Problems of Policy Im­ plementation. 3. BEATTIE, N. — Perceived Environmental Quality— the Use of Linear Models to Approxi­ mate the Environmental Evaluation Process. 4. CHAMBERLAIN, ].— Environmental Effects of Industrial Development In the Western Port Ray Area. 5. HAWKiNS, L. — 77;c Supply and Demand for Urban Planners in Victoria in the 1980s. 6. HOLLOWAY, R. — The Political Administration of Planning for the Western Port Region. Victoria. 7. JENKINS, C — Prediction of Primary School Pupils' Travel Patterns in Middle and Outer Suburbs of Melbourne. 8. l.ANTERI, A. —Compensation for Town Planning. 9. MeDONALD, J.— An Assessment of the Environmental Effects of Recreation in the Hastings Port Indus/rial Area, und the Adjoining Intertidal Zones. 10. NADEBAUM, L.— Management of Victoria's Visual Landscale Resources within the Government Legal and Administrative Structure. 11. NANKERVIS, M. — Cognitive Maps— Perceptions of Accessibility. 12. PEARSON, K. — Potential for Increased Residential Densities in Metropolitan Melbourne. 13. SHIELDS, }. —Planning: Posing as a Profession? 14. WORSFOLD, G. — The Neighbourhood Concept and Social Network.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ALONSO, P. A. G. — Environmental standards, value systems and regulation in Australian urban and regional planning. 2. BLAKE, A. —Infill control in historic areas. 3. BREALEY, T. — Identification and measurement of significant environmental variables. MTRP Theses in Progress 4. FAUBEL, M. — Implementation of statements of planning policy. 5. HEMMING, A.—A general theory of planning. 6. MARTON, R. — Citizen participation: authority and decision making at local government level. 7. MORRISON, D. —Strategy for controlled and orderly growth of marginal settlements and kainpongs in their transitions from rural to urban areas. MUP Theses in Progress 8. AITKEN, S. — 1'eusibility of Staggering Working Hours in Melbourne. 9. BONATO, C — Housing in Northcote: A Study of Local Housing Needs. 10. CASHMORE, P.-Systems Ideology within Urban Planning. 11. DAVIES, P. — Lancejield, Victoria: An Assessment of Historical Influence upon a Rural Landscape. 12. GOLDSTONE, 11. —Land Value Trends within three Australian Capital Cities. 16 FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE, BUILDING AND TOWN & REGIONAL PLANNING

13. MIDDLETON, C. —Processes of Conversion of Rural-Urban Fringe Land to Residentially Zoned Lots. 14. SEPHTON, E. — Recreation Planning and Public Participation in a Melbourne Local Government Area. 15. SMITH, J. — Threshold Analysis: An Application in a Melbourne Growth Corridor. 16. WOLINSKI, J.-Retail Markets in Suburban Melbourne. SUBSTANTIAL GRAM'S RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Local Government Planning Initiatives in Metropolitan Melbourne. Ministry for Conservation: Impacts of Recreation and Urban Development on thc Shoreline of Western Port Bay, and Detailed Mapping of Shoreline Vegetation. FACULTY OF ARTS

DEAN'S REPORT In a Faculty which includes such a wide range of disciplines —languages, humanities and social sciences —it is difficult to generalise about the scale of research. The Faculty includes nine Departmcnts, and a Language Centre, which pursue research into at least twenty-four ancient and modern languages. Five humanities Departments range from An History lo the History of Philosophy of Science. Four social science Departments spread from Criminology 10 Geography. Despite such variety, some common tendencies can be discerned: an increased interest in linguistics is not confined lo linguists proper, but extends to philosophers and psychologists; greater interest in co-operaiive research is not confined to social scientists; and increasing sophistication in research techniques and thc use of computer technology is also not confined to thc social sciences. Thc greater demand for such services has, of course, led to greater pressure on ihe available research funds and many researchers have increasingly turned to ouiside sources for them. The How of A.R.G.C. grams to the Faculty has increased and some activities such as ihe programme in Public Policy Studies have attracted considerable ouiside funding. Despite all these advances, the Faculty does not believe that thc day of thc scholarly book is over: these continue to be produced al a steady average rate of one a fortnight.

17 18 FACULTY OF ARTS

CLASSICAL STUDIES INTRODUCTION Research in the Department in 1980 embraced Greek and Roman literature, ancient an and archaeology, early Christian literature, Byzantine historiography, Neo-Latin literature and Modern Greek literature. Thc Department held a joint seminar scries with thc Department of Classical Studies. Monash University on thc theme of Greek Tragedy; the seminars were introduc­ ed by Professor Marsh McCall of Stanford University who was a visitor to the Department as a Senior Scholar of the Australian-American Education Foundation. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. The Episdes of Cyprian-G. VV. Clarke. 2. The Plays of Euripides —G. H. Gellie. 3. Thc archaeology of Torone, Chalkidiki, Greece—P. J. Connor. 4. Thc Epigrams of Callimachus —K. J. McKay. 5. Hellenistic Greek literary symbolism —K. J. McKay. 6. Stage movement in the comedies of Plautus —A. D. Pryor. 7. Neo-Latin literature-J. R. C. Martyn. 8. Juvenal's Satires-J. R. C. Martyn. 9. Modern Greek folksong and the Rebetiko tragoudi—S. Gauntlet!. 10. The poet Angclos Sikelianos-J. B. Burke. 11. Early Byzantine chronicles and histories —R. D. Scott. PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. GAUNTLETT, S. — Vasilis Tsitsanis, in Rebetika tragoudia, cd. E. Petropoulos, Kcdros, Athens: 273-275 (1979). Articles 2. CLARKE, G. W. — Dating thc Death of thc Emperor Decius. Zeitschrift fiir Papvrolpgie und Epigraphik, 37: 114-116 (1980). 3. CONNOR, P. J. -The Painter of Villa Giulia 3559: Additions to his-Work. Bulletin Antieke Beschaving. 55: 29-35 (1980). 4. GAUNTLETT, S.-O Karagiozis paraligo Afstralos. Chroniko '79, I: 16-19 (1980). 5. MARTYN, J. R. C.-Juvenal's Wit. Grazer Beitrdge, 8: 219-238 (1979). 6. MARTYN, J. R. C. - L'epitaphe de Plaute. Latomus, 39: 421-422 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Arts 1. HOGAN, S. J. — Dionvsius of Alexandria. 2. PITCHER, R. A.-People in Martial. 3. STALLMAN, C. - Cyril of Scylhopolis. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. WEBB, J. — Bronze Age Religion in Cyprus. MA Theses in Progress 2. CHATZINIKOLAOU, A. - Trends in twenlielh-centurv Modern Greek literature. 3. FII-TS, C. N.-Modern Greek poetry of the 1950s. 4. FORD, P. A. — Virgil and the Supernatural. 5. GARDINER, M. — The Concept of Vates in the Odes of Horace. 6. H ARTNEY, C. - The Circle of Svmmachus. 7. KENNEDY, S. — Oratory in Tacitus. 8. PERRETT, M. — Aristotle's definition of psvche in Dc Anima II. 9. PODGORNIK, J. E. - The Early Books ofMalalas. 10. SPILIAS, A. — Post-war Greek short stories. 11. TAMIS, A. —Macedonian Folksongs. 12. TSANGARIS, G. P. — Charos. 13. TYLER, T. A. H.-Aelred of Rievaulx: de slandardo.

SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED The following grant has been received: ARGC: Thc Epistles of Cyprian (G. W. Clarke). CRIMINOLOGY INTRODUCTION In 1980 research continued into each aspect of the criminal justice system — legislation, police, sentencing and corrections —and also into crime prevention. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Analysis of official data on young offenders —D. O. Challinger. 2. Controlling shoplifting— D. O. Challinger. 3. The welfare role of the Victoria police force— L. E. Foreman. 4. Family and juvenile courts in Australia —L. E. Foreman. 5. The feasibility and implications of establishing a family-oriented welfare system in Australia — L. E. Foreman. 6. Social welfare research in Australia—L. E. Foreman. 7. Young offenders in schooling —D. N. Greig. 8. Thc relationship of criminology to sociology —D. N. Greig. 9. Working-class criminality —D. N. Greig. 10. Social control of the mentally ill —D. N. Greig. 11. United Nations resolutions and their enforcement — S. W. Johnston. 12. Sentencing alternatives: revision of Victoria law and practice —S. W. Johnston. 13. Victorian correctional services —S. W. Johnston. 14. Intersection control in residential areas —S. A. Lovegrove. 15. Driver decision making in relation to the road rules —S. A. Lovegrove. 16. Empirical studies of sentencing —S. A. Lovegrove. 17. Thc strategies against patrol preventable crime —K. L. Milte. 18. Homicide in Victoria (1974-76)-K. L. Milte. 19. Political terrorism —K. L. Milte. 20. A cross-cultural analysis of the police occupation role —K. L. Milte. PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. FOREMAN, Lynne —Family Policy: A Select Bibliography, in Towards a National Family Policy, The Council of Social Welfare Ministers of Australia, New Zealand and Papua New Guinea, Macquarie University: 352-363 (May 1980). Article 2. CHALLINGER, D. O.— Geographical Distribution of Some Young Offenders. Australian Journal of Social Issues, 15: 49-53 (1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Arts I. DA SILVA, J. — International law, extradition and deportation: Australia. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. FOREMAN, L. E. — Present tasks and future prospects of policewomen in Victoria. 2. DA SILVA, J.—Australians and international crime. 3. MILTE, K. L. — The policeman's occupation role. MA Theses in Progress 4. ANDERSON, V. A. — Counterfeiting of currency in Australia. 5. BENNETT, P. H. - Police in vesligations. 6. BROWN, G. P.— An examination of police patrol strategies in Metropolitan Melbourne. 7. EDEN, A. M. — An examination of the effects of the implementation of the Equal Oppor­ tunities Act on policewomen in Victoria. 8. HART, M. C— Authority and the prison officer. 9. HIGGINS, W. L. - Police cautions. 10. KANDASAMY, R. — Prison industry corporation in Victoria — Is it feasible? 11. NEWNHAM, N. R. — Police recruiting —An examination of Victoria's police for the 21st century. 12. SINCLAIR, K..C.—A critical analysis of the justifying assumptions underlying the laws pro­ scribing homosexual behaviour. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Criminology Research Council: Various Police Associations: 19 20 FACULTY OF ARTS

EAST ASIAN STUDIES

INTRODUCTION The three major areas of research were in Chinese linguistics, contemporary Chinese literature and Chinese and Japanese history. In linguistics projects were concerned with grammatical structure, differences between speech and writing and with character script and romanisation. In Chinese literature projects were primarily concerned with thc 1950's and 1960's. Work in history was limited to the dynastic history of the Ch'ing and pre-war Japanese history.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Discourse tactics and scenario-related structures in Chinese — H. I'. Simon. 2. The composition of models of speech in Chinese— H. F. Simon. 3. Script reform and romanisation systems in Chinese —T. H. Chang. 4. The dynastic history of thc Ching court —R. C. I. King. 5. A biography of thc Emperor K'ang Hsi-R. C. I. King. 6. Right-wing nationalist movements in Japan —L. R. Oates. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. KING, R. C. 1. — Huang Taiji-dc Jicheng Hanwci (On Huang-t'ai chi's succession as Khan of the late Jin). Tutu Zazhi (The Continent Magazine), 61 (6): 40-47, Taipei (December, 1980). 2. SIMON, H. I-'. —You guan sanyuhuanjingzhong-dc hanyu yanjiu-dc yixie xiangfa (Reflec­ tions on Chinese Linguistics in a Trilingual Environment). Yuwen Zazhi, 1980, No. 5: 33-36 (1980). 3. SIMON, H. F. —On speech characteristics in Chinese and Ihe construction of models of speech. Cahiers de Linguistics, Asie Orientate, 8: 29-79 (Oct. 1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Arts 1. NAILER, C — Ch'ii Yuan: The Emerging Personality. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ENDREY, A. A.-The Literary Theories of Hu Feng. 2. IRVING, R. J. — Social and Political Change in China— Reactions of Three Chinese Writers. 3. LIAO, C. M. — Syntax, Symbol and Image in Ihe Poetry of Bian Zhilin and Ai Qing. MA Theses in Progress 4. KUMAGAYA, H. — Modern Chinese Literature. 5. LIM, G. — The Writings of Wang Wenhsing. ENGLISH

INTRODUCTION The research paitern of (he department, as reflected in both staff and postgraduate student ac­ tivity, continues the pattern of recent years. There is a discernible emphasis upon the study of thc literature of the last half century, whether in Australia, U.S.A. or Great Britain. Along with this goes a rise in interest in the more theoretical aspects of thc subject, and the two emphases often conjoin or associate wilh interest in linguistic theory and practice. The medieval and renaissance fields continue to attract some attention while interest in nineteenth century literature, long a major preoccupation of the department, has noticeably declined. One shift in emphasis is unmistakable. Thc number of post-graduate students enrolling for the doctorate has risen steeply while those studying for the Master's degree have become fewer and most of those are enrolling for the Master's degree by Course of Advanced Study rather than thc traditional examination by thesis. This will become evident in thc figures for 1981. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Keats and psychological division; the double nature of autobiographical gestures — C. Wallace-Crabbe. 2. The vernacular element in post-war Australian literature—P. Pierce. 3. The languages of marriage and thc opposition of genteel and vulgar in this literature — P. Pierce. 4. Medieval religious drama wilh emphasis on Resurrection plays —E. Adcncy. 5. Langland's Piers Plowman C-Version — G. H. Russell. 6. Symbolic characters in Donne, Spenser, Milton and Joyce—R. Jordan. 7. Samuel Beckett, T. S. Eliot and Dante—K. Arthur. 8. Laurence Slcrnc, performer—P. Steele. 9. Expatriates: Studies in modern poetry—P. Steele. 10. Gibbon, biography, and autobiography-P. Steele. 11. Ideology and narrative: Genre studies in Cold War fiction —K. MacDermotl. 12. Comedy —T. Kelly. 13. Shakespearean comedy —T. Kelly. 14. Dramatic presentation in Mac belli — R. Grove. 15. Study of Elizabeth Taylor's fiction —R. Grove. 16. Biographical and critical problems in the study of Emily Bronte-R. Grove. 17. The Perfect Age of Man's life —M. Dove. PUBLISHED WORK Buoks 1. WALLACE-CRABBE, C.-The Emotions Are Not Skilled Workers, Angus & Robertson (1980). 2. WALLACE-CRABBE, C. cd. - The Golden Apples ofthe Sun, Melbourne University Press (1980). Chapter of Book 3. RUSSELL, G. H. — The Vocabulary of English in Australia and New Zealand, in the Ran­ dom House Dictionary of the English Language, rev. cd. New York: Passim (1980). Articles 4. ARTHUR, K.-Prufrock, Bclacqua and Dante. Proc. of A.U.L.L.A., 1980: 20 (1980). 5. CARTER, D —Thc Death of Satan and the persistence of Romanticism, The Literarv Criterion: 15 (3-4): 59-82 (1980). 6. FELPERIN, H. —Romance and Romanticism. Critical Inquiry, 6 (4): 691-706 (Summer 1980). 7. JORDAN, R. -Thomas Trahernc: Notes on his Bioeraphy. Notes and Queries, 27: 341-345 (1980). 8. JORDAN, R. — The Faerie Queen, 11, i.\, 22: The Missing Link. Review of English Studies: 31 (New scries): 436-440 (Nov. 1980). 9. PIERCE, P. —Vulgarity or "a" Vulgate? Australian Drama in the 1970s. Current Affairs Bulletin (University of Sydney), 56 (9): 4-15 (Feb. 1980). 10. PIERCE, P.-The Australian Literature of thc Vict Nam War. Meanjin, 39 (3): 290-303 (Oct. 1980). 11. PIERCE, P.-Recent Fiction: Futurism and other Projections. Meanjin. 39 (2): 260-269 (July 1980). 12. PIERCE, P. -Simple Politics. CRNLE Reviews Journal, 1980 (2): 42-44 (1980). 13. TOMLINSON, T. B.-A Degree in English Literature? The Critical Review, 22: 65-76 (1980). 21 22 FACULTY OF ARTS

14. WALLACE-CRABBE, C.-Australian Literary History. The Lilerarv Criterion: 15 (3-4): 131-143 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. DANIEL, H. — Outsider and Society: A Studv ofthe Post-War Australian Novel. 2. GODDARD, J. — The Wakefield Mystery Cycle. Master of Arts 3. COLLETTE, A. — Henry James's Tribute to the Ideal: a Study of the Romantic Aspirations of his Fiction. 4. GUILE, M. — Children in the Works of D. H. Lawrence. 5. KELLY, V.—James's Tragic Vision: A Study of the Disintegration of Personality in the fiction of Henry James. 6. McGUlNNESS, H. — Maupassant, Chekhov and James: The Short Stories. 7. McMULLEN, D. — Characterization in the novels of Thomas Keneally. 8. RADIC, L. — The Changing Face of Comedy: Aspects of Modern 'Absurdist' Comedy wilh particular reference to Beckett and lonesco. 9. REIDY, }.-Patrick White. 10. SHAW, G. —Idealization of character in some of George Eliot's novels.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ADLER, L. — The Categorv of reflection in twentieth centurv lilerarv criticism. 2. ARTHUR, K.-Dante, Eliot and Beckett. 3. BENNETT, M. — Simplicity and Power: the Poetry of Sri Chinmoy. 4. COHN, C. — The Religious Impulse in twentieth century English Poetry. 5. COLLITS, 1. —Greek and Shakespearean Tragedy. 6. CURTIS, P.-Chaucer's Canterbury Tales: A Study of the First Fragment. 1. FORSTER, A. — Eighteenth Century Reviewing. 8. FORSYTH, J.— Eighteenth Century Shakespearean Criticism. 9. GARDE, J. —Aspects of Old English Religious Poetry: A study of the poet as teacher. 10. HARROP, L. — Developments in Australian Poetry since World War II. 11. MATIC, M. — 77?e Poetry of T. S. Eliot and Ezra Pound: A Comparative Study. 12. McCULLOCH, A.-Modern Tragedy and the Novel. 13. PIERCE, P. — 77ie Language of the Tribe: the vernacular element in Post- War Australian Literature. 14. TRIGG, S. — An edition o/Wynncre and Wastoure. MA Theses in Progress 15. BRATICH, C — Effects of social environment on Development of Personality in Bleak House and Middlcmarch. 16. CAMPBELL, C.-Studies in Satire. 17. CARTER, D. J. — Modernism and Recent Australian Literature. 18. CRAVEN, P.—Joyce and Shakespeare. 19. CUTTING, P.-Images of Women in the Novel. 20. EDWARDS, B.-Frye and Pynchon. 21. ENGLISH, D.-Selected Novels of Thomas Keneallv. 22. FUNSTON, A. - The Poetry of John Berryman. 23. GERRARD, G. — The Novels of Samuel Richardson. 24. GRAHAME, R.-Modern Verse Drama. 25. HANSFORD, A. - Troilus and Criseyde. 26. HAWKER, P. — The "New Criticism" in America. 27. LAMONT, S. — Contemporary Narrative Theory. 28. LIDDELOW, E. — Linguistic Analysis of Henry James's Late Fiction. 29. MACKENZIE, J.-Studies in Poetic Theory and Criticism. 30. MASEL, C — Self in Modern American Poetry. 31. McCREDDEN, L.-Henry James's Short Stories. 32. MEAD, J. — Studies in the poetic of the Alliterative Tradition. 33. MENDELOVITS, 5.—Egoism and Altruism in the Novels of George Eliot. 34. MUNRO, M.—A literary-critical assessment of the work of Athol Fugard. 35. MURRAY, J. - The Novels of John Updike. 36. O'SHEA, H. — The poetry of Seamus Heaney. 37. PENDER; I.—Studies in The Cloud of Unknowing group of treatises. 38. ROJTER, A. —Politics and comedy in drama of Brecht and Shakespeare. ENGLISH 23

39. RUTHERFORD, K. - The earlv novels of Thomas Hardy. 40. SLESSAR, M. — W. M. Thackeray. 41. SPENCELEY, S.-The Novels of George Eliot. Al. STEER, V .—Australian Lilerarv Criticism: A studv of the criticism of Henry Lawson. 43. STRAZZERA, A.-Old English Religious-Heroic Poetry. AA. SYMES, B.—Alexander Rope. 45. THOMPSON, H. - The Stories of Flannerv O'Connor. 46. TOUT-SMITH, G. - The Critical Reception of the work of Patrick White in Australia. 47. TURNER, D.-Nineteenth century Studies. 48. WATERS, J. — George Eliot and the nineteenth century Family. LINGUISTICS SECTION RESEARCH TOPIC IN PROGRESS 1. Variation in Australian English —D. Bradley. PUBLISHED WORK Periodical 1. ZATORSKI, R. J. (ed.)- Working Papers in Linguistics. No. 6, University of Melbourne (1980). Articles 2. ZATORSKI, R. J. and LESSER, R.—The Lexicon and sentence generation in aphasia. Working Papers in Linguistics. 6, University of Melbourne: 1-19 (1980). 3. BRADLEY, D. — Acoustic correlates of seven consonant positions in Yanyuwa. H'orking Papers in Linguistics, 6, University of Melbourne: 21-48 (1980). 4. BRADLEY, D. —Regional differences in Australian English Phonology. Working Papers in Linguistics, 6, University of Melbourne: 73-93 (1980). 24 FACULTY OF ARTS

FINE ARTS

INTRODUCTION Research activiiies in the Department of Fine Arts in 1980 centred around already declared fields. In Australian art, these included Fred McCubbin, Phillips Fox, Acstheticism, the art of Cook's voyages and Australian film. Western Mediaeval Art, Flemish Art and the Italian Renaissance have remained key areas of research in the Department with the completion by Professor Manion and Mrs. Vines of research for their first volume of a corpus of illuminated manuscript in Australasian collections. Work in this area was further stimulated by the visits of Professor Peter Lasko, Director of the Courtauld Institute (Mediaeval), Professor Jan Bialostocki, university of Warsaw (Flemish and Cast Euro­ pean Renaissance), and Professor .leseph Trapp, Director of thc Warburg Institute (English Renaissance). A highly significant event of the future development of research both in thc Department and throughout Australia was the acquisition for thc Department of one of the rare microfiche copies of the Witt Library, a collection of photographs and illustrations of paintings and drawings cover­ ing western art from c. 1200 to the present day and containing some 1,300,000 items. The purchase was made wilh grants from thc General Equipment Fund, the Utah Foundation, and the Collier Charitable Bequest and was underwritten by the University Finance Committee. RESEARCH TOPICS I.N PROGRESS 1. William Frater: Artist and stained glass designer — L. Course. 2. The art of Frederick McCubbin (a monograph now completed —to bc published August/September, 1981) —A. Galbally. 3. Thc history of thc collections of the National Gallery of Victoria (commissioned by the Na­ tional Gallery of Victoria for publication in 1983) —A. Galbally. 4. Film and television training in tertiary institutions in Australia—B. J. Gilbert. 5. The role of semiotics and structuralism in film theory and criticism —B. J. Gilbert. 6. Study of a fourteenth century Italian Book of Hours for Festschrift for Allan Thomas —M. Manion. 7. A comparative study of medieval illuminated manuscripts in Australasian collections —M. Manion. 8. Introduction and commentaries to a facsimile of thc Wharncliffe Hours (in press, to be published March, 1981) —M. Manion. 9. Aspects of imperial propaganda in Byzantine Art —M. Riddle. 10. A catalogue raisonne of the art of Cook's voyages —B. Smilh. 11. Directory of art libraries and visual resources collections in Australia —J. Stewart (and J. McGrath, State Library). 12. Thc relationship between two early fifteenth century Flemish painters, Roger van der Weyden and Jacques Daret, and thc evidence for the existence of the Master of Flemalle —V. Vines. 13. Manuscript illumination during the fifteenth and early sixteenth centuries in Basancon, a regional centre—V. Vines. 14. Continuing research pertaining to the corpus of medieval illuminated manuscripts —V. Vines. 15. The painters of the Barbizon school —R. Zubans. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. ASTBURY, L. A.-The Heidelberg School and the Popular Image. Art & Australia, 17(3): 263-266 (March 1980). 2. ASTBURY, L. A.-Tom Roberts' The Breakaway. Myth and History. Bulletin ofthe Art Gallery of South Australia, 38: 2-9 (1980). 3. GALBALLY, A.—Acstheticism in Australia. Studies in Art and Architecture: Essays presented to Bernard Smith, ed. A. Bradley and T. Smith, Melbourne, Oxford University Press: 124-133 (1980). 4. GILBERT, B. J. —Film and Television Training in Australia. Part II: Swinburne College of Technology. Cinema Papers, 26: 147-149 (1980). 5. PLANT, M. - Janet Dawson. Art and Australia, 17 (4): 337-345 (June 1980). 6. ZUBANS, R.-Emanuel Phillips Fox: St Ives and the Impact of British Art, 1890-1892. Studies in Art and Architecture: Essays presented to Bernard Smilh, ed. A. Bradley and T. Smith, Melbourne, Oxford University Press: 134-149 (1980). FINE ARTS 25

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Arts 1. EDQUIST, R. M. — The Sadeler Family Engravings: A Critical and Historical Introduction to the Engravings by members of the Sadeler Family in the Print Collection of the Baillieu Library. 2. FULLERTON, P.-The War Cartoons of Norman Lindsay in Thc Bulletin 1914-18. 3. HELMER, E. J. - George Bell (1878-1966): His Life and Work. An Assessment of his con­ tribution to Australian Art. 4. MOORE, F. - Vassilieffand his Sculpture. 5. SEEGER, C. L. — External Influences on Archaic Greek Art: A Stylistic Analysis on Four Sixth-Century Sculptures. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BARKER, L. — Romanesque Art and Monastic Culture. 2. EDQUIST, H. — Thematic Development and Design in Piero della Francesca. 3. McNEILL, D. — The Relationship between Art Theory and Epistemology in Marxist Philosophy and Cultural Analysis. 4. O'CAI.LAGHAN, J. M.— Australian Architecture of the nineteenth century. 5. PLANT, M. — Italian fresco painting in the fourteenth century. 6. RIDDLE, M. — A Study of Joseph the Patriarch in Early Christian and Medieval Art. 7. SIMONS, P. —Ghirlandaio and the Tornaquinci Chapel: A Study of Patronage and Por­ traiture in Quattrocento Florence. 8. VINES, F. — The place of Jacques Daret in Fifteenth Century Flemish Art —a reassessment of currently held views. MA Theses in Progress 9. ASTBURY, D. L.— Late nineteenth century Australian Subject Painting. 10. DEDMAN, R. — Art of William Fraier and Arnold Shore between ihe wars. 11. FAIGAN, J. — The Waiercolours of Paul Sandby in ihe Hamilton Art Gallery. 12. GUY, I. —Oriental Trade Ceramics in South East Asia, tenth to sixteenth centuries. 13. HUTTON, A. Xi. — Representation of Australian history, myths and imagery in recent and early Australian film production. 14. JONES, J. — Robert bowling —Monograph and Catalogue. 15. KIRBY, S.-Mallarme and Ihe French Svmbolists. |6. MOORE, G. M. - Gothic Revival Churches c. 1850-1880 in Victoria, N.S. W. and Tasmania. Were there links with the Pugin, Shrewsbury circle,and craftsmen? 17. O'BRIEN, C.— The illumination of Roman Histories in Renaissance Italy with special reference to Imperial Portraiture. 18. PAVLEY, J.- English Art in Collections of the National Gallery of Victoria. 19. RIDDETT, R. E.— Vigils of the Dead in a group of fifteenth century Franco-Flemish manuscripts. 20. SAUNDERS, H. L. — L. B. Hall. 21. SLOGGETT, R. — Influence of new media m an in the post second World War period. 22. SMITH, R.-Mortimer Menpes, his relationship to Whistler and the Aesthetics oj "Japonisme". 23. THWAITES, V. —Aspects of the Art of Rosso Fiorentino. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED The following grants have been received: ARGC: Grant for comparative study of manuscripts in Australasian collections. ARGC: Grant for a catalogue raisonne of the art of Cook's voyages. Australia Council, Visual Arts Board: Grant for Directory of art libraries and visual resources. 26 FACULTY OF ARTS

FRENCH INTRODUCTION Thc range of active research interests in the French Department is wide in terms both of time and space: from mediaeval folklore to contemporary literature, theatre and criticism; from France under the German occupation to Australia under French squatters. Many varied approaches and disciplines arc reprcsenled in the Department's research: biography, linguistics, applied linguistics, stylistics, modern critical methodologies, intellectual history, physical bibliography, theatre per­ formance analysis, and so on. This variety is also reflected in the topics chosen for MA and PhD theses: each one is in quite a different held and period, indicating a willingness on the part of super­ visors and students alike to move into new and divers areas. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. LANGUAGE 1. Language acquisition theories in Beginners' French — S. Gutierrez. 2. Phonetics and stylistics —A. K. Holland. 3. Romance linguistics: marginal areas, particularly Corsica —S. .1. Scott. 4. General linguistics: linguistic intervals —S. .1. Scott. 5. Word frequency lists and vocabulary lists —S. B. Thornton-Smith. 6. Aspects of the Anglo-Norman verb —A. Trindade. B. LITERATURE 7. Narrative and stylistic techniques in Thomas's Tristan — A. Trindade. 8. Folklore, oral literature and the medievalist— A. Trindade. 9. Women's journalism in the eighteenth century—P. A. Clancy. 10. Mme Leprincc dc Beaumont and Ihe education of women in the eighteenth century — P. A. Clancy. 11. Children's literature in thc eighteenth century—P. A. Clancy. 12. A physical bibliography al Manon Lescaul - A. K. Holland. 13. An edition of thc English text and Louis XVl's translation (wilh unpublished variants) of Horace Walpolc's Life and Reign of Richard HI (with unpublished commentaries by David llume)-C. R. Duckworth. 14. The Handsome Intriguer, a biography of the comte d'Antraigues —C. R. Duckworth. 15. French Drama in Performance: English and French critical language and response —C. R. Duckworth. 16. New Zealand reactions to Beckett's Waiting for Godot — C. R. Duckworth. 17. Dialogue in drama —S. Farrall. 18. Translation, w ith preface and notes, of Hubert de Castella — Les Squatters australiens, Paris, Hachelte, 1861 (300)-C. B. Thornton-Smith. 19. Bibliograpical survey of first-hand accounts in French of colonial Australia, with details of unpublished English translations — C. B. Thornton-Smith. 20. Thc authenticity of thc material on Van Dicman's Land in Les Baleiniers: voyages aux lerres untipodiques, journal du doctcur Felix Maynard publie par Alexandre Dumas (pere), Paris, Michel Levy Freres, 1861 —C. B. Thornton-Smith. 21. Various Mauriac studies, including Mauriac and Jansenism — C. B. Thornton-Smith. 22. Nineteenth century poetry —T. R. Casey. 23. The theatre of Sartre — D. K. Keuneman. 24. Problems in modern literary criticism —D. K. Keuneman. PUBLISHED WORK Bonk 1. CLANCY, P. A. with CHOUILLET, A.-M., MOUREAU, F. and ot hers - Supplement I to the Diclionnairc des journalislcs (1600-1789), Universitc dc Grenoble (1980). Articles 2. DUCKWORTH, C. R. — Beckett's early background: a New Zealand biographical appendix. N.Z. Journal of French Studies. I (2): 59-67 (1980). 3. DUCKWORTH, C. R.-Four Beckett dramas. Theatre Australia, 4(8): 52 (March 1980). 4. DUCKWOR TH, C. R. — 13 rue dc l'Amour: acting style in Feydcau. 'Theatre Australia, 5(1): 55 (August 1980). 5. KEUNEMAN, D. K. — L'imaginaiion matericllc chez Bachelard: theorie ou mystification? Poetique, 41: 128-136 (February 1980). 6. TRINDADE. A. -Time, Space and Narrative Focus in thc Fragments of Thomas's Tristan. Romance Philology, XXXII: 387-396 (1979). 7. WA TSON, G. D.-Une Journec. Bulletin des Amis d'Andre Gide. 47: 465 (July 1980). FRENCH 27

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. D'ARCY, S. F. - Rhetorical anti Stylistic Aspects of ihe Debate Poem of the Troubadours. 2. EGAN-LEE, J. A. — Barthes and the Banishment of Man from Literature. 3. FLINTOFT, M. — Landscape of Desire and Threat: a Literary Study of French Garden Imagery. 4. WAN1S, \. — The Family Constellation in the Fiction of Herve Bazin. MA Theses in Progress 5. BECK, P. — La notion de "cortege" chez Apollinaire. 6. CARTWRIGHT, P.-The Theme of War in French Theatre, 1939-1945. 7. MORGAN, M.-T. — La femme dans les oeuvres romanesques de George Sand. 8. SROUSSI, J. — Ombres et lumieres sur Albertine dans A la recherche du lemps perdu de Marcel Proust. 9. WILSON, G. 3. —Morality and Personal Relationships in Ihe Fiction of Jean-Paul Sartre. 10. WORTHINGTON, M. J. — Mutation el branle dans les oeuvres de Montaigne. 28 FACULTY OF ARTS

GEOGRAPHY

INTRODUCTION The establishment ol' thc geomorphology laboratory and thc purchase of additional equip­ ment for the computer-graphics laboratory improved the Department's research facilities, and the benefits can bc expected to appear in future research reports. Already Dr Massey's success in over­ coming technical problems associated with the production of instant maps, analysing agricultural and other statistics for Victoria, for display on VDU screens, and in overcoming the difficulty of recording such maps on microfiche, has attracted interest from government departments, other scholars and firms producing computer graphics equipment. Dr Bird continued to secure impor­ tant grants which enabled some research associates to bc employed, and one of these grants resulted in the completion of a monumental report on sites of environmental significance in Gipps­ land, which should provide a sound basis for some aspects of environmental planning in lhal region. Il is also expected that Ihc work of Dr Finlayson and Miss McKay on flooding and thc use of Hood plain maps, funded by an important grant, which was started this year will yield signifi­ cant results of interest to all areas in Australia where floods are a risk. Overseas research contacts were maintained by thc Department. Professor Brookfield spent a year working in Barbados on a project organized by UNESCO; Dr Bird continued his close association with the United Nations University through studies of coastal management in In­ donesia and New Caledonia; and Dr Prescott worked for two months in the Environment and Policy Institute of thc East-West Center in Honolulu, on maritime issues in the South China Sea. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Mapping and analysis of shoreline changes —E. C. F. Bird. 2. Data requirements for coastal management —E. C. I7. Bird. 3. The role of flooding and flood plain maps in individual perception and community response to flood risks —B. L. Finlayson, J. M. McKay. 4. Limestone hydrology and geomorphology in the Buchan area —B. L. Finlayson, L. Mill. 5. Antarctic geomorphology — B. L. Finlayson. 6. Granite caves —B. L. Finlavson. 7. Historical geography in the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries with special reference to the work of Matthew Flinders —T. M. Perry. 8. Growth of Melbourne's inner suburbs —T. M Perry. 9. Political geography of the oceans —J. R. V. Prescott. 10. Malay settlements in Kuantan —G. Missen, M. Swift. 11. Peripheral capitalism in Malaysia — G. Missen. 12. A computer-plotted microfiche atlas of Victoria, Australia —J. S. Massey. 13. Interactive analysis and mapping of census data for macro-economic strategy planning — J. S. Massey. 14. Environmental.issues in thc development of thc Lesser Antilles in thc Eastern Caribbean — H. C. B. Brookfield. PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. BIRD, E. C. F. and ONGKOSONGO, O. S. R. - Environmental changes on Ihecoasls of In­ donesia, United Nations University, vi + 52 pp. (1980). 2. FINLAYSON, B. L. and STATHAM, 1.-Hillslope analvsis, Butterworths London, 230 pp. (1980). Chapters of Books 3. BIRD, E. C. I7. — Environmental problems related to thc coastal dynamics of humid tropical deltas, in Proceedings of the Jakarta Workshop on Coastal Resources Management, ed. E. C. F. Bird and A. Socgiarto: 18-21 (1980). 4. BIRD, E. C. F. —Erosion of coastlines, in Veda a lidstvo, ed. M. Machacek, Horizont- Praguc: 87-96 (in Czech) (1979). 5. MISSEN, G. —Socio-economic studies in Java in the context of a coastal resources evalua­ tion, in Proceedings of the Jakarta Workshop on Coastal Resources Management, ed. E. C. I'. Bird and A. Soegiarto: 45-53 (1980). 6. PERRY, T. M. P.-Oskar Spate, in Of Time and Place, Essays in Honour of O. H. K. Spate, ed. J. N. Jennings and Ci. J. R. Lingc, A.N.U. Press, Canberra: xiii-xix (1980). 7. PRESCOTT, J. R. V.— The deep seabed, in The maritime dimension, ed. R. P. Barston and P. Birnc, George Allen & Unwin, London: 54-75 (1980). 8. PRESCOTT, J. R. V. —Existing and potential maritime claims in the southwest Pacific Ocean, in Ocean Yearbook, ed. N. Ginsburg, Chicago University Press: 203-235 (1980). GEOGRAPHY 29

Articles 9. BIRD, E. C. F. — Historical changes on sandy shorelines in Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic­ toria, 91 (1): 17-32 (1980). 10. BIRD, E. C. F. — Mangroves and coastal morphology. Victorian Naturalist, 97 (1): 48-58 (1980). 11. BIRD, E. C. F. — Recent changes on the world's sandy shorelines. Coastal Research, 5 (9): 1-4 (1980). 12. BIRD, E. C. F.-Scatown Beach. Dorset County Journal, 89: 1-5 (1980). 13. BIRD, E. C. F.-Scabed site training. Development Forum, 8 (9): 13 (1980). 14. MASSEY, J. S.-The Australian Small-Area Agricultural and Pastoral Land-Use Informa­ tion System: 1900 to the Present. Proc. of URP1S, 6 (4): 39-87 (1980). 15. MASSEY, J. S.-The microfiche agricultural atlas of Victoria. Proc. of URPIS, 7(3): 7-26 (1980). 16. MASSEY, J. S.-Interactive analysis and mapping of Census data. Proc. of URPIS, 8 (10): 1-4(1980). 17. PRESCOTT, J. R. V.-Maps and boundary disputes. The Globe. 12: 1-9 (1980). 18. PRESCOTT, J. R. V.-Southern Africa today-formula for stability or crisis? White African altitudes. South African News and Views, 4 (6): 4-11 (1980). 19. PRESCOTT, J. R. V.-Walvis Bay and the Guano Islands. South African News and Views, 4 (9): 2-7 (1980). 20. ROSENGREN, N. J. — Dune systems on Cuspate forelands, East Gippsland, Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 92: 106-119 (1980). Reports and Notes 21. BIRD, E. C. F. and CULLEN, P. W.-77ii? management of coastal sand dunes in South Australia. Geostudies, Melbourne, xvii + 99 pp. (1980). 22. BIRD, E. C. F., BIRD, J. I'., FINLAYSON, B. L., McARTHUR, J. A., and McKAY, J. M. — Bank erosion on the Latrobe River and its lower tributaries. Ministry for Conservation, Victoria, Environmental Studies Series, Publication 267, vi + 117 pp. (1980). 23. KRAEMERS, S. M. — Westernport Catchment Co-ordinating Group, French Island". Ministry for Conservation, Victoria, Environmental Studies Series, Publication interim report, 113 pp. (1980). 24. McCRAE-WILLIAMS, M. S., ROSENGREN, N.J. and KRAEMERS, S. M.-Sites of En­ vironmental Significance, (Geology and Geomorphology), East Gippsland, Victoria. Ministry for Conservation, Victoria, Environmental Studies Series, Publication 316, 635 pp. (1980). 25. ROSENGREN, N. J. and WILLIAMS, M. S.-Study Area I, Westernport Catchment Co­ ordinating Group "Top of the Bay" Area. Ministry for Conservation, Victoria, Environmen­ tal Studies Series, Publication interim report, 54 pp. (1980). 26. WILLIAMS, M. S.—Mallacoota Inlet —A geomorphological Assessment, Occasional Paper, Melbourne State College, 50 pp. (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Arts 1. CABENA, P. B.-Transhurnance in the Victorian Alps. 2. COHEN, S. E. — Urban development in Kuala Pilah District, Malaysia. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BIRD, J. F. — Environmental history of Victorian river systems. 2. BOSTON, K. G. — 77ie physiographic role of Sparlinu. 3. DE VRIES, B. — 77ie nature of thc interior—an examination of the explorers' assessments of landscape in the State of South Australia 1802-1864. 4. CARNEVALE, F. N. — The political geography of international organizations. 5. FREESTONE, R. G.— Australian garden city and suburbs. 6. McKAY, J. M. — The role of flood inundation and flood plain maps in individual perception and community response lo flood risk. A case study of the River Torrens flood plain, Adelaide, S.A. 7. MILES, I. W. — 77ie morphology and dynamics of tidal channels. 8. PARTON, A. —Agricultural land-use change in Melbourne's rural-urban fringe 1950-76. 9. TEH, T. S. — Beach ridge systems in Malaysia. MA Theses in Progress 10. ANDERSON, B. L. — Trade and industry policies and how they ajfecl the international loca­ tion of industry between developed and developing countries. 30 FACULTY OF ARTS

11. BEARD, D. — Social service provision thresholds in the Wimmera in the nineteenth century. 12. FRANCE, L. — Perception in the geographical environment. 13. GRUNFELD, H.— Agricultural and pastoral land use changes in Ihe Wimmera region 1906-1975. 14. LANCASHIRE, C. I. — Historical geography of central Victoria. 15. SHARP, N. R. — Land-use and settlement in the Daylesford region. MSc Theses in Progress 16. GELL, R. A. —Beach systems on the Victorian coast. 17. MILL, L. — Limestone geomorphology and hydrology in the Buchan area, East Gippsland, Victoria. 18. QUINN, P. B. — Erosion surfaces in the geomorphology of southern central Victoria. 19. TRAN DANG DAI —Channel changes on the River Avon, Gippsland, Victoria. 20. WHITE, S. — Past landforms and their relation to quaternary calcareous dune ridges at Bat Ridge, Portland, Victoria. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Movements of coastal sand dunes (E. C. F. Bird). UNU: Coastal management in New Caledonia (E. C. F. Bird and J. litis). IGU: World review of coastal changes (E. C. F. Bird). Ministry for Conservation: Sites of environmental significance (E. C. F. Bird, N. Rosengren, S. Kraemers, M. Williams). AWRC: The role of flooding and flood plain maps in individual perception and community response to flood risk (B. Finalyson). GERMANIC STUDILo

INTRODUCTION The departmcm's main projects were on nineteenth and early twentieth century German and Dutch literature and Scandinavian migrants in Australia. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Expressionist literature—M. Adams. 2. A reference grammar of Dutch —B. Donaldson. 3. Introduction to Weimar Classicism —C. Grawe. 4. Schiller's reputation in the nineteenth century — C. Grawe. 5. The Dutch regional novel —G. van Hoeydonck. 6. Wedekind's Lulu plays—H. Maclean. 7. Migrants and multiculturalism in Sweden —J. S. Martin. 8. Scandinavian migrants in Australia —.1. S. Martin. 9. Translation of the novels of Ante H. Lindgren —J. S. Martin. 10. History of German literature 1789-1830-G. Schulz. PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. DONALDSON, M.-Dutch Reference Grammar, Nijhoff, T he Hague, 324 pp. (1980). 2. GRAWE, C.-Hihrerdurch die Ramane Theodor Fontanes, Ullstein, Berlin, 256 pp. (1980). 3. GRAWE, C — Jane Austen: liinma, Aus dem Englischen iibersetzt von Ursula unci Christian Grawe. Reclam, Stuttgart, 560 pp. (1980). 4. DE VOS, 1.., and GILBERT VAN HOEYDONCK-De uitbeelding aan de macht. Analyse van strips, Manteau, Antwerpen & Amsterdam, 104 pp. (1980). Chapters of Books 5. GRAWE, C —Der Lekliirckanon der Germanistik als Fremdsprachcndi.sziplin, in Fremd- sprache Deutsch II, ed. A. Wicrlachcr, Munchen: 35S-386 (1980). 6. SCHULZ, G. — Gerhart Hauptmanns dramatisches Werk, in W. Hinck, Hundbuch des deutschen Dramas. Bagel, Dusseldorf; 311-326 (1980). 7. SCHULZ, G. - Drei Briefc Hermann Brochs an Oscar Oeser, in Festschrift for E. W. Herd, University of Otago, Dunedin: 226-237 (1980). 8. SCHULZ, G. — Ein ncuer Wellzusammenbruch. Stefan Georges Der Widerchrist, in Frankfurter Anlhologie, cd. M. Reich-Ranicki, lnsel Verlag, Frankfurt/Main: 133-137 (1980). 9. VAN HOEYDONCK, G. —Spreekvaardighcid: achtergronden voor een lessenrccks, in Ex- pressief. Rond taal in onderwijs en opvoeding, Leuven, Acco: 129-137 (1980). Articles 10. ADAMS, M. —'Volk', 'Masse' und 'PdbeT im fruhcxprcssionisiischen Spracligcbrauch. Aklen des VI. Internationale/! Gernianisten-Kongresses, Basel: 275-281 (1980). 11. GRAWE, C —Wulhcnow oder Venedig. Analyse von Schachs Reiscfaniasie im 1'on- taneschen Kontext. Wirkendes Won, 'I (30): 258-267 (July-August 1980). 12. VAN HOEYDONCK, G. — The Dutch Rural Novel in Plunders (1900-1945). Dutch Crossing. 11: 4-20 (July 1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Arts 1. ACKER, U. —Hans Arps Die Wolkcnpumpc. 2. FRIEDEL, M. — Motive in Hoffmanns Die Elixiere des Teufels im Hinblick auf das Konzept der Dualitiit. THESES IN PROGRESS I'hD Thesis in Progress 1. PERCZUK, Y.- The Journey Motif in the Novels of Max Frisch. MA Theses in Progress 2. BECHLY, Ci. — Der Scingerkrieg auf der Wartburg in der Literatur des 19. Juhrhunderts. 3. DOBBERSTEIN, I7. - Thc Writings of German Migrants in Australia. 4. JAKOBOWTCZ, R.- Medical aspects of German Romantic letters. 5. KAL1TO, J. — The Theme of Self Realization in the Novels of Max I risch. 6. VAN HOEYDONCK, O.-The Dutch Regional Novel. 7. RYRIE, H.-Arp's Mondsand. 31 32 FACULTY OF ARTS

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: ARGC: Continuation of Professor Schulz's gram for his History oj German Literature 1789-1830. Alexander von Humboldt Foundation: Expressionist periodical reprints for Dr M. Adams. HISTORY

INTRODUCTION ln 1980 research continued in a wide range of areas of history, with especial emphasis on Australian history. A number of important books and articles were published, in Australian history. Modern British history, Pacific history, and Ancient history. Dr Davison, Ms Grimshaw and Dr Lack continued their participation in the Australian Bicentennial History Project. ARGC Support was received for work on the Bicentennial project, and also for work in cultural history, Colonial American history, and family history. Fruitful use was made, by many members of the Department, of the Arts Faculty Research Development Fund, for assistance in gelling research projects started, and getting them to the stage of publication. Numbers of students in the postgraduate school continued to bc high, both MA and PhD, and 1980 saw the completion of a Satisfyingly large number of MA theses. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. AUSTRALIAN HISTORY 1. Australian Bicentennial Historv Project, 1888 section —G. Davison. 2. Social and political history of New South Wales 1788-1860 —J. Hirst. 3. History of Footscray —J. Lack. 4. University of Melbourne social survey 1941-1943 —J. Lack. 5. Biographical study of Patrick Troy —S. Macintyre. 6. History of Ormond College — S. Macintyre. 7. Australian history 1900-1940 — S. Macintyre. 8. Biography of Sir Charles Gavan Duffy —J. Parnaby. 9. Soldier settlement after World War I —J. Tcmpleton. 10. Hisiory of Tasmania from the earliest times — L. Robson. 11. The Australian soldier and Britain 1914-18 —L. Robson. 12. German Jews in Melbourne 1938-1980—J. Foster. 13. Women and the family in colonial Australia—P. Grimshaw B. BRITISH HISTORY 14. Sixteenth and seventeenth century English Puritanism-D. Kennedy. 15. Household of Cardinal Wolsey; and Roper's Life of More- L. Gardiner. 16. Crime and law-enforcement in England c. 1780-1850—D. Philips. 17. Twentieth century British labour history —S. Macintyre. 18. Biography of Robert Wilmot Horton-N. McLachlan. C. EUROPEAN HISTORY 19. Fifteenth century witchcraft treatises — C. Zika. 20. Local government in France, 1790-1792-A. Patrick. 21. Membership and committee structure, French Constituent Assembly —A. Patrick. 22. French National Convention, 1792-1795-A. Patrick. 23. The Jewish Community in Regensburg, 1870-1942 —J. Foster. 24. Thc German-Jewish family 1880-1940 —J. Foster. 25. The government of thc Papa! State under Paul 1! (1464-147!) — I. Robertson. 26. Political Analyses of Madeleine Pelletier, French feminist and socialist, before 1914 —C. Sowerwine. 27. Implantation of socialism in the Department ofthe Ain (France) 1848-1980 —C. Sowerwine. D. AMERICAN HISTORY 28. Comparative studies of Dutch and English settlers in seventeenth centuiy New York state —D. Merwick. E. ASIAN HISTORY 29. A regional systems analysis of the Southeast Coast of China —S. T. Leong. 30. History of the Jia-jing reign (1521-1567); Ritualism in Ming History —C. Fisher. F. PACIFIC HISTORY 31. Missionary families in thc nineteenth century Pacific —P. Grimshaw. G. ANCIENT HISTORY AND PRE-HISTORY 32. Later Phoenician Pottery —W. Culican. 33. Roman history and historiography—R. Ridley. 34. Cola di Rienzi's classical influences —R. Ridley. 35. 19th century excavations al Pompeii — R. Ridley. 36. Machiavelli and Livy—R. Ridley. 33 34 FACULTY OF ARTS

H. SOCIAL, CULTURAL HISTORY 37. Origins of urban sociology, Britain and U.S.A., 1800-1930-G. Davison. 38. Study of ethnographic history and an historiography of theories concerning thc semiotic nature of culture —G. Dening. 39. Social history of British and U.S. Navy lower deck sailors —G. Dening. PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. BLAINEY, G.-A Land Half Won, Macmillan (1980). 2. BLAINEY, G.—A Historv of Caniberwell, enlarged ed., Lothian Publishing Co., Melbourne (1980). 3. BLAINEY, G. — The Tvrannv of Distance, rev. Japanese cd., Simul Press, Tokvo (1980). 4. DAVISON, G. (ed.)-Melbourne on Fool, Rigby, Adelaide (1980). 5. DENING, G. — Islands and Beaches: Discourse on a Silent Land, Marquesas I774-ISS0, Melbourne University Press (1980). 6. MACINTYRE, S.-'/l Proletarian Science: Marxism in Britain 1917-1933, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1980). 7. MACINTYRE, S. — Little Moscows: Communism and Working-Class Militancy in Inter- War Britain, Croom Helm, London (1980). 8. ROBSON, L. — Australia in the 1920s: Commentary and Documents, Thomas Nelson, Melbourne (1980). 9. ROBSON, L. - To the Last Breath: The Aborigines of Van Dieman's Land, CCH Australia, Sydney (1980). Chapters of Books 10. BLAINEY, Ci. —Preface to Pare and Curious Specimens: An Illustrated History of the Australian Museum 1827-1979, cd. R. Strahan, 'The Australian Museum, Sydney: i-ii (1979). 11. BLAINEY, G. — Introduction to Svinbols of Australia, cd. M. Cozzolino, Penguin Books. Melbourne: 1 1-12 (1980). 12. BLAINEY, G. — Thc Influence of Climate on Australian History, in Value of Meteorological Services: pub. of Royal Meteorological Society (Australia) and Economic Society of Australia and New Zealand: 110-1 16 (1980). 13. CULICAN, W.- Pottery from the Punic Wreck (Marsala), in Notizie degli Scavi, ed. H. Frost, Accademia dei Lincei, Rome, Chap. XI (139-189), Appendix II (283-296) (1980). 14. CULICAN, W. — Entries on Svria, Phoenicia, evolution ofthe Alphabet, in Encyclopaedia of Ancient Civilisations, cd. A. Colterell, Rainbird N.Y., 123-129, 129-134, 171 -174 (19S0). 15. GRIMSHAW, P. —Women and thc Family in Australian History —a Reply to 77ie Real Matilda, mWomen. Class and History, cd. E. Windschuttle, Fontana, Sydney: 37-52 (1980). 16. LACK, .1. - Footscray, in Melbourne on Foot, ed. G. Davison, Riubv, Adelaide: 184-198 (1980). 17. PHILIPS, D. —A New Engine of Power and Authority: The Institutionalization of Law- enforcement in England 1780-1830, in Crime and ihe Law: the Social History of Crime in Western Europe since 1500, ed. V.A.C. Gatrell, G. Parker and B. l.cnman, Europa Publica­ tions, London: 155-189 (1980). Articles IS. GRIMSHAW. P. — Family Structure in Colonial Australia: an Exploration in Familv History. Australia 1888 Bulletin, 4: 5-27 (1980). 19. GRIMSHAW, P.-Women in Australian History: Black and White. Proc of Ihe Women and Labour Conference: (1980). ' 20. LACK, J. — Residence, workplace, community: local history in metropolitan Melbourne. Historical Studies, 19 (74): 16-40 (1980). 21. RIDLEY. R.-The world's earliest annals. Kokulos. 25 (1979). 22. RIDLEY, R. — Documents of thc dynasty of Agade. Mundus antiquus, 3: 65-80 (1980). 23. RIDLEY, R.-Thc hoplite as citizen: Athenian military institutions in their social context. Laniiquiie clussique, 48: 508-548 (1979). 24. RIDLEY, R.—The origin of the Roman dictatorship: an overlooked opinion. Rheinisches Museum, 122: 303-309 (1979). 25. RIDLEY, R.-Livy and the concilium plcbis. Klio, 62: 337-354 (1980). 26. RIDLEY, R. — Anonymity in thc Vila Consianlini. Byzunlion, 50: 241-258 (1980). 27. RIDLEY, R. — Un prince accompli et un parfaitcment honnele homme. Qnaderni caiuncsidi studi clussici e medievali. 2: 373-423 (1980). 28. RIDLEY, R. - Impressions of Champollion's correspondence. Mundus antiquus, 3: 8-21 (1980). 29. ROBSON. L. —The Australian Dictionary of Biography: International Precedent and the Australian Experience. Meanjin. 39 (3): 389-398 (1980).' HISTORY 35

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of A ns 1. ASHER, L. — The Women's Electoral Lobby: An Historical Inquiry. 2. CARTER, J. D. — S. R. Mitchell and Archaeology in Victoria. 3. COFFEY, S. E. — The National Sunday League: A study of a nineteenth century Anti- Sabbatarian Pressure Group. 4. CRITCHETT, J. P. —A Historv of Framlingham und Lake Conduit Aboriginal Stations. 1860-1918. 5. DOLAN, iM. S. — Pressmen and the War: An Examination of the Relationship between some leading British newspapermen and the Politicians and High Command during World War 1. 6. KRAUSS, W'. — The Autobiography of an Austrian Jew. 1. LASTER, K. — Utopian Literature and Intellectual Mood: a consideration of ihe fall of the Utopian genre wilh particular reference to ihe nineteenth century lexis. 8. McPHERSON, A. B. — Thai Uncomfortable Genius: a study of ihe building of St. Paul's Cathedral. Melbourne, and ihe role of William Butterfield, Architect IS78-I884. 9. MILEMAN, J. - The Treatment of the Mentally 111 in Victoria 1850-1887: A study of official policy and institutional practice. 10. ROLFE, A. M. — Echuca in the twentieth century: Aspects of its Social History. 11. WHITING, M. K. — An Interpretation of the Iconography on some Graeco-Roman A nutlets. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ADLER, }.-The Jews in Paris. 1940-1944. 2. COPE, G. S. — The Woollen Industry in nineteenth century Victoria. 3. DUNSTAN, W. D. - The Melbourne City Council 1860-1890: A Study in Urban Politics. 4. EAGLE, M. E. — Painting in Sydney from World War I io 1930. 5. FA HEY, J. C. — Wealth and Poverty in Northern Victoria. 6. FOX, C. J. — The Victorian Unemployed Workers' Movement of the Great Depression. 1. GILLAM, R. A. — The Origins and Characteristics of the Cult of the goddess lialhor from the earliest times to the Thirteenth Dynasty. 8. GRIMSHAW, P. A. —A Social Historv of Women in Culture Contact in the Pacific 1797-1850. 9. HOWE, A.-Anglo-Dutch Politics in Colonial New York Cilv 1700-1760. 10. HUEGE dc SERVILLE, P.-The Upper Classes in Victoria 1850-1914. 11. JANSON, S. — Transported Worlds and New Environments: A cultural contact theory, a comparative study. 12. JOHNSTONE, C. B. — History of ihe origins, formation and early development of the Broken Hill Associated Smellers Ply. Lid. 13. JORDAN, D. J. — Nellie Palmer: Australian Women and Writing. 14. McCONVlLLE, C. J. - Migration from Ireland to Melbourne and Sydney 1850-1900. 15. MACLEAN, P. J. —Eastern European Jews in Germany 19/8-1939. 16. McMULLIN, A. F. R. — Perceptions of the Great War in Australia 1914-1938. 17. RASMUSSEN, C. A. - The Ami- War Movement in Australia. 18. RtEVES, A. P. —Trade Unions and Communism: Industrial Recovery in' Australia 1930-1939. 19. SAGAZIO, C.-The Viclorian Labor Parly and Bourgeois Hegemony 1892-1900. 20. SAGONA, A. — Pre-hisloric Settlement Patterns: Eastern Anatolia and Trans-Caucasia. 21. STEPHEN, S. i.-lmellectural Life in Melbourne 1890-1914. 22. STRAHAN, L. M. —Meanjin Quarterly in the context of Australia's cultural historv 1940-1972. 23. TEMPLI: TON, .1. D. - 77ie Bovs Come Home: A Studv of World War I Veterans. 24. THORN TON-SMITH, P.- 19/7 Australian Federal Election. 25. TREMBATH, G. R. — The Historv of the Roval Viclorian Trained Nurses' Association 1901-1934. 26. UNDERDOWN, M. R. - The Japanese Role in Mongolian Nationalist Movements. 21. VLAHOG1ANN1S, N. - Milhridales VI, King of Pontus. 28. WATTS, R. — Welfare Planning in Australia. 1938-1946. 29. WOOD ELLEM, E. O. — Queen Salote Tupou III and Tungi Muilefihi: a study of leadership in twentieth century Tonga 1918-41. 30. YULE, P. —The Tariff Reform Movement and the Unionist Party 1903-14. 31. ZIMMER, J.- Islamic Jewellery.

MA Theses in Progress 32. ADCOCK, M. — Social Altitudes of second Empire, as seen in the popular novels of Houssave. 36 FACULTY OF ARTS

33. ALSOP, G. —British Education Politics in I fong Kong in late nineteenth centurv. 34. BASSETT, J. M.-Australian Women during the Great War 1914-18. 35. BRADLEY, J. — Political Theory in sixteenth century England. 36. BRAND. D. L. D. — Annotated Bibliographical Guide to the University of Melbourne A rchi ves. 37. BROWNING, H. O. — Some aspecis of ihe move to federation and ihe writing of the Australian Constitution Act of 1900. 38. DARLING, B. — Anglican Church and Societv in Victoria between the Wars. 39. DOBER, M. — Opinions about Unemployment in England 1880-1914. 40. EGAN. J. Ys. — Reaction of ihe British Medical Profession lo Aneurin Bevan and his Na­ tional Health Service Legislation. 41. ELLIS, J. i.-Attitudes of Obedience and Allegiance of Radical Early seventeenth century Puritans. 42. GOODMAN, D. - History and Discourse. 43. GRIFFITHS, T. R. — Beechworth: Historical Consciousness in a small town. 44. HASTINGS, A. P.-Australian Army in New Guinea 1942-5. 45. HELL1ER, D. A. -Scottish Highland Emigration lo Victoria in 1850s. 46. HELMS, C. I L — Reception of the Anglican Mission in British New Guinea. 47. HOOPER, E. K. —Antiquarian Theory Concerning ihe Origin of ihe Ancient Celts in Cen­ tral and Western Europe in Prehistoric Times. 48. HORROCKS, L. C. — 77ie 'Endeavour' in the Pacific: Aspects of Culture Contact. 49. JAMES, M. — Religion in Israel during Ihe Iron Age. 50. JONES, G. D. M. — Nineteenth century Middle Class Women in Australia in Employment: Governesses and Teachers. 51. KISS, R. E. — The Origin and Development of ihe Suburb of Fitzroy in nineteenth century. 52. LA MACCHI A, G. - 'Thalassocracv': The Great Naval Age 1875-1925. 53. LINDSTROM, R.-Australian Soldiers in World War I. 54. McKAY, P. M. — History of the Cement Industry in Australia. 55. MacPHERSON, P. J. — Early Settlement and Pastoral Development of North-Eastern Victoria. 56. MATHES, C. R. — The Godly Magistrate in Ihe Long Parliament. 57. PHILLIPS, R. — Origins of the Viclorian Housing Commission. 58. PRIEDITIS, G.-Baltic Immigration lo Australia, late 1940s, early 1950s. 59. SAGONA, C. - Sea Peoples of the Middle East. 60. SUNDBERG, R. A. — 77ie Origins of the Judicature Chapter of the Australian Constitution. 61. WAJSENBERG, J. — Migration of Jews from Bialystok (Poland) lo Australia. 62. WATTS, L. A.—Norman Mailer: Facing and Making History. 63. WESTCOTT, W.-Port Phillip in 1838. 64. WILLIAMS, H. K. — Henry Fielding as Novelist and Magistrate. 65. W1NZENRIED, A. P.-Puritan Sabbatarianism in the 1590s. 66. YUGOVIC, J. — Leisure in Melbourne Between ihe Wars. 67. ZOGBAUM, H. — Iconoclasm and the Removal of Images during Ihe Early Reformation Period in Germany. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Australian Bicentennial History Project, 1888 section. ARGC: Cultural History. ARGC: Colonial American History. ARGC: Family structure in colonial Victorian towns. ARGC: Socialism in France (Department of the Ain) 1848-1980. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

INTRODUCTION An active research programme was continued during 1980 in both the history and the philosophy of science. A highlight was the visit by Professor R. S. Westfall (Indiana University) as a Faculty of Arts Visiting Scholar; his presence, and especially his Term II seminar on the evolu­ tion and structure of Newton's dynamics, provided a great .stimulus to those working on aspects of seventeenth-century science in particular. Another visitor, Professor Ben F. Rogers (Witchiia State University), conducted a seminar during Terms II and III on the philosophical foundations of statistics. Interest in studying thc history of Australian science continued to expand, to thc point where a research seminar devoted to this subject was also inaugurated during the year. Thc end of Dr Stephen Gaukroger's stay as a University of Melbourne Research Fellow was marked by thc ap­ pearance of his very important collection of essays dealing with Dcscartes's science.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. The Chemical Revolution in France 1740-1794—H. E. LeGrand. 2. The influence of thermodynamics on heat-engine technology in the late nineteenth cen­ tury— K. R. Hutchison. 3. Public Health in the colony of Victoria 1851-1901 — D. Dyason. 4. Thc mathematization of physics during the eighteenth century —R. YV. Home. 5. The role of magic in the Scientific Revolution — K. R. Hutchison. 6. The demarcation of science from non-science — H. Krips. 7. Theories of space and time—H. Krips. 8. Foundations of quantum theory— H. Krips. 9. Mathematical heuristic, wilh special reference to classical (Euclidean) geometry —J. Pottage. 10. Social factors in scientific change—H. E. LeGrand. 11. Philosophical problems of scientific explanation —S. Gaukroger. 12. Non-Darwinian theories of evolution in the early twentieth century —M. M. MacCallum. 13. Physics research in Australia 1875-1945 — R. W.'llome. 14. Biology and society in Australia 1850-1940—L. A. Farrall. 15. Thc history of the English eugenics movement 1865-1920—L. A. Farrall. 16. Philosophy of medicine —H. Krips. 17. Mathematical truth and ontology — F. J. Clendinnen. 18. Identity and inter-theoretic reduction —F. J. Clendinnen. 19. The rational basis of scientific inference —F. J. Clendinnen. 20. Statistical explanation in the social sciences— B. Rogers. 21. Amalie Dietrich: the scientific exploration of Northern Australia-R. Sumner. 22. History of Australian Science —J. Radford. 23. Comedy in thc history of the social sciences —R. Love. 24. Darwinism and social Darwinism —R. Love. 25. History of modem physics —P. Robertson. 26. Traditional navigation and astrology in the Pacific Islands — L. A. Farrall.

PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. GAUKROGER, S. (cd.) — Descartes: Philosophy, Mathematics and Physics, Harvester, Sussex (1980). Articles 2. DYASON, D. —Distance and Isolation in Interdisciplinary Research, Examples from Medical Historv. Hamdard, XXI11 (No. 1-2): 37-56 (1980). 3. GAUKROGER, S.-Aristotle on Intelligible Matter. Phronesis, 25: 187-197 (1980). 4. JONES, L. J.—The Early History of Mechanical Harvesting. Historv of Technology, 4: 101-148 (1979). 5. JONES, L. J. —John Ridley and the South Australian 'Stripper'. History of Technology, 5: 55-101 (1980). 6. JONES, L. J.-Thc Beam-Engine of Ridley's 'Hindmarsh Mill': Thc Fate of an Historic Technical Artefact. South Auslraliana. 19 (1): 1-5 (March 1980). 7. KRIPS, H.-Astrology-Fad, Fiction or Forecast? Erkenntnis, 14: 373-392 (1979). 8. KRIPS, H. — Aristotle on the Infallibility of Normal Observation. Studies in the Historv and Philosophy ofScience, II: 79-86 (1980). 9. SUMNER, R —Thc German Image of Australian Aborigines. Australia 1888: A bicenten­ nial Historv Bulletin, No. 5: 116-130 (Sept. 1980). 10. ROBERTSON, P. -Coming of Age: the British Association in Australia- 1914. Australian Physicist, 17(2): 23-27 (1980). 37 38 FACULTY OF ARTS

Reports and Notes 1 L HUTCHISON, K. R. — Review of S. Brush, The Temperature of History. Phases of Science and Culture in the Nineteenth Century (New York, 1978), in Annals of Science, 37: 716-718 (1980). 12. HUTCHISON, K. R.-Review of C. Truesdell and S. Bharatua, The concepts of Logic of Classical Thermodynamics as a Theory of Heat Engines Rigorously constructed upon the Foundations laid bv S. Carnot and F. Reech (New York, 1977), in Annals of Science, 36: 660-663 (1979). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DECREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. JONES, L. J. —John Ridley's Contributions to Australian Technology. Master of Science 2. OZOLI NS, .1. T. — The Subjective Axioinalizalion and Evaluation of Probability. Master of A rts 3. KEEN, J. R. - McCrea — A Matter of Paradigms. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. CLARK, J. F. — The Quantification of Electrostatics in the earlv nineteenth centurv. 2. CUSHAN, A. M. —Medical Ethics. 3. DAVEY, B. G. - Kantian Explications of the Metaphysical Residues of Newton's Concept of Space. 4. 1TO, Y. — Geology and Antiquarians in seventeenth century England. 5. NAYLER, M. A. — Theories of Muscle Function after the seventeenth centurv. 6. STOKES, T. - The Nature of Theories. 1. TAYLOR, A. — The Royal Society during Newton's Presidency. 8. TURNBULL, G. D.-Some Historical and Philosophical Aspecis of ihe Demarcation Between Science and Non-science. 9. WRIGHT, J. N. — A Physicalist Approach to some Semantic Concepts. MA Theses in Progress 10. BATCH ELDER, E. - French Scientists in Australia. 11. CLARK, C — Science and Religion in ihe Work of Robert Bovle. 12. KENNEDY, D. C. — On Zeno's Paradoxes. 13. McCARTHY, M. J. — Investigations of Scientific Methods and Predictions with special reference to Lakatos. 14. NICOL, G. J. - Victorian Colonial Medical Profession 1851-1865. 15. NORMAN, P. D. — Some Aspecis of the Role of Intuition in Science. 16. OVERTON, R. 1. —Catholic Ideas of Evolution in Australian Colonial Times. 17. RAVENHALL, J. G. — Chemistry in nineteenth century Melbourne. 18. REYNOLDS, K. — Late eighteenth century Veterinary Science. 19. SMITH, A. P. — The Statistical Relevance Account of Explanation. MSc Theses in Progress 20. GILL, W. — Scientijic and Social Factors in the Development of Melbourne's Earlv Water Supply 1835-1860. 21. G1TT1NS, M. J. — Religion and Science in the seventeenth century. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Thc Mathematization of Physics during the 18th Century. ARGC: The Chemical Revolution in France 1740-1794. ARGC: Public Health in the Colony of Victoria 1851-1901. ARGC: Physics Research in Australia 1875-1945. ARGC: The Influence of Thermodynamics on Heat-Engine Technology in the Late Nineteenth Century. INDIAN STUDIES

INTRODUCTION In 1980 the emphasis in research in the Department continued in the sociological-historical study of political and cultural developments in India in the past 150 years, as well as in the study of ancient Indian religious, philosophical, social and cultural aspects. Research in Indian languages, both classical and modern, the social organisation and religious beliefs of the 'adivasis' or tribal peoples of India, and the impact of Islamic culture on India was also encouraged. However, a more wide-ranging programme of research during thc past few years in thc Department is in thc sociological-historical-political study of thc cultural development of Modern India. Thc relationship between nationalism and communism in India, secular nationalism and the Muslim intelligentsia, the examination of ideological forces which caused the Indian renaissance, the problems of adjustment of the under-privileged communities of India after her independence, and changes in attitudes towards thc traditions of India due to thc impact of modernism are some of the major topics in which research is very much encouraged.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A critical study of Gatha-Saptasati —A. Mojumder. 2. Intellectuals and social change in Asia —S. N. Ray. 3. Renaissance in Bengal —S. N. Ray. 4. M. N. Roy: projected biography of a revolutionary in three volumes (first volume completed) —S. N. Ray. 5. Social organization and religious beliefs of the Santals —A. Mojumder. 6. Arabic, Persian and Turkish words in Bengali —A. Mojumder. 7. Buddhism in medieval India: a study of thc condition of Buddhism in India during the period from the lenth century up to the sixteenth century. This research, based on literary and archaeological sources, is intended to fill the gap which exists in Buddhist studies —T. Rahula. 8. A critical edition of the Apadana Pali: undertaken for ihc Pali Text Societv, London — T. Rahula. 9. Sources for the Study of British India in the State Library of Victoria. Part 11, Gazetteers, Maps and Photographs —J. M. Dunham, Beh Kim Un, H. C. Charlesworth. PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. MOJUMDER. A.-Samayer abhisap (in Bengali), Calcutta, Jatak, 96 pp. (1980). 2. MOJUMDER, A. — Bengali Language: Historical Grammar (l'l. I), 2nd impression, Cal­ cutta, Eirma K. L. Mukhopadhyaya; xxv + 88 pp. (1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Doctor of Philosophy 1. MADDERN, M. - Bengali And/In English. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. DUNHAM, J. M. — Time and History in the Mahabharata. 2. DUYKER, E. A.—Naxalism in-West Bengal: The Midnapore Uprising. A Study of ihe guerilla warfare in rural India. 3. RULE, P. - Crime and Society in Calcutta IS59-1947. 4. WISE, J. J. — Western Educated Elite in Krishnagur West Bengal in hue nineteenth century. MA Theses in Progress 5. Dill LLON, M. S.-Kadicvl Trends in Indian Literature 1920-47. 6. HOOD, J.— A Studv of Manik Bando-podhvuv: The Bengali Radical Novelist. 1. JOHNSON, R. — Kiplings India. 8. MACH, J. — A Critical Studv of nineteenth centurv Moslem Elites. 9. SOMERVILLE, \\.-Serpent in Indian Culture. 10. VALI:, J. — The Svriac Christians of South India. 11. WH ITE, D. - Me'wari Painting.

39 40 FACULTY OF ARTS

INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES

INTRODUCTION Research in the Department in 1980 proceeded on a broad front of areas of Indonesian Studies, including Indonesian language and literature, Indonesian politics and problems of moder­ nization and development, aspects of religious and spiritual movements, the Chinese minority, and the place of textiles in the society and culture of Flores. The work of thc Department was greatly stimulated from August to November by the presence ofa visiting scholar, Dr Harold Crouch, from the Department of Political Science at the National University of Malaysia. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Syntax and etymology of Bahasa Indonesia —J. P. Sarumpact. 2. Modern usage in Bahasa Indonesia —J. P. Sarumpact. 3. Compilation of Toba-Batak-Bahasa Indonesia dictionary —J. P. Sarumpaet. 4. Collection of material on the life and work of the writer Idrus —J. P. Sarumpaet. 5. Priangan gentry-peasantry relationships —M. Slamet. 6. "Subud" and "Pangestu" spiritual movements —M. Slamet. 7. History of Confucian religion in Indonesia — C. A. Coppel. 8. Comparative study of Chinese and Arab minorities in Indonesia —C. A. Coppel. PUBLISHED WORK Bonk 1. SARUMPAET, J. P. —Modern Usage in Bahasa Indonesia, Pitman Australia, Melbourne (1980). Chapters of Books 2. COPPEL, C. A. —Tjoe Bou San, Fromberg and the Chinese Movement (1921), in Leo Suryadinata, ed., Political Thinking of the Indonesian Chinese 1900-1977, trans, by C. A. Coppel, Singapore University Press: 16-24 (1979). 3. COPPEL, C. A —Tjoe Bou San, Chinese Interests in thc Netherlands Indies (1921), in Leo Suryadinata, ed., Political Thinking of the Indonesian Chinese 1900-1977, trans, by C. A. Coppel, Singapore University Press: 24-28 (1979). 4. COPPEL, C. A.-K. T. H. (Kwee Tck Hoay), Misleading Clamour (1928), in Leo Suryadinata, cd., Political Thinking of the Indonesian Chinese 1900-1977, trans, by C. A. Coppel, Singapore University Press: 44-49 (1979). Articles 5. COPPEL, C. A.-Teacher in Indonesia. Overland, SI: 70-71 (1980). 6. COPPEL, C. A. — Review of Leo Suryadinata, Pribuini Indonesians, the Chinese Minoritv and China (Heinemann, Kuala Lumpur, 1978). Pacific Affairs, 52 (4): 748-749 (1979-80).' 7. COPPEL, C. A. — Review of Leo Suryadinata, Political Thinking of the Indonesian Chinese 1900-1977 (Singapore University Press, Singapore, 1979). Asian Studies Association of Australia Review, 4 (\): 89-90 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. YOUNG, R. F. — The literary works of Iwan Simatupang. MA Theses in Progress 2. ADAMSON, A. A.- Religion and Stale in Indonesia. 3. DEAN, J. M — Origins of the Sain Kauw Hwee movement in Java before World War 2. 4. FIDD1AN, W. R. — Transmigration as a factor in regional development: An Indonesian case studv. 5. HARDJADIBRATA, R. R.-Studv of Sundanese svntax. 6. MAXWELL, R. J.-Flores textiles. 7. SOERADINATA, A. H. — Nh Dini's treatment of male characters in her novels. 8. WENNAGEL, A. —Concept of the individual in post-war Indonesian poetry. ITALIAN

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Ferdinando Gagliardi and his book on Australia —C. A. McCormick. 2. Thc problem of Dante's "development'' in the Divine Comedy — C. A. McCormick. 3. Italian dialects in Australia —M. Calio. 4. Enlightenment in eighteenth century Italy-C. Gundolf. THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Arts 1. BORGHESE, V. - Trieste e la letteratura triestina. 2. DE ROSA, M. —/ romanzi di Luigi Santucci. 3. MUSOLJNO, W. A. — Montale: verso una religiositd poelica. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. GENOVESI, P. —I moralist! della Voce. 2. TEH, S. — llalo Svevo. MA Theses in Progress 3. BERTOZZI, A.-The novels of L. Capuana. 4. DURANTE, L. — L'analfubetismo riflesso della letteratura italiana prima dell'unifieazione. 5. LEON1, E.-lgnazio Silone. 6. SCHIAVONI, F. - The poetry of Aldo Palazzeschi.

41 42 FACULTY OF ARTS

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Hebrew in iis Wesl Semitic selling —A. Murioncn. 2. A comprehensive history of Arab peoples —N. Mir/a. 3. The resurgence of Islam, its role in shaping contemporary events in the Arab World —N. Mirza. 4. Thc archaelogical and epigraphic survey of the Safaitic tribes of Ihc Wadi Rajil region of Jor­ dan (carried out under ihe terms of Ihc Albright Fellowship of the American Schools of Oriental Research). - V. Clark. 5. Rujm al-Hcnu. and the date and function of the Ammonite fortresses of Iron Age Jor- • dan-V. Clark. 6. Thc Aramaic of the Palestinian Targum fragments from the Cairo Genizah — T. Muraoka. 7. Hebrew and Greek in the Sepluaginl — T. Muraoka. 8. Intermediate Biblical Hebrew grammar —T. Muraoka. 9. Muslims in Australia from Afghans till the present day —A. K. Kazi. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. CLARK, V. — Investigations in a Prehistoric Necropolis near Bab Edh-Dhra. Annual of-Ihc Department of Antiquities, Jordan, XXIII: 57-79 (1979). 2. CLARK, V. —Review of F. V. Winnctl and Ci. Lankcstcr Harding, Inscriptions from Fifty Safaitic Cairns. Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, 237: (1980). 3. MIRZA, N. — A Studv of the Arabic Speaking Community in Victoria. An-Nuhar Weekly, Sydney, 26th September 1980: 12 (1980). 4. MIRZA, N.—The Significance ol the New Year Feast (Nawruz) in Iran, An-Nahar Weekly, Sydney, 28th March 1980: 13 (1980). 5. MURAOKA, T.-Review of M. Sckoloff, The Targum to Job from Qumran Cave XI (Ramat-Gan, 1974). Bibliolheca Oricmulis, 35: 318-322 (1978). 6. MURAOKA, T.-Sir. 51-13-30: an erotic hvmn to Wisdom? Journal for the Studv of Judaism, 10: 166-178 (1979). 7. MURAOKA, T. — On verb complementation in Biblical Hebrew. Vetus Teslainenlum, 29: 427-435 (1979). 8. MURAOKA, T. — Hebrew philological notes. Annual of ihe Japanese Biblical Institute, 5: 88-104 (1979). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. A TA, 1. - The Lebanese Community in Melbourne. 2. CLARK, V. A. —.4 Study of New Safaitic Inscriptions in Jordan. 3. SALT, }. —Christian Imperialism in Turkey 1876-1908. Master of Arts 4. FLATTLEY, K. — The Suffering of God in Old Testament Literature. 5. LUNG, W. N. — Prophetic Symbolic Actions in Ancient Israel. 6. MAHON, P. — Mar A wgen und the Historv of Syrian Asceticism and Monasiicisin. 1. NASRAI.LAH, N. -Aspects of the Palestine Problem; A Political Study. 8. OKNO, G. - The Theology of Saint Ephrem. 9. W1GG, .1. C. — Animal Husbandry in ihe Jaziru during ihe Mari Period. 10. YACOUB, A. H.—A Critical Study of Al-Maqrizi's View of Ihe Faliuu'd Period in Egypt. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. AM1NOFF, \. — The Conflict between Jacob and Esau as Reflected in Midrashic-Talmudic Sources and Contemporary Parallel Literature. 2. BERGMAN, B. — Hebrew Literature — A New Method of Analysis. 3. CHEN, P. L. — Mediaeval Muslim travellers and geographers and their literary works with special reference lo accounts in China. 4. FRANK, E. — Translation and Critical Edition of Medieval Syriac Manuscripts. 5. HAFEZ, F. — A Critical edition and translation ofthe manuscript History of the Kurdish and Turkish Peoples written in 1287 by Mohammed Ibn Ibrahim Ibn Mohammed Ibn Abi el- Fawaris Abd el-Aziz al-Ashari al-Khazraji. 6. MOJUMDER, A. J.— Arabic, Persian and Turkish words in Bengali. 7. WHITE, P. J.-Jewish Themes in Patristic Exegesis. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 43

MA Theses in Progress 8. BERGER, E. — The Influence of Agnon on Modern Israeli Writers. 9. COHEN, B.-Zion — in the writing of Yehuda Halevy. 10. CRANSVVTCK, U. — Persistent Motifs of Anthropology from Prophetic and Apostolic Literature which have continued into modern debate. 11. DOUGHERTY, P. A. — Women in the Work Force in Jordan wilh Particular Reference to the Impact of Agricultural Development on Rural Women. 12. FRIEDMAN, I.— Anli-semiiism in the Soviet Union in the late nineteenth and early twen­ tieth centuries. 13. McLOUGHLIN, C. M.— Thc llagiography of the Syriac Persian Martyrologies. 14. MOHAMED, S.—A Comparative studv of family law in the Middle East and Australia. 15. MOUSSA, MOHAMMAD EMAD A. A. -A Comparative Study of Al-Farabi's First Chief and the Muslim Caliph. 16. NU'MAN, A.-Analytical Studv of Muslim Theological Debate on the Concept of God and His Attributes from 'Malik B. Anas Id. 179 A.li.) to Abu Humid al Ghuzali (d. 505 A.H.). 17. SPENCER, G. - Translation with introduction and thematic exposition of Ms On the Resur­ rection of Bodies by John of Dura (9th C AD Bishop). 44 FACULTY OF ARTS

PHILOSOPHY

INTRODUCTION Research in ihe Department was strengthened by the presence ofa University of Melbourne Postdoctoral Fellow, Dr Martin Davies, whose special field of interest is philosophy of language.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. The defining criteria of'Personhood'-L. M. Broughton. 2. Masculine/feminine roles and images— L. M. Broughton. 3. Consciousness —L. M. Broughton. 4. Aesthetics of architecture —L. M. Broughton. 5. Thc justification of violence— C. A. J. Coady. 6. Regress and speaker meaning — C. A. .1. Coady. 7. Thc epistemology of testimony —C. A. J. Coady. 8. Hobbes's theory of obligation —C. A. J. Coady. 9. Conscience and mcta-cthics in J. H. Newman and John Rawls —J. E. D'Arcy. 10. Empiricist vcrificationism —J. E. D'Arcy 11. R. B. Braithwaite's conatism — J. E. D'Arcy. 12. Personhood —J. E. D'Arcy. 13. Significance logic— L. Goddard. 14. Paradoxes—L. Goddard. 15. Continuation of research into the topic of inicntionalily wilh reference to Frege's theory of sense and Husserl's phenomenology-M. J. Harney. 16. Philosophy of art: an investigation of contemporary European philosophy in relation to (a) thc origins of creativity (b) art and civilisation —M. J. Harney. 17. Identity through time—B. Langtry. 18. Principles of social justice —B. Langtry. 19. Logical probability and induction —B. Langtry. 20. Kant's groundwork of aesthetics —M. A. McCloskey. 21. Reasons, morals and mental conflict —M. A. McCloskey. 22. Mind and morals —M. A. McCloskey. 23. Introduction to Plalo's Hippias Major-M. A. McCloskey. 24. Intrinsic good —M. A. McCloskey. 25. Pleasure, beauty and good in Plato's works— M. A. McCloskey. 26. Rational man theory, and the social sciences —G. D. Marshall. 27. Activity and passivity —G. D. Marshall. 28. Emotions and instincts— G. D. Marshall. 29. Thc theory of logic and language proposed in Wittgenstein's Tractulus — L. J. O'Neill. 30. The concepts of techniques of rational inquiry —L. J. O'Neill. 31. Mysticism — W. K. Presa. 32. Emotions —W. K. Presa. 33. Metaphor and imagination —W. K. Presa. 34. Materialism and dualism —B. F. Scarlett. 35. Ethics of belief — B. F. Scarlett. 36. War and morality— B. F. Scarlett. 37. Examination of concepts of responsive government —J. T. J. Srzednicki. 38. S. Lesniewski's Logical Papers, etc. —J. T. J. Srzednicki. 39. Contemporary importance of some Kantian problems —J. T. J. Srzednicki. 40. Motivations behind logics —J. T. J. Srzednicki. 41. The semantics of natural language—B. M. Taylor. 42. Wittgenstein and mind —D. L. Gunner. 43. Semantics of demonstratives —M. Davies. 44. Causal theories of perception-M. Davies. 45. Pronouns and anaphora—M. Davies. PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. SRZEDNICKI, J. T. J. (cd.) (with BROUGHTON, L. M. (ass. e

Chapter of Book 3. MARSHALL, G. D. —Ovcrdctermination and the Emotions, Chapter 8 in Explaining Emo­ tions, ed. Amclic Rorty, University of California Press, Berkeley & Los Angeles: 197-222 (1980). Articles 4. BROUGHTON, L. M. —The Androgyny of Christ: a philosophical discussion of masculine and feminine in Christian thought. St. Mark's Review, December, 1980: 8-72 (1980). 5. BROUGHTON, L. M. — Empiricism and Innate Structure. Papers of Warsaw University: Studies in Logic, Grammar and Rhetoric, I: 71-89 (1980). 6. COADY, C. A. J. —The Leaders and the Led: Problems of Just War Theory. Inquiry, 23: 275-291 (October 1980). 7. GODDARD, L. —Significance, Necessity and Verification. Notre Dame Journal of Por mal Logic, XXI (2): 193-215 (April 1980). 8. GODDARD, L. and GOLDSTEIN, L.-Strengthened Paradoxes. Australasian Journal of Philosophy, 58 (3): 211-221 (September 19S0) 9. MARSHALL, G. D. — Review oi Action and Interpretation: Studies in the Philosophy ofthe Social Sciences, ed. Hookway& Pettit. Australasian Journal of Philosophv, 57(4): 359-361 (December 1979). 10. O'NEILL, I.. J.-Singular Causal Statements. Mind: 595-598 (October 1980). 11. O'NEILL, L. J. — Review of Kannegieser, Knowledge and Science. Australasian Journal of Philosophy, 58 (4): 426-427 (December 1980). 12. PRESA, W. K.-Creativity and the Creative Process. Journal of Ihe Institute of An Educa­ don, 4 (1): 55-61 (May 1980). 13. PRESA, W. K.-St. Thomas on Religious Faith. Sophia, 19: (3): 22-26&51 (October 1980). 14. SRZEDNICKI, J. T. J.-Spor O Uprawnienia Zwicrzat. Ruch Filozoficzny, XXXVII: 136-142 (1979). 15. SRZEDNICKI, J. T; J.-What Creativity is Not, reprinted in S. Johnson, The Stuff of Argu­ ment, Nelson: 98-104 (1980). 16. DAVIES, M. —Determinism and Evil. Australasian Journal of Philosophv, 58: 116-127 (1980). 17. DAVIES, M., with HUMBERSTONE, L.-Two Notions of Necessity. Philosophical Studies, 38: 1-30 (1980). 18. DAVIES, M.-A Note on Substitutional Quantification. Nous. 14: 619-622 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Arts 1. BLONDER, I. G. — Psvchologism: Frege-Husserl debate. 2. INCIGNERI, J. E.-Names in fiction. 3. SANDS, C. A. —Review of Sartre's critique of Freud's theory of mind. 4. TULLOCH, G. — Skinner and 'seeing red'. 5. WOOD, D. A. R. — Rawls' theory of distributive justice.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. AKIE, M. G. — Human rights, public order and social purpose. 2. BLONDER, I. G.-A theory of supposition. 3. BURNS, L. C- Vagueness. 4. CROSS THWAITE, }.—Analysis and comparison of some theories of meaning. 5. DELPORTO, A. F. — A studv of Nozick's contribution to moral and political philosophv. 6. FLEMING, P. J.-Rationality. 7. FOSTE R, R. M. — Use of symbols. 8. GREY, B. M. — Modality, reference and time. 9. HENDERSON, A. —Notion of reciprocity, its relation to Kant's ethics and metaphysics. 10. HYNES, L. M. — A comparison of the theory of moral development of Jean Piaget with his theory of knowledge. 11. JARAS1US, V. V.-Necessity. 12. KONDOR, }. —Explanation in the social sciences. 13. MARNELL, G. R. — The use of inela-ethics. 14. MILLER, S. R.-Convention. 15. OPIE, C. J. — The logical structure of a language containing vague terms. 16. PATAKI, T. — Facts, events and stale of affairs. 17. ROBINSON, D. J. — The semantics of mass terms [Monash]. 18. WECKERT, J. F. — Conceptual schemes. 46 FACULTY OF ARTS

19. WOODS. M. — A study of the semantics of natural kind predicates and their importance and role in rational inquiry. MA Theses in Progress 20. BECKETT, D. G.-The philosophv of creativity. 21. BORTHWICK, M. — Philosophy of history. 22. DAVENPORT, D. C. — Problems in Dummetl's philosophy of language and logic. 23. DUSCOVTC, B. — Metaphysics and ihe aeslhelic experience. 24. GI1.HEANY, J. C.-Activitv. abilitv, skills. 25. HALIK, S. C — Power. 26. HAWTHORNE, S. — The nature of belief structures and religious beliefs in ancient society. 21. .JOHNSTON, M. — Indexicalilv and the self. 2S. JOLLEY. M. C.-Mood and mode. 29. KESKINNEN, I. A. — Epistemological problems in philosophy of social sciences especially in philosoph v of history. 30. LEWIS, N. T. — Time and non-realistic theories of meaning. 31. McKlE, J. R. — Epistemology, precursors of existentialism 32. MANHAL, T.— philosophy of psychology and ethics. 33. MILLER, R. — On explanation. 34. MILTIADOU, R. — Towards an ethical knowledge. 35. NORTHROP, J. M. — Meaningfulness. 36. POULTON, .1. D. — Meaning, values and coercion. 37. RAINER, V. J. —Some metaphysical problems, wilh special reference to lmmanuel Kant. 3S. ROSE, .]. — Epislemology/nielaphysics. 39. RUSSELL, S. — Kant's moral and political philosophv. 40. SCOLYER, D. — 77ie connection between rights/duties and hierarchies of need and wants as the groundwork for a naturalistic ethics. 41. . SMITH, G. E. — Mysticism. 42. SOPHOCLEOUS, A. — Pleasure, the beautiful and the sublime are symbols of morality (us thev come out of ethical and aesthelical experience) in Kant's Critique of Judgement. 43. SPRACKLAN, i. — Kant. 44. TAYLOR, C. J. Yi.-Philosophy of language. POLITICAL SCIENCE

INTRODUCTION Research in the Political Science Department in 1980 continued to cover a variety of fields. In comparative government work is being done on thc politics of the U.S.S.R., China, the U.S.A. and the German Federal Republic. In political theory, apart from such perennial topics as political freedom, there is an increasing interest in the interaction of politics and language. A book on Marxism and Individualism by David Tucker was published by-Basil Blackwcll of Oxford. An active group within thc Department used the psycho-social —and especially thc psycho­ analytic—approach to such areas as political leadership. The Department's research into Australian politics now embraces local as well as state and Federal government. Strong research links have been formed with the Program in Public Policy Studies including a joint study, based on a panel survey, into the dynamics of life-satisfactions. From September Professor Hans Bossc from the Goethe University, Frankfurt, joined thc Department while he worked on his investiga­ tion into thc genesis of social conformity as a socialisation process.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A roll-call analysis of U.S. Congressmen's ideology in 1967-1976 —K. G. Armstrong. 2. Intergovernmental relations in Victoria —J. M. Power. 3. Political resources and political skills —J. M. Power. 4. Metaphor: towards a social theory of knowledge and action — D. F. Miller. 5. The dynamics of life satisfaction: a panel study —B. Headey (with A. Wearing). 6. Censorship and political freedom —D. F. B. Tucker. 7. Thc Soviet intelligentsia; changing structure and roles. —L. G. Churchward. S. The politics of the First Fleet —J. King. 9. Political language —J. Brett. 10. Chinese Trotskyism: its development and contemporary impact —J. Miller. 11. Leaders, followers and the self—G. Little. 12. Internal security in the West German Federal Republic —A. H. Hughes. 13. The political economy of stagflation and structural unemployment —A. H. Hughes. 14. The genesis of anomic alienation in early life and its implications. 15. Public policy and prisons —A. H. Hughes. 16. Political values and altitudes in Australia —J. M. Holmes.

PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. TUCKER, D. F. B. — Marxism and Individualism, Basil Blackwell, Oxford (1980). Chapters nf Books and Monographs 2. HEADEY, B. (with SMITH, A. F.)-Owning Versus Renting in Australia: Public and Private Choices in Housing, in Housing Economics, A.G.P.S., Canberra 278-286 (1980). 3. HEADEY, B. (with O'LOUGHLIN, T.)-Inequality in Australia: A New Perspective, in Australian Politics: A Fifth Reader, Longmans, Melbourne 104-108 (1980). 4. HEADEY, B. (with ROGERS, T., LOW, N., and BENHAM, L.)-Fitzroy-Collingwood Rental Housing Association: 2nd Annual Evaluation Report, Melbourne Univ.; Faculty of Architecture, Building and Town & Regional Planning, 1980, 74 pp. 5. HOLMES, J. —The Hamer Government and Urban Planning in Victoria, Chapter 9 in R. Scott (ed.). Interest Groups and Puhlic Policy, Macmillan: 194-223 (1980). 6. HOLMES, J. —Parliament and the Crisis of Democracy, in J. Holmes (ed.). Televising Parliament, Occasional Monograph, Department of Political Science, Universitv of Melbourne: 4-11 (1980). 7. LITTLE, G. — Kohul's Work on Narcissism, the Self and the Group, Psychosocial Papers, No. 3, Humanities Department. Deakin Universitv (1980). 8. POWER, J. M. (with WETTENHALL, R. L.)-Proposals for Australia, in D. C. Rowait (cd.), International Handbook on Local Government Reorganization, Greenwood Press, Westporl: 197-208 (1980). Articles 9. BRETT, J.-Planning the Future: Phantasv and Rhetoric in Telecom 2000. Melb. J. of Pols.: 36-45 (I9S0). 10. HOLMES, J. —Administrative Chronicle for Victoria. Aust. Journ. Pub. Admin., 39 (1): 109-112 (March 1980). 11. LI TTLE, G. — Leaders and Followers: A Psychosocial Prospectus. Melb. J. of Pols.. 12: 3-29(1980). 47 48 FACULTY OF ARTS

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. BRETT, .1. M. — The Milk of Language: A Psychoanalytic Interpretation of Hugo Von Hof- mannstahl's Chandos Crisis. 2. WHITE, K. B.-John Cain and Victorian Labor 1917-1957. Master of Arts 3. BLATT, P. A. —Self Reliance or Rediscovering the Wheel—Case Studies of Technology Transfer and R&D in the Indian Tractor Industry. 4. INACHIN, V. -The Politics of Inflation. 5. KIELY, R. M. — Single Mothers in Society —A Study of the Causes and Consecpiences of Single Motherhood for a Melbourne Sample of Single Mothers Keeping their Children. 6. LINDNER, W. B. — Logomachy: The Semiology of Political Language. 7. LYNCH, M. E. — Prom Eire to Hellas—A Study of Selected Irish and Creek organizations in Melbourne. 8. MINCHIN, J. B. — Patriot of the Will— Lee Kuan Yew; A Political Biography of Singapore's Prime Minister. 9. OLLIVIER, .!. P. — The French and Italian Communist Parties— Two Roads To Eurocom­ munism. 10. RUMPF, P. B. - Town Hall Politics: Heidelberg's Policy Makers 1967-1977.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ANDREWS, D. J. - Policy Making in Urban Planning. 2. BERRY, M. J. — Politics of Urban Planning in Melbourne with particular reference to Resi­ dent Groups. 3. BROWN, A. D.— The Determinants of Local Government Organization. 4. BURKE, M. J. — Issues in ihe Australian Political Culture. 5. CAMPBELL, F. J.— A Comparative Analvsis of Class Consciousness among Blue and While Collar Workers. 6. CONSIDINE, M. — Insurance Politics and the Policy Process. 7. EDWARDS, M. R.-.4 Study of Aspects of Extreme Right-Wing Political Activity in A ustralia. 8. GEORGIOU, P.-Organization Theory. 9. JONES, A. E. — Social Planning in the Barwon Region. 10. KIRSNER, D. - The Words of Samuel Beckett. 11. LOVE, J. R. — The Political Economy of Antiquity. 12. O'GRADY, A. — The Theory and Practice of Selected Roles in Australian Federal Parlia­ ment [on leave]. 13. PARAMANATHAN, T. - Television Themes and Styles. 14. RICHARDS, M. J. — The Canberra Parliamentary Press Gallery. 15. SCHEDVIN, M. B. — Studv of Political Socialization — Interaction in Marriage. 16. TSOKHAS, K.-Marxist Values of ihe Stale. 17. WEBLEY, I. A.-Political Myth in Australia. 18. WILSON, J. C —Social Climbing and Peak Experience. 19. WONG-SAN DOR, H. K.-S. - Chinese Political Culture. MA Theses in Progress 20. BAYLEY, M. I. - Teaching English to Migrant Students. 21. BENJAMIN, C — Impact of Whitlam Government Program on Western Region of Melbourne. 22. BENNETTO, A. — Educational Policy-making in Victoria. 23. BLACK, D. — The Left Wing in Australia. 24. BROWNE, P. A. — The Delerminance of Local Government Organization. 25. BRYSHA, B. — Pressure Groups in the Australian Federal System. 26. CLARKE, J. E. — Symbol and Myth in the works of Karl Marx. 21. CONDON, R. W. — Decision-Making Procedures in Universitv Councils. 28. CUSACK, D. H.- The Catholic Worker [on leave]. 29. DOBLE, B. A. —Focus on Alienation: Anti-Uranium Movement. 30. DRUMMOND, G. \. —Qualities of work in an Australian Iron Ore Mining Company. 31. DUCK, J. L.—An Organisational Study of Shipwrights' Union. 32. EVANS, D. K. — Political Constraints in an Area of Education Welfare in Australia (Adult Literacy). 33. FRAWLEY, P. F. — Evaluation of Albury-Wodonga Development Corporation. 34. GASS1N, J.-C. — Development of a Political Commitment in Ihe work of Rousseau. POLITICAL SCIENCE 49

37. GOODE, J. Xi. —Community Health Centres in Melbourne. 38. HATTAM, F. M. — Political Biography [on leave]. 39. KENNEDY, J. A. —Trained Primary Teacher's Certificate. 40. KRONEMANN, bA.- Labour Disputes in the Soviet Union. 41. LONG, M. — Spatial Inequalities and Municipal Policies. 42. MARTIN, Z. - Western Relations wilh the Third World. 43. McCRACKEN-HEWSON, J. A. — Democracy in Associations—Case Studies of Australian Community Groups. 44. McLEISH, G. — Local Government Reform in Australia. 45. N1I.SON, S. — An Analysis of the Power Relationships in Dostoevsky's The Brothers Karamazov. 46. NYE, A. —International Organization. 47. PALOZZO, E. — The Extent to which Australian Residents are important to Australian Communism. 48. PATTERSON, D. M. — The FACS Program in Ihe Mildura Region. 49. PERRY, P. - The Effect of Mass Media on Counter Culture. 50. PHUNG, H. — Conventional Missile Defence in Australia. 51. RIMMER, J. R.— Victorian Board of Review of Local Government. 52. SHORT, P. D. — Comparative Incomes Policies under Communism and Capitalism. 53. S1EVERS, J. A. —Civil Disobedience —Protest and Non-Violence. 54. SINCLAIR, A.-Small group study. 55. SMYRK, L.— Marxism and Feminism. 56. STEELE, P. — The Canberra Parliamentary Press Gallery. 57. TONGUE, B. — Power and Authority in West German Politics. 58. TURBAYNE, D. Wl.-Studv of Government Co-ordination. 59. WARD, M. - Political Conflict and Social Order in Machiavelli. 60. WILEMAN, B. — The Politics of Prison: Classification and Treatment of Offenders. 61. WISHART, B. — Theoretical Relationships between Marxism and Feminism. 50 FACULTY OF ARTS

PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION Research in progress in the Department reflects the wide ranging interests of staff and covers statistical, information processing, personality, neuropsychological, psycholinguistic and developmental studies. In 1980, two grants were received from the ERDC which reflect a develop­ ing commitment to research work into the problems of migrant children. One project is in­ vestigating the social and personal adjustment of adolescent children and the other studies specific learning disabilities. The Department continues to attract substantial ARGC grants in the area of psycholinguistic research. A growing area of research activity in the Department is Policy Studies which in 1980 attracted substantial research funds over a variety of areas including telecom­ munication studies, social indicators and studies of widowhood. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Stylistic variance in the MMPI —P. Burgess, I. M. Campbell, S. B. Hammond. 2. The natural history of personality disorders —I. M. Campbell, G. Mellsop. 3. The across-person consistency of thc CPI —P. Wink, I. M. Campbell. 4. Principles and practices of RET—P. Wink, I. M. Campbell. 5. An observer-based validation study of MMPI-CPI factors in a Californian sample—I. M. Campbell, H. Gough. 6. Personality and adjustment to chronic illness —G. V. Stanley, J. Ramshaw, T. Endrey, R. Spivak. 7. Sanity and madness: in collaboration with young former journalist, on this man's experience of madness —C. W. Langley. 8. Personality dialectics: new perspectives on theorising about personality —C. W. Langley. 9. Metabiography: psychodynamic commentary on the biographical process — C. W. Langley. 10. Self-concept, body-image and interest patterns of a double-amputee —L. R. Borland. 11. A study of short-term inclusive psychotherapy —L. R. Borland. 12. Development and measurement of self-concept —M. C. Lawson. 13. Social interaction processes and personality —M. C. Lawson. 14. Interpersonal interaction in pluralistic societies —M. C. Lawson. 15. Personality factors in coping with dental anxiety—N. E. McMurray. 16. Communication and coping skills training in the rehabilitation of incarcerated delin­ quents—N. E. McMurray. 17. The psychological control of pain —D. Elton, G. Burrows, G. V. Stanley. 18. Evaluation of marital quality —T. Kotler. 19. Social and personal adjustment of Anglo-Australian and non-Anglo-Australian adoles­ cents—D. Rosenthal. 20. The use of computer mapping techniques in pinpointing subtle diftenliations in vocational commitment in a Melbourne-based religious order—D. Taylor, W. K. Bartlett. 21. Analysis of survey data relating to attitudes of people in thc Uniting Church towards the pro­ cess of church union —W. K. Bartlett. 22. Psychological analysis of durational data obtained in connection with various psychological phenomena in an attempt to identify varieties of sub-populations —W. K. Bartlett. 23. Sex differences in mathematical competence —N. R. Grieve, P. E. Pattison. 24. Philosophical psychology and social theory —F. Knopfelmacher. 25. The assimilation of ethnics in Australia —F. Knopfelmacher. 26. A longitudinal study of career development based on Holland's theory of occupational choice-K. F. Taylor, G. I. Kelso, P. G. Power, K. Funder. 27. Cognitive outcome following subarachnoid haemorrhage —M. Molloy, J. M. Calvert. 28. Evaluation of effectiveness of various remediation techniques in the rehabilitation of stroke patients displaying unilateral spatial neglect —G. Kinsella. 29. Investigation of patterns of stroke recovery and disturbances of spatial cognition —G. Kinsella, B. Ford. 30. Techniques to promote recovery from brain trauma —A. W. H. Buffery. 31. Cross-modal skill in deaf and hearing children —A. W. H. Buffery. 32. Cerebral functioning in the spina-bifida child-A. W. H. Buffery. 33. Auditory attention in the epileptic child-A. W. H. Buffery. 34. Developmental dyscalculia-A. W. H. Buffery. 35. Cognitive change in dialysis dementia —K. W. Walsh, A. Shores. 36. Sub-ictal disruption of cognitive function —K. W. Walsh, D. Moglia. 37. Neurolinguistic analysis of Broca's Aphasia —G. Kinsella, R. J. Wales. 38. Language acquisition: (a) deixis (b) speech perception and production — R. J. Wales. 39. Normal adult speech perception and production —R. J. Wales. 40. Sequential and word processing by hearing-impaired children —R. J. Wales. 41. Structural factors in spelling errors —R. J. Wales. 42. Context effects in sentence perception —V. M. Holmes. PSYCHOLOGY 51

43. Syntactic and semantic strategics in sentence comprehension —V. M. Holmes. 44. Pragmatic factors in language production —J. Langford, V. M. Holmes. 45. The development of language and communication in the preschool child-A. G. Cross. 46. Family-child interaction in normal and disordered development —A. G. Cross, T. Nienhuys. 47. The effect of day-care programmes on child communication and social development —A. G. Cross, M. Juchnowski. 48. Specific learning disorders in migrant children —G. V. Stanley, G. Smith. 49. The development of sequential integration — G. Smith, G. V. Stanley. 50. Associations between thc Stroop effect and bilingualism and reading ability —G. Smith. 51. Algebraic models for local and global role systems —P. E. Pattison. 52. Coding processes in memory for movement —J. J. Summers. 53. Lateralization of motor functions in the cerebral hemispheres —J. J. Summers. 54. Psychological characteristics of the marathon runner —J. J. Summers. 55. Dynamic decision making —A. J. Mackinnon, P. E. Pattison, A. Welfare. A. J. Wearing. 56. Complex problem solving —H. A. H. Rowe, A. J. Wearing. 57. Development of a social and economic indicators and resources data base for Victoria — A. F. Armstrong, J. Wilding, D. Farrugia, T. Lau, A. J. Wearing. 58. Subjective social indicators and determinants of quality of life—B. Heady, J. Delbridge, A. J. Wearing. 59. Network models of telecommunication behaviour —A. D. Shulman, C. Lonsdale, A. J. Wearing. 60. Field studies of new telecommunication facilities —A. D. Shulman, Y. Stolk, B. Hughson, J. Buzzard, G. Higgins, R. Kelly, T. Lau, V. Machin, A. Rethus, M. Williamson, J. Wolfram, A. J. Wearing. 61. Computer policy in secondary and technical education —P. G. Thorne, A. J. Wearing. 62. Social indicators methodology —A. F. Armstrong, A. J. Wearing. 63. The social consequences of energy pricing policies —A. F. Armstrong, A. J. Wearing. 64. Thc social impact of industrial development in non-metropolitan areas —A. F. Armstrong, D. Farrugia, A. J. Wearing. 65. Consumer evaluations of health determinants and health policies —A. F. Armstrong, A. J. Wearing. 66. Differences in subjective indicators of Australian housing conditions —A. F. Armstrong, D. Farrugia. 67. Decision making and the General Linear Model — S. A. Thomas, A. J. Wearing. 68. Monitoring the effectiveness of the Family and Community Services program —J. Hallcn- stein. 69. Rationalization of authority in state government departments—M. Quinn. 70. National threats—M. Undcrdown. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. BUFFERY, A. W. H. — Clinical developmental neuropsychology: Retrospect and prospect, in M. Molloy, G. V. Stanley and K. W. Walsh (eds.). Drain Impairment: Proceedings ofthe 1979 Drain Impairment Workshop, Psychology Dept., University ofjMelbourne: 1-42 (1980). 2. BUFFERY, A. W. H. —Thc ability of epileptic children to perceive change, in M. Molloy, G. V. Stanley and K. W. Walsh (eds.). Drain Impairment: Proceedings of the 1979 Brain Im­ pairment Workshop, Psychology Dept, University of Melbourne: 252-264 (1980). 3. ELTON, D., BURROWS, G. D. and STANLEY, G. V.-Chronic pain and hypnosis, in G. D. Burrows and I... Dennerstein (eds.), Handbook of Hypnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, Elsevier, Amsterdam: 269-292 (1980). 4. ELTON, D., BURROWS, G. D. and STANLEY, G. V. - Apperception of pain, in C. Peck and M. Wallace (eds.). Problems in Pain, Pergamon Press, Sydney: 115-120 (1980). 5. McMURRAY, N. E. —Fears, in A. Hudson and M. Griffin (eds.). Behaviour Analvsis and the Problems of Childhood, PIT Press, Bundoora, Victoria: 147-161 (1980). 6. SMITH, G. A. —Models of choice reaction time, in A. T. Welford (ed.), Reaction Times. Academic Press, London: 173-214 (1980). 7. STANLEY, G. V. — Personality and attitude correlates of religious conversion, in J. R. Tisdalc (ed.), Growing Edge in the Psychology of Religion, Nelson Hall, Chicago: 151-171 (1980). 8. WU, D., WHITE, J. and LAWSON, M. C.-Thesecond phase, in D. H. Wu(ed.), Interper­ sonal Interaction in Pluralistic Societies: A Report of an International, Interdisciplinary Col­ laborative Research Project, East-West Culture Learning Institute, Hawaii (1980). Articles 9. ARMSTRONG, A. F. and WEARING, A. J.-Thc Viclorian socio-economic indicators and resources data base. URPIS Eight: Proc. of the Eighth Australian Conference on Urban and 52 FACULTY OF ARTS

Regional Planning Information Systems, The Australian and Regional Information Systems Association, Queensland, 8 (49): 1-7 (1980). 10. CORTER, C. M., ZUCKER, K. J. and GALLIGAN, R. F.-Patterns in the infant's search for mother during brief separation. Dev. Psvch., 16: 62-69 (1980). 11. CROSS, A. G., JOHNSON-MORRIS, J. E. and NIENHUYS, T. G. — Linguistic feedback and maternal speech: comparisons of mothers addressing hearing and hearing-impaired children. First Language, I (3): 163-189 (1980). 12. CROSS, A. G. and MORRIS, J. E. — Linguistic feedback and maternal speech: Comparisons of. mothers addressing infants, one-year-olds and two-vear-olds. First Language, I (2): 98-121 (1980). 13. CROSS. A. G.. NIENHUYS, T. G. and MORRIS, J. E.-Maternal speech styles to deaf and hearing children. The Australian Teacher of the Deaf, 21: 8-14 (1980). 14. DAY, R. H. and JORY, M. K. —A note on a second stage in thc formation of illusory con­ tours. Perception & Psychophysics, 27(1): 89-91 (1980). 15. ELTON, D., BURROWS, G. D. and STANLEY, G. V.-Management of mother's clinical pain by behavioural modification of her child's disruptive behaviour. J. Behav. Ther. & Exp. Psychiat., 11: 231-233 (1980). 16. ELTON, D., BURROWS, G. D. and STANLEY, G. V.-Hypnosis and chronic pain. Aust. J. Clin. Exp. Hypn., 8: 83-90 (1980). 17. GURNEY, R. M. —Thc effects of unemployment on the psycho-social development of school-leavers. J. of Occup. Psychol., 53: 205-213 (1980). 18. GURNEY, R. M. — Does unemployment affect the self-esteem of school-leavers'! Austral. J. of Psychol., 32 (8): 175-182 (1980). 19. HILL, D. and GARDNER, G. — Repression-sensilization and yielding to threatening health communications. Austral. J. of Psycho! 32 (3): 183-193 (1980). 20. HUMPHREY, M. and KINSELLA, G. -Sexual life after stroke. Sexualitv and Disability, 3: 150-153 (1980). 21. KELSO, G. I. and TAYLOR, K. F. — Psychologists as judges: A consensual validation of a personality typology. Aust. J. Psycho!, 32: 135-139 (1980). 22. KINSELLA, G. and DUFFY, 1-. — Attitude towards disability expressed by spouses of stroke patients. Scandinavian J. of Rehab. Med., 12: 73-76 (1980). 23. KINSELLA, G. and FORD, B. — Acute recovery patterns in stroke patients: Neuro­ psychological factors. Med. J. of Aust., 2: 663-666 (1980). 24. KNOPFELMACHER, F.-Puritan, paranoid and remissive. Quadrant, Vol. XXII No. 7, 74-75 (1978). 25. LAWSON, M. C. — Development of body build stereotypes, peer ratings, and self-esteem in Australian children. ./. of Psychol, 104: 111-118 (1980). 26. MACKINNON, A. J.' and WEARING, A. J.-Complexity and decision making. Behavioural Science, 25: 285-296 (1980). 27. MOORE, S. M. and ROSENTHAL, D. A.-Sex-roles: Gender, generation, and self-esteem. Austral Psychologist, 15: 467-477 (1980). 28. ROSENTHAL, D. A. and CHAPMAN, D. C.-Sex-role stereotypes: Children's perceptions of occupational competence. Psychological Reports, 46: 135-139 (1980). 29. ROSENTHAL, D. A. and CONWAY, H. — Adolescents' creativity and non-conformity in school. Psychological Reports, 47: 668 (1980). 30. ROSENTHAL, D. A., SOMERVILLE, S. C. and SHEAHAN, R. K.-Thc development of formal operational reasoning: Effects of two training procedures with ten-year-olds. Genetic Psychology Monographs, 102: 219-268 (1980). 31. SMITH, G. and STANLEY, G. V. — Relationships between measures of intelligence and choice reaction time. Bui! Psychon. Soc, 16: 8-10 (1980). 32. STANLEY, G. V. — The psychology of reading diffiulty for the class-room teacher: An over­ view of recent developments. Aust. J. Rented. Educ, 12: 11-14 (1980). 33. STANLEY, G. V. and SMITH, G. —Assessing the intelligence of dyslexic children. Bull. Brit. Psychol. Soc, 33: 259 (1980). 34. STANLEY, G. V. and WATSON, M. — Comparison of writing and drawing performance of dyslexic boys. Percept. & Mot. Skills, 51: 776-778 (1980). 35. TAYLOR, K. F.-On the scientific status of anecdotes. Aust. Psychologist, 15: 123-125 (1980). 36. WEARING, A. J., MACKINNON, A. J. and THOMAS, S. A.-Human interactive control of dynamic systems: Questions about the heuristic uses of systems dynamic models as a tool of policy thought. Proc. of the Sixth International Conference on Systems Dynamics: 1-15 (1980). Reports and Monographs 37. ARMSTRONG, A. F. —Socioeconomic indices for local government areas in Victoria, in A. F. Armstrong and A. J. Wearing (eds.), Socioeconomic Indicators for Victoria; Stage Two, Monograph in Public Policy Studies No. 2, University of Melbourne 22-50 (1980). PSYCHOLOGY 53

38. ARMSTRONG, A. F. and WEARING, A. J.-Indicators and planning: Thc family and community services program, in A. I-'. Armstrong and A. J. Wearing (eds.), Socioeconomic Indicators for Victoria; Stage Two. Monograph in Public Policv Studies No. 2, University of Melbourne 51-73 (1980). 39. ARMSTRONG, A. F. and WEARING, A. J.-Thc Victorian data information system, in A. F. Armstrong and A. J. Wearing (eds.). Socioeconomic Indicators for Victoria; Stage Two, Monograph in Public Policv Studies No. 2, University of Melbourne: 7-21 (1980). 40. ARMSTRONG, A. F. and WEARING, A. J. (eds.)-Social Indicators for Victoria; Stage One, Monograph in Public Policv Studies No. 1, Universitv of Melbourne (1979). 41. ARMSTRONG, A. F. and WEARING, A. J. (cds.)-5oc/o economic Indicators for Vic­ toria; Stage Two. Monograph in Public Policv Studies No. 2, Universitv of Melbourne (1980). 42. BECK WITH, J. B., HAMMOND, S. B. and CAMPBELL, I. M.-Homogeneous scales for the neurotic triad of the MMPI, Melbourne Psychology Reports, No. 63 (1980). 43. KOTLER, T. and GILCHRIST, M. — Reciprocal impact of parental involvement and school achievement, Me/bourne Psychology Reports, No. 62 (1980). 44. KOTLER, T. and HAMMOND, S. B.-Marital quality and disturbed child behaviour, Melbourne Psychology Reports, No. 66 (1980). 45. LYNDELL, R., STANLEY, G. V. and BARTLETT, W. K. — Psychological correlates of religious belief change and loss, Melbourne Psychology Reports, No. 64 (1980). 46. TAYLOR, K. I-., KELSO, G. K., LONGTHORP, N. E. and PATTISON, P. E. — Differen­ tiation as a construct in vocational theorv and a diagnostic sign in practice, Melbourne Psychology Reports. No. 68 (1980). 47. TAYLOR, K. F., KELSO, G. I., PRETTY, H. 1. and POWER, P. G.-Somc cultural and sex differences in responses fo the V. P. I. An Australian-American comparison, Melbourne Psychology Reports. No. 65 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. ARMSTRONG, A. F. — Health Policy and Subject Social Indicators. 2. ELT ON, D. - Psychological Control of Pain. 3. GURNEY, R. M. — Aspects of School Leaver Adaptation lo Unemployment. 4. PATTISON, P. ti.—Algebraic Representations of Structure in Human Groups. 5. ROSS, M. — Homosexuality, Sex Rotes and Society Control. 6. ROWE, H. — Problem Solving.: A Study of ihe Joint Effects of Psychological Processes. Task Characteristics and Individual Differences. 7. SHARP, C. — Cerebral Lateralisation of Spatial Aspects of Human Movement Control. Master of Arts 8. BARSON, F. P.—Disruption of cognitive and memory functioning in Uraemia. 9. CHANT, G. J . — Conjoint Analysis as a Method of Determining Packages. 10. FAIR, F. R. — The Effects of a Cognitive and Somatic Treatment on the Cognitive and Somatic Components of Anxiety: A Clinical Study. 11. GALLAGHER, G. A. J. —Children's Understanding of Proportionality and Performance on A Igorisms for Rational Numbers. 12. HUDSON, R. T. — Prediction of Success in Alcoholism Treatment. 13. HUNT, M. — A Preliminary Neuropsychological Investigation of Frontal Lobe Disorders found in Alcoholism. 14. LOVE, A. —Sex Differences in Altitudes and Mathematical Achievement. 15. MACMILLAN, I. W. —A Comparison of Normal Readers with Dyslexics on a Series of At­ tentional Tasks. 16. MAIZELS, N. H. — A Repertory Grid Study of Change in a Psychotherapeutic Encounter Group. 17. MATIC, M. — Metaphor and Semantic Anomaly. 18. McLACHLAN, D. L. — Some Aspecis of the Unilateral Spatial Neglect Syndrome following Cerebro vascular A ccident. 19. MOLLOY, C. J. S.-Job Satisfaction Study of Low-Level Technical Workers. 20. MORETON, J. R. — Self Esteem and Group Therapy Outcome: An Exploratory Study. 21. MUNRO, J. K. — The Acquisition of Temporal Linguistic Reference in Children. 22. PONSI-'ORD, J. L. - Memory Disorder in Vertebrobasilar Disease. 23. RICKARDS, A. L.-The Effect of Intensive Care on the Intellectual Development of Children of very low Birth Weight. Master of Science 24. CORN WELL, 3. —Comparison of Single and Multiple Sessions of Hypnosis in the Treat­ ment of Smoking Behaviour. 54 FACULTY OF ARTS

25. DUNN, F. M. — An Empirical Investigation into the Usefulness of the MMPI in the Diagnosis of Schizophrenia. 26. ENGLAND, A. S. — Delinquent Self-Esleem and Physical Fitness Training —A Practical Rehabilitation Technique. 27. FREI, D. Z. — Hemispheric Differences in Emotional Disposition following Stroke. 28. MORAN, F. — Self-Concept — A Developmental Approach. 29. MYER, R. - "Goldilocks and Ihe Three Bears": Children's Response lo Fairy Tale. 30. TURNBULL, G. — Functional Hemispheric Asymmetry with Internal Capsule Infarctions.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BECKW1TH, J.— Alcohol use and related behaviours in young adult women. 2. BORLAND, R. M. — Emotional flux in dyadic interaction. 3. BROWN, P. F. — Delinquency—a failure in lunguage coping. 4. DARBYSHIRE, M. G. — Sequela to congenital and early incurred hemiplegia in 7-15 year olds. 5. DAWSON, R. W. — Parameters of change in cognitive behaviour therapy. 6. DOWLING, P. J. — Neuropsychological assessment of recovery from mild-moderate head injury. 7. EVANS, A. 3. — Charismatic authority. 8. HILL, D. J. —Belief and intention —a comparison of three models to explain processes underlying precautionary health behaviour. 9. HOLDEN, R. W. — A dynamic testing approach to self concept change in juvenile delinquent males. 10. H UGHES, A. H. — Some aspects of subjective alienation and anomie (including its measure­ ment). 11. KAPLAN, I. — Self-esteem and depression. 12. KELLY, S. — Impact on family (personal) relationships of the returning to study of mature- age women. 13. LAIDLER, T. J. — Catholic secondary school students: Patterns of interaction and cognitive styles. 14. LANGFORD, J.—Some pragmatic processes in speech production of normal and brain damaged individuals. 15. LAWSON, M. C. —An elhogenic model of self concept. 16. MACKINNON, A. J. — Dynamic decision making. 17. MATTHEWS, J. P.—Studies of the interrelationships between mother's speech and child language: A developmental perspective. 18. McMILLAN, S. D.— Jealousy as a factor in group organization. 19. MOLLOY, M. P. —Memory and cognitive disorders following closed head injury. 20. MUNRO, }. —Psychological correlates of learning disabilities in mathematics. 21. ROBINSON, R. C— Evaluation of continuing education programmes in human sexuality and communication skills. 22. STUART, I. M. — Aspects of constructional apraxia. 23. THOMAS, S. A.— An assessment of social judgement theory. 24. VOWELS, L.— A longitudinal investigation of intellectual change in multiple sclerosis. 25. WESTON, R. E. — Psychological stress in farmers facing economic recession. 26. WILLIAMS, A. J . — Investigations of speech perception in young children. MA Theses in Progress 27. ANDERSON, V. A. —Brain and personality in childhood: A neuropsychological enquiry. 28. BAILLIE, J. E.—An exploration of continuities in family organizations. 29. BALL, J. R. — Social skills training with juvenile delinquents—The relative efficacy of in­ dividual versus group therapy. 30. BARTLETT, B. W. T.—Job satisfaction in air traffic controllers. 31. BENNETT, C. — Coping styles of unemployed people. 32. BODLEY, A. L. — Possible interhemispheric functional inefficiency of spina bifida children. 33. BOREHAM, J. E. — Motive patterns: Personality stricture and individual adaptation to university. 34. BUCOVAZ, C. — Aspects of constructional apraxia. 35. CARROLL, G. B. B. — An evaluation of managerial grid in B. H. P. 36. CROFTS, P. N. — Client characteristics and comparative treatment outcomes between three treatment approaches to drink driver rehabilitation. 37. DONEHUE, A. I. —Evaluation ofthe California Psychological Inventory and other criteria used for the selection of general student nurses. 38. FOX, P. D. — Selecting computer programmers: Using multivariate statistical analysis to determine criterion and predictor variables. PSYCHOLOGY 55

39. FUNDER, K. R. —Stability and change in adolescent career choice. 40. FYFFE, A. E. — Comparative rates of acquisition of two manual communication systems. 41. GREEN, J. M. — Changes in interpersonal perception associated with an encounter group ex­ perience. 42. GUERIN, L. M. — Marital relationships in head injured patients. 43. HAUSER, C. A. — Personality characteristics and attitudes of postgraduate medical students. 44. HICKS, A. ).-Psychiatrists' reliability in the diagnosis of Axis 2 of DSM III. 45. JAMES, H. L. — An investigation of the kinetic family drawing us an indicator of family relations. 46. JAMES, S. P. — The personality of police recruit applicants as measured by the CPI. 47. JUCHNOWSKY, M. — Effects of day care on the children's language and social interaction. 48. LEUNG, S. S. Y. — The concomitants of social positions in Ihe classroom, with emphasis on perception of actors, semantic differences in perceived dimensions and antecedents, in­ cumbents and consequences of social positions. 49. LIPZKER, A. —Menstruation; attitudes and responses to, particularly to pain of menstrua- lion. 50. LOCKE, M. A. — Cross model skills and hemispheric specialization of language in deaf children. 51. LOEWY, J. — The ability of chronic alcoholics to learn strategies to assist in concept forma­ tion. 52. LOWE, A. R.-Pilot personality. 53. LYNDALL, R. — Memory deficits in chronic marijuana users. 54. MARKS, M. E. — A neuropsychological approach lo reading disability —a longitudinal study. 55. MATHESON, A. Wl. — Auditory verbal information processing in epileptic children. 56. MORGENROTH, E. D. — lnterorganizational communication (information overload responses). 57. MURPHY, H.-A quasi-experimental intervention program in a disadvantaged technical school. 58. O'CONNELL, B. M. — Sex, personality and background of illicit drug users. 59. ORCHARD, E. A. — Differential diagnosis of memory disorders in multiple sclerosis patients wilh chronic multiple sclerosis. 60. OTTREY, G. A. —Parent/child communication and early language development. 61. PARBS, H. K. — Child psychopalhology or behaviour problems. 62. PERDICES, Wi. — Shorl-term memory in multiple sclerosis. 63. PERKINS, R. H.— Work values of an aboriginal community. 64. PETR1E, H. L.- Aspecis of producing and processing fluent speech. 65. RAMSHAW, J. E. — Influence of personality and coping style on the outcome of coronary artery surgery. 66. RECHTER, L. — The transition to parenthood: An examination of marital adjustment and sex role orientation. 67. ROBERTS, C. A. —Disturbances of prosodic processing following right hemisphere lesions. 68. ROWAN, R. }. —Organizational psychology. 69. SHORES, E. A. —Posterior cerebral artery disease. 70. SIMPSON, F. L. — Discrimination and temporal ordering of information in unilateral fron­ tal or temporal lobe lesions patients. 71. SMITH, J. C —Divided attachments—an analysis of custody and access arrangements. 72. SPIVAK, R. B. — Uody image and psychosexual adjustment of enlero-slomales. 73. S'lEGER, C. M. — Family resources in delinquent, disturbed and normal family systems. 74. STOKES, D. L. — Neuropsychological traits of dyscalculia in children. 75. STOLK, Y. — Lifestyle andpersonality of older single women. 76. THOMAS, R. C. —An investigation of the altitudes towards safely of supervisory staff in a large Australian business organization. 11. WATTS, S. L. — Menopause and sexuality: Evaluation und treatment. 7S. WEARNE, G. G. — Relationship between maternal anxiety and depression, and infant development. 79. WEBER, A. M.— Writing hand/posture and cerebral lateralization. 80. WEIR, R. {...—Stress problems within divorced families. 81. WINK, P. M. — Study into validity and reliability of family adaptability and cohesion evalua­ tion scale. 82. WRIGLEY, W. J.-Adolescents' attitudes and popularity in rhe classroom. 83. ZEEHER, T. F. - Changes in personality variables and values as a function of participation in a therapeutic encounter group. MSc Theses in Progress 84. BERG, R.- Aspects of women's sexual relationships: 56 FACULTY OF ARTS

85. BROWN-GREAVES, S. J. — Personality disorders and the MMPI—An empirical approach using DSM-3. 86. CHERRY, D. "X .—An investigation of the masculinity/femininity on the MMPI and CPI. 87. D'ARCY-EVANS, A. C — Substantive dimensions of joint CPI-MMP1 "superfactors". 88. FIELD, C. D. — Memory disorder following cardiac surgery. 89. GRAHAM, K. L. — Conditions of school achievement among bright children. 90. HANLY, J. R. — The investigation of factors affecting treatment maintenance and generalization. 91. HARDY, S. L. — The use of psychology in the selection of graduates into Australian in­ dustry. 92. HENDY, J. E. — Hemi-inattention with right hemisphere lesions. 93. McCUBBERY, W. M. — Inhibition of aggression and hypnotic aptitude in intrinsic asthma. 94. MeDONALD, S. — Aspects of language affected by lesions of the right hemisphere. 95. MOGLIA, D. P. —Brain activity and behaviour in adolescents with 'minor' seizures. 96. PEAD, J. — A controlled outcome study of rational-emotive therapy for neurotic depression. 97. POLGAR, S.— Avoidance performance in candotomized rats: A model for Huntington's Disease. 98. ROSALION, R. M. — Learning and cognitive performance ofcigarette smokers compared to non-smokers. 99. THOMAS, D. R. — Cognitive changes following shunt revision in hydrocephalic children. 100. TONER, H. L. — Recognition of facial expression of emotion by normal and anxious/ depressed subjects. 101. VICKERS, M. H.— Modelling social structures in secondary schools. 102. WALSH, A. W. — Constructional apraxia as a disconnection syndrome. 103. WEIR, D. A. —Evaluation of on-the-job training provided under the National Employment Strategy for Aboriginals (NESA). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Dynamic Decision Making in Complex Environments. ARGC: Auditory Pathways and Function in Australian Mammals. ARGC: Environmental Factors in the Development of Speech and Language. ARGC: Language Development in the Young Hearing-Impaired Child and in the Hearing Child of Deaf-Mute Parents. ARGC: Context Effects in Sentence Perception. ARGC: Children's Abilities to Use Words Involving Spatial and Temporal Reference. ARGC: Memory Representation and the Reproduction of Skilled Movements. ARGC: The Development of Sequential Integration. ARGC: The Effects of Training in Social Skills and Coping with Stress on Sclf-Esteem, Locus of Control, and Recidivism in the Rehabilitation of Juvenile Offenders. ERDC: Structural Basis of Spelling Errors. ERDC: Specific Learning Disorders in Migrant Children. ERDC: Social and Personal Adjustment of Immigrant and Non-Immigrant Adolescents. Telecom: Job Satisfaction Study. Telecom: Development and Evaluation of Various Conceptual 'Network' Frameworks for Understanding Telecommunication Behaviour within Social and Business Contexts. Telecom: Field Investigation of Customer Services. Department of Community Welfare Services: Development of a Social and Economic Indicators and Resources Data Base for Victoria. Department of Community Welfare Services: Subjective Social Indicators and Determinants of Quality of Life. Department of Community Welfare Services: Family and Community Services Monitory Project. Ministry for Housing: Development of a Social and Economic Indicators and Resources Base for Victoria. Department of the Premier: Distribution of Drug Use in Victoria. University of Melbourne General Development Grant: (a) Rationalisation of Authority in State Government Departments (b) National Threats. Australian Neurological Foundation: An Investigation of Memory and Cognitive Disorders. National Multiple Sclerosis Society of Australia: A Longitudinal Study of Intellectual Function in Multiple Sclerosis. Oliver Affleck Foundation: The Melbourne Widowhood Project. RUSSIAN

INTRODUCTION Research was pursued over a range of topics in both language and literature. In literature pro­ jects concentrated on the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. In thc area of language topics in­ cluded the typology of the Slavonic languages, particularly their grammatical and phonetic properties as well as research on Slavonic languages as spoken in the Australian community. There were also projects in computer-related phonetic research and teaching methods, wilh special reference to Russian.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Synchronic typology of the modern Slavonic languages —R. Sussex. 2. Enclitic systems in the Slavonic languages—R. Sussex. 3. The Polish language in thc Australian environment —R. Sussex. 4. Problems of Applied Linguistics and the teaching of Russian and Polish —R. Sussex. 5. The Glagolitic and Cyrillic alphabets —P. V. Cubbcrley. 6. The typology of juncture in the Slav languages —P. V. Cubbcrley. 7. The superfluous man syndrome in Russian literature —J. M. Armstrong.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. ARMSTRONG, J. (trans.) —O. Comettant, In the Land of Kangaroos and Goldmines Rigby, Adelaide (1980). 2. ARMSTRONG, J. and SLONEK, R. (eds.)-Essavs to Honour Nina Christesen, A.I.P., Melbourne (1980). 3. CUBBERLEY, P. V. — The Suprasegtnental Features in Slavonic Phonetic Tvpologv. Hak- kcrl, Amsterdam (1980). Chapters of Books 4. SUSSEX, R. (ed) — 77ie Slavic Languages of Emigre Communities, Vol. I Special number of International Review of Slavic Linguistics, 5 (3-4) (1980). 5. ARMSTRONG, J. —Fiction and the Unheroic, in Essavs to Honour Nina Christesen, A.I.P., Melbourne, 8-18 (1980). 6. DOLGOPOLOVA, Z. — K Voprosu o linguistichcskom analizc tcksta, in Essavs to Honour Nina Christesen, A.LP., Melbourne, 38-49 (1980). 7. SUSSEX, R. —Are Adjectives Really Verbals?: thc adjectives as a word-class in contem­ porary standard Russian, in Essavs to Honour Nina Christesen, A. I.P., Melbourne, 116-126 (1980). 8. SUSSEX, R. —On Agreement, Affixation and Enclisis in Polish, in C. V. Chvany and R. D. Brecht (eds.), Morphosynlax in Slavic, Slavica Inc., Columbus, Ohio: 187-203 (1980). Arlicles 9. SUSSEX, R. —English palatalization and assimilation as a teaching aid for Russian. Melbourne Slavonic Studies. 13: 1-10 (1978). 10. SUSSEX, R. —Introduction to International Review of Slavic Languages, 5 (3-4): 1-7 (1980). 11. SUSSEX, R. —Phonetic interference of Australian English in Australian Polish. Inter­ national Review of Slavic Linguistics, 5 (3-4): 133-145 (1980). 12. SUSSEX, R. —The deformed "plurals" of English. Papers in Linguistics, 12(3-4): 527-534 (1979). 13. CUBBERLEY, P. V. —The relative frequency of Common Slavonic phonemes. Melbourne Slavonic Studies, 13: 23-39 (1978). 14. ARMSTRONG, J. —Dostoevsky, Dobroliubov, Injury and Insult. Melbourne Slavonic Studies, 14: 79-87 (1980). 15. DOLGOPOLOVA, Z. —Thc norms of contemporary standard Russian. Melbourne Slavonic Studies. 13: 107-113 (1978). Reports 16. SUSSEX, R. — Slavonic and East European Languages: opportunities for study in Viclorian Universities and Colleges of Advanced Education, Department of Russian, Universitv of Melbourne (1980). 17. SUSSEX, R. — Current Research into Slavonic and East European Languages and Literatures in Australian and New Zealand Universities, Department of Russian, University of Melbourne (1980). 57 58 FACULTY OF ARTS

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. DOLGOPOLOVA, Z. — The structure and humorous effects of modern anecdotes. 2. KEKS, O. — In search of the creative thought of Velemir Khlehnikov: text, structure and meaning. 3. MOLNAR, A. — Eighteenth century Russian literature with special reference lo the socio­ political ideas of Radischev. 4. SCURITELD, J. R. — Historiography and literary values in Povesi' vremennykh let and the Hcimskringla. 5. VICKERY, H. M. — The Dolgushin case and Dostoevsky's novel A Raw Youth. 6. WERCHOLA, J. - The Poetry of Andrei Voznesensky.' MA Theses in Progress 1. BEDNAREK, T. — The family theme and the love theme in Chekov's works. 8. HIRSHORN, B.— The influence of Russian literature on the Polish literature of the twen­ tieth century. SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED Thc following grant has been received: ARCiC: Comparative Phonetic Description of the Slavonic Languages. THE HORWOOD LANGUAGE CENTRE

INTRODUCTION The research interests of stall'continued to focus on two areas: self-instructional approaches to language learning, and strategics for dealing with language problems in a multilingual society with a high percentage of immigrants. One major project, thc ERDC-fundcd Ethnic Languages Project, straddled both fields, since it is an attempt to provide a self-instructional learning format for anglophone Australians wishing to acquire thc bases of one of thc major Australian community languages. The area of multilingual service delivery —previously centred on thc project to train hospital personnel in Greek —was this year treated in work on the Department of Social Security project to maximize thc effective use of existing language resources by upgrading the language competence of semi-bilingual officers from migrant backgrounds. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Self-instructional cassette programmes for acquiring basic communicative competence in five ethnic languages —T. Quinn, V. Austin, 1... Burr, P. Kelly, J. Stanley. 2. Upgrading the language competence of scmi-bilinguals: a model for the effective use of ex­ isting language resources in public service situations —T. Quinn. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. QUINN, T. J. —Language and culture teaching in Australia: a discussion paper on some of the issues, in Research Studies on Education for a Multicultural Society. Occasional Paper No. 4, Canberra, Curriculum Development Centre: 24-45 (1980). 2. QUINN, T. J. —New Directions for School Language Study, in F. Christie and J. Rothery (eds.). Varieties of Language und Language Teuching, Applied Linguistics Association of Australia, Melbourne: 59-71 (1980). Articles 3. QUINN, T. J. and DROUSIOTOU, C.— Special-purpose programmes in a community language. Auslrulian Review of Applied Linguistics, 3 (1): 63-77 (1980). 4. STANLEY, J. A.-Teaching the rhythm or English speech. Babel, 16 (I): 33-36 (1980). 5. STANLEY, J. A. — Are listening materials just for listening to? RELC Journal, 11 (I): 76-88 (1980). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ERDC: Self-instructional cassette programmes for acquiring basic communicative competence in five ethnic languages. Commonwealth Department of Education: Upgrading the language competence of semi- bilinguals: a model for the effective use of existing language resources in public service situations.

59 FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE

DEAN'S REPORT A relatively large number of research projects is being investigated in thc Faculty. These range from basic dental science to assessment of public dental health projects and involve techniques such as visual and quantitative electronmicroscopy of cells and their components to the use of computerized cephalometry for the diagnosis and prediction of normal and abnormal skull and jaw growth of children. A highlight of the academic year was the special activities week when the research work of thc final year undergraduate and higher degree students was presented before the faculty, stalf and guests. The high standard of previous years was maintained. Despite Ihc pressures on ihe Faculty much research support was continued from external bodies such as thc N.H. and M.R.C, ihc Rowden While Foundation, thc Australian Dental Research Trust and the Viclorian Dairy In­ dustry Authority.

60 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

INTRODUCTION The Department of Conservative Dentistry is a multi-disciplinary department with research activity covering a wide range of topics. The main areas of research concern bone and growth studies, evaluation of health care programmes, environmental pollution, factors influencing dental caries, aetiology of periodontal disease, pharmacology of local anaesthetic solutions and studies on fluoride. Clinical studies include development of methods of bleaching discoloured teeth. From this broad spectrum of topics, several streams can bc introduced. Attention has been given during 1980 to developing more identifiable research patterns within the Department. These encompass thc broad areas of public dental health, the biological function of oral and other tissues, and research directed to improvement of clinical therapeutic measures. It is intended that the distinct patterns of research indicated above will result in productive programmes and more efficient utilization of resources within thc Department. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Environmental adaptation of bones —E. Storey, S. Fcik. 2. Thc prediction of need for dental care by Australian adolescents: A. J. Spencer. 3. The role of foreign-trained dentists in Australian dentistry —A. J. Spencer. 4. Thc supply and distribution of dentists in Australia —A. J. Spencer. 5. Thc impact of provider reimbursement methods on the delivery of health care —A. J. Spencer. 6. Connective tissue responses to some heavy metals —G. Ellcnder. 7. Microbiology of the oral cavity—1. H. Johnson. 8. Reactions of rat periodontal tissues to experimentally induced inflammation —R. H. Ham­ mond. 9. Dental survey of the homebound and handicapped —W. A. McDougall. 10. Anticariogcnic properties of phosphoprotiens — E. Reynolds. 11. Fluoride induced bone changes in the rabbit —A. S. Malcolm. 12. Bleaching of tetracycline discoloured teeth —A. A. Vernieks. 13. Pharmacology of local anaesthetic agents —J. G. Walcrson. 14. Influence of sympathetic innervation on periodontal tissues —J. G. Walcrson. 15. Vascularity of the dental pulp —J. G. Walcrson. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. SPENCER, A. J. — Diagonal half-mouth recording of restorative and exodontic needs. Com­ mun. dent. Oral Epidemiol.. 8: 123-127 (1980). 2. SPENCER, A. J.-The estimation of need for dental care. J. Pub. Health dent., 40: 311-327 (1980). 3. SPENCER, A. J., BURT, B. A., BAERUM, Per and MYRHAUG, Ingolf.-The interpreta­ tion of trends in treatment statistics: an example from Norway. ./. Pub. Health dent., 40: 328-333 (1980). 4. WRIGHT, F. A. C. and SPENCER, A. J.-Oral studies and services utilization of 5-6 year old children of migrant parents. J. int. Ass. dent. Child., II: 13-18 (1980). 5. WRIGHT, F. A. C, LUCAS, J. O., and McMURRAY, N. E. — Denial anxiety in five-to- nine-ycar-old children. J. Pedo., 4: 99-115 (1980). Reports and Notes 1. STOREY, E. —Nulrilional disorders of children. Food & Nutrition Notes & Reviews. 36: 4 168-172, 1979. 2. CRACK, D. .1., McDOUGALL, W. A. and SPENCER, A. J. Dental needs of the handi­ capped and homebound in the Melbourne Statistical Division. Melbourne, The Royal Dental Hospilal of Melbourne and Health Commission of Victoria. 1980. xiii and 129 pp.

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Dental Science 1. *CARROLL, J. A. —.4 study of the elements of a dental school dental care delivery system. 2. *GAN, R. Sr.-A. — Partial amputation of rat caudal vertebrae. 3. *GREBNEIF, M. M. — Electrical stimulation of bone formation in the caudal vertebrae of the rat. 4. "HOLDER, T. M. — The effect of transseplal fibre surgery on relapse of maxillary incisor teeth in Ihe guinea pig. 5. "ROBERTS, G. L.-.4 rheological study of the rat tail. 6. *SNOW, M. D. — Periosteal resection in the caudal vertebrae of the rut. *Minor theses. 61 62 FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE

THESES IN PROGRESS DDSc Theses in Progress 1. HALL, R. K.—A study of factors inducing hypoplasia and hypocalcification in teeth of man and animal and associated structural changes. 2. MALCOL M. A. S. — Biophysical relationships of osteofluorilic bone. 3. WEST, V. C. — A study of dimensional changes related to orthodontic therapy. PhD Theses in Progress 4. ELLENDER, G. — Connective tissue responses to some heavy metals. 5. HAMMOND, R. H. — Reaciions of rat periodontal tissues to experimentally induced inflam­ mation. 6. JOHNSON, 1. H. — Glucanase producing organisms in denial plaque. 7. SPENCER, A. J. — Evaluation of alternative policies for the delivery of dental care lo Australian secondary school students. MDSc Theses in Progress 8. BURT, K. I. —Bone changes associated with vascular disturbance. 9. CAMPBELL, J. E. —A study of the perianal musculature. 10. CLAUSEN, G. —Studies of the effects of nickel on connective tissue. 11. COVENEY, A. C— A study of the effects of static electricity and direct electrical current on crania! femoral and vertebral bones of the rat. 12. CRACK, D. J. — Dental health status and treatment of the handicapped and homebound. 13. DONOVAN, J. — Lead induced calcification of the dental pulp. 14. EBERHARDT, N. H. — Transplanted rat caudal vertebrae as pharmacological models. 15. FITZ-WALTER, P. B. — 77?e root canal morphology of mandibular premolars. 16. GA1RNS, S. — The histological response after removal of ihe interproximal contact. I. Hard diet. II. Soft diet. 17. HOFMAN, S. — Effective pressure on bone. 18. LUCAS, J. O.— Assessment of children's denial anxiety. 19. LUDDIN, R. — Studies on bonding strength and shear failures of metal-ceramic bond. 20. MeDONALD, A. — 77;e effects of forces on the growth of rat nasal septum. 21. NERVO, G. i. — Some observations of thermal pulp testing. 22. SHEARER, M. W. — A stereophotograrnmetric analysis of facial soft tissues. 23. SHIELD, S. J. — 77;e cranial base: an experimental mechanism of cleft palate production in mice. 24. TAYLOR, B. E. — A study ofthe relationship of skin and bone growth of the tail of the rat. 25. VERCO, P. J. W. — Changes following denervation of rat oral mucosa. 26. VON THOMANN, i.—Stereophotogrammelry applied to facial asymmetry. 27. WIDMER, R. P. —Studies in deciduous pulp therapy. 28. YEADON, M.— Distribution of sympathetic innervation from the superior cervical ganglion. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: NH & MRC: Investigations in the delivery of dental care to Australian secondary school students —Applied Health Sciences Fellowship, Mr. A. J. Spencer. Victorian Dairy Industry Authority: Milk and dental caries —Professor Storey. Estate of Sir A. E. Rowden White: Support for research — Professor Storey. Australian Dental Research and Education Trust: Ultrastructural studies of the reaction of soft and hard connective tissues to dental amalgam —Mr. G. Ellender. DENTAL MEDICINE AND SURGERY

INTRODUCTION Research in thc Department for 1980 can bc conveniently divided into basic and clinical research. Basic research has continued in: (1) aspects ol" the transplantation and storage ol" the teeth of mice with particular reference to the relative importance of the minor histocompatibility antigens in rejection; (2) the biological activities and sue of synthesis of a polypeptide from salivary glands of mice, epidermal growth factor, which has been shown amongst other things to have a profound influence on thc growth characteristics of kcratiniscd epithelium particularly keralinised mucosa; and (3) the ultrastructural and histochemical aspects of the extracellular matrices of developing teeth has given a new insight into mineralisation processes and by using ion beam thinning of dental hard tissues new ultrastructural features of enamel have been described. The clinical research has covered a number of fields but has been mainly concentrated on oral mucosal diseases especially those induced by drugs and those due to neoplastic disease. In the lat­ ter instance a retrospective and prospective study of the epidemiology of oral cancer is providing information not previously available, especially related to predisposing factors and the benefits of early detection. The Oro-Facial Pain Clinic established some years ago in thc department con­ tinued lo provide a fruitful field for an investigation into the various facets of chronic pain and discomfort conditions of the mouth and associated structures.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Thc role of extracellular matrices in dental organogenesis —11. J. Orams. 2. Ultrastructural studies of dental hard tissues using ion beam thinning — II. J. Orams. 3. The development of chemically induced neoplastic disease of thc oral mucosa—N. E. Slcidler, P. C. Reade. 4. A technical and immunological study into the storage and transplantation of teeth —A. P. Barrett, P. C. Reade. 5. The regulatory effect during growth and development of epidermal growth factor —N. E. Steidler, P. C. Reade. 6. Thc brush tail possum Trichosurus vulpecula in experimental oral embryology—N. E. Steidler. 7. Studies on infective endocarditis —A. J. Chalk, P. C. Reade. 8. The pathogenesis and histopathology of oral dermatoses — K. D. Hay, P. C. Rcadc. 9. Thc effects of tobacco products on human and animal oral mucosa— P. C. Reade, B. G. Rad­ den. 10. Oral carcinoma as it occurs in Victoria—B. G. Radden, P. C. Reade, A. M. Rich. 11. Oro-Facial pain and dental phobia —.1. A. Gcrschman, P. C. Reade. 12. Salivary IgA levels in various oral conditions—P. C. Reade.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapters uf Bouks 1. GERSCHMAN, J. A., READE, P. C, BURROWS, G. D. and WRIGHT, J. L.-Thc Management of Chronic Oro-Facial Pain at a Multidisciplinary Pain Clinic, in Problems in Pain: Proceedings of Ihe first Australia-New Zealand Conference on Pain, eds. C. Peck and M. Wallace, Pergamon Press, Sydney: 166-172 (1980). 2. WRIGHT, J. L., GERSCHMAN, J. A., READE, P. C. and BURROWS, G. D.-Social Aspects of Chronic Oro-Facial Pain, in Problems in Pain: Proceedings of the Pirsl Australia- New Zealand Conference on Pain, eds. C. Peck and M. Wallace, Pergamon Press, Sydnev: 173-178 (1980). Articles 3. BASTIAAN, R. J. —Effects of tobacco smoking on periodontal tissues. J. West. Soc. Perio- dont.. 27: 120-125 (1980). 4. BASTIAAN, R. J. and READE, P. C.-The Histopathological Features which follow Repeated Applications of Tobacco Tar to Rat Lip Mucosa. OS OM OP. 49 (5): 435-440 (1980). 5. FOWLER, G. G., READE, P. C. and RADDEN, 11. G.-Intra-Oral Cancer in Victoria. Med. J. Aust., 2 (1): 20-22 (1980). 6. ORAMS, H. J., PHAKEY, P. P., RACHINGER, W. A. and ZYBERT, J. J.-Ultrastruc­ tural changes in the translucent and dark zones of early enamel caries. J. Oral Path., 9: 54-61 (1980). 7. PALAMARA, J. J., PHAKEY, P. P., RACHINGER, W. A. and ORAMS, H. J. - Electron microscopy of surface enamel of human teeth. Arch. Oral Biol., 25: 715-725 (1980). 8. PRIME, S. S.. and READE, P. C. — Xenografts of Recombine Bovine Odontogenic Tissues and Cultured Cells to Hypothymic Mice. Transplantation. 30 (2): 149-152 (1980). 63 64 FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE

9. PRIME, S. S., and READE, P. C. -Studies on Thc Separation and Culture ol" Cell Popula­ tions from Bovine Molar Tooth Germs. Arch. Oral Bio!, 25: 189-193 (1980). 10. STEIDLER, N. E., COOK, R. M. and READE, P. C.-The Incidence and Management of Major Middle Third Facial Fractures at Thc Royal Melbourne Hospital: A Retrospective Studv. Int. J. Oral Surg., 9: 92-98 (1980). 11. STEIDLER, N. E., COOK, R. M. and READE, P. C. - Residual Complications in Patients with Major Middle Third Facial Fractures. Int. J. Oral Surg., 9: 259-266 (1980). 12. STEIDLER, N. E. and READE, P. C.-Histomorphological effects of epidermal growth factor on skin and oral mucosa in neonatal mice. Arch. Oral Bio!, 25 (1): 37-43 (1980). 13. STEIDLER, N. E. and READE, P. C. - Histological effects of epidermal growth factor on eyelids and cornea in neonatal mice. Ophthalmic Res., 12 (3): 184-191 (1980). 14. STEIDLER, N. E. and READE, P. C. — An immunohistochcmical study of sccretagogue- induccd secretion of epidermal growth factor in the submandibular salivary glands of mice. Aust. J. lixp. Bio! Med. Sci., 58 (3): 241-247 (1980). 15. ZYBERT, J. J., RACHINGER, W. A., PHAKEY, P. P. and ORAMS, II. .1.-Theoretical determination of composite material clastic compliances. Composites., July: 175-180(1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Mas ter of Dental Science 1. *HENNET, K. R. — The Range of Normality and ihe Effects of Tobacco Smoking on Salivary Immuno Globulin A Levels in Man. 2. HAY, K. D. — Drug-induced Disorders of the Oral Mucosa. 3. "WIESENFEI.D, D. — An investigation of dental injections. *Minor theses. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BARRETT", A. P. — The Immunobiology of Toolh Transplantation. 2. CHALK, A. J. —,4 study of the kinetics and prevention of bactcraemias induced by oral surgery procedures. 3. GERSCHMAN, .1. A. — An investigation of oro-facial pain and phobia. 4. STEIDLER, N. E.— The developmental effects of epidermal growth factor. MDSc 'Theses in Progress 5. "CUKTTN, J. W.-.4 Study of Oral Lymphomas. 6. *HEGGIE, A. A. — A light and electronmicroscopic study of human oral mucosa. 7. *FlEWSON, D. R. — Temporomandibular Joint Pain Dysfunction Syndrome. 8. TACT, M. V. —An histological evaluation of lichen planus. 9. "McKELLAR, G. VI.— An evaluation of surgery for orthodontic purposes. 10. "O'BRIEN, M. D. — Complications of middle third fractures. 11. *R1CH, A. M. — A study of intra-oral cancer in Victoria. 12. "STORY, R. D.—An evaluation of the use of artificial saliva in xerostomia. "Minor theses. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Thc NH & MRC of Australia: Epidermal Growth Factor —Its Control and Effect on Mucosa. Ultrastructure of Mineralizing Tissues particularly Dental Enamel. Thc Rowden While Foundation. DENTAL PROSTHETICS

INTRODUCTION Materials research included work on the flow and setting of impression materials and root canai sealants, amalgam hardness at different temperatures, gold substitute alloys, tissue reactions to paper fibres from endodontic points, and characteristics of amalgamators. Biological research included studies lhat established that the longue showed less ageing than oiher muscles, and that thc fluids of thc periodontium are significant in the tooth support system. Work is continuing on the nature and orientation of the bone struts of the tooth ridge, the resistance of thc nasal tract lo an air flow in both cleft palale and non-clcfl subjects, the correla­ tion of muscle activity, jaw movement, oral forces and tooth contact in bruxist and normal sub­ jects, and the development of an artificial saliva. Computer research has involved the development of a programme for matching ante- and posl-morlcm dental records for use in identification procedures following a mass disaster. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Properties of the periodontium —W. J. Ralph. 2. Bruxism and temporomandibular joint dysfunction —K. D. B. Faulkner. 3. Studies in dental materials —.1. K. Harcourt. 4. Clcfl palate and speech —C. G. Dennis. 5. Reaction of periapical tissues to endodontic paper points —B. I.. Stewart and R. F.dwards. 6. Development of an artificial saliva—B. Darvell. 7. Performance evaluation of amalgamators—B. Darvell. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. DARVLLL, B. W.-A novel conductivity probe design. Lab. Practice, 29 (1): 31 (1980). 2. DARVLLL, B. W. —A performance criterion for amalgamators, capsules, pestles and alloys. Austral, dent. J.. 25 (3): 146-147 (1980). 3. DARVELL, B. W. — Efficiency of mechanical trituration of amalgam I. Optimum capsule length. Austral, dent. J., 25 (6): 325-332 (1980). 4. JACKSON, R. A. and RALPH, W. J. —Continuing changes in the contour of the maxillary residual alveolar ridge. ./. oral Rehabil.. 7: 245-248 (1980). 5. RALPH, W. J.—The in vitro rupture of human periodontal ligament. J. Biomechanics, 13: 369-373 (1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Dental Science I. STEWART, B. L. — Part 1: Stresses in a mandibular partial denture model. Part 2: Retentive force and wear of precision attachments. THESES IN PROGRESS DDSc Theses in Progress 1. JOHNSON, K.-Post-extraction healing. 2. PRICE, A. S. —Factors involved in geriodontics. MDSc Theses in Progress 3. CANTILl.ON, D.—A survev of secondary school children from selected suburbs with histories of stale dental care as primarv children. 4. CVETKOVIC, H.-Bruxism.

65 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

DEAN'S REPORT As in ihc past, much of ihc research in ihc Faculty ol' Economics and Commerce is carried out by individual stall' members making little demand for additional resources except in terms of library materials and clerical services, ll is likely lhat this tradilional type of research activity will continue to bc important, especially in theoretical research. However, it is increasingly common, especially in empirical areas, lo find that research in ihc social sciences and in business studies is carried out by groups of research workers and involves substantial amounts of dala gathering and processing. The trend towards more costly types of research is clearly reflected in thc separate research reports of the departments of lhe Faculty. These developments would of course be impossible without ihc assistance of grams from funding authorities outside the University as well as from ihc University's own research funds. Thc Faculty is gratified by the number and size of tho grants made available to it for research. While these grants rarely cover the full costs of research activity, so that the Faculty's resources, particularly in respect of accommodation and support services, have been and are likely to be hard pressed, thc Faculty attaches a high priority to thc development of research, including larger-scale projects, in all its departments. New procedures for co-ordinating and developing research activities, including post graduate research, arc under consideration hy the Faculty, and it is expected that under ihcse procedures the experience of specialist research groups, such as thc Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research and the IMPACT Centre, will be more effectively utilized by other departments.

66 ACCOUNTING

INTRODUCTION The range of research topics undertaken is indicative of the diverse interests of members of thc Department. In 1980 research activity was mainly in the fields of financial and management ac­ counting, business finance and electronic data processing. In the accounting area research was undertaken on accounting education, accounting for the effect of changing prices and financial reporting problems. In the business finance area research was undertaken on various aspecis of the capital and money markets and the management of working capital while in thc electronic data processing area research was undertaken in thc application of computing facilities in local government. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Working capital management — F. K. Wright. 2. Computer program security: control of the use of, and changes lo, computer programs — P. B. Seddon. 3. The effect on current cost profits of thc introduction of a relative price change svstem — C. J. Warrell. 4. The nature of professional development and continuing education in ihc accounting profes­ sion-R. C. Clift. 5. Reporting to employees by Australian corporations —R. C. Clift. 6. Thc supply of equity share capital in Australia—R. E. G. Nicol. 7. Long-term debt financing in Australia—R. E. G. Nicol. 8. Short-term financing in Australia, with emphasis on the commercial bill and promissory note markets —R. E. G. Nicol. 9. Statements of value added — G. J. Harris. 10. An investigation into computing problems in local government authorities —N. Roberts. 11. An Australian study of the liquidity-hedging hypothesis of ihc term structure of interest rales— L. R. McGinley. 12. Bankruptcy costs and ihe valuation of the firm —L. R. McGinley. 13. Lease evaluation with particular reference lo leveraged leases —G. H. Burrows. 14. The role of local rates in the taxation system — G. H. Burrows. PUBLISHED WORK Rook 1. CLI1-T, R. C —Corporate Reporting in Australia, Prentice Hall Australia, Sydney (1980). Chapters of Books 2. WARRELL, C. J.—The Australian Proposals on Current Cost Accounting, in Readings in Accounting, 3rd cd., ed. I. Monro, VCTA Publishing, Melbourne, (26): 164-171 (1980). *3. WARRELL, C. J. — Realisation and Valuation, in Readings in Accounting. 3rd ed., ed. 1. Monro, VCTA Publishing, Melbourne (28): 177-181 (1980). *4. BURROWS, G. H. —Prepaid Expenses and Prepaid Revenue, in Readings in Accounting, 3rd ed., ed. I. Monro, VCTA Publishing, Melbourne (6): 30-34 (1980). *5. CLIFT, R. C. — Sources of Finance for different Types of Business Organization, in Readings in Accounting, 3rd. ed., cd. I. Munro. VCTA Publishing. Melbourne (16): 103-106 (1980). *6. HARRIS, G. J. —Company Accounting, in Readings in Accounting, 3rd cd., ed. I. Monro, VCTA Publishing, Melbourne (29): 182-193 (1980). *7. HARRIS, G. J.-Accounting for Intercompany Investments, in Readings in Accounting, 3rd cd., ed. 1. Monro, VCTA Publishing, Melbourne (30): 194-204 (1980). "Items 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 represent thc republication of chapters which appeared in the previous edition of this book of readings. The chapters were revised before republication. Articles 8. WRIGHT, F. K — Can We Optimize Cash Management? The Australian Accountant, 50: 157,165 (April. 1980) 9. MIDDLETON. K. A. —A Critical Look at Break-Even Analysis. 'The Australian Accoun­ tant, 50: 264-268 (May, 1980). 10. HARRIS, G. J.—Corporate Donations to Institutions —A Survev of Praciice and Disclosure. The Chartered Secretary, 32: 97-101 (April-June, 1980). 11. BURROW'S, G. H. —Underlying Problems in Lease Evaluation. Occasional Paper No. 34, School of Management Deakin University, pp. 15 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS MCom Theses in Progress 1. ANDERSON, R. H.— An Investigation into ihe Usefulness to Investors of Accounting In­ formation disclosed in Annual Financial Statements. 67 68 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

2. GREEN, D. F. W. — An Evaluation of Leasing as un Alternative to owning assets, with special reference to Plant, Equipment and Motor Vehicles, for A ustralian Public Companies. 3. HILTON, I. H.—An Investigation into Transfer Price Policies used by Finns in Industry. 4. iVlONAGH AN, P. J.— The Financial Effects of the Wool Price Decline 1969-1972. 5. ROBERTS. N.— An Evaluation of Management Information Systems in use in Viclorian Local Government with special reference to the use of Computers for the Provision of Deci­ sion and Control Oriented Information. 6. TREACY, J. R. — An Examination of ihe use made of Market Information by Participants in the Unofficial Sector of the Short-Term Money Market. ECONOMIC HISTORY

INTRODUCTION Research centred on the history of Australian science and technology through the commis­ sioned history of CSIRO being prepared by Professor C. B. Schedvin and Dr K. Trace (thc latter of Monash University). A new project on thc historical interaction between economy and household structure was initiated by Professor Schedvin. Thc Asian business research programme under Dr A. G. Thompson, which has been supported by a General Development Grant, con­ tinued. The programme is concerned to explore the recent history of the operation of Australian firms in Asia. Dr J. P. Fogarty undertook a special studies programme in Argentina during the year continuing his work on the comparative economic development of Australia and Argentina. Dr Becver's pioneering study of popular as distinct from middle class altitudes to Australia in the mid-nineteenth century was nearing completion.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A history of CSIRO 1926-1970-C. B. Schedvin (with K. Trace). 2. Household and economy in Australia —C. B Schedvin (assisted by J. Tyers). 3. British popular attitudes towards Australia 1830-1880 —their origin and influence —E. A. Beever. 4. Letters of working class migrants to Australia 1845-1855 —E. A. Beever. 5. The operational experience of Australia joint ventures in South-East Asia —A. G. T hompson (assisted by R. Muir). 6. Nineteenth-century regions of recent settlement— J. P. Fogarty. 7. Economic development in Argentina under Ihe radical governments 1916-1930 — J. P. Fogarty. 8. American and European business history since 1850 —P. L. Robertson. 9. The views of the classical economists on slate intervention — P. L. Robertson. 10. The modernisation of Scottish universities in the nineteenth century—P. L. Robertson. 11. The eight hour day campaign in nineteenth-century Victoria —M. J. Kennedy. 12. The impact of corruption on economic development in Thailand and Indonesia —M. J. Ken­ nedy. 13. European and Chinese use of opiates in nineteenth-century Australia — M. J. Kennedy. 14. Agricultural colonisation and agrarian conditions in the Punjab —C. I. Ali. 15. Urban history of Lahore —C. I. Ali.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. DUNCAN, T\ —La prensa polilica: Sud-America, 1884-1892, in Gustaro Ferrari y Ezequicl Gallo, La Argentina del Ocherla at cenlenario. Editorial Sudamericana, Bs." As.: 761-784 (1980). Article 2. KENNEDY, M. J.-Nuclear Weapons: ihe new proliferation. Social Alternatives. I (6/7): 124-129 (1980).

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ALFORD, K. A.-The labouring role of Australian women 1788-1850. 2. ALI, W.-Rural credit in Bengal 1900-1947. 3. DUNCAN, W. T. — Government bv Audacity: politics and the Argentine economy, 1885-1892. 4. FRANCIS, B. — The Kauri Timber Company in ihe Pacific Islands. 5. JAMIESON, J. G. — The manager process and relations of Japanese companies operating in Indonesia and Australia. 6. KENNEDY, M. i. — The role and significance of horses and bullocks in the economic development of Australia 1788-1880. 7. SI AR, S. — 77i

11. COX, M. C. B.- The unemployment issue in Australia 1890-1940. 12. HOWARD, M. .].-Unemployment in Victoria be/ore 1890. 13. LEWIS, K. N. -Structural change in women's employment 1939-1977 —Geelong. 14. MUIR, R. S. — Comparative analysis of work force characteristics on Ford assembly plants in the Philippines and Taiwan. 15. VENN, M. A. — Railway extension in Victoria under Thomas Higinboiham. ECONOMIC RESEARCH

IMPACT PROJECT BASIC RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT INTRODUCTION During 1980 ihc group completed ihe development of ihc SNAPSHOT Model, look the ORANI Model through a second cycle of development (lo be reported in a forthcoming monograph), participated in work on interfacing the MACRO and ORANI models, and continued developmental work on the economic-demographic labour supply model, BACHUROO. Il­ lustrative applications of thc use of the models reported in 1980 included, inter alia, ihc following: (i) impact on thc Australian economy of changing world energy prices; (ii) impact on employment of changes in tariffs and in standard working hours; (iii) economy-wide consequences of foreseeable technical changes over the next decade; (iv) effects on the structure of thc Australian economy of changes in Australia's cxiernal trading environment. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Applied general equilibrium analysis of the Australian economy —A. A. L. Powell. B. R. Parmenter, D. P. Vincent, D. Sams. 2. Demographic structure and labour supply —A. A. L. Powell, D. Sams, A. Tulpulc, P. Williams. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. POWELL, A. A. L., TULPUI.E, A., and EILMER, R. J.-Commodity Specific Subsidies, Demand Patterns and thc Incentive to Work, in Housing Economics: Papers prepared for the National Housing Conference 1978, Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra 296-324 (1980). 2. VINCENT, D. P.. DIXON, P. B., PARMENTER, B. R., and SAMS, D. C-Impact of Changes in Energy Costs on the Rural Sector of thc Australian Economy, in K. M. W. Howes and R. A. Rummery (eds.), Energy in Agriculture, CSIRO, 29-39 (1980). Articles 3. POWELL, A. A. 1.. —Employment Prospects for Keynes' Grandchildren: Some Popular Fallacies. Aust. Bull. Labour,'6: 84-101 (1980). 4. VINCENT, D. P., DIXON, P. B., and POWELL, A. A. L.-Thc Estimation ofthe Supply Response in Australian Agriculture: thc CRESH-CRETH System. Internal'! Econ. Rev., 21: 221-242(1980). 5. POWELL, A. A. L. —The Theory of Commodity Demand and Labour Supply with an En­ dogenous Marginal Wage Rate. Recherches Economiques de Louvain, 45: 215-239 (1979). 6. DIXON, P. B., VINCENT, D. P., and POWELL, A. A. L.-Modelling the Economy-Wide Implications of Technical Change: Response to Criticism of thc Approach Adopted bv the IMPACT Project. Search, II: 270-275 (1980). 7. DIXON, P. B., and VINCENT, D. P.-Sonic Economic Implications of Technical Change in Australia lo 1990-91: An Illustrative Application of the SNAPSHOT Model. Econ. Record. 56: 347-361 (1980). 8. VTNCEN I , D. P., and RYLAND, G. J. —Adjustment Pressures on ihe Agricuimrai becior of an Open Economy: T he Auslralian Situation. International Association of Agricultural Economists Occasional Papers, 2 (1980). THESIS IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. TULPULE, A. - The Supply of Hours Worked in Australia: An Empirical Study. SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED The following grant has been received: Commonwealth Government: IMPACT Project support.

71 72 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

ECONOMICS INTRODUCTION In 1980 the research activiiies of ihc Department of Economics were extensive and diverse, and spanned Ihc range of economic theory, applied economics, econometrics and industrial rela­ tions. The major projects undertaken in the Industrial Economics Programme under the direction of Professor L. R. Webb made substantial progress towards publication and were assisted by an Emergency Research Grant. An ARGC grant supported ihc continued work of Dr J. P. Nieuwenhuysen on the economics of thc accounting, medical and legal professions. A continua­ tion of an ARGC grant enabled further research to be underlaken in thc international trade in agricultural commodities. Thc Australian Wool Corporation supported a new project on Ihc influence of weather on wool production. Both these agricultural projects have been underlaken jointly by the Department of Economics and ihc Institute for Applied Economic and Social Research. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Financial requirements of Australian industry—R. II. Allan. 2. Australian money markets — R. II. Allan. 3. Thc economics of cricket —R. H. Allan. 4. John Locke's system of political economy —A. Aspromourgos. 5. Leading indicators of Australian economic fluctuations since 1950— E. A. Boehm. 6. Australia's inflation since thc Second World War: causes and effects — E. A. Boehm. • 7. Problems of wage determination in Australia —E. A. Boehm. 8. Unions as employers: a sludy of employment in Australian white collar unions — L. G. Cupper. 9. An analysis of sclf-inanagemenl in Australian employee owned/employee managed firms — L. G. Cupper. 10. Development of Keynes' thought from the Treatise to Ihe General Theory— R. J. Dixon. 11. Two-sector planning models—R. J. Dixon. 12. Relationship between uncertainly and power—R. J. Dixon. 13. Stock-adjustment approach lo savings behaviour—R. .1. Dixon. 14. Thc unification of union peak councils —G. D. Griffin. 15. Thc effects of technological change on employment and industrial relations in thc banking and insurance industries —G. D. Griffin. 16. Thc relationship between personal characteristics and industrial conflict —G. D. Griffin. 17. The economics of restrictive trade practices —A. W. Guniher. 18. Government policy towards foreign investment — A. W. Guniher. 19. The costs and benefits of importing technology —A. W. dumber. 20. Income distribution, poverty and the relationship between personal taxation and means testing—R. .1. A. Harper. 21. The tobacco industry and anli-smoking campaigns —A. Y. K. Hooi. 22. A comparative analysis of ihe gold standard 1890-1914 and Brclton Woods 1945-1973- J. I lorne. 23. Optimal exchange rale policy —J. Home. 24. The Australian devaluation 1976: a case study —J. Home. 25. Assessment methods for testing in economics—R. S. Jones. 26. Capital utilization in manufacturing industry with specific reference lo shifi working in Ihc U.K., U.S.A., Germany and Australia —A. Kan. 27. The history and development of Australian price indices —A. Kan 28. Technological change and the distribution of income —A. Kan. 29. Thc determination of wages and employment under various institutional arrangements — I. M. McDonald. 30. The macroeconomic implications of market power —I. M. McDonald. 31. An empirical investigation of ihc effects of monetary policy and unemployment benefits on unemployment — I. M. McDonald, J. Home. 32. Market theoretical frameworks —N. Moldofsky. 33. Macroeconomic management — N. Moldofsky. 34. Subjective aspecis of economics and their implications for laissez-faire economics — N. Moldofsky. 35. Wage indexation in Australia —J. P. Nieuwenhuysen. 36. The economic consequences of certain professions —J. P. Nieuwenhuysen, M. A. Williams- Wynn. 37. Supply and demand in ihe accountancy profession-J. P. Nieuwenhuysen, M. A. Williams- Wynn. 38. Labour market adjustment in the medical and legal professions —.1. P. Nieuwenhuysen, M. A. Willianis-Wynn. ECONOMICS 73

39. Trade practices legislation in relation lo mergers, concentration and economic perfor­ mance—N. R. Norman. 40. Theory of economic regulation —N. R. Norman. 41. Theory of lax evasion and avoidance —N. R. Norman. 42. Resources boom, exchange rates and economic consequences —N. R. Norman. 43. Economic analysis of tariffs and trade policy—N. R. Norman. 44. The effect of government policies on the consumption-saving decision— S. Ouliaris. 45. Household saving and the rale of interest —S. Ouliaris. 46. Japan-Korea trade deficit; a structural analysis utilizing Japan-Korea combined input-output tables-U.-S. K. Park. 47. Australian resource developments and foreign participation —U.-S. K. Park. 48. Economic relationships between Britain and Australia —J. O. N. Perkins. 49. The use of macroeconomic policy to stop stagflation —J. O. N. Perkins. 50. A basic text on macro-economics —J. O. N. Perkins, R. S. Jones. 51. Price formation in the stamp market —J. E. Price. 52. Balance of payments theory and the establishment of an Australian foreign exchange market —J. H. Reeves. 53. Analysis of international trade in agricultural commodities —R. L. Smith. 54. Relationship between weather conditions and the quantity and quality of wool produced in Australia—R. L. Smith. 55. Thc monetary proposals of J. F. Darling —J. E. Sullivan. 56. U.K.-Australian financial relationships —J. E. Sullivan. 57. Australian financial structure and development —J. E. Sullivan, J. Home. 58. Editorial preparation of Industrial Economics: Australian Studies— L. R. Webb, R. H. Allan. 59. Investment decision-making procedures in Australian firms— L. R. Webb, R. H. Allan, S. Kasch. 60. Thc place of Industry and Trade in the economic analysis of Alfred Marshall —P. L. Williams. 61. Measuring thc efficiency of non-profit organisations —P. I.. Williams. 62. The use of survey data in consumption analysis—R. A. Williams.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. HOCKING, R. D. (with FORSYTH, P. J.)-Economic EJjiciencv and the Regulation of Air Transport, CEDA, Melbourne, 27 pp (1980). 2. NIEUWENHUYSEN, J. P.-Aboriginal Land Rights and Industry, CEDA, Melbourne, 32 PP(1980). 3. NORMAN, N. R. (wilh DORFMAN, R. P.) —Prices and Markets in Australia: Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall, Sydney, x-t 238 (1980). 4. PARK, U.-S. K. — Ncw Trade Policies of China and Countermeasures by Korea, Korea In­ ternational Economics Institute, Seoul, 231 pp (1980). Chapters of Books 5. CUPPER, L. G. —Self-Management: The Dynavac Experience, in Democracy at the Workpluce, cd. R. D. Lansbury, Longman-Cheshire, Melbourne: 83-103 (1980). 6. CUPPER, L. G. —Legalism in the Australian Conciliation and Arbitration Commission: The Gradual Transition, in Australian Labour Relations Readings, 3rd ed., eds. G. W. Ford, J. M. Hearn, and R. D. Lansbury, Sun Books, Melbourne: 409-441 (1980). 7. CUPPER, L. G. (with HEARN, J. M.)-Australian Unions Involvement in 'Non-Industrial' Issues: The Newport Dispute 1971-1978, in Australian Labour Relations Readings, 3rd ed., eds. G. W. Ford, J. M. Hearn and R. D. Lansbury, Sun Books, Melbourne: 50-77 (1980). 8. DIXON, R. J. — Economic Change in Papua New Guinea, in The Economy in Operation: 4, ed. J. Brown (et al.), V.C.T.A. Publishing, Melbourne: 137-141 (1980). 9. NORMAN, N. R. — Implications from the Australian Experience, in Current Innovation, ed. Bengt-Arne Vedin, Almquist & Wiksell, Stockholm: 21-30 (1980). 10. PERKINS, J. O. N. —Finding thc Right Mix: I he Domestic Policy Problem, in Managing the Exchange Rate (Current Issues in Management scries) Sydney Universitv Press, Sydney: 62-68 (1980). 11. PERKINS, J. O. N. —Changing Economic Relations, in Australia and Britain: Studies in a Changing Relationship, eds. A. F. Madden and W. H. Morris-Jones, Sydney University Press, Sydney: 180-191 (1980). 12. WILLIAMS, R. A. —Australian Household Saving and Consumption in the Seventies: An Empirical Overview, in Conference in Applied Economic Research, 1979, ed. W. E. Norton, Reserve Bank of Australia, Sydney: 130-166 (1980). 74 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

13. WILLIAMS, R. A. (wilh DEFRIS, L. V.)-Ausiralian Inflationary Expectations and Their Influence on Consumption and Saving, in Business Cvcle Analysis, ed. W. H. Strigcl, Gower Publishing Company, Famborough: 359-383 (1980).' Articles 14. CUPPER, L. G. - Unions and Youth: A Step in the Right Direction. J. of Ind. Relations, 22: 36-53 (1980). 15. CUPPER, L. Ci. —Public Funded Trade Union Education: The Australian Experience. Ind. Relations Jnl., II: 57-68 (1980). 16. CUPPER, L. G. —Recent Developments in Australian Trade Union Education. Labour Studies ./.. 5: 42-61 (1980). 17. CUPPER, L. G. — Cross-Currents in Australian Trade Unionism. N.Z. J. of Ind. Relations, 5: 13-27 (1980). 18. CUPPER, L. G. and HEARN, J. M. - Australian Trade Unions: Some Issues of the 1980's. J. of Economics for Schools, 21: 9-20 (1980). 19. DIXON, R. J.-Hybrid Corn Revisited. Econometrica, 48: 1451-1461 (1980). 20. GRIFFIN, G. D. (with HINCE, K. W.)-Co-ordination and Public Sector Industrial Rela­ tions. Aust. Eco. Review, 4lh Quarter: 57-60 (1979). 21. HOCKING, R. D. — Trade in Motor Cars between the Major European Producers. Eco. J., 90: 504-519 (1980). 22. HOCKING, R. D. (with FORSYTH, P. J.) — Property Rights and Efficiency in a Regulated Environment: The Case of Australian Airlines. Eco. Record, 56: 182-185 (1980). 23. MeDONALD, 1. M. —On the Comparison of the Stability Implications of Marshallian and Walrasian Adjustment Schemes: Note. American Eco. Review, 70: 829-833 (1980). 24. NIEUWENHUYSEN, J. P. and WILLIAMS-WYNN, M. A.-Conveyancing: The Pitfalls of Monopoly Regulation Pricing. Aust. Eco. Review, 3rd Quarter: 29-35 (1980). 25. NORMAN, N. R. and GILCHRIST, R. R.-Thc Shorter Week-An Overview. Manage­ ment Review, 5: 2-5 (1980). 26. NORMAN, N. R. —Should Industry Fear Resource Development? The Gregory Thesis and its Implications Reviewed. A.l.D.A. Bulletin, Sept.: 2-5 (1980). 27. NORMAN, N. R. —The Australian Economy in 1981. Management Review, Nov./Dec: 2-5 (1980) 28. PARK, U.-S. K. —Studies of the Disaggregated Australian Export Functions. J. Eco. Development, 5: 91-115 (1980). 29. PARK, U.-S. K. —Export Competition Between and Comparative Advantages of Newly In­ dustrializing Countries. International Management, I: (1980). 30. PERKINS, J. O. N. — Using the Macroeconomic Mix to Stop Stagflation. J. Eco. Studies, 7: 28-50 (1980). 31. SMITH, R. L. (with NIALL, D. J. and SMITH, A. W.)-The International Wheat Market Since 1960. Rural Marketing and Policy, 10: 5-9 (1980). 32. WILLIAMS, R. A.— Structural Change and Private Consumption: Evidence from thc 1974-75 Household Expenditure Survey. Eco. Record, 56: 54-68 (1980). 33. WILLIAMS, R. A. and OULIARIS, S. - Inflation, Unemployment and the Pattern of Non­ durable Consumption. Aust. Eco. Review, 51: 24-28 (1980). Technical Report 34. NORMAN, N. R. — Small Business and Ihe Trade Practices Act. (Trading Practices Con­ sultative Committee) A.G.P.S., Canberra (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Commerce 1. ASPROMOURGOS, A. —John Locke's system oj political economy. 2. McPHEE, J. M. — Industrial relations in ihe Australian pulp and paper industry 1947/8 to 1974/5. 3. RAWLINSON, M. J. — Labour turnover in the technician and equivalent trades ofthe Royal Australian Air Force: an economic analysis. 4. ROBERTS, J. H. — A comparative study of short term forecasting techniques used to plan a lelephone network. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BUTLER, G. J.— Demand for established dwellings, new dwellings and dwelling im­ provements—an economic measurement and analysis of the housing adjustment process. 2. DOBSON, W. T. — The participation of Australian employer organizations in economic structural change and technological development. i i

ECONOMICS 75

3. GRIFFIN, G. D.- White collar unionism in Australia: the growth of militancy. 4. McGAVIN, P. A. — A history of the economic policies of the Whitlam government: December 1972-November 1975. 5. MAHMOOD, M.— Jute and synthetics: a study of technical change and trade in the jute market. 6. PITMAN, D. B. H.— The concept of'work value' in Australian compulsory arbitration. 7. SAVAGE, B. A. — The provision of transport services in Australia —the interaction of public and private enterprise. 8. SCHUYERS, G. P.— An analysis of Australian energy resources. 9. STRICKER, P.—Analysis of flow processes in the Australian labour market. 10. TULPULE, A. H. — Factors affecting the supply of labour. MCom Theses in Progress 11. ALDRED, K. J. — Scrutiny of public expenditure bv the Federal Parliament. 12. ARMSTRONG, L. A. - Industrial relations in the Australian Oil Industry 1969-1979. 13. BEVAN, M. — Case study of a union wage policy —an enquiry into the influence of trade union militancy on relative wages. 14. BYRNES, D. H. — The commercial bill market in Australia. 15. ENSLEY, R. G.-Some aspects of industrial relations in small manufacturing business firms. 16. HARRISON, A. W. — The statutory corporation in industrial relations. 17. JOHNS, R. P. —An examination and evaluation of the major factors causing longer term variations in private capital expenditure on new housing in Australia from 1948-1949 to the present and an assessment of the analysis for the future private capital expenditure on new housing. 18. MAHLER, F. W. - The developing countries: A case for the development of the traditional economics organization. 19. MELOTTE, Y. Wl. —Urban development in Victoria: problems and possibilities. 20. OULIARIS, S. — The effect of government policies on Ihe consumption-saving decision. 21. ROWE, B. A. — The oil industry in Fiji—1958-1978: an analytical industrial relations study. 22. STARK, P. N.-The influence ol" technology on labour in I.C.I. Australia Operations Pty Ltd. 23. TOME, J. A. — Industrial relations and technological change: a comparative study of the metropolitan daily newspaper industry in Melbourne and Madrid. MA Thesis in Progress 24. CHO, K. K. Y.-The Industrial Relations Bureau. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: The economic consequences of certain professions. ARGC: International trade in agricultural commodities. Australian Wool Corporation: Weather influences on wool production. 76 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

GRADUATE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

INTRODUCTION Members of ihe Graduate School of Business Adminisiration published research in the following areas: job satisfaction, organizational behaviour, stock options, Banach lattices, trade union issues, and rate of return calculations. Research is well under way in several areas, including business-government relations, work attitudes, marketing, an explanatory model for rights issues and bonus issues, management development programmes, prediction of corporate failure, and aspecis of thc housing loan market. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Thc strategics and structures of major Australian companies —W. J. Byrt. 2. The political thought of H. J. Laski-W. J. Byrt. 3. Organization for business-government relations in Australian companies —W. J. Byrt, G. D. Allen. 4. Work attitudes of Australian and U.S. business students-P. .1. Dowling. 5. Work attitudes of school leavers —P. J. Dowling. 6. A comparative study of interpreter services in New South Wales and Victoria —J. M. Hearn. 7. Australian union involvement in 'non-industrial' issues —J. M. Hearn. 8. Developing models to evaluate the financial risk of corporations —M. G. Lincoln. 9. Thc structure and design of post-experience management development programmes-P. R. Masters. 10. Marketing in financial services industries —A. F. T. Payne. 11. Marketing in non-profit organizations —A. F. T. Payne. 12. Functioning of options markets —A. F. T. Payne. 13. Analysis of exchange traded options —J. A. Rickard. 14. Inequalities for rates of interest —J. A. Rickard. 15. Nomograms for financial decisions —J. A. Rickard. 16. Minimum information models of competition between firms —J. A. Rickard. 17. Optimization algorithms with application to monopolistic firms —J. A. Rickard. 18. Complete information duopoly and oligopoly models —J. A. Rickard. 19. Mathematical models of tax evasion —J. A. Rickard. 20. The processes of policy making and decision making in Federal Government — P. J. Rose. 21. Anomalies in thc legal definition of interest rates—H. G. Stanton. 22. Thc true cost of leasing finance—H. G. Stanton. 23. Thc role of inflation in discounted cash flow analysis— H. G. Stanton. 24. Thc relationship between safely stock and service level in inventory control systems having low frequency demand functions — H. G. Stanton. 25. Control of manpower systems by recruitmenl—A. Wirth. 26. Cash management optimization models —A. Wirth. 27. A normative theory of the price elTccts of rights issues and bonus issues—I. R. Woods. 28. The reverse yield gap in Australia—1. R. Woods. PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. BYRT, W. i. — The Human Variable: Text and Cases in Organisational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill, Sydney (1980). 2. FORD, G. W., HEARN, J. M. and LANSBURY, R. D.-Australian Labour Relations: Readings, Macmillan (1980). 3. RICKARD, J. and HOLTON, D. — Problems! Problems!, Prentice-Hall Australia (1980). Chapters of Books 4. FORD, G. W. and HEARN, J. M.-Industrial Conflict: An Overview, inG. W. Ford, J. M. Hearn and R. D. Lansbury (eds.), Australian Labour Relations: Readings, Macmillan, Ch. 1: 2-20 (1980). 5. CUPPER, L. and HEARN, .1. M. — Australian Union Involvcmenl in "Non-Industrial" Issues, in G. W. Ford, J.M. Hearn and R. D. Lansbury (eds), Australian Labour Relations: Readings, Macmillan, Ch. 3: 50-77 (1980). 6. HEARN, J. M. —Migrant Participation in Trade Union Leadership, in G. W. Ford, J. M. Hearn and R. D. Lansbury (eds.), Australian Labour Relations: Readings, Macmillan, Ch. 7: 149-161 (1980). GRADUATE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 77

Articles 7. BEDINGFIEI.D, S. E. and WIRTH, A. - Norm and Order Properties of Banach Lattices. J. Austral. Math. Soc. (Series AJ, 29: 331-336 (1980). 8. CUPPER, L. and HEARN, J. M. —Cross Currents in Australian Union Policies. N.Z. J. of Industrial Relations: 5(1): 13-27 (1980). 9. CUPPER, I., and HEARN, J. M.-Australian Unions: Some Issues of the 1980s. J. of Economics for Schools, Melbourne, 1980: 9-20 (1980). 10. O'BRIEN, G. E. and DOWLING, P.-Thc Effects of Congrucncy Between Perceived and Desired Job Attributes Upon Job Satisfaction. J. of Occupational Psvchol., 53: 121-130 (1980). 11. PAYNE, A. ]•'. T. — Options and the Japanese Securities Market. Security Analvsis J., 18 (9): 28-36 (September 1980). 12. PAYNE, A. F. T.-Options Trading, Investment Analysts J.: 6: 23-27 (Oct. 1980). 13. PAYNE, A. F. T.-A Stock Options Exchange in South Africa'.' The South African J. of Economics: 48(4): 370-379 (Dec. 1980). 14. PAYNE, A. I-'. T. — Options: Gambling, Insurance or Speculation? Security Analvsis J., 18 (12): 20-26 (Dec. 1980). 15. PAYNE, A. F. T. and RICKARD, J. A.-Exchange Traded and Conventional Options: A Comparison. Chartered Accountant in Australia, March 1980: 11-17 (1980). 16. RICKARD, J. A. and RUSSELL, A. M. - Understanding Interest Rales. Australian Ac­ countant, July 1980: 412-415 (1980). 17. HATHAWAY, N. J., MURRAY, I. W. and RICKARD, J. A.-The Stability of Bishop's Warfare Strategy. J. of the Australian Mathematical Society, Series B (Applied Mathematics), 21 (4): 418-432 (1980). 18. RICKARD, J. A.-Stability Properties in a Dynamic Siackclberg Oligopoly Model. The Economic Record. 56: 253-256 (Sept. 1980). 19. RUSSELL, A. M. and RICKARD, J. A. — The Effect of Product Differentiation on Dynamic Cournot and Siackclberg Stability. Economic Letters, 5: 101-107 (1980). 20. RICKARD, J. A. —A Graphical Procedure of Computing the Effective Rate of Interest, Bulletin of the Institute of Mathematics and its Applications, 16: 227-228 (Oct. 1980). 21. WOODS, 1. R. —On Calculating Average Rates of Return. Professional Administrator, 32: 249-251 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Business Administration 1. ANDR/.EWSKI, Z.—A Strategic Assessment of Taxable Life Assurance within the Australian Capital Market. 2. BETTS, M. J. — The Role of Exchange Traded Options in Improving the Income Return on the Share Portfolio of a Private Investment Company. 3. BORZECKI, S. S.-Melbourne Marina Feasibility Study. 4. BUTLER, M. — An Approach to the Amount of Fund for Unit Linked Superannuation Fund Valuations. 5. CAMPBELL, R. W.— A Study of Values in Farm Management Decision-Making in the Goulburn Valley, Victoria. 6. CHAISAWAT, M. — Market Opportunities in Thailand. 1. CHAMBERS, A. G. and GRIFFIN, V. C.—An Evaluation of the Application of Zero-based Budgeting Techniques to Victorian Government Budgetary Procedures. 8. CHENG, R. A. K. and HOE, F. S. — Asean-Australian Trade Problems and Potential. 9. DIXON, A. J. — Managing the Foreign Exchange Risk. 10. FORDYCE, J. and ROBB, W. i.-So You Want to be Your Own Boss (A Layperson's Guide lo Acquiring a Business). 11. JACKSON, I. and KRONENBERG, P. -New Business Strategies. 12. KEANE, D. .1. — Policy Formation and Decision-Making in Business and Government. 13. LEWINSKY, P. -An Evaluation of the Official Short-term Monev Market in Australia. 14. LIM, T. C. and.TAY, E. H.-Setting Up a Small Business. 15. LIM, A. S. — Asian Dollar Market as a Funding Centre. 16. MACKLEY, S. C — Criteria of Investment by General Insurance Companies in Australia. 17. MACMILLAN, G. — Implementation of Accounting Standards on Leasing in Australia. 18. McENTRY, R. and ZAHARA, R. — Underwriting in the Australian Securities Industry. 19. PARKES, H. A. —Accounting for Social Responsibility by Companies in Australia. 20. PHILLIP, P. D. — An Analvsis of the Bowed String Instrument Repair und Sales Industry. 21. STRUTHERS, J. D.-C. S' L.-Options for the Eighties. 22. TING, L. I I. and YEOW, P. C. E.- Management of Foreign Exchange Risk in Australia. •23. WOO, E. Y. L. — Factoring in Australia. 24. WESTERN. W. J. - Policv and Management for a Small Retail Florist. 78 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress I. BAILEY, J.-Small business. 1. CUMMINS, T. }. — Mid-career development of the Australian manager. 3. KING, J. B. — Patterns of behaviour of boards of directors of selected Australian companies. 4. LINCOLN, M. G. — business failure prediction in Australia. 5. MASTERS, P. R. - The structure and content of post-experience management development programs. 6. MURPHY, E. — Career structures of recreation personnel. 7. STANTON, H. G. — A critical analysis of consumer finance in Australia. INSTITUTE OF APPLIED ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL RESEARCH

INTRODUCTION Major emphases and initiatives in research at the Institute arc concerned with short-term ana long-term economic conditions, policies and forecasts; industrial, financial and agricultural policies; and social conditions, welfare and social policy. Under the first of these headings, 1980 saw the initiation of research on Labour Market Flows and thc establishment of a Key Issues Working Group under the auspices of the Econometric Forecasting Project. Work was carried out on teenage employment and unemployment. Research on long-term economic conditions, policies and forecasts included continued efforts to complete Ihe documentation of thc various modules of the Institute Multi-Purpose Model (IMP). Books on Energy and the Structure of the Australian Economy are likely to be completed in 1981. Publica­ tion of Econometric Technical Papers began with the appearance of ihe Agriculture edition in May. Further editions, on Demography and Energy/Transport, are expected in 1981. Software lo sci up simulation runs of thc energy/transport module and the "core" model on a simple interac­ tive basis was devised and applied. In industrial, financial and agricultural policy studies, work is underway on housing in Vic­ toria, on the effects of the mining boom on the Australian economy, and on the economic impact of statutory authorities in Victoria. A study of the costs of production in Australian agriculture and the incorporation of this analysis in a revised econometric model of Australian agriculture were virtually completed in 1980. Research on social conditions, welfare and social policy in 1980 was marked by the publica­ tion of vol. 11 of the Scotton-Ferbcr study of Public Expenditure and Social Policy in Australia. Oiher publications in progress include papers presented al the conference on "Poverty, income maintenance and welfare in Australia in the 1980's", a volume on Hidden Unemployment in Australia and another on Local Government Co-ordination of Welfare Services.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. SHORT-TERM ECONOMIC CONDITIONS, POLICIES AND FORECASTS 1. Short-term forecasts of economic developments —A. W. Smith, P. B. Rosendale, D. McDonald. 2. Analysis of economic conditions in Australia —J. P. Brennan, B. C. M. Derody, P. P. Strieker, J. C. Buchanan, S. Derrick. 3. Publication of thc Australian Economic Review—P. B. Rosendale and others. 4. Issues of macro-economic policy — D. S. Ironmonger, P. J. Sheehan, P. B. Rosendale. 5. Quarterly model of sections of the Australian economy — P. J. Sheehan, B. C. M. Derody, P. B. Rosendale, D. McDonald, A. W. Smith. 6. Analysis and surveys of consumer altitudes —J. S. McDonnell, D. S. Ironmonger (with thc Roy Morgan Research Centre). 7. Labour Market Elows-W. Foster. 8. Project LINK — International linkage of econometric models—D. S. Ironmonger, P. B. Rosendale. B. LONG-TERM ECONOMIC CONDITIONS, POLICIES AND FORECASTS 1. Medium and long-term forecasts of economic developments —P. J. Brain and others. 2. A medium-term econometric model of thc Australian economy — P. J. Brain, C. H. McPhee. 3. Analysis of industrial activity in Australia —B. S. Gray, J. W. Lang, W. H. Fung. 4. A model of supply and demand for energy in Australia —G. P. Schuyers, P. R. Theakcr. 5. A model of the Australian financial sector —P. 1. Burgess, S. M. Donath. 6. Econometric modelling of the operations of Telecom Australia —P. R. Theaker. 7. Economic activity in the Australian Stales—B. S. Gray, J. W. Lang, G. P. Mcen. 8. Analysis of demographic factors underlying thc Australian economy. 9. An econometric model of Australian agriculture —A. W. Smilh, J. P. Brennan. 10. Analysis of selected international economies as they affect Australia —A. Puniasen, G. P. Mcen. C. INDUSTRIAL, FINANCIAL AND AGRICULTURAL POLICY STUDIES 1. World irade in Australian agricultural products —A. W. Smilh, D. J. Niall. 2. Australian manufactured cxports-G. L. R. Dixon, J. I. Eberhardt. 3. Australian imports —P. B. Rosendale, E. B. Williamson. 4. Analysis of costs of production in Australian agriculture —A. W. Smith, K. F. Meikle. 5. The New Resources Boom-P. J. Sheehan, D. McDonald, P. Rosendale, S. Derrick. 6. Housing demand and supply in Victoria —J. I. Eberhardt, A. W. Smith. 79 80 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

D. SOCIAL CONDITIONS, WELFARE AND SOCIAL POLICY 1. A study of social expenditure patterns in Australia —R. B. Scotton, H. L. Ferber. 2. Local government co-ordination of welfare services —C. C. Thomas. 3. Funding local government welfare operations —R. B. Lewis. 4. Responsibilities of local government in welfare operations —R. F. Henderson. 5. Hidden unemployment in Australia —P. J. Sheehan, P. P. Strieker. 6. Income security and guaranteed income schemes—I. G. Manning, D. S. Ironmonger. 7. Ell'ects of energy prices on incomes and expenditures of families—D. S. Ironmonger, I. G. Manning. E. ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL STAT IST1CS 1. Institute's econometric data bank —.I. C. Buchanan. 2. Preparation of annual data bank for econometric modelling —A. E. Leahy. 3. Computer programming for econometric modelling and analysis of economic conditions — Ii. P. Kelly, S. M. Donath.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. SCOTTON, R. B. and FERBER, 11. (eds.)-Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia, Vol. II, The First Eraser Years, 1976-78, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne (1980). 2. SHEEHAN, P. — Crisis in Abundance, Penguin Books, Melbourne (1980). Chapters of Books 3. FERBER, H. — Diary of Legislative and Administrative Changes, 1975 to 1978, in Public Ex­ penditures and Social Policy in Australia. Vol. II, Thc First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and 11. Ferber, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 312-386 (1980). 4. HENDERSON, R. F . — Reforms of Taxation to Improve Welfare, in Tax Reform and Social Welfure, Taxation Institute Research and Education Trust, Sydnev (August 1980). 5. HENDERSON, R. F., and LEWIS, R. B. - l ocal Government and Personal and Commun­ ity Services, in Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia, Vol. II, The First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and IT. Ferber, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 144-174 (1980). 6. OWENS, H. —Social Indicators, in Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia, Vol. II, The First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. R. Scollon and II. Ferber. Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 261-311 (1980). 7. SCOTTON, R. B. —The Eraser Government and Social Expenditures, in Public Expen­ ditures and Social Policy in Australia, Vol. II, The First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and H. Ferber, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 1-27 (1980). 8. SCO I TON, R. B. —Health Insurance: Medibank and After, in Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia, Vol. II, The First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and H. Ferber, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 175-219 (1980). 9. SHEEHAN, P. .1. and STRICKER, P. P.-The Collapse of Full Employment, 1974 to 1978, in Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia, Vol. II, The First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and H. Ferber, Longman Cheshire, Melbourne: 28-76 (1980). Journal 10. ROSENDALE, P. (cd.), MeDONALD, D. (assoc. cd.) and BUCHANAN, J. (assist, ed.) — Australian Economic Review, Nos. 49, 50, 51 and 52: published quarterly by the Inst, of Appl. Eco. and Soc. Res. (1980). Econometric Technical Papers 11. SMITH, A. W., SMITH R. L., MEIKLE, K., and COLLARD, A- K.-The Agriculture Module of the Institute Multi-Purpose Model, Econometric Technical Paper No. I, Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research (May 1980). 12. BRAIN, P. J., SMITH, R. L., SCHUYERS, G. P., GRAY, B. S. and MEEN, G. P. — The Demographic Module of the Institute Multi-Purpose Model. Econometric Technical Paper No. 2. Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research (September 1980). Articles 13. BRENNAN, J., MeDONALD, D., DERRICK, S., WILLIAMSON, E. and ROSENDALE, P. — Rural Conditions and Overseas Trade. Ausi. Eco. Review, (2nd quarter 1980): 40-55. 14. BRENNAN, J., MeDONALD, D., DERRICK, S., WILLIAMSON, E. and ROSENDALE, P. -Rural Conditions and Overseas Trade. Ausi. Eco. Review (4th quarter 1980): 44-59. 15. DERODY, B. and ROSENDALE, P.-Monetary Conditions. Ausi. Eco. Review. (2nd quarter 1980): 24-29. INSTITUTE OF APPLIED ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL RESEARCH 81

16. DERODY, B., MeDONALD, D., DERRICK, S., BUCHANAN, J. and ROSENDALE, P. — Domestic Demand —Household, Business and Public. Aust. Eco. Review, (2nd quarter 1980): 30-39. 17. DERODY, B., MeDONALD, D., DERRICK, S., BUCHANAN, J. and ROSENDALE, P. — Domestic Demand —Household, Business and Public. Ausi. Eco. Review, (4th quarter 1980): 33-39. 18. DERODY, B., SHEEHAN, P. J., and ROSENDALE, P. —Monetary Conditions-zluiV. Eco. Review, (4th quarter 1980): 27-32. 19. IRONMONGER, D. S.-The Income Maintenance Policies of the Fraser Government. Australian Quarterly, 52, (1): 32-39 (1980). 20. MeDONALD, D. — Businessmen's Expectations and Private Investment, Appendix to Chapter 4, Aust. Eco. Review, (4th quarter 1980): 40-43. 21. McDONNELL, I. and DEFRIS, L. V.-Australian Household Saving and Durable Goods Expenditure: T he Relevance of Consumer Survev Data. J. of Economic Activitv: 17-27 (January 1980). 22. NIALL, D. J., SMITH, A. W. and SMITH, R. L.-Policies affecting thc international wheat market- 1960 to 1980. Rural Marketing and Policy, 10, (2): 5-9 (Winter 1980). 23. ROSENDALE, P.-Survev of Recent Developments. Hull. Indonesian Eco. Stud.: 1-33 (March 1980). 24. ROSENDALE;, P. —Australia's Trade in Retrospect and Prospect, World Review: 43-49 (April 1980). 25. ROSENDALE, P.-The International Economy in 1980. Ausi. Eco. Review, (1st quarter 1980): 3-12. 26. ROSENDALli, P. and SHEEHAN, P. J.-The Economy after the Budget and the Election. Aust. Eco. Review. (3rd quarter 1980): 3-10. 27. ROSENDALE, P. and SHEE1 IAN, P. J.-Prospects for the Economy 1981. Aust. Eco. Review, (4th quarter 1980): 4-19. 28. ROSENDALE:, P., SMIT H, A. W. and MeDONALD, D. — Prospects for the Economy, 1980-81. Aust. Eco. Review. (2nd quarter 1980): 5-12. 29. SMITH, A. W. and ROSENDALE, P. — Wages, Prices and Taxes. Aust. Eco. Review. (2nd quarter 1980): 13-23. 30. SMITH, A. W. and ROSENDALE, P. — Waees, Prices and Taxes. Aust. Eco. Review, (4th quarter 1980): 20-26. 31. STRICKER, P. P. and ROSENDALE, P. — Employment and the Labour Market. Aust. Eco. Review. (2nd quarter 1980): 56-59. 32. STRICKER, P. P.—Some aspects of Divergent Growth in Recent Employment Statistics, Appendix lo Chapter 5, Aust. Eco. Review, (2nd quarter 1980): 60-64. 33. STRICKER, P. P. and ROSENDALE, P. - Employment and the Labour Market. Ausi. Eco. Review. (4th quarter 1980): 60-65.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BUTLER, G. — Demand for Established Dwelling —New Dwellings and Dwelling Im­ provements—An Economic Measurement and Analysis of the Housing Adjustment Process. 2. BURBIDGE;, A. —Income Support Policies for Working People in Povertv. 3. RASMUSSEN, E. J. — Incomes Policy and Related Problems in Australia. 1970-197°. 4. SCHUYERS. G. P. —The Impact of New Energy Sources und Technologies on Future Australian Energy Consumption and Production Patterns. 5. STRICKER, P. P. - Operation of the Australian Labour Market. MCom Thesis in Progress 6. LANG, J. W. — An examination of non-survey Input-Output techniques for Ihe generation of regional Input-Output tables in A ustralia.

SUBSTANTIAL ORAM!) RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Responses to fiscal changes in the I980's. ARGC: Investigation of community development programs. ARGC: World trade in Australian agricultural products. Australian Wool Corporation: The influence of weather conditions on wool quality and quantity. Australian Wool Foundation with Reserve Bank of Australia: Analysis of Australian farm costs. NERDDC: Effects of changes in energy supplies and prices on real incomes and consumption pat­ terns of Australian families. 82 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

Public Bodies Review Committee of Victoria: Thc economic impact of statutory authorities in Vic­ toria. Utah Foundation: Labor market flows. Victorian Housing Commission: Housing demand in Victoria 1976-1986.

Details of subscribers to the Institute's Project Research, especially thc Econometric Forecasting Project, will be found in the Annual Report of thc Institute for 1980. LEGAL STUDIES

INTRODUCTION In 1980 research was undertaken by the staff in Legal Studies in various aspects of the com­ mercial law field, in particular thc areas of corporations and labour law and relations. Apart from this the main thrust of research has been in a book on business law written by J. Telfer in conjunc­ tion with J. E. Smyth, D. A. Soberman and R. Johanson. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Aspects of government regulation of industrial relations practices—R. J. Mitchell. 2. Thc extent to which laws against deception impose a duty to disclose information —F. C. Hanks. 3. The apportionment between manufacturers, suppliers and users of liability arising out of the use of defective products —F. C. Hanks. 4. Trade practices — L. Re. 5. Marxism and the law —R. McQueen. 6. Legal and social implications of multinational investment in Australia —R. McQueen. 7. Legal concept of the relationship between the individual and the state— D. A. Wishart. 8. Enforcement of the internal rules of companies —J. H. Telfer. 9. Changes in taxation law —J. H. Telfer. 10. A textbook on commercial law —Z. Singer. 11. Extension of the exceptions to the rule in Foss v. Harbottle—Z. Singer. 12. Takeovers and legal persons —M. E. Kino. 13. Medical negligence — M. E. Kino. 14. Legislative control of food manufacture and distribution —M. E. Kino. 15. Law of manufacturers' guarantees —V. New. 16. United Kingdom sex discrimination laws —a lesson for Australia—V. New. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. TELFER, J. H., SMYTH, J. E., SOBERMAN, D. A. and JOHANSON, R.-Australian Business Law, Prentice-Hall Australia, Melbourne (1980). Articles 2. MITCHELL, R. J. —Australian Industrial Relations and Labour Law Policy: a Post-War Review Australian Quarterly, 52 (1): 40-59 (1980). 3. MITCHELL, R. J. - Industrial Relations Under a Conservative Government: A Reply. J. of Industrial Relations, 22 (3): 348-352 (1980). 4. McQUEEN, R. — Propagation of Growth: Agribusiness and the Seed Industry in Australia. J. of Ausi. Political Economy, No. 9: 59-70 (Nov. 1980).

83 84 FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

REGIONAL AND URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES

INTRODUCTION In 1980, research continued in the economic analysis of urban and regional phenomena. A regional and sectoral survey of the Australian economy was completed by Dr R. K. Wilson and published as a book. Mr R. A. Carter finished an economic evaluation of housing policy in Australia in thc 1970s. He continued with an analysis of employment and demand for labour in thc Shepparlon area of Victoria. Dr C. S. Beed completed the manuscript of a book on the economic evaluation of urban development and planning policies in Melbourne while a study of migration within Victoria was finished by Mr D. R. Booth. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A regional and sectoral survey of Australian economic and resource development was com­ pleted with the publication of a book —R. K. Wilson. 2. Migration and mobility (for D.202 Urban Development course at the Open University, England) —R. K. Wilson. 3. Regional problems and regional policies in Australia: a contribution to a symposium arranged by the Regional Science Association of Australia and New Zealand — R. K. Wilson. 4. Recent urban development in Melbourne —C. S. Beed. 5. Inter-statistical division gross migration flows, Victoria, 1966-1971—D. R. Booth. 6. Economic structure and thc demand for labour in the regional economy —R. A. Carter. 7. Tenant-managed housing co-operatives —R. A. Carter. 8. Urban housing and socio-economic data-base —R. A. Carter. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. WILSON, R. V..-Australia's Resources and Their Development, Department of Adult Education, University of Sydney (1979). Chapters of Books 2. CARTER, R. A. — Housing Policy in thc 1970's, in Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia: Volume II, The Pirst Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and Helen Ferber, Longman-Cheshire for the Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research: 77-143 (1980). 3. CARTER, R. A. and BROTT, K. —Diary of Legislative and Administrative Changes, Hous­ ing: 1973-1978, in Public Expenditures and Social Policy in Australia: Volume II, The First Fraser Years, 1976-78, eds. R. B. Scotton and Helen Ferber, Longman-Cheshire for the In­ stitute of Applied Economic and Social Research: 363-384 (1980). Articles and Papers 4. CARTER, R. A. —Lone Parents and the Private Rental Market. Australian Quarterly, 52: 104-118 (1980). 5. CARTER, R. A. —Thc Effect of Commonwealth Housing Policies on Lower Income Groups, 1972-1980. Australian Economic Review, 3rd Quarter: 18-23 (1980). 6. CARTER, R. A.-Will the Strategy Work? Proceedings of the Forum on Metropolitan Strategy, Melbourne, Urban Land Institute of Australia: 64-75 (Oct. 1980) FACULTY OF EDUCATION

DEAN'S REPORT Thc Faculty continues to be active in research, with an increasing proportion of the total stu­ dent intake being enrolled for MEd, MEdPsych or PhD, During 1980. three PhD theses, five MEd major theses and seventeen MEd minor theses were successfully completed. There arc at present eighteen PhD theses, 56 MEd major theses and 144 MEd minor theses in progress. Although the more traditional research areas in the Department, such as history, continue to attract able students, especially at PhD level, the overall increase in numbers seems to reflect grow­ ing interest in research which is more overtly related to contemporary practice and attempts to modify it. With the curriculum of the secondary school attracting so much interest, both professional and lay, it was fitting that the 1980 Fink Seminar in Education addressed the topic "Problems of the Common Curriculum". Thc speaker, Professor Denis Lawton, Deputy Director of the Univer­ sity of London Institute of Education and Professor of Curriculum Studies within the Institute, developed the current work in Ihis field both through the Fink Seminar and through a scries of lec­ tures lo BEd Students.

85 86 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

EDUCATION

A. COMPARATIVE EDUCATION

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Secondary school organization and curriculum in England and France —O. Wykes. 2. Comparative study of administration of education in Australian States —O. Wykes. 3. Comparative study of secondary school curriculum in Australian States —O. Wykes. 4. Reforms in higher education in France —O. Wykes. THESES IN PROGRESS MEd Theses in Progress Minor Theses 1. DEN BRINKER, P. A. V. - Technical Education in Germany and Russia. 2. GARDNER, C. R. — Developments in A.P.S. Staff Training Policy 1945-75. 3. HART, R. J. — A Comparative Historical Study of the Development of Educational Pro­ grammes for Gifted Children in Australia and Overseas. 4. HOLMES, G. K.—A Comparative Study of Selected School Councils in Victoria and School Boards in A.C.T. 5. KIDD, J. M.— A Comparison of Deliberate Attempts to Foster Bi-cultural Identity in Selected Government Primary Schools in Victoria with Schools in Sweden and Israel. 6. RUSH, E. R. — English in the Final Year of Australian Secondary Schooling 1975: A Com­ parative View. 7. WILSON, I. R. B.-Geography Curriculum in Australian Schools, Years II and 12.

B. CURRICULUM STUDIES.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Book on curricular, pedagogical and organizational innovations —G. M. Dow (editor and contributor), N. P. Gough, B. Hannan, D. C. White, R. McA. Foster. 2. Educational innovation in Victoria since the end of the second world war: chapter of book in honour of Andrew Fabinyi —G. M. Dow. 3. Learning to teach by trial and terror —G. M. Dow. 4. Sex differences in English achievement, second stage —I. V. Hansen. 5. The schooling of 15 and 16 year olds with particular reference to student perceptions of the meaning of school work. This work is a continuation of study undertaken for the Schools Commission —R. A. Fawns and R. V. Teese. 6. The content, ideology and history of junior science curricula in Australia. The analysis of selected ASEP units is being undertaken for the Curriculum Development Centre as background to thc redevelopment of ASEP —R. A. Fawns. 7. The redevelopment of the pre-trade science course for thc extra-mural studies department of the Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology —R. A. Fawns. 8. Student teachers, the small group context and personal images of effectiveness in thc classroom —R. A. Fawns. 9. Higher school certificate economics —P. Mulholland. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. GOUGH, N. P. — Toward a Theory of School-based Curriculum Development: Principles and Practices in Decision-Making. 2. GRANT, A. N. — Young Readers' Reading: Study of Personal Response to the Reading of Fiction Based on Five Case Studies at the Upper Secondary School Level. MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 3. BAKER, M. J. C. - The Mathematical Curriculum. 4. BRYCE, I. —The Heterogeneity of Music Backgrounds of Students Entering Secondary School and Implications for the Secondary School Music Curriculum. EDUCATION 87

5. GREENALL, M. J. — Environmental Education in Australia: Phenomenon ofthe Seventies: A Case Study in National Curriculum Development. 6. HAMMOND, H. J. — Student Response to Literature in Directed and Undirected Discus­ sions. 7. LEASK, j. D. — The Justification of Music Education in the School Curriculum. 8. PIPER, K. J. — Social Competence and the Core Curriculum. 9. ROBINSON, I. Yl.-The Use of Models in Curriculum Theory. 10. SCHWARZ, V. —Impact of Technological Change on Society and Its Implications for Education. 11. TERRELL-SANFTL, J. M. — Teaching for Imaginative Development: The Development of Literature Curricula for the Primary School. 12. TURNER, W. J. —Relationship between School Organization and Curriculum with par­ ticular emphasis on Music Curriculum and an Alternative System. 13. TROYNAR, G. M. — Concepts of Integration in Science Education. 14. VINCENT, C. — An Investigation into the Historical Development of Instrumental Music at the Secondary Level in Victoria.

Minor Theses 15. BLANCE, A. A. —The Notion of Relevance in Chemistry Curricula. 16. BRUDENELL, P. L.-A Comparative Study of Three Primary Schools' Attempts to Develop School-based Curriculum. 17. DAVID, M. D. — The Place of Art in the Curriculum of the Victorian Secondary School. 18. FERGUSON, P. VJ.-The Nature ofa Secondary Science Curriculum. 19. GILCHRIST, P. T. — The Thinking Processes of Secondary Chemistry Students Studying 'The Mole Concept'. 20. GOWDIE, J. P. — The Place of Foreign Language Study in the Curriculum. 21. HAYNES, J. M.-The Development of Writing Abilities. 22. HYATT, D. J. —Laboratory Experiences in Chemistry in the 80s: Problems and Prospects. 23. INCHLEY, G. T. - The Mature Student and his Concessions. 24. IRWIN, M. F. — Music Education and Curriculum Measurement. 25. JONES, A. J.— An Evaluation of Victorian Computer Studies Curricula in Secondary Schools. 26. LIM CHIOW BENG, M.-Changes in Biology Curriculum. 21. MULLINS, L. G.— Evaluation of Supplementary Educational Programs. 28. OLDMEADOW, J. C. — Decision-making in Curriculum Programming. 29. PETERS, L.- Recurrent Education. 30. POWER, P. D.-Children's Participation in Physical Activities. 31. SEDAL, L. — The Medical Curriculum: A Model for the Study of Educational Theory. 32. SHAW, N. A.-Nursing Education. 33. STEEL, R. P.-Outdoor Education. 34. STRUGNELL, E.-Strategies for Curriculum Development in Schools. 35. WHITE, A. D. — Strategies for Curriculum Implementation. 36. WILLIAMSON, R. M. — The Core Science Curriculum in the Years 7-10 in Victorian Schools.

C. EDUCATION OF THE DEAF

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Mothers' speech to hearing and hearing-impaired children —T. G. W. Nienhuys. 2. A comparison of mothers' speech in two early-intervention programmes for deaf children —T. G. W. Nienhuys.

THESIS IN PROGRESS MEd Thesis in Progress Minor Thesis 1. WALKER, L. M.-Teaching Thinking Skills and its Application to the Education of the Deaf. 88 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

D. EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Competencies for educational administrators: research to determine the skills, knowledge and competencies necessary for efficient and effective school-based administration —R. H. Millikan. 2. Consultative needs and practices of Victorian teachers—R. H. Millikan. 3. An approach to thesis writing for graduate students —R. H. Millikan. 4. Perspectives on educational consultation: an edited volume of papers by leading researchers and writers from around the world —R. H. Millikan and G. S. Harman. 5. Thc role of the supervising teacher in initial teacher training —M. S. Williams. THESES IN PROGRESS MEd Theses in Progress Major Thesis 1. McINDOE, R. G. — Educational Administration: Legal Accountability. Minor Theses 2. AUSTEN, R. E. H.— Adaptation to Turbulent Social Environments by TAPE Institutions. 3. BAKER, M. E.— Administration ofa Central Educational Agency. 4. BARBER, I. A. — Assessment of Agricultural Courses in Indonesia. 5. BROWN, J. E. - Leadership of the Primary School Principal. 6. CAULFIELD, M. K. - Leadership and Responsibilitv. I. CHAMPION, N. V.-School-based Budgeting. 8. CRUISE, R. J. —Educational Administration of TAPE Off-campus Study Courses. 9. D'ORSA, J. B. — Factors Affecting School Climate in Selected Christian Brothers' Colleges. 10. DUNSTAN, G. — The Primary Curriculum Consultant —Dependence on Existing School Structure and Setting. II. FEORE, A. M.— Differences in Administration/Organization/Leadership Styles, between Education and the Military. 12. FRASER, J. D. — Comparative Study of Organization of U.K. and Victorian High Schools. 13. FREEMAN, A. R.— Future Studies Techniques. 14. HAMILTON, A. T. - The Rote of the Off-campus Studies Co-ordinator. 15. HARRISON, P. }.-Organisational Climate of Schools. 16. HAWARD, N. C — The Role of Service Teaching in Technological Institutions. 17. HOUGHTON, J. F. — Review ofthe Operations of TAFE Services: 18. HOWELLS, E. C. — The Perceptions of the Role of the Victorian Primary Vice-Principals without Specific Grade Responsibility. 19. JANKOVIC, M. M. — Stress and the Educational Administrator. 20. KENNELLY, P. A. —Alternative Structures to the Principatship. 21. LAUGHTON, R. A. - The Role of the Deputy Principal in Victorian State High Schools. 22. LA WRY, R. P. —In-service Education: Primary Division. 23. LYNE, M. L. — Teacher Morale in Technical Schools. 24. McGREGOR, P. B. - Variables Influencing School Morale. 25. MEEHAN, R. L.- Description and Evaluation of Primary Teacher Qualifications. 26. NEAL, R. T'. — Leadership Role of the Subject Co-ordinator. 21. PAYNE, A. F. T. — Marketing Education in the Non-profit and Services Sector. 28. PIETSCH, E. C— Evaluation and its Relationship to Decision-making. 29. RIDDIFORD, R. F'. - Problems of Initiative and Control in the Disadvantaged Schools Pro­ gram in Victorian Government Schools. 30. ROGERS, R. — Clinical Supervision and Victorian Primary Schools. 31. STEER, W. A. — Teacher Motivation in Victorian High Schools. 32. STONE, R. J. — Rural Isolation in Secondary Schooling. 33. WILLIAMS, J. M. D.-Evaluating for Accountability. 34. WILLIS, R. W. G. — 77te Link between School and Departmental Agencies.

E. HISTORY

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. History of Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology-S. Murray-Smith. EDUCATION 89

2. History of technical education in Australia —S. Murray-Smith. 3. Community survival and adaptation in small island communities —S. Murray-Smith. 4. Australian educational development as part of our cultural history —G. M. Dow, S. Murray- Smith, G. C. Fendley. 5. Biographies of Enid Derham, Julia Flynn —K. I. Palmer. 6. Biography of Theodore Fink —W. D. Hannah. 7. Cultural transplantation: a studv of the educational activities of Mere Amelie Salmon, RSC- J - D. F. Cave. 8. Series of historical works related to the foundation of the Congregation of the Blessed Sacra­ ment by Pierre-Julien Eymard: first three volumes: I. Fourvierc, 11 Les jeuncs de Toulon, III Le group Dubouche —D. F. Cave.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. CRUTCH FIELD, L. L. — Slate Education and the Domestication of Women in Victoria to 1939. 2. DARE, A. J. — Working Men's College lo Institute of Technology: a History of the Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology 1930 to 1970 with special reference to the Perceptions of Staff and Students. 3. LING, P. N. — An Analysis of Arrangements made for the. Provision of Technical Education in Australia, 1880-1914. 4. McLAREN, J. D. — The Influence of the Writings of P. R. Leavis on the Teaching of Humanities with particular reference to Australia. 5. MITCHELL, J. A. -The Evolution of the Victorian State High School System 1905-1928. 6. TASKER, D. H. — The Place of Religion in Commercial Television in Australia 1956-78. MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 7. ABIUSO, G.-The Historv of Italian Cultural Organizations in Victoria, 1861-1961. 8. BOURAS, G.- Biography of A. J. Hicks. 9. FREEMAN, F. M.-A Biography of H. T. Stacpoole. 10. GARI.ICK, L. F. C— Movements that Led to the Establishment of the Victorian Teachers' Tribunal and its Operations during the Years 1946-1966. . 11. KIMBER, R. F. - 77ie Development ofthe Primary School Curriculum in Victoria 1900-39. 12. McNICOL, R. 5. —History of the Curriculum in Viclorian High Schools. 13. McPHEE, B. P.-Catholic Education: The Contribution of Archbishop Carr 1887-1917. 14. MOUNT, J. J. —Catholic Education: Changes in Policies and Practices in Victoria, 1965-1978. 15. POSTEMA, H. rl.-Some Aspects of Policv in Public Education in Victoria 1918-1940. 16. RETCHFORD, G. K. - The Use of Fiction as a Source in the Study ofthe History of Educa­ tion in Australia. 17. TURNER, A. — Independent Working Class Education in Australia 1917-1927. 18. WATERS, P. M. - The Development of Catholic Education in Melbourne 1839-1880. Minor Theses 19. BARKLEY, R. A.. —A History of the Hermitage C.E.G.G.S. 20. BEAVIS, C. A. —Learning in Undirected Small Group Discussion. 21. BURRELL, J. ri.—School and Community Relations in Victoria. 22. COLDREY, B. Wl. — Lord Somers Camp and Power House: A Response to a Climate of Fear, 1929-1941. 23. DILLON, M. C.—A Study of Working Class Education in the Western Suburbs of Melbourne in Ihe 1920s and 1930s. 2A. GILLBANK, L. R.-Hislory of STA V. 25. JACKEL, S. G. — 77ie Employment of Teachers in Viclorian Government Primary Schools, 1862-1892. 26. JONES, D. C.-The Public Examinations in Victoria, 1955-1974. 27. McDONOGH, J. }.—Some Aspects of Secondarv Technical Education in Victoria. 28. S1LVERBACK, R. B. — Tertiary Education in Provincial Cities. 29. SMITH, A. C — An Analysis of the Teaching of Religion in Viclorian Catholic Primary Schools since 1900. 30. WH1TELEY, R. H. — Donald Clark: The First Chief Inspector of Technical Schools. 31. WILKINSON, R. C. — The Administration of the Secondary Examination System with par­ ticular Reference to Ihe Introduction of Matriculation Examination in 1944.

D 90 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

F. LANGUAGE STUDIES

THESES IN PROGRESS

MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 1. CAMPBELL, R. M. — Language and Concept Formation with particular reference to Bruner, Piaget and Vygotsky. 2. DUNSTAN, C. D. — Psycho-socio-linguistic Factors in the Development of Mathematical Cognition. 3. FRANCIS, N. A. —Comparative Study of Language and Music Acquisition in Pre-school Children. 4. HOLROYD, L. M. — An Investigation of Narrative Writing al Grade 6 and Form 2 Levels. 5. PINGE, I. R.— Assumptions Underlying Approaches lo the Teaching of English in Secon­ dary Schools. Minor Theses 6. BLAZE, D. A. — Language-delayed Working Class Children: Dijferenl or Deviant. 7. KAVANAGH, M. B. — Narrative Development in Language from Five Years lo Adulthood. 8. KYNOCH, H. M. — Difficulties in Maintaining Ethnic Languages and Culture in a Multicultural Society with particular reference to Italian Families in Melbourne. 9. LOMAS, W. P'. — Development of Directives in the Speech of Children of Early Primary School Age. 10. MAHER, M. J. — Assumptions Underlying English Teaching. 11. MULCAHY, M. D. — The Structure and Function of Written Narrative. 12. PILLAY, A. N. — Learning Disabilities: Reading. 13. WHEELER, H. G. — A Preliminary Investigation of Language Function and Educational Success in Primary School Children.

G. MIGRANT EDUCATION

THESES IN PROGRESS

MEd Theses in Progress Major Thesis 1. PARKER, J. D. — A Consideration of Ethnic Prejudice in the Classroom. Minor Theses 2. ABADA, S. H.— Administration of Ethnic Education in Victoria. 3. ARUNDEL, K. A. — Particular Problems of Newly-arrived Migrant Children in Mathematics. 4. DAPIRAN, H. G. — The Migrant Student: Home Environment and School Achievement. 5. KERSTJENS, C. — Problems Related to the Provision of Interpreter Services for Australian Migrant Communities. 6. KREJCAR, L. V.— Interaction of Migrants in Australian Society. 7. S1SLOV, L. — Multi-cultural Studies: The Emergence ofthe Concept and Suggested Practical Consequences. 8. VLAHONASIOU, T. — Historical Background lo the Emergence of the Concept of Multi- cult urism as an A im lo be Pursued in Educational Practice in A ustralia. 9. WOLF, E.-The Emergence of the Concept of Bi-lingual Education 1970-1977.

H. PHILOSOPHY

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. An analysis of rights in an educational context —W. G. S. Smith. 2. Education and intrinsic vajuc —W. G. S. Smith. EDUCATION 91

3. Philosophy of music education —W. G. S. Smith. 4. Autonomy as an aim in education —D. F. Cave. 5. "Appreciation and Conditioning" for publication —R. McA. Foster.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. DUFF, B. E. — Education Criticism: An Attempt to Rethink Dewey's Philosophy of Educa­ tion. 2. RZECHORZEK, P.-Educational Autonomy. MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 3. DERHAM, M. G. — The Possibility of Objective Knowledge and its Educational Implica­ tions. 4. DOROSZLAV, K. — An Analysis ofthe School Discipline 'Classical Civilisation' in the Light of Epistemological Principles. 5. GRESCHKE, L. R. — A Criticism of Transcendental Arguments in the Area of Justification of Educational Activities. 6. HUGHES, J. D. Wl. —The Analysis of 'Education' and the Value of Educational Activities. 1. NICHTERLEIN, J.-Kant's Philosophy of Education. Minor Theses 8. CARMICHAEL, {. — Physics Teaching and Forms of Knowledge. 9. SETTLE, J. Wl. —Philosophical Foundation of Hirst's Forms of Knowledge.

1. PSYCHOLOGY

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Computer simulation of class response to teaching —C. Poole. 2. Lateralisation of linguistic stimuli in young Down's Syndrome children —X. Y. Hartley. 3. A comparison of receptive language of Down's Syndrome and non Down's Syndrome retarded children —X. Y. Hartley. 4. The effectiveness of parents as teachers in the remedial treatment of learning difficulties in children —F. D. Naylor and M. R. Joyce. 5. The relationship between affective and cognitive variables—H. Schofield. 6. Educational policy in the light of declining pupil numbers and finance — K. B. Start. 7. Classroom organization for individual differences in learners. —K. B. Start. 8. Personality and behaviour in stress related conditions —K. B. Start. 9. Sex-role behaviour and gender in teacher-student evaluation —M. E. Bernard. 10. Sex-role identity and mental ability —M. E. Bernard. 11. Vocational guidance consultation in school settings —M. E. Bernard. 12. Behavioural treatment of excessive coffee and tea drinking —M. E. Bernard. 13. A cognitive-behavioural approach to the treatment ofexcessive hair-pulling —M. E. Bernard. 14. Thc psychology of presidential anger —M. E. Bernard. 15. Thc effects ofa coaching program on SAT performance —M. E. Bernard. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. AINLEY, M. D. — Conceptual Issues in Curiosity Research. 2. BALL, I. L. —Performance in Stressful Situations. 3. BOYLE, G. J. —Effect of Manipulating Mood Stales and Motivational Dynamics upon Learning Task Performance, taking into account Ability and Temperament. 4. MILNE, R. — Moral Development in Early Childhood. MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 5. KING, M. G.-Middle Level Technical Students. 6. MOWCHANUK, T. — The Role of Computers/Computing in Secondary Education. 7. SHERWELL, I. F. — Learner and Instructional Variables Contributing to the Learning and Retention of Related Concepts at the Formal Level of Attainment. 92 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

Minor Theses 8. BARRACLOUGH, M. — Some Factors Affecting Mathematics Performance of Form I Students in Technical Schools. 9. BERRY, R. V.—Some Effects of Criterion Mastery Levels and Student Aptitude upon Achievement and Retention of Cartographic Knowledge and Skills. 10. CERBASI, J. {. — Disabilities in Learning: Diagnostic and Remedial Methods in Mathematics. 11. DALE, E. C. — The Development of Academic Policy in Victorian Institute of Colleges. 12. DYTSCHENKO, L. — Cognitive and Ethical Development in Late Adolescents. 13. FARISH, S. J. — An Investigation into the Effect of Sample Design upon Estimates of Test Reliability in Educational Research. 14. FE 1L, C. J. — To In vesligate the Relationships bet ween an A bbreviated Streaming Test and a Mid-year Test. 15. FENBY, B. P.—A Study of Moderating Procedures in Mathematics in Victorian Technical Schools. 16. GALLAGHER, M. F. — Principles of Instructional Design in Ihe Area of Primary Mathematics. 17. GLASS, C. ri. — Gain Scores: Problems Involved in Pre-lest Post-test Situation. 18. GUEST, D. — Bilingual Education —A Facilitator of the Acquisition of English as a Second Language. 19. HAEBERLE, R. L.-Gifted Children Programmes: A Case Study. 20. HOSFORD, .1. N. —Auditory Short-term Memory: Rehearsal Strategies. 21. JACKLIN, K. M. — Comparison of Mastery Learning and Traditional Methods of Grade VI Level. 22. KELLEHER, M. M. 'V.—Application of Psychology lo Teaching and Curriculum. 23. LYNE, M. L.— Teacher Morale in Technical Schools. 24. McLEAN, R. 3. —Computer-assisted Instruction in Elementary School Mathematics. 25. MORRISH, R. — The Integration of Trainable Menially Retarded Children into the Normal School Svstem. 26. NEWTON, W. D.-An Examination of Item Bias in the AM4(I) Test. 27. OPPY, N. M. — The Relevance of Overseas Teacher Effectiveness Research for Australian Teachers and Teacher Educators. 28. PITT, D. R. — Learning Variables: School and Home. 29. ROBERTS, J. L. — 777

J. SOCIOLOGY

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Culture and national unity: the development of radio broadcasting in Australia, 1922-45 — L. Johnson. 2. Emily Childcrs' Australian Diaries—L. Johnson and M. Sullivan. 3. The relationships between education, the media and work —H. Bannister, D. McCallum and others. 4. Thc geographical distribution of grade retention rates in Victoria —R. Teese. 5. Sex differences in subject-choice at HSC, Victoria, 1947-1978 —R. Teese. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BANNISTER, H. M. — Education and the State: An Application of Social Theorv to the Study of Education. 2. McCALLUM, D. D. — Posing the Problem of Inequality in Australian Education, 1934-1949. EDUCATION 93

MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 3. CHRISTIE, C. S. — Co-education in Independent Schools in Victoria. 4. DOVVNES. S. E. — The Changing Structure and Function of the Broadcasting Media in Australia with particular reference to Educational and Children's Broadcasting. 5. FORD, O. A. — A Studv of Local Communities and their Schools in the Shire o f Bravbrook, 1871-1921. 6. GOODAI.L, J. D. — Implications for Teaching in Victorian Stale Education. 1. KEANE, M. A. —The Phenomenonological Perspective as a Methodology Jor the Social Sciences. 8. McMAHON, A. C — Education and Technological Change. 9. SEDDON, J. M.-Literacy and Social Control. 10. THOMAS, C. C. - Educational Aspirations of Adolescent Girls. 11. UNGER, Z. M.-Effect of Social Theory on Social Studies Curriculum Materials. 12. WARNER, I. N. C. — Models of Community Development and their Application to A venues of Changes and Education. 13. WITNEY, N. A. —Organizational Climates and Attitudes in Educational Innovation. Minor Theses 14. ADAMS, D. J. — Youth Unemployment and the Curriculum. 15. BENO, M. U. — The Media Campaign on Teacher Oversupplv. 16. DETHRIDGE, E. M.-Sociology of Australian Education. 17. GIBSON, I. F.—An Investigation of Social Change. 18. GRANT, J. — Sociology of Educational Ideas. 19. HANDLEY, M. J. - Co-education and the 16-18 Year Old Girl. 20. JONES, S. L.-The Secondarv Correspondence School in Victoria 1938-1978. 21. KERW1CK, S. D. — Substantial Change in Education. 22. McKlNNA, C. — Factors Associated with Early School Leaving. 23. MAAS, F. W. — Early School Leavers and Ihe Australian Economy. 24. MAY, G. N.- VISE: Year 12 Secondary School Curriculum. 25. ORR, M. J. — Variations in Posl-compulsorv Recruitments. 26. ROBERTS, D. A.-Job Satisfaction of Teachers. 27. SALK1N, I. W . — Comparative Study of Literacy Standards in Primary Schools in Relation to Socio-economic and Cultural Factors. 28. SALVAS, A. D. — Post-compulsory Holding Measures of Victorian Secondary Schools. 29. SCOTT, C-Supplementary Grants Program. 30. WALTERS, M. A. — The Response of Parents and Community Involvement into Treatment of the Menially Retarded Child.

K. STUDIES IN EDUCATIONAL THOUGHT

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Progressive and alternaiive school theory—P. N. Gill. 2. Thc pedagogical 'theory' or Antonio Gramsci — D. F. Cave. 3. Education, culture and social reform: Daniel Bell —W. D. Hannah. 4. Culture, elites and education: a study of some contemporary English writers — K. 1. Palmer. 5. Chapter entitled 'Human Nature' and educational practice in a book edited by G. M. Dow —R. McA. Foster. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. D'CRUZ, V. —The Educational Thought of Vivekananda in its Ideological and Cultural Context. 2. GRIFFITHS, J. R. — Education as an Aspect of Social Reform in the Works of Some Vic­ torian Writers. MEd Theses in Progress Major Theses 3. BOWDEN, J. S. — The God-Concept of Adolescents (Australian and Fijian Samples). 4. G1DDENS, M. S.-The Twentieth Century Progressive Educational Music Concepts, Theories and Practical Applications of Dulcroze. 94 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

5. HEATH, R. M. — Freedom and Authority in the Work of Selected 'Progressives'. 6. KEHOE, M. — Changes in the Concept of the 'Catholic Teacher' 1965-1976. 7. MICHEL, J. E. M.— Fullness and Education: An Exposition and Interpretation of D. II. Lawrence's Educational Thought. 8. TAYLOR, D. P. - Yoga and Education.

Minor Theses 9. BARRETT, G. A. — 77ie Early History of Montessori Education in Australia. 10. GOODWIN, C. R. — The Educational Philosophy of Jacques Maritain. 11. HEINE, T. J.-Steiner Education: A Guide for Parents. 12. KENNEDY, J.-Education and the Utility of the Individual: A Study ofj. S. Mill. 13. McKNIGHT, C. — The Roman Quintitian: A Writer of Importance in the Development of Classical Educational Thought.

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. CLEMENTS, M. A.. — Relationships between the Universitv of Melbourne and the Secon­ dary Schools of Victoria 1890-1912. 2. NOBLE, G. W.— Aims, Men or Money? The Establishment of Secondary Education for Boys in South Australia and Ihe Port Phillip District of New South Wales 1836-1860. 3. SCHOFIELD, FI. L.— Attitude and Achievement: Teacher-Pupil Relationships.

Master of Education Theses Major Theses 4. BRADBEER, J. M.-/1 Criticism of Paul Hirst's 'Forms of Knowledge.' 5. HAMERSTON, M. T. - The Public Examination of English in Victoria: A Study of One Ex­ ternal Influence on the Secondary School English Curriculum 1944-1974. 6. HOWELLS, J. C— An Analysis and Interpretation of the Decline of an Institution. 1. RYAN, Y.— A Study of the Notion of Role in Relation to Ihe Behaviour of Full-time Mature Students in a Regional College. 8. SPEAR, S. M. — School-based Curriculum Development: lis Introduction and Implementa­ tion in Victorian Slate High Schools 1968-1978.

Minor Theses 9. CLACY, J. E. R. —An Assessment of the Herzberg Two-faclor Theory and of the Reaction of a Particular Group of Educational Administrators to a Questionnaire Pertaining to that Theory. 10. COSGRIFF, R. O. —Uses Made of Students' Writing: Implications in Terms of Language and Learning. 11. CURWOOD, M. R. — Achievement as a Function of Academic Status and Time. 12. DUDLEY, A. G. — Children's Comprehension of Mathematical Language. 13. HAMPEL, B. K. — Social Ideologies in Two Sets of Multicultural Curricular Materials. 14. HARDMAN, R. D. —Authority Bases of Victorian Primary School Principals. 15. ILES, R. L. — Victorian High School Principals' Perception of School Review Boards as In­ struments for Accountability. 16. JONES, S. E. — Advancement for Women in Organizations: A Training Perspective. 17. LARSEN, E. W. — A Study of the Effects of Streaming in Years Nine and Ten Mathematics. 18. LLOYD, G. L. — The Study Leave Program of the Education Department of Victoria. 19. MAKIN, G. J. — The Effects of Trait Anxiety, Mathematical Ability, Method of Testing, Task Difficulty and their Interactions on Stale A nxiety and Performance in Maths at Primary School. 20. MERLINO, F. — The Viclorian Teachers' Unions, 1946-1975. 21. PATEMAN, N. A. — Remediating the Elementary Mathematics of Prospective Primary School Teachers. 22. TOMKINS, M. R. — 77)e Senior High School in Western Suburban Melbourne: A Feasibility Study. 23. TRANTER, B. C. — Raymond Williams: A Critique of his Theory of Culture and Education. 24. WHITE, D. L. — An Historical Analysis of the Growth and Development of Geelong High School Within Ihe Evolution of Victorian Public Secondary Education in Ihe Years 1909-20. 25. WILLIAMS, E. G. — An Appraisal of The Educational Recommendations of the World Bank Mission Report on Papua New Guinea: 1964-74. EDUCATION 95

PUBLISHED WORK Bonks 1. MULHOLLAND, P. W. — The Music Industry in Australia, Victorian Commercial Teachers' Association, Melbourne (1980). 2. MURRAY-SMITH, S., ed.-Melbourne Studies in Education 1980, Melbourne University Press (1980). Chapters of Books 3. FAWNS, R. A. and TEESE, R. V. —Secondary school survey: A replication study of students' attitudes to their schooling 1972-1979, in Transition from School: An Annotated Bibliographv of Recent Australian Studies, ed. D. S. Anderson and C. Blakers, A.N.U., Canberra: 80-81 (1980). 4. HANSEN, I. V. —Religion and literature, in 777e Influence of Religion in a School, ed. F. I. McCarthy, AARE, Adelaide: 52-60 (1980). 5. HANSEN, 1. V. — Selfhood in relationships: The novel and the adolescent, in Readings in Children's Literature, cd. B. Murphy, Frankston Stale College: 174-183 (1980). 6. LEE DOW, K. C—Thc Williams report and the transition from school, in What's after School? Williams and Beyond, ed. B. J. Smith and C. J. Morgan, Australian College of Education, Canberra: 37-49 (1980). 7. MULHOLLAND, P. W. — Concept of internal and external balance, in Economy in Opera­ tion 4, ed. J. Brown et al., Victorian Commercial Teachers Association, Melbourne: 78-84 (1980). 8. MULHOLLAND, P. W. —Economic growth: Is it worth having? in Economy in Operation 3, ed. J. Brown et al., Victorian Commercial Teachers Association, Melbourne: 110-115 (1979) . Articles 9. BANNISTER, H.-The centralization problematic. Aust. J. of Education, 24 (3): 276-295 (October 1980). 10. BANNISTER, H., JOHNSON, L., JONES, S. and McMAHON, A.-Standards outrage. Radical Education Dossier, 12: 15-18 (Winter, 1980). 11. BAYLY, M.—Satay and Strzelecki: Breadth and depth in a multicultural curriculum. Polycom (Viclorian Education Department), 25: 12-16 (August 1980)/1 12. BERNARD, M. E. — Private thought in rational emotive psychotherapy. Rational Living, 75:3-9 (1980). 13. CROSS, T. C, NIENHUYS, T. G. and JOHNSON-MORRIS, J. E. - Linguistic feedback and maternal speech: Comparisons of mothers addressing hearing and hearing-impaired children. First Language, 1 (3): 32-43 (1980). 14. CROSS, T. Ci., NIENHUYS, T. G. and MORRIS, J. E.-Maternal speech styles to deaf and hearing children. The Australian Teacher of the Deaf, 21: 8-14 (1980). 15. DOW, G. M. —Humanistic teacher education. New Education, 2 (1): 1-15 (1980). 16. FAWNS, R. A. — The rough theatre of science teaching. J. of Curriculum Theorizing, 2 (2): 213-223 (1980). 17. FAWNS, R. A. — Science education and thc social contract: A rcsDonse to the Green Paoer. Lab. Talk; 24(5): 10-18 (1980). 18. FAWNS, R. A.—The treatment of aspects of change associated with thc concept of evolu­ tion in the Australian Science Education Project: The development of an argument through four approaches to content analysis. Research in Science Education, 9: 119-123 (1980). 19. FLEMING, K. G.— Criteria of learning and teaching. J. of Philosophv of Education. 14 (I): 39-51 (June 1980). 20. HANNAH, W. D. — Establishing a sense of the professional role. New Horizons. 20: 71-77 (November 1979). 21. HOLDAWAY, E. A. and MILLIKAN, R. H. - Educational consultation: A survey of four Alberta studies. The Alberta J. of Educational Research, 26(3): 194-210 (September 1980). 22. LEE DOW, K. C —Into the 1980s: Educational change in Australia. Comparative Educa­ tion, 16 (3): 245-255 (1980). 23. LEE DOW, K. C.-School to work or further study. Education News, 17(1): 32-34 (1980). 24. McCALLUM, D. D. — Naturalising educational inequality: An overview of the Australian intellectual field, 1935-1945. The Ausi. and N.Z. J. of Sociology, 16 (2y. 32-36 (July 1980). 25. MILLIKAN, R. H. — Some further comments on the Green Paper on strategies and structure for education in Victoria. The Educational Administrator 15: 11-21 (October 1980). 26. MULHOLLAND, P. W. —The nature and behaviour of the components of aggregate de-

ma/id as represented by C + I + G, + G2 + X - M. Compak (VCTA): .El8-25 (April/May 1980). 27. MURRAY-SMITH, S.-Radical nationalism and its audience. Westerly, 25 (4): 55-58 (1980) . 96 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

28. MURRAY-SMITH, S. — Will Young and his reminiscences. The Great Circle (Australian Association for Maritime History), 2 (2): 99-116 (1980). 29. NAYLOR, F. D., ELSWORTH, G. R. and ASTBURY, J. A.-Interaction of factorial com­ ponents and testing occasions in thc determination of scores on the A-State scale of the State- trait Anxiety Inventory. Aust. J. of Psychol. 32 (3): 217-223 (1980). 30. SCHOFIELD, H. L. —Attitudes towards reading and thc teaching of reading in final year student teachers. Clearinghouse on Reading and Communication Skills, ERIC Document Reproduction Series No. ED167946. Abstract in R1E, August 1979, 26 pp. 31. SCHOFIELD, H. L. and START, K. B. — Product variables as criteria in teacher effec­ tiveness research. J. of Experimental Education. 48: 130-136 (1979/1980). 32. SCHOFIELD, H. L. —On the compatibility of promoting both cognitive and affective pupil outcomes. Aust. Psychologist, 15 (2): 274 (1980). 33. SCHOFIELD, H. L. — Reading attitude and achievement: Teacher-pupil relationships. J. of Educational Research, 74(2): 111-119 (November/December 1980). 34. START, K. B. and STRANGE, L. — Primary reading and mathematics method in eight State colleges of Victoria. Brit. J. of Teacher Education, 6(2): 131-139 (1980). 35. WARD, S. D. —Classroom management. Inter View: Considerations in Learning (Victorian Education Department), I: 7-12 (1980). 36. WARD, S. K. — A heck of a lot of help. Inter View: Considerations in Learning (Viclorian Education Department) 2: 11-13 (1980). Reports 37. FAWNS, R. A. and TEESE, R. V.-Secondary Schools Survey: Students' Altitudes to their Schooling: A Replication Study, 1972-1979, Schools Commission, Canberra, 124 pp. (1980). 38. START, K. B. — China Report: A report to the Ministries of Education of Australia and the Peoples Republic of China on the visit of three Victorian educators, invited by China to lec­ ture at specific Chinese universities in May, 1979, 28 pp. (February 1980). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Language development in the young hearing-impaired child and the hearing child of deaf mule parents (in conjunction with Psychology). Schools Commission: Attitudes of 15-16 year olds to their schooling. CDC —Background concept mapping of ASEP units. CENTRE FOR THE STUDY OF HIGHER EDUCATION

INTRODUCTION Publication of research in the area of policy studies highlighted the establishment of this new research development within thc Centre. This year thc publication of eight State and Territory monographs marked the completion of the Australian-United States comparative study of the education policy process reported in the Research Report 1979 ditccted by G. S. Harman and F. M. Wirt (University of Illinois) in co-operation with staff from other Australian tertiary institu­ tions. A national study of Australian teacher educators and education policy by U. G. Beswick and G. S. Harman (with others) was extensively quoted in the Report of the National Inquiry into Teacher Education and a study of education and training for local government in Victoria by R. F. Garton and G. S. Harman was published as part of thc Final Report of the Slate Committee of In­ quiry. Evaluation surveys of student financial assistance schemes undertaken during 1980 for the Commonwealth Department of Education led to an invitation to undertake a further study of financial aspects affecting education and employment in 1981. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A study of the social and educational role and values of Australian academics — J. E. Anwyl, J. A. Bowden. 2. Evaluation surveys of student financial assistance schemes —D. G. Beswick, G. S. Harman, M. Hayden. 3. Intrinsic motivation, curiosity and career related behaviour—D. G. Beswick. 4. The roles of federal and slate government in thc financing and control of Australian tertiary education —G. S. Harman. 5. Evaluative study of the Gippsland Institute of Advanced Education-G. S. Harman, I.. Meek. 6. Student and employer views of the Students' Appointments Board at the University of Melbourne-R. F. Garton. 7. Career development of country school matriculants from non-metropolitan regions of Australia —D. G. Beswick. 8. Thc design of printed materials lo enhance learning —S. C. Driver. 9. Effects of thc new technology on curriculum and organizational structure —.1. G. Hedberg. 10. Visual perception and the design of pictorial learning materials —.I. G. Hedberg. 11. HSC results and the prediction of university performance —T. R. Dunn. 12. Learning Skills: a review of the needs and services to students ai the University —.1. A. Bowden, C. Macmillan (with .1. Frederick, B. James and L. Hancock, Student Counselling Service). 13. Thc evaluation of the university courses— D. G. Beswick, R. F. Garton, C. Macmillan. 14. Socioeconomic background of students entering undergraduate courses at the Univer­ sity-R. F. Garton, E. Greenblat. 15. Analysis of the concept of educational technology —J. C. Julian.

PUBLISHED WORK Books and Monographs !. BESWICK, D. G. and HARMAN, G. 3. wiih ELSWORTH. G. R., FALLON, B. j. and WOOCH, R. R.— Australian Teacher Educators and Education Policv: A Study of the Views and Characteristics of Academic Staff and Practising Teachers who Contribute to Teacher Education, Ccnirc for the Studv of Higher Education, University of Melbourne (1980). 2. GARTON, R. F. and HARMAN, G. S. -Education and Training for Local Government in Victoria, Volume III Research Appendices, Final Report of thc Board of Review of the Role Structure and Administration of Local Government in Victoria, Government Printer, Melbourne (1980). 3. HARMAN, G. S., MILLER, A. H., BENNETT, D. J. and ANDERSON, B. I. — Academic Becalmed—Australian Tertiary Education in the Aftermath of Expansion, Australian Na­ tional University Press, Canberra (1980). Chapters of Books 4. BESWICK, D. G. — Colleges of Advanced Education and thc Next Twenty-Five Years, in Academic Becalmed—Australian Tertiary Education in ihe Aftermath of Expansion, eds. G. S. Harman, A. H. Miller, D. J. Bennett and B. 1. Anderson, Australian National Universitv Press, Canberra: 195-218 (1980). 5. BOWDEN, J. A. and ANWYL, J. E. — Student Learning Skills: Attitudes of Australian Academics in Universities and CAES, in Freedom and Control in Higher Education, cd. A. H. Miller, HERDSA, Sydney: 102-109 (1980). 6. HARMAN, G. S. —Policy Making and the Policy Process in Education, in Canadian und 97 98 FACULTY OF EDUCATION

Comparative Education Administation, eds. R. Farq'uhar and I. Housego, University of British Columbia Press, Vancouver: 54-75 (1980). 7. HARMAN, G. S. — Policy and thc Administrator: Some Comments on Key Themes and Issues, in Canadian and Comparative Educational Administration, eds. R. Farquhar and 1. Housego, University of British Columbia Press, Vancouver: 150-158 (1980). Articles 8. BOWDEN, J. A.-Work patterns and interests of TAFE teachers. TAFE Quarterly, 2 (I): 5-8 (1980). 9. HEDBERG, J. G.-Client relationships in instructional design. Programmed Learning and Educational Technology Journal, 17 (2): 104-112 (1980). 10. HEDBERG, J. G. —Factors contributing to instructional innovation in higher education: A Comparison of Australian and American responses: Australian Societv of Educational Technology Yearbook: 62-72 (1979). Reports 11. BESWICK, D. G. — Higher Education and the Rural-Urban Drift in Australia, Research Working Paper 80.3, Centre Tor.lhe Study of Higher Education (1980). 12. BOWDEN, J. A.. — Background and Work Patterns of Teachers in Australian Technical and Further Education, Research Workine Paper SO. 1, Centre for the Studv of Higher Education (1980). 13. BOWDEN, .1. A. and PERRY, L. - Women Teachers in Australian Technical and Further Education, Research Working Paper 80.7, Centre for the Study of Higher Education (1980). 14. FREDERICK, .1., HANCOCK. L.. JAMES, 13., BOWDEN, J. A. and MACMILLAN, C — Learning Skills: A Review of Needs and Services lo Students at the University of Melbourne, University of Melbourne (1980). 15. HARMAN, G. S. — Explaining Politics in Education: Some Barriers and Some Theoretical Considerations, Research Working Paper 80.5, Centre for the Studv of Higher Education (1980). 16. HARMAN, G. S. and WIRT, F. M. (eds.)- The Education Policy Process al Stale Level: An Australian-United Slates Comparative Study (comprising 8 separate reports on each of the six Australian stales and thc Iwo federal territories). Centre for the Studv of Higher Educa­ tion (1980). 17. HARMAN, G. S. and SELBY-SM1TH, C.-Thc Universities of Australia in Com- monwealth Universities Yearbook 1980, 'The Association of Commonwealth Universities, London: 2-11 (1980). THKSKS IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. DUNBAR, G. A.—The development of policies and practices in advanced education 1964-78: Conflict or consensus. 2. HAYDEN, M. - Demand for Higher Education. 3. KINGS, C. B. — Factors predicting success of graduate diploma programs. 4. ROLLINS, B. R.— The University and the Professional Association. 5. ROSS, K. N. — Social area indicators and education achievement. MEd Theses in Progress 6. GARRETTY, H. — Placement of E-lype applicants wilh previous tertiary experience. 1. GILL1N, M. — Career Progress of Co-operative Degree Graduates in Engineering. 8. KER R, A. P. — The role of the Registrar's department in tertiary education institutions. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: A study of thc social and educational role and values of Australian academics. ERDC: Backgrounds and work roles of academic stall'. ERDC: Recurrent education provision —pilot study. Victorian Institute of Colleges: Evaluative study ofa regional college of advanced education. Commonwealth Department of Education: Preliminary study of student financial assistance. Committee of Enquiry into Education in South Australia: Report on Australian education struc­ tures. FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

DEAN'S REPORT The previous high level ol' fundamental and applied research has been either maintained or in­ creased in all areas ol' the Faculty. In particular, the support received from industry and govern­ ment lor applied research has again increased in the general field of energy conservation and utilization. Thc Faculty had taken the initiative to establish contact with industry and government in order to promote research programmes of mutual interest and some valuable developments have resulted, stimulating new research interests and providing assistance on problems of national importance. Multi-disciplinary research interests arc being developed between departments. The Antarctic Engineering programme is now well established in the Faculty with strong links between depart­ ments and to thc Faculty ofScience. The installation of new cold room facilities should ensure fur­ ther research development in this area. Several departments are also participating in the area of Appropriate Technology where a wide range of relevant research problems is emerging. 100 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

INTRODUCTION Research work in the Department of Chemical Engineering continued at a high level throughout 1980. Many of thc projects were concerned with aspects of energy research through ex­ amination of alternative sources of fuels, particularly liquid fuels, or energy conservation. It is believed that these projects will have a significant impact on thc utilization of local resources lo satisfy Ihc energy requirements of the community in the most effective manner. A number of the projects received financial support from outside agencies including Ihe National Energy Research Development and Demonstration Council, the Victorian Brown Coal Council and the Australian Research Grants Committee. ll should bc noted thai the majority of the projects on which postgraduate students arc engaged arc approaching completion. The recruitment of new postgraduate students is proving to bc very diffiult part ly because of the poor financial support available for research scholars in com­ parison to the salaries olfcrcd new graduates.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. FUEL ENGINEERING 1. Processes for dewatering brown coal —B. R. Stanmore, S. R. Siemon, D. G. Evans. 2. Structure of brown coal— S. R. Siemon. 3. Conversion of brown coal to liquid fuels —S. R. Siemon, R. S. Yost. 4. Handling of solid fuels— F. A. Bull. 5. Electrode grist and pitch from brown coal char and tar— F. A. Bull, M. A. Connor. 6. Identification of petroleum residues in arsons— I7. A. Bull. 7. Solvent extraction of brown coal —S. R. Siemon. 8. Brown coal slurries— S. R. Siemon. 9. Catalytic combustion for process heating and energy conservation —D. G. Wood. 10. Extrusion of brown coal-G. N. Kerkin. 11. Low temperature oxidation of brown coal—D. F. Radcliffc, I. J. Harris. B. BIOCHEMICAL ENGINEERING 1. Influence of environmental parameters on yeast alcohol fermentations —N. B. Pamment. 2. Simultaneous saccharification and fermentation of cellulose to ethanol —P. Ghosh, N. B. Pamment, W. R. B. Martin. 3. Sulphide toxicity in anaerobic digestion of piggery wastes —N. B. Pammenl. 4. Effect of salinity on activated sludge plant performance —M. A. Connor, N. B. Pamment, A. K. Turner. 5. Effect of air pollutants on Australian plants —G. N. Kerkin. 6. Continuous high tcmpcraturc/short lime sterilization of liquid foods using steam injec­ tion— D. G. Wood. 7. Immobilized whole cell biorcaciors for ethanol production — N. B. Pamment. 8. Characterisation of livestock salcyard runoff—N. B. Pamment, A. K. Turner. 9. Modelling kinetics of microbiological systems —I. J. Harris. C. TRANSPORT PHENOMENA 1. Droplet coalescence and breakage rales in a pulsed perforated plate liquid extraction col­ umn— H. R. C. Pratt. 2. Elfect of column diameter on axial dispersion in a pulsed perforated plate liquid extraction column-ll. R. C. Pratt, I. J. Harris. 3. Separation of wool grease components by multicomponent fractional extraction —I. J. Har­ ris. 4. Mass transfer coefficients in multicomponent vapour-liquid systems—R. S. Yost. 5. Condensation inside horizontal and vertical lubes —D. G. Wood. 6. The structure of the interface during condensation two-phase flow —D. G. Wood. 7. Thc development of velocity and temperature profiles in mixed convection —M. A. Connor, D. G. Wood. D. OTHER 1. Heal loss during anaesthesia —I. J. Harris. 2. Kineiics of oxidalion of organic components in aqueous solution —1. J. Harris. 3. Socio-economic factors in solid waste treatment and disposal — M. A. Connor. 4. Estimation of carbon dioxide content of exhaled gases —I. J. Harris. 5. Process for dewatering piggery waste —S. R. Siemon. CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 101

6. The ell'ects of incorporating organic wastes into clay for brick-making — M. A. Connor, D. S. Mansell. 7. Thc use of lamella thickeners for settling sludges from biological wastewater treatment plants —M. A. Connor. 8. Enhancement of lead acid battery operation —G. N. Kerkin. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. CAMIER, R. J., SIEMON, S. R. and STANMORE, B. R.-Colloidal Structure of Viclorian Brown Coals. Three examinations by Ullracenlrifugalion. Fuel. 59: 331-334 (1980). 2. CONNOR, M. A. — The Development of Recycling Practices under the Stimulus of Materials Shortages. Conservation and Recycling, 3 (3/4): 343-354 (1979). 3. HAMILTON, J. A., PRATT, H. R. C. - Measurement of Droplet Coalescence Rates in a Packed Extraction Column Usine a Novel Colorimetric Technique. Proc. Internal. Solvent Exln. Conf.. Liege (ISEC 80), Session 3, 'Dispersion': 80-91 (1980). 4. KERKIN, G. N. and MARTIN, VV. R. B.-How to Test a Traction Bailery Without Buying an Electric Vehicle, Simulation Society of Australia. Proc. of ihe lourth liienniul Con­ ference. Brisbane. 27-29 August 1980: 31-35 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. CHIAM, H. ¥. —The dynamics of bacterial growth on phenol. 2. DAVEY, K. R. — Continuous sterilization of liquid. 3. 'TANG, T. O. — Thermal changes in man during surgery and general anaesthesia. Master of Engineering Science 4. ABDUL-RAHMAN, R. — Removal of dye from coloured wastewaters by a trickling filler. 5. CARTER, G. — The incorporation of rice husks into kiln fired bricks. 6. DABBOUS, H. — Study of the operation of a biological waste treatment plant. 7. JUNG, V.. — The fluidized combustion of wet brown coal. 8. ROYLANCE, S. J.-/1 study of oxygen demand at South Eastern Purification Plant. 9. SEHIC, O. A. — The use of bioaclive fluidized sand for the rapid carbonaceous oxidation of domestic wastewater. 10. WOON, T. S. — Oil Slurry dewatering of brown coal litholypes. Master of Applied Science 11. THIA BEE CHING — Effect of ferrous chloride on anaerobic digestion of piggery waste. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BARNARD, W. J. - Primary breakage of brittle panicles. 2. BIEN, C. N.— Attack of carbon monoxide on brown coal. 3. CANDELORO, V .—Structure of brown coal and its effect on the hydrogenation process. 4. DEVLIN, 11. R. — Kinetics of oxidation of aqueous wastes. 5. DOWNING, P. G.-Liquidfuelfrom_brown coal. 6. HAMILTON, J. A. — Coalescence andbreakdown rales of droplets in a liquid-liquid extrac­ tion column. 1. KARIM, M. — Solvent attack on brown coal. 8. LILBURNE, G. M. — Condensation inside tubes. 9. RODRIGUEZ, A.-Effect of salinity on wastewater treatment plant performance. 10. STEVENS, G. W. — Geometry of the interface in horizontal annular adiabatic Iwo phase flo w. 11. STRACHAN, M. G. — Hydrogenation of Victorian brown coal. 12. THATCHER, P. J. — Identification of petroleum residues in arsons. 13. TUOHEY, P. G. — Mass transfer in multicomponent systems. 14. WARNER, J. —Fractionation of wool grease bv liquid-liquid extraction. 15. WOSKOBOENKO, I .-Brown coal slurries. MEngSc Theses in Progress 16. ARMSTRONG, R. J.- Extrusion of brown coal. 17. CHEUNG, I. — Immobilised whole cell bioreaclors for alcohol production. 18. ELLIOTT, N. - 77ie use of lamella thickeners for settling sludges from biological wastewater treatment plants. 19. HUYNH, T. S. — Electrical resistivity of chlorinated char. 20. POLAT, S. — Auto ignition of dried brown coal. 102 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

21. RYAN, R. P. —Industrial alcohol at elevated temperatures. 22. STUC1.EY, C. — Intracellular ethanol concentrations in yeast fermentation. MAppSc Theses in Progress 23. BAUMG ARTEL, K. II. - Binders from brown coal tar. 24. WALLIS, R.— Study of total dissolved solids in a wastewater treatment plant. SUBSTANTIAL CRANTS RECEIVED Grants have heen received as follows: ARGC: Thc development of processes for producing petroleum substitutes from brown coal. ARGC: Axial dispersion and its cll'cci on thc performance of pulsed extraction columns. ARGC: Thc role of oxygen containing functional groups in the hydrogenation of brown coal. NERDDC: Structure of brown coal. NERDDC: Brown coal slurries. NERDDC: Catalytic combustion as a pollution free energy conserving source of thermal energy. VBCC: Attack of carbon monoxide on brown coal. VBCC: Solvent attack on brown coal. Criminology Research Council: Thc identification of petroleum residues in arsons. CIVIL ENGINEERING

INTRODUCTION Agricultural Engineering continued to receive substantial external funding for its research ac­ tivities that involve wheat machinery research, farm buildings, soil-water interaction, and the engineering aspects of sheep handling. The importance of the use of computers in Civil Engineering has been highlighted by the at­ tention given to numerical modelling of sediment transport in catchments and rivers, travel de­ mand, freight movement, and land use and transport interaction. The investigation of the dynamics of fluid-structure interaction with application to offshore/coastal engineering continued, after producing some new and valuable results. Related work in offshore coastal-engineering has led to an investigation of pipeline stability under oscillating water tables. Projects on construction management have continued, with strong links with industry'being established.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING 1. Shallow flow of water through vegetation —A. K. Turner. 2. Spray irrigation for orchards in heavy soil —A. K. Turner. 3. Soil moisture and hydrology of the Basalt Plains of Western Victoria —A. K. Turner. 4. Runoff from cattle saleyards —A. K. Turner, N. B. Pamment. 5. Soil-water management in E. Java —A. K. Turner. 6. Irrigation and root development in wheat —A. K. Turner, J. H. Wilson. 7. Mechanised handling of sheep —R. P. Burrow. 8. Mechanised and pneumatic handling of wool —J. A. Brys'on. 9. Improved methods for wool severance —B. W. Field, A. J. Mackenzie. 10. Methods of depositing chemicals on sheep — B. W. Field. 11. Time scries modelling of hydrologic dala — T. A. McMahon. 12. Hydrology of world rivcrs-T. A. McMahon. 13. Computational procedures in low-flow hydrology —T. A. McMahon. 14. Reservoir capacity —yield analysis —T. A. McMahon. 15. Use of log-Pearson III distribution in hydrologic analysis —T. A. McMahon. 16. Functional design criteria for Australian Farm buildings —G. J. Redding. 17. Research needs in agricultural engineering in Australia —C. G. E. Downing. 18. Systems analysis of engineering operations in wheat harvesting —J. R. Burrow. 19. Performance of seed drills —R. H. Macmillan. 20. Kinematics of tractor chasses —R. H. Macmillan. 21. Power demand use in tillage and sowing operations —R. H. Macmillan. 22. Sub-surface application of fertiliser to rice —R. H. Macmillan. 23. Force-deflection characteristics of spring and spring-release cultivation tines—R. H. Mac­ millan. 24. Evaporation patterns in an agricultural catchment — D. E. Angus. 25. A simple method for estimating actual evaporation — D. E. Angus. 26. Frost prevention by fogging— D. E. Angus. 27. Solar energy applications in agriculture—D. E. Angus. 28. Estimating global radiation in Australia —D. E. Angus. 29. Thermal behaviour of greenhouses in relation lo heating requirements —D. E. Angus. 30. Collection and use of solar heat in plastic greenhouses — D. E. Angus. 31. Effect of ultrasonic waves on soils and seeds —D. E. Angus. B. HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING 1. Analysis and modelling of circular hydraulic jump —J. D. Lawson. 2. Coastal erosion studies —J. D. Lawson, H. R. Graze. 3. Unsteady flow (water hammer) in dosed conduits —B. B. Sharp. 4. Properties of a real sea slate through simultaneous measure of wave height and current — B. B. Sharp. 5. Dynamic physical properties of rivers and estuaries —B. B. Sharp. 6. Dynamic field investigation of integrated pumping installation —B. B. Sharp. 7. Developments of novel velocity measuring techniques — B. B. Sharp. 8. Two-phase flow in closed conduits —B. B. Sharp, I. C. O'Neill. 9. Unsteady flow in open channels—I. C. O'Neill. 10. Modelling of air-entraining vortices —I. C. O'Neill. 11. Cavitation in regulating valves—I. C. O'Neill. 12. Mathematical modelling of stream channel morphology—I. C. O'Neill, J. D. Lawson. 13. Mathematical modelling of sediment sources and transport within catchments- I. C. O'Neill, J. D. Lawson. 103 104 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

14. Simulation modelling oC water resources and multicomponent systems —I. C. O'Neill, J. D. Lawson. 15. Basic physics of particles transport —I. C. O'Neill, B. B. Sharp. 16. Boundary layer and friction properties of corrugated conduits —H. R. Graze. 17. Wave forces and wave run-up on coastal/offshore structures —H. R. Graze. 18. Research into thc rational behaviour of air chambers —H. R. Graze. 19. Hydrodynamics of iceberg towing —H. R. Graze. 20. Fundamentals of hydraulic capsule pipelining (HCP) —H. R. Graze. 21. Development of island breakwaters —H. R. Graze, J. D. Lawson.

C. SOIL ENGINEERING 1. Soil structure interaction in piled foundations —P. J. Hoadley. 2. Earth pressures on a vertically moving wall —P. J. Moore. 3. Evaluation of subgrade and flexible pavement materials—P. J. Moore. 4. Vibratory cutting of brown coal —P. J. Moore. 5. Landslide susceptibility of slopes following inundation —P. J. Moore. 6. Pipeline jacking —P. J. Moore. 7. Response of a tensioned pile under vibration —P. J. Moore. 8. Secondary compression behaviour ofa clay —P. J. Moore. 9. Response of footings to vibratory loads —P. J. Moore. 10. Earth pressures under repeated backfill loading —P. J. Moore. 11. Cracking susceptibility in clay cores of earth dams —P. J. Moore.

D. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 1. Dynamic response of structures lo wave action —L. K. Slcvens, N. Haritos. 2. The influence of load on the dynamic properties of simple frame structures— L. K. Stevens, N. Haritos. 3. Dynamic stability of columns and frames —R. Kohoutck. 4. Development of finite element methods —L. K. Stevens. 5. Development of limit state design methods—L. K. Slcvens. 6. Space frame analysis, design and testing—L. C. Schmidt, P. R. Morgan. 7. Fatigue strength of stud shear connectors in composite beams—L. C. Schmidt. 8. Pressure of granular materials on containers —L. C. Schmidt. 9. Behaviour of friction grip connections — L. C. Schmidt. 10. Response to load of clastomeric bridge bearings—D. S. Mansell. 11. Stiffened steel plates as structural elements in multi-storey buildings —D. S. Mansell. 12. Stability of stiffened shells —D. S. Mansell. 13. Stability of flexible frames-D. S. Mansell. 14. Behaviour of steel connections —D. S. Mansell. 15. Influence of micro-cracking on creep of concrete in compression —G. D. Base. 16. Stresses in end zones of prctensioncd prestressed concrete beams —G. D. Base. 17. Shrinkage and thermal cracking in reinforced concrete — G. D. Base. 18. Analysis of column-supported reinforced concrete slabs — G. D. Base. 19. Limit design of reinforced concrete slabs —G. D. Base. 20. Influence of secondary reinforcement on moment-rotation characteristics of R.C. beams —G. D. Base. 21. Prcstress loss in prestressed concrete — G. D. Base. 22. Seepage through cracks in concrete —G. D. Base.

E. TRANSPORT ENGINEERING 1. The development of travel demand models using census data— H. P. Brown. 2. Estimation of destination attractiveness for discretionary travel behaviour—H. P. Brown, A. S. Wisdom. 3. Modelling recreational travel demand in Victoria —A. S. Wisdom, H. P Brown. 4. Attitudinal measures in models of mode choice — H. P. Brown. 5. Modelling automobile ownership in Melbourne—D. W. Bennett. 6. Economics of road design standards —D. W. Bennett. 7. Road design standards and traffic accidents —D. W. Bennett, W. Mandrawa. 8. Land use and transport interaction and modelling —T. A. Patton. 9. Policy sensitive modelling of thc Victorian grain transport system — D. W. Bennett, M. J. Kent. 10. University of Melbourne emergency carpooling scheme — D. W. Bennett. 11. Time series analysis of public transport patronage data—H. P. Brown. 12. Analysis of urban freight movement in Australia —D. W. Bennett, P. L. Dumble. CIVIL ENGINEERING 105

F. ENGINEERING PRACTICES 1. The development, transmission and use of theoretical methods in construction management —P. R. Morgan. 2. Construction estimating with uncertainty —P. R. Morgan. 3. Management games in construction —P. R. Morgan. 4. Computer simulation of construction companies in a competitive bidding environment — P. R. Morgan.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. HARITOS, N., SHARP, B. B. and STEVENS, L. K. -A Study of a Simple Pile Structure in an Ocean Environment, in Mechanics of Wave Induced Forces on Cylinders, ed. T. L. Shaw, Pitman: 346-358 (1979). Articles 2. AGELIDES, N. and MANSELL, D. S.-Element Design for a Steel Services Core. Proc. 7th Australasian Conf. on Mechanics of Structures and Materials, Perth: 80 (May 1980). 3. ANGUS, D. E.— Estimating Solar Radiation in Australia. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust. : 171-174 (1980). 4. ANGUS, D. E. —Effect of Soil Moisture on Evapotranspiration. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust.: 184-187 (1980). 5. ANGUS, D. E. — Identification of areas of possible improvement of energetic efficiency through energy output/input analysis, in K. M. W. Howes and R. A Mummery (eds.), The Impact of Changes in Energy Costs on the Rural Sector of the Australian Economy. Proc. CSIRO Workshop, liunburv, W. A. Oct. 1979: 260-270 (1980). 6. APELBAUM, J. P. - Modelling Airport Ground Access. Proc. 10th Conf ARRB, Sydney: (1980). 7. ATTARD, J. and BASE, G. D. - Hillcrborg's Simple Strip Method of Design for Reinforced Concrete Slabs. Proc. International Conf. on Advances in Concrete Slab Technology, Dundee: 242-253 (April 1979). 8. BENNETT, D. W.—The Influence of Design Standards on Road Locations and Costs for Different Terrain Types and Traffic Descriptions. Proc. B. T. E. Workshop on Economics of Road Design Standards, Canberra: (1980). 9. BERVOETS, S. G., LE1TCH, C. J. and TURNER, A. K. — Close Range Photogrammetry for Soil-Surface Measurement. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust.: 40-44 (1980). 10. BREN, L. J. and TURNER, A. K.-Hydrologic Output of Small Forested Catchments: Im­ plications for Management. Aust. Forestry, 43: 111-117 (1980). 11. BROWN, H. P. and O'ROURKE, M. D.-A Cost Analysis of an Urban Rail System. Proc. 6th A.T.R.F., Brisbane: 359-376 (1980). 12. BROWN, H. P. and SINGLETON, D. J.-Low-Cost Demand Forecasting Using Existing Public Transport Patronage Data. Proc. 6th A. T.R.F. Brisbane: 631-644 (1980). 13. BROWN, H. P., KOCUR, G., McMANN, J. and DALY, A.-A Model of Statewide Recreational Travel Demand. Proc. P.T.R.C. Conf. University of Warwick, U.K.: (1979). 14. BURROW, R. P. and BRYSON, J. A. - Handling of Sheep and Wool for Automated Shear­ ing. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust.: 234-238 (1980). 15. CHANMEESRI, N. and TURNER, A. K. — Shallow Flow Through Vegetation in Irrigation. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust.: 156-160 (1980). 16. COOK, G. and SCHMIDT, L. C.-Frictional Behaviour of Roughened Steel Surfaces. Proc. Conf. on Lubrication and Wear in Engineering. l.E.Aust., Melbourne: 212-216 (1980). 17. DEVINE, L., MORGAN, P. R. and VIRDI, K. S.-Financial Factors Influencing the Operation of a Construction Company. Civ. Eng. Trans. l.E.Aust., Vol. CE22 (2): 112-117 (May 1980). 18. EDDIE, A. G. F., LAWSON, J. D., GRAZE, H. R. and DEAN, B. K.-The Effects of Con­ struction Techniques and Bulk Terminal Operational Requirements on thc Design Criteria for Island Breakwaters. /7//i Int. Conf. on Coastal Engineering: 105 (1980). 19. FLETCHER, S. and McMAHON, T. A.-Applications of Gould's Probability Matrix Technique to Multi-reservoir Systems. l.E.Aust., Civil Eng. T., Vol. CE22 (3): 236-240 (1980). 20. FRANCIS, A. J. and MANSELL, D. S.-Technology for Development: How Australian Engineering Schools Can Help. Proc. 1st Int. Conf. on Technology for Development, Canberra: 98-102 (Nov. 1980). 21. GOSS, J. R., AULT, R. G. and REDDING, G. J.-Transient and Steady State Temperature Fluctuations in a Downdraft Gas Producer. Proc. of Winter Meeting, Amer. Soc. Agr. Engs. : (1980). 106 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

22. HARITOS, N.—The F.F.T. Simulation of Response of Simple Offshore Structures to En­ vironmental Loading. Proc. 4th Biennial Conf. of the Simulation Societv of Australia, Brisbane: (Aug. 1980). 23. HARITOS, N. and SHARP, B. B.-Prototype Study of a Beacon Structure. Proc. Specialty Conf. A.S.C.E. Civil Engin. in the Oceans IV. San Fran.: 654-668 (Sept. 1979). 24. KENT, M. .1. and BENNETT, D. W.-Modelling Grain Handling in Victoria. Proc. 6th A.T.R.F., Brisbane: 411-427 (1980). 25. McMAHON, T. A. and CRONIN, D. L. R.-An Approach to Marginal Economic Analysis of Hydromctric Data Collection. Water Resources Bull., 16: 414-420 (1980). 26. MARTIN, T. C. and HOADLEY, P. J.-Non-Linear Finite Element Analysis of Diaphragm Wall Behaviour. Proc. Third Int. Conf. in Aust. on Finite Element Methods, Svdnev: 517-530 (1979). 27. MOODY, J. R. and MANSELL, D. S.-Dynamic Interaction of Bridge Bearings, Superstructure and Loads. 7//i Australasian Conf. on Mechanics of Structures and Materials, Perth: 80 (May 1980). 28. MOORE, P. J. —Analysis of Landslide Susceptibility of Slopes Following Inundation. Proc. Int. Conf. on Eng. for Protection from Natural Disasters, Bangkok: 527-538 (1980). 29. MOORE, P. J. and CHANDLER, K. R.-Foundation Evaluation for a High Rise Building in Melbourne. Proc. Sixth Southeast Asian Conf. on Soil Engineering, Taipei: 245-259 (1980). 30. MOORE, P. J. and DIGHT, P. M.-A Study of Pipeline Stability wilh an Oscillating Water Tabic. Proc. Third Aust.-N.Z. Conf. on Geomechanics, Wellington: 53-59 (1980). 31. MORGAN, P. R. —Thc Management Game as a Tool in the Continuing Education of Con­ struction Industry Personnel. Conf. on Engineering Education, l.E.Aust., Brisbane: 148-150 (Sept. 1980). 32. MORGAN, P. R., MANSELL, D. S., SCHMIDT, L. C, STEVENS, L. K. and BASE, G. D. —Alternative Presentations of Traditional Structural Mechanics Laboratory Work. Conf. on Engineering Education, l.E.Aust., Brisbane: 203-204 (Sept. 1980). 33. PATTON, T. A. and WIGHT, I. D.-Structuring ihc Urban Area to Make Better Use of Public Transport. Proc. Transportation Conf, l.E.Aust., Adelaide: 39-44 (1979). 34. PAVLOV1C, M., MANSELL, D. S. and STEVENS, 1.. K. — Stability of Flexibly Connected Plate Systems. Proc. A.S.C.E., 106, (ST10): 2077 (Oct. 1980). 35. REDDING, G. J. and GOSS, J. R.—Gas Production from Crop Residues: Fuel Moisture Content Limitations. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust.: 40-44 (1980). 36. SCHMIDT, L. C, MORGAN, P. R., O'MEAGHER, A. J. and COGAN, K.-Ultimate Load Behaviour ofa Full-Scale Space Truss. Proc. I.C.E., Part 2, Vol. 69: 97-109 (March 1980). 37. SCHMIDT, L. C, MORGAN, P. R., O'MEAGHER, A. J. and COGAN, K.-Collapse Test on a Large Space Frame. 7th Australasian Conf. on the Mechanics of Structures and Materials, Penh: 197-203 (May 1980). 38. SCHMIDT, L. C, and GREGG, B. M. — A Method for Space Truss Analysis in the Post- Buckling Range. Internal. J. Numerical Methods in Engineering, 15: 237-247 (1980). 39. SHARP, B. B. and GRAZE, H. R. - Water hammer in Pumping Systems. Pump Tech. Con­ gress (Melbourne). 5: 1-11 (1980). 40. SRIKANTHAN, R. and McMAHON, T. A.-Generation of Annual Flows using a Simple Markov Mixture Model. Proc. Hydrology and Water Resources Symp., l.E.Aust.: 140-144 (1980). 41. SRIKANTHAN, R. and McMAHON, T. A.-Stochastic Generation of Monthly Flows for Ephemeral Streams. J. Hydrology, 47: 19-40 (1980). 42. STEWART, R. L., TURNER, A. K. and WILSON, J. H. -The Response of Pasture Plants to Sub-irrigation. Aust. J. Soil Res., 18: 75-83 (1980). 43. STYLES, J. R. and BARRETT, J. R.—Technicians to Support Specialist Engineers —An Impossible Education Problem. Conf. on Engineering Education, l.E.Aust., Brisbane: 65-72 (1980). 44. TATTERSALL, C. G. and SCHMIDT, L. C. -Model Studies of a Plane Converging Hop­ per. Internat. Conf. Design of Silos for Strength and Flow. Lancaster Univ.: 1-23 (Sept. 1980). 45. TURNER, A. K., WATTS, P. J. and MACMILLAN, R. H.-An Australian Contribution towards Agricultural Engineering Training in Indonesia. Proc. Conf. Technology for Devel., l.E.Aust.: 103-105 (1980). 46. WALKER, L. W. and TURNER, A. K.-Quantity and Peak Flow Rates of Stormwater Runotrfrom a Cattle Feedlot. Proc. Agr. Eng. Conf. l.E.Aust.: 166-170 (1980). 47. WILLIAMSON, R. J. and TURNER, A. K.-Field Calibration of a Neutron Moisture Meter for Catchment Hydrology. Aust. J. Soil Res., 18: 1-11 (1980). 48. ZOPPOU, C. J. and O'NEILL, I. C. -Validity of Backwater Models for Flood Routing Ap­ plications. Proc. 7th Aust. Conf. on Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics: 179 (1980). CIVIL ENGINEERING 107

Reports 49. AGELIDIS, N. —Selected Literature Review of Shear Walls and Stiffened Steel Plate. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Slriict/07/78. 50. AGELIDIS, N.-Stiffened Steel Plate Shear Cores in Multi-Storey Buildings. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Siruel/08/78. 51. BENNETT, D. W. and others-Summary of Research 1979-80. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Trans/03/80. 52. BROWN, H. P. —Estimating Destination Attractiveness for Recreation Travel, Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Trans/05/80. 53. BROWN, H. P.-Modelling Recreational Travel Demand. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Trans/06/80. 54. BRYSON, J. A. and GOULD, I. V. - Experiments and Development of Wool Removal Techniques, in Wool Harvesting Research and Development. Ausi. Wool Corp. ed. P. R. W. Hudson: 469-480 (1980). 55. BURROW, R. P. — Development of Sheep Presentation Devices for Automated Shearing, in Wool Harvesting Research and Development. Aust. Wool Corp. ed. P. R. W. Hudson: 461-468 (1980). 56. DOWNING, C. G. E. et al.-Agr. Eng. Research and Investigations. Mar. 1979 to Feb. 1980. RR/Agr/OI/80. 57. GOTTLIEB, L. and MOORE, P. J..-A Pilot Study of thc Vibratory Cutting of Brown Coal. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng., RR/Soils/02/80. 58. KOHOUTEK, R.-Spring-Hinged Beam, Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng., RR/Slrucl/04/80. 59. LAWSON, J. D. and HALLS, C. A.-Report on Visits to Chinese Institutions of Higher Learning. RMIT Report (1980). 60. LAWSON, J. D. and O'NEILL, I. C.-The Role of Physical and Mathematical Models in Hvdraulic Engineering. A.CM. Water Engineering Tech. Committee, A CADS (1980). 61. MACKENZIE, A. .1. and BURROW, R. P.-Why arc new Methods needed in Wool Harvesting? in Wool Harvesting Research and Development. Aust. Wool Corp., cd. P. R. W. Hudson: 19-36 (1980). " 62. MACKENZIE, A. .(., FREEMAN, R. B. and BURROW, R. P.-Thc MUSHEEP Program in Mechanical Wool Severance, in Wool Harvesting Research and Development. Aust. Wool Corp. Ed. P. R. W. Hudson: 129-140 (1980). 63. MANSELL, D. S. —Loading Techniques for Scaffold Tests. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Strucl/9/78. 64. MANSELL, D. S. and ANDREW, S. I. — Aspecis of thc Impact of Tertiary Education in Papua New Guinea. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Struct/OI/79. 65. MOORE, P. J.-Behaviour of Layered Pavements. ARRB Special Report No. 19 (1980). 66. PATTON, T. A. —Transport Cost and Utility Functions for Use in Urban Development Models. Univ. Melb.. Dept. Civ. Eng. RR/Tr'ans/07/S0. 67. WILLIAMSON, R. J. and TURNER, A. K.-The Role of Soil Moisture in Catchment Hydrology. Tech. Paper 53. Ausi. Water Resources Council, Canberra: 180 (1980). Technical Reports 68. ANGUS, D. E. and NATHAN, R. J.—The Production of Ethanol from Irrigated Sugar Beets in N. W. Tasmania —A Feasibility Study. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. TR/Agr/05/80. 69. LAMBERT. J. M. — Solar Encrgv Applications in Agriculture. (IV) Thc Pig Industry. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. TR/Agr'/04/80. 70. LAMBERT, J. M., ANGUS, D. E. and REID, P. J.-Solar Energy Applications in Agriculture. (I) The Dried Fruits Industry. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng., TR/Agr/01/SO. 71. REID, P. J —Solar Energy Applications in Agriculture. (Ill) Thc Grain Industry. Univ. Melb., Dept. Civ. Eng. TR/Agr/03/80. 72. RIGBY, A. R. and LAMBERT, J. M.-Solar Energy Applications in Agriculture. (II) The Dairy Industry. Univ. Melb.. Dept. Civ. Eng.. TR/Agr/02/80. 73. WALKER, L. W., TURNER, A. K. and VANSELOW, D. V.-Thc Design of Cattle Feedlots in relation to ihe Quantity and Quality of Runoff Water, including Seepage. Univ. Melb.. Dept. Civ. Eng. TR/Agr/06/80.

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. BACZYNSKI, N. R. P. — Rock Mass Characterization and its Application ro Assessment of Unsupported Underground Openings. 2. BASSETT, R. C. - Transport and Urban Structures for New Cities. 3. HANAOR, A.—Force Li mi ling Devices in Space Trusses. 4. RICHARDS, 1. D.-/1/I Optimization of Rural Rail Goods Movement. 108 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

5. SCOTT, G. — Imperfections in Stiffened Steel Plate Structures. 6. WILLIAMSON, R. J. — Soil Moisture and Hydrology of the Basalt Plains of Western Vic­ toria. Master of Applied Science 7. GRAVES, J. W. — The Potential Market for Limited Range Automobiles. Master of Agricultural Science 8. GOULD, 1. V.— Vacuum-Pneumatic Conveying of Raw Wool. Master of Engineering Science 9. ALTMANN, A. E. — Numerical Modelling of Pine Sediment Transport in Catchments. 10. BENNETT, A. L. — Structural Response to Wind. 11. CARTER, G. — The Incorporation of Rice Husks into Kiln Fired Bricks. 12. FACHRI, S. A. — Industrial Buildings— The Space Frame Alternative. 13. NG, T. E. — Reinforcement Placement in Concrete Slabs. 14. FA1RHURST, L. - Circular Frevssinet Concrete Hinges. 15. PHANG, P. W.-Space Truss Subassemblages. 16. PUMP, W.-In Situ Strength ofa Residual Fissured Clay. 17. WATTERS, K. — Developments in Hole Elements. 18. WH ITE, P. D. — Evaluation ofa Repeated Loading Triaxial Machine as an Indicator oj Base Course Material Performance. 19. WONG, A. W.C. — Impulsive Loading of Tubular Cantilevers. 20. WOOD, Y. S.— Fatigue Behaviour of Concrete/Stiffened Plate Composite Construction. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. AGGARWAL, A. K.-Stability of Stiffened Conical Shells. 2. BAMFORD, W. E. — Geotechnical Studies for Tunnelling Projects. 3. BROWN, H. P.—Altitudes in Behavioural Modelling—A Study in Modal Choice. 4. CHANDLER, I. — End-block Zones in Pretensioned Prestressed Beams. 5. GABRIC, A. S. — Mathematical Modelling of Thermal Discharges inAquutic Environments. 6. GARZOLI, K. V. — Thermal Behaviour of Greenhouses and its Relation to their Heating Re­ quirements. 7. GOLDSTEIN, S. — Moment Distribution in Non-prismatic Members and its Application lo Flat Slab Analysis. 8. GREGG, B. — Effects of Statistical Variations of Properties on the Ultimate Load Behaviour of Space Trusses. 9. JOWETT, P. H.-Effect of Ultra-sound on Soil Structure and Seed Germination. 10. KENT, M. —Modelling the Viclorian Grain-Handling System. 11. KOHOUTEK, R. — Dynamic Stability of Beams and Frames. 12. LOO, Y. H. — Influence of Microcracking on Creep. 13. McNAMEE, B.— A Study of Wave Forces on Cylinders in the Inertial Regime. 14. MORGAN, P. R. — Development and Application of Theoretical Methods in Construction Management. 15. PATHAK, J. P. —Studies on the Role of Thermal Pretreatment in Mechanical Dewatering of Lucerne Forage. 16. REDDING. G.— Solar Energy Applications and Energy Conservation Techniques for Water Heating and Milk Cooling in a Farm Dairy. 17. RODRIGUEZ, A.—Effect of Salinity in Performance of Biological Waste Treatment Systems. 18. THOMAS, J. D. - Thermal Effects in Bridge Decks. 19. TRUONG, H. V. P.-Behaviour of Foundations of Structures. 20. ULLAH, H. — Experimental Investigation of Mass Transport Velocity in a Laboratory Flume. 21. WALKER, L.-Runofffrom Cattle Saleyards. 22. WASHUSEN, G. — Time-Dependent Properties of Melbourne Silurian Mudstone. 23. WATTS, P. J. — Evapo-transpiration from an Agricultural Catchment. 24. WESTCOTT, R. - Lateral Stability of Trusses. 25. YADAV, A. R.-Strength and Deformation Characteristics of Fillet Welds. 26. ZOPPOU, C. -Flood Routing in Open Channels with Flood Plain Storage. MEng Theses in Progress 27. ATTARD, S.-Hillerborg's Simple Strip Method. 28. BETHUNE, A. J. - Behaviour of Very Soft Silts and Clavs. 29. CALLINAN, R. J. -Optimization of Stiffened Plates. CIVIL ENGINEERING 109

30. CHIN, C. H.-Effect of Repeated Loading on Earth Pressures. 31. CHOONG, Y. T.-Effect of Vertical Wall Movements on Earth Pressure. 32. CONNELLAN, G. J.-Collection and Use of Solar Heat in Plastic Green Houses. 33. CRAWFORD, B.-Fogging for Frost Prevention. 34. DUMBLE, P. L. -Modelling Urban Freight Movement in Australia. 35. FRIEND, H. A.-Behaviour of Rock- Socketed Piles. 36. GOULD, N. S. — Power Demand and Use in Tillage and Sowing Operations on Wheat Farms. 37. HOR, A. Y. T. — Cracking Susceptibility of Compacted Clay. 38. KHOO, C. L. — Structural Standardization. 39. LEE, S. W.— A Studv on the Development on the Air-Liquid Nozzle for Sprayers. 40. LIM, S. H.-Shrinkage Cracking in Thin Walts. 41. LOH, C. O.-Preslress Loss. 42. LYLE, C. W. - Water Re-distribution Following Point Source Irrigation. 43. McMICHAEL , I. — Management of Large Projects Using the "Client-Design/Build Com­ pany" Approach. 44. MAK, E. K. F. — Physical Performance of Wastewater Stabilization Ponds. 45. MANDRAWA, W.-The Relationship Between Road Accidents and Road Design Stan­ dards. 46. NG, T. C— Management Problems Facing Construction Companies with Head and Site Offices. 47. PHILLIPS, B. —Sediment Mode/ling in Alluvial Streams. 48. PORTER, J. A.-/In Analysis of Trip Generation Playgrounds. 49. RAMINA, R. -Seasonal Allocation Policies for the Loddon River System. 50. SEAMER, P. R. - The Temporal Stability of Trip Generation Models. 51. SENTONGO-K1BAI.AMA, Sub-surf ace Application of Fertiliser on Paddy Soils. 52. SMITH, D. Wl. —Selection of Flexible Pavement Materials. 53. TAN. F. B. H. — Financing Arrangements for Engineering Building Projects. 54. TAN, T. H.— An Aspect of Space Truss Behaviour. 55. TATTERSALL, C. — Pressure of Granular Materials on Containers. 56. TAYLOR, ]. —Creep in Particle Board Panels. 57. THARMARATNAM, S. — Effect of Secondarv Reinforcement on the Moment-Rotation Characteristics of Concrete. Hinges. 58. VAN DER MOLEN, J. L.-Curing of Concrete. 59. WISDOM, A. S.-Modelling Recreational Travel Demand. 60. WONG, K. T. — Friction Losses in Corrugated Plastic Pipes. 61. WONG, K. W.-Stability of Flexible Frames. 62. YTTRUP, P. J. — Consolidation Characteristics of Hydraulic Fill. 63. YOGARANANDAN, J.-Effect of Water on Cracking in Concrete. 64. YONG, A. F. K.— Secondary Compression of Coode Island Silt. MAppSc Theses in Progress 65. CRAG1E, R. — Seepage from Garbage Pits in Sandy Soils. 66. JEFFRIES, J. — Water Usage for Irrigation at Koo Wee Rup. 67. STAHL, V. — Behaviour of Sludge Drying Beds. MAgrSc Theses in Progress 68. A1.-AMOOD1, A. S. — Rool Growth of Crop Plants in Relation lo Timing of Irrigation. 69. EKANAYAKE, M.—A Simple Method for Estimating Evaporation.

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian-Asian Universities Co-operation Scheme: Soil-water Management Program in In­ donesia. Australian Research Grants Committee: Wave Spectra Generation and Simple Structures Response. Australian Road Research Board: Development of Travel Demand Models using Census Data. Australian Welding Research Association/Commonwealth Department of Productivity: A.I.S.C. Standardized Connections. Australian Wool Corporation: Engineering Aspects of Sheep. Australian Wool Corporation: Technology Transfer. Commonwealth Council for Rural Research and Extension: Mechanisation Research Needs. Commonwealth Extension Services Grant: Farm Buildings. 110 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

Country Roads Board, Victoria: Prestress Loss in Prestressed Concrete Beams. Country Roads Board, Victoria: General Grant. Department of Agriculture (Vic): Agricultural Engineering. Ministry of Conservation (Vic): Runoff from Cattle Salcyards. Reserve Bank: Agricultural Buildings. Wheat Industry Research Committee of Victoria: Wheat Machinery Research. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

INTRODUCTION While a number of research projects within thc Department of Electrical Engineering con­ tinue lo attract outside funding, three in particular have drawn special attention from industry and the community at large. Professor J.H. Anderson's work on the control and management of large power systems is of vital interest to thc State Electricity Commission who directly support the work by sponsoring research students. Dr. D. J. Dewhurst has attracted the attention of thc Department of Science and Technology with his Aids to the Handicapped project and it is expected that substantial funding will bc pro­ vided for the commercial development of this equipment. Mr. J. C. MeCutchan published the results of his research on electric fencing in the form of a report entitled Electric Fence Dcsiign Principles. This report has been enthusiastically received by the agriculture sector and further significant financial support for the work is anticipated.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. WAVE DIGITAL FILTERS K. M. Adams 1. Wave digital filter hardware design, control and operation. 2. High-level language microcomputer adaptive control. B. POWER-ELECTRONIC SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN K. M. Adams, A. E. Ferguson, R. A. Minasian 1. Power electronic system design. 2. Modelling of Power MOSFETS. C. BIOENGINEERING D. .1. Dewhurst 1. An implanted nerve deafness prosthesis. 2. Computer assisted training for the physically handicapped. 3. Optimal design of cardiac defibrillators. 4. Control of skilled human limb movements. D. MICROWAVES D. F. Hewitt, R. A. Minasian 1. Large signal modelling of microwave MESFET transistors. 2. Analysis of MESFET mixers. E. ELECTRIG FENCE SYSTEMS .1. C MeCutchan 1. Development of automatic observation equipment. 2. Training animals lo respeel electric fences. 3. Field performance of electric fence components. 4. Electric fencing for kangaroos. 5. Solar powered electric fence systems. 6. Fence pulse strength monitor systems. F. CONTROL SYSTEMS J. S. Packer, J. H. Anderson 1. Modal control via eigenvalue and eigenvector assignments. 2. Optimal control methods for industrial processes. 3. Frequency domain controller design for multivariable systems. 4. Computer-aided design with interactive graphics. 5. An evaluation of large-scale systems methods. G. COMMUNICATIONS D. A. H. Johnson 1. Optimal signal processing. 2. Two dimensional algorithms for picture processing and transmission. 3. Data compression studies for facsimile. 111 112 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

H. POWER SYSTEMS J. H. Anderson. K. W. Macklcy, I. C. Cochrane 1. Digital computers and interactive graphics. 2. Medium term dynamics of electrical power systems. 3. Control system design for power systems. 4. Optimum usage of energy resources. 5. Energy storage. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. McCUTCHAN, J. Electric Fence Design Principles, Electrical Engineering Department, University of Melbourne (1980). Articles 2. ANDERSON, J. H., WILSON, W. J. andOKONGUIR, E. H. - Nonlinear stabiliser design applied to microalternator system. Proc. IEE, 126 (\Q): (Oct 1979). 3. COCHRANE, 1. C—The hcatbank project in Victoria, Australia, IEE Conf. Proceedings, "Effective Use of Electricity in Buildings", 29 Apr.-2 May, 1980, IEE Conference Publication Number 186: (1980). 4. COCHRANE, I. C. — Electrical adjustable speed drives. Pump Technical Congress Papers, Australian Pump Manufacturers Association, 26 November, 1980: Paper No. 6. 5. McCUTCHAN, J. —Modern use of electric fencing. Proc. Grassland Soc. of Vic. Annual Conference: 88-96 (1980). 6. McCUTCHAN, J. and SUMNER, R. —A pioneer hydro-electric scheme. Institution of Engineers, Australia, Annual Conference, Adelaide, 1980: 88-95. 7. PRICE, C. J.-Thc use of pascal data structures in describing cascade networks. Nal. Microcomputer Conf. on Personal Computing for thc Eighties, Canberra, Julv, 1980: 23-1, 23-9 (1980). Reports 8. DEWHURST, D. J., CHAN, L. and SUM, C. M. A. — FRED (Friendly Educational Device): An introduction to programming. Departmental Research Report No. 2, 1980. 9. PRICE, C. J.-Notes on system maintenance for SBC 80/10 MDS 210. Departmental Research Report No. 1, 1980. THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. MINASIAN, R. A. — Large signal operation of microwave transistors. Master of Engineering Science 2. LAIRD, R. — Data processing Jor an implanted nerve deafness prosthesis. 3. MACLEOD, .1. R.— An ionospheric path simulator. Master of Agricultural Science 4. MeDONALD, C. L.— Animal response lo electric fences.

THESES IN PROGRESS PHD Theses in Progress 1. DLUZNIAK, R. — Frequency domain controller design for multivariable systems. 2. JIN, Y .—Adaptive equaliser studies. 3. SUM, C. M. A. —A speech picessor for a nerve deafness prosthesis. 4. TAN, J. S. — Model control via eigenvalue and eigenvector assignments. MEng Theses in Progress 5. BARFOOT, G. — Solar cell powered converters working at maximum power transfer. 6. COCHRANE, I. C — Electric thermal storage space heating. 7. CALDER, P. R. — Developments of an auditory prosthesis. 8. CHAN, K. LL. — Micro-computer based system for aid lo the handicapped. 9. CHUNG, J. — Investigation of the series resonant switching power converter. 10. DAVIE, W. J. —Design ofa microprocessor based training aid. 11. DE KEIZER, A. — An adaptive cardiac defibrillator. 12. FENNELL, S. — Long term dynamics of a power system. 13. HEIM, E. J. P.-High speed logic. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 113

14. HOWARTH, J. W.—Simulation and analysis of long term dynamics. 15. MeDONALD, M. — Studies of the operation of the cyclo-converter. 16. NAUVEL, R. R. — Optimisation of power systems. 17. PRICE, C. J .—Adaptive wave digital filters. 18. RATH BONE, G. — Data Characterising muscular function. 19. ROWE, J. P. —The electronic music studio. 20. SILVER, D. — Data compression and coding for facsimile transmission. MAppSc Theses in Progress 21. DOWNING, M. - P. W.M. controlled DC lo DC switching power regulator. 22. THOMAS, L. R. — Strategy of control of human limb movement. MAgrSc Thesis in Progress 23. COATS, S. — Sensory perception of electric fences by cattle. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Power electronic system analysis and design. ARGC: Adaptive wave digital filter. ARGC: Simulation and control of electrical power systems including applicability of multivariable control system design theory. ERB: Converters for suppression of user generated higher harmonics by power converters and in­ verters. ERB: Real time control of interconnected power systems and boiler turbine units. ERB: Optimal design of defibrillators for the emergency treatment of electric shock. ERDC: Training and retraining of handicapped persons. RRB: Thyristor D. C. converter with particular reference to variable power sources. RRB: Communication applications of microwave field effect transistors. NH & MRC: Development of a hearing prosthesis. NH & MRC: Training and retraining of handicapped persons. Rural Credits Development Fund, Reserve Bank of Australia (RCDF): Practical electric fence design. 114 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

INDUSTRIAL SCIENCE

INTRODUCTION Research in Industrial Science covers two areas: physical and chemical properties of polymers related to their use as practical materials; environmental chemistry in the fields of air pollution and natural waters. In polymer research, considerable attention has been given to the long-term behaviour of polymers in environments simulating real working environments, e.g. effect of ultra­ violet radiation. In the environmental area, studies have been made of thc concentration levels of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (some of which are carcinogens) in airborne particles, river sediments and marine fauna. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Environmental stress cracking of poly(cthylene) —O. Delatycki. 2. Ultraviolet degradation of polymers— O. Delatycki. 3. Influence of composition and processing on the rheology of poly(vinylchloridc) —O. Delatycki. 4. Dielectric response of polymeric materials —G. Pratt. 5. Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons in marine sediments and fauna —J. Bagg. 6. Ionic interactions in estuarine waters and sediments —J. Bagg. 7. Air pollution and planning —S. .1. Mainwaring.

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Applied Science 1. BUCZMA, E. — Flow of poly(ethvlene) foams 2. GOLDMAN, M.-Dental Polymers 3. STIRLING, D. — Concentration and size distribution of PAH and particulates collected from Melbourne atmosphere. 4. WIESE, A. —Melt properties of poly(ethylene). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. OLSZEWSKI, A. —Environmental stress cracking. 2. BIGGER, S. - U. V. degradation of polymers. MAppSc Theses in Progress 3. BISHOP, ]. —Phosphate-fluoride interactions in the River Yarra. 4. FRIEDL, C — Influence of composition and processing on rheology of rigid poly( vinylchloride) MEngSc Theses in Progress 5. CLARKE, N.— An emissions inventory of pollution in Ballarat. 6. LYSENKO, S. — Lead particle size at selected sites in Melbourne. 7. THORPE, J. — Validation of some line source models for dispersion of pollutants near road­ ways. SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED The following grant has been received: AMSTAC: Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons in marine organisms from the Great Barrier Reef. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

INTRODUCTION The Dcpanmeni has a strong research programme covering both fundamental studies of physical phenomena and applications of direct benefit to society. Energy conservation and utiliza­ tion arc of major importance lo an industrialized society, and thc Department's research pro­ gramme has reached to this need. The demand for efficient manufacturing is being met by a series of investigations into the technical and economic factors affecting metal removal and component assembly operations, with a view to determining the optimal conduct of these operations in safe working environments. Fundamental research in fluid mechanics has achieved international recognition by helping to uncover the basic structure of turbulence; this in turn will lead to better control of the aerodynamic drag of vehicles and the dispersal of effluent fumes from chimneys. In these and other instances there is a continual interplay between fundamental research in the laboratory and engineering phenomena in practice. Such interactions are often overlooked in facile classifications of research into basic and applied categories. Thc high level of sponsored research experienced in 1979 continued in 1980, with major con­ tracts awarded for investigations into turbulence flows, energy conversion and utilization, vehicle dynamics and road safety, and the design and operation of manufacturing systems, ln addition there has been much support and encouragement from local industry. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS W. W. S. Charters, V. R. Megler, E. E. Milkins and H. C. Watson 1. Comparison of alternative forms of solar heal pumps installed in houses. 2. Optimizing heat pump design and suppressing refrigerant instability. 3. Li Br Absorption cycle air conditioner performance using solar energy. 4. Boiling properties of Li Br water mixtures. 5. Effects of wind and sky temperature on flat plate collectors. 6. Performance of thc Trombe-Michcl wall in two low energy houses. 7. Laser-inlcrfcrometer study of free convection suppression in collectors. 8. Solar power generation with stationary mirrors and a tracking heat pipe collector. 9. Heat pipe and Hal plate collector comparison. 10. Solar ponds for process heat and desalination. 11. Organic fluids and steam turbines for low power production. 12. Mass flow rate variations in heat exchangers. 13. Development of the hydrogen engined car. 14. Development of driving cycles for energy and emissions measurement. 15. Forecasting emissions and fuel consumption of traffic systems. 16. Quantifying fuel conservation strategies. 17. Effects of grade, temperature and cold starting on fuel consumption. 18. Transient emissions and fuel consumption simulation. 19. Controlling s.i. engine combustion for low pollution. 20. Evaluation of alternative fuels for transport. 21. Small, fuel efficient turbo charged engine. 22. Advanced engine/vehicle dynamometer control. B. DYNAMICS M. C. Good 1. Motorcycle rider skill assessment. 2. Braking, stability and handling of motorcycles. 3. Evaluation of short range delineation. C. ENGINEERING DESIGN W. P. Lewis and A. E. Samuel 1. Computer aided design and manufacture. 2. Design of tunnel-boring machinery 3. Design parameters of wheelchairs. 4. Facilities layout. 5. Information processing and decisions in engineering design. D. FLUID MECHANICS P. N. Joubert, A. E. Perry and D. I. Pullin 1. Viscous resistance of ship shapes. 115 116 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

2. Thc separated flow behind bluff bodies with splitter plates. 3. Low Reynolds number turbulent boundary layers. 4. The effect of longitudinal curvature on turbulent boundary layer behaviour. 5. The eddying structures in periodic co-flowing jets and'wakes. 6. The structure of high Reynolds number flows in jets and wakes. 7. Turbulent boundary layer development over wavy and rough boundaries. 8. A visual study of turbulent spots and the transition process. 9. Vortex filament modelling of the structure of turbulent boundary layers. 10. Development of new optical techniques in the study of flow patterns. 11. A study of the unsteady vortex shedding process behind blunt bodies. 12. Fundamental study of eddying motion about ground based bodies and devices. 13. A study of phase averaged large scale structures in turbulence. 14. Constant vorticity extension of free-streamlinc wake flows. 15. Numerical study of separation and reattachment bubble in a turbulent boundary layer. 16. Nonlinear vertical stability of a vortex layer at a wall. 17. Boundary layer separation at a right angle corner due to a moving wall. 18. Turbulent shear flow in rough wall pipes and over flat surfaces. 19. Effects of coriolis force on turbulent duct flow. 20. Response of a Salter duck to a wave train. 21. Air-sea interaction study. 22. On the mechanism of wall turbulence. E. HUMAN ENGINEERING E. R. Hoffmann 1. Night and day driving. 2. Comprehension of traffic signs. 3. Design of advance direction signs. 4. Studies of human movements with application to predetermined motion time systems. F. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING E. J. A. Armarego and E. .1. Colvillc 1. Mechanics of cutting analyses for machining operations. 2. Temperatures in machining operations. 3. Nomenclature and geometrical specifications of cutting tools. 4. Assessment and prediction of cutting performance. 5. Economics of machining operations. 6. Quality control in manufacturing industry. 7. Financial modelling of business firms. 8. Computerized management service information. ' 9. Group technology. 10. Tolerance technology. 11. The use of computers for the reading of engineering drawings. 12. Analyses of optical measuring instruments.

G. SOLID MECHANICS AND BIOMECHANICS J. F. Williams and K. C. Brown 1. Estimation of residual stress distribution in the vicinity of a fatigue crack. 2. Mathematical models for fatigue crack growth rate wilh constant and variable stress intensity factors. 3. Influence of thc Bauschinger effect on stresses at thc crack lip. 4. Effect of overload ratio and crack length on residual crack tip stresses. 5. Crack growth arrcsl. 6. Crack closure and compliance. 7. Fatigue strength of steel plates with fillet welded attachments. 8. Biomechanics of equine locomotion. 9. Flotation reduction of equine fractures. 10. Safety requirements in bus seats and seat anchorages. 11. Failure criteria for carbon fibre reinforced plastics. 12. Vibration of anisotropic shells. 13. Analysis and design of joinis in fibre reinforced plastics. 14. Energy storage in supcrflywhcels. 15. Effect of growth stresses on fruit cracking and split ting. 16. Stress distributions around surface imperfections in fruit. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING i17

H. SYSTEMS THEORY AND TECHNOLOGY C. J. Pengilley, P Milner and L. J. Jones 1. Analysis of complex system. 2. Multi-crileria decision making. 3. Pulse control of systems using d.c. motors. 4. Some comparisons between optimal and classical control system responses. 5. Technology and culture. 6. History of technology. 7. Kinematics of technology. 8. Kinetics of technology. 9. Technical problem solving. 10. Technical history of Vickers Ruwolt. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. CHARTERS, W. \V. S. —Passive Solar Heating Systems, in Solar Energy Applications in Buildings. Academic Press, N.Y.: 139-144 (1980). 2. CHARTERS, W. W. S. and PRYOR, T. L. -Solar Energy-Principles and Applications, in Phvsics Module Option (H.S.C. Text): (1980). 3. PERRY, A. E., WATMUFF, .1. II. and CHONG, M. S.-Flow Visualization using Hot- Wire Anemomctrv, in International Symposium on Plow Visualization, Bochum, Hemisphere Publishing Corp., U.S.A.: (1980). 4. SMITS. A. J. — A Visual Study ofa Separation Bubble, in International Symposium on Plow Visualization, Bochum, Hemisphere Publishing Corp., U.S.A.: (1980). Articles 5. ARMAREGO, E. J. A., HO, P. Y. K. and CHIA, T. H.-An analysis for optimizing pro­ duction rate cutting conditions in rough turning 1 —Continuous case solution. J. Eng'g. Prod.. 3: 153-184 (1979). 6. ARMAREGO, E. J. A. and WRIGHT, J. D.-An analytical study of three point grinding methods for general purpose twist drills. Annals. C.I.P.P., 29 (I): 5-10 (1980). 7. AMAREGO, E. J. A. and CHIA, T. H.—The influence of constraints on Maximum produc­ tion rate cutting conditions. International Conference on Manufacturing Engin. (I.E.Aust.J: 36-41 (1980). 8. DOREY. A. D., GOOD, M. C. and JOUBERT, P. N.-A variable free control characteristic vehicle. Vehicle Svstem Dynamics. 9: 19-44 (1980). 9. FOX, J. C, GOOD, M. C. and JOUBERT, P. N. — Development of breakaway utilitv poles. ARRH Proceedings. 10: 202-219 (1980). 10. GOOD, M. C —Some studies of driver-vehicle-roadway interactions. IATSS Review, 7: (1980). 11. HOFFMANN, E. R. and MacDONALD, W. A.-Short-term memory for slack and diagrammatic advance direction signs. Proc. Tenth Conference Australian Road Research Hoard. 10 (4): 17-22 (1980). 12. HOFFMANN, E. R., PAYNE, A. and PRESCOTT, S. -Children's estimates of vehicle ap­ proach times. Human Factors, 22 (2): 235-240 (1980). 13. HOFFMANN, E. R. and MacDONALD, W. A. — Short-term retention of (raffle turn restric­ tion signs. Human Factors, 22 (2): 241-251 (1980). 14. .10NES. L. J. - John Ridley and the South Australian 'stripper'. Historv of Technology, 5: 55-101 (1980). 15. JONES, L. J.-Thc beam-engine of Ridley's Hindmarsh Mill: The fate of an historic technical artefact. South Auslraliana, 19 (1): 1-15 (1980). 16. LEWIS, W. P. and BLOCK, T. E. -On the application of computer aids to plant layout. In­ ternational J. of Production Research, IS: 11 (1980). 17. LEWIS, W. P.—The role of intelligence in thc design of mechanical components. Proc. of International Conference on Man-Machine Communications, University of 'Tokyo: 47-72 (1980). 18. MacDONALD, W. A. and HOFFMANN, E. R.-A review of thc relationship between steering w heel reversal rate and driving task demand. Human I 'aciors, 22 (5): 733-739 (1980). 19. MILKINS, E. E. and WATSON, H. C.-Modelling fuel consumption and emissions. S.A.E.A.: 80007 (1980). 20. PERRY, A. E. and CHONG, M.S. - Fluid How studies using a stretched membrane, analog solution of the flow equations and experimental measurement of wall pressure distribution. J. Phvs. E. Sci. Instrum.. 13: 575-578 (1980). 21. PERRY, A. E., LIM, T. T. and CHONG, M. S.-The instantaneous velocity fields of coherent structures in coflowing jets and wakes. J. Fluid Mech., 101: 243-256 (1980). 118 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

22. PULLIN, D. I. — Particle simulation methods for equilibrium fluid flow. J. Comp. Phys., 34: 231-244 (1980). 23. PULLIN, D. I. and PERRY, A. E. — Some flow visualization experiments on thc starting vortex. J. Fluid Mech., 97: 239-255 (1980). 24. SMITS, A. J., MATHESON, N. and JOUBERT, P. N.-Some experiments on artificially roughened Luch Ashton gcosims. J. of Ship Research. 24 (3): 170-180 (Sept. 1980). 25. SMITS, A. J. and PERRY, A. E.—The effect of varying resistance ratio on thc behaviour of constant temperature hot-w-ire anemometers. J. Phys. E. Sci. Instrum., 13: 451-456. 26. WATSON, H. C. — Sensitivity of fuel consumption and emissions io driving patterns and vehicle design. S.A.E.A.: 80004 (1980). 27. WILLIAMS, J. F. —Thc effect of tensile overloads on residual stress fields in the vicinity ofa fatigue crack. Seventh Australasian Conference on the Mechanics of Structures and Materials, University of Western Australia: 204-208 (1980). Reports 28. ARMAREGO, E. J. A. —Research activities of thc machining group. Report MCI, Dept. Mech. Eng., University of Melbourne (1980). 29. MILNER, P. —On industrial archaeology in Victoria. Technology Report No. TR-80/I. pp. 49 (1980). 30. MILNER, P.—An assessment of machinery at Fairfield Vineyard. Technologv Report No. TR-80/2, pp. 18 (1980). 31. MILNER, P. —On recording engineering artefacts. Technology Report No. TR-80/3, pp. 58 (1980). 32. MILNER, P. —A computer-based system for the recording of industrial and other artefacts. I. The operating system. Technology Report No. TR-80/4, pp. 125 (1980). 33. MILNER, P. —A computer-based system for the recording of industrial and other artefacts. II. File management. Technology Report No. TR-80/5, pp. 212 (1980). 34. MILNER, P. —Measurement standards for the recording of industrial and other artefacts. Technology Report No. TR-80/6, pp. 25 (1980). 35. MILNER, P.— Mathematical represents for industrial systems and two conjectures on technical problem formulation. Technology Report No. TR-80/7, pp. 105 (1980).

Conference Papers 36. CHARTERS, W. W. S. —Long term prospects for solar energy utilisation. ANZAAS Silver Jubilee Congress, Adelaide (1980). ' 37. CHARTERS, W. W. S. and others—Design and performance of some solar booster heat pumps. ISES (A & NZ Section) Melbourne Symposium (1980). 38. CHARTERS, W. W. S. and GUTHRIE, K. 1.-Comparative performance of a flat plate col­ lector with and without a 'slatted' convection suppressor device. ISES (A & NZ Section) Melbourne Symposium (1980). 39. GOLDSWORTHY, L. C, WATSON, H. C. and MILKINS, E. E. — Modifying combustion in petrol engines to reduce fuel consumption and emissions. AIE Conference on Petroleum Policies and People, Melbourne, Proc : 198-199 (1980). 40. HENBEST, S. M. and PERRY, A. E.-Axisymmetrical and plane-wall turbulence. Seventh Australasian Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Conference, Brisbane (1980). 41. LIM, T. T., CHONG, M. S. and PERRY, A. E.-The viscous tornado. Seventh Australa­ sian Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Conference, Brisbane (1980). 42. McLEOD, G. A., CLARK, G. M., PENGILLEY, C. J. and PATRICK, J. F.-An clec- trotactile speech aid: Preliminary psychophysical studies. 10th International Congress on Acoustics, Sydney (1980). 43. MILKINS, E. E. — Review of overseas experience in thc use of ethanol in engines. Con­ ference on Ethanol Research and Development, NERDDC, Canberra (1980). 44. PERRY, A. E. and CHONG, M. S. — A membrane moire fringe and shadowgraph technique as aids in fluid mechanics. Seventh Australasian Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Con­ ference, Brisbane (1980). 45. PERRY, A. E., LIM, T. T. and TEH, E. W. — A study of some transition processes. Seventh Australasian Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Conference, Brisbane (1980). 46. PERRY, A. E., LIM., T. T., CHONG, M. S. and TEH, E. W.-The fabric of turbulence. The AIAA 13th Fluid & Plasma Dynamics Conference, Snowmass Colorado, U.S.A. (1980). 47. WATMUFF, J. H., CHONG, M. S. and PERRY, A. E.-The flying hot-wire and its ap­ plication to the study of large scale structures in turbulent wakes. Seventh Australasian Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Conference, Brisbane (1980). 48. WATSON, H. C. Fuel ethanol utilization —engines blends and distribution. Conference on Ethanol Research and Development. NERDDC. Canberra (1980). 49. WATSON, H. C. and MILKINS, E. E. Reducing fuel demand by traffic management. AIE Conference on Petroleum Policies and People, Melbourne, Proc: 196-197 (1980). MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 119

50. WATSON, H. C. Traffic flow— Us effect on energy and emissions. A.I.P. Congress, Future of Petroleum in thc Pacific Region, Sydney (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Engineering Science 1. MARSHALL, G. — Euel consumption in urban driving. 2. MUSHTAQ, M. — A study of the variability in twist drill geometry and its control during manufacture. 3. SASADEUSZ, C. L. — An investigation into plant layout in process and allied industries.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. AL1MORIDAN, ft. —Transient emissions from vehicles. 2. BASKARAN, V. — Interaction of curvature and longitudinal pressure gradient on turbulent boundary layers. 3. BAXTER, G. L. — Evaluation of short range delineation. 4. BORG, G. — Innovation in computer-aided design and manufacture in Australian industry. 5. CHEN, W. D. —Solar absorption cycle equipment. 6. CHIA, T. H. — Optimization strategies for cost per component and production rate in turn­ ing. 7. ERM, L. P. — Low Reynolds number turbulent boundary layers. 8. GARZOLI, K. — Thermal effects in greenhouses. 9. HENBEST, S. — Turbulence structures in pipe flow. 10. JOHNSON, R. C — Multi-criteria decision making. 11. LAM, Y. C. — A rational theory of fatigue crack growth incorporating the effect of residual stresses and crack closure. 12. HM, K. L. — Turbulent flow over rough and wavy surfaces. 13. McAREE, P. —The role of technical decision-making in the education of professional engineers. 14. PRYOR, V. —Open cycle air conditioning. 15. SANT1KARN, D. — A study of gravity-fed hacksawing operations and blade performance. 16. SMITH, A. J. R. — 77ie effects of geometric machining variables on tool temperatures. 17. STIENER, T. — Coherent large scale structures in turbulent wakes and plumes. 18. TAN, D. — Perfectly periodic eddying motions. 19. TEH, K. K. — Vibration of fibre-reinforced conical shells. 20. WINCH, K. — Study of Cue useage in day and night driving. 21. WRIGHT, J. D. — A study of the drill point geometry —its generation variability and effect on forces. MEngSc Theses in Progress 22. ANDERSON, J. — A study of eddy structures in jets and wakes. 23. BECKER, P. - Thermal storage tanks. 24. BRAUNST1ENS, J. — Driving cycles for fuel consumption and emissions testing. 25. CONELLAN, G. — Greenhouse thermal losses. 26. DIXON, A. — An analysis of the structural integrity of bus seals and bus seal anchorages. 27. DOHERTY, B. S. — Pulse control of systems using d.c. motors. 28. FITZPATRICK, I. S.-On the optimal design of composite flywheels. 29. HADJU, G. — An examination oj the delay levis synthesiser. 30. HAYES, G.—An early history of Charles Ruwolt Ply Lid. 31. JUNIPER, R. G.-Braking, stability and handling of motorcycles. 32. KARAMBOULIS, D. — Laser interferometer convection studies. 33. LAM, S. — Dynamic response of a Salter duck. 34. LAMBERT, J. — Some comparisons between optimal and classical control system response. 35. LEE, E. C. — Thc variability and size control of centreless ground drills. 36. LEE, S. H. — Computer integrated manufacture. 37. LESLIE, D. — Passive solar energy collection. 38. LIM, E. E. — Computer aided problem solving. 39. LIM, L. W. — Heat pipe flat plate collectors. 40. LOOI, W. p.-Facilities layout. 41. MEERMAN, A. —Design of advance direction signs. 42. MUSHTAW, M.- Variability of the drill point geometry and its control during manufac­ ture. 43. PARTRIDGE, Wl. —Modal vehicle emissions and fuel consumption. 44. PREM, H.— Motorcycle rider skill assessment. 45. SEOW, L. P. —Forces in rock cutting. 120 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

46. SKAZAS, J. — Prediction of urban vehicle fuel consumption. 47. TAMBLIN, G. — Refrigerant instability or solar heat pump evaporative panels. 48. TAY, G. C. — Wind and sky temperature effects on solar collectors. 49. TEY, W. — A visual study of turbulent spots. 50. THOMAS, V. C. —Engineering applications of the exterior calculus. 51. WHITFIELD, R.—Porce prediction methods for common machining operations. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: AINSE: Turbulent shear layers and heat transfer. ARRB: Development of traffic signs for N.A.A.S.R.A. ARRB: Vehicle fuel consumption and emission. ARRB: Evaluation of short range delineation. ARGC: Modifying spark ignition engine combustion. ARGC: A method for force and power prediction in common machining operations. ARGC: Skin friction of ships. ARGC: Turbulent boundary layers in rotating fluids. ARGC: Periodic eddy motions in a fluid. ARGC: Turbulent structure. ARGC: Passive solar healing walls. Comm. Dept. of Transport: Motorcycle rider skill assessment. Comm. Dept. of Transport: Braking, stability and handling of motorcycles. Comm. Dept. of Transport: Safety requirements of bus scats and seat anchorages. FRB: Solar boosted heat pump. NERDDC: Applications of solar heat pumps. NERDDC: Fundamental study of flow patterns and eddying motion about ground based bodies and devices. NERDDC: Solar boosted heat pump. NERDDC: Air cooled solar absorption cycle air conditioning. NERDDC: Quantifying motor vehicle fuel conservation strategies. NERDDC: A hydrogen engine vehicle fuelled with iron titanium hydride. NHMRC: Design parameters of wheelchairs. Robbins Company: Design of tunnel-boring machinery. VSERC: Solar research on professional training courses. MINING AND METALLURGY

INTRODUCTION Rock mechanics, mine properly evaluation and a performance study of a rock tunnelling machine, conducted in collaboration with the Department of Mechanical Engineering, continued as ongoing mining research activities. An application of gcomechanic analysis to a particular mine design constituted a new mining research activity. In mineral processing, flotation research con­ tinued wilh respect to sulphide mineral assemblages and the recovery of fine mineral particles. Roasting and thc study of metal/non metal mixtures at elevated temperatures remained as the main thrust of extractive metallurgical research, and, at year end a project directed at increasing the throughput capacity and reducing the energy requirements of a copper smeller was initiated. Studies of the structure and properties of ferrous alloys, and the wear characteristics of cast iron and mild steel, continued as areas of applied physical metallurgy research. In fundamental metallurgy, studies commenced with respect lo thc Monte-Carlo simulation of alloy systems and the statistical analysis of chemical interaction models.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. MINING 1. Assessment of rock properties in relation to the design of rock excavations — VV. E. Bamford. 2. Prediction of rock cuttability and its correlation with the performance of a tunnel boring machine—VV. E. Bamford. 3. Time dependence of stress-strain behaviour of rocks— W. E. Bamford. 4. Influence of taxation on thc optimal exploitation of a finile mineral deposit — R. Ci. Maskell. 5. Influence of environmental legislation on mining activities in Victoria —J. B. Evans. 6. Potential non-metallurgical market for a manganese ore —J. B. Evans. B. MINERAL PROCESSING 1. Sodium sulphite as a depressant in a polymetallic sulphide notation system —.1. S. Carr. 2. Behaviour of fine particles in flotation systems —J. S. Carr. C. EXTRACTIVE METALLURGY 1. Mixing studies in metallurgical reactors—N. B. Gray. 2. Controlled atmosphere roasting of sulphides in a fluidized bed —N. B. Gray. 3. Chemical reactivity of carbon, including brown coal char —N. B. Gray. 4. Lead oxide-iron oxide-silica slags-G. M. Willis. 5. Metal-sulphur melis —G. M. Willis. 6. The cobalt-iron-silica system at high temperatures—D. M. Pollard and G. M. Willis. D. PHYSICAL METALLURGY 1. Statistical mechanics of magnetic and alloy systems—P. .1. Bunyan. 2. Precipitation hardening—D. VV. Borland. 3. Structure and properties of steels-D. VV. Borland. 4. Electrical resistance changes in iron-nitrogen alloys —D. W. Borland. 5. Creep and superplasticity—P. McNamara. 6. Dry rubbing wear of casi iron —D. W. Borland. 7. An examination of the microstructure of mild steel following penetration by high velocity projectiles —R. .1. Hazel and S. Maj. 8. Hydrogen embrittlement in high strength steels —.1. J. Carter.

PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. EVANS, J. B. —Under what Ground Rules will Australian Mines Opcraie during the nexl decade? Aust.I.M.M. Bull., No. 438: 20-23 (Ecb. 1980). 2. EVANS, J. B. — Management as Presented to Engineering Students. Aus.I.M.M. Symp. on Management in tlie Mining Industry, Melbourne: 157-162 (1980). 3. LEECH, P. VV. and BORLAND, D. W.-The Wear of Cast Iron in Unlubricated Sliding. Conference on Lubrication, Friction and Wear in Engineering, Melbourne (I.E. Aust.): 50-54 (1980). 4. WEATHER1.Y, G. C, HUMBLE, P. and BORLAND, D. VV. - Precipitation in a Cu-0.55wl%Cr Allow Acta Met., 22: 1815-1828 (1980). 5. HARDING, M. P. and BUNYAN, P. J.-Group Probabilities in ihe Two-Dimensional Ising Model. J. Phvs. A: Math. Gen. 13: 3243-3252 (19S0). 6. DAVEY, T. R. A. and TURNBULL, A. G. (CSIRO)-The Direct Smelling of Zinc Sulfide Concentrate. Australia/Japan Extractive Metallurgy Symposium, Sydney, 16-ISlh July 1980, Australas. Inst, of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne: 23-29 (1980). 121 E 122 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

7. DAVEY, T. R. A., SEC NIT, E. R. (CSIRO) and BOOW, J. (CSIRO)-Viscosity and Com­ position Relationships in Kalgoorlie Nickel Smeller Slags. Australia/Japan Extractive Metallurgy Symposium, Svdnev, I6th-I8th Julv 19S0, Australas. Inst, of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne: 115-120 (1980). 8. DAVEY, T. R. A., JENSEN, G. (CSIRO) and SEGN1T. E. R. (CSIRO) - Decoppering of Lead and Hard Lead by Stirring with Sulfur and Pyrites. Australia/Japan Extractive Metallurgy Symposium, Svdnev, 16-I8lh Julv 1980, Australas. Inst, of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne: 301-312 (1980). 9. GRAY, N. B. and MISRA, V. N. - Reactivity of Brown Coal Char to Carbon Dioxide. Australia/Japan Extractive Metallurgy Symposium, Sydney, 16-I8lh Julv 1980, Australas. Inst, of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne: 419-429 (1980). 10. BRYAN, R., POLLARD, D. M. and WILLIS, G. M.-Removal of Bismuth from Copper by Vacuum Refining. Australia/Japan Extractive Metallurgy Symposium, Svdney, 16-ISlh July 1980, Australas. Inst, of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne: 439-448 (1980). 11. DAVEY, T. R. A. —Advances in Lead, Zinc and Tin Technology—Projections for the 1980s. Lead-Zinc-Tin '80, eds. J. M. Cigan, T. S. Mackcy and T. J. O'Keefc, Metallurgical Soc. of A1ME, Warrendale, PA.: 48-65 (1980). 12. DAVEY, T. R. A. The Physical Chemistry of Lead Refining. Lead-Zinc-Tin '80, eds. J. M. Cigan, T. S. Mackey and T. J. O'Keefc, Metallurgical Soc. of AIME, Warrendale, Pa.: 477-507 (1980). 13. WILLIS, G. M. Thc Physical Chemistry of Lead Extraction. Lead-Zinc-Tin '80, eds. J. M. Cigan, T. S. Mackey and T. J. O'Keefc, Metallurgical Soc. of AIME, Warrendale, Pa.: 457-476 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. HARDING, M. P. — Computer Prediction of Atom Patterns in Metallic Alloys. Master of Applied Science 2. GIBSON, T. J. — Cleavage Fracture Resistance of Deformed Structural Steels. 3. SIRIBUMRUNGSUKHA, B. - Investigations into Diamond Drilling and Rock Drillability. 4. SMITH, G. D. .1. — Thermodynamic Properties of Lead Sulphur Melts and other Related Systems. Master of Engineering Science 5. NYUNT, S. S. — Extraction of Metals from Solutions by Victorian Brown Coal Pre-loaded with Calcium Ion.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BACZYNSK1, N. R. P.-Stability of Shale Hanging-Walls. 2. BAMFORD, W. E. — Some Geomechanical studies for Tunnelling Projects. 3. KUK, 1. H. G. — Resistivity Changes during Strain-Ageing of Iron. 4. LEECH, P. W. — 'lhe Unlubricated Wear of Graphitic Cast Iron. 5. MASKELL, R. G. — Taxation Philosophy and Optimal Exploitation of a Finite Mineral Resource. 6. PATTISON, I. G. — The Action of Sodium Sulphite as a Depressant in Sulphide Mineral Flotation Systems containing Chalcopyrite, Galena, Pyrite and Sphalerite. 7. ROME, G. — Automated Design of Underground Structures Incorporating Rock Restraint. 8. WASHUSEN, J. A.— Time-Dependent Properties of Melbourne Silurian Mudslone. MAppSc Theses in Progress 9. JELEN1EWSKI, V.-Hydrogen Embrittlement in High Strength Steels. 10. STROUD, D. J. — Hydrometallurgical Applications of Minerals. MSc Theses in Progress 11. MORRIS, I. J. — Investigations of Complex Silicate Formation in the Treatment of Bauxites. 12. POLLARD, D. M. — The Distribution of Non-Ferrous Metals in copper Matte Smelting. 13. WEXLER, D. — Precipitation of Niobium Carbide in High-Strength Low-Alloy Steels. MEngSc Theses in Progress

14. HOLL1TT, M. — 77?e Pb-Fe-OSi-02 System al I200°C. 15. JAMES, C. E. — Influence of Environmental Legislation on the Mining and Quarrying In­ dustries of Victoria. 16. McAULEY, T. — The Application of Numerical Methods in Underground Geomcchanics. MINING AND METALLURGY 123

17. NEWELL, A. J. H. — The Effect of Specific Impurities in Lead Sulphide on its Flotation Behaviour. 18. VAN DER WAERDEN, M A. i.-Some Aspects of Fine Mineral Panicle Behaviour in Flotation Systems. MEngSc (Prelim) Thesis in Progress 19. CULLEN, J. E. — Potential non-metallurgical Markers for Groote Eylandt Manganese Ore. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Precipitation in High-Strength Low-Alloy Steels. ARGC: Hydrophobic Solids and Natural Floatability. Repeo Research Ply Ltd: Wear of Casi Iron. Broken Hill Proprietary Co Ltd: Reduction of Iron Ore Pellets. Mt, Isa Mines Ltd: Copper Smelting. Zinc Corporation Ltd: Mine Design. NERDDC: Development and Demonstration Program: The Role of Chemical Reactivity of Car­ bon in Metallurgical Applications. 124 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

SURVEYING

INTRODUCTION New research topics in 1980 include land based information systems, surveillance of dam structures and the development of computer programs to recover and edit electronic tachcometcr data. Also a new A.R.G.C. project on photogrammctric recording from non-metric cameras began during thc year and studies into thc use of terrestrial photogrammetry for measurements in orthodontics. Research areas that continue to attract support include mapping of deep water trawling beds, position fixing techniques for marine studies in Bass Strait and the determination of earth work volumes. The conclusion of the research work of Mr C. J. Earls has resulted in the pro­ duction of a suite of computer programs that hold promise to allow a much improved precision in the use of photogrammetry in industrial applications, particularly for thc measurement of defor­ mation of structures. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Use of metric cameras in industrial application including self calibration procedures —S. G. Bervoets. 2. Geodetic traverse adjustment — B. T. Murphy. 3. Title boundaries and cadastral surveys —B. T. Murphy. 4. Mapping of deep water trawling grounds —G. L. Benwcll. 5. Heritage Photogrammetry —application to architectural and archaeological recording —L. J. Rivett. 6. Thc measurement of earthwork volumes — L. J. Rivett. 7. Decoding and reduction of electronic tachcometer data —G. L. Benwell. 8. Body measurements from close-range photogrammetry—L. J. Rivett. 9. Algorithms for long geodetic line reduction —F. J. Leahy. 10. Land based information systems —S. G. Bervoets. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. BENWELL, G. I . — Position Fixing for Marine Areas of Victoria: Multidisciplinary Utiliza­ tion. Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, 92: 93-105 (1980). 2. BENWELL, G. L. —The Bass Strait Study; Position Fixing for Scientist and Surveyor. Technical Papers, 22nd Australian Survev Congress, Hobart: 13/1-13/18 (1980). 3. BERVOETS, S. G., LEITCH, C. J., and TURNER, A. K.-Close-range Photogrammetry for Soil Surface Measurement. Technical Papers, Agricultural Engineering Conference, I. E. Aust., Geelong: 40-44 (1980). 4. RIVETT, L. J.-Thc Photogrammctric Recording of Rock Art in the Kakadu National Park. Aust. Archaeology, No. 10: 38-51 (June 1980). Report 5. RIVETT, L. J. —The Photogrammctric Recording of Aboriginal Art Sites in the North Metropolitan and Hawkesbury Districts. Report to New South Wales National Parks and Wildlife Service (October, 1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Surveying Science 1. BIRD, D. E. — Computer Aided Mapping. THESES IN PROGRESS MSurvSc Theses in Progress 1. EARLS, C. }. —Self Calibration Procedures for Close-range Photogrammetry. 2. LANPH1ER, G. J. — A Geometrical Data Base for Land Information Systems. 3. MURNANE, fi. —Monitoring Engineering Structures. 4. QUICK, B. R.- The Determination of Volumes. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Archaeological Measurements from Non-metric Cameras. Collier Trust Foundation: Recording of digital Fixing Data. Ministry of Conservation: Mapping of deep water trawling beds. SEC/SRWSC/MMBW: Earthwork Quantities Measurements. Watsons Pty Ltd: Decoding electronic Tachyomctry Data. FACULTY OF LAW

DEAN'S REPORT An annual Research Repon of the kind published by this University addresses itself, in pro­ portions which vary with the discipline concerned, to at least three different potential audiences. One consists of scholars elsewhere, who are well aware of thc characteristics of the research in which they have a professional interest but want to know what is happening in that area at Melbourne. A second is composed of colleagues in other disciplines al this University, who do not necessarily understand thc characteristics of research in fields wilh which ihey arc unfamiliar and look to the Research Report to find out. A third is made up of politicians, public servants and others who may be looking for information along cither or both of the foregoing lines. In ihc case of law, the most useful function of thesc introductory observations is for them to be addressed to tlie second and third categories mentioned above. Readers in thc first category can lurn imme­ diately to the list of research topics in progress. The range and direction of research in the Faculty of Law, although in many respects difl'erent in character from research in other faculties, depend fundamentally on the same basic factors. These include thc established specialized competencies of staff members, thc availability in Melbourne of appropriate source material, the availability of appropriately qualified research assistance back-up, and access to funding. Research in law shares wilh oiher forms of scholarly research the characteristic of being a continuing exploration of thc world of ideas on the basis of ascertained facts. Because of its particular characteristics, thc character of the facts to bc ascer­ tained varies widely. At one end of the spectrum lies Ihe traditional material of thc lawyer, the immense and con­ stantly enlarging wealth of documentary record and speculation. This type of research seems likely to remain for the foreseeable future thc major field of scholarly inquiry in law but in recent limes it lias been to an increasing degree paralleled by research into the actual working of Ihe law, as op­ posed to what can perhaps bc called thc intellectual structure and content of the law. A typical ex­ ample of this kind of research orientation concentrates on the daily practical operation of ihe courts of law and thc consequences of their procedures and decisions in sociological or economic terms. Another major related area of research interest focuses on the expression of policy in legislative form and modes of providing legal restraints on necessary governmental discretions. The central subject of investigation in this kind of research is the connection between government policy and its legal expression, including particularly Ihc necessary restraints on thc former im­ posed by the limits of thc latter. A further almost limitless area of research, which is developing rapidly, seeks to formulate useful legal or quasi-legal concepts and structures within the framework of which relations between national slates, boih on thc planet and, now, in outer space, can be conducted. The diversity of interest which is revealed in this year's, quite typical, list of projects currently under investigation in this Faculty is accounted for partly by the huge potential research range in law and parity by its tendency to bc individual rather lhan team research. Team research is by no means unknown in law. On the contrary, it is a common phenomenon. lis limitation however, in law as in other disciplines, is the degree of access to appropriate funding which is available. Such funding is difficult to come by in Melbourne. There is in consequence a natural tendency in this faculty to develop relatively small scale projects which can bc comfortably handled by individuals or at most a small group of workers. Perhaps thc only other point lo make in an introduction to what is, for non-lawyers, thc somewhat mysterious, if not baffling, world of research in law is lhat it has in common with nearly all other university level research a close connection with the teaching activities of the Faculty. In­ deed it may have this characteristic in higher degree than in some other faculties because il is quite rare for ihc results of current research not to bc reflected almost simultaneously in the teaching program.

125 126 FACULTY OF LAW

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A lexlbook on easements and restrictive covenants —A. J. Bradbrook, VI. A. Neave. 2. Thc prevention of harassment in landlord-tenant law —A. J. Bradbrook, S. V. MacCallum. 3. A textbook on the Victorian Residential Tenancies Act —A. J. Bradbrook. 4. Solar law in Australia —A. J. Bradbrook. 5. Australian Legal History Bibliography Research Project (continuing) —R. Campbell. 6. Burning at the stake —eighteenth century—R. Campbell. 7. Women and the law in Britain-eighteenth century — R. Campbell. 8. Early reports of New South Wales from the British Press—R. Campbell. 9. English constitutional developments —early eighteenth century —R. Campbell. 10. Legal profession-early eighteenth century—R. Campbell. 11. Institutional arrangements for water resource administration in Victoria-S. D. Clark and J. Scovell. 12. Regimes for environmental management in Antarctica —S. D. Clark. 13. Preparation of text and materials on Australian labour law —W. B. Creighton. 14. Study of the implementation of U.K. Safety Representative and Safely Committee Regula­ tions—W. B. Creighton. 15. Comparative study of thc implementation of anti-discriminalion legislation in thc U.K. and Australia—W. B. Creighton. 16. Australian mining and petroleum law —B. M. 1.. Crommelin. 17. Government management at oil and gas resources in Australia —B. M. L. Crommelin. 18. Economic analysis of property rights, with reference to resource tenures—B. M. I.. Crom­ melin. 19. Legal aspects of resource development in Antarctica— B. M. L. Crommelin. 20. Economic analysis of consumer protection laws —A. J. Duggan. 21. High Court contract law 1950-80 (continuing) —M. P. Ellinghaus. 22. An analysis of duress as a defence in criminal law —1. D. Elliott. 23. Projected publications on the Victorian theft legislation and intoxication as a basis for ex­ culpation from criminal liability—I. D. Elliott. 24. Australian narcotic drugs legislation — I. D. Elliott. 25. Misfeasance in a public office —R. C. Evans. 26. Relationship between false imprisonment and negligence —R. C. Evans. 27. Continuing work on a textbook on the law of trusts —H. A. J. Ford. 28. Trading trusts and creditors' rights— H. A. J. Eord. 29. The arm's length concept in taxation legislation — F. G. Gurry. 30. The company director and confidential information — F. G. Gurry. 31. Thc role of a secret security force in a democracy —E. G. Gurry. 32. A textbook on Australian family properly law —j. J. Hardingham, M. A. Neave. 33. Dispute resolution in Australia-China trade —M. E. Hiscock. 34. Legal problems peculiar to East-West trade —M. E. Hiscock. 35. Australian contract law —M. E. Hiscock. 36. Criminal law: research towards fourth edition of standard text — C. Howard. 37. Constitutional law: Intergovernmental Relations in Victoria Program: continuous research project — C. Howard. 38. Thc extent of thc operation of the principle of ratification in administrative law —D. J. Lanham. 39. Continuing research into accident compensation —H. Luntz. 40. A textbook on the Victorian and South Australian Residential Tenancies Acts —S. V. Mac­ Callum. 41. Trespass to air space — S. M. B. Morgan. 42. Standing to sue in trespass to land —S. M. B. Morgan. 43. Legal implications of ihe use of remote sensing techniques in mineral exploration —S. M. B. Morgan. 44. Analysis of (lie nature of royalty rights-S. M. B. Morgan. 45. Thc indivisibility of State legislative power —B. O'Brien. 46. Inchoate rights to interstate communications under s.92—B. O'Brien. 47. A study in thc political economy of Ihc Australian Constitution —Ti. O'Brien. 48. Prosecution policy: initiation, discretion and separation of functions —K. P. O'Connor. 49. Aspects of human rights in Australia —K. P. O'Connor. 50. The reform of Ihc criminal trial svstem by the adaptation of Ihe inquisitional model —J. Phillips. 51. A study of Ihc threshold criteria for the admissibility of expert evidence and ihc limitations imposed on such testimony —J. Phillips. 52. A comparative study of anti-discrimination legislation in U.S.A., Canada, U.K., West Ger­ many, Sweden and Australia —J. Phillips. 53. A study of thc techniques used in U.S.A., Canada, U. K., West Germany, Sweden and LAW 127

Australia for dealing with discrimination in employment on grounds of age, physical or men­ tal handicap and criminal conviction—I. Phillips. 54. A comparative study of the resolution of grievance disputes in employment arising from un­ fair dismissal —J. Phillips. 55. A comparative study of industrial democracy in the U.K., West Germany, Sweden and Yugoslavia-J. Phillips. 56. Thc use of computer technology in law school administration teaching and research —J. Phillips. 57. 2nd edition Cases and Materials on Taxation with Baxt, Gelski, Grbich and Marks —K. S. Pose. 58. Alienation of incomc-K. S. Pose. 59. Thc concept of arm's length transactions under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 — K. S. Pose. 60. The income concept and the requirement that gains bc convertible into money—K. S. Pose. 61. Textbook on industrial and intellectual property —S. Ricketson. 62. Research paper on s.80 of the Commonwealth Constitution and trial by jury —S. Ricketson. 63. Review of colonial legislation at local and imperial levels in Canada and Australia in the nine­ teenth century —J. G. Santamaria. 64. Development of the implied institution of review in Australia both at federal and State levels after 1900-J. G. Santamaria. 65. The relation of judicial definitions of intention and the concept of intention in the philosophy of mind —.1. Ci. Santamaria. 66. The effect of intergovernmental arrangements on legislation, administration and policy­ making in Victoria —C. Saunders. 67. The operation of thc Australian Loan Council —C. Saunders. 68. The feasibility of a general competence power for local government in Australia —C. Saunders. 69. The nature of parliamentary appropriation —C. Saunders. 70. The control of exemption clauses in Victoria —J. Singh. 71. Public control through financial accountability of public enterprises—J. Singh. 72. The taxation of businesses in ASEAN —J. Singh. 73. Enforcing the Income Tax Assessment Act against the Commissioner —.1. Singh. 74. Thc concept of business under thc Income Tax Assessment Act. — J. Singh 75. Protection of the rights of the individual unionist under Australian federal law —R. R. S. Tracey. 76. An analvsis of thc law relating to bias as applied to statutory and non-statutory bodies—R. R. S. Tracey. 77. A casebook on administrative law—R. R. S. T racey. 78. International Law doctrine of sovereign immunity. Report for the Sovereign Immunity Com­ mittee of thc International Law Association —G. Triggs. 79. Territorial sovereignty in Antarctica —G. Triggs. 80. The Trade /'radices Act 1974 and mergers in thc newspaper industry —S. Walker. 81. Industrial property rights and thc Trade Practices Act 1974 —S. Walker. 82. Thc problem of ensuring a fair trial for the accused with a criminal record —M. Weinberg. 83. T he meaning of the word "dishonestly" in sections 72 and 81 of thc Crimes Act 1958 —M. Weinberg. 84. Revision of thc Rules of the Supreme Court of Victoria in civil proceedings — N. J. Williams.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. DUGGAN, A. .1. and DARVALL, L. W. eds. — Consumer Protection Law and Theory, Law Book Company, Svdney (1980). 2. HOWARD, C. - The Constitution, Power and Politics, Fontana/Collins, Melbourne (1980). 3. LUNTZ, H., HAMBLY, D., and HAYES. K..-Torts: Cases and Commentary, Butterwor­ ths, Svdnev (1980). 4. McCALLUM, R. C. and TRACEY, R. R. S.-Cuses and Materials on Industrial Law in Australia, Butterworths, Svdney (1980). 5. SINGH, J., ALLAN, D. E., HISCOCK, M. E. and ROEBUCK, D. — Credit und Security in West Malaysia, University of Queensland Press (1980). Chapters of Books 6. CLARK, S. D. — Salinity: More Drums along the Murrav? in Engineering in ihc 80s, Institu­ tion of Engineers, Australia: 19-23 (1980). 7. CREIGHTON, W. B. and CUNNINGHAM, N. — Health and Safety Legislation in Political and Economic Context, in Legislation and Society in Australia, ed. R. TOMASIC, George, Allen & Unwin, Sydney: 146-173 (1980). 128 FACULTY OF LAW

8. CROMMELIN, M.-Naiural Resources, in An Annual Survev of Law 1979, ed. R. Baxt, Law Book Co., Sydney: 366-406 (1980). 9. CROMMELIN, M.— Environmental Considerations in Energy Production, in Ameri­ can/ Australian/New Zealand Law: Parallels and Contrasts, West Publishing Co., St. Paul, Minnesota: 375-391 (1980). 10. FORD, M. A. J. — Commentary on Companies Bill 1980, in A Guide to the National Scheme and Revised Companies Hill 1980, wilh W. E. Paterson and H. H. Ednie, Buticrworlhs 23-79 (1980). 11. L.UN LZ, 11.-Law of Torts, in An Annual Survev of Law 1979, ed. R. Baxt, Law Book Co., Sydney: 185-218 (1980). 12. SAUNDERS, C. A. — The Judicature and the Constitution, in Mathews R.— Australian federalism 1979, Centre tor Research on Federal Financial Relations, Canberra: 41-57 (1980). Articles 13. CL ARK. S. D.-Thc Philosophy of Australian Water Legislation. Water, 7: 16 (1980). 14. E1.1.1NC.HAUS, M. \\-Amoco v. Rocca: an Annotation. Adel. L. Rev., 7: 33-40 (1980). 15. ELL IOTT, I. D. — Dishonesty in Victoria: 7/te Queen v. Salvo. Crim. L. J., 4: 149-168 (1980). 16. EVANS, R. C. — Damages-Action for damages for destruction of property due to admitted negligence or defendant. A.L.J., 54: 96-97 (1980). 17. EVANS, R. C- Damages -Measure of Damages-Repairs to building. A.L.J., 54: 602-606 (1980). 18. EVANS. R. C. — The Effect of Tax Liabilities on the Assessment of Damages in Personal In­ jury Claims: Gourley Re-reconsidered. Ausi. Current Law Digest: 22-27 (1980). 19. HARDINGHAM, I. J.-A Married Woman's Capacity to Pledge her Husband's Credit for Necessaries. A.L.J., 54: 661-675 (1980). 20. HARDINGHAM, I. J. —Access by Spouses to Discretionary Trust Assets under the Family Law Act 1975. Can a Spouse Get at Familv Trust Assets? Monash Universitv Law School: 3-9(l9S0). 21. HARDINGHAM, 1. J. - Non-marital Partners as Contractual Licensees. Melb. U. L. Rev., 12: 356-3S9 (1980). 22. HISCOCK, M. E. and ALLAN, D. E. —The Position of Secured Creditors in Commercial Insolvencies-Australia. Rabelszeiischrifl, 44: 713-736 (1980). 23. HISCOCK, M. E. and SONO, K. — Security Interests and Insolvency in Japan. Rabelszeiischrifl. 44: 757-783. 24. LANHAM, D. .1.-Accomplices and Transferred Malice. L.Q.R.. 96: 110-125 (1980). 25. LANHAM, D. J.-Murder and Instigating Suicide. Crim. L. Rev.: 215-221 (1980). 26. LANHAM, D. J.-Accomplices and Constructive Liability. Crim. L. J., 4: 78-95 (1980). 27. LANHAM, D. J. — Complicity, Concert and Conspiracy. Crim. L. J., 4: 276-295 (1980). 28. LANHAM, D. J. — Accomplices, Principals and Causation. Melb. U. L. Rev, 12: 490-515 (1980). 29. LANTERI, A. — Compensation Under the Town and Country Planning Act 1961 (Vic.)-Part 1. Melh. U. L. Rev., 12: 311-339 (19S0). 30. LANTERI, A.— Compensation Under the Town and Country Planning Act 1961 (Vic.)-Part II. Melb. U. L. Rev.. 12: 437-466 (1980). 31. LUNTZ, H.-Compensation for Injuries Due to Sport. A.L.J.. 54: 588-601 (1980). 32. MacCALLUM, S. — Registration of Mining Tenements in Queensland. Qld. L. J., 11: 175-189 (1980). 33. O'BRIEN B. M. - Understanding Indcfcasibility under the Victorian Transfer of Land Act. Melb. U. L. Rev., 12: 390-407 (1980). 34. O'CONNOR, K. P. —Personal information systems: Privacy Protection. Science for a sus­ tainable Society: Communications: 303-317 (1980). 35. POSE, K. S. — The Capital/Income Dichotomy and Selected Recent Developments under section 25 and section 26 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936. Planning for Taxes and Duties, Leo Cussen Institute for Continuing Leeal Education: 1-27 (1980). 36. POSE, K. S. -Sections 82KJ, 82KK, 82Kl.-Some Further Reflections. New and Amending Tax Legislation, Court and Hoard of Review Decisions, Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia: 1-29 (1980). 37. RICKETSON, S. — The Power to Grant Extensions of thc Term or a Patent under the Com­ monwealth Patents Act 1952. Aust. Hus. L. Rev., 8: 321-356 (1980). 38. RICKETSON, S. — Intellectual Property and Consumer Protection. European Intellectual Property Review, 2: 407-413 (1980). 39. SINGH, J.-Thc Rights of Manufacturers in Malaysia under the Industrial Co-Ordinulion Act 1975, (Part II). Malaya L. Rev., 21: 413-430 (1979). 40. SINGH-PASRICI1A, J.-A Re-interpretation of Section 51 (1) or the Income Tax Assess­ ment Act and Deductibility of Inflated Expenses. Monash Univ. Law Re., 7: 77-109 (1980). LAW 129

41. WEINBERG, M. S. — Thc Admissibility of Out-of-Court Identification Evidence in Criminal Cases. Melb. U. L. Rev., 12: 543-566 (1980). 42. WILLIAMS, N. J. — Discovery of Civil Litigation Trial Preparation in Canada. Can. Bar. Rev.. 5

DEAN'S REPORT As in previous years, lhe research activities of the departments of ihis faculty have continued al a high level. A very large number of important publications have appeared in rcfereed interna­ tional journals and funding for research, from a wide range of sources, has continued to grow. Noneiheless, research is held back in a number of areas through lack of funds. In a large, active faculty of this kind, ii would bc inappropriate lo pick out individual ex­ amples of research endeavour. Research covers a span from basic cellular and molecular biology through studies on tissues, experimental animals lo clinical studies in paticnls. In addition, there is continued growih of research in ihc fields of epidemiology and health care evaluation. Basic research of ihe kind noted lakes place in both clinical departments and in those situated on the university campus as does research dependent on animal experimentation. Studies involving human subjects in ihc hospitals arc kept under close scrutiny by thc Research Ethics Committees of ihe hospitals which, as institutions, have legal responsibility i'or the care of the paticnls; ihc ac­ tivities of these committees arc important in protecting both ihc subjects of experimentation and ihc university. Where experiments involve students or stalf of the university, specific approval is required from ihc university's Committee on Human Experimentation. Whilst these requirements impose further burdens on research workers of an administrative kind, ihey have been accepted willingly and handled conscientiously by all concerned. Research using ihc techniques of recombinant DNA hus attracted public interest and been ihc subject of debate within the university. Increasing experience in this field has given substantially greater confidence wilh respect to safety aspects and such research will, in ihc near future, bc in progress in four departments of the faculty. Continuing growih in research in ihis faculty has led to progressive increase in numbers of graduate students and it is envisaged thai this trend will continue in future years.

130 ANATOMY

INTRODUCTION In 1980, research cominued in structure-function relationships involving the kidney, adrenal gland, pituitary gland, placenta, lung, vertebral joints and pineal gland. Investigations also con­ tinued in computer assessment of variations in craniofacial growth. Of particular interest were studies of factors affecting the juxtaglomerular peripolar cell, an unusual secretory-type cell recently discovered by our group and now shown to bc present in kidneys of a wide range of animal species. Following thc appointment of Dr G. R. Campbell to the Department, new research initiatives have also developed in Ihc biology of smooth muscle and its relationship to atherosclerosis. Apart from ongoing research funding from the NH & MRC and National Heart Foundation of Australia, large donations from six private foundations enabled the purchase ofa Philips EM 400T transmission electron microscope. This instrument will permit expansion of the morphological research activities of the Department.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Normal and abnormal glomerular barrier function and the mechanisms of proteinuria in glomerular disease—D. Alcorn, G. B. Ryan. 2. Studies of the morphology and functional significance of thc renal juxtaglomerular "peripolar cell"—D. Alcorn, G. B. Ryan. 3. Studies of tubular and juxtaglomerular morphology in the isolated perfused kidney —D. Alcorn, G. B. Ryan. 4. Effects of ureteric obstruction on renal morphology and function —D. Alcorn, G. B. Ryan. 5. Renal and adrenal morphology in normal and abnormal states of sodium balance in sheep —P. A. Hill, G. B. Ryan. 6. Renal and adrenal morphology in normal and toxaemic pregnant sheep —P. A. Hill, G. B. Ryan. 7. Development of the sheep adrenal cortex—P. M. Robinson. 8. Effect of ACTH on the morphology of Ihe sheep adrenal cortex —P. M. Robinson. G. B. Ryan. 9. Morphology and development of the sheep pituitary gland —R. A. Perry, P. M. Robinson, G. B. Ryan. 10. Morphology of the pituitary gland in normal and abnormal states of sodium balance in sheep-R. A. Perry. P. M. Robinson. G. B. Ryan. 11. Morphology of thc pituitarv gland in normal and toxaemic pregnant sheep —R. A. Perry, P. M. Robinson, G. B. Ryan." 12. Development of the renal juxtaglomerular complex in sheep — G. M. Mitchell, B. F. Strat­ ford, G. B. Ryan. 13. Studies of placental morphology —G. M. Mitchell, B. F. Stratford. 14. Glomerular and juxtaglomerular morphology in models of acute renal failure in rats—R. Jacobs, G. B. Ryan. 15. Phenotype-dcpendent changes in low density lipoprotein metabolism —.1. H. Campbell, L. Popadyncr, P. Nestel, G. R. Campbell. 16. Change in specific activity of cholesteryl esterase and other enzymes with modulation of smooth muscle phenotype in culture —J. H. Campbell, P. Ashley, A. Bobik, G. R. Camp­ bell. 17. Experimental loss of internal elastic lamina and formation of nco-intima in renal arteries — G. R. Campbell, J. H. Campbell. 18. The effect of hypertension on dietary induced atherosclerosis in the rabbit —a morphological examination —G. R. Campbell, Jr H. Campbell.

19. Phenotype-dcpendent changes in synthesis of prostaglandins E2, F2(1 and 12 by cultured aortic smooth muscle —J. H. Campbell, .1. Jakubowski, G. R. Campbell. 20. Phcnotype-dependent response of cultured aortic smooth muscle to serum mitogens —J. H. Campbell, G. R. Campbell, R. Ross. 21. What controls smooth muscle phenotype? —J. H. Campbell, G. R. Campbell. 22. Investigation of factors influencing fetal sheep lung development — D. Alcorn. 23. Joints of thc cervical vertebral column —L. J. Ray. 24. Movements of thc craniovcriebral joints—L. J. Ray. 25. Cranial morphology— L. J. Ray. 26. Scanning electron microscopic studies of the middle car—L. J. Ray. 27. Structure and function of the pineal gland —G. C. T. Kenny. 28. The pineal region of non-eutherian mammals —G. C. T. Kenny. 29. The mesencephalon of non-eutherian mammals — G. C. T. Kenny. 30. Serial studies of anthropometric measurements — B. D. Bowden. 31. Serial studies of craniofacial growih — B. D. Bowden. 32. Computer assessments of results of surgical and orthodontic treatments for craniofacial anomalies —B. D. Bowden. 131 132 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

33. Serial studies of maturity markers —B. D. Bowden. 34. Serial studies of dental caries — B. D. Bowden. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters nf Books 1. BURNSTOCK, C, CHAMLEY, J. H. and CAMPBELL, G. R.-Thc innervation of arteries, in Structure and Function of the Circulation, Volume I, eds. C. J. Schwartz, N.T. Werthessen and S. Wolf. Plenum Press, N.Y.: 729-767 (1980). 2. CAMPBELL, G. R., CHAM LEY-CAMPBELL, J. IL, ROBINSON, R. and HERMS- MEYER, K. —Trophic interactions between nerve and vascular smooth muscle in transplants to the anterior eye chamber, in Vascular Neuroeffector Mechanisms: 3rd Int. Symp. Brussels I97S, eds. J. A. Bcvan, T. Godfraind, R. A. Maxwell and P. M. Vanhoutte, Raven Press, N.Y.: 107-113 (1980). Articles 3. ALCORN, D., ADAMSON, T. M., MALONEY, J. E. and ROBINSON, P. M.-Mor­ phological ell'ects of chronic bilateral phrencctomv or vagotomy in the fetal lamb lung. J. Anat., 130: 683-695 (1980). 4. BOWDEN, B. D. —Cephalometric appraisal for orthodontic surgical treatment for craniofacial anomalies. Aust. Orthodont. J., 6: 154-176 (1980). 5. CAMPBELL, G. R. and CHAMLEY-CAMPBELL, J. H.-'Spontaneous' intimal loss in arteries of old hypertensive rats and the experimental production of similar lesions in voung rabbits. Micron'.. II: 457-458 (1980). 6. FINK. R. L. W., CARIDIS, D. T., CHMIEL, R. and RYAN, G. B.-Renal impairment and its reversibility following variable periods of complete ureteric obstruction. Aust. N.7.. J. Surg.. 50: 77-83 (1980). 7. HANNER, R. H. and RYAN, G. B. — Ultrastructure of the renal juxtaglomerular complex and peripolar cells in the axolotl and toad. J. Anat. 130: 445-455 (1980). 8. MALONEY, J. E., ALCORN, D., BOWES, G. and WILKINSON, M. - Development of the future respiratory system before birth. Seminars in Perinatology, 4: 251-260 (1980). 9. McDOUGALL, .1. G., BUTKUS, A., COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., MULLER, J., ODDIE, C. J., ROBINSON, P. M. and SCOGGINS, B. A. - Biosynthetic and mor­ phological evidence for inhibition of aldosterone production following administration of ACTH to sheep. Ada Endocrinol., 94: 559-570 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. HILL, P. A. — Morphologic and Functional Studies of Human and Experimental Toxaemia of Pregnancy. 2. MITCHELL, G. M. — A Study ofthe Fine Structure of the Placenta in Human Preeclampsia and Experimental Ovine Toxaemia. 3. PERRY, R. A. — The Cytology and Histochemistry of Steroid Cells in vitro. MSc Theses in Progress 4. JACOBS, R. — Ultrastructural Studies of ihe Mammalian Juxtaglomerular Region. 5. I ONG, .1. G. — Cations and Hypertension. 6. RANKIN, R. G.- Joints of the Cervical Spine. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: NH&MRC: Morphologic studies of renal disease. NH&MRC: The role of smooth muscle cells and non-muscle cells in atherogenesis. National Heart Foundation of Australia: Arterial changes in hypertension: a morphological ex­ amination. University of Melbourne Medical Research Funds: Computer assessment of the variations in craniofacial development. In addition, thc purchase of a Philips EM400T transmission electron microscope was made possi­ ble by substantial grants from the following: The Ian Potter Foundation, Thc Jack Brockhoff Foundation, Thc Felton Bequests' Committee, the 1-1. & L. Hccht Trust, the Australian Wool Corporation and thc Van Clecf Foundation. BIOCHEMISTRY

INTRODUCTION A broad spectrum of biochemical research has continued in the Department with studies relating to a range of organisms drawn from the plant, animal or microbial worlds. Two visitors. Professor .1. P. Richm, from the University of West Florida, collaborating with Professor Leach, and Mr D. Menzel, Research Associate, from thc Freie Univcrsitat, Berlin, working in Dr Grant's laboratory, were valuable contributors to thc research programme. Dr VV. H. Sawyer's work on the use of fluorescence analysis to probe the structure of biomembranes was recognized by his shared award of the David Syme Research Prize for 1980.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. INTERMEDIARY METABOLISM 1. Evolutionary studies on scrum albumin in plasma wilh particular reference to the transport of fatly acids, tryptophan and bilirubin — F. J. R. Hird, F. C. I. Fellows. 2. The control of glycogenolysis and glycolysis in skeletal muscle by control of (a) ihe level of adenylic acid and (b) ihc level of inorganic phosphate — F. J. R. Hird. 3. Nucleotide metabolism in mammalian tumour cell lines — L. R. Finch, A. Mitchell. 4. Metabolism in mycoplasma—L. R. Finch, A. Mitchell. 5. Ferrokinetic and iron uptake studies in laying and non-laying poultry —C. M. Mauritzen. 6. Review of the literature on somatostatin —M. T. McQuillan. 7. Glutathione metabolism in the human lens —R. C. Augusteyn. 8. Use of porphyrins and light to delineate and/or destroy malignant cells— R. VV. Henderson. 9. Carbohydrate and amino acid metabolism in lactic acid bacteria —G. R. Jago. B. STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION STUDIES ON PROTEINS 1. Identification of antigenic determinant sequences in proteins using peptide synthesis and im­ munoassay on a macrorcticular resin support —S. J. Leach (with J. P. Riehm, Visiting Pro­ fessor). 2. The nature of thc topographic antigenic determinants in myoglobins and the structural basis of'original antigenic sin' —S. J. Leach, P. E. li. Todd. 3. Monoclonal antibodies to single determinants of human and beef myoglobins —S. J. Leach, P. E. E. Todd (with Biochemistry Department, La Trobe University and Commonwealth Scrum Laboratories). 4. Trypiic peptide mapping of human mutant haemoglobins using high performance liquid chromatography —S. J. Leach (with Haematology Department, Queen Victoria Hospital). 5. Thc ratios of non-allelic yA and gene products in the HbF of neonates of thalassacmic pa­ tients—S. J. Leach (with Haematology Department, Queen Victoria Hospilal). 6. Synthesis, circular dichroism, infrared and NMR conformational analysis of synthetic cyclic and acyclic peptides as models for /3-siructures and chain reversals in proteins —S. .1. Leach (with Chemistry Departments, Monash, Cornell and Colorado Slate Universities). 7. Circular dichroism studies on the recombination of synthetic and natural chains of relax- in—S. J. Leach (with Howard Florey Institute of Experimental Physiology and Medicine). 8. The structures of thc cryslallins from the humal foetal lens—R. C. Augusteyn. 9. The biochemistry of senile nuclear cataract —R. C. Augusteyn. 10. Structure-function studies on chorismate mutase/prephenate dehydratase and chorismate mutasc/prcphenalc dehydrogenase—B. E. Davidson. 11. Redox potentials of leghacmoglobin in ihc presence of various ligands —R. VV. Henderson. 12. Characterization of biological macromolecules by sedimentation equilibrium in an air-driven ultraccmrifuge — G. J. Howlctt. 13. Purificaiion and characterization of a 'pro-hormonasc' from pituitarv glands —P. E. E. Todd. C. PROTEIN BIOSYNTHESIS 1. Synthesis and secretion of protein by the liver —G. H. Schreiber, J. Urban. 2. Regulation of gene expression in aromatic amino acid biosynthesis in li. coli—M. E. David­ son. 3. DNA sequences and evolution of the genes for enzymes involved in aromatic amino acid biosynthesis in E. coli— B. E. Davidson. D. MEMBRANE ST RUCTURE AND FUNCTION 1. The orientation of lipid soluble molecules in lipid bilaycrs as determined by fluorescence quenching, energy transfer and polarization techniques —VV. H. Sawyer. 2. Thc design and construction of a phosphorescence depolarization instrument for measuring the rotational diffusion of membrane proteins — W. H. Sawyer. 133 134 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

3. The molecular basis of hereditary spherocytosis. — W. H. Sawyer, G. J. Hewlett (with Department of Haematology, Austin Hospital). 4. Cytosine arabinoside transport and membrane fluidity in acute myeloid leukaemia in man —W. H. Sawyer (with Department of Haematology, Austin Hospilal). F_. ASPECTS OF PLANT AND MARINE BIOCHEMISTRY 1. Amino acid biosynthesis in marine algal chloroplasts —K. R. Gayler, G. H. McKenzie. 2. Protein synthesis in developing soybean seeds —K. R. Gayler. 3. Biochemistry of algal chloroplasts — B. R. Grant. 4. Biochemistry and cylolgoy of wound healing in coenocytic algae-B. R. Grant. 5. Physiology and biochemistry of the interaction of the fungus Phytophthora cinnamomi with its host species—B. R. Grant. F. CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY I. Improvement in methods for detection of blood in faeces and thc way in which diet might all'eet ttic test —.1. W. Legge.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. AUGUSTEYN. R. C. (with COLLIN. H. B.)-T/ie Eye. Vol. 2. 1980, Annual Research Reviews, Scries ed. D. F. Horrobin, Eden Press, Montreal (1980). 2. MCQUILLAN. M. T. -Somatostatin. Vol. 2, Annual Research Reviews, Series ed. D. F. Horrobin. Eden Press, Montreal (1980). Articles 3. BROOME, M. C, THOMAS, M. P., HILLIER, A. .1. and JAGO, G. R. — Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Activity in Group N Streptococci. Ansl. J. Biol. Sci., 33: 15-25 (1980). 4. EAST, I. J.. TODD, P. E. and LEACH, S. J. —On Topographic Antigenic Determinants in Myoglobins. Molec. Immuno/.. 17: 519-525 (19S0). 5. EAST, I. .1., TODD, P. E. and LEACH, S. J.-Original Antigenic Sitv. Experiments wilh a Defined Antigen. Molec. Immunol., 17: 1539-1544 (1980). 6. FELLOWS, F. C. I.. HIRD, F. J. R. and McLEAN, R. (with WALKER, T. I.)-A Survey of the Non-Estcrilied Fatty Acids and Binding Proteins in the Plasma of Selected Animals. Comp. Biochem. Phvsiol., 67B: 593-598 (1980). 7. GRANT', B. R. and HOWARD, R. J. — Kinetics of ,JC Distribution during Photosynthesis bv Chloroplast Preparations Isolated from the Siphonous Alga Caulerpa simpliciuscula. Plant Phvsiol., 66: 29-33 (1980). 8. GRANT, B. R. and WRIGHT, S. W.-Purity of Chloroplasts Prepared from the Siphonous Green Alea, Caulerpa simpliciuscula. as Determined by their Ultrastructure and their En- zvmic Content. Plant Phvsiol.. 66: 130-138 (1980). 9. HENDERSON, R. W. and L1NE11AM, J. (with CHRISTIE, G. S., and CLEZY, P. S.) — Haematoporphyrin Diacetate: A Probe to Distinguish Malignant from Normal Tissue by Selective Fluorescence. Hr. ./. exp. Path.. 61: 345-350 (1980). 10. HENDERSON, R. W. (with CLEZY, P. S., HAI, T. T. and VAN THUC, L.)-Thc Chemistry of Pyrrolic Compounds. XLV. Haematoporphyrin Derivative: Haematopor- phvrin Dicacctatc as the Main Product of ihe Rcaciion of Haematoporphyrin wilh a Mixture of Acetic and Sulfuric Acids. /1i«f. J. Chem., 33: 585-597 (1980). 11. HOWLETT. G. .1. and MARKOV. G. - Ligand-Affinity Sedimentation Equilibrium Using an Air-Driven Ultracenirifuuc. Arch. Biochem. Biophvs.. 202: 507-514 (1980). 12. LEACH, S. .1. (with HAN, S. L., STIMSON. E. R., MAXFIELD. F. R. and SCHERAGA, IT. A.) — Studv of the Stale of Ionization of I Leu'(-Enkephalin in ihc Crystal and in Solution. Int. J. Peptide Protein lies., 16: 183-190(1980). 13. LEACH, S. .1. (with ISOGAI, Y.. NEMETHY, G., RACKOVSKY. S. and SCHERAGA, H. A.)-Characterization of Multiple Bends in Proteins. Biopolvmers. 19: 1183-1210 (1980). 14. McNAMARA, M. K. and AUGUSTEYN, R. C.-3,3'-Dityrosinc in the Proteins of Senile Nuclear Cataracts [Icuerl. Exp. Eve lies., 30: 319-321 (1980). 15. MILLERSHIP. A.. EDWARDS, K , CHEL.LADURAI, M., DRYBURGH, H., URBAN, J. and SCHREIBER. G. (with INGLIS, A. S.)-A'-Terminal Amino Acid Sequence of Pro- albumin from Inbred Buffalo Rats. //;/. J. Peptide Protein Res., 15: 248-252 (1980). 16. MINASIAN, E. and LEACH, S. J. (with KEMP, B. E. and RAE, I. D.)-Synthetic Peptide Substrates for Protein Kinases Structure and .Biological Function. Peptides Structure and l unclion. Proc. Sixth American Peptide Symposium, cd. E. Gross and J. Meienhofcr, Pierce Chemical Co.: 169-172 (1979). 17. NAGASHIMA, M., URBAN, J. and SCHREIBER, G. - Intrahepatic Precursor Form of Rat m-Acid Glycoprotein. J. Biol. Chem., 255: 4951-4956 (1980). BIOCHEMISTRY 135

18. PATERSON, Y. and LEACH, S. J. — Chain Fission of Poly-I.-Glutamic Acid bv a Waier- Solublc Carbodiimide. Biochem. Biophvs. Res. Commun., 95: 1722-1729 (1980). 19. ROGERS, K. M. and AUGUSTEYN, R.C - Proieolvtic Enzvmes of ihe Human Lens. Exp. Eve Res., 30: 427-429 (1980). 20. SAWYER, W. II. and HILL, J. S. (with COOPER, R. A., LESLIE, M. II., GILL, F. M. and WILEY, J. S.) —Normal Fluidity of Red Cell Membranes in Hereditary Spherocytosis. Br. J. Haemutologv. 46: 299-302 (1980). 21. SAWYER, W. H. (with HOWARD, R. ,1.)-Chariges in ihe Membrane Microviscosity of Mouse Red Blood Cells Infected with Plasmodium berghei Detected Using n-(9-Anthroyloxy) Fatty Acid Fluorescent Probes. Parasitology, SO: 331-342 (1980). 22. THULBORN, K. R. and SAWYER, W. H. (with ASHCROFT, R. G., SMITH J. R. and COSTER, H. G. L.) — Perturbations to Lipid Bilavers bv Spectroscopic Probes as Deter­ mined by Dielectric Measurements. Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 602: 299-308 (1980). 23. TODD, P. (wilh HEINRICH, G.) —Pituitary Enzyme which Splits Proinsulin. Peptides Structure and Function. Proc. Sixth American Peptide Symposium, ed. E. Gross and J. Mcicnhorer, Pierce Chemical Co.: 173-176 (1979).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. CHELLADURAI, M. - Intermediate Forms of Secretory Proteins. 2. CH'NG, A. L. — Biosynthesis of Amino Acids from Inorganic Nitrogen Sources in a Marine Green Alga. 3. DREHER, T. W. — Studies on the Wound Response of the Cocnocytic Green Alga Caulerpa simpliciuscula. 4. HAWTHORNE, D. B. — Studies on the Structure and Function of Polysaccharides from the Green Alga Caulerpa simpliciuscula. 5. RADFORD, 1. R.-Inhibition of DNA Synthesis and Cell Death. Master of Science 6. ZAPF, P. Vi'.-Serum Enzymes in Malignant Hyperpyrexia, Heart and Liver Disease. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BYRT, P. N. — Studies on /.oospores of Phytophthora cinnamomi. 2. COVENTRY, M. J. — Aspecis of Carbohydrate Metabolism in Lactic Acid Streptococci. 3. DAVIES, W. D. — Biochemical Studies on some Escherichia coli genes responsible for the Biosynthesis of Aromatic Amino Acids. 4. DAVULURI SIVA PRASAD-/l/n/>io Acid Metabolism in Relation to End-Products of Nitrogen Metabolism. 5. EAST, I. J. — The Structural Basis of Antigenicity in Myoglobins. 6. EVANS, D. J. —Synthetic Peptide Models for Chain Reversal Conformations in Proteins. 1. HAIGH, E. A. — Protein-Lipid Interactions in Biomembranes as Studied with a Set of Fluorescent T'altv Acid Probes. 8. HICKEY, M. \\.-Aspects of the Carbohydrate and Amino Acid Metabolism of Lac­ tobacilli. 9. HUDSON, G. S. — Comparative Studies of Chorismate Mutase-Prephenate Dehydratase and Chorismate Mutase-Prephenate Dehydrogenase ofE. coli KI2. 10. MII.I.ERSHIP, A. S.-Studies on the Response of the Liver to Inflammation. 11. NAGASHIMA, M. — Studies on ihe Synthesis and Secretion of Glycoproteins. 12. SMAI..L, D. 11. — Synthesis of Myelin Basic Protein in Relation to Multiple Sclerosis Serum Factors. 13. STONE, F. H. — A Biochemical Basis for the Selectivity of Certain Cytotoxic Drugs. 14. SYKES, G. E. — Regulation of Protein Synthesis in Developing Soybean Seeds. MSc Thesis in Progress 15. CARBONE, F. R. - Synthetic Peptide Models for Beta-Structures in Proteins. 16. FECONDO, .1. V.—A Possible Rote for Hydrogen Peroxide in the Aetiology of Human Senile Nuclear Cataract. 17. HILL, J. S. — Investigation of Various Aspects of Membrane Defects ofthe Genetic Disease Hereditary Spherocytosis. 18. NEALE, G. A. M. — Deoxyrihonucleolide Metabolism in Mycoplasma mycoides. 19. TINSON, W. — Carbohydrate Metabolism in Thermophilic Microorganisms. MAgrSc Thesis in Progress 20. IRVING, H. R. — Studies on the Control of Differentiation in Phytophthora '/.oospores. 136 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RKCF.IVKD Grains have been received as follows: ARGC: Structure and Function of Enzymes Involved in ihc Synthesis of Aromatic Amino Acids in /.'. coli. ARGC: Seed Protein Accumulation in Soybean and Related Glycine Species. ARGC: The Biochemistry of Wound Healing in Siphonous Algae. ARGC: Evolutionary Aspects of Biochemistry. ARGC: Characterization of Biological Macromolecules by Sedimentation Equilibrium in an Air- Driven U11 race nt r i Iug c. ARGC: Thc Delineation of Antigenic Domains in Proteins. ARGC: Protein-Lipid Interactions in Natural and Model Membranes. Australian Wool Corporation: Peptide Models for Beta Structures in Keratins. The William Buckland Foundation: The Interaction of the Cinnamon Fungus (Hhytophthora cin­ namomi) with Plain Roots. NH&MRC: Oxidation during Senile Nuclear Cataract Formation. National Institutes of Health: Thc Mechanism of Senile Cataract Formation. Ian Potter Foundation: Thc Physiology and Biochemistry of Ihe Cinnamon Fungus Zoospore. Research and Graduate Studies Committee, University of Melbourne: Intracellular Processing of Plasma Glycoproteins in thc Mammalian Liver. Rowden White Estate: Intracellular Processing of Plasma Glycoproteins in the Mammalian Liver. COMMUNITY HEALTH

INTRODUCTION In 1980 research continued in the follow-up of the Melbourne Stroke Register established by Dr D. G. S. Christie over thc previous two years. In particular this has led to a randomized con­ trolled trial of a social worker support service to stroke survivors. The successful completion of the feasibility study of occupational aspects of the health workers in the petroleum industry resulted in preliminary steps by Dr Christie to set up a major prospective study designed to link occupational environmental exposure with subsequent mortality and morbidity from cancer and other diseases. Dr D. R. Dunt continued his study into the aetological factors producing skin diseases in the rubber industry while Professor Webster and his group undertook a further study of educational techniques. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Health Watch: thc Australian Petroleum Industry Health Surveillance Program — D. G. Christie, I. R. H. Rockett, K. R. Robinson. 2. A randomized controlled trial of a social worker support service to stroke survivors —D. G. Christie, D. T. Weigall, N. Stott. 3. Follow up of Melbourne Stroke Register—D. G. Christie. 4. Lichuca arbovirus study —J. R. E. Fraser, D. G. Christie. 5. An evaluation of hospice care for terminally ill cancer patients—D. R. Dunt. 6. Altitudinal and other factors influencing patients' preference for type of primary medical carc-D. R. Dunt. 7. Recent mortality trends in the Australian and foreign born sections in the Australian popula­ tion survey —D. R. Dunt. 8. Prevalence survey of adolescent acne —D. R. Dunt, D. S. Nurse. 9. Aetiological factors affecting occupational dermatitis in thc rubber industry — D. R. Dunt, G. A. Varigos. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. ROHAN, T. and CHRISTIE, D. G.-Australian Cancer Mortality from 1950-1977: an analysis of the National Mortality Statistics. Med. J. Ausi-., I: 109 (1980). 2. ROSE, G. A. IIEI.LER, R. 1'., TUNSTALI.-PEDOE, H. and CHRISTIE, D. G.-The Heart Disease Prevention Project: a randomized controlled trial in industry. Brit. Med. J., I: 747 (1980). 3. ROHAN, T. and CHRISTIE, D. G. —Australian Lung Cancer Mortality. Med. J. Aust., I: 458 (1980). 4. CHRISTIE, D. G. - Incidence or Prevalence? Editorial Med. J. Aust., I: 458 (1980). 5. CHRISTIE, D. G. and CHRISTIE, M.-Teaching Primary Care: a study of student at­ titudes. J. Med. Educ., 55: 544 (1980). 6. CHRISTIE, D. G. — Emergency care in Melbourne: a studv of help seeking behaviour. Med. J. Aust., 2: 200 (1980). 7. CHRISTIE, D. G. — Deputising Services in Melbourne: an evaluative study. Community Health Studies, 4: 194 (1980). 8. DUNT, D. R., KAUFERT, J. M., CORKH1I.L, R. and others —A questionnaire method for measuring disability: theoretical and methodological issues. Community Medicine, 2: \20 (1980). 9. DUNT, D. R. and OPIT, L. J. — A model for primary medical care in some small rural com­ munities. Med. J. Aust., 1: 229 (1980). 10. WEBSTER, R. W. — Experience with a General Practice Elective in thc Undergraduate Cur­ riculum. Med. J. Aust., 2: 485 (1980). Technical Reports 1. OPIT', L. J. and CHRISTIE, D. G.-The Mobile Intensive Care Ambulance, a report prepared for thc Health Commission of Victoria (1980). 2. CHRISTIE, D. G. and HARPER, S.-The Australian Petroleum Industry Health Surveillance Program: thc feasibility study (1980). 3. SKELDON, R., DUNT, D. R. and DUDLEY, R. - Western Samoa: Report of Mission on Needs Assessment and Project Development for population assistance. United Nations Fund for Population Activity (1980). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian Institute of Petroleum: Health Watch Study. Commonwealth Department of Health: Follow up of stroke survivors. Australian Neurological Foundation: Follow up of Melbourne Stroke Register. 137 138 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

GERONTOLOGY AND GERIATRIC MEDICINE

NATIONAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE OF GERONTOLOGY AND GERIATRIC MEDICINE, MOUNT ROYAL HOSPITAL

INTRODUCTION A number of research projects were completed in 1980, wilh results presented in published papers and at conferences, notably the International Association of Gerontology Asia and Oceania Regional Congress, held in Melbourne in December, 1980. Research in geriatric medicine is continuing ai Mount Royal Hospital and through joint projects with stalf at the Austin, St. Vin­ cent's and Royal Melbourne Hospilal. Nutrition research is expanding with ihe establishment of a small laboratory. External funding has been attracted for projects in Social Gerontology. A study of social and economic aspecis of retirement, planned in conjunction with the Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research, is expected lo become a major project, extending for two or three years. Research into services for care of the aged has been carried out under a Health Service Research Study Grant, and further support for additional projects is anticipated. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Paltcrns of entry into institutional care among the aged: a study of new admissions to nurs­ ing homes —A. Howe, B. Kerr. 2. Retirement: an economic and social study —A. Howe and I. Manning (Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research, Melbourne University). 3. Orange juice supplementation to the diet of institutionalized elderly— D. M. Prinsley and D. M. Flint (Section of Human Nutrition, Deakin University). 4. Nutritional status and diet of elderly patients who have lo be fed —D. M. Prinsley and H. Nguyen. 5. Evaluation of supplementary food intake of feeders by measurement of anthropometric in­ dices—D. M. Prinsley, H. Nguyen and D. M. Flint (Section of Human Nutrition, Deakin University). 6. Aged attenders in casualty, Royal Melbourne Hospilal —D. M. Prinsley, with D. Ames and N. Kcks (Royal Melbourne Hospital). 7. Unwanted effects of drugs— D. M. Prinsley and L. Mashford (St. Vincent's Hospilal). 8. Clinical complications of non-psychoiropic drugs in the aged—D. M. Prinsley and P. Shaw (Royal Melbourne Hospital). 9. A study of ihe effectiveness of a new anti-arthritic drug for use among the elderly— D. M. Prinsley. 10. Theophylline pharmokinetics in paticnls from a geriatric hospital: influence of cigarette smoking-D. M. Prinsley and J. J. Hammond, with D. D. Thorsbornc-Palmer, B. Jerrotl and P. W. Trembaih (Austin Hospilal).

PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. HOWE, A. L. - Leisure and the Elderly, in Recreation Planning and Social Change in Urban Australia, eds. D. C. Mercer and E. Hamilton-Smith, Sorretl, Melbourne: 96-112 (1980). Articles 2. PRINSLEY, D. M. -The Older Patient With Hypertension. Australian Family Phvsician, 9: 257-264 (1980). 3. PRINSLEY, D. M. — Investigation of the Geriatric Paiient. Patient Management: 23-27 (Oct., 1980). 4. PRINSLEY, D. M. — Retirement Migration on Phillip Island, Victoria. Selected Issues in Geriatrics, Proc. of 15th Annual Conference, Australian Association of Gerontologv, Perth, 11-12 (1979). 5. WAHLQVIST, M. L.. FLINT, D. M. and PRINSLEY, D. M.-Thc Effect of Zinc Sup­ plementation on Serum Albumen and Folic Acid Concentrations in a Group of Hypoalbumenaemic and Hypozincaemic Aged Persons. Proceedings of the Nutrition Society of Australia, 5: 179 (1980). 6. HOWE, A.-Retirement and Pensions: A Survev of Recent Trends in Australia. Aging and Work, 3: 89-102 (1980). 7. HOWE, A. —Systems of Aged Care in Melbourne, Social Science and Medicine, 14 (2D): 237-239 (1980). GERONTOLOGY AND GERIATRIC MEDICINE 139

8. HOWE, A. — Assessment and Alternatives in Nursing Home Care. Growing Older, 7(16): 14-17 (1980). 9. HOWE, A.—The Role of thc General Practitioner in the Use of Nursing Homes. Patient Management: 63-72 (1980). Reports 11. PRINSLEY, D. M., BOWER, H. M. and HOWE, A. L.-Management of Disturbed Behaviour among thc Elderly, Occasional Paper in Gerontology, National Research Institute for Gerontology and Geriatric Medicine, Melbourne, 2: 58 pp. (November, 1980). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Retirement— An Economic and Social Study. Health Service Research Study Grant, Commonwealth Department of Health: Patterns of Entry to Institutional Care among the Aged —A Study of New Admissions to Nursing Homes. 140 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

MEDICAL BIOLOGY

THE WALTER AND ELIZA HALL INSTITUTE OF MEDICAL RESEARCH

INTRODUCTION The Department's main research thrust continues to be in immunology, broadly defined so as to include study not only of the lymphocyte cell in health and disease, but also that of other cells which contribute to bodily defence, such as white blood cells and scavenger cells. Amongst major developments during the year arc the following: Dr N. Nicola and colleagues in the Cancer Research Unit have succeeded, through sophisticated biophysical techniques, in identifying within the liver of foetal mice thc precursor cell which gives rise to certain of the white blood cells, thus materially increasing our knowlege of the differentiation of the blood system. Dr J. W. Schrader and colleagues of the Cellular Immunology Unit have shown that many of the hormone-like fac­ tors which control blood cell formation are themselves products of a particular kind of T lym­ phocyte, which has been "immortalized" through fusion to malignant cells. This facilitates large- scale production and analysis of these important factors. Dr G. Mitchell and colleagues in the lm- munoparasitology Unit have produced a new diagnostic reagent which is being field-tested in the Philippines for its value in the rapid and quantitative diagnosis of schistosomiasis. Dr G. Hums and colleagues in the Clinical Research Unit have developed methods of growing the normal white cells which infiltrate human breast cancer and melanoma tissues. Thc role which ihcsc cells might play in helping to defend thc hody against cancer is being investigated. Dr J. M. Adams and colleagues in the Molecular Biology Unit have unravelled the structure and organization of the genes responsible for antibody synthesis. Dr K. D. Shortman in thc Biochemistry and Biophysics Group has positively identified a new stage in B lymphocyte differentiation termed the pre- progenitor which is characterized by certain specific cell surface markers which have been chemically identified. Dr T. Mandel of the Electron Microscopy Unit has made considerable pro­ gress in deriving functional pancreatic islet tissue through tissue culture of embryonic pancreatic rudiments, both murine and human. This work should prove useful in assessing the value of pan­ creatic islet cell transplantation in severe insulin-dependent diabetes.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. CELLULAR IMMUNOLOGY UNIT 1. Tolerance induction in immature B lymphocyte populations —G. .1. V. Nossal, B. L. Pike. 2. Further testing of thc clonal selection theory of B lymphocyte stimulation — B. L. Pike. 3. The role of B lymphocyte surface IgD in thc immune response and tolerance —J. E. Layton. 4. Size fractionation of B lymphocytes susceptible to clonal abortion —B. L. Pike. 5. In vitro development of B and T lymphocytes from stem cells —J. W. Schrader, P. Bartlett. 6. Study of Ig-like molecules on T lymphocytes —A. Szenberg. 7. Organ culture of foetal mouse thymus —T. Mandel. 8. Maintenance and regulation of thc immune response by antigen retained on dendritic cells —T. Mandel. 9. Organ culture and transplantation of mouse pancreatic islets of Langerhans in experimental diabetes mellitus —T. Mandel. 10. Structure and genetics of lymphocyte surface proteins and receptors —J. Goding. B. CANCER RESEARCH UNIT 1. Purification and structural analysis of granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating fac­ tor—A. W. Burgess, N. A. Nicola, I. Stanley. 2. Clonal analysis of normal and leukaemic cells from mice and humans —D. Metcalf, P. Cooper, A. W. Burgess, N. A. Nicola, M. Matsamoto, G. Morstyn, G. R. Johnson. 3. Purification of factors controlling eosinophil and megakaryocyte proliferation —N. A. Nicola, D. Metcalf. 4. Isolation and characterization of cells in thc granulocytic differentiation pathway —N. A. Nicola, A. W. Burgess, D. Metcalf. 5. Biochemical analysis of the action of colony stimulating factor on normal and leukaemic target cells —A. W. Burgess, N. A. Nicola. 6. Analysis of hemopoietic precursor cell regeneration in in vitro spleen cultures —H. von Melchncr. 7. Factors controlling hemopoietic multipoiential stem cell differentiation in vitro — G. R. Johnson. MEDICAL BIOLOGY 141

C. CLINICAL RESEARCH UNIT 1. Immunopathogenesis and genetic aspects of chronic active hepatitis —I. Mackay, S. Whit­ tingham. 2. Regulation and characterization of eosinophilic leucocytes in humans and mice —M. Vadas. 3. In vitro immunization and amplification of lymphocyte populations extracted from human cancers —G. F. Burns. 4. Reactivity of serum in chronic hepatitis with liver cell membrane antigens —1. Kronborg. 5. lmmunopathic mechanisms in multipe sclerosis, and experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis in the mouse—1. Mackay. 6. The application of immunological marker studies to frozen sections of human tissues —G. F. Burns, C. Riglar. D. EXPERIMENTAL PATHOLOGY UNIT 1, Macrophagc-T lymphocyte interactions —J. F. A. P. Miller, P. Mottram. 2. Macrophage subpopulations —P. Mottram, J. F. A. P. Miller. 3, T cell dependent suppression of delayed type hypersensitivity —W. Thomas, I. Walker, J. F. A. P. Miller. 4, Characterization of factors from specific suppressor T cells —I. Walker, J. F. A. P. Miller. 5, Hybridization of T cell subsets and T cell lymphomas to produce antigen specific T cell cloncs-J. Gamble, J. F. A. P. Miller, D. McPhee, G. Morahan. 6. Production of amigen-specific, notihybrid, T cell lines —P. Mottram, D. McPhee. 7. Identification of B cell and T cell hybridomas bearing defined idiotypes —G. Morahan, I. Walker, J. Gamble, J. F. A. P. Miller. 8. Immunochemical analyses of idiotypc-bearing molecules derived from hybridomas—1. Walker, G. Morahan, J. Gamble. E. IMMUNOPARASITOLOGY LABORATORY 1. Development of model anti-parasite vaccines —G. F. Mitchell, R. F. Anders, E. Handman. 2. Development of model immunodiagnosiic reagents for parasitic infection based on hybridoma antibodies —G. F. Mitchell, R. F. Anders. 3. Analysis of mouse strain variation in susceptibility to infection with various mciazoan and protozoan parasites —G. F. Mitchell, R. F. Anders. 4. Immunological aspects of intestinal parasitism —R. F. Anders, G. F. Mitchell. 5. Immunological and molecular biological aspects of malaria and babesiosis —G. V. Brown, R. F. Anders. 6. Development of methods for the identification and isolation of filarial antigens — R. F. Anders. 7. Immunological aspects of cutaneous leishmaniasis infection —E. Handman, G. F. Mitchell. 8. Studies on mechanisms of evasion of host-protective immunities utilized by parasites —G. F. Mitchell. F. BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS UNIT 1. Differentiation of T and B lymphocytes-K. Shortman, R. Scollay. 2. Physical techniques for cell separation —K. Shortman. 3. Organization and rearrangement of immunoglobin genes — S. Cory, D. Kemp, O. Bernard, J. Adams. 4. Structure of immunoglobulin genes —O. Bernard, .1. Adams. 5. Expression of immunoglobulin genes—D. Kemp, S. Cory, J. Adams.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. ANDERS, R. F. — Developments in immunological technology, in Proc. Australian Develop­ ment Assistance Bureau Research for Development Seminar, No. 3, Svdney, 1979: Tropical immunology, cd. L. Davidson, Commonwealth Institute of Health, Sydnev: 129-138 (1980). 2. CHEERS, C., McKENZIE, 1. F. C, MANDEL, T. E. and YU YU CHAN-A single gene (Lr) controlling natural resistance to murine listeriosis, in Genetic control of natural resistance to infection and malignancy, eds. E. Skamcne, P. A. L. Kongshaven and M. Lan- dy, Academic Press, New York: 141-148 (1980). 3. MACKAY, I. R. — Immunological interactions involving virus and liver: a synthesis, in Virus and the liver, eds. L. Bianchi, W. Gerok, K. Sickinger and G. A. Stalder, MTP, Lancaster; section 14: 131-135 (Falk Symposium No. 28) (1980). 4. MACKAY, I. R. — Immunopaihology: a current overview, in Proc. Australian Development Assistance Bureau Research for Development Seminar, No. 3, Sydney, 1979: Tropical im­ munology, cd. L. Davidson, Commonwealth Institute of Health, Sydney: 110-119 (1980). 142 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

5. METCALF, D. — Biological control systems in cancer, in Cancer, causes and control, cd. D. Metcalf, Australian Academy of Science, Canberra: 4-22 (1980). 6. MILLER, J. F. A. P.— Early events after contact with foreign antigens, in Strategies of im­ mune regulation, eds. E. E. Sercarz and A. J. Cunningham, Academic Press, New York: 333-336 (1980). 7. MILLER, J. F. A. P — Immunoregulation by T lymphocytes, in Strategies of inunune regula­ tion, eds. E. E. Sercarz and A. J. Cuningham, Academic Press, New York: 63-76 (1980). 8. MILLER, J. F. A. P. —T cell dependent inflammatory responses, in Inflammation: mechanisms and treatment, MTP, Lancaster: 107-112 (1980). 9. MILLER, J. F. A. P. and ARNOLD, B.-Specific suppressor T cell hybridomas, in Transplantation and clinical immunology, Vol. II: Proc. 11th Int. Course, Lvon, 1979, Ex­ cerpta Medica, Amsterdam: 95-100 (1980). 10. MITCHELL. G. I-. — Discussions on aspecis of the immunology of microbial diseases. 111. Protozoa, in Proc. Australian Development Assistance Bureau Research for Development Seminar, No. 3, Svdnev, 1979: Tropical immunology, ed. L. Davidson, Commonwealth In­ stitute of Health, Sydney: 60-67 (1980). 11. MITCHELL, G. F. and CHAPMAN, C. B. —Immunity against mctazoan and protozoan parasites, in Australian advances in veterinary science, 1980. Proc. of the Australian Vcterinarv Association Conference, Hobart, 1980, Australian Veterinary Association, Hobart: 19-20 (1980). 12. NOSSAL, G. J. V.—At what B cell developmental stage does clonal commitment occur, in Strategies of immune regulation, eds. E. E. Sercarz and A. J. Cunningham, Academic Press, New York: 263-265 (1980). 13. NOSSAL, G. J. V.—Concluding remarks (Symposium on Cancer, causes and control, Australian Academy ofScience, May, 1980), in Cancer, causes and control, ed. D. Metcalf, Australian Academy of Science, Canberra: 119-121 (1980). 14. NOSSAL, G. J. V. — Immunological tolerance: cellular facts and clinical speculations (The 1980 Lilly Lecture of the Royal College of Physicians of London), in Advanced medicine, 16: Proc. 16th Advanced Medicine Conference of the Roval College of Phvsicians, ed. A. J. Bellingham, Pitman, London: 356-369 (1980). 15. NOSSAL, G. J. V. — Institutional linkages in trans-national research —roles for public and private sectors, in Proc. Australian Development Assistance Bureau Research for Develop­ ment Seminar, No. 3, Sydney, 1979: Tropical immunology, cd. L. Davidson, Com­ monwealth Institute of Health, Sydney: 183-186 (1980). 16. NOSSAL, G. J. V. —Varying sensitivities to tolerance induction throughout maturation, in Strategies of immune regulation, eds. E. E. Sercarz and A.J. Cunningham, Academic Press, New York: 517-520 (1980). 17. TAIT, B. D., MACKAY, 1. R., KASTELAN, A., DAUSSET, J., MAYER, S. and OKOCHI, K.—Chronic liver disease including chronic active hepatitis, in Proc. 8th Histocompatibility Workshop, Los Angeles, Feb., 1980: Histocompatibility testing, 1980, ed. P. 1. Terasaki, UCLA, Tissue Typing Laboratory, Los Angeles: 657-661 (1980).

Articles 18. ADAMS, J. M.—The organization and expression of immunoglobulin genes. Immunology Todav, 1: 10-17 (1980). 19. ADAMS, J. M., GOUGH, N. M., WEBB, E. A., TYLER, B. M., JACKSON, J. and CORY, S. — Molecular cloning of mouse immunoglobulin heavy chain mRNAs coding for /i, a, y\, 72a, and y} chains. Biochemistry, 19: 2711-2719 (1980). 20. ASHERSON, G. L., ZEMBALA, M.. THOMAS, W. R. and PERERA, M. A. C. C- Supressor cells and the handling of antigen. Immunol. Rev., 50: 1-45 (1980). 21. BERNARD, O. and GOUGH, N. M. — Nucleotide sequence of immunoglobulin heavy chain

joining segments between translocated VM and n constant region genes. Proc. Nal. Acad. Sci. USA, 77: 3630-3634 (1980). 22. BOYD, A. W. and SCHRADER, J. W.-Mechanism of effector cell blockade. I. Antigen in­ duced suppression of Ig synthesis in a hybridoma cell line, with cell-associated antigen. J. Exp. Med., 151: 1436-1451 (1980). 23. BROWN, G. V., BATTYE, F. L. and HOWARD, R. J.-Separaiion of stages of Plasmodium falciparum-Meded cells using a fluorescence activated cell sorter. Amer. J. Trop. Med. Hvg., 29: 1147-1149 (1980). 24. BURGESS, A. W., CRUISE, K. M., MITCHELL, G. F. and WATT, S. M. - Preparation and surface labelling of murine eosinophilic polymorphonuclear leukocytes. Exp. Hematol., 8: 108-120 (1980). 25. BURGESS, A. W. and METCALF, D. — Characterization of a serum factor stimulating the differentiation of myclomonocytic leukemic cells. Int. J. Cancer, 26: 647-654 (1980). 26. BURGESS, A. W. and METCALF, D. — The nature and action of granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factors. Blood, 56: 947-958 (1980). MEDICAL BIOLOGY 143

27. BURGESS, A. \V„ METCALF, D., RUSSELL, S. H. M. and NICOLA, N. A.- Granulocytc/macrophagc, megakaryocyte, eosinophil and cryihroid-colony stimulating fac­ tors produced by mouse spleen cells. Biochem. J., 185: 301-314 (1980). 28. BURTON, R. C. and WARNER, N. L.-Tumor immunity to murine plasma cell tumors. V. Genetic control of the in vino cytotoxic T-cell respunse lo plasma cell lumor-associated an- tieens of NZB mice. J. Nat. Cancer Inst., 65: 431-440 (1980). 29. BUXTON, B., LAMBERT, R. P. and PITT, T. T. E.-The significance of vein wall thickness and diameter in relation to thc patency of femoro-popliteal saphenous vein bypass grarts. Surgerv, 87: 425-431 (1980). 30. CAWLEY, J. C. and BURNS, G. F.—Thc cytochemistry of human lymphoreticular sub- populations. Immunology Today, I: 85-90 (1980). 31. CEREDIG, Rh. — Frequencies of allorcactive cytotoxic T lymphocyte precursors responding to H-2 antigens alone. Immunology, 40: 163-169 (1980). 32. COOPER, P. C, COFFEY, M. F., ANDERS, R. F. and MACKAY, 1. R. — Delayed-type hypersensitivity to liver F antigen in the mouse. J. Immunol., 124: 790-794 (1980). 33. CORY, S. and ADAMS, J. M. - Deletions are associated with somatic rearrangement of im­ munoglobulin heavy chain genes. Cell, 19: 37-51 (1980). 34. CORY, S., ADAMS, J. M. and KEMP, D. J. —Somatic rearrangements forming active im- muiiogloblin p. genes in B and T lymphoid cell lines. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 77: 4943-4947 (1980). 35. CORY, S., JACKSON, J. and ADAMS, J. M. — Deletions within the constant region locus can account for switches in immunoglobulin heavy chain expression. Nature, 285: 450-456 (1980). 36. CRAIG, P. S., MITCHELL, G. F., CRUISE, K. M. and RICKARD, M. D.-Hybridoma antibody immunoassays for the detection of parasitic infection: attempts to produce an im- munodiagnostic reagent for a larval taeniid cestode infection. Aust. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci, 58: 339-350 (1980). 37. DAWKINS, H. J. S.. GROVE, D. I., DUNSMORE, J. D. and MITCHELL, G. F.- Strongyloides ratti: susceptibility to infection and resistance to reinfection in inbred strains of mice as assessed bv the excretion of larvae. Int. J. Parusitol., 10: 125-130 (19S0). 38. DcLUCA, D., MANDEL, T. E., LUCKENBACH, G. A. and KENNEDY, M. M. —Tolerance induction by fusion of fetal thymus lobes in organ culture. J. Immunol.. 124: 1821-1829 (1980). 39. DEXTER, T. M., GARLAND, J., SCOTT, D., SCOLNICK, E. and METCALF, D. — Growth of factor-dependent haemopoietic precursor cell lines. J. Exp. Med.. 152: 1036-1047 (1980). 40. GODING, J. W.-Antibody production bv hybridomas. J. Immunol. Methods, 39: 285-308 (1980). 41. GOLDSCHNEIDER, I., METCALF, D., BATTYE, F. and MANDEL, T.-Analysis of rat hemopoietic cells on thc fluorescence activated cell sorter. 1. Isolation of pluripotent hemopoietic stem cells and granulocvte-macrophagc progenitor cells. J. Exp. Med., 152: 419-437 (1980). 42. GOLDSCHNEIDER, I., METCALF, D., MANDEL, T. and BOLLUM, F. J.-Analysis of rat hemopoietic cells on the fluorescence activated cell sorter. II. Isolation of terminal deoxy- nuclcotidyl transfcrase-positive cells. J. Exp. Med., 152: 438-446 (1980). 43. GOUGH. N. M., KEMP, D. j., TYLER, B. M., ADAMS, J. M. and CORY, S -Interven­ ing sequences divide the gene for thc constant region of mouse immunoglobulin y. chains into segments, each encoding a domain. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA. 77: 554-558 (1980). 44. GOUGH, N. M., WEBB, E. A., CORY, S. and ADAMS, J. M.-Molecular cloning of seven mouse immunoglobulin x chain messenger ribonucleic acids. Biochemistry, 19: 2702-2710 (1980). 45. HAMILTON, J. A., STANLEY, E. R., BURGESS, A. W. and SHADDUCK, R. K. Stimulation of macrophage plasminogen activator production by colonv stimulating factors. J. Cell. Phvsiol.. 103 : 435-445 (1980). 46. HAWKINS, B. R., CHEAH, P. S., DAWKINS, R. L., WHITTINGHAM, S., BURGER, H. G., PATEL, Y., MACKAY, I. R. and WELBORN, T. A.-The diagnostic significance of thyroid microsomal antibodies in a randomly selected population. Lancet, II: 1057-1059 (1980). 47. HOGARTH, P. M., CRUISE, K. M., McKENZIE, I. F. C. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Sur­ face markers of a purified peritoneal eosinophil population from Mesocestoides corti- infected BALB/c male mice. ./. Immunol., 124: 406-411 (1980). 48. HOWARD, M., BAKER, J., TEALE, J. and SHORTMAN, K.-Antigen-initiated B-lymphocyte differentiation. XVII. The inhibitory effects of recent antigen preprinting on thc subsequent responsiveness of'pro-progenitor' B cells. Scand. J. Immunol.. 11: 327-334 (1980). 49. HOWARD. R. J., CHAPMAN, C. B. and MITCHELL, G. F.-A difference in surface pro- 144 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

tcins of Fasciola hepatica larvae from imact and nude mice. Aust. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci.. 58: 201-205 (1980). 50. HOWARD, R. J., SMITH, P. M. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Characterization of surface proteins and glycoproteins of red blood cells infected with haemosporidia. 1. Babesia roclhaini infections of BALB/c mice. Parasitology, 81; 251-272 (1980). 51. HOWARD, R. J., SMITH, P. M. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Characterization of surface proteins and glycoproteins of red blood cells infected with haemosporidia. II. Plasmodium herghei infections of BALB/c mice. Parasitology, 81: 273-298 (1980). 52. HOWARD, R. J., SMITH, P. M. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Characterization of surface proteins and glycoproteins of red blood cells infected with haemosporidia. III. Plasmodium voelii infections of BALB/c mice. Parasitology, 81: 299-314 (1980). 53. HOWARD, R. J., RODWELL, B. J., SMITH, P. M., CALLOW, L. L. and MITCHELL. G. F.— Comparison of thc surface proteins and glycoproteins on erythrocytes of calves before and during infection with Babesia bovis. J. Protozoal., 27: 241-247 (1980). 54. HOWARD, R. J. and SAWYER, W. H. — Changes in thc membrane microviscosity of mouse red blood cells infected with Plasmodium berghei detected using normal-(9-anthroylo.\y) fatty acid fluorescent probes. Parasitology, 80: 331-342 (1980). 55. HURLEY, J. C, DAY, K. P. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Accelerated rejection of Neinaiospiroidcs dubius intestinal worms in mice sensitized with adult worms. /l;/.sr. ./. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci.. 58: 231-240 (1980). 56. JOHNSON, G. R.—Colonv formation in agar by adult bone marrow multi-potential hemopoietic cells. J. Cell. Physiol.. 103: 371-383 (1980). 57. JOHNSON, G. R. and METCALF, D. — Detection of a new tvpc of mouse eosinophil colonv by Luxol-Fast-Blue staining. Exp. Hematol., 8: 549-561 (1980). 58. KAY, T. W., PIKE, B. L. and NOSSAL, G. J. V.-Mechanisms of clonal abortion lolerogenesis. IV. Verification of the hypothesis in living mice. J. Immunol., 124: 1579-1584 (1980). 59. KEMP, D. J., HARRIS, A. W., CORY, S. and ADAMS, J. M. — Expression of thc im­ munoglobulin C„ gene in mouse T and B Ivmphoid and mveloid cell lines. Proc. Nal. Acad. Sci. USA, 77: 2876-2885 (1980). 60. KEMP. D. J., WILSON, A., HARRIS, A. W. and SHORTMAN, K.-The immunoglobulin li constant region gene is expressed in mouse thymocytes. Nature, 286: 168-170 (1980). 61. KRONBORG, I. J. and KNOPF, P. M. — Intrahepatic synthesis of immunoglobulin G in chronic liver disease. Ann. Acad. Med., Singapore, 9: 176-178 (1980). 62. LAYTON, J. E.— Anti-carbohydrate activity of T-cell-reactive chicken anti-mouse im­ munoglobulin antibodies. J. Immunology, 125: 1993-1997 (1980). 63. LEVIN, J., LEVIN, F. C. and METCALF, D.-Thc effects of acute thrombocytopenia on mcgakarvocyte-CFC and granulocvlc-macrophage-CFC in mice: studies of bone marrow and spleen. Blood, 56: 274-283 (1980).' 64. MCCARTHY, J. H., MANDEL, T. E., GARSON, O. M. and METCALF, D.-Thc presence of mast cells in agar cultures. Exp. Hematol., 8: 562-567 (1980). 65. MCCARTHY, J. H., NICOLA, N., SZELACI, G. and GARSON, O. M.-Studies on eosinophil colonies grown from leukemic and non-lcukemic patients. Leukemia Res., 4: 415-426 (1980). 66. MACKAY, I. R. — Immunologv of chronic hepatitis. Ann. Acad. Med., Singapore, 9: 167-171 (1980). 67. MACKAY, 1. R., GODYCK1, E. and TOURTELLOTTE, W. W.-Effect of multiple sclerosis materials on polymorphonuclear neutrophils of mice. Acta Neurol. Scand., 61: 1-8 (1980). 68. MACKAY, 1. R., ROSE, N. R. and CARNEGIE, P. R. —Germ-line deletion of genes coding for self-determinants. Nature, 288: 302-303 (1980). 69. MACKAY, 1. R. and TAIT, B. D. — HLA associations with autoimmune-type chronic active hepatitis: identification of B8-DRw3 haplotvpe by familv studies. Gastroenterology, 79: 95-98 (1980). 70. MACKAY, I. R., WHITTINGHAM, S., MATHEWS, J. D. and TAIT, B. D.-Genetic determinants of autoimmune chronic active hepatitis. Springer Seminars in Im- munopathology. Autoimmune liver disease, 3: 285-296 (1980). 71. MANDEL, T. E. and CHEERS, C. — Resistance and susceptibility of mice to bacterial infec­ tion. III. Histopathology of listeriosis in resistant and susceptible strains. Infect. Immun., 30: 851-861 (1980). 72. MANDEL, T. E., H1GG1NBOTHAM, L., COLLIER, S., CARTER, W. and MARTIN, F. 1. R. — Effect of in vitro glucose concentration on fetal mouse pancreas cultures used as grafts in syngeneic diabetic mice. Transplantation, 30: 231-233 (1980). 73. MANDEL, T. E., HOFFMAN, L., COLLIER, S., CARTER, W., MARTIN, F. 1. R. and CAMPBELL, D.—Transplantation of islets of Langerhans in experimental diabetes mellitus. Proc. of The Endocrine Society of Australia, 23: 2-3 (1980). MEDICAL BIOLOGY 145

74. MANDEL, T. E., PH1PPS, R. P., ABBOT, A. and TEW, J. G.-The follicular dendritic cell; long term antigen retention during immunity. Immunol. Rev., 53: 29-59 (I980). 75. MARCHALONIS, J. J., WARR, G. W., SANTUCCI, L. A., SZENBERG, A., von FELLENBERG, R. and BURCKHARDT, J. J.-The immunoglobulin-like T-cell receptor. IV. Quantitative cellular assay and partial characterization of a heavy chain cross-reactive with the FD fragment of serum p. chain. Mol. Immunol., 17: 985-999 (1980). 76. METCALF, D. —Clonal analysis of thc proliferation and differentiation of paired daughter cells: action of granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor on granulocyte- macrophage precursors. Proc. Nal. Acad. Sci. USA, 77: 5327-5330 (1980). 77. METCALF, D. —Clonal extinction of myclomonocytic leukaemic cells by serum from mice injected with endotoxin. //;(. J. Cancer, 25: 225-233 (1980). 78. METCALF, D., JOHNSON, G. R. and BURGESS, A. W.-Direct stimulation by purified GM-CSF of the proliferation of multipotential and erythroid precursor cells. Blood, 55: 138-147 (1980). 79. MITCHELL, G. F., CURTIS, J. M., HANDMAN, E. and McKENZIE, 1. F. C- Cutaneous leishmaniasis in mice: disease patterns in reconstituted nude mice of several genotypes infected with Leishmania tropica. Aust. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 58: 521-532 (1980). 80. MITCHELL, G. F., RAJASEKARIAH, G. R. and RICKARD, M. D.-A mechanism to ac­ count for mouse strain variation in resistance to the larval cestode, Taenia laeniae/orrnis. Im­ munology, 39: 481-489 (1980). 81. MORSTYN, G., NICOLA, N. A. and METCALF, D. - Purification of hemopoietic pro­ genitor cells from human marrow using a fucosc binding lectin and cell sorting. Blood, 56: 798-805 (1980). 82. MOTTRAM, P. L. and MILLER, J. F. A. P. - Delayed-type hypersensitivity induced by antigen-pulsed bone marrow-derived macrophages. Eur. J. Immunol., 10: 165-170 (1980). 83. NICOLA, N. A., BURGESS, A. W., STABER, F. G., JOHNSON, G. R., METCALF, D. and BATTYE, F. L. — Differential expression of lectin receptors during hemopoietic differen­ tiation: enrichment for granulocyte-macrophage progenitor cells. J. Cell. Physiol., 103: 217-237 (1980). 84. NICOLA, N. A., MORSTYN, G. and METCALF, D. — Lectin receptors on human blood and bone marrow cells and their use in cell separation. Blood Cells, 6: 563-579 (1980). 85. NOSSAL, G. J. V.—Antibody formation: strategies of molecular recognition and cellular control. Records of the Australian Academy of Science, 4 (3): 53-71 (1980). 86. NOSSAL, G. J. V.—The case historv of Mr T. 1. —terminal patient or still curable? Im­ munology Today, I: 5-9 (1980). 87. NOSSAL, G. J. V.-Global and regional strategy. World Health, World Health Organiza­ tion, Geneva: 20-24 (April 1980). 88. NOSSAL, G. J. V. —Human insulin through recombinant DNA technology. Med. J. Ausi. (Editorial), 2: 295-296 (1980). 89. NOSSAL, Ci. J. V. and PIKE, B. L. — Clonal anergy: persistence in tolerant mice of antigen- binding B lymphocytes incapable of responding to antigen or mitogen. Proc. Nal. Acad. Sci. USA. 77: 1602-1606 (1980). 90. O'DONNELL, I. J. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Ati investigation of the antigens of Ascaris tuinbricoides using a radioimmunoassay and sera of naturally infected humans. //)/. Arch. Allergv Appl. Immunol., 61: 213-219 (1980). 91. OLOBO, J. O., HANDMAN, E., CURTIS, J. and MITCHELL, G. F. — Antibodies lo Leishmania tropica promastigotes during infection in mice of various genotypes. Aust. ./. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci.. 58: 595-601 (1980). 92. PENSCHOW, J. and MACKAY, 1. R.-NK and K cell activity of human blood: differences according to sex, age and disease. Ann. Rheum. Dis., 39: 82-86 (1980). 93. PETERS, M., MACKAY, I. R. and BUCKLEY, .1. D.-Occurrence of tumors and effects of longevity after limited x-irradiation in man. Amer. J. Path., 101: 647-655 (1980). 94. PHIPPS, R. P., MITCHELL, G. P., MANDEL, T. E. and TEW, J. G.-Antibody isotypes mediating antigen retention in passively immunized mice. Immunology, 40: 459-466 (1980). 95. PHIPPS, R. P., TEW, J. G., MILLER, G. A. and MANDEL, T. E.-A murine model for analysis of spontaneous induction and feedback regulation of specific antibody synthesis. Immunol, Commun., 9: 55-70 (1980). 96. PIKE, B. L., KAY, T. W. and NOSSAL, G. J. V. - Relative sensitivity of fetal and newborn mice to induction of hapten-specific B cell tolerance. J. Exp. Med., 152: 1407-1412 (1980). 97. PROUDFOOT, A. D. and MACKAY, I. R. —Utility analysis of a computer stored diagnosis index and other medical record dala. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 314-319 (1980). 98. PROWSE, S. J. and MITCHELL, G. F.-On the choice of mice for dissection of strain variations in thc development of resistance to infection with Nematospiroides dubius. Ausi. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci.. 58: 603-605 (1980). 99. RAJASEKARIAH, G. R., MITCHELL, G. F. and RICKARD, M. D.-Taenia taeniafor- 146 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

mis in mice: protective immunization with oncospheres and their products. Int. J. Parasitol.. 10: 155-160 (1980). 100. RAJASEKARIAH, G. R., RICKARD, iM. D. and MITCHELL, G. F. - Density gradient separation of Taenia pisiformis oncospheres. J. Parasitol., 66: 355-356 (1980). 101. RAJASEKARIAH, G. R., RICKARD, M. D. and MITCHELL, G. F. — Immunization of mice against infection with Taenia laeniaformis using various antigens prepared from eggs, oncospheres, developing larvae and strobilocerci. Int. J. Parasitol., 10: 315-324 (1980). 102. ROBERTS-THOMSON, I. C, MITCHELL, G. F.. ANDERS, R. F.. TAIT, B. D., KERLIN, P., KERR-GRANT, A. and CAVANAGH, P.-Genetic studies in human and murine giardiasis. Gut. 21: 397-401 (1980). 103. RODGER, B., WHITTINGHAM, S., MARTIN, F. I. R., HAWKINS, B. R., DAWKINS, R. L. and WELBORN, T. A. —A population survey of pancreatic islet cell anti-bodies. Clin. Exp. Immunol., 39: 125-129 (1980). 104. SCHRADER, J. W., ARNOLD, B. and CLARK-LEWIS, l.-A T cell hybridoma stimulated with concanavalin A releases factors affecting both haemopoietic colony-forming cells and B cell antibody responses. Nature, 283: 197-199 (1980). 105. SCHRADER, J. W. and NOSSAL, G. J. V.-Strategies Tor the analysis of accessory-cell function; the in vitro cloning and characterization of thc P cell. Immunol. Rev., 53: 61-85 (1980). 106. SCHUMACHER, M. J.— Characterization of allergens from urine and pelts of laboratory mice. Molec. Immunol.. 17: 1087-1095 (1980). 107. SCHUMACHER, M. J. — The effect of a /3-adrenergic agonist, fenoterol, on nasal sensitivity to allergen. J. Allergv Clin. Immunol., 66: 33-36 (1980). 108. SCHUMACHER, M. J. and MITCHELL, G. F. - Inhibition of murine reaginic antibody responses bv nasal immunotherapy with modified allergen. Int. Arch. Allergv Appl. Im­ munol., 62: 382-388 (1980). 109. SHORTMAN, K.—Citation Classics: The separation of different cell classes from lymphoid organs. II. The purification and analysis of lymphocyte populations by equilibrium density gradient centrifugation. Current Contents, 23 (14): 12 (1980). 110. STABER, F. G. — Diminished response of granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating fac­ tor (GM-CSF) in mice after sensitization wilh baclcrial cell-wall components. Exp. Hematol., 8: 120-133 (1980). 111. STABER, F. G. and BURGESS, A. W.-Serum of lipopolysaccharide treated mice contains two types of colony-stimulating factor, separable by affinity chromatography. J. Cell. Physiol., 102: 1-10 (1980). 112. STABER, F. G. and JOHNSON, G. R.—Thc responses of hemopoietic precursor cells in mice to bacterial cell-wall components. J. Cell. Physiol., 105: 143-152 (1980). 113. STABER, F. G. and METCALF, D. —Cellular and molecular basis of the increased splenic hemopoiesis in mice treated with bacterial cell wall components. Proc. Nal. Acad. Sci. USA, 77: 4322-4325 (1980). 114. STABER. F. G. and METCALF, D. —Humoral regulation of splenic hemopoiesis in mice. Exp. Hematol., 8: 1094-1105 (1980). 115. STEVEN, M. M. and MACKAY, 1. R. —Prognosis of pregnancy in chronic liver disease. Gastroenterology, 78: 1116(1980). 116. TEALE, J. M. and MANDEL, T. E. —The ontogenic development of B lymphocyte func­ tion and tolerance susceptibility in vivo and in an in vitro fetal organ culture system. J. Exp. Med., 151: 429-445 (1980). 117. TEALE, J. M., PIKE, B. L., CRAIG, J., NOSSAL, G. J. V. and McKENZIE, I. F. C- Clonal analysis of B lymphocyte subpopulations separated on the basis of Lyb surface an­ tigens. Cell. Immunol., 55: 272-282 (1980). 118. TEW, J. G., MANDEL, T. E. and RICE, P. L. —Immune elimination and immune reten­ tion: the relationship between antigen retained in the foot and the elicitation of foot pad swelling. Immunology, 40: 425-433 (1980). 119. TEW, J. G., PHIPPS, R. P. and MANDEL, T. E.-The maintenance and regulation ofthe humoral immune response; persisting antigen and the role of follicular antigen-binding den­ dritic cells as accessory cells. Immunol. Rev., 53: 175-201 (1980). 120. TYLER, B. M. and ADAMS, J. M.-Enrichment of specific genes from genomic DNA or from clone library DNA, using R-looping. Gene, 10: 147-155 (1980). 121. TYLER, B. M. and ADAMS, J. M.—Organisation of the sequences flanking im­ munoglobulin heavy chain genes and their role in class switching. Nucleic Acids Res., 8: 5579-5598 (1980). 122. VADAS, M. A. —The eosinophil: a cell comes of age. Clin. Immunol. Newsletter, I (13): 1-4 (1980). 123. VADAS, M. A. —Parasite immunity and the major histocompatibility complex. Im­ munogenetics, 11: 215-224 (1980). 124. von MELCHNER, H. and METCALF, D. —Differential seeding of injected hemopoietic MEDICAL BIOLOGY 147

precursor cells in the bone marrow and spleen of irradiated mice. Leukemia Res., 4: 393-398 (1980). 125. von MELCHNER, H., METCALF, D. and MANDEL, T. E.-Usc of spleen organ cultures to monitor hemopoietic progenitor cell regeneration following irradiation and marrow transplantation. Blood, 56: 917-922 (1980). 126. WALKER, I. D. and HARRIS, A. W. - Immunoglobulin C RNA in T lymphoma cells is not translated. Nature, 288: 290-293 (1980). 127. WATT, S. M., BURGESS, A. W., METCALF, D. and BATTYE, F. L. — Isolation of mouse bone marrow neutrophils by light scatter and autofluorcsccncc. J. llistochem. Cytochem.. 28: 934-946 (1980). 128. WHITTINGHAM, S. — Clinical immunology in Australia. Clin. Immunol. Newsletter, I (17): 4-6 (1980). 129. WHITTINGHAM, S., MATHEWS, J. D., SCHANFIELD, M. S., MATTHEWS, J. V.,

TAIT, B. D., MORRIS, P. J. and MACKAY, 1. R. - Interactive effect of Gm allotypes and HLA-B locus antigens on thc human antibody response lo a bacterial antigen. Clin. Exp. Im­ munol., 40: 8-15 (1980). 130. WILLIAMS, N. and BURGESS, A. W.-The effect of mouse lung granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor and other colony stimulating activities on the proliferation and differentiation of murine bone marrow cells in long-term culture. J. Cell. Physiol., 102: 287-295 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. CEREDIG, Rh. — In vitro studies of cell mediated immunity to human and murine tumour associated antigen. 2. GOUGH, N. M. — Control of immunoglobulin gene expression 3. McCARTH Y, J. H. — Regulation of granulocyte and macrophage populations in leukaemia. 4. SMITH, F. I. —Activation of T lymphocytes in cellular immunity. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BOYD, A. —Cell surface phenomena and immunological unresponsiveness. 2. BUCKLEY, J. D. — Cancer epidemiology and diagnosis. 3. CHAPMAN, C. — Immunological aspecis of Fasciola hepatica infections of sheep and cattle. 4. CLARK-LEWIS, 1. — Biochemical studies of lymphocyte differentiation. 5. COLLIER, S. — Organ and tissue culture studies of pancreatic islet cells. 6. COOPER, P. —Molecular regulation of haemopoiesis. 7. COPPEL, R. — Studies on human filariasis and malaria. 8. COWMAN, A. — Molecular cloning and analysis of immunoglobulin genes from T cells. 9. GERONDAK1S, S. — Gene organization in the immunoglobulin heavy chain locus. 10. JENNINGS, G.~ Differentiation and clonal proliferation of B cell subsets. 11. KAHL, L. — Biochemical and immunological aspecis of red cell invasion by babesia parasites. 12. LAYTON, .1. E. — The function of lymphocyte surface IgM and IgD during B cell matura­ tion. 13. LOWENTAH L, .1. - Radiobiology of lymphoid cells. 14. MORAHAN, Ci. — Production and characterization of functional T and B cell hybridomas. 15. MORSTYN, G. — Analysis of ihe nature and control of normal and leukaemic cells. 16. PIKE, Yi. — Differentiation of B lymphocytes and their interaction with antigen. 17. TYLER, Yi.—Expression of immunoglobulin genes. MSc Theses in Progress 18. FORSYTH, K. — Antigens o/Onchocerca gibsoni. 19. GAMBLE, }. — T cell hybridomas, their production and characterization. 20. MOTTRAM, P. —The role of the macrophage in delayed type hypersensitivity. 148 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

MEDICAL HISTORY

INTRODUCTION In 1980, Professor Attwood joined Professor Russell on moving lo ihe Melbourne campus from the Austin Hospital. RESEARCH IN PROGRESS 1. History and bibliography of anatomy — K. F. Russell. 2. Mondino dei Luzzi and his Anothomia — K. F. Russell. 3. Thc hisiory of Chinese name seals—K. F. Russell. 4. Musical doctors —J. F. Russell. 5. Biographical research on Rupert Willis—H. D. Atlwood. 6. The Edinburgh notebooks of Dr Kenneth Maxwell —H. D. Attwood. 7. Medical men in thc early hisiory of the Austin Hospital —E. W. Gault, H. D. Attwood. PUBLISHED WORK Article I. ATTWOOD, H. D.-Rupert Willis. The America J. of Surg. Path.. 4: 511 (1980). MEDICINE

AUSTIN HOSPITAL AND REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION Research continued in 1980, into a wide variety of topics related to human disease. Thc Department is divided into a number of research groups, each working independently, but col­ laborative research between groups, utilizing thc special skills of each, makes an important con­ tribution to the intellectual life of thc Department. The major research groups are involved in research in cardiovascular diseases, endocrinology, immunology, gastro intestinal disease, and renal disease, clinical pharmacology and behavioural disorders. A new rheumatology research group has been formed. A major feature of the Depart­ ment's research organization is the close collaboration between University and Hospital stall'who share common interests and facilities.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. MEDICINE-AUSTIN HOSPITAL 1. Thc role of tissue angiotensin forming systems in experimental and genetic hypertension — E. A. O. Mendelsohn, .1. S. Hutchinson, J. Gsicsmann, R. DiNicolantonio. 2. Control of aldosterone biosynthesis in vilro—l7. A. O. Mendelsohn, D. J. Campbell. 3. Production of angiotensin converting enzyme by cultured endothelial cells —F. A. O. Mendelsohn, C. Sharrad. 4. Activities of converting enzyme inhibitors in vivo — }. S. Hutchinson, Y. Takata, R. DiNicolantonio, E. A. O. Mendelsohn, A. E. Doyle. 5. Calcium in the ischaemic heart —VV. G. Nayler, P. Grinwald. 6. Hepatic transport and elimination of drugs—R. A. SmaUwood, N. D. Yeomans, G. VV. Mihaly, R. G. Hanson, D. B. Jones, A. VV. Marshall. 7. Thc gastric mucosa — N. D. Yeomans, A. S. Giraud, S. J. Millar, L. K. Webster, A. Newton, R. Hanson. S. Infective factors in the actiopathogenesis of ankylosing spondylitis and other HLA associated diseases —R. W. Ebringer. 9. Renal bone disease: vitamin D metabolism in chronic renal failure and renal transplanta­ tion—D. Brown, .1. K. Dawborn. 10. Communitv aspecis and delivery of health care in relation to renal disease in children and adults-VV' Heale. 11. Divalent iron transfer and other aspects of peritoneal dialysis —J. K. Dawborn, W. Heale. 12. Dialysis in thc treatment of schizophrenia —J. K. Dawborn, D. Leonard, F. Varghese. 13. Roles of prostacyclin in the cardiovascular system — G. J. Dusting, R. D. Nolan. 14. Functional aspecis of diabetic nephropathy —G. Jerums, R. M. L. Murray. 15. Lymphocyte responsiveness in hypothyroidism — G. Jerums, R. White. 16. Pathogenesis of experimental renal hypertension —A. E. Doyle, S. Duffy, Y. Takata. 17. Effect of smoking on fibrinoid necrosis—A. E. Doyle, M. Veroni. 18. Hormonal therapy of carcinoma breast —R. M. L. Murray, P. Piti, G. Jerums. 19. Analysis of cell surface antigens —1. F. C. McKenzie, M. Henning, M. Sandrin, B. Loveland, A. Riglar, J. Craig, M. Hogarth, M. Michaelides, H. Vaughan, G. Tobias, C. Thompson, j. Edwards, R. Belts, P. Crewther, V. Sutton, C. Tew, P. Thurlow. B. MEDICINE-REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL 1. Calcitonin receptors and calcitonin responsive adenylate cyclase in cancer cells —T. .1. Mar­ tin, J. M. Moseley, D. M. Findlay, V. P. Michelangcli. 2. Protein phosphorylation control in osteoblasts —T. J. Martin, N. C. Partridge. 3. Cellular mechanisms of bone resorption —T. J. Martin, N. C. Partridge, V. P. Michelangeli. 4. Mechanisms of malignant hypercalcaemia and metastatic bone cancer —T. J. Martin, J. A. Eisman, D. M. Findlay, R. G. Larkins, N. C. Partridge, V. P. Michelangeli. 5. Assay of vitamin D metabolites in man —J. A. Eisman, R. G. Larkins, R. L. Prince. 6. Regulation of vitamin D metabolism — R. Ci. Larkins, J. A. Eisman, R. L. Prince. 7. Platelet interactions with vascular endothelium —T. J. Martin, I. L. Smith. 8. Platelet function in diabetes—R. G. Larkins. 9. Regulation of insulin secretion from pancreatic islets—R. G. Larkins, M. C. Veroni. 10. Sodium homeostasis — W. R. Adam. C. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS 1. Pharmacokinetic analysis of adrenoceptor drugs in hypertensive patients —S. N. Anavekar, M. Dynon, B. Jarrott, W. J. Louis. 2. Distribution and regulation of histamine receptors in blood vessels —B. Jarrott, A. J. Culvenor. 149 150 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

3. Uptake distribution and metabolism of centrally acting antihypertensive drugs—E. L. Con­ way, B. Jarrott. 4. Pharmacokinetics of theophylline in asthmatic patients—P. Trembath, D. Thorsborne- Palmer. 5. Distribution and regulation of dopamine receptors in the central nervous system —P. M. Beart, A. L. Gundlach. 6. Interaction between GABAergic and dopaminergic pathways in the brain-P. iM. Beart, A. L. Gundlach. 7. Central actions of drugs modulating GABAergic neurotransmission — P. M. Beart, L. Howes. 8. Development of radioligands for a adrenoceptors —R. J. Summers, B. Jarrott. 9. Radioligand studies of a adrenoceptors in kidney—R. J. Summers, G. A. McPherson. 10. a adrenoceptors in lymphocytes —R. J. Summers, G. A. McPherson. 11. Adrenoceptors in uterus —R. J. Summers, K. G. Digges. 12. Studies of different beta adrenoceptor blockers in experimental epilepsy in rats —J. Papanicolaou, F. J. E. Vajda, W. J.. Louis. 13. Studies of brain adrenoceptors in chemically and electrically induced seizures —J. Papanicolaou, R. J. Summers, F. J. E. Vajda. 14. Fluorouracil pharmacokinetics in relation to clinical drug toxicity —I. Lucas, F. J. E. Vajda, N. Christophidis, W. J. Louis. 15. Studies of cis-plaiinum in man —I. Lucas, F. J. E. Vajda, W. J. Louis. 16. Bioavailability of two preparations of fluorouracil —I. Lucas, F. J. E. Vajda, W. J. Louis. 17. Gastric and intestinal absorption of sodium valproate—N. Yeomans, F. J. E. Vajda. 18. Hepatic metabolism of methotrexate —A. Proudfoot, G. Mihaly, F. J. E. Vajda. 19. Pharmacokinetics of angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors in hypertensive patients —P. Miach, A. Anderson, B. Jarrott, W. J. Louis. D.PSYCHIATRY 1. Studies of mother-infant interaction —R. A. Meares. 2. Studies of cortical evoked potentials in mental illness —R. A. Meares, J. Milgrom-Fricdman. 3. The cerebral effects of tobacco smoking —R. A. Meares, J. Milgrom-Friedman. 4. Interface of philosophy and psychiatry —E. Harari.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. DOYLE, A. E., MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. and MORGAN, T. O.-Pharmacological and Therapeutic Aspects of Hypertension, CRC Press (1980). 2. CUMMING, I. A., FUNDER, J. W. and MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. (eds.)-Endocrinology 1980, Australian Academy of Science, Canberra (1980). Articles 3. ADAM, W. R. — Aldosterone and dopamine receptors in the kidney: Sites for pharmacologic manipulation of renal function. Kidney Int., 18: 623-628 (1980). 4. ALLEN, R., MENDELSOHN, F. A. O., CSICSMANN, J., WELLER, R. F., HURLEY, T. H. and DOYLE, A. E. — A clinical evaluation of serum angiotensin converting enzyme in sarcoidosis. Aust. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 496-501 (1980). 5. ATKINS, D., WALLER,, P. C. and MARTIN, T. J.-Rat osteogenic sarcoma cells: Modulation of hormone stimulated cyclic AMP production by prostaglandin antagonists and biosynthesis inhibitors. Clin. Exp. Pharm. & Phys., 7: 31-44 (1980). 6. BEART, P. M. and MeDONALD, D. —Neurochemical studies of the mesolimbic dopaminergic pathway: somatodendritic mechanisms and GABAergic neurones in the rat ventral tegmentum. J. Neurochem., 34: 1622-1629 (1980). 7. BEART, P. M. and GUNDLACH, A. L. — 3,4-Dihydroxyphenylacetic acid (DOPAC) and the mesolimbic dopaminergic pathway: drugs effects and evidence for somatodendritic mechanisms. Br. J. Pharmacol., 69: 241-247 (1980). 8. CHAPPLE, D. J., DUSTING, G. J., HUGHES, R. and VANE, J. R.-Some direct and

reflex cardiovascular actions of prostacyclin (PGI2) and PGE2 in anaesthetized dogs. Bri. J. Pharmacol., 68: 437-447 (1980). 9. CLARK, S„ LARKINS, R. G., deLUISE, M. and MELICK, R. A.-The effects of trypsin and phospholipase C on insulin binding and action in the isolated adiposyte. Biochem. J., 186: 535-540 (1980). 10. CLARK. S., LARKINS, R. G. and MELICK, R. A. — Negative cooperativity induced by desoctapeptide insulin unmasked by phospholipase C treatment. Biochem. Biophys. Pes. Commun., 95: 1543-1549 (1980). 11. COWLING, P., EBRINGER, R., CAWDELL, D., ISHII, M. and EBRINGER, A.- MEDICINE (AUSTIN AND REPAT. GEN. HOSPITALS) 151

C-reaclive prolcin, ESR, and Klebsiella in ankylosing spondylitis. Annals of the Rheumatic Diseases. 39: 45-49 (1980). 12. COWLING, P., EBRINGER, R. and EBRINGER, A. —Association of inflammation with raised scrum IqA in ankylosing spondylitis. Annals of the Rheumatic Diseases., 39: 545-549 (1980). 13. DAWSON, R. M. and JARROTT, B. — Regional distribution of the muscarinic cholinocep- tor and acetylcholinesterase in guinea pig brain. Neurochem. Res., 5: 809-815 (1980). 14. DEN1SON, D. fvl., DAVIES, N. J. H., MEYER, M., PIERCE, R. J. and SCHEID, P.- Single-inhalation method for study of labar and segmental lung function by mass spec­ trometry in man. Respiration Physiology, 42: 87-99 (1980). 15. DEN1SON, D. M., BELLAMY, D. and PIERCE, R. J.-Some observations on lung func­ tion in scoliosis. Scoliosis 1979, Academic Press, London: 137-147 (1980). 16. DAVIS, W. C. and McKENZIE, 1. F. C. — Immunological enhancement can bc mediated by anti-la and anti-K, D, antibodies. Transplantation, 29: 11-19 (1980). 17. DAVIS, W. C, McKENZIE, I. F. C. and MELVOLD, R. W.-A comparison of skin and heart graft rejection patterns in H-2 mutant mice. Transplantation. 29: 189-192 (1980). 18. DOYLE, A. E. —Errors in the treatment of hypertension. Current Therapeutics February: 181: 19 (1980). 19. DOYLE, A. E. —Government funding for medical research (Point of View). Med. J. Aust., I: 181-183 (Feb. 23, 1980). 20. DOYLE, A. E. and DUFFY, S. —Sodium balance and plasma renin activity during thc development of two-kidnev Goldblatl hypertension in rats. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol.: 293-304 (19S0). 21. DRUMMER, O. H. O., CULVENOR", A. J., JARROTT, B. and LOUIS, W. J.-Alpha- and beta-adrenoceptor activities of norepinephrine analogues in isolated tissues of the rat. Circulation Research, 45, Supl. I: 133-137 (1980). 22. DUNN, E. C, EBRINGER, R. and ELL, P. J.-Quantitative scintigraphy in the early diagnosis of sacroilitis Rheumatology and Rehabilitation. 19: 62-75 (1980). 23. DUSTING, G. J., MULLINS, E. M. and NOLAN, R. D.-Stimulation of prostacyclin generation by angiotensins in isolated mesenteric vasculature of rats. Microvasc. Res., 19: 246 (1980). 24. DUSTING, G. J. — Prostacyclin: the prostaglandin of physiological importance in the car­ diovascular system. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7: 98 (1980). 25. DUSTING, G. J. and MULLINS, E. M.-Stimulation by angiotensin of prostacyclin biosynthesis in rats and dogs. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol.. 7: 545-550 (1980). 26. DUSTING, G. J., MULLINS, E. M. and DOYLE, A. E.-Angiolcnsin-induced pro­ stacyclin (PGI;) release may contribute to thc hypotensive action of converting enzvme in­ hibitors. Adv. Prostaglandin Thromboxane Res.. 7: 815-819 (1980). 27. DUSTING, G. J. and VANE, J. R. —Some cardiovascular properties of prostacyclin (PGI,) which are not shared by PGE2. Circ. Res., 46 (Suppl 1.): 1-183-187 (1980). 28. DYNON, M. K., JARROTT, B., DRUMMER, O. H. O. and LOUIS, W. J.-Phar­ macokinetics of prazosin in normotensive subjects after low oral doses. Clinical Phar­ macokinetics, 5: 583-590 (1980). 29. EBRINGER, R., COLTHORPE, D., YOUNG, A. and CORBETT, M.-Increased in­ cidence of faecal Klebsiella pneumoniae in patients with HLA B7 CRECi antigen and men with rheumatoid arthritis, lirit. Med. J., ii: 583-585 (1980). 30. EBRINGER, R.— (Editorial review) HLA B27 and thc link with rheumatic diseases: recent developments. Clinical Science, 59: 405-410 (1980). 31. EISMAN, J. A., MARTIN, T. J., MacINTYRE, 1., FRAMPTON, R. J., MOSELEY, J. M. and WHITEHEAD, R. — 1,25-dihydroxvvitamin D3 receptor in a cultured human breast cancer cell line (MCE 7 cells). Biochem.'Biophvs. Res. Comm.. 93 : 9-15 (1980). 32. EISMAN, J. A. MacINTYRE, I., MARTIN, T. J., ERAMPTOM, R. .1. and KING, R. J. B. —Normal and malignant breast tissue is a target organ for l,25(OH), vitamin Dj. Clin. Endocrinol.. 13: 261-212 (1980). 33. FINDLAY, D. M., dcI.UISE, M., MICHELANGELI, V. P., ELLISON, M. and MARTIN, T. J. — Properties of a calcitonin receptor and adenylate cyclase in BEN cells, a human cancer cell line. Cancer Res. 40: 1311-1317 (1980). 34. FRIEDMAN, J. and MEARES, R. A. — Tobacco smoking and cortical evoked potentials: an opposite clfcct on auditory and visual svstems. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol. 7(6): 609-615 (1980). 35. FRIEDMAN, J., McCALLUM, P. and MEARES, R. A.-Stimulus intensity control in depression: a studv of the comparative effect of doxepin and amitriptyline on cortical evoked potentials. Aust. N.Z. J. Psvchiat.. 14 (2): 115-120 (1980). 36. FUNDER, J. W., MERCER, J. E., ULICK, S., MARVER, D. and ADAM, W. R.- Towards more specific aldosterone antagonists: a radio-receptor assay approach. Circ. Res., 46: 1-10 (1980). 37. GREAVES, M., IBBOTSON, K. J., ATKINS, D. and MARTIN, T. J. - Prostaglandins cx- 152 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

traded from tumours and produced by cultures of renal cortical carcinoma and benign and malignant breast tumours: relation to bone resorption. Clin. Sci., 58: 201-210 (1980). 38. GRINVVALD, P. iM., HEARSE, D. J. and SEGAL, M. B.-A possible mechanism ol glycolytic impairment after adenosine triphosphate depletion in the perfused rat heart. J. Physiol., 301: 337-347 (1980). 39. GIRAUD, A. S. and YEOMANS, N. D.-Phylogeny of the mucous cells in vertebrate gastric mucosa. C//>i. Exper. Pharmacol. Phvsiol. 7: 82-83 (1980). 40. GIRAUD, A. S. and YEOMANS, N. D.-Ultrastructure of thc pvloric cecal epithelium. Micron, //.-(Suppl. I): 17 (1980). 41. GIRAUD, A. S. and YEOMANS, N. D. —Ultrastructure of the pvloric cecal epithelium. Micron II: 489-490 (1980). 42. GUNDLACH, A. L. and BEART, P. M. —Effect of muscimol on dopamine metabolism of the rat hypothalamus. Experientia, 36: 1312-1313 (1980). 43- HALLIDAY, VV. J., BUTTON, C. J., KOPPI, T., McKENZIE, 1. F. C. and NOONAN, F. P. — Identification of l-J antigenic determinants: a Hapten-Spccific scrum blocking factor. Immunology Letters, I: 325-327 (1980). 44. HEAD, R. J., HJELLE, J. T., JARROTT, B., BERKOVV1TZ, B., CARD1NATE, G. and SPECTOR, S. — Isolated brain microvessels: preparation, morphology, histamine and catecholamine contents. Blood Vessels, 17: 173-186(1980). 45. HEALE, VV. P.—The management of hypertension in children. Aus. Fam. Phvsic. 9: 849-850 (1980). 46. HEYMA, P., LARKINS, R. G. and CAMPBELL, D. G. - Inhibition of propranolol of 3,5,3-triiodothyronine formation from thyroxine in isolated rat renal tubules: an effect in­ dependent of beta adrenergic blockade. Endrocrinolozv, 106: 1437-1442 (1980).

47. HEYMA, P., LARKINS, R. G. and CAMPBELL, D. G. -Effects of propranolol on T3 for­

mation from T4 in vitro and i7i vivo studies, in Thvroid Research VIII, eds. J. R. Stockigl and S. Nagataki, Aust. Acad. Sci.: 420-432 (1980).' 48. HEYMA, P. LARKINS, R. G., HIGGINBOTHAM, L. and NG, K. W.-D-propranolol and DL-propranolol both decrease conversion of thyroxine to triiodothyronine in man. Brit. Med. J., 2: 24-25 (1980). 49. HEYMA, P., LARKINS, R. G. and CAMPBELL, D. G. -The effect of iodothyronines on thc conversion of thyroxine to 3,5,3'-triiodolhyronine in isolated rat renal tubules. Biochem. J., 190: 239-242 (1980). 50. HIGGINS, T. J., PARISH, C. R., HOGARTH, P. M., McKENZIE, 1. F. C. and HAM- MERLING, G. J. — Demonstration of carbohydrate and protein determined la antigens by monoclonal antibodies. Immunogenetics, II: 467-482 (1980). ' 51. HOGARTH, P. M., POTTER, T. A., CORNELL, F. N., McLACHLAN, R. and McKEN­ ZIE, I. F. C — Monoclonal antibodies to murine cell surface antigens. I. Lyi-1-11. J. Im­ munol., 125: 1618-1624 (1980). 52. HOGARTH, P. M., CRUISE, K. M., McKENZIE, I. F. C. and MITCHELL, G. F.-Sur­ face markers of a purified peritoneal eosinophil population from mesocestoides corti- infectcd BALB/c male mice. J. Immunol., 124: 406-411 (1980). 53. HOGARTH, P. M., CRAIG, J. and McKENZIE, I. E. C.-A monoclonal antibody delect­ ing the Ly-9.2 (LglOO) cell membrane alloantigen. Immunogenetics, 11: 65-74 (1980). 54. HOROWITZ, J. D., HOWES, L. G., CHRISTOPHIDIS, N., LOUIS, W. J., LANG, VV. J., GENNESSY, M. R. and RAND, M. J. - Hypertensive, responses induced by phenylpropanolamine in anorectic and decongestant preparations.' Lancet, I: 60-61 (1980). 55. HUNT, N. H. and MARTIN, T. J. — Hormone receptors and cyclic nucleotides. Significance for growth and function of tumours. Mol. Aspecis of Med., 3: 59-118 (1980). 56. HUTCHINSON, J. S. and MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. - Hypertensive effects of captopril ad­ ministered centrally in intact conscious SHR and peripherally in ancphric anaesthetized SHR. Clin. Exp. Phvsiol. Pharmacol., 7: 555-558 (1980). 57. HUTCHINSON, J. S., DiNlCOLANTONIO, R., LIM, A. and FUNDER, J.-Im- munoreactivc bela-endorphin levels in plasma and pituitary tissue from hypertensive and normotensive rats. 58. HUTCHINSON, J. S., MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. and DOYLE, A. E. - Hypotensive action of captopril and saralasin in intact and anephric spontaneous^ hypertensive rats. Hyperten­ sion, 2:119-124 (1980). 59. HUTCHINSON, J. S., MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. and DOYLE, A. E.-Blood pressure responses, of conscious normotensive and spontaneously hypertensive rats to in- . tracerebroventricular and peripheral administration of the angiotensin concerting enzyme in- 'hibitor, captopril. Hvpertension, 2: 546-550 (1980). 60. HUTCHINSON, J. S. and DOYLE, A. E. —Hypotensive effects of captopril, saralasin and bromocriptine in spontaneously hypertensive rats. Clinical Science (Suppl. 6): 79S-82S (1980). 61. JARROTT, B. SUMMERS, R. J., CULVENOR, A. J. and LOUIS, W. J.-Characteriza- MEDICINE (AUSTIN AND REPAT. GEN. HOSPITALS) 153

tion of alpha-adrenoceptors in rat and guinea pig tissues using radiolabeled agonists and an­ tagonists. Circ. Res.. 46 (Suppl. 1): 115-120 (1980). 62. JERUMS, G. — The Effect of gliclazide on the evolution of diabetic nephropathy in insulin dependent and non insulin dependent subjects. Royal Societv of Medicine: International Congress Series No. 20: 225-230 (1980). 63. KINSELLA, P., EBRINGER, R. and CORBETT, M. - Levamisolc in severe rheumatoid ar­ thritis: a double blind studv. Journal of Rheumatology 7: 288-292 (1980). 64. LANGDON, W. Y., SHELLAN, G., MORGAN, G. M. and McKENZIE, I. E. C.-The augmentation of endogenous murine leukaemia virus antibodies following lymphocyte alloantigen immunisation. Immunogenetics 10: 150 (1980). 65. LARKINS, R. G., SIMEONOVA, L. and VERONI, M.-Glucose utilization in relation to insulin secretion in NZO and C57B1 mouse islets. Endocrinology 107: 1634-1638 (1980). 66. LARKINS, R. G., MARTIN, F. I. R. and TAIT, B. D.-The HLA system and diabetic com­ plications, in Immunology of Diabetes, ed. W. J. Irvine Tcviot, Scientific Publications Ltd: 337-344 (1980). 67. LEUNG, K. N., ADA, G. L. and McKENZIE, I. F. C.-Thc specificity Ly phenotype and H-2 compatibility requirements of effector cells in DTH responses in murine influenza virus infection. J. Exp. Med., 151: 815-826 (1980). 68. LEVY, J. P. and McKENZIE, I. F. C. — Genetic control of sensitivity to moloney leukaemia virus in mice. IV. Variability in organ involvement in cell surface markers of leukaemic cells. J. Immunol.. 125: 1415-1420 (1980). 69. LOUIS, W. J., McNEIL, J. J., ANDERSON, A. and JARROTT, B.-Use of adrenoceptor blocking drugs in hypertension. Cardiology, 66: 28-35 (1980). 70. LUDBROOK, A., DYNON, M., MENDELSHOHN, F. A. O. and LOUIS, W. J. - A com­ parison of single and twice a day spironolactone therapy in mild hypertension. Med. J. Aust., I: 124-125 (1980). 71. MARSHALL, A. W., MIHALY, G. W., SMALLWOOD, R. A., BALDAS, J., PHILLIPS, J. and VAJDA, F. — Hepatic elimination of thc anticpilcptic agent sodium valproate. Gastroenterology, 78: 1313 (1980). 72. MARSHALL, A. W. MIHALY, G. W., MORGAN, D. J., STEPHENS, D. A., SMALLWOOD, R. A. and HARDY, K. J. —Propranolol disposition and biliary excretion in the pregnant sheep and fetus. Gastroenterology, 77: A25 (1980). 73. MARTIN, T. J., FINDLAY, D. M., MacINTYRE, I., EISMAN, J. A., MICHELANGELI, V. P., MOSELEY, J. M and PARTRIDGE. N. C.-Calcitonin receptors in a cloned human breast cancer cell line (MCF 7) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 96: 150-156 (1980). 74. MARTIN, T. J. and PARTRIDGE. N. C. - Prostaglandins, cancer and bone: phar­ macological considerations. Metabolic Bone Disease and Rel. Res., 2:167-171 (1980). 75. MAS-OLIVA, J., WILLIAMS, A. J. and NAYLER, W. G.-Two orientations of isolated cardiac sarcolemmal vesicles separated by affinity chromatography. Analyt. Biochem., 103: 222-236 (1980). 76. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. and KACHEL, C. D.-Action or angiotensins, I, II and HI on aldosterone • production by isolated rat adrenal zona glomerulosa cells. Importance of metabolism and conversion of" peptides in vitro. Endocrinology, 106: 1760-1768 (1980). 77. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O., HUTCHINSON, J. S. and CSICSMANN, J.-Angiotensin converting enzyme in thc brain or spontaneously hypertensive rats. Clin. Exp. Physiol. Phar­ macol., 7: 551-554 (i980). 78. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O., DOYLE, A. E. and GRAY, G. W.-Lack or response ol" the sympathetic nervous system to angiotensin inrusion. Lancet, March 1: 492-493 (1980). 79. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O —Measurement or blood pressure. Aust. Family Phvsician, 9: 652-654 (1980). 80. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. - Different potencies of Asp1, Iles-and Asn' Val5-angiotensin II is stimulating aldosterone production from rat adrenal zona glomcrulosa cells />J vitro. Clin. Exp. Physiol. Pharmacol., 7: 199-203 (1980). 81. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. — Failure ot suppression ol" intrarenal angiotensin II in thc con­ tralateral kidney one-clip two kidney hypertensive rats. Clin. Exp. Phvsiol. Pharmacol., 7: 219-223 (1980). 82. MENDELSOHN, F. A. O. and SMITH, E. A. - Intrarenal renin and angiotensin 11 and plasma renin in rats with uranvl nitrate and glvcerol-induced acute renal failure. Kidnev In­ ternational, 17: 465-472 (1980). 83. MEARES, R. A., FRIEDMAN, J. and HORVAT H, T. - Attention in hvstcria: a studv of habituation and arousal. Amer. J. Psychiat.. 137 (2): 217-220 (1980), 84. MEARES, R. A. —Body feeling in human relations: the possible examples of Brancusi and Giacometti. Psychiatry, 43: 160-167 (1980). 85. MIACH, P. .1. and LOUIS, VV. .1. — Evaluation of guanfacine and clonidine in patients with essential hypertension: a single blind cross-over study. Med. J. Aust., 2: 395-395 (1980). 86. MIHALY, G. W., DRUMMER, O. H. O., MARSHALL, A., SMALLWOOD, R. A. and

F 154 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

LOUIS, W. J. — High pressure liquid chromatographic determination of Ranitidine, a new

H2-receptor antagonist, in plasma and urine. J. Pharmac. Sci. 69: II55-H58 (1980). 87. MIHALY, G., MARSHALL, A., SMALLWOOD, R. A., McNEIL, J., ANDERSON, A. and LOUIS, W. J. — Pharmacokinetics of the H,-receptor antagonist Ranitidine in man. Gastroenterology, 78: I222 (19S0). 88. MITCHELL, G. F., DURTIS, J. M.. HANDMAN, E. and McKENZIE, I. I'. C.- Cutaneous leishmaniasis in mice: disease patterns with Leishmania tropica. Aust. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 58: 521-532 (1980). 89. MORGAN. T. O., ADAM, W. R., HODGSON, M. and GII3BERD, R. W.-Failure of therapv to improve prognosis in elderlv males with hvpertension. Med. J. Aust., 2: 27 (1980). 90. MORGAN, G. M., DELLOS, 11., McKENZIE, I. F. C, MELVOLD, R. W. and BAILEY, D.-Studies of two H-2Db mutants: C57BL/6-H-2bml3 and C57BL/6-H-2bml4. Immuno­ genetics. 11: 341-349 (1980). 91. MORGAN, G. M., McKENZIE, I. F. C. and MELVOLD. R. W.-The definition ofa new- la antigenic specificity using the C57BL/6. C-H-2hm12 I region mutant strain. Immuno­ genetics, II: 1-6 (1980). 92. MORGAN, G. M., McKENZIE, I. F. C. and MELVOLD, R. W.-Studies of H-2Kb mutants. II. Definition of four new H-2 specificities using C57BL/6-H-2bm,n. Immuno­ genetics. 11: 434-453 (1980). 93. MORGAN, G. M., McKENZIE. I. F. C. and MELVOLD, R. W.-Studies of H-2Kb mutants. 1. Description and serological studies of C57BL/6-H-2bm9, H-2b""°, H-2bm". Im­ munogenetics. II: 31-41 (1980). 94. MORGAN, G. M., McKENZIE, I. F. C. GODING, .1. and MELVOLD, R. W.-/rgene testing in H-2 mutants. ./. Immunogenetics., 7: 421-425 (1980). 95. MORGAN, G. M. and McKENZIE. 1. F. C. —Cell membrane alloantigenic determinants of several unusual mouse strains. ./. Immunogenetics, 7: 393-399 (1980). 96. MOSELEY, J. M., BEATTY, E. A. and MARCHALONIS, .1. J.-Molecular properties of T-lymphoma immunoglobulin II. Peptide composition of thc heavy chain. ./. Im­ munogenetics, 6: 1-18 fl980). 97. McKENZIE, 1. F. C, HENNING, M. and MORGAN, G. M.-Skin graft enhancement studies with antigenic differences arising from thc H-2K, H-2D and H-2L Loci. Transplanta­ tion, 29: 439-433 (1980). 98. McKENZIE, I. F. C, SANDRIN, M. S., MORGAN, G. M., HENNING. M. and MELVOLD, R. W. —Mutation in the IA subrcgion of the murine H-2 complex. Im­ munogenetics, 11: 103-106(1980). 99. NAYLER, W. Ci. —The use of co-en/vme Q10 to protect ischaemic heart muscle. Biomedical and Clinical Aspecis of Co-Enzvme QI0, 2: 409-425 (1980). 100. NAYLER, W. G., FERRARI, R. and SLADE, A.-Cardioprotective actions of calcium an­ tagonists in myocardial angina and ischaemia. Calcium Antagonists, cd. A. Fleckcnstcin: 119-137 (1980). 101. NAYLER, W. G.-Calcium antagonists. European Heart J., I. 225-237 (1980). 107 NAYLER, W. G., MAS-OI.1VA. J. and WILLIAMS, A. J.-Cardiovascular receptors and calcium. Circ. Pes., 46 (Suppl. 1): 161-166 (1980). 103. NAYLER, W. G. and FERRARI, R. —The pharmacological protection of the ischaemic heart. Am. J. Cardiol., 46: 242-249 (1980). 104. NAYLER, W. G. and MAS-OLIVA, J.-Thc effect of verapamil on iheCaJ+ transporting activity of cardiac sarcolemmal vesicles. Brit. J. Pharmacol., 70: 617-624 (1980).

105. NOLAN, R. D., DUSTING, G. J. and MARTIN, T. J. - Inhibition of prostacyclin (PGI2) generation in rat mesenteric vasculature. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7: 427 (1980). 106. O'NEILL, H. C. and McKENZIE, I. F. C.-Quantitative variation in H-2 antigen ex­ pression. I. Estimation of H-2K and H-2D expression in different strains of mice. Immuno­ genetics, 11: 225-239 (1980). 107. OLIVER, L. E., HOROWITZ, .1. D., DYNON, M. K., JARROTT, B., BRENNAN, .1. G., GOBLE, A. J. and LOUIS, W. J. —Use of dopamine and prazosin combined in thc treat­ ment of cardiogenic shock. Med. J. Ausi. (Suppl. 2): 42-45 (1980). 108. PARISH, C. R., O'NEILL, H. C. and McKENZIE, I. F. C.-A new procedure for analysing the relationship between different cell surface antigens. J. Immunol. Methods., 39: 223-232 (1980). 109. PARR, E. L., LAITERTY, K. J., BOWEN, K. M. and McKENZIE, I. F. C.-The survival of allografts after culture in vitro. II. Immunofcrritin labelling of H-2 complex in la antigens on cells dissociated from mouse thyroid glands and islets of langcrhans. Transplantation, 30: 142-148 (1980). 110 PARTRIDGE, N. C, FRAMPTON, R. J., EISMAN, J. A., MICHELANGELI, V. P.,

ELMS, E., BRADLEY, T. R. and MARTIN, T. J.-Rccepiors for l,25(OH)2 vitamin D3 enriched in cloned ostcoblast-likc rat osteogenic sarcoma cells. PEBS Letters, 115: 139-142 (1980). 111. PERRY-KEENE, D. A., LARKINS, R. G., HEYMA, P., PETER, C. T., ROSS, D. and MEDICINE (AUSTIN AND REPAT. GEN. HOSPITALS) 155

SLOMAN, J. G.—Thc effect of long-term diphcnyl-hydamoin therapy on glucose tolerance and insulin section: a controlled trial. Clinical Endocrinology. 12: 575-580 (1980). 112. PIERCE, R. J. and TURNER-WARWICK, M. — Delayed skin tests to C. Albicans, Trichophyton and P.P.D in cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis and asbestos related lung disease. Clinical Allergv. 10: 229-237 (1980). 113. PIERCE, R. J., BROWN, D. .1. and DENISON, D. A. - Radiographic, scintigraphic and gas-dilution estimates of individual lung and lobar volume in man. Thorax, 35: 773-780 (1980). 114. POTTER, T. A., McKENZIE, I. F. C, Morgan, G. M. and CHERRY, M. — Murine lym­ phocyte alloantigens. I. Thc Lv-6 locus. J. Immunology, 125: 541-545 (1980). 115. POTTER, T. A., MORGAN, G. M. and McKENZIE, 1. E. C. Murine lymphocyte alloan­ tigens. 2. The Ly-7 locus. J. Immunology, 125: 546-550 (1980). 116. RAFF, J., McKENZIE, I. F. C. and CLARKE, A. E. — Antigenic determinants of primus avium are associated with the protoplast surface. /.. Pflunzenphysiol.. lid. 98.S.: 225-234 (1980). 117. SEWELL, R. B., HOFFMAN, N. E., SMALLWOOD, R. A. and COCKBAIN, S. — Bile acid structure and bile formation: a comparison of hydroxy and keto bile acids. Am. J. Phvsiol, 238: G10 (1980). 118. SHAW, J., CAPLAN, B., DELOVITCH, T. I,., McKENZIE, I. F. C, P1LARSKI, L. M. and PAETKAU, V. —Cellular origins of costimulator (IL2) and its activity in cytotoxic T lymphoevtc responses. J. Immunol., 124: 2231-2239 (1980). 119. STASZEWSKA-BARSCAK, J., DUSTING, G. J., MAY, D. E. and NOLAN, P. N.-Effect of prostacyclin on the sympathetic and vagally-mcdiatcd chcmorctlcxcs elicited from the heart with bradykinin or nicotine. Proc. Aust. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 194 (1980). 120. SUMMERS, R. J., JARROTT, B. and LOUIS, W. J.-Selectivity of a scries of clonidine like drugs for alpha 1 and alpha 2 adrenoceptors in rat brain. Neuroscience Letts.. 20: 347-350 (1980). 121. SUMMERS, R. J., JARROTT, B. and LOUIS, W. J. — Displacement of 'H clonidine bind­ ing bv clonidine analogues in membranes from rat cerebral cortex. Europ. J. Pharmacol., 66: 233-241 (1980). 122. SUMMERS, R. J. — 3 l-l Clonidine binding to alpha adrenoceptors in membranes prepared from regions of guinea pig kidney: alteration bv monovalent and divalent cations. Pr. .1. Pharmacol., 71: 57-65 (1980). 123. TAYLOR, H. R. and l.OUIS, W. J.-Thc significance of tear function test abnormalities. Annals of Ophthalmology, 12 (5) 531-535 (May 1980). 124. TRECHSEL, U., EISMAN, J. A., R1SHER, J. A., BONJOUR, J-P. and FLEISCH, H - Calcium-dependent, parathyroid hormone-independent regulation of 1,25-dihydroxyvitamin D. Amer. J. Phvsiol.. 239: 119-124 (1980). 125. THOMPSON, C. H., POTTER, T. A., McKENZIE, I. F. C. and PARISH, C. R - Phcnotype of the DTH suppressor cell. Immunology. 40: 87-96 (1980). 126. VAJDA, F. J. E. - Principles of pharmacology. Aust. Family Phvsician. 9: 134-141 (1980). 127. VAUGHAN, H. A., SANDRIN, M. S., McKENZIE, I. F. C, TAIT, B. D. and TING, A. —Cross reaction of la antigens between mouse and man. Human Immunology, 279: 639-641 (1980). 128. WELSH,J., AVAKJAN, 1-1., COWLING, P., EBRINGER, A., WOOI.EY, P., PANAJI, G. and tBRiNohR, K. —Ankylosing spondylitis, HLA B27 and Klebsiella. I. Cross- reactivity studies with rabbit antisera. lirit. ./. of Exper. Pathol.. 61: 85-91 (1980). 129. WILEY, J. S., HUTCHINSON, J. S., MENDELSOHN I-. A. O. and DOYLE, A. E. — In­ creased sodium permeability of erythrocytes in spontaneously hypertensive rats. Clin. Exp. Phvsiol. Pharmacol., 7: 527-530 (1980).' 130. WORDSWORTH, P. EBRINGER, R., JONES D. and BED1, S.-Thyroid antibodies in synovial effusions. Lancet, i: 660 (1980). 131. YEOMANS, N. D.-GE Medical Manpower. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 372 (1980). 132. YEOMANS, N. D., WILLIAMS, D. R., MacKINNON, M. A. and McLEISH, A. R- Cigarelte smoking and duodenogastric reflux. Aust. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 363-364 (19S0). 133. YEOMANS, N. D. and MILLAR, S. J. —Mechanism of mucus secretion in rat and mouse gastric mucosa. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7: 414-415 (1980). 134. YEOMANS, N. D.-Glucagon in gastroenterology. C7/>7. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol.. 7: 700 (1980). 135. YEOMANS, N. D., VAJDA. F. J. E and BALDAS, J. -Gastric absorption of valproate in rats. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7: 676-677 (1980). 136. YEOMANS, N. D. and MILLAR, S. J.-Effect of tobacco smoke condensate on mucus, protein and DNA synthesis in cultured antral mucosa. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 590 (1980). 137. YEOMANS, N. D. and MILLAR. S. J. —Synthesis and secretion of glycoproteins by mucosa of rat gastric antrum in organ culture. Dig. Dis. Sci.: 295-301 (1980). 118 YEOMANS, N. D. Cometidine vs. antacids for treatment of peptic ulcers. Aust. Prescriber, 4: 33-34 (1980). 156 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

139. YEOMANS, N. D. and GIRAUD, A. S. — Non-glvcoprotcin "cores" in gastric mucus granules. Gastroenterology, 78: 1658-1659 (1980). 140. YEOMANS, N. D. and ST. JOHN, D. J. B.-Familial mediterranean fever in Australia. Med. J. Aust., 1: 334-335 (1980). T HESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor oj Philosophy 1. CHRISTOPHIDIS, N. - 77ie pharmacokinetics of cytotoxic drugs. 2. GI RAUD, A. S. — The phylogeny of the gastric mucosa. 3. McQUEEN, A. —Central nervous system effects of amines on behaviour. 4. POTTER, T. — Murine lymphocyte surface alloantigens. 5. SANDRIN, M. — la antigens in man and mouse. 6. WARK, J. D.- Vitamin D metabolism. Master of Science 7. MORGAN, G. — H-2 mutations: The serological analysis of several H-2 mutant strains. 8. RIGLAR, A . - Detection of circulating immune complexes. THESES IN PROGRESS MEDICINE-AUSTIN HOSPITAL MD Theses in Progress 1. DONNAN, G. A. — Lacumar syndromes in a stroke population. 2. MARSHALL, A. W. — Hepatic transport of endogenous and xenobiotic organic com­ pounds. PhD Theses in Progress 3. BETTS, R. — Immunogenetics of Ihe human major histocompatibility complex. 4. CAMPBELL, D. i. —Control of aldosterone secretion. 5. DUFFY, S. — Exchangeable sodium and experimental hypertension. 6. HOGARTH, M. — Hybridoma production as a source of alloantibodies. 7. LOVELAND, B. — Cellular interactions during graft rejection in Ihe mouse. 8. MICHAELIDES, M. — Functional studies with Ly antigens in the mouse. 9. TAKATA, Y. — Angiotensin converting enzyme in hypertension. 10. THOMPSON, C. — Monoclonal antibodies recognizing human tumour specific antigens. 11. THURLOW, P. — The production of monoclonal antibodies to antigens of leukaemias lym­ phomas, human tumours and the HLA system. MSc Theses in Progress 12. Di NICOLANTONIO, R.-Mechanisms of hypertension. 13. HILL, J. S. — Studies on genetic defects of the red cell membrane. 14. LONG, J. G. — Cations and hypertension. 15. REID, M. — The effectiveness of an exercise training programme following myocardial in­ farction compared with the standard rehabilitation programme as measured by maximal ex­ ercise capacity measured in mets at three months after myocardial infarction. BSc Theses in Progress 16. SUTTON, V'. — Monoclonal antibodies to urine cell surface antigens. 17. TEW, C. — Mouse T lymphocytes sub-population in health and disease. REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL PhD Theses in Progress 1. FINDLAY, D. M. — Calcitonin receptors in cancer cells. 2. HEANEY, T. P. — Regulation on insulin secretion in pancreatic islets. 3. NOLAN, R. D. — The regulation of prostaglandin synthesis in various tissues. 4. SHER, E. — Properties of the receptor for 1,25-dihydroxyvitamin D. 5. ROGERS, S. — Prostaglandins and diabetic vascular complications. MSc Thesis in Progress 6. DANKS, J. M. — Renal sodium handling. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS MD Thesis in Progress 1. ANDERSON, A. — The pharmacokinetics of antihypertensive drugs. MEDICINE (AUSTIN AND REPAT. GEN. HOSPITALS) 157

PhD Theses in Progress 2. DRUMMER, O. H. O. — Structure-activity relationships on adrenoceptors. 3. DYNON, Wl.—Studies on the metabolism and mode of action of beta-blocking drugs. 4. GUNDLACH, A. —Neurotransmitter interactions in brain. 5. HOWES, L. — Mechanism of drug action on receptor and membranes. 6. MacPHERSON, G. — Characterization of adrenoceptors by ligand binding techniques. 7. McNEIL, J. J. — Pharmacokinetics of antihypertensive drugs. 8. MIACH, P. —Catecholamine receptors in brain. 9. PAPANICOLAOU, J. — Pharmacological basis of epilepsy. 10. PROUDFOOT, A. — Pharmacokinetic and clinical cisplalin and vinca alkaloids. MSc Theses in Progress 11. LUCAS, I.—Pharmacokinetics of cytotoxic drugs. 12. THORSBORNE-PALMER, D. - Pharmacology or bronchodilator drugs. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: NH & MRC: The role of tissue angiotensin formation in experimental and genetic hypertension. NH & MRC: Studies in transplantation immunity. NH & MRC: Cell surface immunogenetics. NH & MRC: Production of monoclonal antibodies to lymphocyte antigens in man and mouse. NH & MRC: Cortical evoked potentials in anxiety, depression and psychogenic pain. NH & MRC: The hepatic transport of endogenous and xenobiotic organic compounds. NH & MRC: Transport and excretory function of foetal liver. NH & MRC: The control of vitamin D metabolism. NH & MRC: The mucus-secreting cells of thc stomach: their role in health and disease. NH & MRC: Isolation and identification of core material in exocrine secretion granules of alimen­ tary tract. NH & MRC: Calcium regulation in normoxic, ischaemic and re-oxygenated heart muscle. NH & MRC: Modulation of lymphocyte function in hypothyroidism. NH & MRC: Sites and mechanisms of action of centrally acting antihypertensive drugs. NH & MRC: Identification and characterisation of a adrenoceptors by radioligand binding. NH & MRC: Effect of antihypertensive drugs on circulating and vascular catecholamines in animal models of hypertension. NH & MRC: The pharmacology of dopamine-GABA interactions and their clinical relevance. Australian Tobacco Research Foundation: Production of monoclonal anticarcinoma of the lung antibodies for the early detection of displasia and neoplasia in cigarette smokers. Australian Tobacco Research Foundation: A study of thc effect of tobacco smoking on an in­ dividual's interrelationship with his sensory and social environment. Australian Tobacco Research Foundation: Effects of smoking on prostaglandin production by vascular endothelium and blood platelets. National Heart Foundation of Australia: Role of arachidonatc metabolites in the circulation. National Heart Foundation of Australia: Assessment of thc role of brain angiotensin in hyperten­ sion. National Heart Foundation of Australia: Mechanism of calcium entry during post ischaemic reperfusion. National Heart Foundation of Australia: Alpha adrenoceptors in lymphocytes. National Heart Foundation of Australia: Distribution and regulation of adreno receptors in blood vessels. National Heart Foundation of Australia: The influence of genetic factors on catecholamine abnor­ malities in hypertension. Medical Research Committee: Regulation of prostaglandin biosynthetic pathways in the lung and its relationship to pathogenesis of asthma and hypertension. Medical Research Committee: Production of monoclonal antibodies to cell membrane and soluble antigens. Austin Hospital Medical Research Foundation: An investigation into the effects of drugs and hor­ mones on vitamin D metabolism and their relevance to thc treatment of uremic bone disease. Austin Hospital Medical Research Foundation: Production of specific, monoclonal antibodies by the cell fusion hybridisation technique lo (a) human globulin; (b) bacteria; (c) human hormones. 158 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: The production of monoclonal antibodies to antigens of human tumours, leukaemias and lymphomas. Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: the detection of Ia antigens and their relevance to cancer in man. cancer in man. IT. & L. Hecht Trust: To study hormone disturbances in renal failure. National Institutes of Health: Cell surface antigens of lymphocytes and tumour cells. Clive and Vera Ramaciotti Foundation: Use of high pressure liquid chromotography for thc analysis of steroids and peptides. Santem Pharmaceutical Company, Japan: Action of converting enzyme inhibitors. Ministry for Conservation: Histopathological indices of pollution-induced stress in the mussel, Mytilus eclulis. Gist Brocades nv, Netherlands: Mode of action of tripotassium dicitratobismuthatc. Life Insurance Medical Research Fund of Australia & New Zealand: Alpha adrenoceptors in lym­ phocytes. Life Insurance Medical Research Fund of Australian & New Zealand: Structural requirements for dopamine receptors in cardiovascular tissues. Thc Utah Foundation: Calcium regulation in normoxic, ischaemic and reoxygenated heart muscle. Mental Health Research Foundation: Sensory input regulation and "psychogenic pain". Thc Australian Kidney Foundation: Hormone responsiveness in renal failure. The Australian Kidney Foundation: Monitoring of graft rejection. MEDICINE

DEPARTMENT OP THE JAMES STEWART PROFESSOR THE ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION The year 1980 marked the completion of the Australian CollaborativcTrial to assess the value of treatment for mildly raised blood pressure. Professors R. R. H. Lovell and A. E. Doyle played a primary role in the instigation, design and analysis of this study which is unique in many respects, and has yielded much valuable data for future efforts in preventive medicine. New hypotheses formulated by Dr J. D. Mathews concerning the effects on immunity of alleles and genes borne by the same and different chromosomes have been experimentally con­ firmed in studies done jointly with the Walter & Eliza Hall Institute. Work on epidemic polyar­ thritis, a common disease in Australia and the South Pacific, has identified two distinct genetic determinants. This appears to be Ihe firsi demonstration of ils kind in naturally occurring virus- induced disease, and may provide a further avenue for the exploration of Dr Mathews' postulates. Professor Kincaid-Smith and her colleagues have edited, and contributed much of thc text in a book on clinical nephrology, based on their vast experience and outstanding contributions to this subject. Members of thc Department continue to collaborate in research with other departments, universities, and research institutes. These activities extend al many points to participation with thc community and extramural colleagues in matters of practical importance io thc public.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. RENAL AND CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASE 1. National Blood Pressure Study-R. R. H. Lovell. 2. Atypical bacterial forms and L-forms in urinary tract infection —P. Kincaid-Smith. 3. Lithium nephrotoxicity in man —P. Kincaid-Smith. 4. Lithium nephrotoxicity in animals —P. Kincaid-Smiih. 5. Clinical trials in the treatment of hypertension —P. Kincaid-Smith. 6. Transplant immunology—P. Kincaid-Smith. 7. Ultrastructure of glomerulonephritis—P. Kincaid-Smith. 8. Immunological aspects of renal disease—P. Kincaid-Smith. 9. Active and inactive renin in haemodialysis patients—P. Kincaid-Smith. 10. Platelet aggregation and coagulation in glomerulonephritis—P. Kincaid-Smith. 11. Steroids in hypertension —P. Kincaid-Smith. 12. Clinical and experimental studies in glomcrulonephriiis-P. Kincaid-Smith. 13. Thc significance of HLA-DR and associated antigen systems in renal transplantation —P. Kincaid-Smith. 14. The mechanism of the beneficial effect of blood transfusion on renal transplantation —P. Kincaid-Smith. 15. Suppressor cell activity in patients with glomerulonephritis — P. Kincaid-Smith. 16. The significance of Urcaplasma urealyticum in renal disease —P. Kincaid-Smiih. 17. The influence of smoking on the genesis of malignant phase hypertension —P. Kincaid- Smith. 18. Vasectomy as a cardiovascular risk factor —.1. D. Mathews. 19. Immunogenetic and family studies of coronary heart disease —J. D. Maihcws. 20. Twin studies of cardiovascular risk factors —J. D. Mathews. B. BONE AND JOINT DISEASE 1. Enzyme inhibitors in the pathogenesis of rheumatoid arthritis — K. D. Muirden, E. l-'lory. 2. Cell mediated immunity studies in rheumatoid arthritis —K. D. Muirden. 3. The value of trypsin installation in rheumatoid knee joints —K. D. Muirden, J. R. E. Fraser, K. Boyden. 4. Study of anti-inflammatory drugs and drug interactions in rheumatoid arthritis — D. R. E. Barraclough, R. L. Travers, K. D. Muirden. 5. Study of thc ultra-structure of thc synovial membrane and articular cartilage j net ion — K. D. Muirden. 6. Hyaluronic acid metabolism —J. R. E. Fraser, E. Baxter, T. C. Laurent (Uppsala), H. Per- toft (Uppsala). 7. Rheology of hyaluronic acid and synovial fluid —J. R. E. Eraser, D. Boger (Monash). 8. Clinical and pathogenetic studies in epidemic polyarthritis —J. R. E. Fraser, A. L. Cun­ ningham. 9. Genetic factors in epidemic polyarthritis following Ross River virus i n feci ion — J. R. E. Eraser, B. Tait (RMH), .1. Aaskov (Queensland Institute of Medical Research), A. L. Cun­ ningham. 159 160 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

10. Non-collagenous proteins of human bone—R. A. Melick, K. J. Quelch, W. Farrugia. 11. Effects of E- and F- type prostaglandins on morphology and the lysosomal system of human synovial cells—B. Clarris. 12. Activation of the adenylate cyclasc-cyclic AMP system in human synovial cells and its rela­ tionship to morphology and synthesis of hyaluronic acid —B. Clarris. E. Baxter, J. R. E. Fraser. 13. Influence of pH of culture media on the lysosomal system of human synovial cells — B. Clar­ ris. C. ENDOCRINE DISEASE 1. Studies of insulin binding and action —S. Clark, R. G. Larkins (Repat.), R. A. Melick. 2. Synthetic properties of cultured rat osteosarcoma cells—R. A. Melick, W. Farrugia, K. J. Quelch. D. GASTROINTESTINAL DISEASE 1. Analysis of intestinal brush border proteins in health and disease —G. P. Young, L. Ghase. 2. Studies on the early detection of colorectal cancer —F. A. Macrae. 3. Studies on thc pathogenesis and treatment of peptic ulcer —D. J. B. St. John. E. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY 1. Pharmacology of isolated human blood vessels—R. F. W. Moulds. 2. Ligand binding of vascular alpha-receptors — S. Lipc. 3. Human vascular pre-synaptic receptors — M. Stevens. 4. Relationship of C. S. F. vaso-activity to cerebral vascular spasm —R. F. W. Moulds. 5. Identification of vaso active substance in C. S. F. — V. Iwanov and R. F. W. Moulds. 6. Identification of immune complexes in pre eclampsia— R. Medcalf, J. D. Mathews, R. F. W. Moulds. 7. Studies on mechanism of vaso-activity produced by immune complexes—R. F W. Moulds, R. Medcalf. 8. Measurement of sodium valproate in tissues other than plasma—R. F. W. Moulds, C. Kilpatrick, J. J. Marty. 9. Pharmacology of human and animal biliary ducts—R. F. W. Moulds, I. Roberts-Thomson. 10. Further studies on isolated skeletal muscle in malignant hyperpyrexia—R. F. W. Moulds. 11. Comparison of vascular neuro-efTcctor mechanisms in normotension and hypertension —S. Lipe, V. Iwanov, R. I7. W. Moulds. F. OTHER 1. Australian Twin Registry —J. D. Mathews, J. B. Gibson, N. G. Martin. 2. In vitro immune response to viral antigens-genetics and disease study —J. D. Mathews, B. D. Tait. 3. Genetic studies of the immune response — .!. D. Mathews. 4. Causes of variation in blood lead levels in Melbourne families —J. D. Mathews. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. d'APlCE, A. J. F., BECKER, G. J., KINCAID-SMITH, P. (eds.)-ClinicalNephrology, A Lecture Series on, Boehringer Ingelheim Pty. Ltd., Sydney, for the Department of Nephrology, The Royal Melbourne Hospital (1980). Chapters of Books 2. d'APlCE, A. J. F. — Immunopathogenesis of glomerulonephritis, in A Lecture Series on Clinical Nephrology, eds. A. J. F. d'Apicc, G. J. Becker and P. Kincaid-Smith, Boehringer Ingelheim, Sydney: 45 (1980). 3. d'APlCE, A. J. F. — Acute Renal Failure, in A Lecture Series on Clinical Nephrology, eds. A. J. F. d'Apice, G. J. Becker and P. Kincaid-Smith, Boehringer Ingelheim, Sydney: 96 (1980). 4. KINCAID-SMITH, P. —The Treatment of Hypertension, in A Lecture Series on Clinical Nephrology, eds. A. J. V. d'Apice, G. J. Becker and P. Kincaid-Smith, Boehringer In­ gelheim, Sydney: 15-22 (1980). 5. KINCAID-SMITH, P.—Analgesic Nephropathy, in A Lecture Series on Clinical Nephrologv, eds. A. J. F. d'Apice, G. J. Becker and P. Kincaid-Smith, Boehringer In­ gelheim, Sydney: 86-95 (1980). 6. LOVELL, R. R. H. and the Australian Blood Pressure Study Management Commit­ tee—Controlled Therapeutic Trial in Mild Hypertension, in AI hero-Sclerosis V, Proc. of the Fifth International Symposium, Workshop: Hypertension, eds. A. M. Gotto, Jr., L. C. Smith and B. Allen, Springer-Verlag, New York: 707-711 (1980). MEDICINE (ROYAL MELB. HOSP.) 161

Articles 7. BECKER, G. J., WALKER, R. C, DZUIKAS, L. J., HARVEY, K. J., VALENTINE, R. and KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Renal infection with Mycobacterium chelonci. AUST. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 44-47 (1980). 8. BENNETT, N. McK., CUNNINGHAM, A. L., ERASER, J. R. E. and SPEED, B. R. — Epidemic polyarthritis acquired in Fiji. Med. J. Aust., 1: 316-317 (1980). 9. COGHLAN, J. P., BUTKUS, A., DENTON, D. A., GRAHAM, W. F., HUMPHREY, T. J., SCOGGINS, G. A. and WHITWORTH, J. A.-Steroid receptors in hypertension. Cir­ culation Research. 46(6): 1/88-1/93, Part II (1980). 10. COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., GRAHAM, W. F., HUMPHREY, T. J., MASON, R. T\, SCHNEIDER, E. G., SCOGGINS, B. A. and WHITWORTH, J. A. — Efleet of ACTH administration on the haemodvnamic response to arigininc-vasoprcssin in sheep. Clin. & Exp. Pharmacol. & Phvsiol.. 7: 559-562 (1980). 11. CLARK, S., LARKINS, R. G., de LUISE, M. and MELLICK, R. A.-The effects of trypsin and phospholipasc C on insulin binding and action in the isolated adipocyte. Biochem. J., 186: 535-540 (1980). 12. CLARK, S., LARKINS, R. G. and MELLICK, R. A. — Negative coopcrativity induced by desoctapeptide insulin unmasked by phospholipasc C. Biochem. Biophvs. Research Comm., 95: 1543-1549 (1980). 13. DUMBLE, L. J.. MACDONALD, I. M. and KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Human renal allograft rejection is predicted by serial determinations of antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity. Transplantation, 29 (1): 30-34 (1980). 14. DZUIKAS, L. .1., DOUGLAS. S. M., CARTER, P. M., CAMPBELL, D. C, ANDREWS, J. T., d'APlCE, A. J. F. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Evaluation ofthe gambro lundia ma­ jor l.36m; disposable parallel plate dialyzer. J. Dialysis. 3 (4): 309-325 (19S0). 15. ENGLAND, .1. I-'.—The influence of beta blockers upon Plasma Cvclic AMP levels. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 180-181 (1980). 16. FAIRLEY, K. F. — Haematuria. Med. Ausi., 25 (2): 1781-1784 (I9S0). 17. FAIRLEY, K. F. and WHITWORTH, J. A.-Problems in thc treatment of urinary tract in­ fections. Drugs, 19: 190-194 (1980). 18. FRASER, J. R. E. and CUNNINGHAM, A. L. — Incubation time of epidemic polyarthritis. Med. .1. Ausi.. I: 550-551 (1980). 19. FRASER, J. R. E., TAIT, B., AASKOV, .1. G. and CUNNINGHAM, A. L.-Possible genetic determinants in epidemic polyarthritis caused by Ross River virus infection. Aust. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 597-603 (1980). 20. GRAHAM, W. F., ALLEN, K. J. !•'., COGHLAN. J. P., DENTON, D. A., HUMPHREY. T. J., SCOGGINS, B. A., and WHITWORT H, J. A. - Haemodynamic changes in ACTH- induced hypertension in sheep. Clin. & Exp. Pharmacol. & Phvsiol.. 7: 569-572 (1980). 21. HIGG1NBOTHAM, I..., MARTIN, F. I. R., BUCHANAN, M. R. C, BUTKUS, A. and WHIT WORTH, J. A. - Cushing's syndrome due to an ACTH-secrcting adrenal medullary tumour. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 654-656 (1980). 22. HUA, A. S. P., KALOWSKI, S., WHITWORTH, J. A. AND KINCAID-SMITH, P.- Acebutolol in mild to moderate hypertension. A double blind crossover studv. Med. J. Ausi.. I: 226-22S (1980). 23. JUNOR, B. J. F., d'APlCE, A. J. F. and KINCAID-SMITH, P. —Circulating immune com­ plexes after renal transplantation. Transplantation, 30 (2): 111-113 (1980). 24. KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Analgesic abuse and the kidney. Kidnev International. 17: 250-260 (1980). 25. KINCAID-SMITH, P.— Assessment of the hypertensive. Ausi. Eainilv Phvsician, 9 (4): 222-227 (I9S0). 26. KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Glomerulonephritis. Med. Australia. 24 Part II: 1795-1804 (1980). 27. KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Hypertension. Med. Australia, I: 1479-1495 (1980). 2S. KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Malignant hypertension: mechanisms and management. Phar/nu. Ther.. 9: 245-269 (1980). 29. KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Renal biopsy. Med. Australia. 26: 1872-1873 Part 3 (1980). 30. KINCAID-SMITH, P. —The kidneys in hypertension. Current Concepts in Hypertension and Cardiovascular Disorders, I (2): 5-8 (1980). 31. KINCAID-SMITH, P.-The treatment of glomerulonephritis. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 340-345 (1980). 32. KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Treatment of renal hypertension. Drugs. 19: 312-316 (1980). 33. KINCAID-SMITH, P. and DAVIES, B. — Lithium and the kidney: research and clinical im­ plications. Advances in Human Psvchopharmacologv. I: 141-155 (1980). 34. KINCAID-SMITH. P., WHITWORTH, J. A., and FAIRLEY, K. F.-Mesangial IgA nephropathy in pregnancy. Clin. & Exp. Hvperiension: 821-838 (1980). 35. KINCAID-SMITH, P. and WHITWORTH. J. A. — Renal diseases-advances in treatment. Current Therapeutics, 21 (9): 193-199 (1980). 162 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

36. LAW, 11. Y., BODMER, W. F., MATHEWS, I. D., SKEGG, D. C.-Thc immune response to vasectomy and its relation to HLA system. Tissue Antigens, 14: 115-139 (1979). 37. LIFE, E., MEDCALF, R., IWANOV, V. and MOULDS, R. F. W.-A comparison of the effects of endrallazinc and hydralazine on isolated human arteries and veins. Clin. & Exp. Pharmacol. & Phvsiol., 7 (Abstract 78) 685 (1980). 38. LIFE, S. and MOULDS, R. E. W. -Studies on thc mechanism of thc effect of hydralazine on isolated human arteries and veins. Proc. A.S.C.E.P., 10: 180 (1980). 39. MACDONALD, I., HUA, A. S. P., THOMAS, G. W., WOO, K. T.. WHITWORTH, J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Use of labetalol in moderate to severe hypertension. Med. J. Ansl.. 1: 325-327 (1980). 40. MACRAE, E. A., ST. JOHN, D. .1. 13. - Detection of colo-rcctal tumours by Hacmoccult: influence of patterns of bleeding and slide sensitivity. Ansl. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 589 (1980). 41. MACRAE, F. A., ST. JOHN, D. J. B. —Spontaneous bacterial peritonitis: reversible cause of deterioration in patients with cirrhosis. Med. J. Aust.. 2: 209-211 (1980). 42. MATHEWS, J. D. — Interaction of genetic and environmental factors causing atherosclerosis by immunologic mechanisms, in Atherosclerosis V: Proc. of ilie Fifth Inter­ national Svmposium on Atherosclerosis: eds. A. M. Gotto, L. C. Smilh, B. Allen, Sprinecr- Verlag, New York: 324-329 (1980). 43. MATHEWS, J. D., MATHIESON, I. D., TAIT, G. D.-Evaluating ihc importance of im­ munological and immunogenelic factors in atherosclerosis, in Immunity and Atherosclerosis: Proc. of Ihe Serona Svmposia, ed. P. Consianlinides, Academic Press, London, 24: 57-67 (1980). 44. MOULDS, R. I7. W. —Reduced responses lo noradrenaline of isolated digital arteries from hypertensives. Clin. & Exp. Pharmacol. & Phvsiol., 7: 505-508 (1980). 45. MOULDS, R. F. W. RITT1NGHAUSEN, R. E. and SHAW, J. - Prejunctional receptors in human digital arteries. Cir. Pes.. 46 (II): 180-182 (1980). 46. MOULDS, R. F. W. and WORLAND, P. J. - Potentiation of human vascular smooth mus­ cle contraction by angiotensin. J. Cardiovasc. Pharmacol.. 2: 377-386 (1980). 47. MUIRDEN, K. D. — Anti-arihritic drugs in ihe treat mem of rheumatoid arthritis. Australian Prescriber. 4 (2): 38-39 (1980). 48. MUIRDEN, K. D. —The evolution of chronic inflammation in joint disease. Indian Rheumatism Association Bulletin, 2: 2-8 (1979). 49. MUIRDEN, K. D. — Treatment of osteoarthritis. Current Therapeutics. 21: 59-63 (1980). 50. MUIRDEN, K. D. — Rheumatic diseases: future treatment prospects. Current Therapeutics, 21: 215-220 (1980). 51. MUIRDEN, K. D. and ROBINSON, A. D.-Cellular immunity to possible synovial antigens in rheumatoid arthritis. Ann. Rheum. Dis., 39(6): 539-544 (1980). 52. NANKERV1S, A., FAIRLEY, K. F., SHAW, P. G., WHITWORTH, J. A., MILES, H.. GRAHAM, I., and PAVILLARD, R.—Treatment of urinary tract infection with multiple- dose administered iiitra-muscular cefamandole. Med. J. Ausi., 1: 427-428 (1980). 53. RICHMOND, .1. M., d'APlCE, A. J. F., MUIRDEN, K. D., WHITWORTH, J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Scleroderma crisis — response to therapy. Med. J. Ausi., I: 545-547 (1980). 54. RICHMOND. J. M., d'APlCE, A. J. F., WHITWORTH, .1. A., and KINCAID-SMITH, P.— Thrombotic thrombocytopaenic purpura and anuria: response lo plasma exchange Aust. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 48-50 (1980). 55. RITTINGH AUSEN, R. E. and MOULDS, R. I7. W.-The use of isolated digital arteries lo studv factors influencing adrcncrgic-transniiller release in man. C77/I. Sci., 58: 373-378 (1980). 56. SHAW, P., FAIRLEY, K. F. and WHITWORTH, J. A. — Treatment of urinary tract infec­ tion wilh single dose intramuscular administration ccfcmandole. Med. J. Ausi.. I: 489 (1980). 57. ST. JOHN, D. J. 13.-Gastritis and duodenitis: the role of drugs. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 591 (I9S0). 58. STEVENS. M. J. and MOULDS, R. F. W. —Are neuronal uptake mechanisms responsible for the difference in sensitivity to noradrenaline between human arlcrics and veins? Clin. <£ Exp. Pharmacol. & Phvsiol.. 7: 139-145 (1980). 59. WALKER, R. G., WHITWORTH, J. A., and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Acute interstitial nephritis in a patient taking licnilic acid. Brit. Med. J.. 280 (6225): 1212 (1980). 60. WALKER, R. G., YEUNG, C. K.. HUA, A. S. P., THOMAS, G. W., WHITWORTH, J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.—Tienilic acid in thc treatment of mild to moderate hyperten­ sion. Clin. <« Exp. Pharmacol. & Phvsiol.. 7 (5): 473-477 (1980). 61. WALTER. N. M. A., WHITWORTH, J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Captopril in mild and severe hypertension. Clin. <£ Exp. Pharmacol. <£ Phvsiol.. 7(5): 477 (1980). 62. WHITTINGHAM. S.. MATHEWS. J. D., SCHANEIELD, M. S., MATTHEWS, J. V., TAIT, B. D., MORRIS, P. .1., and MACKAY, 1. R. — Interactive ell'ects of Gin allotypes and MEDICINE (ROYAL MELB. HOSP.) 163

HLA-B locus antigens on the human antibody response to a bacterial antigen. Clin. Exp. Im­ munol.. 40: S-l5 (I9S0). 63. WHIT WORTH, J. A. and FAIRLEY, K. F.-Urinary tract infection. Med. Australia, 25: 1806-1813 (1980). 64. WOO, K. T., JUNOR, B. .1. R., SALEM, II., d'APlCE, A. J. F., WHITWORTH, J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P. — Bcta-thromboglobulin and platelet aggregates in glomerulo­ nephritis. Clin. Nephrologv, 14 (2): 92-95 (1980). 65. YEOMANS, N. D., ST. JOHN, D. G. J.-Familial Mediterranean fever in Australia. Med. J. Aust.. I: 334-335 (1980). 66. WRIGHT, P. A., REED, P. I., DAVIES, W. A., ST. JOHN, D. J. B., YOUNG, G. P., HOUSE, F. R., GRIBBLE, R. .1. N. and BARON, J. II.-Scrum carbenoxolone: Ulcer heal­ ing and metabolic effects. Scandinavian J. of Gastroenterology, 15, (Supp. 65): 41-46 (1980). Reports and Notes 67. BAXTER, E., ERASER, J. R. E. and HOLMES, M.-Anion acceleration-a potentially useful artefact of gel chromatography in small-pore polvacrvlamide gels. Connect. Tissue lies.. 7: 198-199 (1980). 68. BAXT ER, E., FRASER, J. R. E. and CLARRIS, B. J. - Modulation of the functional behaviour of cultured human svnovial cells via membrane receptors. Ausi. N.Z. ./. Med., 10: 272 (1980). 69. BAXTER, E., FRASER, J. R. E and CLARRIS, B. J.-Thc ell'ect of adenosine on hyaluronic biosynthesis in human svnovial cells. Proc. Ausi. liiochein. Soc, 13: 50 (1980). 70. BULLEN, M. U., WHITWORTH, J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Comparison of single-dose and twice daily timolol therapv in mild hypertension Med. J. Ausi., 2 (9): 514-515 (1980) (Letter). 71. CLARRIS, B. J., ERASER, I. R. E. and MICHELANGELI, V. P.-Cholera cnteroioxin induces "dendritic" cells and increases adenylate cyclase activity in cultures of non- rheumatoid synovium. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 272 (1980). 72. CUNNINGHAM, A. L. and ERASER, J. R. E.-Rubella arthritis —a study of joint pathologv and pathogenesis in a single case. Aust. N.Z. ./. Med., 10: 272 (1980). 73. DUDLES', F. J., ALFORD, F. and YOUNG. G. P. - Hypcrglucagonaemia in cirrhosis: Im­ paired clearance or increased secretion? Sixth World Congress of Gastroenterology, Madrid: (June 1978). 74. DUMBLE, L. J., MACDONALD, I. M., CLUNIE, G. J. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P. — The ell'ects of antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity in renal transplantation. Abstract: Australasian Societv of Nephrology Annual Scientific Meeting, 1980. Aust. N.Z. J. Med., 19 (4): 480 (1980). 75. FRASER, J. R. E., CUNNINGHAM, A. L., CLARRIS, B. J. and LEACH, R. — Long-term studies of epidemic polyarthritis. Aust. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 483 (1980). 76. KINCAID-SMITH, P., WHITWORTH, J. A., WALTER, N. M. A. and DOWLING, J. P. — Immune complex glomerulopathy and captopril. Lancet, 2: 37 (1980) (Letter). 77. MOK, J. S. L. and MOULDS, R. F. W.-A comparison of ihc ell'ects of diazoxide, chlorothiazide, ethacrvnic acid and frusemide on human vascular smooth muscle. Abstract, 17-19 December, A.S.C.E.P., Canberra: (1980). 78. RICHMOND, J. M., KINCAID-SMITH, P. and WHITWORTH. .1. A. — Familial nephropathy and gout. Abstract: Australasian Society of Nephrology Annual Scientific Meeting, 1980. Aust. N.Z. J. Med., KJ (4): 487 (1980). 79. WOO, K. T\, JUNOR. B. J. R , SALEM, H., d'APlCE, A. J. F., WHITWORTH, I. A. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Beta thromboglobulin and platelet aggregates in glomerulonephritis. Aust. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 127-128 (1980) (Abstract).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. HEYMA, P. — The regulation of triiodothyronine formation. Doctor of Medicine 2. BURDON, J. G. W.- Ventilatory drive during loaded breathing. Master of Science 3. TAY, S. K. — Sperm antibody measurement. Master of Applied Science [P.M.I. TJ 4. CLARK, S. — Effects of enzymes on ihe insulin receptor. 164 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Bachelor of Science (Hons) 5. MOK, J. — A study of direct relaxant effects of diuretic drugs on human vascular smooth muscle. 6. SANDIG, D. — Antigenicity of ureaptasma. Bachelor of Medical Science 7. FINLAY, R. 1. — Immunogenetic studies in sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BRAZIER, B. — Mechanisms of production of hypercalciuria by high protein diets. 2. CLARK, S. — Regulation of insulin binding and action. 3. DE LUISE, M. — Characteristics of polypeptide hormone receptors. 4. HUA, A. S. P. —Hypertension and drugs: clinical and experimental studies. 5. L1PE, S. — Investigation of altered nervous control of vascular smooth muscle in hyperten­ sion. 6. MACDONALD, I. M.— Clinical and experimental studies in glomerulonephritis (Submiued). 7. MEDCALF, R. — Immunological mechanisms in pre-eclampsia. 8. STEVENS, M. — Comparison of the nervous control of human isolated arteries and veins. MD Theses in Progress 9. CUNNINGHAM, A. L.-Studies in virus arthritis. 10. DZUIKAS, L. — Experimental pylonephritis in relation to focal nyalinosis. 11. HOFFMAN, L. — The metabolic effects of transplantation of foetal mouse pancreatic islets. 12. JAUERNIG, R. — 77ie development and use of isolated human vascular preparations. 13. MACRAE, 1". A. —Studies on early detection of colorectal cancer. 14. R1TTINGHAUSEN, R. — Studies in presynaptic receptors in human blood vessels. 15. WALKER, R. G. —Lithium nephrotoxicity. 16. YOUNG, G. P.- Inter-relationship of soluble and membranous forms of intestinal alkaline phosphatase. MSc Theses in Progress 17. IWANOV, V. — The role of endogenous vasoactive agents in producing contractile effects in isolated human blood vessels. 18. PICKERING, W. J.—Ascending Ureaptasma urealyticum infection of the rat kidney—an immunopalhological study of the hosl-parasile interaction and its relationship to progressive renal disease. 19. QUELCH, K. —Studies on the proteins of human bone. MPharm Theses in Progress 20. STEVENS, M. J. — A pharmacological comparison of human digital arteries and metacarpal veins. (Submitted).

SUBSTANTIAL GRANT'S RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: Studies on the early detection of colorectal cancer. Australian Kidney Foundation: Lithium nephrotoxicity in animals. Australian Kidney Foundation: Suppressor cell activity in patients with glomerulonephritis. Australian Kidney Foundation: Blood pressure, haemodynamic, renal and metabolic effects of ACTH in man. Australian Arthritis and Rheumatism Foundation: The role of alpha-2-macroglobulin in rheumatoid arthritis. Australian Tobacco Research Foundation: The influence of smoking on the genesis of malignant phase hypertension. Country Women's Association of Victoria: Arthritis research. Life Insurance Fund: Steroids and hypertension. Mental Health Research Fund: Lithium nephrotoxicity in animals. NH & MRC: Enzyme inhibitors and the pathogenesis of rheumatoid arthritis. NH & MRC: A comparison of arterial sympathetic neurotransmitter mechanisms in normotensive and hypertensive patients. NH & MRC: Lithium nephrotoxicity. MEDICINE (ROYAL MELB. HOSP.) 165

NH & MRC: The significance of HLA-DR and associated antigen systems in renal transplantation. NH & MRC: Thc mechanism of the beneficial effect of blood transfusion on renal transplantation. NH & MRC: Metabolism of hyaluronic acid. NH & MRC: Programme grant —B. J. Clarris, National Health and Medical Research Council Fellow. NH & MRC: Australian Twin Registry. NH & MRC: In vilro immune response to viral antigens —genetic and disease study. NH & MRC: lmmunogenctic and family studies of coronary heart disease. National Heart Foundation: Twin studies of cardiovascular risk factors. Clive and Vera Ramiciotti Foundation: Immunological complications of vasectomy. Rheumatism and Arthritis Association of Victoria: Cell induced immunity studies in rheumatoid arthritis. Royal Australian Navy: Study of cardiovascular risk factors in naval recruits. University of Melbourne Floral Group: Arthritis research. Victor Hurley Medical Research Fund: Lithium nephrotoxicity in animals. Victor Hurley Medical Research Fund: The significance of Ureaplasma urealyticum in renal disease. Victor Hurley Medical Research Fund: Steroids in hypertension. 166 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

MEDICINE

ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION During 1980 experimental haematology remained the major research interest of thc Depart­ ment. While studies on the structure and function of platelet release proteins has continued, an ex­ pansion in the study of heterogeneity of platelets was achieved with thc arrival of Dr J. F. Martin from Sheffield. Improvements in technique resulted in new and important findings and these studies will form part of the discussions held by a newly-formed working party of the International Committee on Thrombosis and Haemostasis which meets in mid 1981. The Cytogenetic Depart­ ment has also expanded its activities and Dr O. M. Garson is thc Australian representative on a regular International Workshop to study chromosomes in leukaemia. Dr F. Firkin is developing new techniques in long-term human bone marrow culture which he has been studying in Oxford during thc last six months of 1980. In Ihc fields of gastroenterology and nutrition the effects of alcohol and related areas of drug metabolism in the presence of liver disease have continued and will be enhanced by the appoint­ ment of Dr P. V. Desmond to Clinical Pharmacology. An objective measure of the efficiency of various teaching methods and ihe ell'ects of observer subjectivity in clinical medicine are important areas in a Clinical School and Dr G. Whelan is continuing to perform these studies. T he Depart­ ment of Endocrinology is maintaining an active research inlercst into several aspects of diabetes mellitus and ihc Cardiac Investigation Unit is continuing its studies in the use of echocardiography and exercise testing.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. EXPERIMENTAL HAEMATOLOGY D. G. Pcnington, C. N. Chcslernian, F. C. Firkin, O. M. Garson, J. F. Martin, F. J. Morgan, W. Beswick. 1. Investigation of synthesis of platelet factor 4 and /3-thromboglobulin in platelets and in megakaryocytes (with St. Vincent's School of Medical Research). 2. Purification and chemistry of platelet specific mitogenic factors (with St. Vincent's School of Medical Research). 3. Platelet kinetics in coronary artery disease (wilh St. Vincent's School of Medical Research and the Royal Melbourne Hospilal). 4. The effect of /3-thromboglobulin on endothelial cell prostacyclin production (wilh Prof. T. J. Martin, Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg and St. Vincent's School of Medical Research). 5. Investigation of platelet and coagulation abnormalities in diabetes mellitus, their relationship to small vessel disease and the etl'ccts of treatment (with Dr F. P. Alford). 6. Mechanisms in the production of vascular spasm secondary to limb trauma (with Microsurgery Research Unit, St. Vincent's Hospilal). 7. An investigation of platelet volume, density, immunoglobulin content and diagnostic methods in immune thrombocytopenia (with Department of Medicine, Monash Medical School). 8. Investigation of a new antileukacmic drug: meta-AMSA. 9. Combination chemotherapy in lymphoma (with Australian Lymphoma Group). 10. Development and application of short and long-term human bone marrow culture to study mechanisms and treatment of bone marrow depression and malignancy. 11. Estimation of erythropoietin levels in human blood disorders by a simplified tissue culture bioassay. 12. Studies in neutrophil kinetics—mechanisms of neutropenia. 13. Comparison of methods of density separation of platelet populations. 14. Relationship of platelet age and density studies using 75Se-mcthioninc cohort labelling. 15. The whole distribution and survival of 51Cr and 111 In-labelled platelet density-defined sub- population in the monkey. 16. Volume and density of "stress" platelets produced after thrombocytopenia. 17. Nature of the thrombocytosis produced by vinca alkaloids. 18. Investigation of thc ultrastructure and function of platelet density defined subpopulations and "stress" platelets. 19. Megakaryocyte ultrastructure in stimulated platelet production. 20. Role of nutrition in the regeneration of bone marrow during therapy for acuic leukaemia. 21. Chromosome studies in acute leukaemia. 22. Chromosome studies of patients wilh therapy-induced remission of lymphoma (with the Haematology Research Unit, Cancer Institute). MEDICINE (ST. VINCENT'S HOSP.) 167

23. Cytogenetic identification of human tumour cell lines (with the Biological Research Unit, Cancer Institute). 24. Chromosome studies in multiple myeloma and C-banding studies in patients with chronic granulocytic leukaemia. 25. Chromosome banding studies in cats (with Department of Biology, Melbourne State College). 26. Collating of clinical and cytogenetic data on patients wilh acute lymphoblastic leukaemia for participation in thc Third International Workshop on Chromosomes in Leukaemia. 27. In vitro culture of megakaryocytes. B. CARDIOLOGY I. G. McDonald, M. J. V. Jelinek 1. Stratified risks early after uncomplicated myocardial infarction. 2. Objective and integrated clinical diagnosis using echocardiography as a model. 3. Ambulatory monitoring: comparison of 24 hour continuous and 5 day intermittent sampling technique (with the Royal Melbourne Hospilal). 4. Prognostic significance of test angina early after myocardial infarction. C. GASTROENTEROLOGY AND NUTRITION K. J. Breen, G. Whelan, P. V. Desmond, M. L. Mashford, M. B. Wood 1. Nutritional studies in alcoholism. 2. Diagnosis and treatment of oesophageal reflux. 3. Drug metabolism in liver disease. 4. The effects of alcohol on thiamine status. 5. Effect of Hislamine-H, receptor antagonists on drug disposition. 6. Effect of ethanol on drug metabolism. D. CLINICAL EPIDEMIOLOGY AND BIOSTATISTICS G. Whelan 1. Evaluation of methods of teaching clinical medicine. 2. Observer variation studies of clinical phenomena. 3. Quality of life following colostomy or ileostomy (with Department of Psychiatry, St. Vin­ cent's l lospital). E. ENDOCRINOLOGY F. P. Alford 1. Pancreatic islet (A and B cell) function of cultured foetal mouse pancreas (in collaboration with T. Mandel, Waller & Eliza Hall Institute). 2. Biological actions of insulin and glucagon on glucose kinetics in normals and cirrhotics. 3. Insulin Action: In vivo and in v/7ro_meiabolic studies in diabetes mellitus. 4. Segmental pancreatic transplantation in experimental diabetic dogs (with Department of Surgery and Experimental Microvascular Unit, St. Vincent's Hospital). F. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY M. L. Mashford, R. W. Bury, M. B. Robertson 1. Pharmacokinetic studies of antimicrobial agents. 2. The impact of liver disease on drug handling. 3. Drug use in thc community. G. COMMUNITY MEDICINE J. N. Santamaria I. Alcohol related brain damage.

PUBLISHED WORK Book I. PENINGTON, D. G. (Guest Editor) — Clinics in Huemmology: Cytogenetics und Haematology, W. B. Saunders Ltd. London, 9 (1980). 168 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Chapters of Books 2. GARSON, O. M. — Introduction to Nomenclature, in Clinics in Haematology: Cytogenetics and Haematology, cd. D. G. Penington, W. B. Saunders, Ltd., London, 9: 3-18 (1980). 3. GARSON, O. M. —Acute Non-Lymphocytic Leukaemia, in Clinics in Haematology: Cytogenetics and Haematology, ed. D. G. Pcnington, W. B. Saunders, Ltd., London, 9: 39-54 (1980).

Articles 4. BEE, D., LEACH, E., MARTIN, J. F. and SUGGETT, A. J. —The Effects of Vincristine on Platelet Aggregation Studied by a Filter Loop Technique in thc Rat. Br. J. Pharmacol, 69: 227-231 (1980). 5. BEST, .1. D., ALFORD, F. P. and DONALD, R. A.-Evaluation of the Three Hour Metyraponc Test in Adults. C//7i. Endrocrinol., 13: 69-76 (1980). 6. BLAIR, N. L., YOUKER, J. E., MeDONALD, I. G., TELFORD, R. and JELlNEK, V. M. — Echocardiographic Assessment of Cardiac Chamber Size and Left Ventricular Function in Aerobically Trained Athletes. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 540-548 (1980). 7. CHESTERMAN, C. N. — Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation and Related Disorders. Medicine, 28: 1428-1433 (1980). 8. CHESTERMAN, C. M., JANUSZEW1CZ, E. and FIRKIN, F. C. - Haematological Disorders: Future Treatment Prospects. Current Therapeutics, 21: 229-232 (1980). 9. DESMOND. P. V., ROBERTS, R. K., WOOD, A., DUNN, G. D.. WILKINSON, G. R. and SCHENKER, S — Influence of Heparin on Benzodiazepine Free Fraction in Plasma. Brit. J. Clin. Pharmacol., 9: 171-175 (1980). 10. DESMOND, P. V., BRANCH, R. A., CALDER, I. and SCHENKER, S.-Comparison of l4C-Phenacctin and MC-Aminopyrine Breath Tests after Various Liver Toxins in the Rat. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med., 164: 173-177 (1980). 11. DESMOND, P. V., PATWARDHAN, R. V. and SCHENKER, S. - Effect of Liver Disease on Call'einc Metabolism. Am. ./. Dig. Dis.. 25: 193-197 (1980). 12. DESMOND, P. V., PATWARDHAN, R. V., PARKER, R., SCHENKER, S. and SPEEG, K. V. Jr. —Effect of Cimetidine and Other Anlihistaminics on thc Elimination of Aminopyrinc, Phenacetin and Caffeine. Life Sci.. 26: 1268 (1980). 13. DESMOND, P. V., PATWARDHAN, R. V., SCHENKER, S. and SPEEG, K. V. Jr. — Cimetidine Impairs the Elimination of Chlordiazepoxidc (Librium1*). Ann. Intern. Med., 93: 266-268 (1980). 14. DOYLE, D. J., CHESTERMAN, C. N., CADE, J. F., McGREADY, J. R., RENNIE, G. D. and MORGAN, F. J. —Plasma Concentrations of Platelet-Specific Proteins Correlated with Platelet Survival. Blood. 55: 82-84 (1980). 15. FARMER, R. G., WHELAN, G. and SIVAK, M. V.-Colonoscopy in Distal Colon Ulcerative Colitis. Clin. Gastroenterol.. 9: 297-306(1980). 16. FIRKIN, P. C, RUSSELL, S. H. and ORAMS, J.— Identification of Megakaryocytes in Human Bone Marrow Culture: Non-specificity of Acid Phosphatase. Blood, 55: 892-893 (1980). 17. FIRKIN, E. C. and RUSSELL, S. H.-Differential Patterns of Cultured Erythroid Pro­ genitor Behaviour in Congenital and Acquired Erythroblast Disorders. Clin. A Exp. Phar­ macol. <£• Physiol. 7: 411-412 (1980). 18. FIRKIN, F. C.-Haematological Side-Effects of Drugs. Medicine, 28: 145S-1462 (19S0). 19. GALLUS, A. S., GOODALL, K. T., BESWICK, W. and CHESTERMAN, C. N.- Hcparin-Associated Thrombocytopenia: Case Report and Prospective Studv. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 25-31 (1980). 20. GARSON, O. M., ROBSON, M. K., WESTE, S. M. and BAIKIE, A. G.-Clinical Findings in Patients wilh Numerical Abnormalities of thc X Chromosome. Med. ./. Aust., 2: 33-35 (1980). 21. GARSON, O. M. (and other participants in The Second International Workshop on Chromosomes in Leukemia) (a) General Report; (b) Morphological Analysis of Acute Pro- myclocytic Leukemia (M3) and I (8; 21); (c) Cytogenetic, Morphologic and Clinical Correla­ tions in Acute Nonlymphocyiic Leukemia with t (8q - ; 21 q +); (d) Chromosomes in Acute Promyelocvtic Leukemia; (e) Chromosomes in Preleukemia. Cancer Genet. Cvtogenet., 2: 93-113 (1980). 22. HOROWITZ. J. D. and MASHFORD, M. L. — Purification of a Peptide with Vcnoconstric- tor and Vasodepressor Activity, from Cohn Fraction III-O of Human Plasma Protein. Vox- Sang. 38: 259-265 (1980). 23. HOROWITZ, J. D. and MASHFORD, M. L. — Venoconstrictor Activity of Some Precursor Fractions of Stable Plasma Protein Solution. Vox Sang. 38: 266-271 (1980). 24. HOYUMPA, A. M. Jr., DESMOND, P. V., ROBERTS, R. K. and SCHENKER, S.-Effect of Ethanol on Benzodiazepine Disposition in Dogs. J. Lab. Clin. Med., 95: 310-322 (1980). MEDICINE (ST. VINCENT'S HOSP.) 169

25. JANUSZEWICZ, E. and FIRKIN, F. C.-Uual Presentation of Polycythaemia Vera and Lymphatic Leukaemia. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 209-211 (1980). 26. JELlNEK, V. iM. — Exercise Testing of Cardiac Patients. Patient Management, 9: 49-58 (1980). 27. JELlNEK, V. M., ZIFFER, R. W., MeDONALD, 1. G. and HALE, G. S.-Shortened Car­ diac Rehabilitation: A Three Year Experience. Aust. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 171-175 (1980). 28. JELlNEK, V. M. and MeDONALD, I. G.-Historv, Exercise Test and Prognosis of Chest Pain. Med. J. Aust., 2: 26-27 (1980). 29. JELlNEK, V. M. —Exercise Induced Arrhythmias: Their Implications for Cardiac Rehabilitation Programs. Med. Sci. Sports, 12: 223-230 (1980). 30. LATIMER, N. Z., CHIU, E. and GARSON, O. M.-Sister Chromatid Exchanges in the Lymphocytes of Humans on Long-Term Lithium Therapy. Mutat. Pes., 74: 421-422 (1980). 31. LEE, C. M., CLARK, A. R., THORPE, M. E., MACKIE, B. S. and FIRKIN, E. C.-Bile Duct Adenocarcinoma with Lcscr-Trelat Sign and Pure Red Cell Aplasia. Cancer, 46: 1657-1660 (1980). 32. MARTIN, J. F., SUGGETT, A. J., LEACH, E. and MONCADA, S.-The Effect of Pro­ stacyclin on Platelet Aggregation and Disaggregation In Vivo. Thromb. Res., 18: 749-751 (1980). 33. MARTIN, J. F., KITTAS, C. and TR1GER, D. R.-Giant Cell Arteritis of Coronary Arteries Causing Myocardial Infarction. Br. Heart J., 43: 487-489 (1980). 34. MASHFORD, M. L., ROBERTSON, M. B. and STEWART, J. M.-Use of Prophylactic Antibiotics in Surgery. Med. J. Aust., 1: 532-534 (1980). 35. MCCARTHY, J. IE, NICOLA, N., SZELAG, G. and GARSON, O. M.-Studies on Eosinophilic Colonies Grown from Leukaemic and Nonleukaemic Patients. Leuk. Res., 4: 415-426 (1980). 36. MCCARTHY, J. H., MANDEL, T. E., GARSON, O. M. and METCALF, D.-The Presence of Mast Cells in Agar Cultures. Exp. Hematol., 8: 562-567 (1980). 37. MeDONALD, I. G. and JELlNEK, V. M.-Serial M-mode Echocardiography in Severe Chronic Aortic Regurgitation. Circulation, 62: 1291-1296 (1980). 38. MORGAN, F. J., BEGG, G. S and CHESTERMAN, C. N. — The Amino Acid Sequence of Human Platelet Factor 4. Thromb. Haemost., 42: 1652-1660 (1980). 39. NANKERVIS, A. J., HUMPHREY, R., WESTWOOD, S., WHITE, K. and ALFORD, F. P.-Appraisal of a New Rapid Enzvme Strip. Med. J. Ausi.. 2: 677-678 (1980). 40. PATWARDHAN, R. V., YARBOROUGH, G., DESMOND, P. V., SCHENKER, S. and SPEEG, K. V. Jr. —No Effect of Cimetidine on the Glucuronidation of Lorazepam. Gastroenterologv, 79: 912-916 (1980). 41. PATWARDHAN, R. V., DESMOND, P. V., JOHNSON, R. F., DUNN, S. D., ROBERT­ SON, D. H., HOYUMPA, A. M. Jr. and SCHENKER, S.-Effects of Caffeine on Plasma Free Fattv Acids, Urinary Catecholamines and Drug Binding. Clin. Pharmacol. Ther.. 28: 398-403 (1980). 42. PATWARDHAN, R. V., DESMOND, P. V., JOHNSON, R. and SCHENKER, S.-The Effect of Gender and Oral Contraceptives on Caffeine Disposition. J. Lab. Clin. Med.. 95: 603-608 (1980). 43. PENINGTON, D. G. — Ervthrocvtosis and the Myeloproliferative Disorders. Medicine. 28: 2067-2073 (1980). 44. PROIETTO, J., ALFORD, E. P. and DUDLEY, E. -The Mechanism of Carbohydrate In­ tolerance of Cirrhosis. J. Lab. Endocrinol. Metab.. 51: 1030 (1980). 45. SACKETT, D. L. and WHELAN, G.-Cancer Risk in Ulcerative Colitis: Scientific Re­ quirements for the Studv of Prognosis. Gastroenterologv, 78: 1632-1635 (1980). 46. SCHENKER, S., DESMOND, P. V., SPEEG, K. V. Jr. and HOYUMPA, A. M. Jr.-The Cryptic Nature of Bromocriptine Therapy in Hepatic Encephalopathy. Gastroenterologv. 78: 1094-1097 (1980). 47. SHAW, R. G., MASHFORD, M. L. and DESMOND, P. V.,-Cardiac Arrest Following In­ travenous Injection of Cimetidine. Med. J. Aust., 2: 629-630 (1980). 48. WHEI.AN, G. —Cancer Risk in Ulcerative Colitis: Why are thc Results in thc Literature Varied? Clin. Gastroenterol., 9: 469-476 (1980). 49. WHELAN, G. and WOOD, B.-The Metabolic Consequences of Jejunoileal Bvpass for Obesity. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg.. 50: 520-524 (1980). 50. WOOD, B., GIJSBERS, A., GOODE, A., MULHOLLAND, J., DAVIS, S. and BREEN, K. J.-Partial Thiamin Restriction in Human Volunteers. Amer. J. Clin. Nutr., 33: 848 (1980). 51. WOOD, B. and BREEN, K. J. -Clinical Thiamine Deficiency in Australia. The Size of the Problem and Approaches to Prevention. Med. J. Aust., 1: 461 (1980). 52. WOODRUFF, R. K., BELL, W. R., CASTALDI, P. A., STREATFIELD, K. and PEN­ INGTON, D. G.-Essentia] Thrombocythaemia. Haemostasis, 9: 105-125 (1980). 170 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Reports und Notes 53. BURY, R. W. and MASHFORD, M. L.-Misleading Plasma Digoxin Results. Med. J. Ausi., 4: 218-220 (1980). 54. DOYLE, D. J., CADE, J. 1 MORGAN, F. J. and CHESTERMAN, C. N.-Platelet Kinetics in Coronary Arterv Disease: Effects of Coronary Surgery and Sulphinpvrazone. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 395 (Abstract) (1980). 55. McGREADY, J. R., DIGC.LE, T. A., CHESTERMAN, C. N. and MORGAN, F. J. —Studies on thc Structure of Platelet Thromboglobulin. Proc. Ausi. Biochem. Soc, 13: 9 (Abstract) (1980). 56. WOOD, B., CURRIE, J., GOODE, A. and BREEN. K. .1.-Nutritional Status in Wernicke's Encephalopathy. 1979 Proc. Brain Impairment Workshop: 74 (19S0). THESES IN PROGRESS MD Theses in Progress 1. DOYLE, D. J. — Platelet Secretory Proteins and Platelet Survival in Coronary Arterv Disease. 2. PANELL1, D. J — The Pole of Nutritional Support During Intensive Chemotherapy in (a) Acme Leukaemia; lb) Small Cell Carcinoma of the Lung. MMed Thesis in Progress 3. MARTIN, J. V. —Cause and Effect of Platelet Heterogeneity. PhD Theses in Progress 4. HARRIS, R. A. —In Vitro Culture of Megakaryocytes. 5. PROIETTO, .1. — Mechanism of the Carbohydrate Intolerance of Cirrhosis. 6. SHAW, T. — Protein Synthesis in Platelets and Megakaryocytes. 7. WOOD, M. B. — Thiamine Status of the Australian Community, and Its Relation lo Alcohol and Alcoholism. S. WEBBER, L. M. — Brdil Replication Handing and lis Application to Malignant Cell Lines. MSc Theses in Progress 9. CARUSO, G. M.—A and B Pancreatic Cell Function and the Physiological Role of Insulin and Glucagon in Normal and Abnormal Carbohydrate Metabolism. 10. MICHAEL, J. H. —Chromosome Banding in Renal Transplant Recipients on Immuno­ suppressive Drugs. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: NH & MRC: The structure of platelet proteins and their role in the generation of atherosclerosis (with St. Vincent's School of Medical Research). NH & MRC: Characterization of toxic mechanisms affecting erythroid and myeloid activity in bone marrow disorders by in vitro studies. National Heart Foundation of Australia: The site of biosynthesis of the platelet specific secretory proteins and their role in the genesis of vascular disease (with St. Vincent's School of Medical Research). Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: Chromosome studies in human leukaemia. Cancer Institute: Chromosome studies of patients with therapy-induced remission of lymphoma. Rowden White: Thrombosis. Rowden White: Alcohol related brain damage. Australian .Associated Brewers: Nutritional studies in alcoholism. John Claude Kellion Foundation: The role of glucagon in thc pathophysiology of diabetes mellitus and related disease. MICROBIOLOGY

INTRODUCTION The Department of Microbiology continues to be one of the University's most active and pro­ ductive in research. Most of thc research is of a fundamental type, within the major sub-disciplines of virologv, bacteriology, immunology and molecular genetics, supported by grants totalling some S400.000 pcr annum rrom NH & MRC, ARGC, AMSTAC, NERDDC and various other sources, ln addition, contract research of a more applied nature is conducted for governmental, en­ vironmental and industrial bodies on problems principally related to pollution control and alter­ native sources of energy. The Microbiological Diagnostic Unit undertakes investigations for the Victorian Health Commission into microbiological and epidemiological problems relevant to public health.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. BACTERIAL GENETICS AND PHYSIOLOGY 1. Regulation of aromatic biosynthesis in Escherichia coli K-12 —A. J. Pittard, H. Camakaris, S. Morrison. 2. Transmissible antibiotic resistance in enteric organisms —A. J. Pittard, R. B. Davey. 3. Metabolic control mechanisms in Bacillus brevis: (a) function of polypeptide antibiotics; (b) biosynthesis of diaminopimclic acid, dipicolinic acid, and lysine— B. Hodgson. 4. Antibiotic resistance in anaerobic bacteria—R. G. Wilkinson. B. INDUSTRIAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY 1. Microbiology of wetlands—H. J. Bavor N. F. Millis. 2. Cadmium tolerance in marine bacteria —N. F. Millis. 3. Anaerobic digestion of sugar cane waste to produce acid—R. G. Wilkinson, M. Britz, C. Matei. 4. Production of caproic acids by anaerobic bacteria—R. G. Wilkinson, M. Britz, C. Matci. C. MEDICAL MICROBIOLOGY 1. Trachoma in aborigines in Northern Territory— D. M. Graham, D. P. Dennett. 2. Immunology of trachoma in mice—D. M. Graham. 3. Public health and epidemiology studies —J. R. L. Forsyth, M. Peel, J. Taplin, A. Tan. D. IMMUNOLOGY 1. Immunity to intracellular bacteria: (a) Genetic control and mechanisms of resistance or susceptibility to infection, (b) Control of immune response during chronic infection —C. Cheers. 2. Antigens and interleukins initiating graft rejection —W. Boyle, H. Schnagl. 3. Factors affecting hybridoma production-W. Boyle, L. Morris E. VIROLOGY 1. Antigenic determinants on influenza virus haemagglutinin —D. O. White, D. C. Jackson, E. M. Anders, A. M. Breschkin. 2. NK cells and macrophage ADCC in togavirus infection —D. O. White. 3. Viral enteritis—1. H. Holmes, M. Begin, J. Breschkin, S. Rodger.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapters nf Books 1. ANDERS, E. M., KATZ, J. M., BROWN, L. E., JACKSON, D. C. and WHITE, D. O. - In vitro Studies on thc Specificity of Helper T Cells for Influenza Virus Haemagglutinin, in Structure and Variation in Influenza Virus, cd. W. G. Laver and G. Air, Elscvier-North, Holland: 321-328 (1980). 2. JACKSON, D. C, BROWN, L. E., WHITE, D. O., DOPHEIDE, T. A. and WARD. C. W. — Antigenic and Immunogenic Properties of Hemagglutinin Fragments, in Structure and Variation in Influenza Virus, cd. W. G. Laver and G. Air, Elsevier-North, Holland: 309-320 (1980) 3. WARD, C. W., DOWN1E, J. C, BROWN, L. E. and JACKSON, D. C.-Structural Studies on the Sulphated Moiety of thc Influenza Virus Hemagglutinin, in Structure and Variation in Influenza Virus, ed. W. G. Laver and G. Air, Elsevier-North, Holland: 233-240 (1980). 4. WHITE, D. O. —Practical Considerations in thc Immunology of Viral Diseases, in Tropical Immunology, ed. L. Davidson, Australian Development Assistance Bureau, Sydnev 35-43 (1980). 171 172 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Articles 5. BASTARDO, J. E. and HOLMES, 1. H. —Attachment or SA 11 Rotavirus to Erythrocyte Receptors. Inf. Imm., 29: 1134-1140 (1980). 6. BROWN, L. E., DOPHEIDE, T. A., WARD, C. W., WHITE, D. O. and JACKSON, D. C. — Antigenic Determinants of Influenza Virus Hemagglutinin. V. Antigenicity oT Ihe HA, Chain. J. Immunol., 125: 1583-1588 (1980). 7. CAMAKARIS, H., CAMAKARIS, J., and PITTARD, J.-Regulation or Aromatic Amino Acid Biosynthesis in E. Coli K 12: Control oT the aroF-lvr.A Operon in the Absence or Repression Control. J. Bad., 143: 613-620 (1980). 8. CHEERS, C, PAVLOV, H., R1GLAR, C. and MADRASO, E. D.-Macrophage Activa­ tion During Experimental Murine Brucellosis. III. Do Macrophages Exert a Feedback Con­ trol During Brucellosis? Cell. Immunol., 49: 168-177 (1980). 9. COBBETT, C. and PITTARD, J.-Formation ofa X(Tnl0) IwR ' Specialized Transducing Bacteriophage from Escherichia coli K-12. J. Bad., 144: 877-883 (1980). 10. CROSB1E, J. J., KENNY, P. J. and BOYLE, W.-Alloantiserum Production Simplified by Adoptive Transfer or Immune Spleen Cells. Transplantation, 29: 419-426 (1980). 11. DAVEY, R. B. and PITTARD, J.-Endonuclcase Finger-Printing of Plasmids Mediating Gentamicin Resistance in an Outbreak or Hospital Infections. Ausi. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 58: 331-338 (1980). 12. FOX, J. S. and WHITE, D. O. — Delivery of Antiviral Chemotherapeutic Agents lo Neurons by Retrograde Axonal Transport. Med. Hvpoth., 6: 773-779 (1980). 13. GILBERT, G. L., BEATON, C. P., FORSYTH, J. R. L., and BELL, C. O.-An Epidemiological Survev of Human Brucellosis in Three Victorian Abattoirs. Med. J. Ausi., 1: 482 (1980). 14. GRANT, A., BIRD, P. and PITTARD, J.-Naturally Occurring Plasmids Exhibiting In­ compatibility with Members or the I and P Incompatibility Groups. J. Bad., 144: 758-765 (1980). 15. HITCHCOCK, M. J. M., HODGSON, B. and LINFORTH, J. L.- Regulation or Lysinc- and Lysinc-plus-Threonine-Inhibitable Aspartokinases in Bacillus brevis. J. Bad., 142: 424-432 (1980). 16. JACKSON, D. C. —Some Effects of Chloramine T Induced Radioiodination on thc Physico- Chemical Properties or Oligomeric Proteins. J. Imm. Meth., 34: 253-260 (1980). 17. MACFARLAN, R. 1. and WHITE, D. O.-Further Characterization of Natural Killer Cells Induced by Kunjin Virus. Ausi. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 58: 77-89 (1980). 18. MACFARLAN, R. I. and WHITE, D. O.-A Soluble Cytotoxic Factor from Macrophages. Aust. J-, Exp. Biol. Med. Sci. 58: 489-500 (1980). 19. MANDEL, T. E., and CHEERS, C. - Resistance and Susceptibility of Mice to Bacterial In­ fection. III. Histocompatibility of Listeriosis in Resistant and Susceptible Mice. Inf. Imm., 30: 851-861 (1980). 20. McLEAN, B. S., SONZA, S. and HOLMES, I. H.-Measurement of IgA, IgG and IgM Class Rotavirus Antibodies in Serum and Mucosal Secretions. J. Clin. Micro., 12: 314-319 (1980). 21. McLEAN, B. S. and HOLMES, I. H. —Transfer or Antirotaviral Anlibodies from Mothers to their Infanls. J. Clin. Micro., 12: 320-325 (1980). 22. PEEL, M. M. and HOLMES, B.-Isolation of Group EF-4 Bacteria in Australia. Ausi. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 435 (1980). 23. PEEL, M. M. —Measurement of Tetanus Antitoxin. I. Indirect Hemagglutination. J. Biol. Stand., 8: 177 (1980). 24. PEEL, M. M. — Measurement or Tetanus Antitoxin. II. Toxin Neutralization. J. Biol. Stand., 5: 191 (1980). 25. R1GLAR, C. and CHEERS, C. — Macrophage Activation During Experimental Murine Brucellosis. II. Inhibition or in vitro Lymphocyte Proliferation by Brucella-Activalcd Macrophages. Cell. Immunol., 49: 154-167 (1980). 26. RODGER, S. M., STUDDERT, M. J. and HOLMES, I. H.-Characterization or the Genomes of Equine Rotaviruses, Vet. Microbiol., 5: 243-248 (1980). 27. SCHNAGL, H. Y. and BOYLE, W.-Separate Clones of Cytotoxic T Lymphocytes are Generated Against Private and Public H-2 Antigens. Transplantation, 29: 492-497 (1980). 28. SMART, 1. J., BOYLE, W. and MORRIS, P. J.-Depression of Lymphocyte Proliferation and Haemolytic Antibody Production in Passively Enhanced Rat Renal Allograft Recipients. Tissue Antigens, 16: 205-211 (1980). 29. SMITH, M. L., LAZDINS, I. and HOLMES, 1. H.-Coding Assignments or Double- Stranded RNA Segments or SA 11 Rotavirus Established by //; vitro Translation. J. Virol., 33: 976-982 (1980). 30. SONZA, S. and HOLMES, I. H. — Coproantibody Response to Rotavirus Infection. Med. J. Aust., 2: 496-499 (1980). 31. VOLKMAN, J. K., JOHNS, R. B., GILLAN, F. T, PERRY, G. J., and BAVOR, H. J. MICROBIOLOGY 173

— Microbial Lipids of an Intenidal Sediment. I. Fattv Acids and Hydrocarbons. Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta, 44: 1133-1143 (1980). 32. WHIPP, M. J., HALSALL, D. M. and PITTARD, J.-Isolation and Characterization of an Escherichia coli K-12 Mutant Defective in Tyrosine and Phenylalanine Specific Transport Systems. J. Bact., 143: 1-7 (1980). 33. WHITE, D. O.-Advances in Antiviral Chemotherapy. Med. J. Aust.. 1: 515-516 (1980). Reports 34. BAVOR, H. J. — Effect of Heavy Metals on Bacterial Activities in Surface Marine Sediments, Ministry for Conservation, Victoria, Environmental Studies Series, Publication No. 288 (1980). 35. FENNER, F. J. — Recombinant DNA: An Australian Perspective (including contributions by N. F. Millis and A. J. Pittard), Aust. Acad. Science, Canberra (1980). 36. FORSYTH, J. R. L. — Tarawa Sewerage Project 1980, Australian Department of Housing and Construction (1980). 37. MILLIS, N. F., EAGER, E. A., HAY, A. J., KASIAN, P. A., PICKERING, W. J. and TAN, A. C — Bacteriological Examination of Private Swimming Pools in Melbourne in the Summer of 1980, prepared for ICT (Australia) (1980). 38. YORK, J. J. —A Rapid Method for the Detection of Salmonella in Egg Products, Poultry Research Advisory Committee (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. KELSO, A. Wl — Role of Antigen in Alloreactive T Lymphocyte Reactions. 2. SCHNAGL, H. Y. — lmmunoabsorption of Alloreactive Cells. 3. TUDROSZEN, N. J. — a-Pinene Metabolism by Pseudomonas putida.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BASTARDO, J. VV . — Characterization of Rotavirus Antigens. 2. BIRD, P. —Molecular Studies of Incompatibility Reactions of Plasmids. 3. BROWN, L. Yi.—Antigenic Determinants of Influenza Hemagglutinin. 4. COBBETT, C. — Regulation of Aromatic Amino Acid Biosvnlhesis in the Bacterium E. coli K-12. 5. CORNISH, E.- Characterization of the TvrR Gene and Gene Product. 6. DEFEYTER, R. - The Role of Shikimate Kinase in E. coli K-12. 7. DUTTA, D.-Cell Interactions in Graft Rejection. 8. DYALL-SMITH, M. L. — Coding Assignments of the Rotavirus Genome. 9. GOWR1SHANKAR, }.-Regulation of Phenylalanine Biosyntheses in Escherichia coli. 10. JENNINGS, S. R. — Studies on Growth and immunogenicity of Trachoma in Mice. 11. KASIAN, P. —Studies of Tvrosine Specific Transport Systems in Escherichia coli. 12. KENNY, P. .1.- Hybridized Cells with Immunological Potential. 13. MACFARLAN, R. {.—Specific and Non-Specific Immunity in Togavirus Infection. 14. McLEAN, B. —Rotavirus Infection of Neonates. 15. SONZA, S. — Immunity to Rotavirus. MSc Theses in Progress 16. CHAN, Y. Y. — Changes in Tand B Lymphocyte Populations During Murine Listeriosis. 17. EAGER, E. A. —Tolerance of Microorganisms lo Cadmium. IS. PAVLOV, H. — Immune Mechanisms During Chronic Brucellosis in Mice.

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: AMSTAC: Bacterial Degradation of Hydrocarbons in Reef Environments. ARGC: Regulation of Aromatic Biosynthesis in Escherichia coli K-12. AVVRC: Wetland Study Gippsland. CSIRO/NERDDC: Microbial Production of Volatile Fatty Acids as a Source of Liquid Fuels. ICI (Aust.): Swimming Pool Survey. NH & MRC: A Clinical, Microbiological and Immunological Study of Trachoma Among Aboriginals in Northern Australia. NH & MRC: The Pathogenesis of Viral Infections: In vitro Studies of Antiviral Immunity. 174 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

NH & MRC: Viral Enteritis. NH & MRC: Production of Hybridomas Against Human Lymphocyte Antigens. NH & MRC: Antigen Suppression of Allograft Response. NH & MKC: Transmissible Antibiotic Resistance in Enteric Organisms. Nil & MRC: Genetic and Cellular Determinants Regulating Immunity to Intracellular Bacteria. OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

i ROYAL WOMEN'S HOSPITAL i INTRODUCTION In 1980 ihe major research emphasis continued in the endocrine and ultrasonic evaluation of patients with infertility and thc endocrine assessment of patients with endometrial cancer. Signifi­ cant discoveries resulted in each of these areas and have led to modifications of investigation and treatment programmes. Since Dr Lopata has joined Ihe Department, research in in vitro fertiliza­ tion has also increased considerably.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Investigation and treatment of patients with unexplained infertility —J. C. McBain. 2. Role of oestrogen in induction of endometrial cancer —M. A. Quinn, J. B. Brown. 3. Development of "do il yourself" kits for detection of ovulation —.1. B. Brown. 4. Premature labour —its aetiology and management — R. J. Pepperell. 5. Mullidiscipline longitudinal study of infants of very low birthweight —W. H. Kitchen. 6. Mullitudinal study of infanls born to mothers with low oestriol excretion-R. W. Wade. 7. Mortality and morbidity associated with breech presentation —R. J. Pepperell. S. Hysterectomy and its aftermath-J. R. H. Fliegner. 9. Stress and urge incontinence in the human female —J. R. H. Fliegner. 10. Investigation and treatment of patients with disorders of ovulation—R. J. Pepperell, J. H. Evans. 11. The use of clomiphene citrate in disorders of ovulation and ultrasonic assessment of ovula­ tion in patients with ovulatory disorders and requiring in vitro fertilization —C. O'Herlihy. 12. Thc place of antenatal and intrapartum cardiolocography in obstetric practice —R. J. P. Kuhn. 13. Pelvic infcction-L. Reli, R. J. P. Kuhn. 14. In vitro fertilization — A. Lopata. 15. Ultrasonic diagnosis of neonatal ccrcbro-vcntricular haemorrhage — L. J. Ch. de Crcspigny. 16. Ultrasonic evaluation of fetal growth —L. J. Ch. de Crcspigny, H. P. Robinson.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. BROWN, .1. B., PEPPERELL, R. J. and EVANS, J. II.-Disorders of Ovulation, in The Infertile Couple, ed. R. J. Pepperell, B. Hudson and C. Wood, Churchill Livingstone, Edin­ burgh: 7-42 (1980). 2. HUDSON, B., PEPPERELL, R. J. and WOOD, C.-The Problem of Infertility, in The In­ fertile Couple, ed. R. J. Pepperell. B. Hudson and C. Wood, Churchill Livingstone, Edin­ burgh: 1-6 (1980). 3. LOPATA, A., JOHNSTON, W. I. H., LEETON, .1. and McBAIN, J. C.-Use of In Vitro Fertilization in the Infertile Couple, in The Infertile Couple, cd. R. J. Pepperell, B. Hudson and C. Wood, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh: 209-228 (1980). 4. McBAIN, J. C. and PEPPERELL, R. J.-Unexplained Infertility, in The Infertile Couple. ed. R. J. Pepperell, B. Hudson and C. Wood, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh: 164-181 (1980). 5. McBAIN, J. C. — Thc Timing of Ovulation for AID, in Artificial Insemination by Donor, cd. C. Wood, J. Lecton and G. Kovacs, Brown Prior Anderson, Melbourne: 50-62 (1980). 6. ROBINSON, H. P.-Ultrasound Measurements in ihc Evaluation of ihe Normal Early Pregnancy, in The Principles and Practice of Ultrasonography in Obstetrics and Gynecology. ed. R. C. Saunders and A. E. James, Appleton Century Crofts, New York: 121-130 (1980). Articles 1. BAKER, H. W. G. and PEPPERELL, R. J.-Lack of Effect of Bromocriptine on Semen Quality in Men with Normal or Slightly Elevated Prolactin Levels. Aust. N.Z. J. Obstel. Gvnaec, 20: 158-161 (1980). 2. CAUCHI, M., GORIUP, D., RIGLAR, C, QUINN, M. A. and RICHARDSON. C. R.—Cancer of the Endometrium —A Mulliparametric Studv. Gvnec. & Obstet. Invest., II: 65-74(1980). 3. D'APICE, A. J. E., RETI, L. 1.., PEPPERELL, R. J., FAIRLEY, K. F. and KINCAID- SMITH, P.—Treatment of Severe Pre-eclampsia bv Plasma Exchange. Aust. N.Z. J. Obstel. Gvnaec. 20: 231-235 (1980). 4. de CRESP1GNY, L. J. Ch., ROBINSON, 11. P. and McBAIN, J. C.-Fetal Abdominal Paracentesis in the Management of Gross Fetal Ascites". Aust. N.Z. J. Obstel. Gvnaec, 20: 228-230(1980). 175 176 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

5. KITCHEN, W. H., McDOUGALL, A. B. and NAYLOR, F. D.-A Longitudinal Study of Verv Low Birthweiehi Infants. III. Distance Growih at Eight Years of Aec. Dev. Med. & Child Neur., 22: 163-171 (1980). 6. KITCHEN, W. H., RYAN, M. M., RICKARDS, A., McDOUGALL, A. B., BILLSON. F. A., KE1R, E. H. and NAYLOR, F. D.-A Longitudinal Study of Very Low Birthweight In­ fants. IV. An Overview of Performance at Eight Years of Age. Dev. Med.

THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics 1. QUINN, M. A. — Clinical Applications of Prostaglandin Gel in Obstetrics and Gynaecology. OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY (ROYAL WOMEN'S HOSP.) 177

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. CLARKE, G. N. —Studies in ihe Biology and Crvopreservation of Human Spermatozoa. MSc Theses in Progress 2. BASCOM B, J. — Development of Radioimmunoassay for Oestrogen Glucuronides and their Application for Monitoring Human Female Reproductive Functions. 3. BRIGHT, M. I. — Development of Pregnanediol Clucuronide Assay. Its Application lo the Detection of Ovulation and as a Placental Function Test in Pregnancy. MD Theses in Progress 4. de CRESPIGNY, L. J. Ch. — The Investigation of Neonatal Cerebroveniricular Hae­ morrhage and ils Sequelae wilh Real-Time Ultrasound. 5. McBAIN, J. C-Idiopathic Infertility. 6. O'HERLIHY, C. — The Evaluation of Human Ovulation with Ultrasound and Endocrine Techniques. 7. QUINN, M. A. — Endocrine Profiles of patients with Gynaecological Cancer. 8. WADE, R. W. - Long-Term Follow-Up of Infants Born to Mothers with Low Oestriol Ex­ cretion in Pregnancy. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: A. E. Rowden White Foundation: Reproduction research. NH & MRC: Endocrinology of gynaecological cancer. NH & MRC: In vitro fertilization. Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: Endocrinology of Gynaecological cancer. Sandoz (Australia) Pty. Ltd.: Prolactin and disorders of reproduction. 3AW Community Service Trust: Paediatric follow-up studies. 178 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

MERCY AND AUSTIN HOSPITALS INTRODUCTION Thc major research activities in the department were detection and treatment of abnormal glucose tolerance and fetal growth retardation during pregnancy. Surviving infanls born from thesc high-risk pregnancies continue to be followcd-up lo determine the quality of survival. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Treatment of fclal growth retardation before delivery —N. A. Beischer. 2. Study of abnormal glucose tolerance (gestational hypoglycaemia and gestational diabetes) in pregnancy —D. A. Abell. 3. Angiotcnsin-converting enzyme in pregnancies complicated by renal disease, hypertension and diabetes mellitus —J. N. Oats. 4. Blood volume changes in pregnancies complicated by intrauterine growth retardation — .!. N. Oats. 5. Changes in plasma urate in pregnancy-induced hypertension —J. N. Oats, H. M. Walker. 6. Changes in skin vessels in pregnancy-induced hypertension —J. N. Oats, J. B. Hobbs. 7. Assessment of placental function in patients with pre-eclampsia—P. A. Long. 8. Studies of fetal heart rale patterns in late pregnancy — F. T. K. Chew. J. N. Oats. 9. Prevention of prematurity by treatment of undiagnosed incompetent cervix —G. J. Ratten. 10. Genetic counselling in pregnancy —J. E. Brehcny. 11. Follow-up of babies born from pregnancies associated with low maternal excretion of oestriol—J. H. Drew. 12. Treatment of the persistent fetal circulation syndrome in newborn infants with lolazolinc hydrochloride — .!. H. Drew. 13. Studv of the effects on survival of immediate intubation at birth of infants with a birth weight of 501 to 1500g.-J. H. Drew. 14. Study of late-onset convulsions in newborn infanls —J. H. Drew. 15. Obstetric factors in suddcn-infant-dcalh syndrome —.1. N. Oals, E. Farrell. 16. Evaluation of ulcrinc lavage in the early diagnosis of malignancy of the uterine body and cer­ vix—C. A. Barbaro. 17. Use of provcra as primary treatment for carcinoma of the endometrium— R. Planner. 18. Assessment of the time of ovulation — L. Hatherley. 19. Whole blood viscosity in paticnls with pre-eclampsia —J. B. Hobbs, J. N. Oats. 20. Study of late-onset convulsions in newborn infants —J. H. Drew, H. J. Goldberg. 21. Analysis of infants with massive pulmonary haemorrhage —J. H. Drew, P. D. Sly. 22. Causative factors in air leaks in the newborn infant —J. H. Drew, P. D. Sly. 23. Hyperviscosity studies in newborn infants —J. H. Drew, J. B. Hobbs. 24. The timing of intracranial haemorrhage in newborn infanls by ultrasound estimation — J. H. Drew, C. M. Acion.

PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. ABELL, D. A. and BEISCHER, N. A.—Are There Recognizable Symptoms of Abnormal Glucose Tolerance (Hvpoglvcacmia and Hypcrglvcacmia) in Pregnancv? Aust. N.Z. J. Obstel. Gvnaec., 20: 73-76 (1980). 2. BROUGHTON PIPKIN, F., OATS, J. N., and SYMONDS, E. M. — The Effect of a Specific AH Antagonist (Saralasin) on Blood Pressure in the Immediate Puerperium, in Pregnancy Hvpertension, eds. J. Bonnar, 1. MacGillivray and E. M. Symonds, M.T.P. Press Ltd., England: 75-80 (1980). 3. DREW, J. H. and BEISCHER, N. A. —Incidence, Associated Factors and Long-term Prog­ nosis of Newborn Infants with Nerve Palsies, in Problems in Perinatology, eds. S. M. M. Karim and K. L. Tan, M.T.P. Press Ltd., England: 572-578 (1980). 4. DREW, J. H. and ARROYAVE, C. M.-The Complement Svstem of the Newborn Infant. Biol. Neonate., 37: 209-217 (1980). 5. DREW, J. H.— Malformations: Incidence, Aetiologv, Problems and Possible Association with Infants of Multiple Births. Med. J. Aust., 1: 49-50 (1980). 6. DREW. J. H., SATCHWELL, C. A., CARMAN, P. G. and BEISCHER, N. A.-Prospec­ tive Follow-up of Growth Retarded Infanls and of those from Pregnancies Complicated by Low Oestriol Excretion. Singapore J. Obstel. Gynaec, II: 67-72 (1980). 7. DREW, J. H. — Breastfeeding and Jaundice. Nursing Mothers Association of Australia Newsletter, 16: 3-7 (1980). OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY (MERCY AND AUSTIN HOSPS.) 179

8. HATHHRLEY, L. I., HAYES, K., HENNESSY, E. M. and .IACK, I. — Herpes Virus in an Obstelrie Hospilal I: Herpetic Eruptions Med. J. Ausi., 2: 205-208 (1980). 9. HATI-IERLEY, L. I., HAYES, K. and JACK, I. — Herpes Virus in an Obsietric Hospital II: Asymptomatic Virus Excretion in Stall" Members. Med. J. Ausi.. 2: 273-275 (1980). 10. HATHER1.EY, L. I., HAYES, K., and JACK, I. — Herpes Virus in an Obstetric Hospilal III: Prevalence of Antibodies in Patients and Stalf. Med. J. Ausi.. 2: 325-329 (1980). 11. HILL, D.J. and BEISCHER, N. A. — Placenta Praevia Without Antepartum Haemorrhage. Ausi. N.Z. J. Obslel. Gynaec., 20: 21-23 (1980). 12. HILL, D. J. and BEISCHER, N. A. — Hysterectomy in Obstetric Practice. Ausi. N.Z. .1. Obslel. Gvnaec. 20: 151-153 (1980). 13. LONG, P. A., ABELL, D. A. and BEISCHER, N. A. — Fetal Growth Retardation and Pre­ eclampsia. Brii. J. Obsiel. Gvnaec. 57: 13-18 (1980). 14. OATS, J. N., ABELL, D. A., BEISCHER, N. A. and BROOMHALL, G. R. — Maternal Glucose Tolerance During Pregnanes' with Excessive Size Infants. Obstel. Gvnec. 55: 184-186(1980). 15. OATS, J. J. N., BROUGHTON PIPKIN, I", and SYMONDS. E. M.-A Prospective Serial Study of Plasma Angiotensin 1 - Converting Enzyme in Pregnancy, in Pregnancy Hyperten­ sion, eds. J. Bonnar, I. MacGillivrav and E. M. Svmonds, M.T.P. Press Ltd., England: 51-58 (1980). 16. WHIR, P. E., RATTEN, G. .1. and BEISCHER, N. A. — Acute Polyhydramnios-A Com­ plication of Monozygous Twin Pregnanes'. Brit. J. Obstet. Gvnaec, 86: 849-853 (1979). 17. WEIR. P. H. and BEISCHER, N. A. — Birth Before Arrival in Hospital. Med. ./. Aust.. 2: 31-33 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. DREW, J. II. — Follow-up of infanls born from pregnancies complicated by low urinary oestriol excretion and of those suffering from fetal growih retardation. MD Theses in Progress 2. ABELL, D. A. —The significance of abnormal glucose tolerance (hypoglycaemia and hyperglycaemia) in pregnancy. 3. HATHERLEY, 1... I. — Resumption of ovulation after term pregnancy and spontaneous first trimester abortion. 4. LONG, P. A. —Pre-eclampsia with reference to parity, onset in labour and relationship to fetoplacental function and abnormal glucose tolerance. 5. OATS, .1. N. — A study of angiotensin-converling-enzyine in normotensive primigravid pregnancies. MGO Theses in Progress 6. ANDERSON, K. .1. — Study of glucose tolerance in pregnancy. 7. BARBARO, C. A. — Uterine lavage in the early diagnosis of endometrial malignancies and its precursors. SUBSTANTIAL GRAN TS RECEIVE!) Grants have been received as follows: Mental Health Research Fund: Investigation into thc Incidence of Mental Retardation and In­ tellectual Impairment in Infants where Mothers had Low Oestriol Excretion in Pregnancy. Thc Apex Foundation for Research into Menial Retardation Ltd.: Thc Relationship of Blood Flow in Newborn Infanls lo Mental Retardation. 180 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

OPHTHALMOLOGY

INTRODUCTION ln 1980, major technical developments of instrumentation for inira-ocular microsurgery and for the pre- and post-operative assessment of visual function were completed. Detailed analyses of clinical results from various surgical systems were established, and studies of diabetic eye disease were extended lo examine the influence of newer methods for diabetes control on ocular complica­ tions. A survey of eye diseases in a South Pacific population was undertaken as part of an inter­ national study with Professor Zimmet's group, centred on diabetes. At the request of the editorial board of the Institute of Physics, London, an optical review was prepared in collaboration with J-M. Parel from the University of Miami.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A survey of ocular findings among Cook Islanders as part of a diabetic study with P. Zimmet's group — G. W. Crock, W. Hcriot. 2. A review of thc optics of the ophthalmoscope and related instruments, with J-M. Parol of University of Miami —G. W. Crock, L. J. Pcricic. 3. Initiation of long-term study on the influence of homo-monitoring of blood sugar on the natural history of diabetic retinopathy — G. VV. Crock, D. Heine, M. Horvat, J. Young, in association wilh P. Zimmel and M. Cowen. 4. Acyclovir Trial (Zovirax) in herpetic corneal ulceration — H. Maclean. 5. Computer assessment of cataracts—H. Maclean with C. J. Taylor, University of Manchester. 6. Completion of Catalin irial with computerized dala analysis —H. Maclean. 7. Comparison of single and linear optotypes in amblyopic eyes undergoing treatment —H. Maclean. 8. Pharmacological treatment of amblyopia— H. Maclean. 9. Visual assessment of children with learning difficulties —11. Maclean with M. Neale, Monash University. 10. Intra-ocular penetration of synthetic penicillins —H. Maclean. 11. Assessment of side effects of anti-glaucoma medication — H. Maclean. 12. Methods of visual assessment in multiply handicapped children at the Association for the Blind, Low Vision Clinic, Kooyong —H. Maclean in association wilh the Royal Victorian Institute for thc Blind. 13. Contrast sensitivity measurement. Development of an automated instrument for clinical trials —R. Newman. 14. Re-assessment of natural history, medical and surgical therapy of vitreous haemorrhage— D. Heine, G. W. Crock. 15. Clinical assessment of optical changes following corneal/corneo-sclcral sections with the Contact Lens Corneal Cutter and Oscillating Knife — G. W. Crock, D. Heine. 16. Review of koratomotry findings after corneal grafting by thc Contact Lens Corneal Culler system — G. W. Crock, D. Heine. 17. Review of clinical patterns and outcome of vitrectomy procedures —J. D. Cairns, D. Roydhouse, G. W. Crock, J. B. Heinze, D. Heine. 18. Pre-operative assessment of intra-ocular structures by Ultrasound in the presence of opaque media —R. Newman, D. Heine, D. Roydhouse, A. Sharma, G. W. Crock. 19. Measurement of axial length of eyes and compulation of inira-ocular lens power prc- operatively. — R. Newman, D. Heine, D. Roydhouse, G. W. Crock. 20. Tho structural characteristics of lens fibres at different stages of cataract formalion —G. VV. Crock, N. Carroll, in collaboralion with R. Auguslcyn, Biochemistry. 21. The ultrastructure of vitreous aspirates from vitreo-rctinal microsurgery — G. W. Crock, N. Carroll. 22. Cultures of retinoblastoma and ocular melanoma cell lines, and stimulation of cellular differentiation by the addition of various growth factors — N. Carroll, in collaboralion with I. Jack, Royal Children's Hospital. 23. The effect of topical eye preparations on corneal endothelium —N. Carroll, in collaboration with B. Collin, Optometry. 24. The effect of epidermal growih factor an neonate murine corneal endothelium- N. Carroll, in collaboration with St. Vincent's Hospital Microsurgery Unit. 25. Scanning microscopic evaluation of corneal endothelium, and pseudoexfoliative Icnsos-G. W. Crock, N. Carroll. 26. Transmission electron microscopic study of basement membrane changes in diabetic vessels-N. Carroll, with P. Taft. OPHTHALMOLOGY 181

PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. CROCK, G. W. — Vitreous Haemorrhage, in Current Ocular Therapy, ed. W. B. Saunders <£ Co. Philadelphia: 579-580 (1980). Articles 2. SMITH, R. L. and HENDERSON, P. N.-Actinomycotic canaliculus. Austral. J. Ophthal., 3: 75-79. (1980). 3. HORVAT, M., MACLEAN, H., GOLDBERG, L. and CROCK, G. W.-Diabetic retinopathy in pregnancy: A 12 year prospective survey, lirit. J. Ophthal., 64: 398-403 (1980). 4. MACLEAN, H. and TAYLOR, C. J.—Assessment of cortical cataract in vivo (Abstract). Proc. of Internat. Soc. for Eve Res., 1: 6 (1980). 5. CROCK, G. W., PERICIC, L. J., GOLDBERG, L., SCRIMGEOUR, J. and CARROLL, N. — Instrumentation and techniques for corneal microsurgery (Abstract). Medilex Digest Ophthalmology: 49-50 (1980). 6. MACLEAN, H. —Exacerbation of asthma by Timolol. Comment in Current Therapeutics, 21 (11): 87-88 (Nov. 1980). 7. PAREL, J-M., CROCK, G. W. and PERICIC, L. J.-Thc optics of the ophthalmoscope and related instruments. J. Phvsics E Science Instrumentation, 13: 1242-1253 (1980). 8. MACLEAN, H., CRISP, M. 'and McCAIG, J.-Specific eye conditions. Proc. Early In­ tervention Workshop, R.V.I.13.: 1-27 (1980). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: William Angliss (Vic.) Charitable Fund. Percy Baxter Charitable Trust. Collier Charitable Fund. Miss D. Edols. Thc George Hicks Foundation. OPSM Pty Ltd. Ophthalmic Research Institute of Australia. Reckitts Pharmaceutical Division. Sir A. E. Rowden White Bequest. Myra Stoicesco Charitable Trust. Mrs M. N. Taylor. 182 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

OTOLARYNGOLOGY

INTRODUCTION Studies are being carried out to determine the basic psychophysics, speech perception and biological research that will lead to the further development of hearing prostheses for the manage­ ment of patients with a profound or total hearing loss. The Deparment is examining the psychophysics and speech perception for different combina­ tions of multiple-electrode stimulation using a cochlear implant; speech perception and acoustic modelling studies for the development of hearing prostheses for the prelingually deaf; thc psychophysics and speech perception for patterns of skin stimulation; the electrophysiology of multiple-electrode stimulation; animal behavioural studies lo determine ihe population and distribution of nerve fibres required for saiisfaclory multiple-channel electrical stimulation, and thc value of the auditory brain-stem response in selecting patients likely to bench! from the im­ plant procedure and thc biological effects of electrical stimulation of the cochlea and auditory nerve. This research should result in improved speech-processing techniques for patients receiving multiple-channel cochlear implants, and provide the design requirements for the construction of the speech-processor. The research should also lead to the development of a system for helping pa­ tients communicate through patterns of skin stimulation.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Psychophysics of electrical stimulation ofthe human auditory nerve—Y. C. Tong, G. .M. Clark, L. F. A. Martin, R. C. Dowell. 2. Speech processing strategies for electrical stimulation of thc auditory nerve in patients with profound or total hearing loss —Y. C. Tong, G. M. Clark. 3. The histopathological evaluation of cochlear implants in experimental animals —G. M. Clark, B. C. Pyman, R. L. Webb, J. S. Ng. 4. Electrochemical and electrophysiological studies relating to cochlear implantation — R. C. Black, G. M. Clark, C. W. Wallers. 5. Electronic development of wearable speech processor for patients with profound or total hearing loss-J. F. Patrick, P. M. Seligman. .•6. Thc development of surgical techniques for multiple-channel cochlear implantation —G. M. Clark, B. C. Pyman, Q. F. Bailey, R. L. Webb. 7. The audiological evaluation of cochlear implant palients —L. F. A. Martin, G. M. Clark. 8. The development of rehabilitation techniques for cochlear implant patients —L. E. A. Martin. 9. Psychophysics of electical stimulation of cat auditory nerves— R. C. Black, G. M. Clark, A. C. Steel, D. A. Marks, C. W. Walters. 10. Auditory evoked potentials in response to frequency and amplitude modulated sounds —F. W. Rickards, G. M. Clark.

PUBLISHED WORKS Articles BLACK, R. C. and CLARK, G. M. — Differential Electrical Excitation of the Auditory Nerve. J. Acoust. Soc. Amer., 67: 868-874 (1980). TONG, Y. C. and CLARK, G. M.-Speech Comprehension with Multiple-Channel Elec­ trical Stimulation of Human Auditory Nerve Fibres. Proc. Aust. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, //: 201 P (1980). CLARK, G. M., PYMAN, B. C, and PAVILLARD, R. E.-A Protocol for thc Prevention of Infection in Cochlear Implant Surgery. J. Laryngol & Otol.. 94: 1377-1386 (1980). CLARK, G. M., BLACK, R. C, FORSTER, 1. C, PATRICK, J. F. and TONG, Y. C —Design Criteria of a Multiple-Electrode Cochlear Implant Hearing Prosthesis, in Sen­ sory Aids for the Hearing Impaired, eds. H. Levitt, J. M. Pickett and R. Houde, IEEE Press: 457-459 (1980). RICKARDS, F. W. and CLARK, G. M-Evoked Responses in Humans to Tones which arc Sinusoidally Amplitude Modulated. Proc. 10th Int. Congress on Acoustics, Sydnev, 2: B-4.6 (1980). BLACK, R. C. and CLARK, G. M. — Biophysical Design Considerations of the Cochlear Prosthesis. Proc. 10th Int. Congr. Acoust., Sydnev: (1980). TONG, Y. C, MILLAR, J. B., CLARK, G. M., MARTIN, L. F. A. and BUSBY, P. A.-Psychophysical Studies for a Multiple-Channel Cochlear lmplani. Proc. 10th Int. Cong. Acoust., Svdney: B-12.4 (1980). TONG, Y. C, MILLAR, J. B., CLARK, G. M., MARTIN, L. F. A. and BUSBY, P. OTOLARYNGOLOGY 183

A. —Speech Processing for a Multiple-Channel Cochlear Implant. Proc. 10th Int. Cong. Acoust.. Svdnev: A1-75 (1980). 9. McLEOD, G. A.. CLARK, G. M. and PENGILLEY, C. J.-A Speech Processing Strategy for an Electrotactilc Vocoder. Proc. 10th Int. Cong. Acoust.: B-13.5 (1980). 10. TONG, Y. C, CLARK, C. M. BUSBY, P. A., MILLAR, J. B. and MARTIN, L. E. A. - Speech-Processor Design for a Multiple-Channel Cochlear Implant. Aust. Linguist. Soc. 12ill Annual Conference: (1980). 11. TONG. Y. C, MILLAR, J. B., CLARK, G. M., MARTIN, L. F. A., BUSBY, P. A. and PATRICK, J. F. — Psychophysical and Speech Perception Studies in Two Multiple-Channel Cochlear Implant Paticnls. J. Larvngol. & Otol.. 94: 1241-1256 (1980). 12. TONG. Y. C, CLARK, G. M., SELIGMAN, P. M. and PATRICK, J. F.-Speech- Processing for a Multiple-Electrode Cochlear Implant Hearing Prosthesis. J. Acoust. Soc. Amer.. 68: 1897-1899 (1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Science 1. JOHNSON, P. M. — The development of a histopathological and physiological model. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BUSBY, P. A. — Single Formant Models for Speech Perception. 2. RICKARDS, F. W.-A Study in Auditory Evoked Potentials. BMed Sc Theses in Progress 3. MARKS, D. A. — Histopathological Effects of Electrical Stimulation of the Mature Cal Cochlea. 4. STEEL, A. C — Electrical Stimulation of Ihe Degenerated Auditory Nerve of the Cal. 5. WALTERS, C. W.-Further Advances in Multiple-Channel Electrical Stimulation of the Cat Cochlea. MSc Theses in Progress 6. MARSHALL, A. R. — Auditory brain stem response in high frequency cochlear hearing loss. 7. MARTIN, L. E. A. — An evaluation of speech communication for cochlear implant patients. 8. PAPAGELIS, A. N. — Effects of auditory stimulation on Ihe auditory nerve. 9. ROGERS, K. V. — The study of auditory brain stem responses in man, evoked by low fre­ quency. 10. SHEPHERD, R. K. — Electrical stimulation of the cal cochlea. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: National Health and Medical Research Council of Australia —The Development ofa Hearing Pro­ sthesis and Speech processor. Department of Productivity of Australian Government — Hearing Prosthesis project. The IT. &. L. Heclu Trust —Prelingual deafness studies. The George Hicks Foundation —Tactile vocoder. 184 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

PAEDIATRICS

INTRODUCTION The year 1980 was notable for the initiation of a number of new areas of genetic research within the Department of Paediatrics. The appointment of Dr. Carry Grown brought a new level of expertise in enzymology and intermediary metabolism, led to identification of a number of rare inborn errors of metabolism on which new research projects were initiated and allowed more com­ plete resolution of some research which had been in progress. Definition of the enzyme al fault in a disorder of valine metabolism which appears to lead to accumulation of a teratogenic chemical in the developing foetus was an exciting achievement. Dr. Cotton returned from sabbatical leave, bringing new methods of using mouse leratocarcinoma cell cultures for the study of cell differen­ tiation. Dr. Julian Mercer completed setting up the recombinant DNA techniques required in the group and was able to demonstrate a dramatic increase in the production of metallothionein messenger RNA in response to copper injection in rats. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. GENETICS 1. Use of mouse spleen cell hybridoma antibody production for study of phenylalanine hydroxylase-R. G. H. Cotton, K. H. Choo. 2. Definition of basic defect in phenylketonuria —R. G. H. Cotton, K. H. Choo, D. M. Danks. 3. Isolation of messenger RNA for phenylalanine hydroxylase —J. F. B. Mercer, K. H. Choo. 4. Development of antibody techniques for enzyme purification —R. G. H. Cotton, K. H. Choo. 5. Definition of enzyme defect in dihydropteridine reductase deficiency—F. Firgaira, R. G. H. Cotton, K. H. Choo. 6. Diagnosis of malignant hyperphenylalaninacmia (tetrahydrobioperin deficiency) —F. Firgaira, R. G. H. Cotton, D. M. Danks. 7. A new defect in human valine metabolism (0 hydroxy isobutyryl CoA acylase deficiency)-G. K. Brown, R. Truscott, R. G. H. Cotton, D. M. Danks. 8. A new defect in catabolism of dcoxyribose (deoxyribose-5-phosphate aldolase deficiency) —A. Chappcl, G. K. Brown, R. G. H. Cotton, D. M. Danks. 9. Precision two dimensional electrophoresis of cellular proteins — K. H. Choo, R. G. H. Cotton. 10. Copper metabolism in mottled mice and in Menkes' syndrome —J. Camakaris (Genetics), D. M. Danks. 11. Copper metabolism in human and mouse cells in culture —J. Camakaris, D. M. Danks. 12. Lysyl oxidase in mottled mice and Menkes' syndrome-P. Royce, D. M. Danks. 13. Superoxide dismutase and cytochrome oxidase in mottled mice and Menkes' syndrome —J. Camakaris, D. M. Danks. 14. Messenger RNA and DNA for metallothionein —J. F. B. Mercer, J. Camakaris. 15. Cellular copper metabolism in Wilson's disease —J. Camakaris, D. M. Danks. 16. A verbal-visual computer-based system of syndrome identification — D. B. Pitt, J. G. Rogers, D. M. Danks. 17. Evaluation of prenatal diagnosis —D. M. Danks, J. G. Rogers. 18. Cytogenetic studies in X-linked mental retardation —G. C. Webb, D. M. Danks. 19. Heritable variations in development of mouse embryonic carcinoma cells in culture — R. G. H. Cotton. B. STUDIES IN GROWTH AND NUTRITION 1. Studies on skeletal muscle cell growth (protein synthesis and hormonal influences) —J. Graystone, J. Field, D. B. Cheek. 2. Studies on zinc, copper and iron metabolism in Aboriginals with and without glucose in­ tolerance—D. B. Cheek, N. Francis, A. B. Holt. 3. Studies on renal compensatory growth in the presence and absence of certain hormones —J. Hutson, D. B. Cheek. 4. Studies on the fetal brain development of the macropod —A. B. Holt, D. B. Cheek. 5. Studies on factors or peptides which increase sulphate uptake into cartilage —N. McKern. C. STUDIES IN ORTHOPAEDIC SURGERY 1. Biochemical studies of collagen in osteogenesis imperfecta — W. G. Cole. D. STUDIES IN RENAL PHYSIOLOGY AND DISEASE 1. Relationship between renin and parathormone secretion — D. A. McCredie, H. R. Powell, E. Rotenberg. PAEDIATRICS 185

2. Renin responsiveness in renal failure —H. R. Powell, D. A. McCredie, E. Rotenberg. 3. Pathophysiological (actors and haemolylic-uraemic syndrome—H. R. Powell, D. A. Mc­ Credie, E. Rotenberg. 4. Frusemide treatment in acute nephritis —H. R. Powell, D. A. McCredie, E. Rotenberg. 5. Captopril in severe hypertension —I). A. McCredie, E. Rotenberg, S. Denholm. 6. 25 hydroxy cholecakifcrol levels in blood of infanls —E. Rotenberg, D. A. McCredie, H. R. Powell. E. NEUROLOGICAL AND NEUROMUSCULAR STUDIES 1. Histochemical and ultrastructural studies on skeletal muscle —X. Dennett. 2. Histochemical and ultrastructural studies in thc mottled mouse—X. Dennett. 3. Auditory-verbal information processing in epileptic children — A. Buffrey (Psychology), I.J. Hopkins. F. COMMUNITY PAEDIATRIC NEEDS 1. Epidemiological study of families with young children in a poor socio-economic, multi­ ethnic municipality —H. E. Williams, A. Carmichael. 2. Survey of community paediatric needs—H. E. Williams, A. Carmichael. G. NEONATAL PAEDIATRICS 1. Very low binh weight infant study — W. H. Kitchen, M. M. Ryan, A. Rickards, J. Astbury, J. V. Lisscnden, W. Russo, G. Keith. 2. Follow-up of babies born from pregnancies associated with low maternal excretion of oestriol —J. H. Drew. 3. Treatment of thc persistent fetal circulation syndrome in newborn infants with tolazolinc hydrochloride —J. B. Barson (Mercy Maternity), .1. H. Drew. 4. Studv of ihe effects on survival of immediate intubation at birth of infants with a birth weight of 501 to 1,500 g.-J. II. Drew. 5. Study of late-onset convulsions in newborn infants—H. J. Goldberg. 6. Analysis of infants wilh massive pulmonary haemorrhage—P. D. Sly. 7. Causative factors in newborn infants with air leaks—P. D. Sly. 8. Hyperviscosity studies in newborn infants —.1. H. Drew. 9. Ultrasonographic studies for intracranial haemorrhage —J. H. Drew.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. CHEEK, D. B. —Acrodvnia, in Brcnncmann's Practice of Paediatrics, Harper & Row, U.S.A.: (1980). 2. DANKS, D. M. — Genetic Considerations in A.I.D., in Artificial Insemination bv Donor, cd. C. Wood, Brown Prior Anderson: 94-102 (1980). 3. DANKS, D. M. — Diagnosis of metabolic diseases after birth: neonatal screening and thc in­ vestigation of symptomatic patients or babies al genetic risk, in Recent Advances in Paediatrics, ed. D. Hull, Pitman Press: 51-70 (1980). Articles 4. CAMAKARIS, .1., ACKI.AND, L. and DANKS, D. M. — Phenotypic expression of Wilson's disease in cultured fibroblasts, ./. Inker. Metab. Dis., 3: I55-15S (1980). 5. CAMAKARIS, J., DANKS, D. M., ACKI.AND, L., CARTWRIGHT, E., BORGER. P. and COTTON, R. G. IE —Altered copper metabolism in culiured cells from human Menkes' svndromc and mottled mouse mutants, liioche/n. Genetics. 18: 117-131 (1980). 6. CHOO, K. H., COTTON, R. G. H. and DANKS, D. M. — Double-labelling and high preci­ sion comparison of complex protein patterns on two dimensional polvacrylaminc gels. Analvt. Biochem., 103: 33-38 (1980). 7. CHOO, K. H., MYER, .1., COTTON, R. G. H., CAMAKARIS, J. and DANKS, D. M. — Isolation of a phenylalanine hydroxylase stimulating monoclonal antibody by tai myeloma-rat spleen cell fusion. Biochem. J. 191: 665-668 (1980). 8. COTTON, R. G. H., JENNINGS, 1. G., CHOO, K. H. and FOWLER, K.-Isolation and characterisation of a mveloma-spleen cell hybrid producing antibodv lo phelvlalunine hyrox- ylase. Biochem. J., 191: 777-783 (1980). 9. DANKS. D. M. and COTTON, R. G. H.-Early diagnosis of hyperphenylalaninacmia due io telrahvdrobiopyterin deficiency (Malignant hvperphenylalaninaemia). ./. of Pediat., 96: 844-845 (1980). 10. DANKS, D. M.—Copper deficiency in man. Ciba Foundation Symposium: 209-221 (19S0). 11. DREW, J. H. and ARROYAVE, C. M.-The complement system of the newborn infant. Biol. Neonate. 37: 209-217 (1980).

G 186 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

12. DREW, J. H. — Malformations: Incidence, aetiology, problems and possible association with infanls of multiple births. Med. J. Ausi., I: 49-50 (1980). 13. DRF.W, .1. H., SATCHWEI.L, C. A., CARMAN, P. G. and BEISCHER, N. A. — Prospec­ tive follow up of growth retarded infanls and of those from pregnancies complicated by low oestriol excretion. Singapore J. Obslel. Gvnaec., 2: 67-72 (1980). 14. HAIN, D., LEVERSHA, M., CAMPBELL, N., DANIEL, A., BARR, P. A. and ROGERS, .1. G.—The ascertainment and implications of an unbalanced translocation in the neonate. Familial 1:15 translocation. Ausi. Paediai. J., 16: 196-200 (1980). 15. HOLT, A. B., SPARGO, R. M., IVESON, J. B., FAULKNER, G. S. and CHEEK, D. B. — Serum and plasma zinc, copper and iron concentrations in Aboriginal communities of North Western Australia. Am. J. of Clin. Nutrition, 33: 119-132 (1980). 16. HOPKINS, I. J., EARKAS-BARGETON, E., and LARROCHE, J. C.-Neonatal neuronal necrosis: its relationship to the distribution and maturation of oxidative enzymes of newborn cerebral and cerebellar cortex. Earlv Human Devel.. 4: 51-60 (1980). 17. KITCHEN, W. H., McDOUGALL, A. B. and NAYLOR, P'. D.-A longitudinal study of very low birthweight infanls. HI: Distance growih at eight vears of age. Develop. Med. and Child Neurol., 22: 163-171 (1980). 18. KITCHEN, W. H., RYAN, M. M., RICKARDS, A., McDOUGALL, A. B., BILLSON, F. A., KEIR, E. H. and NAYLOR, F. D. —A longitudinal study of very low birthweight in­ fants. IV: An overview of performance at eight years of age. Develop. Med. and Child Neurol., 22: 172-188 (1980). 19. MANN, J. R., CAMAKARIS, J. and DANKS, D. M.-Copper metabolism in mottled mouse mutants —defective placental transfer of "Cu to foetal brindled (Mobr) mice. liiochem. J., 186: 629-631 (1980). 20. POWELL, H. R., McCREDIE, D. A. and ROTENBERG, E.-Response to frusemide in acute renal failure: Dissociation of renin and diuretic responses. Clin. Nephrol., 14: 55 (1980). 21. POWELL, H. R. and McCREDIE, D. A. — Essential fatty acid thcrapv in haemolytic- uraemic svndrome. Ausi. N.7.. .1. Med., 10: 483 (1980). 22. POWELL, H. R., McCREDIE, D. A., DENHOLM, S., ROTENBERG, E.-A simple method for studying intestinal absorption of calcium. Ausi. Paed. J., 16: 133 (1980). 23. ROGERS, J. G., ANDERSON, R. McD., CHOW, C. W., GILLAM, G. L. and MARKMAN, L. — Possible teratogenic effects of gold. Aust. Paediai. J., 16: 194-195(1980). 24. ROYCE, P. M., CAMAKARIS, J. and DANKS, D. M.-Reduced lysyl oxidase activity in skin fibroblasts from patients with Menkes' syndrome. Biochem. ./., 192: 579-586 (1980). 25. TRUSCOTT, R. .1. W., HALPERN, B., HAMMOND, J., HUNT, S., COTTON, R. G. H., HAAN, E. A. and DANKS, D. M. —Abnormal deoxyribose metabolites in thc urine of a child with a possible new inborn error of metabolism. Biomed. Mass Spec, 6: 453-459 (1979). 26. WESTERMAN, R. A., CHAN, H. S., Z1CCONE, S. P., SR1RATANA, D., DENNETT', X., and TATE, K. A. — Plasticity of motor reinnervation in the kitten, in Neural Growih and Differentiation, Proc. HI IBRO Svm. on Developmental Neurobiology, eds. E. Meisamc and M.A.B. Brazier, Raven Press, New York: 397-432 (1980). 27. WILLIAMS, H. E.—Social change and child health in China over 22 years —a personal view. Aust. Paediair. ./., 16: 161-165 (1980). 28. WILLIAMS, H. E.-Trends in paediatric care. Aust. Paediat. J., 16: 2-3 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Medicine 1. BROWN, T. C. K. — Tricyclic Antidepressant Overdosage in Children: Epidemiology, Prevention, and Ihe Management of Cardiovascular Complications. Master of Science 2. BIRNER, R. — Chromosomal Location of Genes Coding for Human Immunoglobulin Pro­ duction. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. COLE, W. G — Study of Collagen in Inherited Connective Tissue Diseases. 2. DUNLOP, M. — Study of ihe Effects of Phosphodiesterase Inhibition by Caffeine on Eoelal and Neonatal Maturation. 3. FINGER, J. — Utility of 2-dimensional Electrophoretic Analysis of tissue in the Study of In­ herited Diseases. 4. FT R E.R, M. A. — The Development of Class Specific Antibody Tests for the Management of A Her tic Disease in Childhood. 5. FIRGAIRA, F. — Studies on Human Dihydropteridine Reductase. PAEDIATRICS 187

6. HERD, S. —Investigation of the Basic Defect in Human Menkes' Syndrome and Mottled Mouse Mutants— Studies on Copper Binding Molecules. 1. .McKERN, N. — Studies on Somatomedin and Incorporation of Sulfate into Curtilage. 8. SHELTON, M. S. — The Effect of Serum Factors on the Microbicidal capacity of Human Granulocytes. MD Theses in Progress 9. CARMICHAEL, A. —Epidemiology of Health and Illness in Young Families in Brunswick. 10. SHEFFIELD, L. J. - (Title of thesis not known at present). MSc Theses in Progress 11. ALEXANDER, S. — Study of Altitudes to Food and Ealing Habits of Mothers of Obese and Normally Nourished Infants. 12. BLAKES', J. L. — Microbial Etiology of Neonatal Necrotising Enterocolitis. 13. HILL, M. — Erythrocyte Function in Type I Diabetes Mellitus: The Effects of Glucose and Glucose Metabolites. 14. MANN, J. — Copper Metabolism of Copper Deficient Mouse Mutants in Relationship to Menkes' Syndrome. 15. McCASKILL, A. C —Development and Investigation of an Animal Model of Asthma. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RKCKIVEl) Grants have been received as follows: NH & MRC. Royal Children's Hospital Research Foundation. Royal Children's Hospilal Research Grant Committee. Department of Aboriginal Affairs. Buckland Foundation. Australian Kidney Foundation. Apex Foundation for Research into Mental Retardation. Department of Health —Research and Development Grant. Mental Health Research Fund. 3AW Community Service Trust. 188 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

PATHOLOGY

INTRODUCTION Research has been in similar fields lo thai of previous years. Collaboralion with CSIRO, ollier medical departments, the Chemistry Department and the Denial School has been a feature of much of the work done. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Studies in acute inflammation —.1. V. Hurley. 2. Neuropathology—R. McD. Anderson. 3. Selective cell toxicity —G. S. Christie. 4. Carcinogenesis —A. G. Jabara, G. S. Christie. 5. Studies in liver pathology — P. S. Bhathal, R. N. Le Page. 6. Studies in renal pathology —J. D. Tange, T. J. Baxter, K. N. Ham. 7. Studies on connective (issues —K. N. Hani. 8. Effects of chronic zinc poisoning —1. S. Robinson. 9. Causes of maternal death —H. D. Atlwood. 10. Comparative pathology of arachnoid villi —H. D. Attwood. 11. Adrcno-hcpatic fusion in Dasyurid marsupials—H. D. Attwood. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. ATTWOOD, 1-1. D. and WOOLLEY, P. A. - Pancreatic pathologv in Dasyurid marsupials. J. Wildlife Dis., 16: 245 (1980). 2. ATTWOOD, H. D.-Rupert Willis. The Am. J. of Surg. Path.. 4: 511 (1980). 3. CALDER, I. C, YONG, A. C, WOODS, R. A., CROWE, C. A., HAM, K. N. and TANGE, J. I).—The Nephrotoxicity of />Aminophenol. II. The Elfccl of Metabolic In­ hibitors and Inducers. Chem. Biol. interactions, 27: 245-254 (1979). 4. DONSK1, P. K., FRANKLIN, J. D., HURLEY, J. V. and O'BRIEN, B. McC. — The Effects of Cooling on Experimental Free Flap Survival. Br. ./. plast. Surg., 33: 353-360 (1980). 5. FERNANDO, C. R., CALDER, I. C. and HAM, K. N.-The Mechanism ofthe Hcpatotox- icitv of Paracetamol (Acetaminophen) —Studies on Some Methyl Substituted Derivatives. J. Med. Chem.. 23: 1153-1158 (1980). 6. HART, S., CALDER, I., ROSS, B. and TANGE, J.-Renal Metabolism of Paracetamol: Studies in the Isolated Perfused Rat Kidncv. Clin. Sci., 58: 379-384 (1980). 7. HENDERSON, R. W., CHRISTIE, G. S., CLEZY, P. S. and LINEHAM, J. — Haematoporphyrin Diacetate: A Probe to Distinguish Malignant from Normal Tissue by Selective Fluorescence. Brit. ./. exp. Path., 61: 345-350 (1980). 8. HURLEY, J. V. — Inflammation —Microcirculatory Mechanisms and Control. Microvasc. Res., 19: 251-252 (1980). 9. JOHNSON, C. I., KAEGI, H. W. and MARTINELLO, P.-Modification of a Tissue Pro­ cessor to Allow Resin Processing. /1i/sv. J. Med. Lab. Sci.. I: 31-35 (1980). 10. JOHNSON, C. I. and HAM, K. N. — Immunopcroxidasc Technique for Electron Microscopy of Renal Biopsies. Micron. 11: 413-414 (1980). 11. JONAS, R. A., ERASER, R. N. and BHATHAL, P. S. - Perforated Leiomyosarcoma of Meckel's Diverticulum. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg.. 50: 301-303 (1980). 12. LABUC, G. E. and BLUNCK, J. M. - Inhibition of Chemical Carcinogenesis: Early In­ crease in Tissue Uptake and Macromolecular Binding of (JH)-labellcd Mclabolilcs of 1-lcpatocarcinogen 3-melhyl-4-dimeihylaminoazobcnzenc in Rat Liver In Vivo in thc Presence of thc Tumour Inhibitor Chloramphenicol. Biochem. Pharmac. 29: 2252-2255 (1980). 13. LEE, C. P.. CHRISTIE. G. S. and HEGARTY, M. P. —Antithyroid and Antiperoxidase Activity of Some Isomeric Dihydroxypyridines, in Thyroid Research VIII. Proc. of the Eighth International Thyroid Congress. Svdnev, Australia, 3-8 February, 1980: 137-140 (1980). 14. MATHIESON, F. and JOHNSON, C. - Rapid Processing in Electron Microscopy. Micron, 11: 483-484 (1980). 15. ROGERS, J. G., ANDERSON, R. McD., CHOW, C. W., GILLAM, G. L. and MARKMAN, L. — Possible Teratogenic Effects of Gold. Aust. Paed. J., 16: 194-195 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. CLARKE, B. E. — Crescent Formation in Glomerulonephritis. 2. LABUC, J. li. — Mechanism of Inhibition of Azo Dye Carcinogenesis by Chloramphenicol. PATHOLOGY 189

Master of Science 3. EMSLIE, K. R. — Paracetamol Metabolism in the Isolated Perfused Kidney. 4. SZTYNDA, T. — The Endo-endoihelial Layer of Normal and Injured Endothelium. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. GALL, J. A. M. — Aspects of the Ontogeny and Pathology of the biliary Tree. 2. GROSSMAN, I I. J. — Structure and Behaviour of Blood Vessels in Normal and Cirrhotic Livers. 3. JONES, G. M.— Aspecis of Vascular Permeability in Acute Injhnnmalion. 4. LAMBERT, R. W.-Proteinuria in the Isolated Perfused Rat Kidney. 5. PEREIRA, H. A. —Opsonic Factors in Serum. 6. PlLBEAM, C. M. — Portal Systemic Encephalopathy in Man and Experimental Animals. 1. SMAIL, M. C—Toxicity and Metabolism of Paracetamol. 8. SMITH, M. B. — Haematological Studies in Fetuses, Neonates and Subjects wilh Thalassaemia wilh Reference to Globin Production. MSc Theses in Progress 9. GIDDY, M. J. — Immunological Aspecis of Cervical Cancer with Special Reference to Cer­ vical Mucus. 10. H E N R Y, M. A. - Experimen lal A nalgesic Nephropathy. 11. HO, S. L. — Toxicity of Cunavanine to Cells in Culture. 12. THEAN, L. E. — Light and Electron Microscopy of Megakaryocyte Development in Mouse Bone Marrow Post 5-l'tuorouracil Treatment. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: Ami-Cancer Council of Victoria: Progesterone Inhibition of Experimental Breast Carcinogenesis: Sites nnd Mechanisms of Action. NH & MRC: Liver Cell Plasma Membrane Subtractions in Experimentally Induced Cholestasis. NH & MRC: Structure and Function of Normal and Injured Vascular Endothelium. Nicholas Pty. Ltd.: Renal Research. Rowden White Trust: Studies on Toxicity of Abnormal Amino Acids. 190 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

PATHOLOGY

AUSTIN HOSPITAL AND REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION This is a small Department closely integrated in its research and teaching activities with the hospital laboratories. During 19S0 (he main emphasis in research has been on the biology of the cancer cell especially a study of the mechanism of suppression of cancer in man using cell hybridization. Dr S. T. Chou is continuing his work on primary liver cancer and Dr .1. M. Xipell on renal and metabolic bone disease. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Mechanism of suppression of malignancy in man —C. J. Louis and T. Sztynda. 2. Primary liver cancer — S. T. Chou. 3. Metabolic bone disease —J. M. Xipell. 4. History of the Austin Hospital —E. W. Gault. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. CONNELLAN, J. M., BOWDEN, D. S., SMITH, I. and CASTALDI, P. A.-The use of antibodies to investigate thc role of Factor XI in Platelets. Thrombosis Res., 17: 225-238 (19S0). 2. COOPER, R. A., SAWYER, W. H., LESLIE, M. H., HILL, J. S., GILL, E. M. and WILEY, J. S. — Normal fluidity of red cell membranes in hereditary spherocyles. British J. of Haemalologv, 46: 299-301 (1980). 3. GAWLER, D. M., ROYLE, J. P. and TOSOL1N1, F. A.-Intractable nasal carriage of mcthccillin-resistant staphylococcus aureus. Med. J. Aust., I: 607-608 (1980). 4. GRIFFITHS, M. H., R1DELL, R. J. and XIPELL, J. M.-Malignant mesothelioma: a review of 35 cases with diagnosis and prognosis. Pathologv, 12: 591-603 (1980). 5. WILEY, J. S., -Haemolysis. Medicine (The Monthly Add-On Journal), 28: 1468-1473 (1980). 6. WILEY, .1. S., HUTCHINSON, .1. S., MENDELSOHN, F. A. O., and DOYLE, A. E.-In­ creased sodium permeability of erythrocytes in spomaneously hypertensive rats. Clin. <£ Ex­ per. Pharmacol. & Physiol., 7: 527-530 (1980). SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED The following grant has been received: NH & MRC: Study of the mechanism of suppression of malignancy. PHARMACOLOGY

INTRODUCTION The main thrusl of research in the Department in 1980 continued to be in the fields of (i) the pharmacological analysis of cardiovascular control mechanisms involving autonomic transmitters and autacoids, and (ii) thc pharmacological basis of drug dependence. Thc Department was host to a meeting of the Australasian Society of Clinical and Experimen­ tal Pharmacologists (ASCEP) in May. Members of thc Department contributed significantly to another meeting of ASCEP in Canberra in December, to meetings of the Australian Physiological and Pharmacological Society in Brisbane (May) and at Monash (August), and to a meeting of ihe Australian High Blood Pressure Research Council (December).

RESEARCH TOPIC'S IN PROGRESS 1. Receptor mechanisms associated with neurone terminals regulating neurotransmitter release-M. .1. Rand, M. W. McCulloch, D. F. Story, H. Majewski, 1. C. Medgett, H. Wong-Dusting. 2. Role of adrenaline in the development and maintenance of hypertension —M. J. Rand, M. W. McCulloch, D. F. Story, H. Majewski, L-H. Tung. 3. Mechanism of the antihypertensive action of hydralazine-M. J. Rand, H. Majewski, P. Songkittiguna. 4. Interaction of prazosin, clonidine and beta-adrenoreceptor antagonists with noradrenergic neuroeffector transmission —M. J. Rand, M. W. McCulloch, D. F. Story, H. Majewski, I. C. Medgett. 5. Interaction of nicotine and related drugs with transmitter release from noradrenergic nerves —M. J. Rand, M. W. McCulloch, C. Sarantos-Laska. 6. Release of noradrenaline by isoprenaline in myocardial tissue —M. .1. Rand, M. W. Mc­ Culloch, C. Sarantos-Laska. 7. Effects of drugs on the conversion of dopamine to noradrenaline in the atria of conscious rats-M. W. McCulloch, H. Majewski, E. Badoer. 8. Neurochemical mechanisms of opioids and cannabinoids — M. R. Fennessy, S. .1. Lewis, A. J. M. Verberne. 9. Pharmacological characterization of endogenous opioids —M. R. Fennessy, M. J. Quinn. 10. Physiological mechanisms involved in the development and maintenance of drug dependence—M. R. Fennessy. 11. The role of anti-asthmatic drugs in experimental anaphylaxis —M. R. Fennessy. 12. The role of polyamines in experimental hypertension —M. R. Fennessy, S. J. Lewis. 13. Mechanisms of blood pressure control: renin-angiotensin system and hypercapnia —J. Staszewska-Barczak. 14. Cardiac chcmoreflexcs and central adrenergic mechanisms —J. Staszewska-Barczak. 15. Prostaglandins and hyperalgesia —J. Staszewska-Barczak. 16. Pharmacology of vasodilator mechanisms —W. .1. Lang, O. Woodman, G. Eddie. 17. Behavioural aspects of drug dependency —W. J. Lang, A. A. Latilf. 18. Effects of sympathomimetic amines on skeletal muscle contractions and cyclic nucleotide levels —M. W. Nott, Z. Merican. 19. Involvement of cyclic nucleotides in neuronal and vascular responses to antihypertensive agents —M. W. Nott, Z. Merican, I. P. Alade. 20. Pharmacodynamics of clinically used adrenoceptor antagonists and isoquinoline derivatives —M. W. Nott, M. Sunbhanich. 21. Receptor mechanisms involved in adrenal medullary catecholamine secretion —M. J. Rand, D. F. Story, A. R. Collctt. 22. Pharmacokinetic studies of antimicrobial agents —M. L. Mashford, R. W. Bury. 23. The impact of liver disease on drug handling —M. L. Mashford, R. W. Bury, K. Breen. 24. Drug use in the community — M. L. Mashford, M. B. Robertson.

PUBLISHED WORK Book I. BOWMAN, W. C. & RAND, M. J. -Textbook of Pharmacology, 2nd ed. Blackwell Scien­ tific Publications, Oxford (1980). Chapters of Books 1. FENNESSY, M. R. - Experimental evaluation of analgesics in mice and rats, in Problems in Pain, ed. C. Peck and M. Wallace, Pergamon Press, Sydney: 24-33 (1980). 2. RAND, M. J., McCULLOCH, M. W. and STORY, D. F.-Catecholamine receptors on nerve terminals, in Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology, Vol 54/1, ed. L. Szekeres, Springer-Verlag, Berlin (1980). 192 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Articles 1. BADOER, E., MAJEWSKI, FL, McCULLOCH; M. W. and RAND, M. J.-Effect of ac- cute and chronic administration of hydralazine on the conversion of dopamine to nora­ drenaline in rats. Proc. Ansl. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: H2P (I980). 2. BURY, R. W. and MASHFORD, M. L. - Misleading plasma digoxin results. Med. J. Ausi.. 4: 218-220 (1980). 3. COLLETT, A. R. and STORY, D. F. — An isolated perfused adrenal preparation for study­ ing adrenal catecholamine secretion. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol., 7: 667-668 (1980). 4. CZARNY, D., PR1CHARD, P. J., FENNESSY, M. R. and LEWIS, S. J.-Anaphylactoid reaction to 50% solution of dextrose. Med. J. Ausi.. 2: 255-258 (1980). 5. HOPE, W., MAJEWSKI, H., McCULLOCH, M. W., RAND, M. J. and STORY, D. F. — Evidence for a modulatory role of dopamine in sympathetic transmission. Circ. Pes., 46 (Suppl.): 77-79 (1980). 6. HOROWITZ, J. D., HOWES, L. C, CHRISTOPHIDIS, N., LANG, W. J., FENNESSY, M. R., RAND, M. .1. and LOUIS, W. J. - Hypertensive responses induced by phenyl­ propanolamine in anorectic and decongestant preparations. Lancet (i): 60-61 (1980). 7. HOROWITZ, J. D. and MASI1FORD, M. L. - Purification of a peptide with venoconstric- tor and vasodepressor activity, from Cohn Fraction 111-0 of human plasma protein. Vox Sang., 38: 259-265 (1980). 8. HOROWITZ, .1. D. and MASHFORD, M. L. — Vcnoconstrictor activity of some precursor fractions of stable plasma protein solution. Vox Sang., 38: 266-271 (1980). 9. IWANOV, V., STASZEWSKA-BARCZAK, J. and DUSTING, G. J.-Thc effect of ven­ tilatory gas composition on arachidonic acid metabolism in isolated perfused guinea-pig lungs. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol., 7: 667 (1980). 10. KRANZ, K., CADDY, D. J., WILLIAMS, A. M. and GAY, WANSOON-Myasthenic syn­ drome: effects of choline, plasmapheresis and tests for circulating factor. J. Neurol. Neurosurg. & Psychiat.. 43 (6): 483-488 (1980). 11. LANG, W. J. — Factors influencing the self-administration of nicotine and other drugs by- rats. Proc Aust. Physiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 33 P(1980). 12. LATIFF, A. A., SMITH, L. A. and LANG, W. J.-Effects of changing dosage and urinary pH in rats self-administering nicotine on a food delivery schedule. Pharmac Biochem. and Behaviour. 13: 209-213 (1980). 13. LEWIS, S. J. and FENNESSY, M. R. — Involvement of histamine in thc initial pressor phase of acute clonidine administration. Proc. Ausi. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, 11: 129 P(1980). 14. LEWIS, S. J., FENNESSY, M. R., LASKA, F. J. and TAYLOR, D. A.-A modified method for the isolation and determination of brain histamine using Bio-Rex 70. Agents and Actions. 10: 197-206 (1980). 15. LEWIS, S. J., FENNESSY, M. R. and TAYLOR, D. A.-A possible histaminergic compo­ nent of the clonidine withdrawal syndrome in the rat. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol., 7: 655 (1980). 16. MAJEWSKI, H., McCULLOCH, M. W., RAND, M. J. and STORY, D. F.-Effect of adrenaline on transmitter noradrenaline release. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol.. 7: 665-666 (1980). 17. MAJEWSKI, H., TUNG, L-H. and RAND, M. J.-Effects of chronic administration of adrenaline on rat blood pressure. Proc Ausi. Physiol. Pharmacol. Soc, 11: 204 P (1980). 18. MASHFORD, M. L., ROBERTSON, M. B. and STEWART, .1. M.-Usc of prophylactic antibiotics in Surgerv. Med. J. Ausi., I: 532-534 (1980). 19. MEDGETT, I. C, and McCULLOCH, M. W.- Receptor sites of action ofclonidine: effects of clonidine and three structural isomers on prejunctional and postjunctional

^-adrenoceptors and histamine H2-rcccptors in guinea-pig isolated cardiovascular tissues. J. Pharm. Pharmacol.. 32: 137-138 (1980). 20. MEDGETT, I. C, McCULLOCH, M. W., RAND, M. J. and STORY, D. F. - Facilitation of sympathetic transmission by prejunctional ^-adrenoceptors in cardiac and vascular tissues. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol., 7: 573 (1980). 21. McCULLOCH, M. W., MEDGETT, 1. C, RAND, M. J. and STORY, D. E.-Structure- activity relationship of imidazolidine derivatives related to clonidine at histamine

H2-rcceptors in guinea-pig isolated atria. Br. J. Pharmacol., 69: 397 (1980). 22. McCULLOCH, M. W., RAND, M. J. and STORY, D. F. Thc development of the prejunc­ tional receptor hypothesis. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7: 639 (1980). 23. NOTT, M. W. and MERICAN, Z.-Bovine splenic nerve segment as a model for studying involvement of cyclic nucleotides in neuronal release of noradrenaline. Clin. Exp. Phar­ macol. Phvsiol., 7: 664 (1980). 24. RAND, M. J., MAJEWSKI, H., MEDGETT, I. C, McCULLOCH, M. W. and STORY, D. F.— Prejunctional receptors modulating autonomic neuroeffector transmission. Circ. Pes., 46 (Suppl.): 70-76 (1980). 25. SARANTOS-LASKA, C, MAJEWSKI, H., McCULLOCH, M. W. and RAND, M. J. PHARMACOLOGY 193

— Mechanism of noradrenaline release from rabbi! atria induced bv nicotinic agonists. Arch, int. I'harmacodvn. Ther.. 247: 294-305 (1980). 26. SARANTOS-LASKA, C, McCULLOCH, M. W. and RAND, M. .1. - Facilitatory effect or nicotine on adrenergic neuroeffector transmission in the isolated car arterv of the rabbit. J. Pharm. Pharmacol.. 32: 92-96 (1980). 27. SARANTOS-LASKA, C, McCULLOCH, M. W., STORY. D. F. and RAND, M. J. - li (feels of tetrodotoxin on release of noradrenaline bv nicotine in rabbit alria. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol.. 7: 666 (1980). 28. SHAW, R. G., MASHFORD, M. L. and DESMOND, P. V.-Cardiac arrest after in­ travenous injection of cimetidine. Med. J. Ausi.. 2: 629-630 (1980). 29. SMITH. L. A. and LANG, W. J. —Changes occurring in self-administration of nicotine by rats over a 28-dav period. Pharmacol. Biochem. & Behaviour. 13: 215-220 (1980). 30. SONGKITT1GUNA, P., MAJEWSKI, H. and RAND, M. J. - Inhibition by hydralazine of the conversion of dopamine to noradrenaline in rat atria in vitro and in vivo. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol. 7: 509 (1980). 31. STASZEWSKA-BARCZAK, J., BENTLEY, G. A. and COPELAND, I. W.-The effects of morphine and naloxone on cardiovascular reflexes evoked from the cpicardium. Proc. Ausi. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc. II: 6 P (19S0). 32. STASZEWSKA-BARCZAK, J., DUSTING, G. J., MAY, D. E. and NOLAN, P. N. —lilfect of prostacyclin on the sympathetic and vagally-mcdiatcd chcmorcflexes elicited from the heart wilh bradvkinin and nicotine. Proc Ausi. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 194 P 0980). 33. STORY, D. E. and MEDGETT, 1. C. — Conditions of operation of positive and negative feedback regulation or transmitter noradrenaline release. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol., 7: 640 (1980). 34. TAYLOR, D. A. and FENNESSY, M. R.-Physical dependence on A'-tetrahydro­ cannabinol in rats. Proc. Ausi. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 20-23 P (1980). 35. TAYLOR. D. A., LEWIS, S. J. and FENNESSY, M. R.-Clonidine withdrawal syndrome and endogenous biogenic amines. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol.. 7: 655-656 (1980). 36. TUNG, L-H., MAJEWSKI, H. and RAND, M. J.-Thc late of intravenously administered adrenaline in conscious rats. Proc. Aust. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 113 P (1980). 37. VERBERNE, A. J. M., TAYLOR, D. A. and FENNESSY, M. R. - Withdrawal-like behaviour induced by inhibitors of biogenic amine reuptake in rats treated chronically with A''-ictrahvdrocannabinol. Psvchopharmucologv, 68: 261-267 (1980). 38. VERBERNE, A. J. M., TAYLOR, D. A., LEWIS, S. J. and FENNESSY, M. R. — Relation­ ship between A''-tetrahydrocannabinol (A'-THC) withdrawal behaviour and brain regional levels of histamine (HA) in the rat. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7: 663 (1980). 39. WOODMAN, O. L. and LANG, W. J. — Dopamine-induced vasodilatation in the isolated perfused rat kidncv. Arch. Int. Pharmacotlvn. Ther., 243: 228-235 (1980). 40. WOODMAN, O. L., MEDGETT, 1. C, LANG, W. J. and RAND, M. J. — Effects of 2-(3,4-dihvdroxyphcnvlimino)-imidazolidine (DPI) on peripheral catecholamine receptors. Proc. Aust. Phvsiol. 'Pharmacol. Soc. II: 71 P (1980). 41. WOODMAN, O. L., RECH'fMAN, M. P. and LANG, W. J.-A comparison of the response to sonic dopamine receptor agonists and antagonists.in thc isolated perfused rat kidney. Proc Aust. Pharmacol. Physiol. Soc, II: 127 P (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. EINNIN, B. — Pharmacology of melatonin. 2. SIN, Y-O. — Prostaglandin £, and cutaneous afferent activities. 3. SONGKITTIGUNA, P.-Studies on hydralazine.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. COLE, H. — Studies on the mechanism of action of prazosin. 2. EDDIE, G. — Actions of histamine in circulatory control. 3. LATIFF, A. — Conditional factors in administration of nicotine and related alkaloids. 4. LEWIS. S. — Drugs of dependence and histaininergic mechanisms. 5. MASON, R. - Mechanism of action of steroid hormones in the circulation. 6. MERICAN, '/.. — Involvement of cyclic nucleotides in nerve und muscle function. 7. QUINN, M. - Pharmacological characterization of endogenous opiate-like peptides. 8. SARANTOS-LASKA, C — Effects of nicotinic agonists and isoprenaline on adrenergic mechanisms. 9. SUNBHANICH, M.— The pharmacodynamics of heta-adrenoceptor agonists and an­ tagonists and other studies. 194 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

10. TUNG, L-H. — Transmitter dynamics in relation to antihypertensive activity. 11. VERBERNE, A.-Neuropharmacology of /^-tetrahydrocannabinol. 12. WONG-DUSTING, H. — Studies on non-adrenergic, non-cholinergic autonomic nerves. 13. WOODMAN, O. —Studies on the cardiovascular actions oj dopamine. MSc Theses in Progress 14. ALADE, [. — Studies on neuronal release of noradrenaline. 15. ONLEY, J. — Toxicology of food additives. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: NHF: Modulation of cardiac and vasomotor sympathetic transmission. NH & MRC: Effects of levodopa on skeletal muscle contractions. NH & MRC: Mechanisms of blood pressure control. NH & MRC: Physiological mechanisms involved in thc regulation of peripheral autonomic transmitter release. NH & MRC: The role of cerebral and peripheral polyamines in normotensive, genetically hypertensive and experimentally hypertensive rats. PHYSIOLOGY

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRKSS 1. Identification of textured surfaces with the fingerpads: Representation within the digital nerve discharge of thc spatial features of thc surfaces—1. Darian-Smith, K. O. Johnson, A. W. Goodwin, G. Lamb. 2. Psychophysical studies of texture discrimination with thc fingerpads —I. Darian-Smith, A. W. Goodwin, G. Lamb, J. Morley, G. Casper. 3. Coding of information about textured surfaces in the cerebral cortex of Ihe alert, discriminating monkey —I. Darian-Smith, A. W. Goodwin, M. Sugiiani, K. Karita, J. Heywood. 4. Coding of information about changes in skin temperature in the primate digital nerve—I. Darian-Smith, K. O. Johnson, P. Kenins. 5. Neural representation of patterned indenting stimuli in digital nerve fibre populations— K. O. Johnson, J. R. Phillips. 6. Cutaneous mechanoreceptor transduction —K. O. Johnson, A. VV. Freeman. 7. Discharge properties of spinal gamma motoncurones-R. li. Kemm. 8. Neurogenic plasma extravasation in the skin: Sensory nerves responsible and substance P in­ volvement. — P. Kenins. 9. Thc effect of bezatibratc on the accumulation of cholesterol and cholesterol ester in cells in tissue culture —A. J. Day, K. Hudson. 10. Thc cll'ecl of prostaglandins on cholesterol ester metabolism in cells in tissue culture —A. J. Day, P. Singh, F. A. Shamgar. 11. The effect of changes in membrane composition on the uptake of lipoprotein by cells in tissue culture —A. .1. Day, S. Mojumder, K. Hudson, with W. H. Sawyer (Biochemistry). 12. Studies of amniotic fluid regulation and in vitro amnion permeability — E. M. Wintour. B.E. I.ingwood. 13. Control of ovine fetal adrenal. Pituitary-adrenal function in intact and adrenalectomised fetuses —li. M. Wintour, D. P. Hcnnessy. 14. Regulation and function of antidiuretic hormone in ovine fetus — E. M. Wintour, D. P. Hcn­ nessy. 15. Regulation of ovine placental lactogen production in pregnant sheep —E. M. Wintour, D. P. I lennessy. 16. Catecholamines in intact and adrenalectomised ovine fetuses —E. M. Wintour, D. P. Hcn­ nessy. 17. Chylomicron catabolism in rats —T. G. Redgrave, L. Tillcy, F. Jeff cry. 18. Regulation of cholesterol biosynthesis-T. G. Redgrave, I.. Tillcy, S. Malcolm. 19. Size distributions of chylomicron suspensions —S. Bhattacharya, T. G. Redgrave. 20. Molecular characteristics of human low-density lipoproteins-N. Vakakis, T. G. Redgrave. 21. Localization of dopaminergic neurones in the sympathetic nervous system —C. Bell. 22. Retrograde labelling of sympathetic neurones supplying the kidney —C. Bell, E. M. McLachlan (Physiology, Monash). 23. Ultrastructural investigation ofthe aminergic innervation of the kidney —C. Bell, G. B. Ryan. (Anatomy). 24. Abnormalities of thc sympathetic nervous system in genetically hypertensive rats —C. Bell. 25. Presynaptic modulation of adrenergic neuromuscular transmission —C. Bell. 26. Patterns of cardiovascular response during sexual arousal in males with organic and nonorganic impotence —C. Bell, J. Bancroft (MRC Reproductive Biology Unit, Edinburgh). 27. Release of dopamine from andrciicrgic nerve terminals —C. Bell, J. S. Gillespie (Phar­ macology, Cilasgow U.). 28. Relationship of lubuloalomerular feed back lo salt and water homeostasis —J. M. Davis, L. L. Walker. 29. Renal actions of glucagon-J. M. Davis, L. L. Walker, R. Naughton, S. L. Skinner. 30. Circulatorv effects of gastrointestinal tract peptides —J. M. Davis, J. D. Tange (Pathology). I.. L. Walker. 31. Effects of palminophcnol on renal function —J. M. Davis, J. D. Tange (Pathologv), I.. 1.. Walker. 32. Isolation and function of inactive renin —S. L. Skinner. 33. Storage and secretion of renin using isolated glomeruli —S. L. Skinner. 34. Phvsioloeical correlates of physical fitness —M. I I. D. Chennells, I. Gillam, F. Holzer, R. Telford. 35. Studies on the basal ganglia (i) Activity of globus pallidus neurones in experimental motor dysfunction, (ii) Activity of substantia nigra neurones in experimental motor dysfunction, (iii) Neural mechanisms of the subthalamic nucleus and its connections —J. S. McKenzie. A. P. Benclrups, W. Kunze 195 196 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

PUBLISHED VVOKK Articles 1. BELL, C. — EtVccis of dopamine on adrenergic neuromuscular transmission in the guinea-pig vas deferens, lirit. ./. Pharmacol.. 63: 505 (1980). 2. BLAIR, N. I .. YOUKER, J. E.. MeDONALD, I.G., TELFORD, R. and JELlNEK, V. M. — Eehoeardiogaphie assessment of cardiac chamber si/e and left ventricular function in acrobicallv trained athletes. Aust. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 540-547 (1980). 3. BOOTH, D., CHENNELLS, M., JONES, D. and PRICE, A.— Assessment of abdominal muscle exercises in non-pregnant, pregnant and postpartum subjects, using elec­ tromyography. Ami. ./. Physiolher., 26: 177-197 (1980). 4. DARIAN-SMITH, I. —Thcrmoreceplive fibres innervating the palm and fingers: Differen­ tiating small changes in skin temperature. International Union of Physiological Sciences Meeting, Budapest, 1980. Symposium on Thermorecepiion: 11 pp. (1980). 5. DARlAN-SMl'l 1-1, 1., DAVIDSON, 1. AND JOHNSON, K. O. - Peripheral neural representation of thc two spatial dimensions of a textured surface moving across tbe monkey's finger pad. ./. Physiol., 309: 135-146 (19S0). 6. DARIAN-SMITH, I. and KENINS, P. - Innervation density of mechanoreceptive fibres supplying glabrous skin of the monkey's index finger. J. Physiol.. 309: 147-155 (1980). 7. DARIAN-SMITH, I. and OKE, L. E. — Peripheral neural representation of the spatial fre­ quency of a grating moving at different velocities across the monkey's finger pad. J. Phvsiol.. 309: I 17-133 (1980). 8. JOHNSON, K. 0.—Sensory discrimination: Decision process. J. Neurophysiol., 43: 1771-1792 (1980). 9. JOHNSON, K. O. —Sensors discrimination: Neural processes preceding discrimination deci­ sion. J. Neurophysiol.. 43: 1793-1X15 (1980). 10. KEMM, R. E. and WESTBURY, D. R. — Some implications of the properties of spinal gam­ ma motoneurones. Proc. clin. Neuropilvsiol., 3: 28-32 (1980). 11. LINGWOOD, B. E., HARDY, K. J., LONG, J. G., McPHEE, M. and WINTOUR, E. M. — Amniotic fluid volume and composition following experimental manipulations in sheep. Obstetrics and Gynecology, 56: 451-458 (1980). 12. SCllOITFEL, R. E., ANDERSON, S. D., GILLAM, 1. and LINDSAY, D. A.-Multiple exercise and histamine challenge in asthmatic patients. Thorax, 35: 164-170 (1980). 13. TELFORD, R. D. —Methods for measuring specific performance profiles of cyclists, rowers and kyak-canocists. Spons Coach: Ausi. Coaching J., 4 (I): 5-9 (1980). 14. WINTOUR, E. M., COGHLAN, J. P., HARDY', K. J., LINGWOOD, B. E., RAYNER, M. and SCOGGINS, B. A. S. — Placental Transfer of Aldosterone in the sheep. J. oj En­ docrinology, 86: 305-310(1980). 15. WINTOUR, E. ,M., COGHLAN, J. P., HARDY, K. .1., HENNESSY, D. P., LINGWOOD, B. E., and SCOGGINS, B. A.—Adrenal corticosteroids and immunoreaclive ACTH in chronically cannulated ovine foetuses with bilateral adrenalectomy. Acta Endocrinologica, 95: 546-550 (1980). 16. WUNDF.RI.1CH, P., BRUNNER, F.. DAVIS, J. M., HABERLE, D. A., THOLEN, H. and TH1EL, G. — Activation of uibuloglomerular feedback in rat nephrons by sera from pa­ tients wilh acute renal failure. Kidney International. 17: 497-506 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Science 1. BELL, C— Autonomic Neuromuscular Control and Related Topics. Collected published works (1968-1979).

Doctor of Philosophy 2. EREEMAN, A. W. — The response of mechano-receptors in the hairless skin of primates to punctate and textural mechanical stimulation. 3. PHILLIPS, J. R. — Tactile spatial resolution: A psychophysical and neurophysiological study. 4. TELFORD, R. D. — Cardiorespiratory properties of trained and untrained subjects and the specificity of performance evaluation. Master of Science 5. BH ATT ACHARYA, S. — The frequency distribution of chylomicron particle volumes. 6. GILLAM, I. H.— 77ie variability of bronchoconstriction in repealed and prolonged lesis in asthmatics. 7. STUBBS, A. J. M. —The glycoprotein nature of human renin. PHYSIOLOGY 197

THESES IN PROGRESS lJliD Theses in I'rogress 1. BENDRUPS, A. P. — Caudate nucleus output mechanisms: Influences on the medial thalamus. 2. HENNESSY, D. - Regulation of the Ovine Petal Adrenal. 3. HUDSON, K. — Lipid metabolism in the arterial wall model cell systems and the effect oj unti-aiherogenic agents. 4. LAMB, G. D.— Tactile discrimination of textured surfaces: peripheral neural coding. 5. LINGWOOD, B. li.-Control of Amniotic Thud. 6. VAKAKIS. N. — I'leierogeneiiy of human low-density lipoproteins. MSc Theses in Progress 7. BROWN, A. — The influence of the embryo on the re/ease of prostaglandin /•' by the ovine uterus. 8. FISHER, D. — Recurrent effects in moioneurones. 9. HOl .ZER, V. — Evaluation of an exercise training programme in cystic fibrosis. 10. KUNZE, W. A. — 77«' study of the lhalamic-hascd ganglia neural interactions. 11. MORLEY, J. — .4 psychophysical study on the laclile perception of textured surfaces. 12. MULLER, B. — Ovarian studies in domestic animals. BMedSc Thesis in Progress 13. FOOTE, S. — Purification of submaxillary renin and direct radioimmunoassay of mouse renin. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: NH & MRC: Discharge properties of gamma-moioneuroncs. NH & MRC: Interactions between chylomicron remnants and the liver. Ni l & MRC: Role of prostaglandins in atherogenesis. NH & MRC: Relationship of Uibuloglomerular feedback to salt and water homeostasis. NH & MRC: Touch in Ihe primate hand: Underlying sensory processes in the cerebral cortex. NHF: Regulation of cholesterol metabolism. French Government Scientific Scholarship: Isolation of inactive renin. Australian Neurological Foundation: Tactile spalial discrimination with thc fingertips: Peripheral and cortical neural responses. Ian Poller Foundation: Tactile spatial discrimination with the fingertips: Peripheral and conical neural responses. Van Cleel' Foundation: Tactile spalial discrimination wilh ihc fingertips: Peripheral and cortical neural responses. 198 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

HOWARD FLOREY INSTITUTE OF EXPERIMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY AND MEDICINE

INTRODUCTION During 1980 research has continued in each of thc topic areas. New initiatives have been possible following the opening of the molecular biology facility and the development of hybridiza­ tion histochemistry, a method for localization of active hormone-producing genes within tissue samples, is a major advance. Thc facility has allowed further research to be undertaken in the cloning for various hormone-producing genes, and the structural gene for relaxin has been se­ quenced following from thc amino acid sequence for rat relaxin. Our research into fluid and electrolyte metabolism has continued with thc newly-developed surgical preparation of sheep with a renal autotransplanl providing a novel and powerful prepara­ tion for certain aspects of these studies; in particular for the study of direct renal effects of hor­ mones and ions. Thc central nervous control of fluid and electrolyte balance has been examined in sheep in which discrete areas of the hypothalamus have been destroyed. Other studies have con­ centrated on thc relationship between CSF sodium concentration (altered by infusion of hyper­ tonic mannitol or saline solutions) and salt balance, and have shown for the first time a rapid in­ duction of sail appetite which normally has a very slow onset in sheep. The mechanism hy which blood pressure is elevated following exposure to ACTH or adrenal steroids has been examined and it has been shown that the brain areas involved in salt and fluid homeostasis play no part in blood pressure control in steroid hypertension. Renal artery constriction-hypertension has been observed in renal autotransplanl sheep and recent studies have shown the importance of renal renin release in the acute onset of this hypertension. In addition to Institute grants for salaries, running expenses and equipment, the fitting out and equipment for the molecular biology laboratory has been made possible during 1979 and 1980 by grants in aid from many donors and in particular from the Potter Foundation and the Myer Family Trusts.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Control of aldosterone secretion —A. Butkus, J. P. Coghlan, D. A. Denton, J. G. McDougall, B. A. Scoggins. 2. Steroid synthesis by isolated adrenal cells-A. Butkus, J. P. Coghlan, J. G. McDougall, B. A. Scoggins. 3. Foetal physiology —K. J. Hardy, B. A. Scoggins. E. M. Wintour. 4. The metabolism of angiotensin —J. P. Coghlan, D. T. W. Fei, B. A. Scoggins, G. W. Tregear. 5. Regulation of antidiuretic hormone and thc renal excretion of sodium and water during changes in body fluid balance — D. A. Denton, L. G. Lekscll, M. J. KcKinley, R. S. Weis~ ingcr. 6. Hypothalamic control of sail and water balance —D. A. Denton, L. G. Lekscll, M. J. McKinley, R. S. Wcisinger. 7 . Factors influencing salt appetite in sodium deficiency —D. A. Denton, L. G. Lekscll, M. J. McKinley, J. F. Nelson, E. Tarjan, R. S. Weisinger. 8. Hormonal control of salt appetite during pregnancy and lactation —D. A. Denton, J. F. Nelson, E. Tarjan. 9. Phosphate appetite in phosphorous deficiency—D. A. Denton, J. F. Nelson. 10. Deficiencies in nutrient factors including trace elements in cattle —J. R. Blair-West, D. A. Denton. 11. The control of elcctrolvtc secretion in parotid saliva —J. R. Blair-West, J. F. Nelson, R. D. Wright. 12. Renal and adrenal morphology in salt deficiency —A. Butkus, J. P. Coghlan, P. Hill, J. G. McDougall, G. B. Ryan, B. A. Scoggins. 13. Investigation of peripolar cells —A. Butkus, J. P. Coghlan, J. Pcnschow, G. D. Ryan. 14. Characteristics of male infertility—H. W. G. Baker, B. Hudson. 15. Purification of inhibin-H. W. G. Baker, L. W. Eddie, R. E. Higginson, B. Hudson, H. D. Niall. 16. Steroid sex hormones in health and disease— B. Hudson, A. Mirovics. 17. The mechanism of ACTH and adrenal hypertension —J. P. Coghlan, D. A. Demon, B. A. Scoggins, J. A. Whitworth. IS. Renal hypertension —J. P. Coghlan, D. A. Denton, J. G. McDougall, B. A. Scoggins, R. D. Wright. HOWARD FLOREY INSTITUTE 199

19. Synthesis of human chorionic gonadotrophin peptides for the study of immunological regulation of human fertility — H. D. Niall, G. W. Tregear. 20. Isolation and sequence determination of relaxin — M. John, H. D. Niall, J. R. Walsh. 21. Synthesis of porcine relaxin and its structural analogues—Du Y-C., B. E. Kemp, D. B. Scanlon, G. W. Tregear. 22. Studies on gene coding for relaxin —.1. D. Haley, P. J. Hudson, H. D. Niall. 23. Hybridization histochemistry-J. P. Coghlan, P. J. Hudson, H. D. Niall, J. Pcnschow, G. D. Ryan. 24. Synthetic peptide substrates lor muscle protein kinases—B. E. Kemp. 25. Development of improved methodologies for solid phase synthesis of peptides-D. B. Scanlon, G. W. Tregear. 26. Solid-phase synthesis of oligopeptides-D. B. Scanlon, G. W. Tregear. 27. Thc measurement and pharmacokinetics of psychotropic drugs —G. D. Burrows, B. A. Scog­ gins. 28. Regulation of renin and ADH on renal sodium handling during dehydration and rehydra­ tion—J. R. Blair-West, A. Gibson. 29. Physiology of renal autotransplants —J. P. Coghlan, D. A. Denton, .1. G. McDougall, B. A. Scoggins, R. D. Wright.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. TREGEAR, G. W., ROSENBLATT, M., SHEPARD, G. I.., TYLER, G. A., VERONI, M. C. and POTTS, J. T. Jr. —Solid phase synthesis of the 32-amino acid carboxyl-tcrminal frag­ ment of human parathyroid hormone RPTH (38-84): Comparison of strategies, in Peptides Structure and Biological Function (Proc. 6th American Peptide Symposium), eds. E. Gross and J. Meicnhofer, Pierce, Illinois: 357-360 (1979). 2. TREGEAR, G., KEMP, B., BORJESSON, B., THOMPSON, A., SCANLON, D., COL­ LIER, M., JOHN, M., NIALL, H. and BRYANT-GREENWOOD, G.-Approaches to the solid-phase synthesis of porcine relaxin in Peptides Structure and Biological Function (Proc. 6th American Peptide Svmposium), eds. E. Gross and J. Meicnhofer, Pierce, Illinois: 445-453 (1979). 3. KEMP, B. E., RAE, I. D., MINASIAN, E. and LEACH, S. J. —Synthetic peptide substrates for protein kinases structure and function, in Peptides Structure and Biological Function (Proc. 6th American Peptide Svmposium), eds. E. Gross and J. Meicnhofer, Pierce, Illinois: 169-172(1979). 4. DENTON, D. A. and NELSON, J. F — The influence of reproductive processes on salt ap­ petite, in Biological and Behavioural Aspects of Salt Intake, eds. M. R. Kare, M. J. Ercgley and R. A. Bernard, Academic Press, New York: 229-246 (1980). 5. NIALL, H. D., JOHN, M., JAMES, R., KWOK, S., MERCADO, R., BRYANT- GREENWOOD, G., BRADSHAW, R. A., CAST, M. AND BOIME, I.-Structural studies on porcine relaxins and their biosynthetic precursors, in Chemistry, Structure and Function of Insulin and Belated Hormones, eds. D. Brandenburg and A. Wollmer, Walter de Gruvier & Ox, Berlin, New York: 269-276 (1980). 6. tsAKfcR, H. W. G., MURRAY, E. i., JEFFERSON, L. S., Li. J. and BARD1N, C. W. — Perfusion of accessory sex organs and testes, in Male Accessory Sex Glands. Vol. 4, eds. E. Spring-Mills and E. S. E. Hafez, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, New York: 215-362 (1980). 7. HUDSON, B.-Endocrinology, in Biology in Profile, ed. P. N. Campbell, Pergamon Press, Oxford: 59-64 (1980). 8. HUDSON, B., PEPPERELL, R.-J. and WOOD, C.-The problem of infertility, in The In­ fertile Couple, eds. R. J. Pepperell, B. Hudson and C. Wood, Churchill Livingstone, Harlow: 1-6 (1979). 9. HUDSON, B., BAKER, H. W. G. and DE KRETSER, D. M.-Thc abnormal semen sam­ ple, in The Infertile Couple, eds. R. J. Pepperell, B. Hudson and C. Wood, Churchill Liv­ ingstone, Harlow: 70-111 (1979). Articles 10. GRAHAM, W. F., ALLEN, K. J. F., COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., HUMPHERY, T. .1., SCOGGINS, B. A. and WHITWORTH, J. A. - Haemodynamic changes in ACTH- induced hvpenension in sheep. Clin. Fxp. Pharmacol. Physiol.. 7: 569-572 (1980). 11. COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., GRAHAM, W. F., HUMPHERY, T. J., MASON, R. T., SCHN1EDER, E. G., SCOGGINS, B. A. and WHITWORTH, J. A.-Effect of ACTH administration on the haemodynamic response lo arginin-vasopressin in sheep. Clin. Fxp. Pharmacol. Phvsiol., 7: 559-562 (1980). 12. SCOGGINS, B. A., MAGUIRE, K. P., NORMAN, T. R. and BURROWS, G. D. 200 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

— Measurement of tricyclic antidepressants. Part I. A review of methodology. Clin. Chem., 26:5-17 (1980). 13. ROSENBLATT, M., T REGEAR, G. W„ SHEPARD, G. L., TYLER, G. A., VERONI, M. and POTTS. J. T. Jr. — Comparison of two solid-phase peptide syntheses of a 32-amino acid carboxvl-terrninal fragment of human parathyroid hormone, hPTH (53-84). Arch. Biochem. Biophvs., 799:286-296 (1980). 14. BLAIR-WEST, J. R., FERNLEY, R. T., NELSON, J. F., WINTOUR, E. M. and WRIGHT, R. 1). —Thc effect of carbonic anhvdrase inhibitors on the anionic comnosition of sheep's parotid saliva. J. Phvsiol. 299: 29-44 (1980). 15. SCOGGINS, B. A., ALLEN, K. .1. F., COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., GRAHAM, W. I-'., HUMPHERY, T. J. and WHITWORTH, I. A. - Haemodynamics of ACTH induced hypertension in sheep. C7/«. Sci., 57: 333s-336s (1979). 16. KEMP, B. E. —Relative alkali stability of some peptide O-phosphoscrinc and O-phosphothreoninc esters. I'EBS Letters, 110(2): 308-312 (1980). 17. KERR, J. B., KEOGH, E. I., HUDSON, B., WHIPP, G. T. and Dc KRETSER, D. M. — Alterations in spermatogenic activity and hormonal status in a seasonally breeding rat rat­ tus fuscipes. Gen. Comp. Endocrinol.. 40: 78-88 (1980). 18. KEMP, B. E. — Phosphorylation of acyl-and dansyl-dcrivatives of the peptide leu-arg-arg- ala-ser-leu-gly by the Amp-dependent protein kinase. ./. Biol. Chem., 255: 2914-2918 (1980). 19. TREGEAR, G. W. and COGHLAN, J. P. — Enkephalin, endorphin and the opiate receptor, Circulat. lies.. 46: 1-13 (1980). 20. POWELL, J. E., LEE, A. C, TREGEAR, G. W., NIALL, H. D. and STEVENS, V. C. - Characteristics of antibodies raised to carboxy-lcrminal peptides of hCG beta subunit. J. Reprod. Immunol.. 2: 1-13 (1980). 21. GRAHAM, W. ]•'.. CAMPBELL, D. I., COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON. D. A., HUM­ PHERY, T. J., SCOGGINS, B. A. and WEISINGER, R. S.-Changes in the relationship between cerebrospinal fluid and blood composition produced bv ACT H treatment in con­ scious sheep. Life Sci., 26: 2267-2272 (1980). 22. SCOGGINS, B. A. and COGHLAN, J. P. —Primary Hvpcraldosleronism. Pharmacol. Therap.. 9: 367-394 (1980). 23. WEISINGER, R. S., COGHLAN, .1. P., DENTON, D. A., FAN, J. S. K., HAT­ ZIKOSTAS, S., McKINLEY, M. J., NELSON, .1. F. and SCOGGINS, B. A.-ACTH elicited sodium appetite in sheep. Amer. J. Physiol., 239: E45-E50 (1980). 24. KEMP, B. E. and JOHN, M. J. — Synthetic peptide substrates for protein kinases. Proc. Conf. on Cell Proliferation-Protein Phosphorylation. Cold Spring Harbor, 8: (1980). 25. LEE, A. C. J., POWELL, J. E., TREGEAR, G. W., NIALL, H. D. and STEVENS, V. C. — A method for preparing 0-hCG COOH pcplidc-carrier conjugates of predictable composi­ tion. Molec. Immunol.. 17: 749-756 (1980). 26. PADROM, R. S., WISCHUSEN, .1., HUDSON, B., BURGER, H. G. and De KRETSER, D. M. —Prolonged biphasic response of plasma testosterone to single intramuscular injec­ tions of human chorionic gonadotrophin (hcg). J. and Chn. Endocrinol. Metab., 50: 1 100-1104 (1980). 27. WINTOUR, E. M., COGHLAN, .1. P., HARDY, K. J., LINGWOOD, B. E., RAYNER, M. and SCOGGINS, B. A.-Placental transfer of aldosterone in the sheep. ./. Endocr.. 86: 305-310 (1980). 28. BAKER, H. W. G. and PEPPERELL, R. J.-Lack of clfecl of bromocriptine on semen quality in men with normal or slightly elevated prolactin levels. Aust. N.Z. .1. Obstel. Gynaec. 20: 158 (1980). 29. WALSH, J. R. and NIALL, H. D. —Use of ocladccylsilica purification method minimizes proteolysis during isolation of porcine and rat relaxins. Endocrinology, 107: 1248-1260 (1980). 30. CAST, M. J.. BRYANT-GREENWOOD, G., MERCADO, R., NIALL, H. and BOIME, 1. —Cell-free svnthesis of a high molecular weight precursor to relaxin. Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 343: 148-154 (1980). 31. McDOUGALL, J. G., BUTKUS, A., COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., MULLER, J., ODDIE, C. J., ROBINSON, P. M. and SCOGGINS, B. A. - Biosynthetic and mor­ phological evidence for inhibition of aldosterone production following administration of ACT H to sheep. Acta Endocrin., 94: 559-570 (1980). 32. MASON, R. T., ALLEN, K. J. COGHLAN, J. P., DENTON, D. A., FEI, D. T., GRAHAM, W. E., SCOGGINS, B. A. and STEWART, K. W.-ACTH hypertension modihics the haemodynamic ell'ects of prostacyclin infusions in sheep. Clin. Exp. Phar­ macol. Physiol.. 7: 469-472 (1980).

THESI S PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy I. HUMPHERY. 7". }.-Experimental hypertension in the sheep. HOWARD FLOREY INSTITUTE 201

Master of Science 2. GRAHAM, W. F. — Mechanisms of steroid induced hypertension. 3. LINGWOOD, B — Regulation of amniotic fluid volume and composition. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. FRYDAY, H. — Transmitter mechanisms in water and sodium metabolism. 2. MASON, R. T. — Mechanism of action of steroid hormones on the circulation. 3. SCANLON, D. lis. —Solid phase synthesis of oligonucleotides related to peptide hormones. MSc Theses in Progress 4. POTOCNIK, S. — Fluid and electrolyte regulation in sheep. 5. STEWART, K. — The role of the renin-angiotensin system in sodium restricted sheep. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: NH & MRC: Institute Grant. State Government of Victoria: Institute Grant. National Heart Foundation: Angiotensin Metabolism and ACTH Hypertension. World Health Organisation: Peptide Chemistry Research and Reproductive Research. National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, N.I. H. (U.S.A.): Chemical Studies of Relaxin and its Receptors. Muscular Dystrophy Association: Synthetic Peptide Substrates for Muscle Protein Kinases. Clendon Investment Pty. Ltd.: Grant in Aid. The Ian Potter Foundation: Grant in Aid. Department of Science (Queen Elizabeth Fellowship Committee): Fellowship Grant. Howard Florey Biomedical Foundation (USA): Grant in Aid. J. & R. McGauran Trust Fund: Hypertension. Percy Baxter Trust: Grant in Aid. The H. V. Mackay Charitable Trust: Grant in Aid. Bank of New South Wales: Grant in Aid. Sidney Myer Charity Trust: Grant in Aid. The Angliss Group: Grant in Aid. Mr S. Baillieu Myer: Grant in Aid. Windermere Hospital Foundation: Grant in Aid. William Buckland Foundation: Grant in Aid. Estate of thc late Edward Wilson: Grant in Aid. William Angliss (Victoria) Charitable Fund: Grant in Aid. 202 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

PSYCHIATRY

A. AUSTIN HOSPITAL RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Studies of mother-infant interaction —R. Meares. 2. Studies of cortical evoked potentials in mental illness —R. Meares. 3. Hysteria —Janet's hypothesis—R. Meares. 4. The cerebral effects of tobacco smoking —R. Meares. 5. Psychological aspects of hypertension —R. Meares. 6. Suicidal behaviour— R. Meares. 7. Phenomenological aspects of psychotherapy—R. Meares. 8. ' EEG studies of sleep —P. Dcbenham. 9. A study of "psychogenic pain" —R. Meares. 10. Interface of philosophy and psychiatry —E. Harari. 11. Sleep induction by low frequency sounds —P. Dcbenham. 12. Frequency analysis of waking and sleeping EEG by microcomputer —P. Debenham. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. FRIEDMAN, J. and MEARES, R.-Some Pilot Studies of Early Attachment and Detach­ ment Behaviour, in E. J. Anthonv and C. Chiland (eds.), The Child in his Family, Wiley In­ terscience, N. Y. (1980). 2. MEARES, R. —A Psychodynamic View of Anxiety, in G. Burrows and B. Davies (eds.), A Handbook of Studies in Anxiety, Elsevier, Amsterdam 39-55 (1980). Articles 3. MEARES, R., FRIEDMAN, J. and HORVATH, T.-Attention in hysteria: A study of habituation and arousal. Amer. J. Psychiat., 137 (2): 217-220 (1980). 4. MEARES, R. —Body feeling in human relations: The possible examples of Brancusi and Giacometti. Psychiatry, 43: 160-167 (1980). 5. FRIEDMAN, J. and MEARES, R.—Tobacco smoking and cortical evoked potentials: An opposite effect on auditory and visual svstems. Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol., 7 (6): 609-615 (1980). 6. FRIEDMAN, J., McCALLUM, P. and MEARES, R.-Stimulus intensity control in depres­ sion: A study of the comparative effect of doxepin and amitriptyline on cortical evoked potentials. Aust. N.Z. J. Psychiat., 14 (2): 115-120 (1980). 7. DEBENHAM, P. E.-The Law of Initial Values and Drug effects in Sleep. Sleep Res., 8: 92 (1979). 8. DEBENHAM, P. E.-Spindle Activity as a measure of sleep. Sleep Res., 8: 257 (1979). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian Tobacco Research Foundation: A study of the effect of tobacco smoking on an in­ dividual's interrelationship with his sensory and social environment. Mental Health Research Foundation: Sensory input regulation and "psychogenic pain". National Health and Medical Research Council: Cortical evoked potentials in anxiety, depression ind "psychogenic pain".

B. ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Measurement and pharmacokinetics of antidepressants —G. D. J3urrows, T. R. Norman, K. P. Maguire. 2. Effect of lithium on platelet monoamine oxidase —B. M. Davies. 3. The use of the blood platelet as a model of serotonergic neurones —T. R. Norman, G. D. Burrows. 4. Cardiological effects of antidepressants —G. D. Burrows, B. M. Davies. 5. Plasma concentrations and clinical response to psychotropic drugs — G. D. Burrows, B. M. Davies, T. R. Norman, K. P. Maguire. PSYCHIATRY 203

6. Hypoihalamo-adrenal-pituitary function in depression — B. M. Davies, G. D. Burrows, T. R. Norman, K. P. Maguire. 7. Relationships of physiological and subjective changes associated with the use of imagery in the behavioural treatment of anxiety —D. J. deL Home, R. O. Stanley. 8. Psychological stresses and responses of women undergoing treatment for breast cancer —D. J. deL Home, J. Forbes, H. McCormack. 9. Benzodiazepines and hirsutism —L. Dennerstein, G. D. Burrows, A. Callan, J. B. Brown, G. Warne. 10. Premenstrual tension —Aetiology and Management — L. Dennerstein, C. Spencer-Gardner, G. D. Burrows, J. B. Brown. 11. Sexual side effects of antidepressants — L. Dennerstein, G. D. Burrows, R. O. Stanley. 12. Conjoint sex therapy —L. Dennerstein, G. Szego. 13. Therapeutic imagery processing: hemispheric lateralization and thc effects of emotional arousal —R. O. Stanley, D. J. del. Home. 14. Internal-external locus of control and health locus of control. A comparison of two scoring formats and measurement of norms for an Australian sample— R. O. Stanley, C. Sharp, G. Hyman. 15. Psychological management of tobacco smoking behaviour —G. Hyman, G. D. Burrows. 16. Comparison of single and multiple sessions of hypnosis in the treatment of smoking —J. Cor­ nwall, G. D. Burrows. 17. Relaxation training: Hypnosis and Biofeedback with hypertensive patients —V. Powlctt, G. D. Burrows. 18. Hypnotisability in the genesis of phobic disorder-A. W. Goddard, G. D. Burrows. 19. Psychological problems of coronary arterv surgerv —D. Horgan, B. M. Davies. 20. Renal effects of lithium-P. Kincaid-Smith, B. Davies, B. Holwill, R. Walker. 21. Biological aspecis of lithium therapy—P. A. Jacobs. B. M. Davies. 22. Study of thc mental health of Indo-Chinese refugees —J. Krupinski, Ci. D. Burrows.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. BURROWS, G. D. and DAVIES, B. M. (eds.)-Handbook of Studies on Anxiety, Elsevier/North Holland, Amsterdam (1980). 2. BURROWS, G. D. and WERRY, J. (eds.)-Advances in Human Psychopharmacology, Vol. I, S.M Press, Greenwich, Conn. (1980). 3. BURROWS, G. D. and DENNERSTEIN, L. - Handbook of Hypnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam (1980). 4. DENNERSTEIN. L. and BURROWS, G. D.-Obstetrics, Gynaecology and Psychiatry, 1980 (Proc. of the 7th Annual Congress of the Australian Society for Psychosomatic Obstetrics and Gynaecology), York Press. Melbourne (1980). 5. BURROWS, G. D. (ed.)-Studies in Anxiety (Proc. ofthe Scientific Meeting accompanying the 46th Beattie-Smith Lecture), University of Melbourne (1980). 6. DENNERSTEIN, L. and BURROWS, G. D. (eds.)-Obstetrics, Gynaecology and Psychiatry, York Press. Melbourne (1980). Chapters of Books 7. BURROWS, G. D.-Affective Disorders and Hypnosis, in Handbook of Hypnosis and Psvchosomatic Medicine, eds. G. D. Burrows, and L. Dennerstein, Elscvicr/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 149-170 (1980). S. BURROWS, G. D. and DENNERSTEIN, [...-Depression and Suicide in Middle Age, in Modern Perspectives in the Psvchiutrv of Middle Age, Brunncr/Mazel Inc., New York (1980). 9. BURROWS, G. D. and ELTON, D. — Relaxation, Meditation, Hypnosis, in Obstetrics, Gynaecology and Psychiatry (Proc. of the 7 th Annual Congress of ihe Australian Society for Psvchosomatic Obstetrics and Gvnaecologv), eds. L. Dennerstein and G. D. Burrows, York Press, Melbourne: 11-25 (1980).' 10. CALLAN, A. W., DENNERSTEIN, L., BURROWS, G. D. and HYMAN, G. J.-The Psychocndocrinology of Hirsutism, in Obstetrics, Gynaecology and Psychiatry, eds. L. Den­ nerstein, and G. D. Burrows, York Press, Melbourne: 43-54 (1980). 11. DAVIES, B. and MOWBRAY, R. M.-The clinical testing of new anti-anxiety compounds, in Handbook of Studies on Anxielv, eds. G. D. Burrows and B. Davies, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 365-375 (1980). 12. DENNERSTEIN, L.-The Australian Society for Psychosomatic Obstetrics and Gvnaecologv Annual Fellowship, in Obstetrics, Gvnaecologv and Psychiatry, York Press, Mclbourne:'l09-112 (1980). 13. DENNERSTEIN, L. — Hypnosis and Psychosexual Dysfunction, in Burrows, Ci. D. and 204 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Denncrstein, I,, (eds.). Handbook of Hvpnosis and Psvchosomatic Medicine, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 341-358 (1980). 14. DENNERSTEIN, L., BURROWS, G. D., and SPENCER-GARDNER, C. - Premenstrual Tension, in Studies in Anxiety (Proc. of the Scientific Meeting accompanying the 45th Heatlie-Smith Lecture), University of Melbourne: 8-14 (19SU). 15. DENNERSTEIN, L., BURROWS, G. D. and SPENCER-GARDNER, C. - Premenstrual Tension: Aetiology and Management, in L. Denncrstein and G. D. Burrows, Obstetrics, Gvnaecologv and Psvchiatrv 1980, York Press, Melbourne: 35-42 (1980). 16. DENNERSTEIN, L., STANLEY, R. O. and BURROWS, G. D. — Anxiety and Psychosex­ ual Dysfunction, in G. D. Burrows and B. Davies (eds.), Handbook of Studies on Anxietv, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 265-277 (I9S0). 17. ELTON. D., BURROWS, G. D., and STANLEY, G. V.-Chronic pain and Hypnosis, in Handbook of Hvpnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, eds. G. D. Burrows and L. Denncrs­ tein, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 269-292 (1980). 18. ELTON, D„ BURROWS, G. D. and STANLEY, G. V.-Apperception of Pain, in Prob­ lems in Pain (Proc. of the First Australian New Zealand Conference on Pain), eds. C. L. Peck and M. Wallace, Pergamon Press (1980). 19. FOENANDER, G., and BURROWS, G. D. — Phenomena of Hypnosis: Age Regression, in Handbook of Hypnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, eds. G. D. Burrows and L. Denner­ stein, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 67-83 (1980). 20. FULTON, A., and BURROWS, G. D. — Benzodiazepine Receptors in thc Central Nervous System, in Handbook of Studies on Anxiety, eds. G. D. Burrows and B. Davies, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 315-325 (1980). 21. GERSCHMAN, J. A., READE, P. C, and BURROWS, G. D. - Hypnosis and Dentistry, in Handbook of Hvpnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, eds. G. D. Burrows, L. Dennerstein, Elscvicr/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 443-479 (1980). 22. GERSCHMAN, J. A., READE, P. C, and BURROWS, G. D.-Hypnosis and Chronic Oro-Facial Pain—Physical and Psychological Perspectives, in Proc. of 2nd European Con­ gress of Hvpnosis in Psychotherapy and Psvchosomatic Medicine, eds. M. Pajntar, E. Roskar, and M. Laurie (1980). 23. GERSCHMAN, J. A., READE, P. C, BURROWS, G. D., and WRIGHT, J.-The Management of Chronic Oro-Facial Pain al a Multi-Disciplinary Pain Clinic, in Proc. ofthe First Australian and New Zealand Conference on Pain, Pergamon Press: 166-172 (1980). 24. HORNE, D. J. deL. — Behaviour Therapy and thc Treatment of Anxiety, in G. D. Burrows and B. M. Davies (eds.), Handbook of Studies on Anxietv, Elscvicr/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 231-264 (1980). 25. HORNE, D. J. deL. and POWLETT, V. -Hypnolizabilily and Rating Scales, in G. D. Bur­ rows and L. Denncrstein (eds.). Handbook of Hvpnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, Elscvicr/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 119-131 (1980). 26. KINCAID-SMITH, P. and DAVIES, B.-Lithium and the Kidney. Research and Clinical Implications, in Advances in Human Psychopharmacology, Vol. I, JAI Press, Greenwich, Conn.: 141-155 (1980). 27. MAGUIRE, K. P. and BURROWS, G. D. — Plasma Levels and Clinical Response, in Studies in Anxiety: 17-19 (1980). 28. MAGUIRE, K. P. and FULTON, A. —Thc measurement of anti-anxiety drugs in plasma, in G. D. Burrows and B. M. Davies (eds.), Handbook of Studies on Anxiety, Elscvicr/North Holland: 327-344 (1980). 29. NORMAN, T. R. and BURROWS, G. D. - Plasma levels of Psychotropic drugs and Clinical Response, in Advances in Human Psychopharmacology. Vol. I, G. D. Burrows, and J. S. Wcrry, JAI Press Inc. Greenwich, Conn.: 103-140 (1980). 30. NORMAN, T. R. and BURROWS, G. D.-Plasma levels of benzodiazepine anti-anxiety drugs and clinical response, in G. D. Burrows and B. M. Davies (eds.). Handbook of Studies on Anxietv, Elsevier/North Holland: 345-364 (1980). 31. STANLEY, R., DENNERSTEIN, L., SZEGO, G. and BURROWS, G. D.-Teaching Sex Therapy to Medical Students, in Obstetrics, Gynaecology and Psvchiatrv, eds. L. Denncr­ stein and G. D. Burrows, York Press, Melbourne: 71-80 (1980). 32. STONE, P. and BURROWS, G. D.-Hypnosis and Obstetrics, in Handbook of Hypnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, eds. G. D. Burrows, L. Dennerstein, Elsevier/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 307-325 (1980). 33. WRIGHT, J. L., GERSCHMAN, J. A., READE, P. C. and BURROWS, G. D.-Social Aspects of Chronic Oro-facial Pain, in Proc. of the First Australian New Zealand Con­ ference on Pain, eds. C. Peck and M. Wallace, Pergamon Press: 173-178 (1980).

Articles 34. BURROWS, G. D. and NORMAN, T. R. - Psychotherapeutic Drugs: Important adverse reactions and interactions. Drugs 20: 485-493 (1980). PSYCHIATRY 205

35. BURROWS, G. D. and NORMAN, T. R. — Psychotherapeutic drugs: Important adverse reactions and interactions. Current Therapeutics. 22: 33-41 (1980). 36. BURROWS, G. D., NORMAN, T. R. and DAVIES, B. M. - Psychiatric disorders: Ad­ vances in treatment. Current Therapeutics, 21: 257-265 (1980). 37. BURROWS, G. D., NORMAN, T. R. and DAVIES, B. M.-A comparative study of Amox- apine and amitriptyline for depressive illness. Aust. Fam. Phvs., 9: 763-766 (1980). 38. DENNERSTEIN, L., BURROWS, G.D., HYMAN, G. J. and SHARPE, K. — Hormones and sexuality: Effects of estrogen and progestogen. Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 56: 316-322 (1980). 39. DENNERSTEIN, L., IOTHERBY, K., BURROWS, G. D., LABY, B. and WOOD, C. — Ethinyl oestradiol and norgestrel therapy after oophorectomy; plasma levels and clinical response. Maturitas. 2: 147-154 (1980). 40. FOENANDER, G., BURROWS, G. D., GERSCHMAN, J. A., and HORNE, D. .1. deL. —Phobic behaviour and hypnotic susceptibility. Aust. Clin. and Exp. Hvpnosis, 8: 41-46 (1980). 41. FULTON, A. and BURROWS, G. D. — JH-Halopcridol binding to tissue receptors: Influence of some drugs and antipsychotic potency. Life Sci., 26: 1505-1508 (1980). 42. HORNE, D. J. deL. and WILKINSON, J. —A controlled trial of'habit-reversal' treatment for persistent fingernail biling. Behav. Pes. & Therapv, 18: 287-291 (1980). 43. MAGUIRE, K. P., BURROWS, G. D., NORMAN, T. R. and SCOGGINS, B. A.-Evalua­ tion of a kit for measuring tricyclic antidepressants. C/I/I. Chem., 26: 529 (19S0). 44. MAGUIRE, K. P., BURROWS, G. D., NORMAN, T. R. and SCOGGINS, B. A.-Blood- plasma distribution ratios of psychotropic drugs. Clin. Chem.. 26: 1624 (1980). 45. MAGUIRE, K. P., NORMAN, T. R., BURROWS, G. D. and SCOGGINS, B. A.-An Evaluation of Maprotiline —Intravenous Kinetics and comparison of two oral doses. Eur. J. Clin. Pharmacol., 18: 1-7 (1980). 46. NORMAN, T. R., BURROWS, G. D., DAVIES, B. M., MAGUIRE, K. P., WURM, J. M. E. R. — Viloxazine Plasma Concentrations and Clinical Response. Affect. Dis., 2: 157-164 (1980). 47. SCOGGINS, B. A., MAGUIRE, K. P., NORMAN, T. R., and BURROWS, G. D. —Measurement of Tricyclic Antidepressants: Part 1 A Review of Methodology. Clin. Chem.. 26: 5-7 (1980). 48. SCOGGINS, B. A., MAGUIRE, K. P., NORMAN, T. R., BURROWS, G. D -Measure­ ment of Tricyclic Antidepressants: Part 11 Applications of Methodology. Clin. Chem.. 26: 805-815 (1980). 49. TELTSCHER, B. - Huntington's Disease Epidemiology. Med. J. Aust. 1: 447 (1980). 50. WATTS, S., DENNERSTEIN, L. and HORNE, D. J. deL.-The premenstrual syndrome: A psychological evaluation. J. Affect. Dis., 2: 257-266 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHtK DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. BRANTON, L. S. — The Physiology of Hypothalamic Releasing Hormones in Affective Disorders—Specific Influence of T.R.H. Master of Science 2. McINTYRE, I. M. — A Pharmacokinetic Investigation of Nomifensine. 3. WURM, J. M. E.— The measurement of antidepressants by Gas Licpiid Chromatography. 4. JACOBS, P. A. — Biological Aspects of Lithium Therapy. 5. CORN WELL, J. — Comparison of single and multiple sessions of hypnosis in the treatment of smoking. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. McINTYRE. I. M. — Biochemical Studies in Psychiatric Disorders. 2. McLACHLAN, M. O. — Approaches to Interpretive Understanding: The Problem of the concept of Verslehen in the Psychological Domain. MSc Theses in Progress 3. CHAMBERLAIN, K. G. — Studies on Lithium and Monoamine Oxidase. 4. CUMMINS, P. D. — Aspecis of psychiatric evidence in legal trials. 5. HYMAN, G. J. — Factors in the management of tobacco smoking behaviour. 6. McCORMACK, H. M. — Psychological stresses and response of women undergoing breast cancer. 7. POWLETT, V. — Relaxation therapy, hypnosis and biofeedback in the treatment of hypertension. 206 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

8. STANLEY, R. O. — Relationship of physiological to subjective changes associated with use of imagery in the behavioural treatment of anxiety. SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED The following grant has been received: NH & MRC: The measurement of drugs and biogenic amines by physiochcmical techniques and biological studies in affective illness.

C. ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Prospective study of immediate and long term psychosocial effects of mild to moderately severe closed head injury —J. R. B. Ball, E. Chiu, P. Dowling, D. Margctts. 2. Retrospective and prospective studies of psychosocial effects of surgical stomata, for in­ dividual patients and their families-J. R. B. Ball, E. S. Tan, G. Whelan. 3. Physical and psychosocial aspects of patients suffering from Tic de Gilles de la Tourettc—.1. R. B. Ball. 4. Investigation of human self injury using a biological model. This study, a continuation of work started in 1976 attempts to separate innate aspects of this syndrome from socially deter­ mined ones, in the expectation lhal this will facilitate understanding of il —I. H. Jones, W. Lambourne, P. Tan. 5. Nonverbal aspects of Psychiatric Diagnosis. Earlier studies in ihis department indicate that nonverbal features are under-utilized in the diagnosis of schizophrenia and depression. This study is investigating depression more closely from this point of view — 1. H. Jones, J. Scom- mazon. 6. Investigation of psychiatric disability following accident in persons where litigation is in­ volved. Study initiated in 1980-1. H. Jones, L. Alexander. 7. Huntington's Disease: (a) Mortality Patterns in H. D.-E. Chiu. (b) Dermatographics in H. D.-E. Chiu. (c) Physiotherapy in H. D. —E. Chiu, C. Gregory. (d) Relaxation therapy in H. D.-E. Chiu, .1 ."Williams. 8. Propranolol in the treatment of chronic schizophrenics—E. Chiu, K. Dixon, I. Fleming, M. O'Connor, J. Stevenson. 9. Mental health of Indo-Asian refugees — E. Chiu, G. Burrows, E. S. Tan, J. Krupinski, G. Graves, R. Frieze PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. BALL, J. R. B. —The Ageing Male, in Obstetrics, Cynaecology'and Psychiatry, eds. L. Den­ ncrstein and G. D. Burrows, York Press, Melbourne: 81-95 (1980). 2. BALL, J. R. B. —Some Biological Aspects of Psychotherapy and Brain Washing, in Biological Psvchiatrv, ed. L. G. Kiloh, Geiey Psychiatric Svmposium, New South Wales: 95-102 (1979). 3. BALL, J. R. B. —Some aspects of anxiety in relation to sexual identity, in Handbook of Studies on Anxiety, eds. G. D. Burrows, and B. M. Davies, Elscvicr/North Holland Biomedical Press, Amsterdam: 279-301 (1980). 4. TAN, E. S. -Transcultural Aspects of Anxiety, in Handbook of Studies on Anxiety, eds. G. D. Burrows and B. M. Davies, Elscvicr/North Holland, Amsterdam: 133-144 (1980). 5. TAN, E. S.— Culture-bound syndromes among overseas Chinese, in Normal and Abnormal Behaviour in Chinese Culture, eds. A. M. Kleinman and T. Y. Lin, Amsterdam, D. Rcidel Pub. Co.: 371-386 (1980). Articles 6. ARMSTRONG, H.E. and TAN, E. S. — Behavioural self-analysis in the medical curriculum: a comparison of Malaysian and American experiences. Medical Education, 13: 99-102 (1979) . 7. BALL, J. R. B.-Schizophrenia-Diagnostic Issues. Aust. N.Z. J. Psvchiat.. 14: 249-253 (1980) . 8. BALL, J. R. B.-Sexual Identity and Anxiety, in Studies in Anxiety. Proc. of the Scientific Meeting Accompanying the Beatiie-Smith Lecture, Melbourne: 1-7 (1980). PSYCHIATRY 207

JONES, l.H. and PANS A, M. —Non-verbal aspects of depression and schizophrenia during interview, in Medilex Digest Psvchiatry, eds. International Synopses, New Jersey: (Dec. 1980). JONES, I. H., CONG1U, L.., STEVENSON, J., STRAUSS, N. and FREI, D. 7.. —Biological Approach to Two Forms of Human Self-Injury, in Psychiatry Digest: 44 (Feb. 1979). 208 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

RADIOLOGY

INTRODUCTION The main fields of research were neuroradiology, uroradiology and arteriography. Analysis of 1,000 palicnts undergoing CT head scan indicated thai plain radiography of ihe skull contributed little in most and could be omitted initially. Amipaque myelography was shown to produce considerable headache contrary to early reports of this new water soluble medium. Techniques for catheterising (he upper urinary iracl were refined. A lavage set was developed for irrigating ihc renal pelvis. These methods were used to study thc feasibility of dissolving or ex­ tracting upper urinary tract calculi. Methods for treating arterial abnormalities were introduced. Fifty patients wilh arterial obstructions in the thigh were treated with a newly developed balloon catheter with excellent results and a small number of renal artery narrowings were dilated. Dr Tress investigated a range of materials for therapeutic embolisation in animals, particularly thc use of barium sulphate. RESEARCH T OPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Factors affecting ihe radionuclide uptake of bone tumours and their detection by imaging in­ vestigations—R. S. Budd. 2. Audio-visual systems in teaching Radiology —.1. S. Kavanagh. 3. Role of plain skull x-rays in CT —B. M. Tress. 4. Patients reaction to Amipaque myelography—B. M. Tress. 5. Therapeutic embolisation of blood vessels —B. M. Tress. 6. Dissolution and extraction of ureteric calculi —VV. S. C. Hare, D. McOmish. 7. Balloon dilatation of arteries — W. S. C. Hare. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. HARE, W. S. C. and Bl.ECHER, C. M.-Echogenic splenic cyst: a mis-diagnosis. Aust. Radiol. 293-297 (1980). 2. HARE, W. S. C. and KETHERANATHAN, V.-Leiomyoma of the oesophagus. Aust. Radiol. 273-276 (1980). 3. SYME, J. — Neurofibromatosis as a cause of renovascular hypertension. Ausi. Radiol. 62-66 (1980). 4. FIELD, P., TRESS, B. M., O'BRIEN, M. D. and LEVANT, B. A.-Embolisation of traumatic aneurysm of the maxillarv arterv. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 49 (2): 244-246 (April 1979). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Doctor of Medicine I. ANDREWS, .1. T. — The development of radionuclide techniques in the diagnosis of tumours. THESIS IN PROGRESS I'hD Thesis in Progress 1. BUDD, R. S. — Factors affecting the radionuclide uptake of bone tumours and their detection by imaging investigations. SURGERY

AUSTIN HOSPITAL AND REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION Studies al the Austin Hospital of the regulatory peptides gastrin, pancreatic polypeptide, vasoactive intestinal peptide, somatostatin, bombesin, and neurotensin have been made in the chronically cannulated ovine foetus, and adult sheep. Tissue studies have followed, and now a clinical arm for their pharmacokinetics has begun wilh Mr. David Fletcher, which involves col­ laborative programs for immunohistochemistry, drug trials of H, receptor blockers, and cerebral release of peptide during vascular surgery. The work is being directed by Dr. Arthur Shulkes. At the Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg, the hereditary and environmental aspects of gastrointestinal cancers are studied as a large scale epidemiological project. Surgical infections, and especially the role of nutrition and antibiotic use, are studied in abdominal surgical cases. Metabolic and clinical studies are continuing with the medical dissolution of gallstones. Mr. Avni Sali is continuing his research on gallstone dissolution and ihe relation between diet and disease, and football injuries.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS AUSTIN HOSPITAL A. ANAESTHESIA 1. Chemical sympathectomy— L. Doolan. 2. Intensive care unit infection control—R. W. SmaUwood, E. Tosolini. 3. Oxygen control during one lung anaesthesia —G. Gutieridge. 4. Post-operative hypertension following aortic surgery —L. McNicol. 13. REGULATORY PEPTIDE STUDIES 1. Ontogeny of gut-brain peptides— K. J. Hardy, A. Shulkes. 2. Control of foetal ovine gastric acid secretion —A. Shulkes, K. J. Hardy. 3. Avian tissue peptide distribution —A. Shulkes, D. Stephens. 4. Plasma vasoactive intestinal peptide as a tumour marker-K. J. Hardy, A. Shulkes. 5. Pharmacokinetics of neurotensin —D. R. Fletcher, A. Shulkes. 6. Peptide influence on mucosal bloodfiow in man —D. R. Fletcher, A. Shulkes. 7. Plasma peptide response to feeding in man —D. R. Fletcher, A. Shulkes. 8. Monoclonal antibody production against murine specific cell antigens —A. Shulkes, 1. F. C. McKenzie, K. J. Hardy. 9. Peptide response following gastroplasty for morbid obesity—R. Allen, A. McLeish, A. Shulkes. C. SPINAL INJURIES 1. Micro-vascular tissue transfer in spinal injuries —G. Sormann, J. Buntinc. 2. Bladder function aflcr spinal cord transection —D. Burke. 3. Gastric acid secretion following complete cervical transection —D. MacLellan, A. Shulkes, D. Burke. 4. Prevention of spinal cord trauma —J. Toscano. 5. Paraosieoarthropathy — .1. Robins, D. Burke. D. VASCULAR SURGERY 1. Evaluation of natural history of carotid artery disease —B. F. Buxton. 2. Assessment of coronary artery bypass surgery—B. F. Buxton. 3. Long-term results of aorto-femoral bypass —B. E. Buxton. 4. Surgery for imminent stroke —J. P. Royle. 5. Exlra-intracranial anastomosis for stroke —J. M. Woodward, J. P. Royle. E. OTHER 1. Transport and excretory function of foetal liver —K. J. Hardy, R. A. SmaUwood. 2. Foetal adrenal cortex physiology —K. J. Hardy, B. A. Scoggins, E. M. Wintour. 3. Surgical infections —M. C. Douglas.

REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL A. CANCER 1. Genetic aspects of gastrointestinal cancers —G. A. Kune, B. Field. 2. Epidemiological sludy of pancreas cancer in Australia —G. A. Kune, S. Kune, A. Sali. 3. Epidemiological study of colorectal cancer in Melbourne —G. A. Kune, S. Kune, B. Field. 209 210 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

4. Epidemiological study of colorectal polyps in Victoria —G. A. Kune, K. MacGowan, J. C. B. Penfold. 5. Pancreas cancer palliation; a prospective study —G. A. Kune. B. SURGICAL INFECTIONS 1. Epidemiology of antibiotic resistant staphylococci at Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg —G. A. Kune, A. Read, K. Millar. 2. Bacteriology of surgical wounds and wound infections —G. A. Kune, L. Street, A. Read. 3. Ccphamandole in elective biliary tract surgery; a randomized double-blind trial — G. A. Kune, T. Jones, C. Leinkram. C. GALLSTONE DISEASE 1. Clinical and metabolic studies of gallstone dissolution with chcnodeo.xycholic acid. — A. Sali, J. Iser, T. Hocking. 2. Non-operative treatment of bile duct gallstones; a prospective trial —A. Sali, B. Hartley. 3. Nutrition of gallstone patients —A. Sali, M. Holt. D. DIETARY STUDIES 1. Dietary fibre estimation of Australian foods —A. Sali, M. Holt. 2. Use of bran in the treatment of haemorrhoids; a randomized double-blind trial —A. Sali, M. Holt. 3. Dietary habits of Melbourne school children. —A. Sali, M. Holt. E. OTHER PROJECTS 1. Comparison of abdominal ultrasound and computed tomographic scanning of the ab­ domen—G. A. Kune. 2. Thc development of an enzymatic urinary oxalate test —A. Sali, M. Kolvacic. 3. Intestinal alkaline phosphatase assay as a diagnostic test for intestinal ischaemia —A. Sali. 4. Assessment of risk factors before surgery —G. A. Kune.

PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. KUNE, G. A. and SALI, A.-The Practice of Biliarv Surgerv, Blackwell, Oxford, 462 pp. 2nd edition (1980). Chapters of Books 2. COGHLAN, J. P., BLAIR-WEST, J. R., BUTKUS, A., DENTON, D. A., HARDY, K. J., LEKSELL, L., McDOUGALL, J. G., McKINLEY, M. J., SCOGGINS, B. A., TARJAN, E., WEISINGER, R. S. and WRIGHT, R. D —Factors regulating aldosterone secretion, in Endocrinology, 1980, ed. I. A. Cumming, J. W. Funder, F. A. O. Mendelsohn. Australian Academy of Science, Canberra: 385-388 (1980). 3. JONES, T. — Biliary cysts, in The Practice of Biliary Surgerv, by G. A. Kune and A. Sali, Blackwell, Oxford, 2nd edition: 275-287 (1980).

Articles 4. DES1MONE, R., FLEMING, J. and GROSS, C. G.-Prcstriate affcrents to inferior tem­ poral cortex: an HRP studv. Brain Research, 184: 41-45 (1980). 5. BJORNSSON, O. G., SH1RA, T. S., FLETCHER, D. R. and CHADW1CK, B. S. — Duodenal perfusion with sodium taurocholate selectively inhibits biliary but not pancreatic secretion in man. Gastroenterology, 78: 1142 (1980). 6. BLACKBURN, A. M., FLETCHER, D. R., CHRISTOFIDES, N. D., FIT/PATRICK. L.. ADRIAN, T. E. and BLOOM, S. R. — Neurotensin infusion in man and its effects on gastric function. Gastroenterologv, 78: 1142 (1980). 7. BLACKBURN, A. M., FLETCHER, D. R., LONG, R. L., FITZPATRICK, L., ADRIAN, T. E. and BLOOM, S. R. — The effect of neurotensin on gastric function in man. The Lancet, I: 987-989 (1980). 8. BURKE, D. C.-Treatment of spinal injuries in Australia. Aust. Ins. Inst. J., 3: 2-6 (1980). 9. EASTMAN, M. C. and KUNE, G. A.—The objectives of surgery in pancreas cancer. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., SO: 462-464 (1980). 10. EASTMAN, M. C. and SALI, A. —The modern treatment of oesophageal varices. Med. J. Aust., I: 129-130 (1980). 11. GAWLER, D. M., ROYLE, J. P. and TOSOLINI, F. A.-Intractable nasal carriage of methicilhn-resistant staphylococcus aureus. Med. J. Aust., I: 607-608 (1980). 12. HARDY, K. J.-Conservative treatment. Brit. Med. J., 281: 294 (1980). SURGERY (AUSTIN AND REPAT. GEN. HOSPS.) 211

13. KING, B., MYERS, K. A., SCOTT, D. F., DEVINE, T. J., JOHNSON, N. and MORRIS, P. J. — Femoro-poplitcal vein grafts for intermittent claudication, lirit. J. Surg., 67: 489-492 (1980). 14. KREJS, G. J., FORDTRAN, J. S., BLOOM, S. R., FAHRENKRUG, J., SCHAFFALIT- ZKY DE MUCKADEI.L, O. B., FISCHER, J. E., HUMPHREY, C. S., SAID, S. I., WALSH, J. H. and SHULKES, A. A. — Effect of VIP infusion on water and ion transport in the human jejunum. Gastroenterology, 78: 722-727 (1980). 15. KUNE, G. A.-Pancreas cancer in Australia. Aust. N.Z. J. Meet., 10: 108 (1980). 16. KUNE, G. A.—Cancer of the pancreas. A storv of gloom (Editorial). Aust. N.Z. J. Suri;., 50: 451-452 (1980). 17. KUNE, G. A. — Modern approach to the diagnosis of prolonged jaundice, in State of the Art of Surgerv 1979/80, Springer-Verlag, New York, /: 47 (1980). 18. LEINKRAM, C, CHOU, S. T., ISER, J. and SALI, A.-Multiple primary cancers arising from different oreans and tissues. Med. J. Aust., I: 309-311 (1980). 19. LEINKRAM, C, ROBERTS-THOMSON, I. C, and KUNE, G. A. —Juxtapapillary duodenal diverticula. Association with gallstones and pancreatitis. Med. J. Aust., I: 209-210 (1980). 20. LINGWOOD, B. E., HARDY, K. J., LONG, J. G., McPHEE, M. and WINTOUR, E. M. —Amniotic fluid volume and composition following experimental manipulations in sheep. Obstet. & Gvnaec., 56: 451-458 (1980). 21. Macl.ELLAN, D. G. and STEPHENS, D. A.-Recurrent laryngeal nerve paralysis. Com­ pression bv a thyroid cvst. Med. J. Aust., 2: 450 (1980). 22. MARSHALL, A. W.', MIHALY, G. W., MORGAN, D. J., STEPHENS, D. A., SMALLWOOD, R. A. and HARDY, K. J. — Propranolol disposition and biliary excretion in the pregnant sheep and foetus. Gastroenterology, 77: A25 (1979). 23. MORLEY, J. E., YAMADA, T., WALSH, J. H., LAMERS, C. B., WONG, H., SHULKES, A. A., DAMASSA, D. A., GORDON, J., CARLSON, H. E and HERSHMAN, J. M. —Morphine addiciton and withdrawal alters brain peptide concentrations. Life Sciences, 26: 2239-2244 (1980). 24. READ, B. G., and KUNE, G. A. — Natural historv of acute pancreatitis. A long-term studv, Med. J. Aust., 2: 555-558 (1980). 25. RENNIE, J. A., CHR1STOFIDES, N. D., M1TCHENERE, P., FLETCHER, D. R., STOCKLEY-LEATHARD, H. L., BLOOM, S. R., JOHNSON, A. G. and HARDING- RAINES, A. J. —Neural and humoral factors in post-operative items. Brit. J. Surg., 67: 694-698 (1980). 26. ROYLE, J. P. —Thc use of multiple choice questions in the Part I FRACS examination. An analvsis of results. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 438-439 (1980). 27. SALI, A., CROWE, C, ISER, J., DONOHUE, W. and KUNE, G. A. - Biliary citrate secre­ tion. Aust. N.Z. J. Med.. 10: 114 (1980). 28. SHULKES, A. A., MAXWELL, V., SOLOMON, T. and GROSSMAN, M. I.-Effect of gastric inhibitory polypeptide on pentagastrin stimulated acid secretion in man. Digestive Diseases and Science, 25: 113-116 (1980). 29. VARNER, A. A., ISENBERG, J". 1., ELASHOFF, J. D., LAMERS, C. B. H. W., MAX­ WELL, V. and SHULKES, A. A. —Effect of intravenous lipid on gastric acid secretion stimulated by intravenous amino acids. Gastroenterology, 79: 873-876 (1980). 30. WINTOUR, E. M., COGHLAN, J. P., HARDY, K. J., LINGWOOD, B. E., RAYNER, M. and SCOGGINS, B. A. — Placental transfer of Aldosterone in the sheep, J. Endocrinol., 36: 305-310 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Bachelor of Medical Science 1. DICKER, G. — Football injuries; a study of aetiological factors. 2. CHANDLER, M. - Intestinal alkaline phosphatase in experimental intestinal and hepatic in­ juries. • 3. McCOLL, D. — The incidence of injury in Australian rules football and its long-term im­ plications. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. KUNE, S. — The influence of environmental factors in the development of colorectal cancer. 2. THOMPSON, P. - The production of monoclonal antibody to human and mouse cell an­ tigens by somatic cell hybridization. MSc Thesis in Progress 3. HENDERSON, J.—Ontogeny and function of gut-brain peptides. 212 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Austin Hospital Medical Research Foundation: Ontogeny of ovine gastric secretion. Australian Apple and Pear Corporation: Nutrition and Disease. Australian Dried Fruits Association: Nutrition and Disease. Department of Veterans' Affairs: Colorectal Cancer. Department of Veterans' Affairs: Gallstone Dissolution Studies. Department of Veterans' Affairs: Haemorrhoids and Bran Usage. Department of Veterans' Affairs: Colorectal Cancer Epidemiology. Elizabeth and Nicholas Slezak Cancer Research Fund: Gastro-intestinal Cancer Research. Medical Research Committee: A Study of Environmental Factors in the Development of Colorec­ tal Cancer and Pancreas Cancer. Medical Research Committee: Dissolution of Gallstones. Medical Research Committee: The Ontogeny of Foetal Sheep Gut-Brain Peptides. Melbourne Wholesale Fruit and Vegetable Market Trust: Determination of Fibre Content of Food. NH & MRC: Gallstone Dissolution Studies. NH & MRC: Transport and Excretory Function in Ovine Foetal Liver. NH & MRC: Gut-Brain Peptides. Rowden White Foundation: Gut Peptide Hormone Development. Sports Development Programme Grants: Australian Rules Football. SURGERY

DEPARTMENT OF THE JAMES STEWART PROFESSOR ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION In 1980 the major emphasis has again been in the fields of oncology and transplantation, with additional studies in anaesthesia and surgical metabolism. A particular feature was the initiation of a study of the epidemiology and genetics of breast and other human cancers, which builds on experience gained previously in studies of the genetics of lymphoma. This study is being under­ taken in association with Dr B. Tait of the Tissue Typing Laboratory, Royal Melbourne Hospital, Professor R. Kirk ofthe Department of Human Biology, ANU, Dr D. Propert of the Department of Genetics, RMIT and Dr D. Ford of CSL. The Department has continued lo act as thc co­ ordinator and dala centre for the Australasian Prospective Randomised Trials of therapy for ad­ vanced breast cancer. A major study of wound infection in general surgical patients was undertaken in the Royal Melbourne Hospital. This has established a high incidence of such infection, and has resulted in major recommendations to reduce the incidence of infection. In October 1980, the Ludwig Institute for Cancer Research established a cancer biology unit within thc Department, headed by Dr A. Burgess, formerly ofthe Walter and Eli/a Hall Institute. This unit is studying growih factors in normal tissues and in tumours al the molecular and cellular level.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. ANAESTHESIA 1. Pharmacokinetics of thiopentone infusions—D. Crankshaw (with G. Blackman and D. Morgan, Victorian College of Pharmacy). 2. Development of a simple carbon dioxide monitoring device —D. Crankshaw, M. Boyd. 3. Refinement of a forced oscillation method for measurement of respiratory mechanical func­ tion— D. Crankshaw, B. Hall. B. ONCOLOGY 1. Serum factors in malignancy —G. Clunie. 2. Phase III trials of endocrine cytotoxic and combined therapy in advanced breast cancer —J. Forbes. 3. Phase III trial of adjuvant therapy in early breast cancer —J. Forbes. 4. Epidemiology and genetics of breast and other cancers —J. Forbes, G. Clunie. 5. Experimental melanoma biology —J. Forbes, R. Whitehead. 6. Steroid receptor analysis in experimental and human malignancies —J. Forbes, R. Melick. 7. Culture of human solid tumours —J. Forbes, G. Clunie, R. Whitehead. 8. Psychological problems and quality of life of breast cancer patients —J. Forbes, I. Russell. 9. Effect of cytotoxic therapy on wound healing —R. Thomas. 10. Incidence and significance of post-splenectomy infection —R. Thomas. 11. Evaluation of operative staging in Hodgkin's disease —R. Thomas. C. IMMUNOLOGY 1. Immunosuppressive activity of serum factors in pregnancy —G. Clunie. 2. Antibody dependent cellular cytoxicity (ADCC) in human renal allograft recipients —L. Dumble, 1. Macdonald, G. Clunie. 3. Response of ADCC to in vitro steroid — L. Dumble, I. Macdonald, G. Clunie. D. MEDICAL HISTORY 1. The press and the profession —A. Moore. 2. Thc medical mind of Montaigne —A. Moore. E. SURGICAL METABOLISM 1. Evaluation of proximal gastroplasty in thc control of obesity—R. Thomas, I. Nyulasi. 2. Evaluation of nutritional status of head injury patients —R. Thomas, I. Nyulasi. 3. A study of route of delivery of insulin —J. Allsop. 4. Glucose kinetics in insulin dependent diabetics —J. Allsop. 5. Glucose kinetics in elective aortic aneurysm repair —J. Allsop. F. TISSUE PRESERVATION 1. Effect of vasoactive agents in renal ischaemic damage —M. Bronk, H. Ross. 2. Effect of gaseous renal perfusion on renal storage —H. Ross, M. Escott. 3. Prevention of warm ischaemic damage by in vivo flushing— H. Ross, M. Bronk, M. Escott. 213 214 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

G. OTHER PROJECTS 1. A survey of wound infection in surgical patients —H. Ross, M. Gwyther. 2. Development of computer methods for dala handling and analysis —J. Forbes, S. White. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. CLUNIE, G..J. A., GOUGH, I. R., DURY, M., FURNIVAL, C. M. and BOLTON, P. M. — A trial of Imidazole Carboxamide and Corynebacterium parvum in disseminated melanoma: Clinical and immunologic results. Cancer, 46: 475-479 (1980). 2. DUMBLE, L. J., MACDONALD, I. M. and KINCAID-SMITH, P.-Human renal allograft rejection is predicted by serial determinations of antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity. Transplantation, 29: 30-34 (1980). 3. EISMAN, J. A., MARTIN, T. J., MACINTYRE, 1., FRAMPTON, R. J., MOSELEY, J.

A. and WHITEHEAD, R. H. —1,25 dihvdroxy Vitamin D3 receptor in a cultured human breast cell line. BBRC, 93: 9-15 (1980). 4. FORBES, J. F. — Principles of clinical trials. Ludwig Breast Cancer Study Group, in Cancer Research, ed. B. Henningscn, F. Linden and C. Steichele, 71: 190-197 (1980). 5. FORBES, J. F.-Oestrogen receptors, quality or quantity. Lancet, 1: 828 (1980). 6. HARDIE, I. R., STRONG, R. W., HARTLEY, L. C. J., WOODRUFF, P. W. U. and CLUNIE, G. J. A. —Skin cancer in Caucasian renal allograft recipients living in a sub­ tropical climate. Surgerv, 87: 177-183 (1980). 7. JONES, K. D., WHITEHEAD, R. H., GRIMSHAW, D. and HUGHES, L. E.-Lym­ phocyte response to PHA and patient response to chemotherapy in breast cancer. Clin. On­ col., 6: 159-166 (1980). 8. LANGLANDS, A. O., FORBES, J. F. and TATTERSALL, M. H. N.-The treatment of locally advanced breast cancer. A discussion document. Australasian Radiologv, 24: 307-310 (1980). 9. MORTON, H., ROLFE, B. E., McNEIL, L., CLARKE, P., CLARKE, E. M. and CLUNIE, G. J. A. —Early pregnancy factor: tissues involved in its production in thc mouse. J. Reprod. Immunol., 2: 73-82 (1980). 10. ROSS, H. —An aid to the complete visualisation of the bile duct wilh the Storz choledochoscope. Surg. Gynec. Obstet., 150: 574-575 (1980). 11. ROSS, H. and JONAS, R. A. —The results of surgery for carcinoma of the pancreas. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 454-458 (1980). 12. SHUKLA, W. S., WHITEHEAD, R. H. and HUGHES, L. E.-A comparison of ihe mechanism of T-ccll depression following radiotherapy or surgery for Stage III brcasl cancer. Clin. Oncol., 6: 39-47 (1980). 13. THOMAS, R. J. S. —Parenteral nutrition in abdominal fistulae. Gastro Digest Publ. The Digests, Northfield Inc.: 66-67 (1980). 14. THOMAS, R. J. S. — The modifying effect of nutritional intake on the post traumatic deple­ tion of hepatic glycogen in rats. Surgery, 87: 539-544 (1980). 15. THOMAS, R. J. S. and FORBES, J. F.— Somatostatin in peptic ulcer bleeding. Lancet, 2: 200 (1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Doctor of Medicine 1. ALLSOP, J. — Glucose kinetics in vivo and the response to thermal injury.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. DUMBLE, L. J. — Antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity: Application to immune monitoring of renal allograft recipients. 2. HALL, B. R. — Investigation of acoustic impedance measurements in the assessment of human respiratory disease. MSc Thesis in Progress 1. KENT, P. W. — Glucose kinetics in vivo following injury: The role of catecholamines.

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: NH & MRC: Randomized trials in advanced breast cancer. NH & MRC: Serum factors in pregnancy. NH & MRC: Glucose kinetics following injury. SURGERY (ROYAL MELB. HOSP.) 215

Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: Epidemiology and genetics of breast cancer. CIG/Mcdishield A.S.A.: Evaluation and refinement ofa simple carbon dioxide analyser. G. V. Hicks Foundation: Pharmacokinetics of thiopentone in surgical patients. William Buckland Foundation: Oxygen perfusion of the kidney in situ. Travcnol Laboratories: Nutrition and wound healing in cancer. 216 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

SURGERY

DEPARTMENT OF THE HUGH DEVINE PROFESSOR ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL INTRODUCTION Many of thc projects listed below represent continuing research which has previously been recorded. However, important new projects include those related to Nutrition and Surgical Metabolism (Mr C. J. Mullany), Sugical Auditing and Quality Assurance Programmes (Mr B. T. Collopy and Mr G. Brazcnor), Neurosurgical Techniques (Mr J. K. Henderson) and Aspecis of Anaesthesia and Blood Transfusion in Vascular Surgery (Dr M. J. Davies and Dr K. D. Cronin). Amongst the projects previously listed, considerable progress has been made in those related to the Immunology of Cancer and the Melbourne Trial for the Assessment of Surgical Adjuvant Im­ munotherapy for Colorectal Cancer (Mr B. N. Gray) and the work on Hormone Receptors in Breast Cancer, where the large amount of laboratory data which has accumulated over thc last five years is being carefully correlated with thc pathological and clinical features of the tumours (Mr R. J. Mercer). It is a pleasure to record the significant contributions being made in the research field by the part-time and associate members of the department who are actively involved in patient-care and student teaching at St. Vincent's Hospital. As can be seen, this involves clinical and basic research in many different fields of surgery.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. CANCER 1. Studies into the immunogenicity of human and experimental tumours —B. N. Gray, C. T. Walker. 2. Monitoring non-specific serum fractions in cancer patients as a guide to prognosis and recur­ rence—C. T. Walker. 3. Melbourne Trial: Assessment of surgical adjuvant immunotherapy in colorectal cancer using BCG and neuraminidase treated tumour cells —B. N. Gray. 4. Oestrogen receptor assay in carcinoma of the breast —its relationship to the natural history of the tumour and its responsiveness to hormonal manipulation —R. C. Bennett, R. J. Mercer. B. GASTROENTEROLOGY 1. The assessment of the E.E.A. stapler in low anastomosis following anterior resection —J. G. Buls. 2. Anal fissure —comparison of anal dilatation and lateral subcutaneous sphincterotomy —B. T. Collopy. 3. Studies in the healing of colonic anastomoses —P. J. Ryan, R. L. Fink. 4. Value of immunotherapy in treatment of Condylomata accuminata —B. N. Gray. C. VASCULAR SURGERY 1. Thc role of the Doppler flow meter in thc assessment and management of patients with peripheral vascular disease-J. F. Gurry. 2. An investigation into the effectiveness of various drug combinations in thc prevention of post-operative deep vein thrombosis —J. G. Buls. 3. The use of the isolated popliteal arterial segment for bypass grafting in peripheral vascular disease —J. L. Connell. 4. The role of the C.A.T. scan in thc investigation of patients with T.I.A.'s —J. L. Connell. 5. Haemodilution and auto transfusion in vascular surgery —M. J. Davies. 6. Steroid pre-treatment in patients undergoing carotid endarterectomy — K. D. Cronin. 7. The role of spinal anaesthesia in lower limb vascular operations —M. J. Davies. D. TRANSPLANTATION 1. Assessment of ability of transplanted pancreatic islets to reverse diabetes mellitus and pre­ vent vascular complications —B. N. Gray. 2. The monuclear phagocyte systems in immune complex disease —J. E. Moran. E. BONE PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 1. A study of the natural history of avascular necrosis in renal transplant patients —J. H. Rush. 2. Study of the blood supply of the articular surfaces of bone in chronic arthritis, particularly in rheumatoid arthritis —J. H. Rush. SURGERY (ST. VINCENT'S HOSP.) 217

3. Detailed studies on thc fine circulation related to thc vertebral body intervertebral disc inter­ face in the clog —H. V. Crock, M. Goldwasscr. 4. Studies of venous drainage of the hip joint in man —H. V. Crock. 5. Natural history and results of surgical treatment of isolated disc resorption — H. V. Crock. F. CARDIAC SURGERY 1. Thc evaluation of various cardioplegia' solutions in the production of cardioplegia — .!. K. Clarebrough. 2. Trial of mcxiletine in post-operative cardiac arrhythmias —M. B. Higginbotham. 3. Microbiological survey of staphylococcal infection following open heart surgery —J. An­ drew. G. NUTRITION AND METABOLISM 1. Design of a suitable canine model of cirrhosis —C. J. Mullany. 2. Nutritional status of patients with gastrointestinal malignancy — C. J. Mullany, B. Wood. II. GENERAL 1. Thc histopathology of vessels following various microsurgical techniques — T. .1. Baxter. 2. Efficacy of microsurgical anastomosis of scalp arteries to cerebral arteries in treatment of cerebral ischaemia —J. K. Henderson. 3. Technical modifications to improve thc accuracy of trans-sphenoidal surgery of pituitary microadenomas — .!. K. Henderson. 4. Criteria auditing —An on-going study-B. T. Collopy. 5. A detailed punch card system for quality control and peer review within the neurosurgical unit—G. Brazcnor. fi. Survey of hospital-acquired Staph, infection — C. .1. Mullany. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. COLLOPY, B. T. — A Pilot Study in Surgical Audit — Evaluation of Criteria Auditing and a Comparison with Other Systems, private publication, St Vincent's Hospital, Filzroy (1980). Chapters of Books 2. BULS, J. G. — Haemorrhoids. Inflammatory Conditions of the Anorectum; Sexually Transmitted Diseases of thc Anorectum, in S. M. Goldberg, P. H. Gordon and S. Nivat- vongs (eds.), Essentials of Anorectal Surgerv, Lippincott 69, 142, 150 (1980). 3. CROCK, H. V., CHARE P. R. and CROCK, M. C.-La Vascularisation des Os du Poigenl et dc la Main Chcs L'Hommc, in R. T. Masson (ed.), Traite de Chirurgie de la Main, Paris 34: 335 (1980). Articles 4. BAXTER, T. J., GILBERT, A., O'BRIEN, B. McC, SYKES, P. J., VORRATH, .1. W. and BENNETT, R. C —The Histopathologv of Microlvmphaticovenous Anastomosis. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg.. 50: 320 (1980). 5. BENNETT. R. C —Editor and Chairman of Editorial Board. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg.. 50: 679 (1980). 6. BULS, J. G. — Ulcerative Proctitis. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg.. 50: 179 (19S0). 7. CADE, R., COLLOPY, B. T. and RYAN, P.-Routine or Indicated Operative Cholangiography. Aust. N Z. J. Surg., 50: 481 (1980). 8. CARIDIS, D. T. — Thc Combined Use of Antilymphocytic Serum and Bone Marrow Infu­ sion in Immunological Suppression. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 49: 709 (1979). 9. COLLOPY, B. T. — Internal Haemorrhoids: Observations on Their Nature and Classifica­ tion in Relation to Their Management. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 167 (1980). 10. COLLOPY. B. T. and BROWNE, J.-Criteria Auditing: Earlv Experience and Evaluation. Aust. Health Review, 3: 16 (1980). 11. CONNELL, .1. L., DOYLE, J. C. and GURRY, J. F.-Thc Vascular Complications of Cer­ vical Rib. Aust. N.Z. ./. Surg., 50: 125 (1980). 12. CROCK, H. V. —An Atlas of the Arterial Supply of thc Head and Neck of the Femur in Man. Clinical Orthopaedics & Related Research. 152: 17 (1980). 13. DOOLEY, B. J., KUDELKA, P. and MENELAUS, M.-Subcutaneous Rupture of the Tibialis Anterior Tendon. ./. Bone & Joint Surg., 62B: 471 (1980). 14. FINK, R. L. W., CARIDIS, D. T., CHMIEL. R. L. and RYAN, G. — Renal Impairment and Its Reversibility Following Variable Periods of Complete Ureteric Obstruction. Aust. N.Z. J. Si/rg., 50: 77 ('l980). 15. GRAY, B. N. —Surgeon Accuracy in Diagnosis of Liver Metastases at Laparotomy. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 524 (1980). 218 FACULTY OF MEDICINE

16. GRAY, B. N.— Colorectal Cancer: Natural Hisiory of Disseminated Disease. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 643 (1980). 17. ORAY, B. N. — Colorectal Cancer: Modern Treatment of Disseminated Disease: A Review. Ausi. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 647 (1980). 18. JOYCE, J. G. and LENEGHAN, D.-Carcinoma of the Bladder Treated bv Partial or Toial Cystectomy. Ausi. N.Z. J. Surg.. 50: 603 (1980). 19. MORRISON, W. A., O'BRIEN, B. McC. and MacLEOD, A. M.-Thc Surgical Repair of Amputations of the Thumb. Ausi. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 237 (1980). 20. MULLANY, C. J., WOLFE, R. R. and BURKE, J. F.-The Fate of a Glucose Infusion in Fasting and Fed Guinea Pigs: Glucose Oxidation Rates and thc Distribution of Glucose in Liver, Muscle and Adipose Tissue. J. Surg. Research, 29: 116 (1980). 21. O'BRIEN, B. McC.-Thc International Hand Surgerv Congress. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 219 (1980). 22. RUSH, J. H. —Operative Repair of Neglected Rupture of the Tcndo Achilles. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 420 (1980). 23. RYAN, P. -Observations Upon the Aetiology and Treatment of Complete Rectal Prolapse. Aust. N.Z. J. Surg., 50: 109(1980). 24. RYAN, P.-Surgical Management of Peptic Ulcer. Med. J. Ausi. 2: 68 (1980). 25. SOKUCU, N., CARIDIS, D. T. and MORAN, J. - Immunosuppression in Canine Renal Allografts Using Niridazole. Transplantation, 29: 306 (1980). 26. ST.IERNSWARD, J., JORDAN, C, ZELEN, M., BENNETT, R. C. and others-Prin­ ciples of Clinical Trials. Recent Results in Cancer Research, 71: 190 (1980). 27. THOMAS, C. G., CORMAN, M. 1..., GOLDBERG, S. M., LAVERY, I. and BULS, J. G. — Symposium —Rectal Prolapse. Contemporary Surgery, 17: 54 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. GRAY, B. N. — Immunology of Cancer—An Investigation into Methods of Enhancing Host Response to Cancer. MS Thesis in Progress 2. MULLANY, C. J. — Substrate Metabolism in Parenteral Nutrition. MSc Thesis in Progress 3. WALKER, C. T. — Monitoring of Serum Factors in Cancer Patients. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Rowden White Foundation: Assessment of Ability of Transplanted Pancreatic Islets to Reverse Diabetes Mellitus and Prevent Vascular Complications. NH & MRC: Melbourne Trial —Assessment of Surgical Adjuvant Immunotherapy in Patients with Colorectal Cancer. NH & MRC: Thc Mononuclear Phagocyte Systems in Immune Complex Disease. William Angliss (Victoria) Charitable Fund: Investigations of the Fine Circulation of the Vertebral Body Intervertebral Disc Interface of the Spine. Herman Bequest: Monitoring Non-specific Serum Fractions as a Guide to Prognosis and Recur­ rence in Cancer Patients. Utah Foundation: Thc Melbourne Trial —Assessment of Surgical Immunotherapy in Patients with Colorectal Cancer. FACULTY OF MUSIC

INTRODUCTION There continues to bc a growth in thc Faculty's post-graduate area in all three of its main divi­ sions—Composition, Musicology, and Performance. Thc Department's Committee for Research and Post-graduate Studies established in 1976 continues to monitor activities in this area. Thc incorporation of the Grainger Museum into thc Faculty of Music at the end of 1979 made possible a much closer link between the two entities and will in the future encourage students to use the excellent source materials available in the Museum to a much greater extent than before. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Direct Synthesis of Music—B. E. Conyngham, R. P. Harris (Computer Science Dept.) 2. Compositional Assistance Programmes for Computer—B. E. Conyngham. 3. Spatial disposition and location of computer generated sound —B. E. Conyngham, R. P. Harris. 4. Interactive music dala input by means of graphic and alpha numeric means —B. E. Con- vimham. 5. Microcomputer 'real time' sound generation —B. E. Conyngham, R. P. Harris. 6. Neuropsychology of Music Research Project —M. Cooke, A. Gates, B. Morley. 7. Edward Elgar as a late-romantic European composer —P. J. Dcnnison. 9. A New Source of 17th century Italian Keyboard Music —G. A. Cox. 10. Grainger Museum Catalogue Two, Percy Grainger Music Collection Part 11: Music by Other Composers—P. R. Clifford. 11. Thc Vihuela Fantasia: a Comparative History of Styles and Forms (Ph.D., in progress, Monash) 12. The Extra-Musical Benefits of Music Education: wilh Max Cooke. 13. Preparation of a new edition of church music by Purcell, and delivered to thc publishers Novcllo as Purcell Society Edition volume 13 to bc published in 1982.

PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. DREYFUS, K. — Percy Grainger's Kipling Sellings: A study of ihe manuscript sources, Music Monograph 3, The University of Western Australia (1980). Articles 2. DREYFUS, K. — The Grainger Manuscripts in the Sibley Librarv—A conunenlarv The Grainger Journal, 2(2): 18-32 (1980) and 3 (1): 24-27 (1980). 3. McNEILL, R. — Moeran's unfinished symphony. The Musical limes, 1654: 771-777 (1980). 4 O'BRIEN, J. — The Perring Chanties/the Grainger English Folksong Collection Nos. 400-407, Studies in Music, 14: 104-121 (1980). 5. RAD1C, M. T. —A man out of season: G. W. L. Marshall-Hall, Meanjin, 2: 195-211 (1980). 6. WRIGHT, Xi. — Further additions und amendments to ihe listing of Percy Grainger's com­ positions for piano solo, Sludies in Music, 14: 122-126 (1980). 7. GRIFFITHS, J. — "The Lutes in the Museo Municipal de Musica in Burccloriu", journal of ihe lute Society of America, XII (1979), 48-66. Recordings 8. GRIFFITHS, J.-(with R. Bandt, H. Newnham, R. Wilkinson). La Romanesca, Love Lvrics and Romances of Renaissance Spain, (Move Records. MS 3034). 9. GRIFFITHS, J. — The Voices of Fire: Half hour ABC TV production in scries "Thc Music Makers". Major Performances 10. GRIFFITHS, J. —La Romanesca toured thc eastern states for Musica Viva in July and August. Festival of Early Music at Lambing Flat, Performances and Workshops. 11. TAHOURDIN, P.-DIALOGUE No. 3, Nancy and Bertram Turcizky. First performance, Universiiy of California ai San Diego. March 31, 1980. SAN DIEGO PIECE, first performance, Universiiy of California at San Diego, March 31, 19S0. 12. BRl.MER, M.-Thc 32 Piano Sonaias of Beethoven presented in 10 introduced recitals by Professor Michael Brimcr. 13. COX, C —"Five Centuries of English Organ Music" at Mclba Hall during the Melbourne In- lernalional Festival of Organ and Harpsichord—16 May 1980. One recital in Complete Bach Organ Works series-Toorak Uniting Church, 29 July 1980. 219 220 FACULTY OF MUSIC

Compositions 14. TAHOURDIN, P. —GRAFFITI —an entertainment lor children and adults for soprano, mezzo soprano, tenor, baritone; instrumental ensemble and visual displav. SAN DIEGO PIECE for four clarinet tape. Thesis Passed for Higher Degrees 1. BLACKBURN, A. - "Styles in the Church Music of Henry Purcell". Theses in Progress 1. CALLAGHAN, M. A. —.4 comparison of Ihe music of certain selected puhlic schools in ihe U.K. with that of selected independent schools of a similar type in Australia. 2. CHAPLIN, P. J.-Polio of Compositions. 3. CURTAIN, J. C.-History of St. Patrick's Cathedral. 4. DIVALL, R. S. — "Pre-Keforin" opera seria of Gluck (1741-65) and an addition of the Dramatic Pallet "Allessandro". 5. ERDONMEZ, D. E. —Factors determining preference for music in hospitalised psychiatric patients. 6. GREEN, N. J.—Composition. 7. HALLO, R. Wl.-Performance (Harp). 8. HARVIE, P. ].-Performance. 9. JAYASUNDERA, M. — Michael Tippett. 10. MORGAN, I. Wl.-Performance. 11. ROSS, D. I.-Aspecis of Grainger's Vocal Music. 12. MeDONALD, J. L. — 17th Century English Music. 13. McNEILL, R. ). — The music of E. J. Moeran and its Relationship to early 20th century trends in the British Isles. 14. MURPHY, K. R. — The Music Criticism of Hector Berlioz. 15. STEVENS, C — Computer Music Communication Design as a reflection. 16. HOWARD, Yi.-Composition. 17. RUFF, M. — Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Australian Piano Music. 18. SABEINSKIS, P. V. — Percussion in 20th century Western Music emphasizing the years 1950 to the present. 19. SCHULZ, D. — Performance. 20. SMALLWOOD, YK.-Composition. 21. STAVRIDIS, K. — Performance (Piano). 22. STEVENS, S. M.-Primary Music Education. 23. STEVENSON, A. C-Composition. 24. STOCKIGT, J. Yi. — Baroque Performance Difficulties wilh particular reference lo ihe Baroque Oboe. 25. TAYLOR, C. J.- Performance (Piano). 26. THOMAS, A. A. — An examination of the approaches to and the teaching of contemporary music in Ternary Music Institutions in California and U.K. 27. WEL1.INGS, J. G.-l.iszl. 28. WHIFFIN, L. S.-Folio of Compositions. 29. WOLIANSKY, A.-Performance. 30. WRIGHT, E. A. —Percy Grainger. Solo piano music. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Australia-Japan Foundation. Utah Foundation. Australian Research Grants Commission. FACULTY OF SCIENCE

DEAN'S REPORT Research endeavours in ihc Faculty ol'Science in 1980 were, perhaps, more intense lhan ever before. The success rate of submissions for support for new protects was higher than in 1979, so that researchers were encouraged also by thc knowledge that Ihe total A.R.G.C. allocations for the continuation of their current work would not diminish even though the general lack of research funds is a drastic constraint. In ihc present situation Faculty is all ihe more appreciative of every means of support. One major project which is supported by valuable funds from industry is on the thermal history of sediments. While ihc aim is "pure" research, thc results could bc of significance to petroleum exploration. Another recent stimulus has been support from the Universiiy Develop­ ment Grant for a project in Marine Plankton. During thc year there was continued participation in each of the voyages arranged by V.I.M.S. for the Bass Strait Study Programme. This has been especially valuable for studies of plankton, sediments and water movement and composition. Some of thc other marine work has been facilitated by the further development of the Zoology held station at Rhyll. Collaboralion with other institutes has continued unabated. In a Physics projocl with scientists at A.N.U., magnetic properties of short-lived nuclear slates arc being smdied using recently discovered effects between the magnetic fields in a thin iron foil and products of nuclear interactions. R.A.A.F. Physics has been constructing secondary mirror systems for use wilh both thc Anglo-Australian and the A.N.U. telescopes at Siding Springs: they arc aimed to give an important" improvement in thc detection of infra-red sources. The acoustic wind finding system which has been developed in thc same department is proving of interest lo authorities con­ cerned with the forecasting and control of air pollution. A collaboralion with chemists ol the Argonne National Laboratory (U.S.A.) is now in its tenth year. Fundamental processes in thc in- tcraction of high intensity radiation with gases such as in plasmas and in some processes in lasers, are being investigated. Support for piojccls which have specific public interest is also of great value 10 Faculty. For example the synthesis of some natural quinone systems has been particularly successful: this work, which is supported by thc Anli-Canccr Council of Victoria can lead to the preparation of anti­ cancer drugs. Thc Wheat Industry is supporting studies in which the essential factors leading to periodic outbieaks of ihe mice plagues in hay slacks arc being investigated ai Ml. Dcrrimult: as a consequence, an unintentional impetus has been given to studies of the migration and behaviour of tiger snakes. Larval implant trials on sheep at the University Research Farm, Strathlicldsaye, have shown lhat insecticidal residues in the fleece influence some aspects of ihe experiments many mon­ ths after they have ceased to protect against blowfly strike. Strathlicldsaye laboratory facilities are also a base for ecological and genetic studies on the wingless grasshopper, Phaulucridium, a pasture pest. Significant researches continue on Phytophthora cinnamoinii, which causes widespread "dieback" in Australian forests. A recent development is thc use of techniques of biological recognition from which il has been found thai in one type of firsl infection particular sugar residues ol" the root slime of ihc plain arc recognised by receptors in the moiilc fungal zoospores. The same recognition techniques continue to yield important results in the major study ol" ihc biochemical and microscopic processes of pollination. For an extensive appreciation of ihc present programme of research it is necessary io consult each of the departmental reports. While the listing of research according io departments is conve­ nient and logical, it docs noi make obvious ihe ever-developing interconnection between ihe disciplines in this and in other faculties. In 1980 some of these liaisons were in projects in: marine sciences antarctic studies mathematics, physics and chemistry meteorology and mathematics biology, biochemistry and chemistry human, animal and microbial genetics geology and biology recognition and immunology in life sciences vision research Such features of thc overall programme can bc, sometimes, the cause of extremely important advances in knowledge and arc among ihe many intrinsic research potentials which develop in a multidisciplinary faculty.

221 222 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

BOTANY

INTRODUCTION Thc Botany School has been fortunate in being well supported by outside funds for research and also in having a number of Research Fellows and distinguished visiting research workers dur­ ing the year. Dr Arnold van der Valk is spending his faculty improvement leave from thc Depart­ ment of Botany, Iowa State Universiiy, Ames in the Department, bringing to Melbourne his knowledge of wetland ecology and applying this to a programme investigating nitrogen fixation in intertidal communities. Dr D. W. Klumpp holds a Melbourne University Research Fellowship and has initiated a co-operative project, particularly wilh the Department of Organic Chemistry, iden­ tifying the food chains in intertidal communities. Dr Adrienne Hardham has come to thc Department from Carlcton University, Oitawa sup­ ported by a Queen Elizabeth 11 Fellowship, and is working on ihe control of polarity during em­ bryo development. Dr Elizabeth Williams, Melbourne University Research Fellow from the New Zealand Department of Scientific and Industrial Research, is working with Professor Knox on the physiology of incompatibility and reproduction. Dr Paul Gabrielson, from the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill and Dr Michael Foster, from thc Moss Landing Marine Laboratories, California, joined the Department towards the end of the year and are working with thc marine group. Our research associates have continued their scholarly botanical researches in thc Botany School, Dr Sophie Ducker her historical researches on the early collectors, particularly those associated with marine botany, and she has collaborated in several research projects on thc marine algae and the seagrasses. Dr. lima Stone is extending her major work on the mosses of southern Australia to a study of the mosses of northern Australia supported by the A.R.G.C. We congratulate Dr F. G. Lennox, Professorial Associate in thc Department, on the rare honour of being elected a life member of the Australian Biochemical Society. Dr Lennox has established a Phytochemical Club, of which he has been President for three years, which meets an­ nually in the Botany School to promote collaboration between botanists and chemists involved in research on the formation, structure and properties of compounds synthesised by plants. One of the major new developments in Antarctic Studies is now well established in thc Botany School. In the 1979/80 season we had ten visits to thc Antarctic mainland and sub-Antarctic islands. From these, major collections of marine, freshwater and land plants (mainly algae) have been made and investigation of these organisms, which live close to the limits of life on earth, con­ tinues at the Botany School. During one of these visits a Botany School Research Associate, Dr J. F. Jenkin, was able to spend some time on McDonald Island, possibly the first occasion that col­ lections have been made from this Australian territory. As can be seen in the following list of projects and publications, 1980 has been an active and productive year for the Bolany School, wilh a large number of scientific papers and reports published.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. AEROBIOLOGY 1. Pollen and spores in thc Melbourne atmosphere: a 5-ycar survey—R. B. Knox. 2. A pollen calendar for Melbourne— R. B. Knox. B. ANTARCTIC BOTANY 1. Taxonomic and ecological studies on Antarctic terrestrial and freshwater algae —P. A. Broady, R. C. Garrick, M. D. Burch, A. G. Davey, G. Anderson. 2. Studies on Ihe structure and floristics of terrestrial communities on the Antarctic con­ tinent — D. H. Ashton, D. M. Calder, J. F. Jenkin. 3. Litter decomposition on Macquarie Island —E. Kerry, G. M. Weste. 4. Mycological studies of Antarctic soils-E. Kerry, G. M. Wcsic. 5. Taxonomy and ecology of benthic marine algae of Macquarie Island —G. T. Kraft, R. W. Ricker. 6. Ecophysiological studies of sea-ice algae—R. Wetherbee, G. McFadden.

C. AQUATIC BOTANY 1. The biology of Australian seagrasses: development of thc male and female inflorescences of Amphibolis antarctica — S. C. Ducker, C. McConchie, R. B. Knox. 2. The biology of Australian seagrasses: pollen development and the mechanism of pollination in Amphibolis antarctica and other Australian seagrasses —S. C. Ducker, J. M. Pettill, R. B. Knox, C. McConchie. BOTANY 223

D. CELL BIOLOGY 1. Development and mechanism of cohesion in the composite pollen of Acacia — R.B. Knox, J. B. Kcnrick, l-l. I. M. V. Vithanage. 2. Events of pollination and interspecific hybridization in Acacia — R. B. Knox, J. B. Kcnrick. 3. Localization of allergens in thc pollen of ryegrass, Lolium perenne, by im- munocytochemistry—R. B. Knox, B. J. Howlett, H. 1. M. V. Vithanage. 4. Pollen-stigma interactions and physiology of self-incompatibility in sweet cherry, Primus avium — R. B. Knox, J. Raff. 5. S-gene expression and physiology of self-incompatibility in wild tomato, Lycopersicum peru­ vianum— R. B. Knox, E. G. Williams. 6. Interspecific incompatibility in thc genus Rhododendron — R. B. Knox, E. G. Williams, J. L. Rouse. 7. Cytology and histochemistry of pollination in Rhododendron — R. B. Knox, E. G. Williams, J. L. Rouse, O. B. Lawson. S. Quantitative histochemistry of R. N. A. associated with basal sterility during floral develop­ ment in wheat —R. B. Knox, J. A. Considine, O. H. Frankel. 9. Tissue origins and cell lineages in thc developing dermal system of fruit of thc grape, Vitis vinifera— R. B. Knox, .1. A. Considine. 10. Allergenicity of Acacia pollen-R. B. Knox, B. J. Howlett, D. .1. Hill. 11. Plant cell recognition —pollen-stigma interactions in Gladiolus gandavensis— R.B. Knox. A. E. Clarke, P. A. Glecson, S-L. Mau, R. Hoggart. 12. Plant cell recognition-pollen-stigma interactions in Primus avium —R. B. Knox, A. E. Clarke, S-L. Mau, J. Raff. 13. Plant cell recognition —pollen stigma interactions in Lolium perenne — A. E. Clarke, R. B. Knox, B. J. Howlett. 14. Plant cell recognition —pollen stigma interactions. Antigenic determinants of plant organs and their cultured callus cells —A. E. Clarke, .1. Raff, T. Meimcth. 15. Plant pathogen recognition —G. M. Weste, A. E. Clarke, .1. flinch, J. Ralton. 16. Establishment of polarity in developing embryos —A. E. Hardham. 17. Localization of surface receptors in fungal zoospores —A. E. Clarke, A. E. Hardham, J. Hindi. 18. Surface slimes of Antarctic diatoms —R. Wetherbee, A. E. Clarke.

E. ECOLOGY AND CONSERVATION 1. Ecology and regeneration of Eucalyptus regnans at Wallaby Creek — D. H. Ashton. 2. Thc ecology of Callitris columellaris and various eucalypts in north-eastern Victoria and the southern Riverina —K. A. Clayton-Greene, D. 1-1. Ashton. 3. The ecology of Ironbark Basin, Aircy's Inlet, Victoria—D. H. Ashton, D. Robertson. 4. Factors affecting eucalypt establishment in decadent Acacia venicillaia scrub at Wilson's Promontory— D. H. Ashton, J. Chappill. 5. T he patterns of grassland and shrubland on the Bogong High Plains in relation to cattle disturbance —D. H. Ashton, R. J. Williams. 6. Water relations of Eucalvplus behriana and E. microcarpa at Melton, Victoria —T. F. Neales, D. H. Ashton, B. A. Myers. 7. The salt marshes of Lincolnshire, England —D. M. Calder. 8. Ecology and conservation of coastal communities in Australia —D. M. Calder. 9. Variation in Eucalyptus obliqua occurring on acidic and calcareous soils. — P. Y. Ladiges, C. A. Anderson. 10. Variation in Eucalyptus buxteri and E. alpina and an analysis of the ecological boundary be­ tween thc two species—P. Y. Ladiges, J. C. Marginson. 11. Classification of Victorian weilands— P. Y. Ladiges, M. M. Barson. 12. The biology of Ehrharla ereciu— P. Y. Ladiges, S. Mclntyre. 13. Variation in leaf characters of Acacia dealbala— P. Y. Ladiges, S. Guest. 14. Variation in Eucalyptus brookerana and its relationship with other species within the Series Ovatae —P. Y. Ladiges.

F. ECOLOGICAL PHYSIOLOGY 1. Nitrogen cycling in forests —P. M. Attiwill, M. A. Adams, T. G. Baker. 2. Nitrogen fixation in forests and inieriidal communities —P. M. Attiwill, T. G. Baker. A. van der Valk. 3. Rubidium as a tracer for potassium in forests—P. M. Attiwill, .1. Pederick. 4. Photosynthesis and productivity of forests —P. M. Attiwill, R. O. Squire, K. A. Clayton- Greene. 5. Productivity of seagrasses —P. M. Attiwill, A. J. Mason. 6. Food chains in seagrass communities — D. W. Klumpp. 224 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

G. EVOLUTION, SYSTEMATICA AND TAXONOMY 1. Studies on the Loranlhaccac— D. M. Calder. 2. Floral biology of mistletoes-D. M. Calder, P. Bernhardt. 3. Variation and evolution of Craspedia glauca—D. M. Calder, J. M. Martin. 4. A world monograph on the genus Blechnum —J. C. Chambers. 5. Cuticular studies on Lower Cretaceous members of the Bcnnettitales —T. C. Chambers, A. N. Drinnan. 6. Studies on thc Siluro-Devonian land Mora of Victoria —T. C. Chambers, J. D. Tims. 7. Pollen analyses of Victorian Quaternary deposits —S. L. Duigan. 8. T axonomy of Victorian angiosperms —S. L. Duigan. 9. Variation in Eucalyptus brookerana and its relationship within the scries Ovatae— P. Y. Ladiges. 10. A taxonomic investigation and critical revision of mosses in the Orders Dicranalcs and Pot- tiales —I. G. Stone. 11. A study of Weissia subgenus Astomum in Australia— I. G. Stone. 12. A survey of the Coniferalcs in preparation for a cladistic study of the evolution of the gym- nosperms — T. C. Chambers, M. Regan, C. J. Humphries.

H. MYCOLOGY 1. A study of leaf-inhabiting fungi — H. .1. Swan. 2. A study of infection in the leaves of Eucalyptus by neurotrophic and biotrophic fungi — H. .1. Swart, M. A. Williamson. 3. Vegetation changes in native forest associated with invasion by Phytophthora cin­ namomi— G. M. Weste. 4. Survival of Phvtophthora cinnamomi in non-sterile "soils" —G. M. Weste. 5. Changes in root tissue phvsiologv with infection bv Phvtophthora cinnamomi —C. M. Weste, D. M. Cahill. 6. Water relations of diseased forest plants —Ci. M. Weste, P. Dawson. 7. A comparison of root-associated fungal flora of susceptible and resistant plants in diseased and disease-free forest — G. M. Weste, H. J. Swart, Yip Hin Yuen. S. Thc physiology of root-rot caused by Phytophthora cinnamomi- A. E. Clarke, G. M. Weste, J. Hinch. 9. The influence of Phytophthora cinnamomi on plant mineral content —G. M. Weste, M. A. Chaudhri (Director of Medical Research, Austin Hospital), M. Haukka (Geology Depart­ ment, University of Melbourne). 10. New Victorian Ascomycetes —G. M. Wcstc, G. Beaton.

I. PHYCOLOGY 1. A history of Australian botany —S. C. Ducker. 2. A study of siphonous green algae of the eastern Australian coast - S. C. Ducker, G. T. Kraft. 3. Studies on selected species, genera and families of marine red algae — G. T. Kraft. 4. Distribution and ecology of marine algae in northern Port Phillip Bay —G. T. Kraft. 5. Deep water algae of the Great Barrier Reef —G. T. Kraft. 6. T he marine algae of Lord Howe Island —G. T. Kraft. 7. The marine algae of Macquarie Island —G. T. Kraft, R. W. Rickcr. 8. Culture and life histories of red algae —G. T. Kraft, J. Huisman. 9. Processes of subcellular evolution in the red algae—R. Wetherbee. 10. Post fertilization development in select genera of the Nemalionales —R. Wetherbee. S. M. Ramm. 11. Ultrastructural investigations of deep-water red algae from thc Great Barrier Reef—R. Wetherbee, E. J. Scott. 12. Red algal parasites: recognition and treatment — R. Wetherbee, H. Quirk. 13. Biology of Antarctic sea-ice microalgac —R. Wetherbee, G. McFadden, M. MeConville. 14. Guide to the common phytoplankton genera of Port Phillip Bav and thc Bass Strait —R. Wetherbee, G. T. Kraft, K. Blaze.

J. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY 1. Ozone pollution ell'ects on plants—D. M. Calder, D. C. Horsman. 2. The physiology of the tolerance to salt of thc halophyte, Disphyma australc — P. J. Sharkey, T. F. Neales. 3. Thc ell'ects of salinity on strawberry clover, Trifolium fragiferunt — T. F. Neales, M. Eraser. 4. T he degree of salt tolerance of Cakile marilima — T. E. Neales, P. O'Neill.

5. The CO2 assimilation by pineapple plants —T. F. Neales, P. J. M. Sale (CSIRO Division of Irrigation Research). 6. The effects of environmental factors on the gas exchange of Pinus radiant —V. M. Attiwill. T. F. Neales, R. O. Squire. BOTANY 225

7. Thc comparative leaf physiology of live species of" Eucalypt — D. H. Ashton, T. F. Neales, B. A. Myers. 8. Nitrogen cycling in marine macrophytes off Werribee — K. S. Rowan, S. C. Ducker. 9. Effect of light intensity on growth and rate of apparent photosynthesis of Vallisneria — K. S. Rowan. 10. Root/shoot relationships of Eucalyptus wilh special reference to root physiology — K. S. Rowan. 11. Changes in impedance ratio in ripening tomato fruits — K. S. Rowan. 12. Pigments in Rivularia species— K. S. Rowan. 13. Podolactonc-likc inhibitors in conifers —J. M. Sasse. 14. Growth-inhibiting substances in Garrya elliptica — 3. M. Sasse, D. Cameron (Chemistry Department, University of Melbourne). 15. Structure-activity relationships of naturally-occurring growth inhibitors —J. M. Sasse. 16. Naturally-occurring regulators of auxin transport —.1. M. Sasse, G. E. Katckar (CSIRO, Canberra). 17. Structure-activity relationships of synthetic gibberellins —J. M. Sasse, L. Mander (A.N.U.), B. G. Coombe (Waite Institute). IS. Phvsiologv of new nalurallv-occurring plant-growth regulators-J. M. Sasse, N. B. Man- dava (USDA), G. Buta (USDA). K. PHYTOCHEMISTRY 1. Studies on selected components of vegetable tanning agents —F. G. Lennox. 2. Variation in the pattern of fluorescent polyphenols from liorya nitidu growing at various sites in Australia—F. G. Lennox. 3. Fluorescent patterns obtained from the leaves of Hakeu ulicinu growing in south-eastern Australia — F. G. Lennox. 4. Extension of field studies on Eucalvplus ovata and related species to a chromatographic com­ parison of seedlings from the same species - F. G. Lennox. 5. The use of chromatography for the detection of hybridization between Eucalyptus regnans and other species of Eucalypt — I". G. Lennox.

PUBLISHED W'OKK Book 1. CHAMBERS, C, KEENAN, F. and JONES, P.-Guidelines for the Management of Valuable Man-made Landscapes, Management Aid No. 4, Royal Australian Institute of Parks and Recreation, A.C.T. (1980). Chapters of Books 2. KNOX, R. B. and CLARKE, A. E. — Discrimination of Self and Non-self in Plants, in Con­ temporary Topics in Inununobiologv, eds. J. J. Marchalonis and N. Cohen, Plenum Publ. Corp., 9:' 1-36 (1980). 3. NEALES, T. F. —Potential and Actual Rates of Transpiration, in The Theory and Measure­ ment of Plant-Soil Water Relations, cd. R. E. Munns, Universitv ol" Western Australia: 34-43 (1980).' 4. NEALES, T. t-.— Different Approaches to the Measurement of Transpiration —in The Theorv and Measurement of Plant-Soil Relations, cd. R. E. Munns, University of Western Australia: 111-112 (1980). 5. WESTE, G. M. —Environmental Factors Controlling Severity of Disease due to Phvtophthoru cinnamomi in Victoria, in Microbial Ecology, Proceedings in Life Sciences, cd. M. W. Loutit and J. A. R. Miles, Springer-Verlag, Berlin: 369-371 (1978). 6. WESTE, Ci. M. —The Plant Communities — Suscepiiblc, Vulnerable, Resistant, in Phvtophthora and Forest Management in Australia, ed. K. M. Old, CSIRO, Melbourne: 7-14 (1979).

Articles 7. ASHFORD. A. E. and KNOX, R. B.-Characteristics of pollen diffusatcs and pollen-wall cytochemistry in poplars. J. Cell Sci., 44: 1-17 (1980). S. ATTIWILL. P. M. — Nutrient cvcline in a Eucalvplus obliqua (L'Herit.) forest. IV. Nutrient uptake and nutrient return. Aust. Lliol., 2S: 199-222 (1980). 9. ATTIWILL, p. M. and CLOUGH, B. E.-Carbon dioxide and water vapour exchange in the while mangrove. Photosvnlhetica, 14: 40-47 (1980). 10. BEATON, G. and WESTE, G. M.-A check list of the Victorian Pyrcnomycctcs and Loculoaxomvcctes. Vict. Nal.. 97: 65-67 (1980). 11. BEATON, G. and WESTE, G. M.-A check list ol" Viclorian Gastcromvcetes. Vict. Nal.. 97: 165-169 (1980). 12. BERNHARDT, P.-Orchids of Darkness. Garden, 4: 12-14 (1980). 226 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

13. BERNHARDT, P., KNOX. R. B. and CALDER, D. M. — Floral biology and self- incompalibilitv in some Australian mistletoes of Amvema (Loranihaccac). Ansl. J. Bui., 28: 437-451 (1980). 14. CANTERFORD, G. S. —Formation and regeneration of abnormal cells of the marine diatom Phylum brighlwellii (West) Grunow. ./. mar. biol. Ass. U.K.. 60: 243-253 (1980). 15. CANTERFORD, G. S. and CANTERFORD, D. R. —Toxicity of heavy metals to the marine diatom Ditvlum brighlwellii (West) Grunow: correlation between toxicity and metal specia­ tion. ./. mar. biol. Ass. U.K.. 60: 227-242 (1980). 16. CATCHESIDE, D. G. and STONE, I. G.-The peristome of Ischvrodon lepturus (Tavl.) Schelpc. J. Bryol.. II: 99-104 (1980). 17. CLARKE, A. E„ ABBOTT, A., MANDEL, T. and PETT1TT, J.-Organization ofthe wall lavcrs of the stigmalic papilli of Gladiolus gandavensis: a freeze fracture studv. J. Ullraslruci. lies., 73: (1980). 18. CLOUGH, B. P. and ATTIWILL, P. M. — Primary productivity of Zostera mnelleri Irmisch ex Aschers. in Westernport Hay (Victoria, Australia). Aquatic Botany, 9: 1-13 (1980). 19. GLEESON, P. A. and CLARKE, A. E.— Comparison of the structure of the major com­ ponents of the stigma and stvlc secretions of Gladiolus: thc arabino-3,6-galactans. Car­ bohydrate Research, 83: 187-192 (1980). 20. GLEESON, P. A. and CLARKE, A. E. — Arabinogalaclans of sexual and somatic tissues of Gladiolus and Lilium. Phytochem., 19: 1777-1782 (1980). 21. GLEESON, P. A. and CLARK, A. E. — Antigenic determinants of a plant proteoglycan, the Gladiolus stvlc arabinogalactan protein. Biochem. J., 191 (2): 437-447 (1980). 22. HARDHAM, A. E., GREEN, P. B. and LANG, .1. M. — Reorganization of cortical microtubules and cellulose deposition during leaf formation in Grapiopetahun paraguayense. Planta, 149: 181-195 (1980). 23. HINCII, J. M. and CLARKE, A. E. —Adhesion of fungal zoospores to root surfaces is mediated bv carbohydrate determinants ofthe root slime. Phvsiol. Plant Path., 16: 303-307 (1980). 24. HINCII, J. M. and WESTE, Ci. M. — Behaviour of Phytophthora cinnamomi zoospores in roots of Australian forest species. Aust. J. Bol., 27: 679-681 (1979). 25. HORSMAN, D. C, NICHOLLS, A. O. and CALDER, D. M.-Growih responses of Dac- lylis tilonierula, Lolium perenne and Phalaris aqualica to chronic ozone exposure. Ausi. ./. Plant Physiol., 7: 511-517 (1980). 26. KLUMPP, D. W'. —The characteristics of arsenic accumulation by Ihc seaweeds Fucus spiralis and Ascophyllum nodosum. Mar. Biol., 58: 257-264 (1980). 27. KLUMPP, D. W. — The accumulation of arsenic from water and food bv Liltorina littoralis and Nucella lupillus. Mar. Biol., 58: 265-274 (1980). 28. KNOX, R. B., VITHANAGE, H. 1. M. V. and HOWLETT, B. J.-Botanical im- munoevtochemistrv: a review with special reference to pollen antigens and allergens. Hislochem. J., 12: 247-272 (1980). 29. NEALES, T. F. —Thc control of leaf photosynthesis rate by the level of assimilate'concentra­ tion in the leaf: a review of the hypothesis. (Citation Classic) Current Contents, 18: 12 (1980). 30. NEALES, T. I\, SALE, P. .1. M. and MEYER, C. P.-Carbon dioxide assimilation by Pineapple plains, Ananas cumosus (L.) Merr. II. Effects of variation of the day/night tempcraiurc regime. Aust. J. Plant Phvsiol., 7: 375-385 (1980). 31. PARR-SMITH, G. A. and CALDER, D. M.-A triplex vesicaria Hew. ex Benih. and relaicd species: taxonomy and variation, in Studies of the Australian Arid Zone. IV. Chenopod Shrublands, R. D. Gractz and K. M. W. Howes, CSIRO Division of Land Resources Management: 17-28 (1979). 32. PET'l iTT, J. M., McCONCHIE, C. A., DUCKER, S. C. and KNOX, R. B. — Unique adap­ tations for submarine pollination in seagrasses. Nature, 286: 487-489 (1980). 33. QUIRK, H. M. and WETHERBEE, R. -Structural studies on ihc host-parasite relationship between the red algae Flobnsella and Gracilaria. Micron., II: 511-512 (1980). 34. RAFF, J., McKENZIE, I. l-.C. and CLARKE, A. E.-Antigenic determinants of Primus avium arc associated with thc proioplasl surface. Z. Pflanzenphysiol.. 98: 225-234 (1980). 35. RAMM-ANDERSON, S. M.—Comparative line structural aspecis of post-fertilization development in thc Nemalionalcs (Rhodophyta). Micron.. 11: 517-518 (1980). 36. REID, D. A. - A monograph of ihc Australian species of Amanita Pcrs. ex Hook. (Fungi). Ausi. J. Bot. Suppl. Ser., 8: 1-97 (1980). 37. ROBERTS, D. C. and SWART. H. .1. - Conidium wall structure in Seiridium and Monochaetiu. Trans. Br. mycol. Soc, 74: 289-296 (1980). 3S. SALE, P. J. M. and NEALES, T. F. — Carbon dioxide assimilation by Pineapple plants. Ananas comosus (L.) Merr. I. Effects of daily irradiencc. Ausi. J. Plant Phvsiol., 7: 363-373 (1980). 39. SEPPELT, R. D — A studv of Dilrichum difficile with special reference to Australian material. J. Bryol.. II: 33-41 (1980). BOTANY 227

40. SEPPELT. R. D. — Ditriclniin brachvcarpum, D. calcureum and D. subbrachvcarpuin in Australasia. J. Bryol., II: 43-48 (1980). 41. SMART, I. J. and KNOX, R. B — Rapid batch fractionation of ryegrass pollen allergens. Im. Archs. Allergv appl. Imimm., 62: 179-187 (1980). 42. SMITH, P. R. and NEALES, T. E.-The effect of peach rosette and decline disease on the translocation of assimilates in peach trees. Physiol. Plain Path., 16: 383-389 (1980). 43. STONE, I. G. — Acaulon ereinico/u, a new moss from thc Australian arid zone. J. Brvol., 10: 467-474 (1979). 44. STONE, 1. C — Phascopsis rubicundu, a new genus and species of Pottiaccac (Musci) from Australia. J. Bryol., II: 17-31 (1980). 45. STONE, l.G. — Weissia subgenus Aslomuin in Australia and some comments on the affinity of Viriclivellus. J. Bryol.. II: 231-243 (1980). 46. VITHANAGE, H. I. M. V., GLEESON, P. A. and CLARKE, A. E.-The nature of callose produced during self-pollination in Secale cereale. Planta, I4S: 498-509 (1980). 47. VITHANAGE, H. I. M. V., HOWLETT, B. J. and KNOX, R. B. — Localization of grass pollen allergens bv immunocyiochemistrv. Micron., II: 411 (1980). 48. VITHANAGE, H. I. M. V. and KNOX. R. B. - Periodicity of pollen development and quantitative cvlochcmistrv of exine and inline enzvmes in thc grasses Lolium perenne I . and Pharluris tuberosa L. Ann. Bot., 45: 131-141 (I9S0). 49. WESTE, G. M. — The invasion of Viclorian native forests by Phytophthora cinnamomi. (In­ ternal.) Phytophthora Newsletter, 8: 4-5 (1980). 50. WESTE, G. M.—Thc cinnamon fungus, Phytophthora cinnamomi. and the home garden. Australian Plants, 10: 270-271 (19S0). 51. WESTE, Ci. M. and CAHILL, D. — Changes in root cell permeability as a result of penetra­ tion bv Phytophthora cinnamomi. (Internal.) Phvtophthora Newsletter, S: 3 (19S0). 52. WESTE, G. M. and VITHANAGE, K. — Production of sporangia by Phylophiora cin­ namomi in forest soils. (Internal.) Phytophthora Newsletter, 8: 3-4 (1980). 53. WETHERBEE, R. — Post fertilization development in thc red alga Polysiphonia. 1. Prolifera­ tion ofthe carposporophyte. J. Uliraslmci. Pes., 70: 259-274 (1980). 54. WETHERBEE, R. and SCOTT, E. J. -The line structure and distribution of "transfer con­ nections" in the red alga Polysiphonia. Micron., II: 509-510 (1980). Reports 55. BROADY, P. A. — Investigations on terrestrial algae in the vicinity of Mawson Station and at thc Vest fold Hills in 1979-80. Melbourne University Programme in Antarctica Studies MUPAS Report No. 7(17 March, 1980). 56. BROADY, P. A . - Thc ecology of sublithic terrestrial algae at the Vest fold Hills, Antarctica. MUPAS Report No. 2 (Oct.7980). 57. BROADY. P. A.—Thc ecology of chasmolilhic algae at coastal locations of Antarctica. MUPAS Repon No. 27 (Nov. i980). 58. BROADY, P. A. — Ecological and taxonomic observations on subaerial cpilithic algae from Princess Elizabeth Land and MacRobcrtson Land, Antarctica. MUPAS Report No. 28 (Oct. 1980). 59. BROWN, V. B., DUCKER, S. C. and ROWAN, K. S.-The effect of sewage diluent on the macrophytes oil'Werribee, Port Phillip Bay. Report for Ministry for Conservation. Victoria i i 980). 60. CLUCAS, R. D. and LADIGES, P. Y.-Die-back of Phragmites australis and increased salinity in the Gippsland Lakes. Publ. 292: Environmental Studies Series, Ministry for Con­ servation (1980).

THESES PASSED EOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor oj Philosophy 1. GLEESON, P. A. —Characterization of carbohydrate polymers associated wilh pollination in Gladiolus and Secale. 2. MEYER, C. P. —The regulation oj gas exchange in Kalanchoc duigramontiana Hamcl et Perrier. 3. TIMS, .1. D. .1.- 77ie early land flora of Victoria. 4. WILLIS, E. 3. — Allelopathy and its role in forests of Eucalyptus regnans. i\ taster of Science 5. BROWN, V. B.-The effects of sewage eljluenl on Ihe macrophytes o/f Werribee, fori Phillip Bay. 6. CLUCAS, R. D. — Aspecis of ihe biology oj 'Phragmites australis. 7. EARAGI IER, J. D. - The physiology of anihocyanin production in apple skin. 8. GLEADOW. R. - Ecology of Pitiosporum undulatum. 228 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

9. 11ARRISON, T. P. —Calcification and the effect of orthophosphate in Corallina officinalis /_. 10. REEDER. M. C — The development of the shoot and root Hibbertia. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ANDERSON, C. A. — The variation in Eucalyptus obliqua growing on calcareous and acidic soils in the Otway Ranges. 2. BAKER, T. G. — Studies in ihe distribution and cycling of nitrogen in forests. 3. BARSON, M. M. — Plant ecology of wetlands on ihe basalt plains of Victoria. 4. BERNHARDT, P. - The pollination biology of some Australian plants. 5. CLAYTON-GREENE, P. A. — The ecological relationships of Callitris columellaris and Eucalyptus species in Victoria. 6. HINCH, .1. M. - Physiology of root roi in Phytophthora cinnamomi. 7. HOWLETT, B. — Charucierization of pollen allergens. 8. KERRY, E. - Phy/loplane ecology of three sub-Amarclic plants from Macquarie Island. 9. LEWIS. S. - Investigation into some aspecis of the physiology and phosphate metabolism of Zostera muelleri. 10. MARGINSON, J. C.-.4/I analysis of the boundary between two closely related sympatric species of Eucalyptus. 11. MARTIN. J. — Population studies on Craspedia glauca. 12. MASON, A. .1. — Studies of productivity in the seagrass Zostera muelleri. 13. MOORE, G. — The effects of heal on the physiology of Eucalyptus obliqua seedlings. 14. RAFF, .1. — Cell interactions in plains. 15. RAMM-ANDERSON, S. M. — The fine structure of postfertilization development in some of the primitive Florideophycean algae (Rhodophyta). 16. SQUIRE, R.— Studies of growth and water relations in Pinus radiata D. Don. 17. YIP, H. Y.— A comparison of the fungal flora on the root surfaces and rhizospheres of different plant species in different areas infected and not infected by Phytophthora cin­ namomi Rands. MSc Theses in Progress 18. ADAMS, M. A. —Studies of nitrate reductase in forest trees. 19. BURCH, M. Vi. — Phytoplankton ecology und production in several Antarctic hikes. 20. CAHILL, D. — Comparative study of physiological changes associated wilh infection of susceptible and resistant species with Phytophthora cinnamomi. 21. CH1DGEY, S. S. — Comparison of subliclal jetty and seagrass algal/invertebrate com­ munities ai Flinders, Westernport Buy. 22. DAVEY, A. G. — Taxonomy and physiology of selected Antarctic marine und freshwater algae. 23. DAWSON. P. D. — Effect of Phytophthora cinnamomi on water relations of host plants. 24. ERASER, M. S. — Physiology of tolerance lo salinily in higher plants. 25. CARRICK, R. C—Morphological and taxonomic investigations on Nostoc wilh emphasis on those from Antarctica. 26. HUNT, L. J. — 77ie ecology of Ihe cliff vegetation from F.astern View lo St. Georges River in the Olwuys, with a view to understanding the processes of erosion and colonization. 27. JONES, k. — An investigation of photosynthetic adaptation in glasshouse crops subjected lo CO: enrichment. 28. KENRICK, .1. B. W. — Pollen development and the breeding system in Acacia. 29. McFADDEN, G. I. — Biology of Antarctic sea-ice microalgae. 30. MEIMETH, 'W —Plant cell differentiation in Psophocarpus leiragonolobus. 31. MILI AR. A. J. K.— Taxonomy of the marine algae of Coffs Harbour, New South Wales. 32. MYERS, B. A. —Ecological interactions in Viclorian vegetation. 33. O'BRIEN, C. E. — Ecology of the benthic marine algue in the Hobson's Buy area. 34. PAYNE, A. L. — A study of soil fungi in relation to neurological disease of sheep and cullle in south-east Australia. 35. RICKER. R. W. — Marine algue of Macquarie Island. 36. SMETHURST, P. l. — Role of nitrogen fixers in industrial forestry. 37. WILLIAMS. R. i. — The environmental factors governing the distribution of shrub und grassland communities in the Bogong High Plains, including fire, grazing and trampling by catilc 38. WILLIAMSON, M. A.—Study of injection in leaves of u host plant by necrolrophic and biolrophic fungi. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Viclorian Ministry for Conservation: Alpine shrub-grassland ecology and dynamics. BOTANY 229

APM Forests Pty Ltd, Forests Commission, Victoria, Victorian National Parks Service: Studies on Phytophthora cinnamomi. Victorian Institute of Marine Science: Taxonomy of Bass Strait phytoplankton. Rowden White Estate: Pollen research under Professor R. B. Knox. APM Forests Pty Ltd, Forests Commission, Victoria, Department of Primary Industry, Forestry and Timber Bureau: Distribution and cycling of nitrogen in forests. Australian Marine Sciences & Technologies Advisory Committee, Department ofScience and the Environment: Taxonomy, distribution and phylogeny of marine algae from eastern Australian islands and the Great Barrier Reef. Antarctic Division, Department ofScience and the Environment: Litter senescence on Macquarie Island. Antarctic Division, Department of Science and the Environment: Mycological studios on Antarc­ tic soils. Antarctic Division. Department of Science and the Environment: Study of the floristies and ecology of the vegetation of Australian Antarctic T erritory. Antarctic Division, Department of Science and the Environment: Thc marine algae of Macquarie Island. Antarctic Division, Department of Science and the Environment: Sysiemalics and ecology of An­ tarctic terrestrial algae. Antarctic Division, Department ofScience and the Environment: Eeophysiological studies of sea- ice algae. ARGC: Nitrogen fixation and nitrogen uptake in forests. ARGC: Botany of Australian Acacias, with special reference to pollen and pollination mechanisms. ARGC: Cell recognition in plants, wilh special reference to pollen-wall protein/stigma interac­ tions and the human allergic response. ARGC: Biology of marine flowering plants (seagrasses), with special reference to pollination mechanisms. ARGC: Thc taxonomy and ecology of Lord Howe Island benthic marine algae. ARGC: Changing patterns of metabolism and transport of nitrogen and carbon compounds in halophytcs as alfccied by salinity. ARGC: A taxonomic investigation and critical revision of mosses in the orders Dicranales and Pottiales. ARGC: Study of the process of disease caused by Phytophthora cinnamomi in relation to the ecology of Victorian native forests. ARGC: The evolution of subcellular processes, with special reference 10 development in primitive and highly specialized members of the Rhodophyta. 230 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

CHEMISTRY

A. INORGANIC CHEMISTRY A new area ol' research has been introduced into the Department wilh thc appointment to a lectureship of Dr C. .1. Marsden, a spcclroscopisi wilh particular experience in gas-phase structural determination using electron dillraction. He has started to build up thc equipment for ihis work. Significant impetus and support have been given 10 several existing research programmes through the acquisition by the School of Chemistry of new major instruments over the last few- years. Several publications arc listed in this Report based on work made possible by use of the JEOL FX-100 multi-nuclear n.m.r. spectrometer. Dr Dakternieks has initialed inorganic chemical studies using ihc VG 70/70 mass spectrometer and will be extending the instrument's capabilities into negative ion studies. A Nonius single-crystal X-ray dilfractomeicr, purchased in 1980, will assisi significantly in several projects involving structural determination of solids, particularly those lhat arc relatively unstable. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Electrochemistry of organometallic complexes of ihe early transition elements —A. T. Casey. 2. Thermodynamics of complex formation of Schiff base complexes by potentiometry and calorimclry — A. T. Casey. 3. Magnetic study of vanadyl complexes —A. T. Casey. 4. Electrochemical investigations of inorganic systems—R. Colton. 5. Mulliiiuclcar n.m.r. studies of inorganic compounds —R. Colton, D. R. Dakternieks. 6. Studies in negative ion mass spectrometry— D. R. Dakternieks. 7. Studies in structural inorganic chemistry—B. F. Hoskins. 8. Gas phase structural inorganic chemistry studied by electron diffraction, microwave spec­ troscopy and molecular orbital theory — C. J. Marsden. 9. Vibrational spectroscopy and force fields of inorganic systems —C. J. Marsden. 10. Electronic and Raman spectroscopic studies of transition metal cations in anhydrous hydrogen Huoride —T. A. O'Donnell. 11. Crystallographic investigation of ihc structures of species crystallized from anhydrous hydrogen fluoride —T. A. O'Donnell. 12. Lewis acid —Lewis base interactions in anhydrous hydrogen fluoride —T. A. O'Donnell. 13. Complexes of tailor-made ligands— R. Robson. 14. High pressure temperature jump kinetic studies—P. A. Tregloan. 15. Substitution kinetics of labile metal ions—P. A. Tregloan. 16. Complc.xation kinetics of aqueous Al(lll) and Ga(lll) —P. A. Tregloan. 17. Meial ihiolate complexes — G. Winter. 18. Adsorption of heavy mclals by proteins —Ci. Winter. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. BURNS, R. C. and O'DONNELL, T. A. — Reactivity of Transition Metal Fluorides. X. Oxidation-reduction Reaciions of Rhenium, Osmium and Iridium Hexafluorides. J. Inorg. Nucl. Chan., 42: 1285-1291 (1980). 2. BURNS, R. C. and O'DONNELL, T. A. — Reactivity of Transition Metal Fluorides. XI. Oxidation-reduction Reactions of Ruthenium Hexafluoride. ./. Inorg. Nucl. Chan., 42: 1613-1619 (19S0). 3. COLTON, R. and DAKTERNIEKS. D. — Mercury-199 and Phosphorus-31 n.m.r. Studies of Mercury Halide Phosphine Complexes. Ausi. J. Chem., 33: 959-963 (1980). 4. COLTON. R. and DAKTERNIEKS, D. — Phosphorus-31, Vlercury-199 and Selcniuni-77 n.m.r. Studies of Ligand Exchange Reactions in Mercury (II) Halide Complexes. Ausi. ./. Chem.. 33: 1463-1470 (1980). 5. COLTON, R. and DAKTERNIEKS. D. - Phosphorus-31, Cadmium-Ill, Cadmium-I 13, and Mercurv-199 n.m.r. Studies of Cadmium (11) Halide and Mixed Cadmium (II) Mercury (II) Halide Complexes with Tri-n-Bulvl Phosphine. Ausi. ./. Chem., 33: 1677-1684 (1980). 6. COLTON, R. and DAKTERNIEKS, D.-Cadmium-I 11, Cadmium-113 and Mercury-199 n.m.r. Studies of Tetrahaloinciallaie Complexes. Ausi. J. Chem., 33: 2405-2409 (1980). 7. COLTON, R. and McCORMICK, M. J. Bridging Carbonvl Svstems in Transition Metal Complexes. Coord. Chan. Revs.. 31: 1-52(1980). 8. DAKTERNIEKS, D. R., GARNETT, .1. L„ GREGOR, I. K. and GUILHAUS, M.-Gas Phase Electron Attachment to Metal Complexes: The Influence of Oxygen- and Sulphur- donor Atoms on ihe Electron Attachment Reaciions of Bis-chclatcs of Nickel (11). Inorg. Chan. Ada.. 44: EI2I-LI24 (1980). CHEMISTRY 231

9. DAVEY. P. T., WILLIAMS, D. R. and WINTER, G.-Thc Use of Cross Linked Casein to Recover Chromate from Solution. J. Applied Biochem., 2: 60-65 (1980). 10. FIELDING, L. J., PORTER, Q. M. and WINTER, G. — Sigmatropic Rearrangements of Unsaturated Dixanthogcns. Ausi. J. Chem.. 33: 2615-2619 (1980). 11. GABLE, R. W. and WINTER, G.-Cooper (11) Halo-xanthalcs. Inorg. Nucl. Chem. Let­ ters.. 16: 9-12 (1980). 12. HONEYMAN, R. T., SCHRIEKE, R. R. and WINTER, G. — Separation or Dixamhogcn and Sulphur Xanthates by H.P.L.C. Analvlica Chimica Acta.. 116: 345-351 (1980). 13. KRAUTIL, P. and ROBSON, R.-Complexes of Binucleating Ligands. XIII. Soluble Com­ plexes of a Ligand with a Bridging Thiophcnoxide Component and Peripheral n-Octyl Substituents. J. Coord. Chem., 10: 7-12 (1980). 14. KUO, J. C, DESMARTEAU, D. D., 1ATELEY, W. G., HAMMEKER, R. M., MARSDEN, C. .1. and WITT, J. D. — Vibrational Spectra and Normal Coordinate Analysis of CFjOE and CEjOCL. J. Raman Sped., 9: 230-238 (1980). 15. LAWRANCE, G. A., O'CONNOR, M. J., SUVACHITTANONT, S., STRANKS, D. R. and TREGLOAN, P. A. —Pressure Dependent Raccmisalion Reactions of Tris (dilhiocar- bamato) Cobalt (111) Complexes in Non Aqueous Solvents. Inorg. Chem.. 19: 3443-3448 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Science 1. WHITE, A. H. — Structural Coordination Chemistry. Doctor of Philosophy 2. ARBI..ASTER, C. I. —Studies of the Mechanism of Action of Selected Stimulant and Depressant Drugs on the Central und Peripheral Nervous Svstems. 3. SUVACHITTANONT, S.-High Pressure Solution Kinetics of Octahedral Complexes. Master of Science •4.. DAVEY, F. W. — An investigation of Chemical Dissolution Techniques in Relation to the Determination of Truce Metals in Marine Sediments.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. CARR, J. J. —Solvent Effects in Metal Ion Substitution Processes. 2. COCKMAN, R. W.- Studies on Transition Metal Cations in A HP. 3. FARNWORTH, P. G. — Biological Actions of 1,10-Phenanthroline Transition Metal Chelates and Related Substances. 4. GABLE, R. —Aspects of Metal Xanthate Chemistrv. 5. I-IASHEM. Md. A.-Aspects of Vanadium (IV) Chemistry. 6. LINDEN, A. — X-ray Structural Determination of Species Cryslullizx'd from Anhydrous Hydrogen I luoride. 7. MeDONALD, I. A. S. —Crystal Chemistry of Metal Complexes Involving Binucleating Ligands. 8. MYERS, R. J. — Structural Studies of Certain Transition Metal Compounds. 9. TRAVERSO. I. P. — Thermodynamics of Complexution Reaciions. MSc Thesis in Progress 10. KELSON, R. — Complexes of Binucleating Ligands Containing a Bridging Sulphur Atom.

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: High Pressure Temperature Jump Kinetics Studies. ARGC: Complexes of Binucleating Ligands Containing a Bridging Sulphur Atom. ARGC: Voltammetric, Spectroscopic and Crystallographic Investigations of Species Dissolved in or Derived from Anhydrous Hydrogen Fluoride. ARGC: Gas Phase Structural Inorganic Chemistry. Dairying Research Committee: Adsorption of Heavy Metals by Proteins. 232 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

13. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

INTRODUCTION In 1980 research has continued on a broad front ranging from biological chemistry through mainstream organic chemistry to physically oriented interests. As in previous years there has been significant collaboration with industry, government laboratories and cognate departments.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Insect pigments and related metabolites—D. W. Cameron, G. 1. Feutrill. 2. Quinones and nucleophiles: polycyclic aromatic systems-D. VV. Cameron, G. I. Feutrill. 3. Organic electrochemistry —Q. N. Porter. 4. Studies in aldehyde synthesis —J. M. Lawlor, E. F. M. Stephenson. 5. Rearrangements in thc Diene synthesis —Q. N. Porter. 6. Mass spectrometric studies —Q. N. Porter. 7. Fluoride ion in organic synthesis —M. Mingin. 8. The chemical basis for the toxicity of analgesics—I. C. Calder. 9. Synthesis and reactions of hydroxamic acids—I. C. Calder. 10. The mechanism of drug metabolism - I. C Calder. 11. IJC nuclear magnetic resonance studies of reactive intermediates—D. P. Kelly. 12. Organic geochemical studies of Victorian brown coal lithotypes—R. II. Johns. 13. Structural studies on Australian coals by physical chemical techniques—R. B. Johns. 14. Mechanisms of flash pyrolysis of some Australian coals—R. B. Johns. 15. Diagcnetic pathways for biolipids in intertidal and nearshore sediments —R. B. Johns. 16. Comparative chemistry of three deep sea bcnthic sediments from the East Pacific Ocean — R. B. Johns. 17. Food chain studies of some intcnidal gastropods of Victoria—R. B. Johns. 18. Food chain studies of holothurians— R. B. Johns. 19. Chemical aspects of food chain studies of iwo commercial fish species in Comer Inlet — R. B. Johns. 20. Chemical studies of the prochloron-ascidian symbiotic system — R. B. Johns. 21. Chemical taxonomy of selected algae of Bass Strait and Antarctic system —R. B. Johns. 22. Selected lipids as biological markers of marine bacteria and algae —R. B. Johns. 23. Synthesis and spectral characterization of phosphorylaied peptides related to milk pro­ teins—R. B. Johns. 24. Synthesis of anticancer substances—D. VV. Cameron, Ci. I. Feutrill. 25. Chemical mechanism of anthraquinone pulping of wood —D. VV. Cameron.

PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. BARRETT, A. G. M., READ, R. VV. and BARTON, D. H. R. — Reactions of Relevance lo thc Chemistry of Aminoglycoside Antibiotics. Part 13. A Novel Synthesis of Bcnzvl Ethers. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Tram., I: 2184-2190 (1980). 2. BARRETT, A. G. M., READ, R. VV. and BARTON, D. H. R. — Synthesis and Reactions of t-Bulyliellurocarbonyloxyalkanes. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans., I. 2191-2195 (1980). 3. BOWDEN, B. F., READ, R. VV. and TAYLOR, VV. C.-Constituents of Fitpomatiu Species. VI. Thc Structures of Eupodienonc-I, -2, and -3. Aust. ./. Chem., 33: 1823-1831 (1980). 4. CALDER, I. C, YONG, A. C, WOODS, R. A., CROWE, C. A., HAM, K. N. and TANGE., J. D.—The Nephrotoxicity of p-Aniinophcnol. 11 — The Effect of Metabolic In­ hibitors and Inducers. Chem.-Biol. Interactions, 27: 245-254 (1979). 5. CAMERON, D. VV., DEUTSCHER, K. R. and FEUTRILL, G. I.-Synthesis of Bosirvcoidin and 8-0-Mcthvlbostrycoidin. Tetrahedron Lett.. 5089-5090(1980). 6. CAMERON, D. VV., FEUTRILL, G. I. and PANNAN, L. J. II.-Synthesis ofa Natural Polychloro Dinaphthofuran Quinone. Tetrahedron Lett., 1385-1386 (1980). 7. CAMERON, D. VV'., FEUTRILL, G. I. and PANNAN, L. J. H.-Synthesis ofa Natural Hexachloro Dinaphthofuran Quinone. Aust. J. Chem., 33: 2531-2541 (1980). 8. CAMERON, D. VV., FEUTRILL, G. I. and PATTI, A. F.-Nucleophilic Alkenes. VIE l:2-Addilion of I, l-Dimelhoxyeihcne to 1,4-Naphthoquinoncs substituted in the Benzenoid Ring. Ausi. ./. Chem.. 33: 1805-1816 (1980). 9. COOKE, R. G., MERRETT, B. K., O'LOUGHLIN, G. J. and PlETERSZ, G. A.-Colour­ ing Mattel's of Australian Plants. XXIII. A New Svnthesis of Arylphenalenoiics and Naphihoxanthcnoncs. Aust. J- Chem., 33: 2317-2324 (1980). 10. COOKE, R. G., RASTON, C. L. and WHITE, A. H.-Colouring Matters of Australian Plants. XXII. Vcniilagonc: Crystal Siructurc and an Approach to Synthesis. Aust. J. Chem., 33: 303-311 (1980). CHEMISTRY 233

11. COOKE, R. C, RASTON, C. L. and WHITE, A. H.-Cryslal Struclure of Dunnione />Bromophcnvlhvdrazonc. Ausi. J. Client., 33: 441-445 (1980). 12. CROWE. C. A.,'YONG, A. C, CALDER, 1. C, HAM, K. N. and TANGE, J. D.-The Nephrotoxicity of p-Aminophenol, I—Thc Effecl on Microsomal Cytochromes, Glutathione and Covalent Binding in Kidney and Liver. Chem.-Biol. Interactions, 27: 235-244 (1979). 13. DESMOND, P. V., BRANCH, R. A., CALDER, 1. C. and SCHENKEV, S.-Comparison of uC-Phenacetin and IJC-Aminopvrene Breath Tests after Acute and Chronic Injury to thc Rat. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. and Med., 164: 173-180(1980). 14. EAI-IEY, J. A., HUGEL, H. M.. KELLY, D. P., HALTON, B. and WILLIAMS. G. J. B. — X-ray Analysis, Molecular Struclure and Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectra of a Dimer from I, l-Dichloro-2,5-diphcnylcyclopropabcnzene: (E)-2,2',3,3'-Teirachloro-4,4',7,7'-ielra- phcnyl-l.r-bicvclohcptatricnylidene. J. Org. Chem., 45: 2S62-2865 (1980). 15. FERNANDO, C. R., and CALDER, I. C. - N-Acelyl-2,3,5,6-lelrachloro-/;-benzoquinonc Imine. Aust. J. Chem., 33: 2299-2305 (1980). 16. FERNANDO. C. R., CALDER, 1. C. and HAM, K. N.-Studies on the Mechanism of the Toxicity of Paracetamol (Acetaminophen). J. Med. Chem., 23: 1153-1158 (1980). 17. FIELDING, L. J., PORTER, Q. N. and WINTER, G.-Sigrnatropic Rearrangements of Unsaturated Dixanthogcns. Aust. J. Chem.. 33: 2615-2619 (1980). 18. GILLAN, F. T. and JOHNS, R. B. — Input and Early Diagenesis of Chlorophylls in a Temperate Intertidal sediment. Marine Chemistrv, 9: 243-253 (1980). 19. HU1SGEN. R., OOMS, P. H. J., MINGIN, M. and ALEINGER, N. L. - Exceptional Reac­ tivity of the Bicyclo[2.2.1]hcptcnc Double Bond. J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 102: 3951-3953 (1980). 20. JOHNS, R. B., GILLAN, F. T. and VOLKMAN, J. K.-Early Diagenesis of Phylyl Esters in a Contemporary Temperate Intertidal Sediment. Geochim. Cosmochim. Ada. 44: 183-188 (1980). 21. JOHNS, R. B., NICHOLS, P. D. and PERRY, G. J.-Fatty Acid Components of Nine Species of Molluscs of the Littoral Zone of Australian Waters. Comp. Biochem. Phvsiol.. 6513: 207-214 (1980). 22. MARTIN, R. F. and KELLY, D. P.-Synthesis and N.M.R. Spectra of Substituted Aminoiodoacridincs. ^li/sv. J. Chem., 32: 2637-2646 (1979). 23. VOLKMAN, .1. K., JOHNS, R. 13., GILLAN, F. T., PERRY, G. J. and BAVOR, II. .1. —Microbial Lipids of an Intertidal Sediment I. Fatly Acids and Hydrocarbons. Geochim. Cosmochim. Ada. 44: 1133-1143 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. DEUTSC1IER, K. R. — The Tola! Synthesis of Bosirycoidin and other Quinone Systems. 2. GRIFFITHS, P. G.— Synthesis of Anthraquinonoid Pigments. 3. HART, S. J.— A Study of Paracetamol Metabolism using High Performance Liquid Chromatography. Master of Science 4. LAMBERT, .1. D. — Diels-Alder Reaciions of N-Benzyl-3-vinylinilo/e (Spectroscopic In­ vestigation). 5. MILNE, P. J. — Aspecis of Chemical Reactivity in an Estuary.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ANDERSON, J. XL. —Pyrroles (and Pyrazolones) as Synthetic Intermediates. 2. CHAFFEE, A. L. — The Organic Geochemistry of Australian Coals. 3. CHALMERS, P. J. — Highly Funciionalised Butadienes: Synthesis and Reactivity. 4. CONN, C — Approaches to Polycyclic Aromatic Compounds. 5. FERNANDO, C. R. — Svnthesis and Reactions of N-Acetyl p-Benzoquinone /mines. 6. GIANSIRACUSA, J. J.-N.M.R. Studies of Carbocations. 1. GILLAN, F. T. — Lipids of Aquatic Ecosystems. 8. HEALEY, K. — The Svnthesis of N-Hvdroxvparacelamol: Chemistrv and 'loxicitv. 9. JENKINS, M. }.-C6rrelalion'of"Band "C.N.M.R. Parameters. 10. McKAY, P. G. — Synthetic Studies of Natural Quinones. 11. MERRETT, B. K. - Synthesis of Tetracyclic Pigments. 12. NICHOLS, P. D. — A Chemical Approach to Marine Pood Chain Studies. 13. PEARSON, .1. R.— Synthesis and Diels-Alder Reaciions of 3-AlkenylbenzoJuruns. 14. PERLMUTTER, P. — Synthetic Approaches lo Insect Quinones. 15. PIETERSZ, G. A. —Synthesis of some Naturally Occurring Quinonoid Pigments. 16. SMAIL, M. C. -Toxicity oj Paracetamol. 234 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

17. STRACHAN, M. G. — The Hydrogenation of Victorian Brown Coal. 18. VERHEYEN, T. V. - Chemical Characteristics of some Australian Coals. MSc Theses in I'rogress 19. BERRY, M. Ci.—.4 Study of ihe Mannich Reaction and its Applications. 20. COLMANET, S. — Studies in Iodination and the Chemistry of Organic lodo Compounds. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Organic Electrochemistry. ARGC: Insect Constituents. ARGC: New Heterocyclic Syntheses. ARGC: Toxicity of Analgesics. APM Ltd: Chemical Mechanism of Wood Pulping. NERDDC: An Approach to Oil Formation from Coal. Anti-Cancer Council of Victoria: Anlhracyclinonc Syntheses. ARGC: l3CH Coupling Constants in Carbocations. ARGC: Pathways of Chlorophyll in Sediments. DRC: Denaturation Processes of Milk Proteins.

C. MARINE CHEMISTRY INTRODUCTION Support from ARGC and VIMS was continued for studies of the chemistry of cstuarine and coastal waters. Thc newly formed AMSTAC funded two programmes, extending work on heavy metals and thc polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, and initiating studies of naturally occurring radionuclides in thc marine environment.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Reaciions of oceans to trace metal inputs —.1. D. Smith, V. McRae. 2. Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons in marine sediments and organisms from south-east Australia and the Great Barrier Reef—.1. D. Smith, J. Bagg (Industrial Science). 3. Behaviour of phosphate and arsenic in estuarine and coastal waters and in Bass Strait — J. D. Smith. 4. Behaviour of iodine species in thc marine environment— J. D. Smith. 5. Radionuclides (Po-210) and heavy metals in food chain studies including squid — J. D. Smith.

6. The role of thc oceans in thc global Co2 budget —J. D. Smith. 7. Radionuclides (Pb-210) in sediment chronology-J. D. Smith. 8. Chemistry of Antarctic lakes —.1. D. Smilh, H. Burton (Antarctic Division). 9. Trade mclal and sulphur diagenesis in sediments —.1. D. Smilh. PUBLISHED WORK 1. SMITH, J. D. and LONGMORE, A. R. — Phosphate Distribution in Bass Strait and South- East Australian Coastal Waters. Aust. J. of Marine and Freshwater Research, 31: 119-128 (1980). 2. BUTLER, E. C V. and SMITH, J. D. - Iodine Speciation in Scawaters-The Analytical Use of Ultra-Violct Photo-oxidation and Differential Pulse Polarography. Deep-Sea Research, 27A: 489-493 (1980). 3. SMITH, J. D. and LONGMORE, A. R.-Behaviour of Phosphate in Esluarine Waters. Nature, 287: 532-534 (1980). 4. MILNE, P. and SMITH, J. D. — Measurement of Dissolved Carbonate Parameters in An­ tarctic Coastal Waters, in G. I. Pearman (ed.) Carbon Dioxide and Climate: Australian Research, Australian Academy ofScience (Canberra): 137-142 (1980). 5. MILNE, P. and SMITH, J. D. —Chemical Oceanography South of the Convergence. Search, II: 424-428 (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Science 1. F. W. DAVEY — An Investigation of Chemical Dissolution Techniques in Relation to the Determination of Trace Metals in Marine Sediments. 2. P. J. MILNE — Aspecis of Chemical Reactivity in an Estuary. CHEMISTRY 235

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. E. C. V. BUTLER, Iodine and Bromine in Natural Systems. MSc Theses in Progress 2. L. CI..EMENTSON—Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons in the Marine Environment. 3. P. CARPENTER - lichuviour of Trace Elements in Estuarine Conditions. 4. H. BU RTON - Studies of A ntaraic I akes. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Reactions of Oceans to Trace Metal Inputs. AMSTAC: Heavy Metals and Radionuclides in Organisms of Bass Strait. AMSTAC: Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon Distribution in the Great Barrier Reef Ecosystem. VIMS: Phosphate Behaviour in Bass Strait.

D. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY INTRODUCTION Research continues in the areas of colloid and surface chemistry, spectroscopic studies, polymer chemistry, radiation chemistry, thermodynamic and transport properties, elec­ trochemistry, chemical kinetics and valence theory. The sudden death of Dr E. E. Treloar has meant that work in chemical archaeology has ceased although his projects in fluorescence studies of polymers arc being continued. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Colloid and surface chemistry: coal-oii-water systems, adsorption of aqueous ions at solid- liquid interlaces, colloid stability, surface-active agents —T. \V. Healy, D. N. Furlong, F. Griescr. 2. Picosecond fluoroesccnce studies of excited-state proton transfer reactions, of a/ocom- pounds and fluoroesccnce studies of prototropic reactivity in quinolinols —P. J. Thistlethwaite. 3. Studies of energy relaxation, conformation and structure in synthetic polymers, biopolymers and micelles —K. P. Ghiggino, R. Sakurovs. 4. Laser-excited lime-resolved emission and absorption spectroscopy of aromatic molecules —K. P. Ghiggino. 5. Fundamental processes in electron irradiated gases, kinetics of formation of electron beam pumped gaseous excimer lasers, gaseous oxidation of halocarbons—R. Cooper. 6. Pulsed magnetic resonance—R. A. Craig. 7. Valence theory—R. D. Harcourt. 8. Thermodynamic and transport properties of mixtures — C. L. Young. 9. Measurement of Volta potential dillerences with a Kcnrick cell, development ol equipment for precise measurement of Volta potential dill'crencc— P. T. McTigue, H. M. Giant. 10. Kinetic studies of encounter complex mechanisms—P. T. McTigue. 11. Elfecl of pressure on equilibria and rates of reaction in solution —R. D. Alexander. 12. Spectroscopic studies of metal ions in liquid hydrogen fluoride, application of Raman spec­ troscopy to ihe study of molecules adsorbed onio solids —C. G. Barraclough. 13. Oxidation of organic sulphides —A. A. Humfl'ray. PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. KOI.ARIK, L. O., DIXON, D. R., FREEMAN, P. A., FURLONG, D. N. and HEALY, T. VV. — Effects of Pretreatment on the Surface Characteristics of a Natural Magnetite, in Fine Panicles Processing, ed. P. Somasundaran, Amer. Inst, of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers, Inc., New York: 652-665 (19S0). 2. YOUNCi, C. L. — Solubilities at Pressures above 2 Bar. in Argon, ed. Fl. I.. Clever, Solubililv Dala Scries, Pergamon Press, Oxford. 4: 253-321 (1980). Articles 3. ALEXANDER, R. D., FALL, W. A. and HOLPER, P. N. — Volumes of Activation lor ihe Reduction of l-Chloro-2,4-dinilrohcnzene and 2-Chloro-1,3,5-iriniirobeiucne with Piperidine in Aqueous Ethanol. Aust. ./. Chem., ii: 257-262 (1980). 236 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

4. ALEXANDER, R. D. and HOI.PER. P. N.-Kineiics of Substitution on Chloro-1,1,7,7-tct r acthvlclict hvlenet riamiiietioldt 111) in Methanol-water Mixtures. Transi­ tion Mei. Chem.. 5: 108-110(1980). 5. ANANTIIPADMANABHAN. K., SOMASUNDARAN, P. and HEALY. T. W.- Chcmisirv ol' Oleate and Amine Solutions in Relation to Flotation. Soc. Mining Engineers AIME. Trans.. 266: 2003-2009 (1980). 6. BLAIR-WEST', J. R.. FERNLEY, R. T.. NELSON, J. F., WINTOUR. E. M. and WRIGHT, R. D., wilh an appendix on uneatalyscd carbon dioxide-water kinetics by McTIGUE. P. T. —The Ell'ect of Carbonic Anhvdrasc Inhibitors on the Anionic Composi­ tion of Sheep's Parotid Saliva. ./. Phvsiol., 299:'29-44 (1980). 7. COOPER, R., CUMMING, .1. B.. GORDON, S. and VIULAC, W. A. — Thc Reaciions of the Ilalomeihvl Radicals CCT. and CE, with Oxygen. Radial. Phvs. Chem.. 16: 169-174 (1980). 8. CRAIG. R. A., HARRIS, R. K. and MORROW. R. J.-Nuclear Spin Magnetization Transfer bv Double Selective Irradiation. Org. Magnetic Resonance, 13: 229-23i (19S0). 9. C UMMING, J. B., COOPER. R., MULAC, W. A. and GORDON. S.-The Reactions of CO. Radicals with NO.. Radial. Phvs. Chem.. 16: 207-211 (I9S0). 10. COS I A. S. M. de B ., PR11.TO, M. J., GHIGGINO. K. P., PHILLIPS, D. and ROBERTS, A. J.—Time-resolved Spectra of an Intramolecular Exeiplex. ./. Phoiochem., 12: 11-16 (19S0). 11. EABRIS, G. .1. and TRELOAR, E. E.-X-ray Fluorescence and Atomic Absorption Analvsis of Sarawak Gold Artifacts. Archeoinelrv. 22: 93-98 (1980). 12. FORD, D., THISTLE! H WAITE, P. .1. and WOOI.FE, G. S.-The Fluorescence Behaviour of Methvl and Phenvl Salicylate. Chem. Phvs. Letts.. 69: 246-250 (1980). 13. FURLONG, D. N. and HAR ELAND, S. - Wall Ell'ects on the Measurement of Surface Ten­ sion using a Vertical Cvlindcr. I. Theorv. ./. Chem. Soc. Faradav I, 76: 457-466 (1980). 14. FURLONG, D. N. and HARTT. AND, S'.-Wall Ell'ects on the Measurement of Surface Ten­ sion usine a Vertical Cylinder. II. Experimental. ./. Chem. Soc. Faradav I, 76: 467-472 (1980). 15. FURLONG, D. N. ROUQUEROL, F., ROUQUHROL. .1. and SING, K. S. W. - Differen­ tial Energies of Adsorption of Argon and Nitrogen on Rutile and Silica. J. Chem. Soc. Fara­ dav I, 76 : 774-781 (1980). 16. FURLONG, D. N., ROUQUEROL, P., ROUQUEROL, !. and SING, K. S. W.-Adsorp­ tion Microcalorinictric Studv of Rutile and Silica-coaled Rutile. J. Colloid Interface Sci., 75: 68-73(1980). 17. GHIGGINO, K. P. —Time-resolved Fluorescence Sludics of trans-1,2-di-(2-naphihvl)elliv- lene. J. Phoiochem., 12: 173-177 (1980). IS. GHIGGINO, K. P., ARCHIBALD, D. A. and THISTLETHWAITE, P. J. — Picosecond Fluorescence Sludics of Polv(N-vinvl carbazolc). J. Polvm. Sci.: Polvm. Lens. Ed., 18: 673-679 (1980). 19. GHIGGINO, K. P., ROBERTS, A. J. and PHILLIPS, D. — Time-resolved Fluorescence Spectroscopy using Pulsed Lasers. J. Phvs. E: Sci. Instrum.. 13: 446-450 (1980). 20. HARCOURT, R. D.-Pauling "3-Eleclron Bonds", "Increased-Valence" and 6-Electron 4-Ccntrc Bonding. J. Amer. Chem. Soc, 102: 5195-5201 (J980). 21. HARCOURT, R. D. and JORDAN, D.-The Harcoun-Jordan Discussion of the Linnet! Theorv. Speculations in Sci. and Tech., 3: 77-95, 628 (1980). 22. HEALY, 1. W.. CHAN, D. and WHITE, L. R.-Colloidal Behaviour of Materials with lonizable Group Surfaces. Pure and Appl. Chem.. 52: 1207-1219 (1980). 23. HURLEY, A. C, HARCOURT, R. D. and TAYLOR, P. R.-Generation of Symmetry-

adapted Wave Functions for 02 using Group Theoretical Projection Operators. Israel ./. Chem., 19: 215-219 (1980). 24. McTIGUE, P. T.-A Key to Chemical Education. Chemistrv in Australia, 47: 334-336 (I9S0). 25. RALSTON, J. and HEALY, T. W. - Activation of Zinc Sulphide with Cu(II), Cd(ll) and Pb(ll). I. Activation in Weakly Acidic Media. Int. J. Mineral Processing, 7: 175-201 (1980). 26. RALSTON, J. and HEALY, T. W. - Activation of Zinc Sulphide with Cu(Il), Cd(ll) and Pb(ll). II. Activation in Neutral and Weaklv Alkaline Media. Int. J. Mineral Processing. 7: 203-217 (1980). 27. RALSTON, J.. ALABASTER, P. and HEALY, T. W.-Activation of Zinc Sulphide with Cu(ll), Cd(II) and Pb(II). III. The Mass-spcctromclric Determination of Elemental Sulphur. Int. .1. Mineral Processing, 7: 279-310 (1980). 28. ROBBINS. R. .1., FLEMING, G. R., BEDDARD, G. S., ROBINSON, G. W., THISTLETHWAITE, P. J. and WOOLEE, G. J.-Photophvsics of Aqueous Tryptophan: pH and Temperature Ell'ects. J. Amer. Chem. Soc, 102: 6271-6279 (1980). 29. TAN, K. L. and TRELOAR, F. E.-Solubilization of 9-Methylanthracenc by the Hypercoil­ ed Form of Polv(methacrylic acid) in Water: Fluorescence Decay and Rotational Diffusion Measurements. Chem. Phys. Lens., 73: 234-239 (1980). CHEMISTRY 237

30. TOCZYLKIN, L. S. and YOUNG, C. L. — Gas-liquid Critical Temperatures of Mixtures containing Electron Donors. 1. Ether Mixtures. J. Chem. Thermodynamics, 12: 355-364 (1980). 31. TOCZYLKIN, L. S. and YOUNG, C. L.-Gas-liquid Critical Temperatures of Mixtures containing Electron Donors. IE Amine Mixtures. J. Chem. Thermodynamics, 12: 365-370 (1980). 32. TOCZYLKIN, L. S. and YOUNG, C. L. — Upper Critical Solution Temperatures of Hydrocarbon + Fluorocarbon Mixtures with Specific Interactions. Ausi. J. Chem., 33: 465-469 (1980). 33. WATERSON, S. D., SEMMENS, J. and YOUNG, C. I..-Upper Critical Solution Temperatures of Pcrfluoro-n-hexane + Alkane, Sulphur Hexalluoride -!- Siloxanc and Perfluoropropanc + Siloxanc Mixtures. Ausi. J. Chem., 33: 1987-1992 (1980). 34. WOOLFE, G. J. and THISTLETHWAITE, P. J. — Excited-state Phototropic Reactivity in Salicylamidc and Salicylanilide. J. Amer. Chem. Soc, 102: 6917-6923 (1980). 35. YATES, D. E., JAMES, R. O. and HEALY, I. W.-Titanium Dioxide-Electrolyte Inter­ face. Part I. Gas Adsorption and Tritium Exchange Studies. J. Chem. Soc Faradav I, 76: 1-8 (1980). 36. YATES, D. E. and HEALY, T. W.-Titanium Dioxide-Electrolyte Interface. Part 2. Sur­ face Charge (Titration) Studies. ./. Chem. Soc. Faraday I, 76: 9-18 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. ROBBINS, R. J. — Picosecond Fluorescence Spectroscopy. Master of Science 2. LYONS, J. S.-Electokinelics oj the Muskovite-Aqueous Electrolyte Interface.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BLAT'I, E. — Fluorescence Studies of Aromatic Molecules in Micelles. 2. FARRELL, J. R. —Experimental Determination of Single Ionic Properties. 3. F1ARDING, I. —The Adsorption of Cadmium al Ihe Colloid Water Interface. 4. HEARD, S. M. — Spectroscopic Studies of Molecules Adsorbed al a Solid-liquid Interface. 5. IMBERGER, H. E.— 77ic Oxidation of Organic Sulphur Compounds. 6. KOI.ARIK, L. O. — Surface Chemistry of the Iron Oxide-Water Interface. 1. LAMB, R. N. — Surface Films und Hydrophohicity. 8. LOVELOCK, B. J. - 77ie Structure of the Solid/Aqueous Solution Interface. 9. METCALFE, I. M. — Heterocoagulalion Studies in Magnetic/Nonmagnetic Colloidal Systems. 10. SCHAEFER, B. A. —Mechanisms of Ionization in Flames. 11. SKREZENEK, V: — Molecular Orbital and Valence Bond Studies of Electron-rich Molecules. 12. SNARE, M.J. — Fluorescence Probes of Polymer Chain Dynamics. 13. TAN, K. L. — Conformational Properties of Polyfmeihacrylic acid). 14. WOOLFE, G. J. — Picosecond Spectroscopic Studies of Excited-stale Proton 't ransfer Pro­ cesses. 15. YOUNG, J. G. — Absolute Emission Yields from Irradiated Gases. MSc Theses in Progress 16. DENISON, L. S. — Electronic Excitation Processes in Rare Gas-Nitrogen Mixtures. 17. GRANT, H. M. — Conductimetric Determination of Acidity Constants. 18. LAU, A. C M. — Adsorption of Hydrolysable Metal Ions on Hydrophobic Surfaces. 19. SAMPSON, G. — Studies of Rates and Equilibria of Proton Transfer Reaciions al High Pressures. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Hydrophobic Solids and Natural Floatability. ARGC: Coagulation and Order-disorder Processes in Colloidal Systems. ARGC: Picosecond Spectroscopy of Aminoacids, Peptides and Proteins. ARGC: Picosecond Fluorescence Sludics of Molecules with Intermolecular Hydrogen Bonds. ARGC: Temperature Studies of Polymer Fluorescence. ARGC: Excitation Processes in Electron Irradiated Gases. ARGC: Phase Behaviour of Mixtures.

j 238 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

ARGC: Gas-gas Immiscibility. ARGC: Development of Kcnrick Cell. ARGC: Timc-rcsolvcd Fluorescence Studies of Synthetic Polyelectrolytes. ARGC: Prehistoric Iron-working in Sarawak. NERDDC: Colloid and Surface Chemistry of Coal-oil-watcr Systems. NERDDC: Oil Agglomeration Fundamental Studies. AMIRA: Promotion and Control of the Natural Floatability of Minerals. AINSE: Oxidation of Gaseous Freons. AWC: Photochemical Studies of Fluorescent Whitening Agents. COMPUTER SCIENCE

INTRODUCTION Research coniinued on a number of broad fronts during the year. The computational capabilities within thc Department were considerably enhanced with the installation of a VAX 11/780 and a PE 3240 both operating under UNIX. Thc high speed multi-way switch became operational and work commenced on interlinking the two main machines and a variety of other small computers. Good progress continued to be made on the ARGC supported joint project with the Faculty of Music on the Computer Synthesis of Music. The development ofa microcomputer based transaction processing system was initiated supported by an external grant and investiga­ tions into specifications language for forms design commenced. Theoretical sludics were carried out in a number of areas including software science, correctness proofs of programs and thc theory of computation. Investigations into partial match retrieval algorithms were initiated and the preliminary results look very promising. Il is planned to incorporate the results of this work in­ to the transaction processing system to produce a filing system of a very advanced design.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. A computer communication system for the disabled —P. Ci. Thome, T. Andrews. 2. Computer aided diagnostic testing-P. G. Thome. 3. Computer synthesis of music—R. P. Harris, B. E. Conyngham (Faculty of Music). 4. Numerical analysis —R. P. Harris. 5. Speech analysis and synthesis —J-E. Lassez. 6. Theory of computation —J-L. Lassez. 7. Partial-match retrieval —J. W. Lloyd. 8. Software reliability —K. R. Rao, I. Richards. 9. Computer networks —K. R. Rao. 10. Correctness proofs of real-life programs —P. Malcli, J. Jaffar. 11. Decision procedures for correctness statements —P. Mateti, A. P. Kync, .1. Jaffar. 12. Program editors —P. Mateti, J. Jalfar. T. .1. Liu. 13. Software engineering techniques-P. C. Poole. 14. Applications of writcablc control stores —P. C. Poole, D. Wilde. 15. Design of a microcomputer based transaction processing svstem —P. C. Poole, W. E. Hollicr. 16. Forms description language—P. C. Poole. PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. POOLE, P. C —Current Trends in Programming, in Phvsics und Conlemporurv Needs, Vol. 4, ed. Ria/.uddin, Plenum Press, New York: 385-417 (1980). Articles 2. LASSEZ, .1-1..., VAN DER KNIJFF. D. J. J.-Evaluation of Length and Level for Simple Program Schemes. Proc. 3rd International Conference on Computer Soflwure und its Ap­ plications, Thc Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.: 688-694 (1980). 3. LLOYD, J.-Optimal Partial-Match Retrieval. BIT: 20 0980). 4. SHEPHERD, J., LASSEZ, J-L. — Opposing Views on the use of Software Science Measures for Automatic Assessment of Students Programs. Proc. of ihe 3rd Australian Computer Science Conference, Australian Computer Science Communications, 2 No (1): 205-215 (1980). Reports 5. CONYNGHAM, B. E. and HARRIS, R. P.-Problems in Computer Synthesis of String Timbre Computer Music Research Project Paper, No. 4, Universitv of Melbourne (1980). 6. CONYNGHAM, B. E. and HARRIS, R. P. - Paradigms for Machine Assisted Composi­ tion. Computer Music Research Project Paper, No. 5, University of Melbourne (1980). 7. JAFFAR, J. — Prcsburgcr Arithmetic with Array Segments. Computer Science Research Report, No. 5, University Of Melbourne (1980). 8. LLOYD, J. Optimal Partial-match Retrieval. Computer Science Research Report, No. 3, University of Melbourne (1980). 9. LLOYD, J. —Partial-Match Retrieval for Dynamic I'iles. Computer Science Research Report, No. 4, University of Melbourne (1980). 10. MATETI, P. —Specification Schema for Indenting Programs. Computer Science Research Report, No. I, University of Melbourne (1980). 239 240 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

11. MATETI, P. and JAFFAR, J. —A Correctness Proof of an Indenting Program. Computer Science Research Report, No. 2, University of Melbourne (1980). 12. NGUYEN, V. L. and LASSEZ, J-L.-Translinitc Computational Induction and a Dual Problem to Least Fixed Points. Computer Science Research Report, No. 6, Universiiy of Melbourne (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Science 1. KANCH ANASUTT, K.-A Shortest Path Algorithm for Partitioned Grid Graphs. 2. VAN DER KNIJFF, D. J. J. —Evaluation of Some Measures of Software Science. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. DIX, T. {. — Language Facilities for Modular Programming. 2. KYNE, A. P. — Use of Formal Methods of Limited Domain Programming. 3. VAN DER KNIJFF, D. J. J.-Program Modularization. MSc Theses in Progress 4. FLOWER, M. C — Speech Synthesis from a Physiological Model. 5. HATZ1, T. — Prepaging for Virtual Storage Systems. 6. JAFFAR, i.—A Calculus of Array Segments. 7. LIU, T. }.-A Syntax-Directed Editor. 8. MENHENN1TT, G. — 77ie Application of Perfect Knowledge Game Techniques to an Im­ perfect Knowledge Game. 9. MORRIS, E. J. S. — Simulation Aided Design of Computer Systems. 10. ROSS, M. — Evaluation of the Parametric Representation of Vocalizations. 11. SEET, C. — Correctness in Concurrent Programs. 12. SHEPHERD, J.-Critical Evaluation of Software Science. 13. WILDE, W. D. —Using a Wrileable Control Store in a Multi-User Environment. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Direct Synthesis of Music by Computer. Micro-Marketing Ply. Ltd.: A Microcomputer-based Transaction Processing System. GENETICS

INTRODUCTION Larval implant trials on sheep from flocks at the University Research Farm, Strathlicldsaye, have shown that insecticidal residues in the fleece of treated sheep continue to select for resistance genotypes amongst the sheep blowfly many months after thc residues have ceased to alford any protection against blowfly strike. Slrathfteldsayc laboratory facilities arc also being used as a base for ecological genetic studies on the wingless grasshopper, Phuulacridiuin, a pasture pest which ex­ ists either in the winged or wingless form. The genetic basis and the importance of wingedness in influencing migration is under study. Mice rearing facilities have been established in the Department for two quite unrelated pro­ jects. Firstly studies on mottled mouse mutants, which are the mouse analogue of Menkes' syn­ drome in humans (a severe inherited Cu deficiency disease) has demonstrated that injection of cer­ tain copper complexes leads to reactivation of Cu-dcpcndcnl enzymes in various tissues. Thc Wheat Industry is supporting behavioural genetic studies in mice to determine what are the impor­ tant factors loading to periodic outbreaks of mice plagues over extensive regions of Eastern Australia. Movement of mice into and out of specially constructed hay stacks and thc pattern of usage of these hay slacks by mice for food and shelter has commenced at Ml Derrimut. Research on the bacterium, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, has revealed the tendency for genes which confer resistance to antibiotics or to the mutagenic effects of UV or ionising radiation to be located, not on the bacterial chromosome, but on much smaller circular molecules. Thc evolu­ tionary origin of these plasmids and the factors determining whether a gene will bc located on the chromosome or a plasmid is still a puzzle. A mullidisciplinai y study of evolution and speciation in thc midge genus Chironomus seeks to clarify thc relative importance of various components in these processes. In particular Ihe sex determining mechanism has shown many changes between species arid appears to constitute an im­ portant factor in speciation.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Cytological, metrical and biochemical studies of Chironomus oppositus— .1. Martin, EJ. T. O. Lcc, C. Kuvangkaclilok. 2. Chironomidae (Diptera) of Ihc Alliaator Rivers Region, Northern Territory-J. Martin, 11. T. O. Lcc. 3. Population cytogenetics and cytotaxonomy of midges —.1. Martin. 4. Sex determination in Chironomus — .1. Martin, 1... Christidis. 5. Evolution of hc-terochromatin and ribosomal genes in Chironomus- G. I.enlzios, A. J. Stocker. 6. Plasmid modification of radiation and chemical mutagen sensitivity in Pseudomonas aeruginosa— B. T. O. Lec, P. Atkinson. 7. Genetic and physical analvsis of R plasmids in Pseudomonas aeruginosa— P. Atkinson, 11. T. O. Lee. 8. Genes controlling radiation response in Pseudomonas aeruginosa — C. D. Dirckze, P. Atkin­ son, B. T. O. Lee. 9. Hybridization studies in Viclorian eucalypts —J. Yugovic, B. I'. O. Lcc. 10. Studies on the aicohoi dehydrogenase polymorphism in natural populations of Drosophila melanogaster— J. A. McKenzie. J. C. l egem. 11. Evolution of insecticide resistance in the Australian Sheep Blowfly-M. J. Whitten, J. A. McKenzie. 12. Adaptation and genetic architecture in Lucilia cuprina — .1. A. McKen/ie. 13. Investigation of thc molecular defect affecting copper metabolism in human Menkes' syn­ drome and in mottled mouse mutants —S. Herd, .1. Camakaris, D. M. Danks (Paediatrics). 14. Studies on the copper-dependent enzymes, cytochrome oxidase and supci oxide dismulasc in human Menkes' syndrome and in mottled mouse mutants— VI. Phillips, .1. Camakaris, D. M. Danks. 15. Copper metabolism in cultured cells from patients with Wilson's disease —J. Camakaris, D. M. Danks. 16. Control of inclallothioncin mcssengcr-RNA synthesis in rat liver —T. Stevenson, J. Mercer, J. Camakaris. 17. Biochemical and genetic aspects of antithrombin III S. D'Sou/a, .1. Camakaris, II. Ekert. 18. Radiation damage by 1 "l-labcllcd DNA binding agents and relationship between somatic mutations and cell survival-R. Gibbs, J. Camakaris. R. Martin, R. Bradley. 19. Studies on mammalian phenylalanine hydroxylase using monoclonal antibodies produced by mveloma-spleen cell hybrids —.1. Mver, K. H. Choo. R. G. H. Cotton, J. Camakaris, D. M. Danks. 20. Genetic studies on phase polymorphism in l.ocusia inigrutoriu — S. M. Dearn. 21. Thc regulation of chiasma frequency variation in t.ocusia migraloria- J. M. Dearn. 241 242 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

22. Field sludics on the maintenance of a colour panern polymorphism in Phaulucridium vii- taium — i. M. Dearn. 23. Determination and ecological significance of a dispersal polymorphism in Phaulacridium vit- latum — i. M. Dearn. 24. RNA-DNA in situ hybridization - D. 1... Porter. 25. Inversion polymorphism in Polypedilum nubifer (Diptera: Chironomidae) — D. L. Porter. 26. Genetic mapping of radiation and chemical-mutagen sensitive mutants in Pseudomonas aeruginosa —/\. H. C. Kung. 27. Thc expression of P-2 plasmid encoded DNA-ropair function in Escherichia coli —A. H. C. Kung. 28. Study of tellurite resistance conferred by plasmid RP-1 in Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Escherichia coli—A. H. C. Kung. 29. The population dynamics of house mice, Mus musculus, in haystacks —G. R. Singleton. 30. Study of behavioural and genetic variation in natural populations of house mice, Mus musculus — G. R. Singleton. 31. Electrophoretic variations in thc marine mussel, Bracliidonies rostratus—O. J. Colgan, M. J. Whitten. 32. Fitness studies in man —D. J. Colgan, M. .1. Whitten. 33. The genetics of storage proteins in Lucilia cuprina — .1. Cheney and M. J. Whitten.

PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. CAMAKARIS, J., DANKS. D. M., ACKI.AND, L., CARTWRIGHT, E., BORGER, P. and CO ETON, R. G. IL-Altered copper metabolism in cultured cells from human Menkes' svndrome and mottled mouse mutants. Biochem. Genet., IS: 1 17-131 (1980). 2. CAMAKARIS, H., CAMAKARIS. J. and PITTARD, J.- Regulation of aromatic amino

acid biosynthesis in E. coliK,2: Control of ihc aroP tvr A operon in the absence of repression control, j. Bacteriol.. 143: 613-620 (1980). 3. CAMAKARIS, .1., ACKI.AND, L. and DANKS, D. M. — Phenotype expression of Wilson's disease in cultured fibroblasts. J. Inner. Metab. Dis., 3: 155-157 (1980). 4. CHOO, K. H., MYER, J., COTTON, R. G. H., CAMAKARIS, .1. and DANKS, D. M. — Isolation ofa phenylalanine hydroxylase stimulating monoclonal Ab bv ral-mvcloma-rai- spleen-ccll fusion. Biochem. ./., 191: 665-668 (1980). " 5. COLGAN, D. J. and CHENEY, J. —Thc inversion polymorphism of Keyacris scurra and the adaptive topography. Evolution, 34 (1): 181-192 (1980). 6. DEARN, J. M. — Evidence of non-random mating for the colour pattern polymorphism in field populations of ihe grasshopper Phaulucridium villulum. ./. Ausi. ent. Soc, IS: 241-243 (1979). 7. DEARN, J. M. —Allitudinal variaiion in, and morphological divergence between, three closelv related species of grasshopper, Praxibilus sp., Kosciuscola cognatus and A', usilatus (Orthoptera: Acrididae). Aust. J. Zool.. 28: 102-118 (1980). 8. FOSTER, G. G., WHITTEN, M. J., KONOVALOV, C, F1EDO, D., MADDERN, R. H. and BOON, D. .1. —Cytogenetic studies of Lucilia cuprina dorsalis. Polytene chromosome maps of thc autosomes and cytogenetic locations of visible genetic markers. Chromosoma, SI: 151-169 (1980). 9. FOSTER, G. G., WHITTEN, M. J., KONOVALOV, C, ARNOLD, J.T. A. and MAF'FI, G. —Autosomal genetic maps of the Australian sheep blowfly, Lucilia cuprina dorsalis and possible correlations with the linkage maps of Musca doineslicu and Drosophilu melanogaster. Genet. Res.: 37: 55-69 (1980). 10. LENTZIOS, G., STOCKER, A. J. and MARTIN, J.-C-banding and chromosome evolu­ tion in some related species of Australian Chironominac. Genetica, 54: 51-68 (1980). 11. LEHRBACH, P. R., DIRCKZE, C. and LEE, B. T. O. — A mutant of Pseudomonas aeruginosa deficient in an ATP-depcndcnt deoxvribonuclease. J. Gen. Microbiol., 120: 377-384 (1980). • 12. McPHEE, H., ANANTHAKRISHNAN, R. and TAFT, L. I. - Antiproteases and Down's svndrome in an Australian population. ./. Med. Genet., 17: 170-173 (1980). 13. McKENZIE, .1. A., DEARN, .1. M. and WHITT EN, VI. J. — Genetic basis of resistance to dia/.inon in Victorian populations of thc Australian Sheep Blowfly, Lucilia cuprina. Ausi. J. Biol. Sci., 33: 85-95 (1980). 14. McKENZIE, J. A. —An ecological study of the alcohol dehydrogenase (Adh) polymorphism of Drosophila melanogaster. Aust. J. Zool., 28: 709-716 (1980). 15. McKENZIE, J. A., and 1'EGENT, J. C. — Mating patterns of virgin and inseminated Drosophila melanogaster of different alcohol dehydrogenase (Adh) genotypes. Experientia, 36: 1160-1162 (1980). 16. MANN, J. R., CAMAKARIS, J. and DANKS, D. M.-Copper metabolism in mottled mouse mutants —defective placental transfer of "Cu lo foetal brindled (Mobl)mice. Biochem. J.. 186: 629-631 (1980). GENETICS 243

17. MARTIN, J., KUVANGKADIl.OK, C, PEART, I). I I. and LEE, B. T. O. - Multiple sex determining regions in a group of related Chironomus species (Diptera: Chironomidae). Ilerediiv. 44: 367-382 (1980). 18. ROYCE, P. M., CAMAKARIS, J. and DANKS, D. M.-Reduced lysyl oxidase activity in skin fibroblasts from paticnls with Menkes' syndrome. Biochem. ./., 192: 579-586 (1980). 19. SUBLETTE, J. E. and MARTIN, J.— Yuma lahiiiensis n. gen., n. sp. from Tahiti (Diptera: Chironomidae). Bun Pacific Entomol.. 56: 221-237 (1980). 20. WHITTEN, M. J., DEARN, J. M. and McKENZIE, J. A.-Field studies on insecticide resistance in thc Australian Sheep Blowfly, Lucilia Cuprina. Aust. J. Bio! Sci., 33: 725-735 (1980). Technical Report 21. MARTIN, J., SUBLET TE, .1. E. and SUBLETTE, M.-Parl 111 -Karyosystemaiics of selected Chironominac of New Mexico, in Utilization of Chironomidae (Diptera) as a water Quality indicator group in New Mexico, Technical Report of New Mexico Energy Institute. 32, 133 pp. (1979). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. COLGAN, D.- Genetic Eitness. 2. LEHRBACH, P. R. — Repair and Mutagenesis in Pseudomonas aeruginosa. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. D'SOUZA, S. — Investigations on the biochemical and genetic aspects of A ntithrombin III. 2. HERD, S. — Investigation of the molecular defect in human Menkes' syndrome and mottled mouse mutants. 3. DIRCKZE, C. D. — Pathways of DNA Repair in Pseudomonas aeruginosa. 4. KUVANGKADIl.OK, C —Studies of the genetic variability in populations of Ch. op­ positus. 5. PH II ,L1 PS, M. — The effects of genetic defects affecting copper metabolism on the regulation and activity of copper-dependent enzymes. MSc Theses in Progress 6. GIBBS, R. — Radiation damage by 'l- I-labelled DNA binding agents and relationship be­ tween somatic mutations and cell survival. 7. LENTZIOS, G. — Bunding studies on chironomid chromosomes. 8. McPHEE, H. — 77ic role of human aniiproleuses in the physiopathology of lung disease. 9. REEVES, P.-Determination of genetic load in the Australian Sheep Blowfly, Lucilia cuprina. 10. STEELE, V.—A comparative study of the effect of breed structure on inbreeding in Australian equities.

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Phytogeny and taxonomy of the Chironomidae. ARGC: Speciation in Chironomus oppositus: the role of cytogenetic biometric and biochemical parameters in thc differentiation of populations and races of Ch. oppositus and its Australian relatives. ARGC: The maintenance of the alcohol dehydrogenase polymorphism in natural populations of Drosophila melanogaster. ARGC: Population genetics of insecticide resistance in thc Australian Sheep Blowfly. ARGC: Genetic studies in phase polymorhism in locusts. AINSE: Genes controlling radiation response in Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Australian Wool Corporation: Genetic studies on the Australian Sheep Blowfly in relation to its control by genetic means. Apex Foundation for Research into Mental Retardation Ltd.: Copper metabolism in human Menkes' syndrome, Wilson's disease, and in mottled mouse mutants. Nil & MRC: Copper metabolism in human Menkes' syndrome, Wilson's disease, and in mottled mouse mutants. Office of Supervising Scientist, Department of Environment: Chironomidae of the Alligator River Region, Northern Territory. Wheat Industry Research Committee: Study of House-Mice in Cereal Haystacks. 244 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

GEOLOGY

INTRODUCTION Thc use of fission Hack studies on ihc oil poientialiiies of sedimentary basins continues to be developed and has now reached such an advanced stage that many of the world's oil companies are showing considerable interest. For ihe first lime, proof has been obtained that platinum and palladium minerals occur in the Upper Mantle and demonstrates that sulphide liquids must also exist as an Upper Mantle mobile phase. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. ARCHAEOLOGY 1. Problems associated with the morphology and chronology of Homo erectus of Java— D. W. Orchiston, S. Sartono, T. Djubiantono (Bandung Institute of Technology) and others. 2. Late Quaternary man and environment in the Keilor area — D. W. Orchiston and others. 3. Late Quaternary man and environment in the Bassian Region —D. W. Orchiston, E. B. Joyce, P. J. McGoldrick, R. Wilk, P. G. Ladd (ANU), R. McCutcheon (Geological Survey), R. C. Glcnie. B. ECONOMIC GEOCHEMISTRY 1. Determination of the controls of gold mineralization, especially favourable "source" rocks for gold-R. R. Keays. 2. Precious metal studies of nickel sulphide deposits and their host rocks—R. R. Keays. 3. Origin of the Sudbury structure, the world's largest reserve of copper-nickel sulphides —R. R. Keays, A. J. Naldretl, D. Haydon. 4. Fluoride as a geochemical indicator for ore bodies —R. J. McLaughlin, P. Wright. 5. Precious metal abundances of the suboccanic upper mantle—P. R. Hamlyn, R. R. Keays. 6. Behaviour of volatile and precious metals during weathering of sulphide ores—P. J. McGoldrick, R. R. Keays. 7. Volatile and precious metals in the ores and host rocks of the Mt. Isa deposits —P. J. McGoldrick, R. R. Keays. 8. Distribution of precious metals in spinel and garnet Iherzolilcs of Upper Mantle origin —R. H. Mitchell, R. R. Keays. 9. Precious metals in komatiiles and related rocks —R. R. Keays. 10. Controls of gold mineralization in the Wood's Point dyke swarm, Victoria-A. H. Green, T. H. Donnelly, F. M. Jahnke, R. R. Keays. 11. Iridium as a discriminant between magmatic, volcanic-exhalative and hydrothermal nickel sulphides: origin of the Western Australian nickel sulphide deposits-R. R. Keays, P. J. McGoldrick, E. H. Nickel. 12. Mobilization of elements during regional metamorphism —H. Waldron, R. R. Keays. 13. Precious melals in layered intrusions and origins of platiniferous horizons—R. R. Keays, I. H. Campbell. 14. Constitution of kerogen in shales of the Otway Basin —R. T. Mathews, C. Edgoosc, A. Rosenhain. 15. Flash pyrolysis of kerogen wilh and without a silicate matrix —R. T. Mathews, S. Ham. C. GEOMORPHOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY 1. Quaternary volcanism in southeastern Australia and the problem of maar volcanism —E. B. Joyce. 2. Lava channels and lava caves —E. B. Joyce. 3. Cieological features of thc National Estate in Victoria —an inventory—E. B. Joyce, R. L. King (Geological Survey). 4. Geological conservation methods in Australia and the U.K.-E. B. Joyce. 5. Environmental geology techniques in the U.K. and their application in Australia —E. B. Joyce. 6. The Earth Sciences and Environmental Impact Assessment in the U.K., U.S.A. and Australia —E. B. Joyce, P. Flint, D. E. M. McGregor (Bedford College, London). 7. Geological expertise among (he first explorers of southeastern Australia —E. B. Joyce. 8. The history of geological investigations of Australia during thc 19th Century and earlier — N. W. Archbold. D. GEOLOGICAL DATING AND ISOTOPE GEOCHEMISTRY 1. Fission track dating of early-man sites in East Africa —A. J. W. Gleadow. 2. Apatite fission track age patterns and Ihc geodynamics of coniinental rifting in the Indian ocean area —A. J. W. Gleadow, P. Kelly, K. Ferguson, J. F. Lovering. GEOLOGY 245

3. Thermal histories of sedimentary basins using fission track annealing in apatites —A. J. W. Gleadow, I. Duddy. 4. Fission track geochronology of volcaniclastic sandstones and Lower Cretaceous volcanism in southeastern Australia —A. J. W. Gleadow, I. Duddy. 5. I-'ission track dating of alluvial zircon mcgacrysts in eastern Australia —A. J. W. Gleadow, J. D. Mollis (Australian Museum). 6. Comparison of apatite fission track ages and U-Pb zircon Concordia lower intercept ages: an cvaluation-A. J. W. Gleadow, R. W. Page, L. P. Black (BMR). 7. Improved determinations of neutron doses and of the :,8U fission decay constant for fission track dating-D. A. Wark.

E. GEOPHYSICS 1. Geological prospecting using electromagnetic methods —T. Kardaras, L. Thomas. 2. Subbottom profiling in Bass Strait —L. Thomas. 3. Magnetic profiling in Bass Strait —L. Thomas. 4. Trawl grounds survey, Portland —G. L. Benwell, L. Thomas. 5. Interpretation of resistivity data —P. J. Elliott. 6. Gravity studies of Yarra Fault — 1.. Thomas. 7. Geophysical studies of thc Latrobe River Valley at Rosedale— L. Thomas, M. Cecil. 8. Electromagnetic current How measurements al San Remo— L. T homas. 9. Subbottom profiling in Tasmanian lakes—L. Thomas, J. Peterson (Monash).

F. GLOBAL TECTONICS AND ANTARCTIC GEOLOGY 1. Geochronology of the Archaean Shield areas of the supercontinent of Gondwanaland — .1. F. Lovering. 2. Geological evolution and earth resource evaluation of Antarctica —.1. F. Lovering. 3. The uplift history of the Transanlaruic mountains, Victoria l and, Antarctica —A. .1. W. Gleadow. 4. Fission track geochronology of the Australian Antarctic Territory-A. J. W. Gleadow, P. Kelly, J. F. Lovering. 5. Thc structural evolution of F'yfe Hills, Khmara Bay, Western Enderby Land, East Antarc­ tica— M. A. Sandiford, C. J. L. Wilson.

G. MINERALOGY. PETROLOGY, GEOCHEMISTRY 1. Petrology, mineralogy and geochemistry of leucite-bearing rocks on a world-wide basis — A. Cundari. 2. Experimental studies ai atmospheric pressure of selected alkaline volcanic suites —A. Cun­ dari, A. Gupta. 3. Crystal chemistry and petrogenesis of clinopyroxcncs in selected volcanic suites —A. Cun­ dari, A. Dal Negro, E. M. Piccirillo. 4. Petrochemisirv of volcanic rocks—R. W. Le Maitre, A. Ewart (Univ. of Qld), K. Cox (Oxford). 5. Classification of igneous rocks —R. W. Le Maine for IUGS Subcommission. 6. Statistical methods and data bases in petrology--R. W. Ee Maine. 7. Volcanology of ihc Western District of Victoria-R. W. I.c Maitre, E. B. Joyce, O. P. Singleton. A. Cundari. 8. Thc distribution of titanium and boron in mclamorphic rocks and the nature of fluid activity during metamorphism—R. Ahmad, C. J. L. Wilson. 9. Application of radiochemical neutron activation analysis to ihc determination of volatile trace elements and rare earths (REE) in rocks — T. C. Hughes. 10. "Ihe use of ihc inductively coupled plasma (ICP) in geological analysis with particular reference to ilie REE-T. C. Hughes, P. Hannaker. 11. The application of X-ray fluorescence (XRE) to the analysis of volatile elements in geological materials with particular reference to sulphur and carbon —T. C. Hughes, M. T. Haukka. 12. Petrological studies on high Mg basalts from King Island —Fl. Waldron. 13. Petrology of the earth's upper manile-.l. F. lovering. 14. Sulphidic metasediments and their relation to Fe-Ni sulphide deposits in the Widgiemooliha area, W.A. —K. G. McQueen. 15. Development of the ion microprobe mass analyzer as a lool for geochemical and gcochronological studies — .1. F. Lovering. 16. Dissolution of smooth platinum electrodes in biological fluids—P. Hannaker, R. C. Black. 17. Hydromelallurgiail extraction techniques—R. J. Mcl aughlin. 18. Formation and evolution of ihe earliest solar system condensates in carbonaceous chondritc meteorites— D. A. Wark. 19. Distribution of.platinum in sulphide minerals in uliramalic rocks—R. R. Kcavs. D. K. B. Sewell. 246 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

H.PALAEONTOLOGY 1. Biostratigraphy and palaeoecology of ihe Callytherra Formation, Western Australia —G. A. Thomas. 2. Taxonomy of Devonian Rhynchonellida and Permian Spiriferida from Western Australia —(j. A. Thomas. 3. Taxonomic and biostratigraphic studies on west Australian Permian Brachiopoda—N. W. Archhold. G. A. Thomas. 4. Studies on ihc Late Palaeozoic faunas (Brachiopoda and Trilobila) of Irian Jaya, In­ donesia—N. W. Archbold. 5. Faunal and Moral provincialism of ihe Permian period and thc relationship to ihc past distribution of ihe continents — N. W. Archbold. I. SEDIMENTOLOGY 1. Bass Strait submarine canyons and associated deep-sea fans —.1. B. Keene. 2. Submarine sand dunes in Bass St rait — .1. B. Keene. 3. Silica diagenesis in Tertiary marine sediments, southern Australia —J. B. Keene. 4. Diagcnetic studies on carbonate rocks —O. P. Singleton. 5. Dynamic processes controlling sediment mobility and dispersal in Western Bass Strait — M. A. H. Marsden, L. Thomas. 6. Bottom sediment distribution panerns in Bass Strait —M. A. H. Marsden. J. STRUCTURE 1. Microstructure (T.E.M. and optical) associated wilh deformed mica —C. .1. L. Wilson. 2. Folding in mullilaycrcd ice samples —C. J. L. Wilson. 3. Mechanical properties of ice —C. .1. L. Wilson. 4. Structural geology of northeast Gippsland, Victoria —C. .1. L. Wilson.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. LE M AIT RE, R. W. and CUNDARI, A. (guest editors) - Chemical Characterization of Tec­ tonic Provinces: Chemical Geology, 30 (special issue) (1980). 2. WTLK, R., RENNICK, P. and JOLLEY, L. — Inventory of geology, soils, climate, water resources and p/ivsiographv of Organ Pipes National Park, National Parks Service, Victoria 73 pp. (1978). Chapter of Book 3. JOYCE, E. B. — l andslide Hazards in Victoria, in R. L. Heathcote and B. G. Thorn (eds.), Natural lluzards in Australia, Australian Academy of Science, Canberra: 234-247 (1979). Articles 4. AHMAD, R. and WILSON, C. .1. L. —Thc use of particle track methods in microstructural studies (Abstract) Iniernutionul Conf. on ihe effect of deformation on rocks, Gottinncn: 5-6 (1980). 5. ARCHBOLD, N. W. —Revision of iwo Permian brachiopod species names. J. Paleonl., 53 (5): 1260 (1979). 6. ARCHBOLD, N. W.— Studies on Western Australian Permian biachiopods. I. The familv Anopliidao (Chonetidina). Proc. Poy. Soc. Vict.. 91 (2): 181-192 (1980). 7. ARCHBOLD, N. W. — Mingcncwia n. gen. (Strophalosiidina, Brachiopoda) from the Western Australian Permian. ./. Paleom., 54 (1): 253-258 (1980). 8. BA VINTON, O. A. and KEAYS, R. R.-Precious metal values from interflow sedimentary rocks from ihc komaiiite sequence at Kambalda, Western Australia. Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta. 42: 1151-1163 (1978). 9. BLACK, R. C. and HANNAKER, P. — Dissolution of smooth platinum electrodes in biological fluids. Appl. Neurophysiol.. 42: 366-378 (1979). 10. CRAWFORD, A. .1. and KEAYS, R. R.-Cambrian greenstone belts in Victoria: marginal sea-crust slices in the Lachlan fold belt of southeastern Australia. Earth Planet. Sci. Letters, 41: 197-208 (1978). 11. CUNDARI, A. —Role of subduction in the genesis of leucite-bearing rocks. Facts or fashion? Contrib. Mineral. Parol., 73: 432-434 (1980). 12. DUDDY, I. R. — Redistribution and fractionation of rare-earth and other elements in a weathering profile Chem. Geol, 30: 363-381 (1980). 13. EWART, A. and LE MAITRE, R. W. —Some regional compositional differences within Terliary-Rccent otogenic lavas. Chem. Geol., 30: 257-283 (I9S0). 14. FERGUSON, A. K. and SEWELL, D. K. B. —A peak integration method for acquiring X-ray data for On-line Microprobe Analysis. X-Ray Spectrometry, 9(2): 48-51 (1980). GEOLOGY 247

15. GLASHY. G. P., KEAYS, R. R. and RANKIN, P. C.-The distribution of rare earth, precious metal and other trace elements in Recent and fossil deep-sea manganese nodules. Geochem. Jour., 12: 229-243 (1978). 16. GLASSON, M. .1. and KEAYS, R. R. —Gold mobili/ation during cleavage development in sedimentary rocks from the auriferous slate belt of Central Victoria, Australia: some impor­ tant boundary conditions. Econ. Geol., 73: 496-511 (1978). 17. GLEADOW, A. J. W.-Thc fission track age of the KBS Tuff and associated hominid re­ mains in Northern Kcnva. Nature. 284: 225-230 (1980). 18. GRANDCLAUDE Ph., BOUDETTE, E., I I: MAITRE, R. W. and MUTSCHLER, F. -Grouped processing of thc GUF, RASS, CLAIR and PETROS files for chemical com­ parison of two mica granites of various ages and locations. .S'cv. dc la Terra, 13: 97-109 (1980). 19. HAMLYN, P. R. — Equilibration historv and phase chemistrv of the Panton Sill, Western Australia. Amer. Jour. Sci., 280: 631-668 (1980). 20. HUGHES, T. C—The determination of Tellurium in geological materials using radiochemical neutron activation analvsis with a low energy photon detector. J. Radiuanal. Chem., 39: 7-13 (1980). 21. JOYCE., E. B.-Late Cainozoic volcanism in southeastern Australia; age distribution and tectonic sotting, in The Cainozoic Evolution of Continental Southeastern Australia (Abstracts of papers presented at a symposium held in Canberra, November 1980): Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geologv and Geophysics, Record 1980/67: 45-46 (1980). 22. KELLY, P. R., FERGUSON, K. U., GLEADOW, A. J. W. and LOVERING, .1. E. — Apatite fission track age patterns in Antarctica: comparison with southern Australia. J. Geol. Soc. Ausi., 26: 278 (1979). 23. LEACH, J. H. J. - Dune forms and patterns of wind circulation in the North Polar Region of Mars. Second International Colloquium on Mars, N.A.S.A. Conference Publication No. 2072 : 52 (1979). 24. LE MAITRE, R. W.-Numerical Petrology. Trans, l.eic. Lit. Phil. Soc. (for 1978) 72: 70-96 (1980). 25. LE MAIT RE, R. W.-Thc generalised petrological mixing model —a replv. Contrib. Min. Pet., 74: 105 (1980). 26. MACUMBER, P. G.-The influence of groundwater discharge on the Malice landscape, in R. R. Storrier, and M. E. Slannard (eds.), Aeolian Landscapes in the Semi-Arid Zone of South Eastern Australia, Australian Society of Soil Science, Inc. Rivcrina Branch: 67-84 (1980). 27. McDOUGALL, L, MAIER. R., SUTHERLAND-HAWKES, P. and GLEADOW, A. J. W. — Potassium-argon age estimate for the KBS Tuff. East Turkana, Kcnva: resolution ofa controversy? Nature,"284: 230-234 (1980). 28. McQUEEN, K. G. - Volcanic-associated nickel deposits around the Widgiemooltha Dome, Western Australia. Second International Archaean Symposium, Perth 1980 (extended Abstracts): 58-60 (1980). 29. MORLEY, M. E., GLEADOW, A. .1. W. and LOVERING, J. F. — Initiation of continental breakup and subsequent uplift in southeast Australia: evidence from fission track dating. Abstr. 4th Ausi. Geol. Conf : 21 (1980). 30. ORCHISTON W. The chaivin1"environment of Bass Strait. See Aiislralia, 2 (2): 83-85 (1979). 31. ORCHISTON, W. — Pleistocene sea level changes and the initial Aboriginal occupation of thc T asmanian region. Modern Quaternary Research in Southeast Asia, 5: 91-103 (1979). 32. ORCHISTON, W. - Prehistoric man in thc Bass Strait region. See Australia. 2 (3): 130-135 (1979). 33. PI.IMER, I. R. — Hydrothermal mobilisation of silver during retrograde metamorphism. Neues Jahrb. Mineral.. 10: 433-439 (1980). 34. PLIMER, I. R. - Discussion of thc paper by E. F. Stumpfl "Manganese haloes surrounding metamorphic slratabound base metal deposits". Mineral. Depositu, 15: 237-241 (1980). 35. PLIMER, 1. R. — Exhalative Sn and W deposits associated with malic volcanism as precur­ sors to Sn and W deposits associated with granites. Mineral. Deposita, 15: 275-289 (1980). 36. PLIMER, I. R. and BIRCH, W. D. — Bournonite-seligmannite series minerals from Broken Hill, Australia. Aust. Mineral., 33: 167-168 (1980). 37. PLIMER, 1. R. and MOAZEZ-LESCO, A.-A. Garnet xenocrvsts in the Mashhad Granite. N. E. Iran. Geol. Rundschau. 69: 801-810(1980). 38. SEEDSMAN. R. W. and MARSDEN, M. A. II.-Sediment distribution and movement in Corio Bay, Victoria. Publication No. 312, Environmental Studies Series, Ministry for Con­ servation, Victoria, 45 pp.+ 5 app. (19S0). 39. SHERATON, J. W. and CUNDARI, A. — Leucitiles from Gaussbcrg, Antarctica. Contrib. Mineral. Petrol., 71: 417-427 (1980). 40. WARK, D. A. - Allende CAI 3643-A layered record of protosolar nebula condensation. Lunar Planet. Sci., XI: 1202-1204, Lunar Planet. Institute (1980). 248 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

41. WARK, D. A., HUGHES, T. C, LUCAS, M. and McKENZIE, C. D.- Proton Microprobe Analysis of Perovskite in Allende Ca-Al-rich inclusions. Lunar Planet. Sci., XI: 1205-1207. Lunar Planet. Institute (1980). 42. WARK, IJ. A. and LOVERING, J. F. — More early solar system stratigraphy: Coarse­ grained CAEs. Lunar Planet. Sci., XI: 1208-1210, Lunar Planet. Institute (1980). 43. WARK, D. A. and LOVERING, J. I-'.-Second thoughts about rims. Lunar Planet. Sci. XI: 1211-1213, Lunar Planet. Institute (1980). 44. WARK, I). A. and WASSERBURG, G. J. — Anomalous mineral chemistry of Allende FUN Inclusions Cl, EK-I4I and Egg 3. Lunar Planet. Sci., XI: 1214-1216 Lunar Planet. Institute (1980). 45. W1LK, R. R., KEENE, J. B. and MARSDEN, M. A. H. —Sediment characteristics in the Embaymcnl Head of Western Port. The impact of swamp drainage and erosion on sedimen­ tation and seagrass distribution. Publication No. 264. Environmental Studies Series, Ministry for Conservation, Victoria, 59 pp. (1980). 46. WILSON, C.J. I.. - Shear /ones in a pegmatite: a study of albilc-mica-quart/ deformation. ./. of Struct. Geol., 2: 203-209 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. MACKENZIE, D. E. — Volcanoes of the Papua New Guinea Highlands. 2. THOMPSON. B. R. — The Gippsland Sedimentary Basin. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. Al IMAD, R. —Structural and metamorphic studies in ihe retrograde schist zones at Broken Hill. NSW. 2. ARCHBOLD, N. W.— Wen Australian Permian Brachiopods. A study of their taxonomy, biostrutigraphy und provincialism. 3. CRAWFORD, A. J. — Geochemistry and petrology of Viclorian Cambrian greenstones. 4. DUDDY, I. R. -Geological, Peirogruphicul und Geochemical Studies of the early Cretaceous Otway Group Volcanogenic sediments. 5. GRIFFIN, A. —Structural evolution of the Koolyanobbing Range, W. A. and lis hearing on iron ore genesis. 6. LEACH, .1. — Geomorphology of the Martian polar regions. 7. MACUMBER, P. — The influence of groundwater systems un surface processes. 8. MARKOVICS, G. — Seawater reaction with pillow basalts. 9. McGOI.DRICK, P. — Volulile metal study of the copper und lead-zinc orebodies of Ml Isa. Queensland. 10. MORLE.Y, M. E. — Tectonic and magmatic evolution of southeastern Australia: un apatile fission /rack dating study. I I. O'BRIEN, P. - Scdimentology und Geochemistry of Viclorian Glacial Sediments. 12. STORER, R. M. — Petrology and geochemistry of ihe Kambalda, Ml Hunt, Kalgoorlie greenstone hell, W. A. 13. WALDRON, II. M. —Studies of element mobility during regional metamorphism. 14. WARK, D. A. — Evolution of ihe early solar system: chemical, mineralogical and particle Hack sludics uf chondritic meteorites. MSc Theses in Progress 15. FENTON. VI. W. — Ihe liihologicul und geochemical characteristics of selected Lower Palaeozoic Viclorian sediments. 16. FERGUSON, K. U. - lission track dating of the shield ureas of Australia —the relationship between apulilc fission track ages and leclonu/1 hernial hisiory of Precambrian blocks. 17. KARDARAS, T. - Exploration Geophysics. 18. REDMAN, B. A. — Precious metal study of Western Australian Archaean greenstones lo in- vestigute stratigraphic and/or geogruphic control und relation to Au or Ni ores. 19. WILK, R. R. — Dilineulion of the Pliu-Pleistocene boundary by the use of calcareous nan- nuplunkiun. THESES PASSED AT THE UNIVERSITY OF LILLE 1. DEI.APORTE, B.- Elude seduneniulogicpie des Lacs de Gippsland, Victoria, Australie. (A tcxtural and mineralogical study of sediments and their distribution in the Gippsland Lakes- undertaken undct an Exchange Agreement with the University of Lille, France.) Diplome D'Etudes Approfondics (1977). 2. VINCHON, C. — Contribution a Pelade des sediments acluels du bassin d'ulunenlaiion el de la Buie de Western Pur/. (A mineralogical and geochemical study of sediment transported by GEOLOGY 249

streams into Western Port — underlaken under an Exchange Agreement with the Universiiy of Lille. France.) Docteur de T roisieme Cycle (1979). SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Origin and Development of Cainozoic acid and intermediate lavas in E. Australia. ARGC: Dclotmation of Ice-rock Models. ARGC: Fission Track Dating and thc Gcodynamics of Continental Rifling in the Indian Ocean A rea. ARGC: The Geochronology of the Earth's earliest crust-an Ion Microprobe, Electron Microprobe Approach. Esso Australia: Thermal evolution of hydrocarbon-bearing sedimentary environments: develop­ ment of fission track exploration techniques. 250 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

HUMAN MOVEMENT STUDIES

INTRODUCTION Thc year 1980 was an eventful one for departmental research. For a considerable period there lias existed a need for more laboratory space. The cramped quarters in the Old Forestry building posed many problems in both teaching and research. Difficulties in relation to convenience, and in care and maintenance of equipment were especially severe. ln 1980 thc Department's Laboratory 1 was moved oil" campus, into the premises in Swanston Street. The New 1 aboraiory I, completely renovated, has enabled staflTo re-deploy apparatus and both stall', graduate and undergraduate students, to work under improved conditions and everyone looks forward lo the possibility of moro laboratory space becoming available.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Inertial properties of human body segments —S. A. Lephart. 2. Historical survey of physical education in Victoria —E. E. P. Gill. 3. Thc development of sport and recreation in Victoria from 1934-1984 —E. E. P. Gill, A. W. Willee. 4. '1 he effects of an activity/iecreaiion programme in an industrial work setting on individual health and fitness pattems-C. A. Briggs, B. Nettleton. 5. Continued development of functional fitness measures for team sports — C. A. Briggs, B. Nettleton. 6. The nature of decision making in complex team games —C A. Briggs, B. Neitleton. 7. Determination of physiological characteristics of Australian elite Alpine and Nordic skiers and speed skaters —C. A. Briggs. 8. Biomechanical determinants of acceleration — E. R. Sandstrom. 9. Methods of improving range of movement —H. R. Sandstrom. 10. An chirographic approach to understanding the role of the teacher of physical educa­ tion—B. Nettleton. 11. Coincident anticipation and attention demands in complex tracking skills —B. Nettleton. 12. Life-style, physical activity and community health —B. Nettleton. 13. Total health promotion in business and industry —A. W. Willee.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. NETTLETON, B.— You're ihc Coach, Australian Government Publishing Service. Canberra (1980). 2. WILLEE, A. W.-//«vc You Ever Seen a Monkev Wilh Back Trouble?, Unicorn Publica­ tions, Melbourne (1980). Chapter of Book 3. NETTLE fON. B. — Acquiring Skills, in Towards Belter Coaching. The Art and Science of Couching, ed. E. S. Pvke, Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra: 61-91 (1980). Articles 4. BRIGGS, C. A. — Ideas lo Use in Warm-up for Cricket. Sports Coach. 4 (.1): 19-23 (1980). 5. BRIGGS. C. A. and NETTLETON, B. - Lifc-stvle and Activitv Panerns. Aust. ./. of Spoils Medicine. II (3): 71-73 (1980). 6. BRIGGS, C. A. and NETTLETON, B. — Approaches to Community Eitness. Health and Hygiene. J (4): 193-197 (1980). 7. NETTLE ION, B.-Role Perceptions of Physical Education Teachers, in Values into Ac­ tion, eds. J. Emmcl, D. D. Molyncux and N. R. Wardrop, Australian Council for Health, Physical Education and Recreation: 73-79 (1979). 8. NETTLETON, B. — New Skills for Changing Roles. A Consideration of the Physical Educa­ tion Teacher in the Community School Setting, in Values into Action, eds. J. Emmel, D. D. Molvnenx and N. R. Wardrop, Australian Council for Health, Physical Education and Recreation: 111-115 (1979). 9. NETTLETON, B. —Children's Needs and Physical Activity. Aust. .1. for Health, Phvsical Education and Recreation, SS: 28-36 (1980). 10. NE I TI.ETON, B. — Some Aspecis of Group Cohesion in Sport Teams. International Review of Sport Sociology. I (15): 65-84 (1980). 11. NET IT.ETON, B.-Vision and Volleyball. Spurts Coach, 3 (4): 30-35 (1979). HUMAN MOVEMENT STUDIES 251

12. NETTLETON. ii.-Voluntary Leaders in Sports Associations Sports Coach, 4 (2): 16-21 (1980). 13. NETTLETON, B. and BRIGGS, C. A.-The Development of Specific Function Tests as a Measure of Performance. J. of Sports Medicine and Physical Fitness, 20 (1): 47-54 (19S0). 14. NETTLETON, B. and SMITH. R. G. —An Approach to the Investigation of Coincidence Anticipation in Ball Tracking Skills. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 50: 676-678 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. CHURCHWARD, R. — Mobility aids for Paraplegics. 2. SMITH, R. G. — Influence of Task Requirements upon the Performance of Tracking Skills. MSc Theses in Progress 3. DIXON, M. J. — Social and Psychological Variables Influencing Participation in Community Health Programs. SUBSTANTIAL GRANT RECEIVED Thc following grant has been received: Slate Department of Youth, Sport and Recreation: The Development of Sport and Recreation in Victoria, 1934-1984. 252 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

MATHEMATICS

INTRODUCTION During 1980 substantial research continued in a wide variety of areas of pure and applied mathematics. Visits from several overseas mathematicians served lo stimulate research activities. Significant progress was made in the area of minimal surfaces assisted by a visit from Pro­ fessor R. Schoen. Thc existence of minimal hypcrsurfaccs in Ricmannian manifolds was estab­ lished, and applications were made of minimal surfaces to 3-dimensional manifolds. Studies of group actions on manifolds and polyhedra yielded classification results for 3-manifolds and definitive progress was made on thc symmetry properties of knots. Results concerning ihc homological properties of groups were obtained and finiteness and computable properties of group rings were studied. The existence of cycles for graphs with certain connectivity properties was established. Research and computer simulation yielded results concerning long-range interaction in ionic systems. Simulation of surface properties showed inadequacies in existing surface theories. Research in continuum mechanics and wave theory was very active with significant applications made to geophysical and oceanographic studies. The application of mathematics in economics and biology, optimization and mathematical programming were thc subject of several research pro­ jects.

RKSKARC1I TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. ALGEBRA AND LOGIC Cannonilo, Groves, Hannah, Hartley, Lindsay, Miller, Richardson, Toohcy. 1. Finiteness conditions for group rings. 2. Model companions for varieties of groups. 3. Compuiablc properties of rings and modules. 4. Homology of finitely presented groups. 5. Balanced presentations of fundamental groups. 6. Minimal presentations of finitely generated nilpotent groups. 7. Applications of computers to group theory. 8. Group rings of mctabelian groups. 9. Mctabelian groups wilh finitely generated homology. B. ANALYSIS Bartnik, Das, Koliha, Love, Rosenblat, Russell, Salivin, Schoen, Simon, Upton, Williams. 1. Spectral theory of affine operators. 2. Variational inequalities. 3. Surfaces of prescribed mean curvature. 4. Almost periodic functions. 5. Real inversion theorems for Stieltjes transforms. 6. Regularity theory for minimal surfaces. 7. Inequalities. 8. Generalized bounded variaiion. 9. Bifurcation problems for periodically perturbed systems. 10. Zeros of Bcsscl functions. 11. Trigonometric series. 12. Hypergeometric integral equations. 13. Minimal surfaces in Ricmannian manifolds. 14. Numerical range of operators. C. TOPOLOGY AND GEOMETRY Hartley, Hodgson, Richardson, Rubinstein, Schoen. 1. Hyperbolic 3-manifolds arising from regular polyhedra. 2. Branched coverings and ihc homcoiopy groups of lens spaces. 3. Incompressible surfaces in bundles. 4. Incquivalcnl Hccgaard decompositions of 3-manifolds. 5. Minimal surfaces and uniqueness of Hccgaard decompositions. 6. Involutions and homcoiopy groups of Scifcrl manifolds. 7. Knots fixed by free periodic transformations. 8. Alexander polynomials of amphicheiral knois. 9. Invariants to determine non-inveriibiliiy of knots. MATHEMATICS 253

D. CONTINUUM MECHANICS Gear, Grimshaw, Rosenblat, N. Smith, Waechter, Wood. 1. Stability of fluids in bounded containers. 2. Internal gravity waves. 3. Wave-mean (low interaction. 4. Over-reflexion. 5. Coupled oscillations. 6. Instability of coastal currents. 7. Waves in a stratified shear flow. 8. Inertial waves. 9. Surface crack detection in metals. 10. Thermal explosion theory. 11. Moving boundary problems. 12. A model of circulation of thc Southern Ocean. E. GRAPH THEORY AND COMBINATORICS Billington, Eggleton, Godsil, Holton, McAvaney, McKay, Nagcls, Taylor. 1. Automorphism groups of graphs. 2. Degree sequences of graphs and hypergraphs. 3. Cycles through specified vertices. 4. Planar graphs. 5. Stability index. 6. Error-correcting codes. 7. Metric properties of random graphs. F. HISIORY OF MATHEMATICS Cross, Morley. 1. Historv of Green's and associated theorems. 2. Life of G. G. Stokes. 3. Correspondence between Gauss, Weber, Mobius, Listing. G. MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Goddard, Holton, Howroyd, Love, Michcner, Rickard, Russell. 1. Inequalities for rates of interest. 2. Dynamic Stackelberg stability. 3. Cournot oligopoly models with time delays. 4. Models of income tax evasion. H. MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY McGuire, Naughton, Rosenblat, Thompson. 1. Ergodic properties of dilfcrcncc equations in biology. 2. Stability of translation and transcription. 3. Models for evolution. 4. Periodic and wave-like solutions of model equations in population biology. 5. Population models with variable growth rates. I. OPTIMIZATION, CONTROL, GAME THEORY Craven, Gulati, Trudzik, Wilson. 1. Duality and sensitivity theorems for nonlinear fractional programming. 2. Optimization in abstract spaces. 3. Speciral analysis of ciphers generated by cryptographic machines. 4. Lagrangian conditions in mathematical programming. 5. Vector-valued optimization. 6. Modified duality for mixed-integer programs. 7. Perturbed minimization with constraints adjoined or deleted. 8. Implicit function theorems. J. STATISTICAL MECHANICS Abraham, lnawashiro, McGuire, Morriss, Rogers, E. Smith, Thompson, Wright. 1. Integral equation and perturbation theory descriptions of bulk fluids. 2. Monte Carlo simulations of ionic and dipolar systems. 3. Analytic theories of adsorption of fluids onto solid surfaces. 254 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

4. Grand canonical simulation of adsorpiion. 5. Lattice sums lor energies of ionic crystals. 6. Energies of defects and of point defect interactions. 7. Universal critical behaviour of simple non-linear systems. 8. Ergodic properties of piecewise linear maps on an interval. 9. Mean field models of amorphous and disordered systems. 10. A model spin glass on a Caylcy tree. 11. Phase transitions in one-dimensional lattice systems.

PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. HOLTON, D. A. and RICKARD, J. A.-Problems Problems, Prentice-Hall Australia, Sydney (1980).

Chapter of Book 2. THOMPSON, C. J. —Phase T ransitions in Exactly Soluble Models, in Recent Advances in Statistical Mechanics, Brasov International School, Central Institute of Phvsics. Bucharest, Romania: 1-62 (1979).

Articles 3. BAUMSLAG, G. B.. CANNON1TO. F. B. and MILLER, C. F. Ill-Infinitely Generated Subgroups of Finitely Presented Groups-II. Math. Zeit.. 172: 97-105 (1980). 4. BILLINGTON, D. — Degree Sequences Uniquely Realisable by Hypergraphs. Combinatorial Maths VII, Springer-Verlag Lecture Notes in Maihemulics No. 829: 59-68, Springer-Verlag, Berlin (1980). 5. COHEN, D. S. and ROSENBLAT. S. -Flickering and Thermal Flicker Waves on Catalvtic Wires and Gauzes and in Chemical Reactors. SIAM J. Appl. Maih., 39: 463-474 (1980). 6. COLLINGS, 1. L. and GRIMSHAW, R. 11. J.-Thc Effect of Current Shear on Topographic Rossbv Waves. J. Phvs. Ocean. 10: 363-371 (1980). 7. COLLINGS, I. L. and GRIMSHAW, R. H. J.-Thc Effect of Topography on the Stability of a Barotropic Coastal Current. Dyn. of Annas, and Oceans; 5: 83-106 (1980). 8. CRAVEN, B. D. and ZLOBEC, S.-Complete Characterization of Optimality for Convex Programming in Banach Spaces. Appl'ic. Anal., II: 61-78 (1980). 9. DAS, K. C. and EMBRY-WARDROP, M. — Orthogonality and Numerical Range II. Linear Algebra and ils Applications, 30: 63-67 (1980). 10. DAVIS, S. H. and ROSENBLAT, S.-A Quasipcriodic Mathieu-1 lili Equation. SIAM J. Appl. Maih.. 38: 139-155 (1980). 11. DE LEEUW, S. W., PERRAM, J. W. and SMITH, E. R.-Simulation of Electrostatic Svstems in Periodic Boundary Conditions 1. Lattice Sums and Dielectric Constants. Proc. Rov. Soc. London. A373: 27-56 (1980). 12. DE LEEUW, S. W., PERRAM, .1. W. and SMITH, E. R. — Simulation of Electrostatic Systems in Periodic Boundary Conditions 11. Equivalence of Boundary Conditions. Proc. Rov. Soc. London, A373 : 57-66 (1980). 13. DUBOIS, C. D., UPTON, C. J. F. and PIKE, K. L. —Constraints on Complexity Seen via Fused Vectors of an n-Dimcnsional Semantic Space. Semiolica, 29: 209-243 (1980). 14. EGGLETON, R. B. and HOLT ON. D. A. — Pseudographic Realisations of an Inlinitary Degree Sequence. Combinatorial Maths VII, Springer- Verlag Lecture Notes in Mathematics No. 829: 94-109, Springer-Verlag, Berlin (1980). 15. GODSIL, C. D. and McKAY, B. D. -Graphs with Regular Neighbourhoods. Combinatorial Maths VII, Springer-Verlag Lecture Notes in Mathematics No. 829: 127-140, Sprineer- Verlag, Bcilin (1980). 16. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J. —A General Theory of Critical Level Absorption and Valve Effects for Linear Wave Propagation. Geophvs. Astr. Fluid Dvnam., 14: 303-326 (1980). 17. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J. — An Exact Finite-Amplitude w'avc on a Hcimholtz Velocity Profile in an Infinite Boussinesq Fluid. J. Atmos. Sci., 37: 2793-2794 (1980). 18. HANNAH, J., RICHARDSON, J. S and ZELEZN1KOW, J. — Completely Semisimple Ring Semigroups. J. Austral. Math. Soc. (Series A), 30: 150-156 (1980). 19. HARDT, R. and SIMON, L. - Boundary Regularity and Embedded Solutions for the Oriented Plateau Problem. Annals of Math., 110: 439-486 (1980). 20. HARTLEY, R. I.-Knots and Involutions. Maih. Z., 171: 175-185 (1980). 21. HARTLEY, R. I.-On thc Classification of Three-Braid Links. Abh. Math. Sent. Hamburg, 50: 10S-117 (1980). 22. HARTLEY, R. l.-lnvcrlible Amphicheiral Knots. Maih. Ann., 252: 103-109 (1980). 23. HATHAWAY, N. J., MURRAY, I. W. and RICKARD, J. A. — Thc Stability of Bishop's Warfare Strategy. ./. Austral. Math. Soc. (Series B), 21: 418-432 (1980). MATHEMATICS 255

24. HOSKINS, C. S. and SMITH, E. R.-Effects of Periodic Boundary Conditions on Simula- lions of Ionic Systems. Molec. Phys., 41: 243-248 (1980). 25. LOVE, E. R. — Inequalities for Effective Rates of Interest. Bull. /ns/. Maths, and its Applica­ tions. 16 (11/12): 259-264 (1980). 26. LOVE, E. R. and BYRNE, A.-Real Inversion Theorems for Generalized Stieltjes Transforms. J. London Maih. Soc. (2) 22: 285-306 (1980). 27. McAVANEY, K. L. —A Conjecture on Two-Point Deleted Subgraphs of Cartesian Pro­ ducts. Combinatorial Maths VII. Springer-Verlag Lecture Notes in Mathematics No. 829: 172-185. Sprinucr-Verlag, Berlin (1980). 28. McGUIRE, J. B. and THOMPSON, C. .1. - Distribution of Iterates of first Order Difference Equations. Bull. Austral. Maih. Soc. 22 (1): 133-143 (1980). 29. PAYNE, A. F. T. and RICKARD, J. A. — Exchange Traded and Conventional Options: A Comparison. Chartered Accountant in Australia: 11-17 (March, 1980). 30. RICKARD, J. A. —Stability Properties in a Dynamic Siackclberg Oligopoly Model. The Econ. Record, 56: 253-256 (September, 1980). 3|. RICKARD, J. A. —A Graphical Procedure for Computing the Effective Rate of Interest. Bull. Inst. Maths, and its Applications, 16: 227-228 (October, 1980). 32. RICKARD, J. A. and RUSSELL, A. M.-Understanding Interest Rates. The Austral. Ac­ countant: 412-415 (Julv 1980). 33. ROSENBLAT, S. -Asymmetric Bifurcation. J. Austral. Math. Soc. (Series B), 21: 297-304 (1980). 34. ROSENBLAT, S. — Population Models in a Periodically Fluctuating Environment. J. Math. Biology, 9: 23-36 (1980). 35. ROSENBLAT, S. and COHEN, D. S. - Periodically Perturbed Bifurcation I. Simple Bifur­ cation. Studies in Appl. Math., 63: 1-23 (1980). 36. ROSENBLAT, S. and SZETO, R. — Multiple Solutions of Nonlinear Boundary-Value prob­ lems. Studies in Appl. Maih., 63 : 99-117 (1980). 37. RUBINSTEIN, J. EL — Dehn's Lemma and Handle Decompositions of Some 4-Manifolds. Pacific J. Maih.. 86: 565-569 (1980). 38. RUSSELL, A. M. —A Commutative Banach Algebra of f unctions of Bounded Variation. Amer. Math. Monthly, 87(1): 39-40 (1980). 39. RUSSELL, A. M. -A Commutative Banach Algebra of Functions of Generalized Variation. Pacific J. Maih., 84 (2): 455-463 (1979). 40. RUSSELL, A. M. —Thc Gamma Function and Infinite Scries. Int. J. Math. Educ. Sci. Techno/.. 11(2); 169-172 (1980). 41. RUSSELL, A. M. and RICKARD, J. A.-The Effect of Product Differentiation on Dynamic Cournot and Stackelbcrg Stability. Economic Letts.. 5: 101-107 (1980). 42. SIMON, L. — Behaviour of Capillary Surfaces over Domains with Corners. Special Issue of Pacific J. of Math.: (1980). 43. SIMON, 1.. —First and Second Variation in Geometry and Topology. Proc Conf. in Minimal Surfaces: Trento (1980). 44. SMITH, E. R. —Periodic Boundary Conditions in Simulation of Ionic Solids, in Proc. of National Resource for Computation in Chemistry Workshop on The Problem of Long- Range Purees in ihe Computer Simulation of Condensed Media, Menlo Park, California, January 8-11: 10 (1980). 45. SMITH, E. R. —Periodic Boundary Conditions for Dipolar Systems, in Proc. of National Resource for Computation in Chemistry Workshop on The Problem of Long-Range Forces in ihc Computer Simulation of Condensed Media, Menlo Park, California, Januarv 8-11: 24 (1980). 46. SMITH, E. R. —Lattice Sums for Periodic Boundary Conditions, in Proc. of National Resource for Compulation in Chemistry Workshop on The Problem of Long-Range Forces in the Computer Simulation of Condensed Media, Menlo Park, California, Januarv 8-11: 49 (1980). 47. TEO, K. L. and CRAVEN, B. D. —On a Computational Algorithm for Time-Lag Optimal Control Problems with Restricted Phase Coordinates. J. Austral. Math. Soc. (Series B), 21: 385-397 (1980).

Research Reports 48. ABRAHAM, D. B. and SMITH, E. R.-Monte Carlo Simulation of a Planar Roughening Transition. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 46(1980). 49. BAUMSLAG, G. B., CANNONITO, E. B. and MILLER, C. F. Ill-Some Recognizable Properties of Solvable Groups. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 36 (1980). 50. BOMBIERI, E. and SIMON, L.-On the Gchring Linked-Sphercs Problem. Institute for Advanced Studv Res. Rep., Princeton (1980). 51. COLLINS, B. A. and GODDARD, S. T.-A Heuristic Method for Determining Hamil­ tonian Paths and Circuits. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 9 (1980). 256 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

52. CRAVEN, B. D. — Implicit Function Theorems and Lagrange Multipliers. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 24(1980). 53. CRAVEN, B. D. —Lagrangian Conditions, Vector Minimization, and Local Duality. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep.. 37 (1980). 54. CRAVEN, B. D. - Perturbed Minimization, with Constraints Adjoined or Deleted. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 42(1980). 55. EGGLETON, R. B. and HOLTON, D. A.-The Graph of Type (O,o°,») Realizations ofa Graphic Sequence. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Reo., 34 (1980). 56. EGGLETON, R. B. and HOE EON, D. A. — Graphic Sequences. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 35 (1980). 57. GODDARD, S. T. - Ranking in Some Tournaments and Group Decision Making. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep.. /0(198O). 58. GODDARD, S. T.—An Approximate Method for Generating Eulerian Circuits. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., II (1980). 59. GODDARD, S. T., MICHENER, S. A. and RICKARD, J. A.-A Graphical Solution to the Lease Evaluation Problem. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 12 (1980). 60. GRIMSHAW, R. H. ,L —Evolution Equations for Long, Nonlinear Internal Waves in Stratified Shear Flows. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., I (1980). 61. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J.-Mcan Flows Generated bv a Progressing Water Wave Packet. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 3 (1980). 62. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J. — Modulation of an Internal Gravity Wave Packet in a Stratified Shear Flow. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 6 (1980). 63. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J.-Resonant Over-Rellexion of Internal Gravity Waves from a Thin Shear Layer. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 23 (1980). 64. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J.-The Effect of Dissipativc Processes on Mean Flows Induced by In­ ternal Gravity Wave Packets. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 25(1980). 65. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J. — A Second Order Theory for Solitary Waves in Deep Fluids. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep.. 31 (1980). 66. GRIMSHAW, R. H. J. — Slowly Varying Solitary Waves in Deep Fluids. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 41 (1980). 67. GRIMSHAW, R. H. .1.-Solitary Waves in a Compressible Fluid. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 44 (1980). 68. GROVES, .1. R. J. —Metabelian Groups with Finitely Generated Integral Homology.-Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 48 (1980). 69. HANNAH, J. —Serniprime Rings wilh Bounded Index of Nilpolcncc. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 7(1980). 70. HARTLEY, R. I. - Identifying Non-lnvenible Knots. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 43 (1980). 71. FIOl.TON, D. A. —Cycles through Specified Vertices in k-Conneclcd Regular Graphs. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 20 (1980). 72. HOLTON, D. A. and LITTLE, C. H. C-Regular Odd Rings and Non-Planar Graphs. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep.. 40(1980). 73. HOWROYD, T. D. and RICKARD, J. A.-Cournot Oligopoly and Output Adjustment Costs. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 22 (1980). 74. HOWROYD, T. D. and RUSSELL, A. M-Cournol Oligopoly Models with Time Delays. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep.. 26(1980). 75. LITTLE, C. H. C. and HOLTON, D. A.-Rings of Cutsets in Graphs. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep.. 45 (1980). 76. MASHFORD, J. S. —A Non-Manifold Theorv of Space-Time. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., /7 (1980). 77. MORRISS, G. P. — Monte Carlo Simulation of Hard Diatomic Molecules. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep.. 13 (1980). 78. MORRISS, G. P. and PERRAM, J. W.-The Analytic Structure of the R1SM Equation Solution. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 5 (1980). 79. RICKARD, J. A., RUSSELL, A. M. and HOWROYD, T. D.-Tax Evasion Models wilh Allowance for Retrospective Penalties. Univ'. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., JO (1980). 80. ROGERS, J. B. and THOMPSON, C. .1.-Absence of Long-Range Order in One- Dimensional Spin Systems'. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 25 (1980). 81. RUBINSTEIN, J. H.-Non-Orientablc Surfaces in Some Non-IIakcn 3-Manifolds. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., /4(I980). 82. RUSSELL, A. M. and RICKARD, J. A.-Thc Effect of Product Differentiation on Dynamic Siackclberg Stability. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep.. /9 (1980). 83. RUSSELL, A.M. and UPTON, C. J. F. — A Generalization of a Theorem bv F. Riesz. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 15 (1980). 84. SCHOEN, R. and SIMON, L. - Regularity of Stable Minimal Hypcrsurl'aces. Institute for Advancer! Stuffy Res. Rep., Princeton (1980). MATHEMATICS 257

55. SCHOEN, R. and SIMON, L. - Regularily of Simplv Connected Surfaces with Quasiconfor- mal Gauss Map. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep.. 18 (1980). 56. SIMON, L. —Survev Lectures on Minimal Submanifolds. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 2/(1980). 87. SIMON, L. - Boundary Behaviour of Solutions of the Non-Parametric Least Area Problem. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 29(1980). 88. SMITH, E. R. — Electrostatic Energy in Ionic Crystals. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 16 (1980). 89. SMITH, E. R., HOSKINS, C. S. and WRIGHT, C. C-Boundary Conditions for Monte Carlo Simulation of Charged Systems. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 32 (1980). 90. TAYLOR, R. — Constrained Switchings in Graphs. Univ. of Melb. Maths. Res. Rep., 27 (1980). 91. TAYLOR, R. - Switchings Constrained to 2-Connectivity. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 38 (1980). 92. TRUDZ1K, L. 1. - Characterization of Optimalily for a Class of Convex Programs. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 47(1980). 93. UPTON, C. J. E. - Some New Classes of Almost Periodic Functions. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 8 (1980). 94. WILLIAMS, G. H. - Nonlinear Nonhomogencous Elliptic Variational Inequalities with a Nonconstant Gradient Constraint. Univ. of Melb. Malhs. Res. Rep., 2 (1980). THKSES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Science 1: ROSS, D. K. — Research Problems in Mathematics and Chemistry. Doctor of Philosophy 2. CUMMINGS, P. J.-Applications of Baxter's Factorisation in the Statistical Theory of I'luids. 3. HATHAWAY, N. \. —Oligopoly Problems in Mathematical Economics. 4. McKAY, B. D. — Topics in Computational Graph Theory. Master of Science 5. A1TCHISON, 1. R. — Involutions and Handle-Decompositions of 4-Manifolds. 6. BARTNIK, R. A. - The Lorentz Mean Curvature Equation. 7. GODDARD, S. T.-Heuristic Methods for Combinatorial Graph Theory Problems. 8. KAY, G. L. — Real and Complex Banach *-Algebras. 9. RULE, T. M. - Three Dimensional Perturbations lo Phase Plane Systems. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ARMOUR, L. T. — Line Search Algorithms for Playing Economic Gaines. 2. ARMSTRONG, C. M. - The Statistical Mechanics of Adsorption. 3. BILLINGTON, D.-Degree Sequences of Graphs and Hypergraphs. 4. COLLINGS, 1. R.-Continental Shelf Dynamics. 5. HUNT ER, R. J. - Weakly Compactly Generated Topological Linear Spaces. 6. McAVANEY, K. L.-Studies in Graph Theory. 1. MORRISS, G. P.- Ihe RISM Equation and Other Topics in Theory of Fluids. 8. ROGERS, J. B.-Simple Dynamical Systems. 9. SMITH, F. R.-Elliptic Variational Problems. 10. TRUDZIK, L. I.-Optimization in Abstract Spaces. MSc Theses in Progress 11. BARUA, U.S. - Graph Theorv. 12. BERESFORD, J. A. — Finitely Presented Solvable Groups. 13. COLAIDIS, A. J. — Heaviside's Operator Theory. 14. GEAR, J. A.-Internat Gravity Waves. 15. HODGSON, C. D.-Topology of 3-Manifolds. 16. LINDSAY, P. A.-Mathematical Logic. 17. MICHENER, S. A.-Mathematical Analvsis of Certain Casino Games. 18. NAUGHTON, M. J. - Topics in Mathematical Biology. 19. PIZER, A. D. — Applications of Topology to Group Theorv. 20. SALIVIN, B. V. — Generalized Calculus on Banach Spaces. 21. TAYLOR, R. — Degree Sequences in Graphs. 22. TOB1N, P. C-Mathematical Models in the Origin and Evolution of Biological Macromolecules. 23. TOOITEY, K. P.-Model Companions and Varieties of Groups. 258 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Balanced presentations of fundamental groups. ARGC: Statistical mechanics of liquids and liquid-solid interfaces. ARGC: Amorphous states of matter. METEOROLOGY

INTRODUCTION A. METEOROLOGY Considerable progress has been made with studies of the southern hemisphere climate using an atmospheric general circulation model. A deep sea ocean model has also been developed as a joint program in Antarctic studies with thc Department of Mathematics. Long term climate studies have been carried out using ice sheet models and by the development of a global energy balance model. In mesoscale mctcotology the emphasis has been placed on field work for data collection in programs for studying sea bree/.es, convection plumes, and cold fronts. A computer aided forecasting system is undergoing trials based on past analogues with a numerical model prognosis input. B. GLACIOLOGY Close collaboralion wilh the Antarctic Division Glaciology Section for Antarctic research has continued. Programs carried out during 1980 include: the deployment ofa new automatic station in inland Antarctica, ovcrsnow traverses cast of Casey, heat balance of sea ice and ocean near Mawson, new ice drill development and the participation in a Soviet Antarctic traverse. In Australia two new radar ice thickness sounders were built and laboratory studies on deep Antarctic ice cores were continued.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. SYNOPTIC METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGY 1. Climatology of southern hemisphere jet streams —T. T. Gibson. 2. Southern hemisphere climate monitoring — W. E. Budd, T. H. Jacka*, S. Kcp. 3. Synoptic conditions associated wilh wet and dry periods in Victoria —T. T. Gibson, P. Whet- lon, W. Wright. 4. The relation between sea surface temperatures and rainfall —W. F. Budd, W. Wright, S. Kep. 5. Analogue and regression forecasting for the Melbourne region using numerical model prog­ nosis and synoptic data input —T. T. Gibson, D. Jenssen, R. Dahni. B. URBAN AND MESOSCALE METEROLOGY 1. Surface wind flow patterns around the region of Melbourne—B. van Meurs, R. Lile, D. Abbs. 2. Air pollution forecasting in the Melbourne area —B. van Meurs, R. Lile, R. Dahni. 3. Sea and bay brce/e characteristics in the Melbourne region —T. T. Gibson, B. van Meurs, R. Lile, D. Abbs. 4. Structure of thermal convection plumes by field studies —B. van Meurs, T. T. Gibson, R. Lile, R. Doming. 5. Solitary waves in the atmospheric boundary layer —Thc Morning Glory study—R. H. Clarke. 6. Thc Cold Fronts Research Project (Phase !)-a multi-institutional cooperative research pro­ gram—R. II. Clarke, T. T. Gibson, B. van Meurs, R. Lile, R. Dahni, P. Whetton, W. Wright, D. Abbs. C. COMPUTER MODELLING FOR WEATHER AND CLIMATE 1. Modelling thc climate of the southern hemisphere with a general circulation model —1. H. Simmonds, W. E. Budd. 2. Analysis of effects of continental topography, cloud and surface albedo on the circula­ tion—!. H. Simmonds, P. Parker, Y. B. Lin. 3. Analysis of cyclones and cvclone tracks in the model and real atmosphere —1. H. Simmonds, Y. B. Lin. 4. Comparison of model and real atmosphere variability —I. H. Simmonds. 5. Reformulation of lower boundary layer and surface drag using Monin-Obukhov theory— 1. H. Simmonds. 6. Development ofa paramcterised energy balance model for global climate studies — I. H. Sim­ monds, C. Chidzcy. 7. Development ofa dvnamic model for the deep water circulation of the Southern Ocean —N. R. Smith. 8. Development and application ol; a simple equivalent barotropic model for research and leaching—D. Jenssen.

* Members of the Glaciology Section of Antarctic Division. Department of Science and Technology. 259 260 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

9. Analysis of the effect of Ihe atmosphere in the long lerm radiation changes due to the Earth's orbital perturbations (Milankovitch theory) —D. Jenssen, W. F. Budd. D. GLACIOLOGY 1. Antarctic sea ice and ocean heat budget studies —1. F. Allison*, M. C. Tivendale*. 2. Antarctic ovcrsnow traverse dala— N. W. Young*, D. Sheehy*. 3. Aerial ice thickness sounding—I. F. Allison*, V. I. Morgan*. 4. Laboratory studies of ice flow properties —V. I. Morgan*, T. H. Jacka*. 5. Mass balance and glacier outflow in Enderby Land, Antarctica-V. I. Morgan", T. H. Jacka*. 6. Derivation of ice berg meltrates from the size and space distributions —W. F. Budd, T. H. Jacka*, V. I. Morgan*. 7. Effect of climatic change on the Antarctic ice sheet —N. W. Young*. 8. The role of ice sheets and thc Earth's orbital radiation variations in long term global climate change — W. F. Budd. 9. Three dimensional dynamic modelling of ice sheets —W. F. Budd, D. Jenssen, 1. N. Smilh. 10. Numerical modelling of temperatures and velocities and other characteristics of ice sheets —D. Jenssen. 11. Derivation of past climates and elevation changes of ice sheets from isotope and gas content changes — D. Jenssen. 12. Antarctic geoid studies — N. W. Young*. E. INSTRUMENTATION 1. Automation of the Multiple Axis Photometer for real-time crystallographic analysis of thin sections of ice—R. Lile, M. Porchcr. 2. Development of an accurate, rapid response, digital thermometer for aircraft profiling—R. Lile, M. Porchcr, R. Doming. 3. Development ofa real-time receiving system for GMS APT images—R. Lile. 4. Development and production of a new generation radio ice thickness sounder —V. I. Morgan*.

PUBLISHED WORKS Articles 1. ALLISON, I. F.*, AKERMAN, G.* — Sea ice and ocean energy balance studies at Mawson, Antarctica, in Sea lee Processes and Models. I AHS Pub. No. 124: 347.-359 (1980). 2. BUDD, W. I-".—Thc importance of the Antarctic region for studies of the atmospheric car­ bon dioxide concentration, in Carbon Dioxide and Climate: Australian Research, Australian Academy ofScience: 115-128 (1980). 3. HOOKE, R. Lc. B., MELLOR, M., BUDD, W. F., GLEN, J. W., H1GASHI, A., JACKA, T. II.*, JONES, S. H., LILE, R. C, MARTIN, R. T., MEIER, M., RUSSELL-HEAD, D. S. and WEERTMAN, J. — Mechanical properties of polycrystalline ice: an assessment of cur­ rent knowledge and priorities. Cold regions Science and technology, 3: 263-275 (1980). Reports 4. ALLISON, I. F.* —A preliminary investigation of the Physical Characteristics of the Vahsel Glacier, Heard Island. ANARE Scientific Reports, Pub. No. 128, Antarctic Division, Department of Science and Technology (1980). 5. LILE, R. C. (ed.) —The meteorology of Ihe Melbourne and Albury-Wodonga urban areas. Final Report lo ihe EPA V, Pan 31, Climaiological aspecis of low level temperature inver­ sions in the Melbourne area, (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEXREE:S Master of Science 1. MORGAN, V. I.*, Oxygen isotope analysis of Antarctic snow and ice. 2. NICHOLLS, N. - The nature and possible cause of some aspects of tbe inierannual fluctua­ tions of the Australian monsoon. 3. RUSSELL-HEAD, D. S. — Ice sheet flow from borehole and laboratory studies. 4. STERN, H. — The development of automated forecasting guidance using analogue retrieval techniques.

' Members of the dadolne.)1 Section ut Antarctic Division, Department ofScience and Technology. METEOROLOGY 261

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ACKLEY, S. — The role of Antarctic sea ice in climate change. 2. ALLISON, I. \;.*— Heal budget studies of Antarctic sea ice and ocean. 3. MclNNES, B. J. — Computer techniques for numerical modelling of glaciers and ice sheets. 4. SMITH, I.—Numerical modelling of glaciers and ice sheets. 5. WRIGHT, W. — Synoptic climatology of winter precipitation in Victoria. 6. YOUNG, N.* - Interdependence of velocity and temperature in ice masses. MSc Theses in Progress 7. ABBS. D. — A study of sea and bay breezes in the Melbourne area. 8. DAHNI, R. — The development of an operational automated forecasting scheme for the Melbourne region using analogue and statistical techniques. 9. HICKS, P. — The chemical content of snow accumulation in Antarctica. 10. .IACKA, T.* — Laboratory studies of ice flow and measured flow of the Antarctic ice sheet. 11. KELLY, G. — Use of satellite vertical temperature profiles and cloud mosaic dala in the southern hemisphere. 12. KE'P, S. — An analysis of southern hemisphere cyclones and cyclone tracks and their relation ro sea surface temperatures and rainfall in Victoria. 13. KIM, K. — Parameterisation of evaporation for numerical models of the atmosphere. 14. LEIGHTON, R. — Application of synoptic climatology to the prognosis of climate diagnostics in ihe Australian region. 15. MEIGHEN, P.—Radar studies of tropical cyclones. 16. PARKER, P. —Effects of zonal variations in cloud on the general circulation of the surface energy budget. 17. POWERS, P. —Techniques for the derivation of temperature and water vapour profiles retrieved from satellite soundings of the atmosphere. 18. RE.ID, D. — Climatological aspecis of sand dune formation. 19. SHEEHY, D.* — The dynamics of ice movement in Eastern Antarctica inland from Casey. 20. WHETTON, P. — The relation between rainfall in Victoria and the characteristics of the at­ mospheric circulation. 21. WOODCOCK, F. — Analogue retrieval and regression techniques for local area forecasts. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grains have been received as follows: Antarctic Division, Department of Science: Antarctic Glaciology Studies. United States Geological Survey: Numerical Modelling of Past and Future Behaviour of ihe Col­ umbia Glacier, Alaska. Rowden White Estate: Development of Computer Graphics Techniques for Meteorology Research. CIRES (Cooperative Institute for Research in Environmental Sciences): Travel and salaries sup­ port for exchange research programs in glaciology and climate modelling (U.S.A.). 262 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

OPTOMETRY

INTRODUCTION There was a greater diversity of work in 1980 compared to previous years as major research themes pursued over several years have generated subsidiary projects. T his diversification of pro­ jects has been particularly noteworthy in the clinical sciences. Work in visual ergonomics con­ tinues with the strong support of the Australian Road Research Board and the Department of Transport. Working relationships with the National Vision Research Institute, which occupies premises adjoining thc Department, have developed further. For some time there have been useful informal working relations, but in 1980 a joint project on thc integrity of Ihe corneal endothelium was started and gained thc support of the NHMRC. A pleasing event was the award by the American Academy of Optometry of thc Garland W. Clay Prize to two PhD candidates, David Atchison and Nathan Efron, and Dr George Smith for the best clinical paper published in the American Journal of Optometry.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Early vascularisation of the rat cornea—H. B. Collin, B. P. Hoban. 2. Ultra-structural studies of human corneal and conjunctival biopsy material — H. B. Collin. 3. The effects of non-therapeutic ophthalmic preparations on thc cornea—IT. B. Collin, B. E. Grabsch. 4. The relationship between available oxygen and glycogen in thc rabbit corneal epithelium — H. B. Collin, B. E. Grabsch, V. E. Hammond. 5. Protection of corneal epithelium against trauma during surgery — H. B. Collin (wilh J. D. Pettigrew, National Vision Research Institute). 6. Local tissue effects associated wilh the implantation of plastics —H. B. Collin (with R. D. Wright, Howard Florey Institute). 7. Architecture of the human cornea—L. G. Carney, G. Smith, P. M. Kiely. 8. Physiological response of thc cornea and tears to environmental stress and contact lens wear —L. G. Carney, N. Efron, R. J- Eullard, N. A. Brennan. 9. Success rates for unilateral aphakes corrected by contact lenses—P. M. Craven, I.. G. Carney. 10. Visual loss in keratoconus and its correction —L. G. Carney. 11. Aberrations and other factors affecting image quality in real and schematic eyes —G. Smith, D. A. Atchison. 12. Design and the assessment of spectacle lenses —G. Smith, D. A. Atchison. 13. The ergonomics of visual instruments — G. Smith. 14. Assessment of visual impairment —A. W. Johnston, P. J. Cunningham. 15. Optical properties and ergonomics of low vision aids —A. W. Johnston, G. Smith. 16. Long term follow-up of ocular hypertensives —D. M. Cockburn. 17. Thc prevalence and significance of pseudo-exfoliation of the lens capsule —D. M. Cockburn. 18. Validity of visual field screening —I. F. Gutteridge, B. L. Cole. 19. Clinical assessment of visual function using thc contrast sensitivity function—R. J. Jacobs (with G. W. Crock, Department of Ophthalmology). 20. The measurement of conspicuity and factors determining conspicuity —B. L. Cole. 21. Judgment of distance at night —B. L. Cole, K. J. Bowman. 22. Colour vision tests for thc selection of maritime and aviation personnel —B. L. Cole, A. J. Vingrys. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. AUGUSTEYN, R. C. and COLLIN, H. li.-The Eye, Vo! 2: Annual Research Reviews Series cd. D. F. Horrobin, Montreal, Eden Press (1980). Chapter in Book 2. COLLIN, H. B.-Vision, in J. R. Blogg (ed.), The eye in Veterinary Practice, Vo! I, Ex­ traocular Disease, Saunders, London: 210-235 (1980). Articles 3. JACOBS, R. J. —Visual resolution and contour interaction in the fovea and periphery. Vi­ sion Res., /9(H): 1187-1195 (1979). 4. SMITH, G. — The gaussian design and uses of two component systems. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (I): 7-12 (1980). OPTOMETRY 263

5. COCKBURN, D. M. and GUTTF.RIDGE, I. F. —Reasons for referrals by optometrists to ophthalmologists: an audit of ocular disease detection. Aust. J. Optom.. 63 (1): 13-18 (1980). 6. NATHAN, J. —Referral criteria for predetachmcnt disease. Aust. J. Optom.. 63 (1): 19-23 (1980). 7. BOWMAN, K. .1. and COLE, B. L. —A recommendation for illumination of thc Earnsworth-Munsell 100-Hue lest. Amer. J. Optom. & Phvsiol. Optics, 57 (11): 839-843 (1980). 8. COLE, B. L. and JENKINS, S. E. —The nature and measurement of conspicuitv. Proc. 10th Conf. Aust. Pond Res. Board, Part 4: 99-107 (1980). 9. HESS, R. I", and JACOBS, R. J. —A preliminary report of acuitv and contour interactions across the amblyope's field. Vision Res., 19 (\2): 1403-1408 (1979). 10. SMITH, G. — Variation of image vergence with change in object distance for telescopes: the general case. Amer. J. Optom. c? Phvsiol. Optics. 56 (U): 696-703 (1979). 11. CUNNINGHAM, P. J. and JOHNSTON, A. W.-Ncw closed-circuit television magnifier for thc low vision patient. Aust. ./. Optom., 63 (2): 60-64 (1980). 12. COCKBURN, D. M.—The prevalence of pscudoexfoliation of the lens capsule in an Australian sample and iis association with glaucoma. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (3): 119-122 (1980). 13. SMITH, G. —Technical note: T he luminous transmittance of the Hova 'Neo' lens. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (3): 130-131 (1980). 14. CARNEY, L. G. and EFRON, N.-Environmental pH and corneal oxygen llux. J. Fr. Ophthalmol., 3 (2): 125-126 (1980). 15. COCKBURN, D. .VI. — A new method for gonioscopic grading of thc anterior chamber angle Amer. J. Optom. & Physiol. Optics. 57 (4): 258-261 (1980). 16. BAILEY, 1. L. and LOVIE, J. E.—The design and use of a new near-vision chart. Amer. .1. Optom. & Phvsiol. Optics, 57 (6): 378-387 (1980). 17. ABELSON, M. B., COLLIN, H. B., GILLETTE, T. E. and DOHLMAN, C. H.-Recur­ rent keratoconus after keratoplasty. Amer. J. Ophthalmol.. 90: 672-676 (1980). IS. BOWMAN, K. J. and McGIBBONY, J. E.-Clinical noie: Aspects of fitting ultra-thin soft contact lenses. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (6): 264-267 (1980). 19. SMIT H, M. J. W.-Eovcal suppression syndrome. Ausi. ./. Optom., 63 (6): 268-272 (1980). 20. 1TUB1NAS, J. —Understanding the low vision patient. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (5): 227-231 (1980). 21. COLE, B. L.-Visual problems associated with visual display units, in B. McPhee and A. Howie, Ergonomics and visual display units: Proc. of Conference. Ergonomics Societv of Australia and New Zealand: 29-42 (1979). 22. ATCHISON, D. A. and SMIT H, G. —Assessment of aphakic spectacle lenses: high power flatback lenses for the correction of aphakia. Aust. J. Optom., 63 ( 6): 258-263 (1980). 23. EERON, N. —Unravelling contact lens specifications. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (6): 284-287 (1980). 24. V1NGRYS, A., SKURRIE, M. and SMITH, G.-The anomalous (or induced) myopias and thc intermediate resting point of accommodation. Aust. J. Optom.. 63 (6): 284-287 (1980). 25. COLLIN H. B. — Vernal and gianl papillary conjunclivites: Part 1 Conjunctivitis Vernal. Aust. J. Optom., 63 (6): 251-257 (1980). 26. ATCHISON, D. A., SMITH, G. and JOHNSTON, A. W.-Prismatic effects of spherical ophthalmic lenses. Amer. J. Optom. ct Physiol. Optics, 56 (11): 779-790 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. JENKINS, S. V..— An investigation ofthe nature and physical determinants of visual con­ spicuity. Master of Science in Optometry 2. GUEST, D. J. — The relation between visual loss and orientation and mobility. 3. L1UBINAS, J.— A functional analysis of methods of simulating low vision.

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress ATCHISON, D. A. - Designs of ophthalmic lenses and their effect on visual performance. BOWMAN, K. J.— Judgment of distance ai night. EFRON, hi. —Corneal oxygen uptake measurements during contact lens wear. EULLARD, R. }. —Investigation of the physiological significance of human tear enzymes. KIELY, P. M. — Corneal geometry: stability, variation and optical significance. VINGR YS, A. J. — The value of color as a coding dimension and the handicap of abnormal color vision in the case of color coded displays. 264 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

MSc Opiom Thesis in Progress 7. BRENNAN, N. A. — The effect of ageing and the environment on hydrogel contact lens per­ formance. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grams have been received as follows: Alcon Laboratories (Ausi) fly. Lid.: Cornea and contact lens research. Allergan Pharmaceuticals Ply. Ltd.: Cornea and contact lens research. Australian Road Research Board: Judgment of distance at night. Barnes Hind Pty. Ltd.: Cornea and contact lens research. Bausch and Lomb Softens: Cornea and contact lens research. Contavue Laboratories Pty. Ltd.: Cornea and contact lens research. Department of Transport: Standards for colour for aviation personnel. Department of Transport: Thc validity of the Holmes-Wright lantern. Hydron Australia Pty. Ltd.: Cornea and contact lens research. NH & MRC: Tear chemistry. NH & MRC: Protection of the corneal endothelium. NH & MRC: Thc effect of non-therapeutic ophthalmic preparations on the cornea. National Cornea and Contact Lens Research Foundation: The relationship between available oxy­ gen and glycogen in the rabbit corneal epithelium. National Cornea and Contact Lens Research Foundation: Oxygen tension and contact lenses. G. Nisscl & Co. Australia Pty. Ltd.: Cornea and contact lens research. Smith and Nephew Australia Pty. Ltd.: Cornea and contact lens research. PHYSICS

INTRODUCTION In 1980, a vigorous programme of research has continued on all fronts. The highlights of this activity, in the field of dillraction physics, were thc contributions of Dr L. A. Bursill to the ultra- high-resolution electron microscopy of certain mineral structures of great practical importance in pollution control and nuclear waste disposal, ln low energy nuclear physics, new results were ob­ tained by Dr D. G. Sargood in the precision measurement of reaction cross-sections of particular interest in astrophysical calculations relating to thc origin and production of the chemical elements in stars. Professor H. H. Bolotin has initiated a new programme of measurements of thc gyromagnetic ratios of short-lived nuclear excited states and Dr G. J. F. Legge has published the first papers describing the Melbourne Proton Microprobe, a unique facility in applied nuclear physics. Dr A. G. Klein and Professor G. I. Opat, of the Particles and Fields Group, have successfully demonstrated, for the first lime, the focusing and imaging of slow neutron beams by diffractivc structures. Important photonuclear experiments were carried out by Dr M. N. Thompson at the Lawrence Livermorc Laboraiory. Various distinguished pieces of research were completed by thc theoretical physicists in the School, whose projects have brought widespread recognition and ex­ ternal support under the US-Australian Cooperative Science Program. Ihe National Science Foundation has funded visits from US theorists to Melbourne and visits to Tucson, Arizona, by- Professor B. H. J. McKellar, to work on problems of theoretical nuclear physics.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. DIFFRACTION PHYSICS (a) X-ray Diffraction 1. High-temperature neutron studies of anharmonic thermal vibrations and their temperature dependence (with the Brookhaven National Laboratory and at Lucas Heights) (under AINSE auspices) —Z. Barnea (B. K. Moss). 2. High-resolution neutron powder diffraciomctry (under AINSE auspices) —Z. Barnea (S. Ecieris). 3. Development of techniques for accurate x-ray intensity measurements—Z. Barnea (R. Pill/, M. Milanko, A. Stevenson). 4. Studies of anharmonic thermal vibrations using x-ray dillraction —Z. Barnea (R. Pili/. M. Milanko, A. Stevenson). 5. Extinction in extended-face cryslals-Z. Barnea (A. Stevenson). (b) Electron Dillraction 1. Further developments of computer simulated electron microscope images —the Fresnel fringe, accuracy of periodic continuation, image matching al very high voltages —A. E. ('. Spargo (A. R. Wilson). 2. High resolution electron microscopy of crystal defects in gallium arsenide —A. E. C. Spargo. 3. High resolution electron microscopy of domain boundaries in ferroelectric crystals—L. A. Bursill, A. E. C. Spargo, Peng Ju Lin. 4. Convergent beam electron diffraction studies of symmetry in rutile and oilier crystals — A. E. C. Spargo. 5. Development of x-ray microanalytical techniques for thin crystals using very line electron beam probes —A. E. C. Spargo. (c) Solid Slate Physics 1. Theory of crystallographic shear arrays in solids- L. A. Bursill.

2. Theory of thc incommensurate-commensurate phase transition in 2H-TaSe2 —L. A. Bursill. 3. High-resolution imaging and computer simulation analysis of voiditcs and platelet defecls in diamond — L. A. Bursill (with A. R. Lang (Bristol) and J. L. Hutchison (Oxford)). 4. Struclure determination of superionic and SYNROC-componcnl hollandite related materials— L. A. Bursill. 5. High-resolutin observation of defects in reduced and deformed ceramics- L. A. Bursill (wilh J. I.. Hutchison (Oxford), M.-G. Blandin (Lyon) and D. J. Smilh (Cambridge). 6. Neutron diffraction studies of hollandiies related to SYNROC-L. A. Bursill (wilh T. Sabine, N.S.W.LT. and Lucas Heights). 7. Direcl imaging of thc framework and cation-ordering in Zeolite catalysts — L. A. Bursill (with .1. M. Thomas (Cambridge)). 8. Neutron dillraction study of Silicon, Aluminium ordering in A-iype Zeolites—L. A. Bursill (wilh J. M. Thomas (Cambridge)). 9. Computer-simulation of high-resoluiion images of amorphous structures—L. A. Bursill. 10. Computer simulation of the elfeclive breakdown of symmetry operations for electron scatter­ ing in bent crystals—L. A. Bursill. 265 266 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

THESES IN PROGRESS IN DIFFRACTION PHYSICS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BARRY, .I.C — High-resolution electron microscope studies of defects in crystals, especially diamonds. 2. GLAISHER, R. \V. — Electron microscopy and diffraction studies of gallium arsenide and silicon crystals. 3. GRZINIC, G. — High-resolution electron microscopy and structure analysis of hollandite- related materials. 4. NETHERWAY, D. J. -Theory of Crystallographic Shear Arrays. 5. WILSON, A. R. — Image-matching techniques for high resolution electron microscopy of crystals. 6. WITHERS, R. L. — Structural implications of the charge-densil.v-wave/'periodic structural distortion model for phase transitions in transition metal dichalcogenides. 7. WOOD, G. J. — Defect structure analysis in reduced rutile. MSc Theses in Progress 8. CREEK, R. — Convergent beam electron diffraction and imaging studies of rutile single crystals. 9. MILANKO, M. — X-ray studies of anharmonicity in cadmium selenide and cadmium sulphide. 10. STEVENSON, A. — An investigation of extinction and anharmonic effects in zincblende and wurtzite structures. B. LOW ENERGY NUCLEAR PHYSICS (a) Belalron 1. Isospin effects in photonuclear cross sections from J!Ca lo 5Jl e — M. N. Thompson. 2. Measurement of photoproton cross sections and angular distributions of 2JMg, -5Mg, "Al, :8Si —M. N. Thompson. 3. The 7Li photoneutron cross section —M. N. Thompson. 4. High resolution cross section of lsO —M. N. Thompson, E. G. Muirhead. 5. Deformation effects in the pholocross sections of Gadolinium and Europium — E. G. Muirhead. 6. L-shell ionization in heavy atoms (Z>50) —B. M. Spicer, E. G. Muirhead. . 7. Design and construction of an energy-loss matched dispersion magnetic specrometer — D. V. Webb, R. Hclstroom, B. M. Spicer. 8. (e,2e) reactions in heavy atoms —preliminary measurements —B. M. Spicer, E. G. Muirhead. THESES IN PROGRESS ON THE BETATRON PhD Theses in Progress 1. BOAL, T. J. - The E2 giant resonance in 2l,»Pb. 2. HELSTROOM, R.— Atomic excitations by relativistic electron bombardment. 3. MILLAR, R. M. — Measurement of electron energy spectra in air and tissue, and a study of the perlurbative effect of the presence of an ionisation chamber on Ihe measurement of ab­ sorbed dose. 4. RYAN, P. J. P. — Photonuclear decay of some 2s-Id shell nuclei. 5. SUTTON, R.-P/iororeacf/ons on 'M. ' 6. WEISE, J.- Isospin effects in the If shell. MSc Theses in Progress 7. GROSS, E.—A'-, L- and M-shell ionisation cross sections in heavy atoms. 8. KEAN, P. — Photoreaction cross sections of "Si. 9. ODGERS, G.— Photoreaction cross sections of,0Si. (b) Pelletron 1. Measurement of gyromagnetic ratios of short-lived excited nuclear stales — H. H. Bolotin. 2. Measurement of lifetimes of nuclear excited states —H. H. Bolotin. 3. Measurements of nuclear reaction cross sections of astrophysical interest —D. G. Sargood. The Pelletron Group produces a Progress Report and one is available for 1979-80. THESES I.N PROGRESS ON THE PELLETRON PhD Theses in Progress 1. ANDERSON, M. R. — Cross section measurements of the 2SMg(p,y)26Al reaction. 2. KENNETT, S. R. — Measurement of some nuclear reaction cross sections of astrophysical significance. PHYSICS 267

3. RYAN, C. G. - g-factors and lifetimes of excited nuclear states. 4. STUCHBERY, A. E. — Measurement of gyromagnetic ratios of short-lived excited nuclear states. MSc Thesis in Progress 5. MITCHELL, L. VV. — Some nuclear cross sections of astrophysical interest. C. PARTICLES AND FIELDS (a) Elementary Panicle Physics 1. The search for narrow resonant NN states in pd interactions near threshold in thc reaction pd-pX -G. C. Mason, G. 1. Opat, S. N. Tovey, J. W. G. Wignall. 2. Analysis of strange particle production in pd interactions —G. C. Mason, G. I. Opat, S. N. Tovcy, J. W. G. Wignall. 3. Analysis of 4?r final states of the reaction pd—4ir below 1 GeV/c —G. C. Mason, J. W. G. Wignall. 4. Development of computer programs for thc analysis of bubble chamber photographs in large track-sensitive-target bubble chambers —J. W. G. Wignall. 5. Sludics of anliproton-proion inieractions al 4.1 GeV/c in the Argonne 12 fool TST bubble chamber — XX Carmony, G. C. Mason, G. I. Opat, S. N. Tovey, J. W. G. Wignall. 6. A study of NN annihilations at rest —D. Carmony, G. I. Opal. _ 7. Study of the properties and modes of decay ofa large sample of il hyperons at CERN —S. N. Tovey. 8. Development of the magneto strictive read-out svstem for a flash chamber —A. Cimmino, G. 1. Opat. (b) Neutron Physics 1. Development and successful testing of Fresnel zone plate lenses for neutrons at Thc Institut Lauc Langevin reactor in Grenoble (ILL) —A. G. Klein, G. I. Opat. 2. Thc Fizeau ether drag experiment carried out with neutrons (instead of light) using a split zone plate lens interferometer al ILL (Grenoble) —A. Cimmino, A. G. Klein, G. I. Opat. 3. A test of [he linearity of the Schrocdinger equation by the straight edge dillraction of neutrons —A. G. Klein. (c) Gravitation and Inertia Physics 1. Investigation of thc possibility of an electromagnetic detector of gravitational radiation —G. 1. Opal. 2. Electric properties of matter induced by inertia and stress during acceleration —A. Cimmino, G. I. Opat. (d) Molecular Interfcrometry 1. A study of the possibility of constructing optical devices for molecular rays (beams) is in pro­ gress—G. I. Opat, A. G. Klein. TIIKSES IN PROGRESS IN PARTICLES AND FIELDS PhD Theses in Progress 1. KASPER, P. H.—Nucleon-anlinuclcon annihilations into pions. 2. PARKIN, S. J. XX.-High energy physics. MSc Theses in Progress 3. BRODY, J. — Electric fields in a lorsionally accelerated coil. 4. CIMMINO, A.—Electric properties of accelerated matter. D. THEORETICAL PHYSICS (a) Particle Physics 1. High energy proton-proton scattering. Neutrino induced processes. Yang-Mills gauge theories. Quark confinement potentials —S. Y. Lo. 2. Factorisation principles in hadron scattering. Quarkonium. Heavy meson spectroscopy. Multiquark hadrons. Instanton effects for heavy quark potentials. Gluonium — G. C. Joshi. 3. Models of weak interactions —B. H. J. McKellar. 4. Pion nuclear interactions—B. H. J. McKellar. (b) Nuclear Physics • • (P-P') (P,2p) and (p,n) reactions on nuclei. Shell model, Hartree-Fock and group theoretic ap­ proaches to nuclear structure and their applications. R matrix theory of nuclear reations. ir 268 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

nuclear reactions — K. A. Amos. Nuclear parity violation. The nucleon-nucleon potential. Many body forces in nuclei —B. H. J. McKellar. 2. The elastic scattering of heavy ions —C. B. O. Mohr. (c) Statistical Physics 1. Random magnetic systems. Tachyon systems. Models of nuclei of active galaxies—N. E. Frankel. (d) Plasma Physics 1. Relativistic particle-anliparticle plasmas in astrophysics and cosmology. Dielectric response of non ideal and intermediate quantum plasmas with applications in astrophysics and solid state physics. Relativistic plasma physics and controlled thermonuclear reactors. Finite size effects in plasma physics —K. C. Hines, N. E. Frankel. (e) Atomic and Molecular Physics 1. Atomic and molecular structure studies using configuration interaction and Hartree-Fock methods. Thc structure of heavy atoms —K. A. Amos. 2. Eikonal methods in the three bodv problem. Three body forces between Helium atoms —B. H. J. McKellar. (f) Optics 1. Atmospheric turbidity —B. H. J. McKellar. THESES IN PROGRESS IN THEORETICAL PHYSICS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ELLIS, R. C. — T-Barvonia and parity violation.

2. FREEMAN, G. R. - Binding energy of He}. 3. HINES, D. F. — Studies in statistical physics. 4. KOWALENKO, V. — Higher order correlations in electron gases. 5. MILLER, R. D. C— Weak interactions of charmed particles. 6. MITROY, L —Fine structure effects in atoms. MSc Theses in Progress 7. BENKE, K. K.— Theorv of light scattering as applied to photographic emulsions. 8. GRANEK, H.— Neutrinos in the early universe. 9. RAVALLI, G. — A calculation of the pair emission lifetime of the 7.65 MeV slate of'2C. E. APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS (a) Proton Microprobe 1. Ion optics of magnetic quadrupole and octupole lenses; microprobe development; elemental pathways and distributions in plants, copper metabolism in mammalian tissues at the cellular level; elemental characteristics of haemopoietic cells —G. J. F. Legge. 2. Elemental analysis in minerals and ion implanted materials —C. D. McKenzie. The Pelletron Group produces a Progress Report, and one will be available for 1979-80. (b) Applied Nuclear 1. Elemental analysis of teeth and appetite —J. L. Rouse. 2. Elemental studies in plants and soil —J. L. Rouse. THESES IN PROGRESS IN APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. MAZZOLINI, A. P.—Elemental analysis of biological material by means of a proton microprobe. MSc Theses in Progress 2. CHITTLEBOROUGH, C. W'. — Non-destructive depth profiling by charged particle induced reaciions. 3. CLEAL, S. — Accumulation of heavy elements in soil. 4. CRAWFORD, A. W .—Elemental analysis of dental tissue using nuclear techniques. 5. JAMIESON, D. vi.—Further development of the Melbourne proton microprobe. 6. LUCAS, M. A. — The microanalysis of zircons and other minerals with a proton microprobe. 7. O'BRIEN, P. M. — 77ie elemental analysis of haemopioetic cells and other biological tissue. 8. ROCZNlOK, A. F'. — Applications of a proton microprobe to the elemental analysis of biological specimens. PHYSICS 269

F. INTERMEDIATE ENERGY NUCLEAR PHYSICS 1. The i0Ca(d,JHc) 3"K reaction at 76MeV —single step and two-step reaction processes. In­ elastic proton scattering from 'TJ, 12C, "O and IJC. Thc (p,pn) reaction in J0Ca. Thc 40Ca(p,2p) 3,K reaction with polarized protons. Deep hole states in medium mass nuclei observed in (p,d) and (p,l) reactions —V. C. Officer, G. G. Shute, B. M. Spicer. 2. Development of position sensitive focal plane detectors —V. C. Officer. 3. Anomalous slates strongly populaied in the 2"Si(p,d) reaction. High spin states of 27Si in the "Mg(l0B,7Li)2,Si reaction-G. G. Shute, B. M. Spicer.

THESES IN PROGRESS IN INTERMEDIATE ENERGY NUCLEAR PHYSICS MSc Theses in Progress 1. COLLINS, S. \~. — Inelastic prolon scattering from '-'C. 2. WASTE1.L, J. M. R.-Thc J»Ca(p,pn) "Ca reaction at 150 MeV. G. MISCELLANEOUS 1. Non-linear processing of images in medicine and its influence on the total performance of the detecting device—B. M. Spicer. 2. Studies of variable stars and novae—R. H. Wilkinson. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. GUIGNARD, P. — Non-linear processing of images in medicine, audits influence on the total performance of Ihe delecting device. MSc Thesis in Progress 2. BARRETT, A. M.— Age of an open cluster. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. ALLEN, P. D., SU SU, and MUIRHEAD, E. G.-Analysis of Photonuclear Yield Curves by the Variable Bin Penfold-Leiss Method. Computer Phvs. Communications, 21: 163-184 (1980). 2. AMOS, K., MORRISON, I. and NESCI, P.-A Comparison of Spectroscopic Models of Low Excitation 2+ States in 2JMg and "Si usina Inelastic Proton Scattering. Aust. J. Phvs., 33: 495-504 (1980). 3. AMOS, K.—The Variety of Information Inhetenl in the Nuclear (p,2p) Reaction Analyses. Proc. Int. Workshop on Molecular Phvsics and Quantum Chemistry, Wollongong, cd. P. Burton: (1980). 4. ANDERSON, M. R., KENNETT, S. R.. Ml TCI I ELL. L. W. and SARGOOD, D. G. — Resonance Strength Measurements and Thermonuclear Reaction Rales for JSMg(p,7)2*AI. Nucl. Phvs., A349: 154-164 (1980). 5. BOLOTIN, H. H., KENNEDY, D. L.. LINARD, B. J. and STUCHBERY, A. E. — Measured Lifetimes of Slates in '"An and a Critical Comparison with the Wcak-coupiing Core-excitation Model. Nucl. Phvs., .132/: 231-249 (1979). 6. BOLOTIN, H. H., KATAYAMA, I., SAKAI, 11., I U.1ITA, Y., FUJIWARA, M., HOSONO, K., ITAHASHI, T , SAITO. T., SIE, S. IL, C'ONl.EY, D., KENNEDY, D. L., and STUCHBERY, A. E. — Lifetime Measuicnients of Excited Stales in ""Pt. J. Phvs. Soc. Japan, 47: 1397-1402 (1979). 7. BOLOTIN, H. H. — Experimental Determinations of Directional-coirelation Solid-angle At­ tenuation Factors for Ge(Li) 7-rav Detectors: Comparison ol Experimental and Calculated Values. Nucl. Instr. and Meth., 178: 237-248 (1980). 8. BOURQUIN, M., BROWN, R. M.. CT IA'1 ELUS, Y., CHOLLET. J. C, DEGRE, A., FROIDEVAUX, D., FYFE, A. R., GAII.l AKD. J.-.YI., GEE, C. N. P., GIBSON, W. M., IGO-KEMENES, P., JEFFREYS, P. W., M ERK El.. IL. MORAND, R., PLOTHOW, H., REPELLIN, J.-P., SAUNDERS, B. .1.. SAUVAGE. G.. SCTIIBY. B.. SIEBERT, II. W., SMITH, V. J.. STREIT, K.-P.. STRUB. R.. THRESHER. .1. .1.. and TOVEY, S. N. — Charged Baryon and Anlibaryon Production in the Fiagmcniaiioii Region by 240 GeV Protons. Z. Physik C, Particles and Fields. 5: 275-283 (1980). 9. BURSILL, L. A. — Resolution Enhancement at 100 kV: lis Limitations and Some Applica­ tions, In Direct Imaging of Atoms and Crystals anil Molecules: Proc-. 47th Nobel Sym­ posium, Lidine.0, Sweden, ed. L. Kihlbci u. Roval Swedish Acadeinv of Sciences, Stockholm: 83-97 (1979). '

10. BURSILL, L. A.-The Structure of Ba,Ti,..-vGa,,, , ,x03,. Ada Crvst.. B36: 2897-2901 (1980). 270 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

11. BURSILL, L. A. and GRZIN1C, G. - Incommensurate Superlattice Ordering in The l-lollan-

dilcs BavTi8.,Mg\Oi6 and BaxTi,.2,GavOi6. Acta Crvst., B36: 2902-2912 (1980). 12. BURSILL, L. A., LODGE, E. A. and THOMAS, J. M.-Zcolitic Structures as Revealed by High-Resolution Electron Microscopy. Nature, 286: 111-113 (1980). 13. CASS. A. and McKELLAR, B. H. J.-The irNN Vertex Function and Oll'-Mass-Shell jrN Scattering. Nucl. Phys., li 166: 399-403 (1980). 14. CHEW, C. J., LOW, H. B., LO, S. Y. and PHUA, K. K.-Particle Ratios-Quarks and Chao-Yang Statistics. J. Phvs., C 6: 17-24 (1980). 15. CRAWLEY, G. M., GALES, S., WEBER, D., ZWIEGEINKS1, B., BENENSON, W., ERIESEL, D. L., BACHER, A. D. and SPICER, B. M.-Dccp Hole Slates Observed in (p,t) Reactions. Phvs. Rev., C 22: 316-319 (19S0). 16. DELSANTE, A. E., and FRANKEL, N. E. - Dielectric Response of a Relativistic Degenerate Electron Plasma in a Strong Magnetic Field. Ann. Phvs. (N. YJ, 125: 135-175 (1980). 17. DeROACH, J. N., CHAPMAN, G. J., KASPER, P. FL, KING, P. A., KLEIN, A. G., MARTIN, L. J., MASON, G. C, OPAT, G. L, PARKER, K. N., TOVEY, S. N. and WIGNALL, J. W. G. —The Reaction pd —2?r1 3?r~p for Antiproton Momenta in the Range 0.35-0.92 GeV/c. Nucl. Phvs.. B176: 321-332 (1980). 18. ELLIS, R. G. and McKELLAR, B. H. J. - Bremsstrahlung and Neutral Currents. J. Phys.. C 6: 1-16 (1980). 19. ELLIS, R. G., McKELLAR, B. H. J., JOSHI, G. C. and ANDERSON, R. —Elec­ tromagnetic Decay Widths for L= 1 JPC- l T-baryonia. Phvs. Rev.. D22: 2832-2837 (1980). 20. FREEMAN, G. and McKELLAR, B. H. J.-ls Nuclear Physics the Molecular Physics of Coloured Quarks? Aust. J. Phvs., 33: 487-494 (1980). 21. JOSHI, G. C. and WARNER, R. - Interaction Potentials for Multiquark Stales from In- stantons and Other Background Gauge Field Configurations. Phvs. Rev., D22: 999-1011 (1980). 22. JOSHI, G. C. and WARNER, R.-Four-body Potentials in Multiquark States. Phvs. Rev., D22: 1012-1017 (1980). 23. JOSHI, G. C. and BELYEA, C. — Hadronic Transitions for Heavy Quarkonia in the O-Meson Model. Phvs. Rev., D22: 2628-2631 (1980). 24. KEARNEY, P. D., KLEIN, A. G., OPAT., G. I. andGAHLER, R. - Imaging and Focusing of Neutrons by a Zone Plate Nature. 287: 313-314 (1980). 25. KENNEDY, D. L., STUCHBERY, A. E. and BOLOTIN, H. H.-The Extraction of Lifetimes of Weakly-Populated Nuclear Levels in Recoil Distance Method Experiments. Nucl. Instr. and Meth., 171: 361-367 (1980). 26. KENNETT, S. R., ANDERSON, M. R., SWITKOWSKI, Z. E. and SARGOOD, D. G. — Cross Section Measurements and Thermonuclear Reaction Rates for J9Ti(p,g)S0V and •"TKp.nV'V. Nucl. Phys., A344: 351-360 (1980). 27. KENNETT, S. R., ANDERSON, M. R., MITCHELL, L. W., SWITKOWSKI, Z. E. and SARGOOD, D. G.— Cross Section Measurements and Thermoneuclcar Reaction Rates for 50Ti(p,g)5lV and 50Ti(p,n)i0V. Nucl. Phys., A346: 523-534 (1980). 28. LEGGE, G. J. E. and MAZZOLINI, A. P.-Elemental Microanalysis of Biological and Medical Specimens with a Scanning Proton Microprobe Nucl. Instr. and Meth., 168: 563-569 (1980). 29. LEGGE, G. J. F. — Thc Scanning Proton Microprobe, in Microbcam Analvsis, cd. D. B. WITTRY, San Francisco Press: 70-76 (1980). 30. LO, S. Y., CLARKE, D. J. and MALONE, M. M.-Spin Struclure and Dip Development in Elastic Proton-Proton Scattering. Proc. of International Conference of Particle Phvsics, Cuanzhan, China: 813 (1980). 31. LO, S. Y. — Propagating Waves in Yang-Mills Gauge Theory. Proc. of International Con­ ference of Particle Physics, Cuanzhan, China: 1125 (1980). 32. LO, S. Y., DESMOND, P., KOVACS, E.-General Self-dual Non-abclian Plane Waves. Phys. Letts., 90B: 418-421 (1980). 33. LODGE, E. A., BURSILL, L. A. and THOMAS, J. M.-Have thc Structure and Space- Group of A-Tvpc Zeolites Been Correctly Assigned? J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm.: 856 (1980). 34. McINTYRE, G. J., MOSS, G. and BARNEA, Z.-Anharmonic Temperature Factors of Zinc Selenide Determined bv X-ray Diffraction from an Extended-Face Crystal. Ada Cryst., A36: 482-490 (1980). 35. McKELLAR, B. H. J. —Massive Neutrinos, thc Goldbcrger Treiman Relation and the p[en Branching Ratio. J. Phys., C 6: L199-L201 (1980). 36. McKELLAR, B. H. J.—The Influence of Mixing of Finite Mass Neutrinos on Beta Decay Spectra. Phys. Lens.. 97B: 93-94 (1980). 37. McKELLAR, B. H. J. —Proceedings of the Workshop on Program Options in Intermediate Energy Physics. LA-8335-C. I: 21-29 (1980). PHYSICS 271

38. MALONE, M. M. and LO, S. Y.-Operator Form of Droplet Model and Neutral Current. Nuovo Cim., 57A: 320-333 (I980). 39. MARTIN, L. J., MASON, G. C, OPAT, G. L, CHAPMAN, G. J., DcROACH, J. N., KASPER, P. H., KLEIN, A. G., PARKER, K. N., TOVEY, S. N. and WIGNALL, J. W. G. — Interpretation of Enhancements in the pn Spectrum from pD Annihilations. Phys. Letts., 92B: 358-362 (1980). 40. MORRISON, I.—Quadrupole Moments of Even-Even (sd) Shell Nuclei in the Band-mixed Hartree-Fock Model. Phvs. Letts., 9IB: 4-8 (1980). 41. MORRISON, I. and McKELLAR, B. H. J. — Parity Mixing in the "Tc J = 17/2 Doublet. J. Phvs., G 6: LI09-L111 (1980). 42. MORRISON, I. and SMITH, R.-Alpha Spectroscopic Factors for the Te(6Li,d)Sn and Sn(6Li,d)Cd Reactions. Phys. Letts., 95B: 13-15 (1980). 43. MORRISON, I. and SMITH, R.—The Interacting Boson Model and thc Even Cadmium and Tin Isotopes. Nucl. Phvs., A350: 89-108 (1980). 44. MOSS, B., McMULLAN, R. K and KOETZLE, T. E.-Temperature Dependence of Ther­ mal Vibrations in Cubic ZnS —A Comparison of Anharmonic Models. ./. Chem. Phvs., 73: 495-508 (1980). 45. PYWELL, R. E., THOMPSON, M. N. and BERMAN, B. L.-A Measurement of the "O Photonuclear Cross Sections as a Test of a Bremsstrahlung Unfolding Technique Nucl. Instr. and Meth., 178: 149-156 (1980). 46. RYAN, C. G., MORRISON, I., KENNEDY, D. L., STUCHBERY, A. E. and BOLOTIN, H. H. - Level Structure and Lifetimes of Low-Excitation States in 63Cu. Nucl. Phvs., .4342: 373-384 (1980). 47. SELF, P., BURSILL, L. A. and SPARGO, A. E. C-Anomalous Images of Rutile. Micron., II: 309-310 (1980). 48. SMITH, R., MORRISON, I. and AMOS, K. - Analyses of the (p,2p) Reaction in the Asym­ metric Energy Mode. Aust. J. Phvs.. 33: 1-24 (1980). 49. STUCHBERY, A. E., MORRISON, I., KENNEDY, D. L. and BOLOTIN, H. H.-Level Structure and Lifetimes of Low Excitation States in !JCr. Nucl. Phys., A337: 1-12 (1980). 50. SUTTON, R., THOMPSON, M. N., SUGAWARA, M., SHODA, K., SAITO, T. and TSUBOTA, H.-A Study of Photorcactions in 48Ti. A'uc7. Phvs., A339: 125-131 (1980). 51. THOMAS, J. M. and BURSILL, L. A.-Amorphous Zeolites. Angewandte Chemie, 92: 755-756 (1980). 52. WARK, D. A., HUGHES, T. C, LUCAS, M. and McKENZIE, C. D. — Proton Microprobe Analvsis of Perovskite in Allende Ca-Al-rich Inclusions. Abstr. llth Lunar and Planetary Science Conf., No. 8239, Houston (1980). 53. WILSON, A. R.— Determination of Electron-Optical Parameters in HREM by Image Mat­ ching. Micron., II: 281-283 (1980).

54. WOOD, G. J.-Electron-Optical Imaging of Reduced Rutile TinO-,„ ,. Micron.. II: 307-308 (1980). 55. R1KUS, L. and AMOS, K. — Low-energy Neutron Scattering from 12C and Nuclear Spec­ troscopy. J. Phys., G 6: 1535-1551 (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. ALLEN, P. D. — Photonuclear reactions in 10Ne and '"Ar. 2. ANDERSON, R. —Studies on baryonium and multiquark stales. 3. CASS, A. —The nucleon-nucleon interaction. 4. CHAPMAN, G. }. —Antiproton interactions in a track sensitive target. 5. HAVLOUJ1AN, }.-Helium-3 induced reactions. 6. KOVACS, E. V. E. -Classical solutions of Yang Mills theories. 7. MALONE, M. M. — Geometrical models in particle physics. 8. MARTIN, L. J. — Anti-proton annihilations in deuterium. 9. MOSS, B. K. (Nee WHITELEY) — Neutron and X-ray studies of anharmonicity in zinc­ blende and wurtzite.

10. PYWELL, R. E.—A systematic study of photonuclear cross sections in Ihe nuclear lf7/2 shell. 11. RICHARDS, P. G. - Continuum shell model calculations. 12. RIKUS. L. }. —Low energy neutron scattering from l2C and nuclear spectroscopy. 13. ZALCMAN, L. B. — The photonuclear disintegration of "Kand "P. Master of Science 14. HORE, S. R.— Aspects of the two quantum gases. 272 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVF.l) Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Thc Exotic Hadrons. ARGC: Microscopic Variations in Ion Implanted Materials. ARGC: Flash Counters for Neutrino Detection. ARGC: Experimental Determinations of Gyromagnetic Ratios and Lifetimes of Excited Nuclear States. ARGC: Studies of Knockout Reactions and Inelastic Scattering. ARGC: Atomic Physics with Relativistic Electrons. ARGC: Improved Yield Curve Analysis and the Measurement of the Structure in the (g,n) Cross Section of Deformed Nuclei. ARGC: High-resolution Electron Microscope Study of the Interactions between Extended Defects in Crystals. ARGC: Experimental Tests of the Statistical Model of Nuclear Reactions. ARGC: Weak Interactions. ARGC: Many Body Forces. ARGC: High Energy Reactions in a Track Sensitive Target. ARGC: DifTraction Studies of Bonding and Anharmonicity. ARGC: High Energy Proton Microprobe Analysis of Trace Metal Uptake and Localization in Plants. ARGC: Amorphous States of Matter. Colgate-Palmolive Company: Inorganic Biochemistry of Dental Enamel and its Significance to Preventive Dentistry. Utah Foundation: Thc Melbourne Proton Microprobe. RAAF ACADEMY: UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT

A. CHEMISTRY INTRODUCTION Work has continued in the two main fields of investigation —the temperature and mechanism of ion production in flames, and the chemistry of natural waters. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Thc temperature or dilute hydrogen-air micro diffusion flames —B. A. Schaefer. 2. Sea surface hydrocarbons, sampling and analysis —D. M. Douglas. 3. The hydrogeochemistry of an igneous sedimentary structure, the origin of cations in mineral spring waters—B. A. Schaefer. 4. Heavy metals in natural waters by polarography —D. M. Douglas 5. Problems in the teaching of thermodynamics —B. A. Schaefer. 6. The occurrence of Na+ and K+ in rainwater —B. A. Schaefer. THESIS IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. SCHAEFER, B. A. —Flame Temperature and Ihe Mechanism of fori Production in Flames. B. MATHEMATICS INTRODUCTION In 1980 research continued in Mathematical Education by way of Dr M. J. C. Baker's pro­ gress with his MEd thesis. In Rehabilitation Engineering, collaboration began between Professor M. N. Brearley and Mr M. A. Tarrant on an attempt to develop a dircctionally sensitive hearing aid for use in situations of excessive background noise. Dr Le began to apply multifunction theory to new areas involving computer problems. Dr Soncnbcrg worked on non-standard models and programming language semantics. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Combinatorial geometry —M. J. C. Baker. 2. Convexity—M. J. C. Baker. 3. Mathematical education — M. J. C. Baker. 4. Rehabilitation engineering —M. N. Brearley. 5. Applications of multi-valued functions to hashing problems in computers — V. T. Le. 6. Non-standard models and applications in logic —E. A. Soncnbcrg. 7. Formal logic and programming language semantics —E. A. Soncnbcrg. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. BREARLEY, M, N. — Investigation of Castor-Wheel Shimmy. Quart. J. Mech. and App. Maih., 33: 491-505 (1980). Reports and Notes 2. BAKER, M. J. C. and MANDAN, S. R.-Triangles from l our Lines. James Cook Mathematical Notes, 2: 102-108 (1980). THESIS IN PROGRESS MEd Thesis in Progress 1. BAKER, M. J. C—Thc Mathematical Curriculum. C. PHYSICS INTRODUCTION Work in infrared astrophysics has concentrated along several lines —the development of detailed models of circumstellar dust shells, observations of galactic surface brightness, detailed photometry of the Carinae region, and thc development of chopping secondary mirror systems for large telescopes. At high energies, development work continues in thc field of gamma ray and neutron astronomy. Two balloon flights were carried out, one searching for 10IJ eV heavy nucleii in the cosmic radiation, and the other carrying a large emulsion stack to aid the search for X par­ ticles in super high energy interactions. ln atmospheric physics Ihc dominant feature has again been thc Doppler Acoustic Radar used in assessing pollution control situations. Work is in hand on a system to produce height profiles of turbulence parameters. 273 274 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS (a) Infrared Astronomy-Leaders: J. A. Thomas, G. Robinson. 1. Investigation of radiative transfer in dust shells surroundiim stars applied to IRC-l I02I6-G. Robinson, R. Mitchell. 2. Detailed sludics of conditions favouring absorption, emission or self-absorption of radiation associated with silicate grains in circumstellar dust shells —G. Robinson, R. Mitchell. 3. Airborne surface brightness measurements of our own galaxy and the Large Magellanic Cloud using a liquid nitrogen-cooled telescope in the near infrared —J. A. Thomas, T. Mal- sumoto, S. Hayakawa, H. Murakami, T. Yamagami, K. Uyama. 4. Infrared observations of ionized hydrogen regions and the struclure of associated dust clouds—J. A. Thomas, R. Mitchell. 5. Southern Sky Infrared Survey—R. Smith, V. Antoniclli. 6. Open clusters in the Carinae region —infrared photometry and spectra —R. Smith, T. Jones. 7. Construction of a dual Infrared Photometer system supporting an InSb detector operating at 60K and a Gc bolometer at 1.2K-J. A. Thomas, R. Smith, R. Mitchell. 8. Design of a chopping secondary mirror system for use on 3.9m telescope —J. A. Thomas, O. Mace, K. Maxwell. 9. Infrared surface brightness distribution of NGC253 — a galaxy similar lo our own —J. A. Thomas, K. Uyama. (b) High Energy Aslronomy-Lcaders: R. K. Sood, V. D. Hopper, B. V. Denehy, O. Mace 1. EOSCOR. A lightweight. Microprocessor-controlled Solar Neutron Detectot-R. Koga, P. Albats, G. M. Frye, S. M. Schindler, B. V. Denehy, V. D. Hopper, O. B. Mace. 2. Calibration EOSCOR detector al Indiana University Cyclotron Facility —B. V. Denehy, O. B. Mace, G. Frye, R. Koga. 3. X-particle search in super high energy interactions observed by balloon-borne emulsion chambers-V. D. Hopper, K. Niu, S. Tasaka, Y. Maeda, T. Sato, K. Hoshiro. 4. Analysis of nucleon and heavy nucleus collisions at energies greater than 10 TeV —V. D. Hopper, K. Niu, S. Tasaka, Y. Maeda, T. Sato, K. Hoshiro. 5. Investigations of very high energy heavy nucleii in thc Cosmic Radiation using a balloon- borne system —R. K. Sood. 6. Development of a high angular resolution instrument for gamma ray astronomy using drift chambers —R. K. Sood, G. K. Rochester. 7. Gamma Ray sky plots from combined balloon nights —M. Durre, B. V. Denehy. (c) Atmospheric Physics —Leaders: 1. Bourne, .1. Laby. 1. Acoustic sounding of the lower atmosphere producing on line information about factors con­ trolling pollution dispersal-I. Bourne, H. N. Brann, G. Robinson, D. Hopper, D. Jones. 2. Doppler Acoustic Radar —a system producing data on horizontal and vertical winds at height intervals of 33 m lo altitudes of about 1 km —I. Bourne, O. Mace, H. N. Brann. 3. Stratospheric aerosol determination of particle sizes and their vertical distribution up to 30 km altitude —J. Laby. 4. Remote IR probing of the lower atmosphere by investigating the spectral variation of absorp­ tion and emission of the atmosphere as a function of the zenith angle —J. Thomas, A. Young, 1. Bourne. 5. Electric field measurements in the atmosphere and their correlation with meteorological observations —V. D. Hopper. (d) Other Fields 1. Effects of leaf canopy structure on interception of solar short wave radiation and on photosynthetic yields —J. V. Denholm. 2. Dyson interferometer adaptation for measurement of the refractive index of liquids —J. F. G. Darby. 3. Sedimentation of Port Phillip and the nearer regions of Bass Strait —J. F. G. Darby. 4. Rapid numerical computation of the area of the long wavelength tail of the Planck func­ tion—J. F. G. Darby. 5. A study of controversial aspects of thc foundation of the Special Theory of Relativity and Electromagnetic Theory —J. V. Denholm, G. Robinson.

PUBLISHED WORKS Articles 1. MITCHELL, R. M. and ROBINSON, G.-The Circumstellar Dust Shell of IRC+ 10216. Mon. Nat. R. Astr. Soc. 190: 669-682 (1980). 2. HYLAND, A. R., McGREGOR, P. J., ROBINSON, G., THOMAS, J. A., BECKL1N, E. R.A.A.F. ACADEMY 275

E., GATLEY, I. and WERNER, M. W.-Thc Infrared Emission of G333.6-0.2, An Ex­ tremely Nonsphcrical HI I Region. AsirophvsicalJ.. 241: 709 (1980). 3. JONES, T. J., HYLAND, A. R., ROBINSON, O., SMITH, R. and THOMAS, J. A.- Infrared Observations of a Bok Globule in the Southern Coalsack. AsirophvsicalJ.. 242: 132 (1980). 4. HAYAKAWA, S., MATSUMOTO, T., MURAKAMI, H., UYAMA, K., YAMAGAMI, T. and THOMAS, J. A. — Near Infrared Surface Brightness of our Galaxy. N.Z. J. of Science., 22: 353 (1980). 5. HOPPER, V. D.-Gamma Ray Astronomy. N.Z. J. ofScience, 22: 501 (1980). 6. BAKER, P. W.—The Estimation of the Parameters of a Turbulent Drifting Medium by a Least Squares Analvsis of Spaced Sensor Measurements. Radio Science: 15, 1047 (19S0). 7. BRANN, H. N. and TEMPLETON, J. I. — Meteorological Factors associated with High Pollution Episodes in Melbourne (June 1978). Clean Air. 14: 43 (1980). 8. HOPPER, V. D., TASAKA, S., MAEDA, Y., SATO, S., EUCH1, H., HOSH1NO, K., KURAMATA, S., SHIBUYA, H., NIU, K., NIWA, K., YANAGISAWA, Y., KIMURA, IL, USHIDA, N. and LIM, Y. K. — On the emulsion chamber experiments carried out using balloons under the Australian-Japan collaboration programme. Inst, of Space and Aeronautical Science of Universitv of Tokvo Journal, 16 (2B): 1051-1072 (1980). 9. HOPPER, V. D., FUCHI, H., HOSHINO, K., KURAMATA, S., NIU, K., NIWA, K., SHIBUYA, H., YANAGISAWA, Y., TASAKA, S., MAEDA, Y., KIMURA, II., LIM, Y. K. and USHIDA, N. —Analysis of nucleon and heavy nucleus collisions at enemies greater than 10 TcV. Proc. 16lh International Cosmic Ray Conf. 6: 245-250 (1979). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Science 1. JONES, D. - Unisonde Dala Analysis. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BOOTH, D. - Remote Sensing by Lidar. 2. HOPPER, D. [..—Acoustic Sounding of ihe Atmosphere. 3. ROBINSON, G. — Remote Sensing of Atmospheric Turbulence. 4. SMITH, K. G. — Infrared Astronomy of the Southern Hemisphere. 5. YOUNG, A. — Infrared Spectroscopy of the Atmosphere. MSc Theses in Progress 6. ANTONIELLI, V.- Infrared Astronomy. 7. CALLUS, E. — Stratospheric Circulation. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Gamma Ray Astronomy. ARGC: Infrared Astronomy. ARGC: Doppler Acoustic Wing-linding Radar. Radio Research Board: Electric Field Measurements. Department of Defence (Air): Physics and Chemistry Research Topics. 276 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

STATISTICS

INTRODUCTION Work has been continued on the properties of Branching Processes, especially thc super­ critical types and those with infinite mean. Statistical inference methods have been developed for multiple comparisons, for cases wilh accessory parameters, and for population processes. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Branching process theory —H. Cohn. 2. Potential theory and Markov chains — H. Cohn. 3. Asymptotic theory for Markov chains—H. Cohn. 4. Multiple comparisons processes —C. L. Morley. 5. Branching process theory (age-dependent and varying environments) — Il.-J. Schuh. 6. I.i.d. random variables —H.-J. Schuh. 7. Infinite divisibility —H.-J. Schuh. 8. Continuous time Markov processes-H.-J. Schuh. 9. Stochastic modelling —H.-J. Schuh. 10. Extremes of narrow-band Gaussian processes — K. Sharpe. 11. Inference about stochastic population processes—R. K. Watson. 12. Epidemic theory — R. K. Waison. 13. Applications of martingale theory —R. K. Watson. 14. Conditional inference procedures — E. J. Williams. 15. Regression theory —E. J. Williams. PUBLISHED WORK Articles 1. ANDERSON, D. A. and WATSON, R. K.-On thc Spread of a Disease wilh Gamma Distributed Latent and Infectious Periods. Biometrika, 67: 191-198 (1980). 2. COHN, H. and SCHUH, H.-J. —On thc Continuity and the Positivity of the Finite part of the Limit Distribution of an Irregular Branching Process with Infinite Mean. J. Appl. Pro­ bability, 17: 696-703 (1980). 3. MECOY, R. and LABY, B. — Bcclomethasone Dipropionaic in Twice Daily Treatment of Asthma. Ausi. Family Physician, 9: 721-728 (1980). 4. WATSON, R. K. —A Useful Random Time Scale Transformation for the Standard Epidemic Model. J. Appl. Probability, 17: 324-332 (1980). 5. WA I SON, R. K.— An Application of a Martingale Central Limit Theorem to the Standard Epidemic Model. Stoch. Proc. Appl.. 10: 79-90 (1980). 6. WATSON, R. K.-On the Size Distribution for Some Epidemic Models. J. Appl. Probabili­ ty, 17: 912-921 (1980). 7. YOUNG, R. R., NICHOLSON, R. M., TWEEDIE, R. L. and SCHUH, H.-J.-Quan­ titative Modelling and Prediction of Development Times of the Free-Living Stages of Oster­ tagia Ostertagi Under Controlled and Field Conditions. Parasitology : (1980). Reports 8. COHN, H. and HERING, H. —Inhomogeneous Markov Branching Processes. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., J(1980). 9. COHN, H. — Norming Constants for thc Supercritical Bellman-Harris Process. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 6(1980). 10. COHN, H.— Another Look at thc Finite Mean Supercritical Bienaymc-Galton-Watson Pro­ cess. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 7 (1980). 11. FISHER, R. J. and WATSON, R. K. - Estimation of the Variance of a Test Statistic. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 13 (1980). 12. KLEBANER, C. F. — A Note on a Relation Between the Limiting Random Variables ofa Bellman-Harris Process and the Embedded Galton-Watson Process. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 10 (1980). 13. KLEBANER, C. E. — Almost Sure Convergence in Cascade Processes. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep.. II (1980). 14. KLEBANER, C. F.-Branching Random Walk in Varying Environments— BRWVE. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 12 (1980). 15. MORLEY, C. E. —A Simulation Studv of Ihc Powers of Three Multiple Comparison Statistics. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 14 (1980). 16. MORLEY, C. L. — Choosing a Multiple Comparisons Procedure. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 5(1980). STATISTICS 277

17. MORLEY, C. L. — A Note on the Siep-Up Manner of Multiple Comparisons. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 9 (1980). 18. SCHUH, H.-J. —Sums of l.i.d. Random Variables and an Application to thc Explosion Criterion for Markov Branching Processes. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 2(1980). 19. SCHUH, H.-J. — A Note on the Harris-Sevast'yanov Transformation for Su pet critical Bran­ ching Processes. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 3 (1980). 20. WATSON, R. K.-Somc Probabilities for a Two-Force Conflict Model. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., I (1980). 21. WILLIAMS, E. .1. —Generalized Matrix Inverses with Specified Properties. Univ. of Melb. Statist. Res. Rep., 4 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BRUTON, G. D. C. - Development of Multivariate and Clustering Techniques and Their Application lo the Hydrochemistry Dala of Westernport Bay. 2. GAY, R. — Mixtures of Probability Distributions wilh Applications for Multivariate A nalysis. MSc 'Theses in Progress 3. HILTON, R. ). — Inference in Epidemic Processes. 4. KLEBANER, C. F.- Branching Processes. 5. McDONNELL, R. A.-Demand for Motor Vehicles. 6. MacPHEE, 1. MacK. — Probability Theory. MA Theses in Progress 7. BRACKENRIDGE, C. J. - Theory and Practice of Clinical Trials. 8. MORLEY, C. L.- Multiple Comparisons. 278 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

ZOOLOGY

INTRODUCTION The Department has research interests ranging from cellular structure and function to field ecology, but .several areas of concentration may bc recognised, namely: (a) Comparative func­ tional anatomy and physiology of respiratory and vascular systems of lower vertebrates: (b) Struc­ lure and function of neurotransmission and transmitters of the autonomic nervous system; (c) neurocihology and neurophysiology of arthropods: (d) physiological and behavioural approaches 10 acoustic communication in insects and anuran amphibians; (e) population and community ecology of marine organisms, including benthic, littoral, and zooplanktonic components; and (f) systomaiics, speciation and ecology of anuran amphibians. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. MARINE ANI) ESTUARINE ECOLOGY AND TAXONOMY 1. Distribution and diversity of plankton —G. F. Watson. 2. Taxonomic and ecological studies of annelids and crustaceans —G. F. Watson, R. Hamond, E. II. Drummond, R. II. Miller. 3. Structure and dynamics of benthic communities on hard and soft substrata—M. J. Little­ john, A. A. Martin, G. E. Waison, R. W. Day. 4. Community relationships and biology of cstuarine fishes —G. F. Watson. 5. Ecology of sessile animals and plants in kelp beds in Victoria—R. W. Day. 6. Ell'ects ol predators and herbivores in maintaining the diversity of the algae and epifauna of coral reefs and rocky reefs — R. W. Day. 7. Ell'ects of grazing fish on ihe composition and productivity of coral reef algal turf com­ munities—R. W. Day. 8. Occurrence and behaviour of whales along ihe Viclorian coast —I. L. Gibbins, P. R. L. Mosse. 11. NON-MARINE. ECOLOGY, BEHAVIOUR, SPECIATION AND BIOGEOGRAPHY 1. Various ecological studies of representatives or all vertebrate classes —M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, Ci. I-. Waison. 2. Origin, struclure and maintenance of narrow hybrid zones in amphibians —M. .1. Littlejohn. 3. Establishment and maintenance of spatial co-existence in closely-related species of amphi­ bians— M. J. Littlejohn, G. F. Watson. 4. Taxonomy, zoogeography and life-hi.siories of Australian amphibians —M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, G. F. Waison. 5. Acoustic communication in anuran amphibians — M. J. Littlejohn. 6. Reproductive biology and behaviour of cichlid fishes —A. A. Martin. 7. Ecology and behaviour of Viclorian field crickets —A. A. Martin.

C. THE AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM 1. Autonomic fibres without central connection in amphibians —G. D. Campbell. 2. Electronmicroscopic identification of autonomic nerve fibre types—1. L. Gibbins, G. D. Campbell. 3. Peptides and "purinergic" nerves in the amphibian lung —G. D. Campbell. 4. Comparative ultrastructure and histochemistry of enteric neurons—1. L. Gibbins, G. D. Campbell. 5. "Anomalous" autonomic neurotransmission to toad heart —G. D. Campbell, J. L. Morris, I. L. Gibbins. 6. Autonomic innervation of amphibian kidney —J. L. Morris. 7. Innervation of heart and major vessels in teleosts —D. G. Smith, G. D. Campbell. 8. Neuroanatomy of vertebrate urinogenital organs —A. G. Willis. 9. Investigation ofthe purinergic nerve hypothesis-D. G. Satchell. 10. The non-adrencrgic inhibitory innervation of mammalian airway smooth muscle— D. G. Sat­ chell. 11. Thc ell'ecis of purines on airway smooth muscle —D. G. Satchell. 12. The autonomic innervation of thc gas gland of the Atlantic cod, Gadus morrhua — i. R. McLean, S. Nilsson (Goieburg, Sweden). 13. Adrenergic innervation of the ral lung during induction of pulmonary hypertension —J. R. McLean, B. M. Twarog (Stony Brook, U.S.A.). 14. Mast cell distribution in iwo models of pulmonary hypertension-J. R. McLean, B. M. Twarog (Stony Brook, U.S.A.). 15. Dual nonadrenergic innervation of the ABRM of Mytilus edulis—). R. McLean, B. M. Twarog (Stony Brook, U.S.A.). ZOOLOGY 279

D. VERTEBRATE PHYSIOLOGY 1. Phvsiology, biochemistry and vascularisation in telcost swimming muscle—P. R. L. Mossc (with F. J. R. Hird). 2. Structure and function of ciliated peritoneal funnels in amphibians —.1. I.. Morris. 3. Innervation of the amphibian carotid labyrinth —D. C. Rogers, J. R. McLean, D. G. Smith. 4. Comparative anatomy and development of neuroepithelial bodies in the respiratory system —D. C. Rogers. 5. Control of blood flow in the amphibian carotid labyrinth — D. C. Rogers, D. G. Smilh. 6. Cardiovascular regulation in lower vertebrates — P. J. Berger, B. K. Evans, D. G. Smilh. 7. Respiratory control in birds —P. J. Berger. 8. Vertebrate gas exchange systems —D. G. Smilh. 9. Central pathways involved in mammalian cardiovascular regulation —B. K. Evans (in col­ laboration with the Baker Institute). 10. Anatomy and physiology of thc bat cardiovascular system — B. K. Evans. E. NEUROETHOLOGY 1. Locomotion in insects and crustaceans—D. L. Macmillan. 2. Structure and development of insect auditory organs —D. Young. 3. Acoustic communication in cicadas —D. Young. E. DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 1. Developmental aspects of silver staining processes —A. G. Willis. 2. Origin and differentiation of enteric plexuses —A. G. Willis, I. L. Gibbins. 3. Embryology of the amphibian carotid labyrinth —D. C. Rogers.

PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. ACHE, B. W. and MACMILLAN, D. 1... - Neurobiology, in The Biologv and Management of Lobsters, ed. J. S. Cobb and B. F. Phillips, Academic Press, New York: 165-214 (1980). Articles 2. ALLAN, I. J. and NEWGREEN, D. E. — Thc origin and differentiation of enteric neurons of the intestine of the fowl embryo. Am. J. Anal.. 157: 137-154 (1980). 3. BERGER, P. J., EVANS, B. K. and SMITH, D. G. — Localisation of barorcceptors and gain of thc barorcceptor-hean rate reflex in the lizard I rachydosaurus rugosus. ./. Exp. Biol., 86: 197-209 (1980). 4. BERGER, P. J., TALLMAN, R. D. Jr. and KUNZ, A. L. - Discharge of interpulmonary chcmorcccptors and its modulation bv rapid IT CO; changes in decerebrate ducks. Resp. Physiol., 42: 123-130 (1980). 5. BROOK, A. J.-Thc breeding seasons of frogs in Victoria and Tasmania. Vict. Nat., 97: 6-11(1980). 6. CHRISTIE, J. and SATCHELL, D. G. — Purine receptors in the trachea: is there a receptor for ATP? Brit. J. Pharmacol.. 70: 512-514 (1980). 7. COOKE, I. R. C —Functional aspects of the morphology and vascular anatomy of the gills of thc Endeavour Dogfish, Centrophorus scatpratus (McCulloch) (Elasmobranchii: Syualidac). Zoomorphologie. 94: 167-183 (1980). 8. COOKE, I. R. C. and CAMPBELL, G.-The vascular anatomy of the gills of the smooth toadfish Torquigener glaber (Teleostei: Tctraodontidae). Zoomorphologie, 94: 151-166 (1980). 9. COULSON, G. M. —Extension of range of the western grey kangaroo, Macropus fuliginosus, in Victoria. Vict. Nat., 97: 4-5 (1980). 10. DORSEY, J. H. and SYNNOT, R. N.-Marine soft-bottom bcnthic community offshore from Black Rock sewage outfall, Conncwarre, Victoria. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res.. 31: 155-162 (1980). 11. GIBBINS, I. L. — Ultrastructural characterisation of peripheral non-adrencrgic autonomic nerves. Micron., II: 453-454 (1980). 12. HARRIS, M. P., BROWN, R. S. and WAINER, J. W.-Seabird islands No. 94: Great Glennic Island. Corel/a, 4: 93-95 (1980). 13. LITTLEJOHN, M. J.-Thc frogs of French Island and Phillip Island. Vict. Nat., 97: 232-234 (1980). 14. MACMILLAN, D. L., FIELD, L. H. and OAKLEY, J. K.-Thc relationship between mus­ cle tension and output in a crustacean meropodite-carpopodile chordotonal organ (MCI). Comp. Biochem. Phvsiol., 67A: 331-335 (1980). 15. MARTIN, A. A., TYLER, M. .1. and DAVIES, M.-A new species of Ranidellu (Anura: Leptodactylidae) from northwestern Australia. Copeia, 1980: 93-99 (1980). 280 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

16. MORRIS, J. L. and CROSBY, L. J.-Ciliated peritoneal funnels in the toad kidney: an SEM and TEM study. Micron., 11: 419-420 (1980). 17. MORTON, S. R — Field and laboratory studies of water metabolism in Smilhopsis crassicaudata (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae). Aust. J. Zool., 28: 213-227 (1980). 18. MORTON. S. R. — Ecological correlates of caudal fat storage in small mammals. Aust. Mamm., 3: 81-86 (1980). ~ 19. MORTON, S. R., WA1NER, J. W. and THWAITES, T. P.-Distributions and habitats or Sminthopsis leucopus and S. murina (Marsupialia: Dasvuridae) in southeastern Australia. Aust. Mamm.. 3: 19-30 (1980). 20. MOSSE, P. R. 1... — Vascular anatomy of the lateral musculature of thc flathead Plalycephalus bassensis (Teleostei: Perciformes). Zoomorphologie, 95: 133-148 (1980). 21. MOSSE, P. R. L. — An investigation of gluconeogenesis in marine teleosts and the effect of long-term exercise on hepatic gluconeogenesis. Comp. Biochem. Phvsiol., 67B: 583-592 (1980). 22. NEWGREEN, D. F., JAHNKE, 1., Al LAN, I. J. and GIBBINS, I. L.-Differentiation of sympathetic and enteric neurons of the fowl cmbrvo in grafts to thc chorio-allantoic mem­ brane. Cell Tiss. Res., 208: 1-20 (1980). 23. NORMAN, F. I., BROWN, R. S., DEERSON, D. M. and ROBERTSON, B. I.-Seabird islands No. 88: Wattle Island, Wilsons Promontorv, Victoria. Corella, 4: 81-82 (1980). 24. OAKLEY, J. K. and MACMILLAN, D. L.-The morphology and physiology of CAP organs in Jasus novaehollandiae (Crustacea, Decapoda, Reptantia, Macrura). Mar. Behav. Physiol.. 7: 233-247 (1980). 25. PARSONS, D. W. —The morphology and ultrastructure of tension receptors in the walking legs of thc crab Carcinus maenas. Cell Tiss. Res.. 211: 139-149 (1980). 26. PROCTOR, C, MOSSE, P. R. L. and HUDSON, R. C. L.-A histochemical and ultrastructural study of the development of the propulsive musculature or the brown trout, Salmo trutta, in relation to its swimming behaviour. J. Fish. Biol., 16: 309-329 (1980). 27. RAMM, D. C. — Electromagnetic tracking of rock lobsters (Jasus novaehollandiae). Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res., 31: 263-269 (1980). 28. ROBERTSON, A. I.—The structure and organization of an eclgrass fish fauna. Oecologia, 47: 76-82 (1980). 29. ROGERS, D. C. and HALLER, C. -The ultrastructural characteristics of the apical cell in thc neuroepithelial bodies of the toad lung {Bufo marinus). Cell Tiss. Res., 209: 485-498 (1980). 30. SMITH, D. G. and HOUBEN, C —Blood pressure regulation in lizards. Colour videotape (27 mins.). Centre for the Study of Higher Education, University of Melbourne (1980). 31. WATSON, G. I-. — A note on differences in thc mating behaviour of Drosophila heleroneura and D. silveslris. Experientia, 36: 62-63 (1980). 32. WATSON, G. F. and MART IN, A. A. —The early development of the Australian green hylid frogs Litoria chloris, L. fallax and L. gracilenta. Ausi. Zool., 20: 259-268 (1979). 33. YOUNG, D. —Thc calling song of the bladder cicada, Cyslosoma saundersii: a computer analysis. J. Exp. Biol.. 88: 407-411 (1980).

Reports and Notes 34. ALLAN, I. J. and SOUTHWELL, B. R. — A morphological staging of intestinal and cloacal development of thc domestic fowl embryo. Department of Biology, Melbourne State College and Department of Zoology, Universiiy of Melbourne, 48 pp. (1980). 35. BERGER, P. J. — Lengthening of inspiration and expiration bv respiratory afferent discharge- in birds. Proc. Ausi. Physiol. Pharmacol. Soc, 11: 10P (1980). 36. CAMPBELL, G., COSTA, M., FURNESS, J. B. and RUTHERFORD, A. M. — Investiga­ tion of "purinergic" inhibitory innervation of load lung. Proc Ausi. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, 11: 19P (1980). 37. CAMPBELL, G. and GIBBINS, I. L. —Somatostatin and the cholinergic innervation of thc toad heart. Proc. Ausi. Physiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 20P (1980). 38. COLLIN, S. B. and MACMILLAN, D. L. —The functional anatomy of the cockroach walk­ ing system. Report to Society for Experimental Biologv 200th Meeting, Oxford, December 1980 (1980). 39. DANN, P. M. - Westernport Bay Environmental Study: An evaluation of the ecological role of the Black Swan Cygnus alralus in the energy flow of ihc seagrass ecosystem of Western- port. Ministry for Conservation, Victoria: Environmental Studies Programme (1980). 40. DANN, P. M. — Westernport Bay Environmental Study: The ecology of wading birds in Westernport. Ministrv for Conservation, Victoria: Environmental Studies Programme (1980). 41. KI EN, .1. and M ACM I LEAN, D. L. - Central-peripheral interactions in the walking locust. Report io Society for Experimental Biology 200ih Meeting, Oxford, December 79,90(1980). ZOOLOGY 281

42. LANG, S. and EVANS, B. K. —Regional variations in ihe rai vas deferens. Proc. Aiist. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 15P (1980). 43. LOWE, K. W.-Studies of ibises in Victoria: Preliminary Report. V.O.R.G. Notes, 16: 47-50 (1980). 44. MACMILLAN, D. and KIEN, J. — The role of load-sensitive alference in the motor pattern­ ing for walking. Proc Aust. Physiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 48P (1980). 45. MORRIS, J. L. and CLEVERS, J. — Peripheral injection of 6-hydroxydopamine causes a weight increase in toads. Proc. Aust. Phvsiol. Pharmacol. Soc, II: 75P (1980). 46. OAKLEY, J. K. and MACMILLAN, D. L.-Tension sensitivity in the MCI chordotonal organ of Jasus novaehollandiae. Report to Society for Experimental Biologv 200th Meeting, Oxford, December 1980 (1980). 47. PARSONS, D. W. — Structure and function of tension receptors in Carcinus maenas. Report to Societv for Experimental Biologv 200th Meeting, Oxford, December 1980 (1980). 48. WATSON, G. I'., LITTLEJOHN, M. J. and ROBERTSON, A. I. - Westernport Bay En­ vironmental Study (Task W88/73): Thc ecological role of macrofauna in seagrass com­ munities of Westernport Bay. Ministry for Conservation, Victoria: Environmental Studies Program (1980).

THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Doctor of Philosophy 1. MOSSE. P. R. L. — Muscle function in marine teleosts: metabolic and anatomical studies of the lateral propulsive musculature. 2. SYNNOT, R. vi. — The population biologv and predatory behaviour of Lepsiella vinosa (Lamarck, 1882).

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ALLAN, I. }. —Experimental studies on the development of the avian autonomic nervous system. 2. ANDERSON, C. R. — The ultrastructure of the enteric innervation of cyclosiomes, elasmobranchs and teleosts. 3. BENNETT, A. F. — Distribution and ecology of mammals in remnant forest patches in south western Victoria. 4. COOKE, I. R. C. —Neural basis of plasticity. 5. DANN, P. M. — Foraging strategies of wading birds in Westernport Bay. 6. DOOLAN, J. — The auditory system and acoustic behaviour of cicadas. 7. DORSEY, J. H. — Ecology of the Nereidae (Polychaeta) at Werribee, Port Phillip Bay, Vic­ toria. 8. GIBBINS, I. L. — The ultrastrucluraT characterization of peripheral non-adrenergic nerves; and the innervation of the amphibian small intestine und its development. 9. HOWARD, R. K. — The ecology of caridean shrimps associated wilh seagrass flats in Westernport Bay. IG. LOWE, K. W.—Ecology of herons, egrets, ibis and spoonbills in the Wesiernpon region. 11. MacNALLY, R. C —Dynamics of sympatry in congeneric anuran amphibians. 12. MORRIS, J. L. —Control of renal function in the load (Bufo marinus). 13. OAKLEY, J. K. — Sensory and motor integration in crustaceans. 14. PARSONS, D. W. — Tension reception in crustaceans. 15. PORTER, C. M. —Neural basis of locomotion. 16. QUINN, G. P. - The dynamics of molluscan predator-prey systems in the murine intertidal zone. 17. ROBERTSON, P. —Comparative life history strategies and ecology of Victorian scincid lizards. 18. RUSS, G. R. — The ecology of communities on hard substrates in the marine sublidul region. 19. SHERW1N, W. B. — Narrow zones of overlap and hybridization in the genus Litoria (Anura: Hylidae). 20. WA1NER, J. W. — Ecological interactions between Antechinus minimus (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae) and Rattus fuscipes (Rodentia: Muridue) on u smull island. MSc Theses in Progress 21. BARCLAY, J. H. — Population ecology of galaxiid fish. 22. BIGGIN, R. - The development of the locust ear. 23. DOIDGE, J. Nl. —The autonomic innervation of vertebrate airways. 24. DONALD, J. A. — Innervation of the cardiovascular system of teleosts. 25. EVANS, A. R. — Ecology and behaviour of Viclorian nemobiine crickets. 282 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

26. HALLER, C. 3. —Comparative anatomy and embryological origin of vertebrate neuroepithelial bodies. 27. HARRIS, .1. A. — Factors affecting the vertical distribution of mussels in Port Phillip Bay. 28. HARRISON, P. A.—Acoustic territorial interactions within the Litoria ewingi complex (Anura: Hylidae) in south-eastern Australia. 29. MOSS, J. — Ecological studies on the Maribyrnong River. 30. NOONE, C. M. — Larval development of brachyurans in Westernport Bay. 31. O'SHEA, J. — A study of cardiovascular regulation in mega- and microchiroplerans. 32. RAMM, D. — Ecology offish eggs and larvae in ihe Gippsland Lakes. 33. RIGBY, B. — 77;

This year's research report again reflects the diversity of expertise present in this broadly- based Faculty. Requirements for research in Veterinary Science are such that investigations range from fundamental studies to almost totally applied research. In the Department of Veterinary Clinical Sciences there has been continued emphasis on in­ vestigating the interactions between disease, management, reproductive efficiency and production in agricultural animals. Such relationships arc important in the application of preventive Veterinary Science in the rural industries. Thc work has enabled existing herd health programmes in dairy cattle 10 be extended and refined, and also provides a basis for continuing work on ihe development of sheep flock and beef herd health and production programmes. Certain clinical syndromes in dogs have been extensively studied, especially the contributions of inheritance and environment to certain bone and joint problems. Some surgical conditions in horses have also been investigated to give a belter scientific basis for ihe management of cases in clinical practice. En­ docrinological studies undertaken in ewes have given a better insight into ihc mechanisms underly­ ing anocstrus in ihe sheep. In thc Department of Veterinary Paraclinical Sciences emphasis in research continued on echinococcosis and cysticercosis, degenerative brain diseases, viral infections of dogs and horses, gastro-inicstinal parasitisms and genital infections of horses. In particular, work on serological testing for cysticercosis and hydatidosis is now moving towards the objectives of refining antigens 10 increase specificity and sensitivity of such tests and examining the feasibility of developing sen­ sitive tests to diagnose tapeworm (not larval) infections in dogs. Advances have been made lo knowledge of ihe brain damage associated wilh lead poisoning and in developing serological lests to diagnose contagious equine metritis. There has been work on ihc classification of equine herpesviruses and on epidemiology and the management of parvovirus infection of dogs. Subsmn- lial data has been acquired on thc taxonomy and ecology of Corynebacleriuin equi. Thc major research activities of the Department of Veterinary Preclinical Sciences have re­ mained in reproductive biology, cardiac physiology and lipid biochemistry. Reproduction studies continue lo be concentrated on the biology of ovarian follicles and corpora luiea. with an addi­ tional programme on ihc cytology of the mammary gland, concentrating particularly on ihe role of mamillary cells in immune mechanisms in ihe udder. The Department's longstanding interest in equine electrocardiography has been maintained, and additional studies commenced on ihe ap­ plication of the heart score theory in dogs. Biochemical studies remain focused on polyunsaturated fatty acid metabolism, and related dietary requirements, in thc cat. The Faculty gratefully acknowledges the generous financial support received from exiernal research funding bodies, and particular grams are specified in each Departmental repon. There are currently 17 Ph.D. students and 8 Masters degree (research) students in the Faculty, indicating clearly the importance attached to post-graduate research training.

283 284 FACULTY OF VETERINARY SCIENCE

VETERINARY CLINICAL SCIENCES

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. VETERINARY EPIDEMIOLOGY AND PREVENTIVE MEDICINE 1. Developing (lock health programs tor sheep —D. C. Blood, D. B. Galloway, 13. R. Wall, F. H. W. Morley. 2. Survev of animal health and production in S. W. Victoria —F. H. W. Morley, R. Glanville, J. Edwards, R. Miller. 3. Effect of genotvpe, stocking rate and pasture species on sheep production — J. R. Donnelly, F. H. W. Morley. 4. Methods of minimizing economic disruption caused by discovery of an exotic sheep disease agenl in Australia —J. H. Johnston, F. H. W. Morley. 5. Construction of computer models of agricultural systems: (a) Dairy farm model —S. Lamb, W. L. Potter, F. H. W. Morley, G. A. Anderson (b) Nematode parasites-A. P. L. Callinan, F. II. W. Morley. (c) Construction ol" a computer model of Foot and Moulh Disease —.1. McDonnell, G. A. Anderson. B. SURGERY 1. Hip dysplasia in dogs: Surgical techniques for treatment— T. A. Mason. 2. Aspects of cervical spondylolisthesis in dogs: heritability and surgical stabilisation — T. A. Mason. 3. Surgical ireatmenl of deformities of the forelegs in young dogs caused by premature closure of thc growth plalcs of the radius and ulna —T. A. Mason. 4. Osteochondrosis in dogs —its manifestations in the shoulder, elbow, siifle and hock joints —T. A. Mason. 5. Studies on the clinical behaviour and heritability of congenital cataracts in Retrievers —T. A. Mason. 6. An investigation of the biomechanics and structure of the suspensory apparatus of horses with special emphasis on sesamoidilis —V. C. Speirs. 7. A study of thc effects of gamma irradiation on the growth rate of periosteal new bone in horses—V. C. Speirs. 8. Hip dysplasia —an investigation of two breeding establishments— R. B. Lavelle. 9. Hypothyroid dwarfism in Great Danes —R. B. Lavelle. C. ANIMAL REPRODUCTION 1. Definition of clinical syndromes associated wilh infertility in male domestic animals in­ cluding endocrinology of reproductive efficiency in rams —b. B. Galloway. 2. Pituitary function in pregnant and postpartum owes; endocrinological studies in other species—P. J. Wright.

PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. MORLEY, F. H. W. (cd.)-Grazing Animals, Elsevier (1980). Chapters of Rooks 2. LAVELLE, R. B. and YOXALL, A. T. - Physiological Basis of Small Animal Medicine. eds. A. T. Yo.xall and J. F. R. Hird, Blackwell Scientific Publications, Victoria: 39-68 (1980). 3. MORLEY, F. H. W. ed.-Grazing Systems, in Grazing Animals: 379-400 Elsevier (1980). Articles 4. CAMPBELL, T. M., LORDING, P. M., WRIGLEY, R. H. and LAVELLE, R. B.-Portal Vein Anomaly and Hepatic Encephalopathy in Three Dogs. Ausi. vet. J., 56: 593 (1980). 5. ELDER, J. K. and others —A survey concerning eanlc lick control in Queensland. 3. Chemical control. Ausi. vet. J., 56 : 212-218 (1980a). 6. ELDER, J. K. and others —A survey concerning ealile lick control in Queensland. 4. Use of resistant canle and pasture spelling. Aust. vet. ./., 56: 219-223 (1980b). 7. ELDER, J. K. and others —A suivey concerning cattle lick control in Queensland. 2. Managerial aspecis which indirectly affect tick control. Aust. vet. J., 56: 205-211 (1980c). 8. MASON, T. A., LAVELLE, R. B., SKIPPER, S. C. and WRIGLEY, R. H.-Osteochon­ drosis of the Elbow Joinl in Young Dogs. J. small Anim. Prac. 21: 641 (1980). 9. MASON. T. A. — Bicipital Bursitis in a Mare. Veterinary Record, 107: 330 (1980). VETERINARY CLINICAL SCIENCES 285

10. MORLEY, F. H. W., MITCHELL, R., NAPTHINE, D., G1LL1CK, J. and HASS, C.-At­ titudes of farmers to adoption of the mules operation. Proc. 2nd Int. Svrnp. Vet. Epid. Econ: 354-357 (1980). 11. MORLEY, E. H. W.—Sheep breeding research —beginnings at Trangie. Aust. Soc. Anim. Prod. Proc. 13: 168-171 (1980). 12. MORLEY, F. H. W. and DONALD, A. D. — Farm Management and systems of helminth control. Veterinary Parasitology, 6: 105-135 (1980). 13. SPEIRS, V. C.-Arterio-Venous and Artcrio-Central Venous Relationships for pH, PCO2, and Actual Bicarbonate in Horse Blood. Amer. J. Vet. Res.. 41: 199-203 (1980). 14. SPEIRS, V. C, CHRISTIE, B. A. and VAN VEENENDAAL, J. C. -Thc Management of Rectal Tears in Horses. Aust. vet. J., 56: 313-317 (1980). 15. WILLIAMSON, N. B., ANDERSON, G. A., BLOOD, D. C. and MALMO, J. — Extensions to a veterinary health and management program data system for dairy herds. Aust. vet. J., 56 (10): 474-476 (1980). 16. WILLIAMSON, N. B., QUINTON, F. W. and ANDERSON, G. A. -Thc elTect of varia­ tions in thc interval between calving and first service on the reproductive performance of nor­ mal dairy cows. Aust. vet. J.. 56 (10): 477-480 (1980). 17. WRIGHT, P. J., GENTENBEEK, P. E., CLARKE, I. J. and FINDLAY, i. K. — Pituitary responsiveness to LH-RH, the occurrence of oestradiol— 17B —induced LH —positive feed­ back and the resumption of oestrus cvcles in ewes post-partum. J. Reprod. Fert., 60: 171-176 (1980). 18. WRIGHT, P. J.-Thc induction of oestrus and ovulation in thc bitch using pregnant mare serum gonadotrophin and human chorionic gonadotrophin. Aust. vet. J.. 56: 137-140 (1980). 19. WRIGHT, P. J. —Serum spermagglutinins and semen quality in the bull. Aust. vet. J., 56: 10-13(1980). 20. WRIGHT, P. J., STELMASIAK, T. and CHAMLEY, W. A.-Pituitary responsiveness to LH-RH in post-partum ewes treated with oestradiol— 17B —and failing toshow a plasma LH surge. Aust. J. Bio! Sci., 33: 465-469 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. CALLINAN, A. P. L. — Computer models of the epidemiology of nematodiasis in sheep. 2. DONNELLY, J. — Efficiency of sheep meal production in grazing system. 3. ELDER, J. K. — Managerial restraints to cattle lick control in Queensland. 4. HEYWARD, B. R. — Simulation of livestock components of smallholders'farms in Nigeria. M VSc Thesis in Progress 5. LAVELLE, R. B. — The Effect of Overfeeding on Bone Growth in Great Danes. . SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: AWC: Developing flock health programs for sheep. AWC: Methods of minimizing the economic disruption caused by discovery of an exotic sheep disease agent in Australia. ABAH: Development of a computer model of Foot and Mouth Disease. 286 FACULTY OF VETERINARY SCIENCE

VETERINARY PARACLINICAL SCIENCES

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. MICROBIOLOGY 1. Mycoplasma-cell interactions including mechanisms of adherence of avian mycoplasmas to host cells-K. G. Whithear. 2. Antibiotic sensitivity testing of mycoplasmas —K. G. Whithear. 3. Development of avian mycoplasma vaccine — K. G. Whithear, B. Patten. 4. Virus diseases and immunology of horses —M. J. Studdert. 5. Primary severe combined immunodeficiency disease (PSCID) of Arabian foals—M. J. Stud­ dert, T. M. Campbell. 6. Chlamydia psittaci infection in cats —M. J. Studdert. 7. Feline, porcine and canine parvoviruses —M. J. Studdert, C. Lenghaus. 8. An inherited canine granulocytopalhy —M. J. Studdert. 9. Contagious equine metritis —K. L. Hughes, J. A. Baker. 10. The bacteriology of Corynebacterium equi and its relation to mycobacteria —K. L. Hughes, M. D. Barton. B. PARASITOLOGY 1. Life cycle and pathogenicity of Eimeria acervulina— K. E. Harrigan. 2. Serological diagnosis of larval cestode infections —M. D. Rickard, P. S. Craig. 3. Studies on mechanisms of immunity to Taeniid cestodes in the intermediate host and purification of antigens stimulating protective immunity—M. D. Rickard. 4. Vaccination of calves and lambs against T. saginata and E. granulosus infection —M. D. Rickard. 5. Electron microscopic studies on the development of Cysticercus pisiformis in vitro and in vivo—M. D. Rickard, C. Bursey. 6. Studies on benzimidazole resistant Ostertagia circumcincta in sheep —M. D. Rickard, I-'. A. M. Echevarria. C. PATHOLOGY 1. Hormonal inhibition of experimental breast carcinogenesis: mechanisms of action —A. G. Jabara. 2. Spontaneous canine tumours: classification and biological behaviour —A. G. Jabara. 3. Diseases of poultry, pet and wild birds and diseases of domestic, zoo and wild mammals in Victoria — K. E. Harrigan. 4. Experimental studies of lead toxicity in dogs—N. D. Sullivan, A. N. J. Hamir. 5. An experimental studv of the pathology, diagnosis and prophylaxis of snake bite —N. D. Sullivan, M. D. Rickard, P. F. Lewis. 6. An experimental study of the reactions of the guinea pig uterus and placenta to injury — K. V. Jubb, H. Attwood, R. E. Reuter. D. WILDLIFE 1. The aetiology and pathogenesis of lumpy jaw in kangaroos — K. L. Hughes, J. D. Burton. 2. Comparative and functional anatomy of thc foregut of marsupials— J. H. Arundel, J. D. O'Shea, K. L. Hughes, D. L. Obcndorf. PUBLISHED WORK Book 1. STEVENSON, W. J. and HUGHES, K. L.-Synopsis of Zoonoses in Australia, Com­ monwealth Department of Health, Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra, (1980). Chapters of Books 2. WILKINSON, J. S. — Diagnostic Aids and Laboratory Tests, in Jones' Animal Nursing, 3rd ed., cd. E. Lane, Pergamon Press, Oxford: 389-429 (1980). 3. WILKINSON, J. S.-The Pituitary and Adrenal Glands: Their Function in Health and Disease, in Clinical Biochemistry of Domestic Animals, 3rd cd., ed. J. J. Kaneko. Academic Press, London: 448-489 (1980). Articles 4. AJUEO, J. C. and WHITHEAR, K. G. —The Surface Layer of Mycoplasma synoviae as Demonstrated by Negative Staining. Res. vet. Sci., 29: 268-270 (1980). VETERINARY PARACLINICAL SCIENCES 287

5. ARUNDEL, J. H. and ADOLPH, A. J. - Preliminary Observations on the Removal ol Taenia saginata Eggs from Sewage Using Various Treatment Processes. Aust. vet. J., 56: 492-495 (1980). 6. ARUNDEL, J. H., KINGSTON, J. L. and KERR, P. J.-Prosthogonimus pellucidus in Domestic Poultry. Aust. vet. J., 56: 460-461 (1980). 7. BARTON, M. D. and HUGHES, K. L.-Corvnebacleriurn equi: A Review. Vet. Bull., Weybridge., 50: 65-80 (1980). 8. BEVERIDGE, I. — Corollostrongylus hypsiprymnodonlis gen. cl sp. nov. (Nematode: Strongvlidac) from the Rat-kangaroo, Hvpsiprymnodon /nosc/ia/u5(Marsu-ialia). J. Parasit, 64: 657-660 (1978). 9. BEVERIDGE, I. — Species of Cloacina Linstow, 1898 (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) from thc Black-tailed Wallaby, Wailabia bicolor (Desmarest 1804) from Eastern Australia. J. Helmin­ thol., 53: 363-378 (1979). 10. CRAIG, P. S. and RICKARD, M. D.-Evaluation of'Crude' Antigen Prepared from Taenia saginata for thc Serological Diagnosis of T. saginata Cysticercosis in Cattle using the Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assav (ELISA). Z. Parasilenk., 61: 287-297 (1980). 11. CRAIG, P. S., MITCHELL, G. F., CRUISE, K. M. and RICKARD, M. D.-Hybridoma Antibody Immunoassays for the Detection of Parasitic Infection: Attempts to Produce an Immunodiagnostic Reagent for a Larval Taeniid Cestode Infection. Ausi. J. exp. Biol. med. Sci., 58: 339-350 (1980). 12. HARRIGAN, K. E.-Botulism in Broiler Chickens. Aust. vet. J., 56: 603-605 (1980). 13. HAZARD, G., HUGHES, K. L. and PENSON, P.-Contagious Equine Metritis in Australia. J. Reprod. Pert. (Suppl.). 27: 337-342 (1979). 14. LENGHAUS, C. —Canine Parvovirus Disease: A Caution Against Routine Vaccination. Aust. vet. J., 56: 511-512. 15. LENGHAUS, C. and STUDDERT, M. J. - Relationships of Canine Panleucopaenia (Enteritis) and Myocarditis Parvoviruses to Feline Panleucopaenia Virus. Aust. vet. J.. 56: 152-153 (1980). 16. LENGHAUS, C. and STUDDERT, M. J.-Model for Viral Myocarditis? Med. J. Aust., 2: 42 (1980). 17. LENGHAUS, C, STUDDERT, M. J. and FINNIE, J. W.-Acute and Chronic Canine Par­ vovirus Mvocardilis Following Intrauterine Inoculation. Aust. vet. J., 56: 465-468 (1980). 18. MATOSSIAN, R. M., McLAREN, M., DRAPER, C. C, BRADSTREET, C. M. P., DIGHERO, M. W., KANE, G. J., MACK1NLAY, L. M. and RICKARD, M. D.-The Serodiagnosis of Hydatid Disease: 2. Additional Studies on Selected Sera Using Indirect Haemagglutination (IHA), Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA) and Defined An­ tigen Substrate Spheres (DASS). J. Helminth., 53: 287-291 (1979). 19. MITCHELL, G. F., RAJASEKARIAH, G. R. and RICKARD, M. D.-A Mechanism to Account for Strain Variation in Resistance to the Larval Cestode, Taenia laeniaeformis. Im­ munology, 39: 481-489 (1980). 20. OBENDORF, D. L., and McCOLL, K.-Mortality in Little Penguins (Eudvptulu minor) Along the Coast of Victoria, Australia. J. Wildl. Dis., 16: 251-259 (1980). 21. RAJASEKARIAH, G. R., MITCHELL, G. F. and RICKARD, M. D.-Taenia laeniaefor­ mis in Mice: Protective Immunization with Oncospheres and Their Products. Int. J. Parasit., 10: 155-160 (1980). 22. RAJASEKARIAH, G. R., RICKARD, M. D. and MITCHELL, G. E. — Density Gradient Separation of Taenia pisiformis Oncospheres. J. Parasit., 66: 355-356 (1980). 23. RAJASEKARIAH, G. R., RICKARD, M. D. and MITCHELL, G. E. - Immunisation of Mice Against Infection with Taenia laeniaeformis Using Various Antigens Prepared from Eggs, Oncospheres, Developing Larvae and Strobiloccrci. Int. J. Parasit., 10: 315-324 (1980). 24. RICKARD, M. D.-Hvdalid Diseases of the Liver: Advances in Serological Diagnosis. Aust. N.Z. J. Med., 10: 584 (1980). 25. STUDDERT, M. J. - Differentiation of Subtypes within Equine Herpesvirus Type 1. ,4i/.s7. vet. J., 56: 45 (1980). Technical Report 26. HUGHES, K. L. and REUTER, R. E. — En tero toxaemia in Sheep, Goals and Cattle, Animal Health Committee, Standing Committee of Agriculture, Canberra (1980).

THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Veterinary Science- I. HOWARD, N. A. — Equine Strongyle Infection in Southern Victoria. 288 FACULTY OF VETERINARY SCIENCE

THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. BARTON, M. D. — The Bacteriology of Corynebacterium equi and its Relation to Mycobacteria. 2. BURTON, J. D. —Studies into Aspecis of Lumpy Jaw in Macropods. 3. CRAIG, P. S. - Diagnosis of Taeniid Infections in Sheep and Cattle. 4. HAMIR, A. N. J. — Lead Toxicity in Dogs. 5. HARRIGAN, K. E. — The Life Cycle and Pathogenicity of Eimeria acervulina in Ihe Chicken. 6. LENGHAUS, C. — ln vitro and In vivo Studies of Pel inc and Porcine Parvoviruses. 7. LEWIS, P. F. — The Pathology, Diagnosis and Prophylaxis of Snakebite. 8. OBENDORF, D. L. — Comparative and Functional Anatomy of the Oesophagus and Stomach of Macropods. 9. PATTEN, B. E. — Mechanisms Associated wilh the Adherence of Avian Mycoplasmas to Host Cells. 10. REUTER, R. E. — Response of the Animal Placenta to Injury. M VSc Theses in Progress 11. BAKER, .1. A. —Studies on Contagious Equine Metritis. 12. CAMPBELL, T. M. — The Interaction of Equine Herpes-. Adeno- and Rhino-Viruses with Lymphocytes. 13. ECHEVARR1A, F. A. M. — The Fitness of Free-Living and Parasitic Stages of Ostertagia spp Susceptible or Resistant lo Benzimidazole Anthelmintics. 14. HARTAN1NGSIH, N. — Some Aspecis of Infectious Infertility in Horses. 15. LAVELLE, R. B. —An Investigation of the Effect of Overfeeding on Bone Development in Great Danes. 16. THAM, K. M. — Inactivated Feline Herpes-. Parvo- and Calici-Viruses: The Immune Responses. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Arabian Horse Society: Primary Severe Combined immunodeficiency Disease (PSC1D) of Ara­ bian Foals. Australian Equine Research Fund: Virus Diseases and Immunology of Horses. Australian Meat Research Committee: Thc Immunology of Cysticercosis/Taeniasis in Domesticated Animals. Chicken, Egg and Meal Research Committee: Mechanisms Associated with thc Adherence of Avian Mycoplasma to Host Cells. Estate of Sir Alfred Edward Rowden White: Contagious Equine Metritis. NH & MRC: Immunology of Hydatidosis and Cysticercosis. NH & MRC: The Use of In vilro Culture Antigens for the Serological Diagnosis of Cysticer- cosis/Hydatidosis/Taeniasis in Domesticated Animals. VETERINARY PRECLINICAL SCIENCES RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Polyunsaturated fatty acid metabolism in the cal and other animals —J. G. McLean, E. A. Monger. 2. Ovarian ultrastructure and changes during luteal regression —J. D. O'Shea, T. I. A/mi. 3. Studies on ovine luteal cells in vitro— R. J. Rodgers, J. D. O'Shea. 4. Distribution and functions of relaxin in thc pig —J. Patterson, J. D. O'Shea, C. S. Lee. 5. Ultrastructure and cytology of thc mammary gland —C. S. Lee, Wan Nordin. 6. Electrocardiography and thc heart score theory —G. A. Stewart. 7. Relationships between ECG abnormalities, training and plasma electrolyte levels in racehorses —V. M. Epstein, G. A. Stewart. 8. Relationships between cardiac output, heart score and heart weight in Greyhounds —P. L. Ereeman, G. A. Stewart. 9. Tanned ovine collagen as a vascular conduit —B. A. Christie, V. Ketharanathan (Royal Melbourne Hospital). PUBLISHED WORK Chapters of Books 1. OUTTERIDGE, P. M. and LEE, C. S.-Cellular immunity in thc mammary gland with par­ ticular reference to T, B lymphocytes and macrophages, in J. E. Butler (ed.), The Ruminant Immune System. Plenum Press, New Hampshire: 513-534 (1980). 2. TITCHEN, D. A. and PATTERSON, J. — Development of secretory activity of salivary glands, in A. T. Phillipson, L. W. Hall and W. R. Pritchard (eds.), Scientific Foundations of Veterinary Medicine, W. Heinemann, London: 243-247 (1980). 3. TITCHEN, D. A., TUDOR, E. McL and SCHOFIELD, G. G. - Development of gastric and small intestinal functions, in A. T. Phillipson, L. W. Hall and W. R. Pritchard (eds.), Scien­ tific Foundations of Veterinary Medicine, W. Heinemann, London: 247-253 (1980). Articles 4. CHRISTIE, B. A.— Collateral arterial blood supplv to the normal and ischemic canine kidney. Amer. J. Vet. Res., 41: 1519-1525 (1980). 5. CHRISTIE, B. A., KETHARANATHAN, V. and PERLOFF, L. J.-Patency rales of minute vascular replacements: the glutaraldehyde modified mandril grown conduit. J. Surg. Res., 28: 519-532 (1980). 6. KETHARANATHAN, V. and CHRISTIE, B. A.-Glutaraldehyde tanned ovine collagen conduits as vascular xenografts in dogs. Arch. Surg., 115: 967-971 (1980). 7. LEE, C. S., WOODING, F. B. P. and KEMP, P. — Identification, properties, and differen­ tial counts of cell populations using electron microscopy of dry cows secretions, colostrum and milk from normal cows. J. Dairv Res., 47: 39-50 (1980). 8. O'SHEA, J. D., CRAN, D. G. and HAY, M. E. — Fate of the theca interna following ovula­ tion in the ewe. Cell Tissue Res.. 210: 305-319 (1980). 9. SPEIRS, V. C, CHRISTIE, B. A., VAN VEENENDAAL, J. C.-Thc management of rec­ tal tears in horses. Aust. vet. J., 56: 313-317 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. AZM1, T. I.— Studies of ihe Vasculature of the Corpus Luteum. 2. MONGER, E. A. — Polyunsaturated Fatly Acid Metabolism in Domestic Animals. 3. PATTERSON, J. ^ Studies on Ihe Distribution and Function of Relaxin. 4. REYNOLDS, G. W.-Studies on Gastrin and Gastric Secretion in the Sheep. 5. RODGERS, R. J. - Structural and functional Studies of Cells of Ihe Corpus Luteum. MVSc Thesis in Progress 6. EPSTEIN, V. M. — ECG Abnormalities and Plasma Electrolytes in Racehorses in Training. MSc Thesis in Progress 7. FREEMAN, P. L. — Studies on Cardiac Output, Heart Score and Exercise Performance. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Australian Equine Research Foundation: ECG Abnormalities and Plasma Electrolytes. Australian Equine Research Foundation: ECG and the Heart Score Theory. ARGC: Polyunsaturated Fatly Acid Metabolism in thc Cat and Other Animals. Dairy Research Committee: Local Cellular Immunity in thc Mammary Gland. Melbourne University Veterinary Research Fund: Studies on Relaxin. Melbourne University Veterinary Research Fund: Sludics of the Corpus Luteum. ?f»9 290 CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

INTRODUCTION The Cemre became increasingly involved in 1980 in thc supervision of postgraduate studies. It was nevertheless able to maintain a fairly high level of activity in its traditional research areas, as described below. RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS A. ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT'S 1. Part 2 of social and economic impact study of thc Port of Melbourne Authority's Forward Development Plan for the Port of Melbourne as part of the Port of Melbourne Environmen­ tal Study-A. S. Atkins, W. T. O'Brien. 2. Environmental ell'ects of possible developments of the brown coal resources of ihc Gippsland Region-D. G. Evans, S. E. Bradford, B. W. Crawshaw. B. NATURAL RESOURCES PLANNING 1. Flushing and exchange regimes in the Gippsland Lakes—D. A. Mills. 2. Environmental design of the Lysterlield Reservoir and its immediate catchment area —W. T. O'Brien, G. C. Dandy, A. M. McGregor, J. P. Pike. 3. Ecological safeguards in logging tropical rainforests in East Kalimantan —G. Seddon. 4. Characteristics and conservation of rainforest with focus on the collection of rain forest species in the Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne — G. Scddon. 5. Application of multi-objective decision-making techniques in natural resource manage­ ment— W. T. O'Brien, A. S. Atkins. 6. Physical and mathematical modelling of the ell'ects of breakwaters and other marine struc­ tures on wave climate and beach morphology — W. T. O'Brien. C. ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN AND LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 1. Landscape principles study of areas managed by thc Upper Yarra Valley and Dandenong Ranges Authority — T. .1. Brown, R. M. Itami, R. J. King. 2. Parametric landscape assessment and evaluation techniques in tho multi-objective manage­ ment of landscape and natural resources —I. D. Bishop. 3. Pilol study in parametric landscape planning in the Geelong region —I. D. Bishop. 4. Churchill Island master plan —R. B. Martin, A. M. McGregor, S. Mathews. 5. Planting design and open space —W. H. Havens. 6. Issues for rural towns in Victoria —W. H. Havens. 7. Documentation of urban landscape guidelines process in Victoria —W. H. Havens. 8. Stalus of landscape architecture in Victoria —\V. H. Havens. 9. Tree forms-J. P. Pike 10. Site engineering —.1. P. Pike 11. Identification and use of plant materials in southern Victoria —J. P. Pike. D. SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASSESSMENTS OF URBAN RELATIONSHIPS AND STRUCTURE

1. Directory service to assist researchers, policy-makers and groups with an interest in housing in Australia—R. J. King, A. M. McGregor. 2. Review, evaluation and publication of housing research relevant lo Australian conditions in Ihe general fields of policy, management and design —R. J. King. 3. Development of guidelines for assessing thc short-term and long-term social effects of changes in accessibility and/or of severance ell'ects from transport or related changes— R. J. King. 4. Study of ihc effect of tho price and availability of housing finance and of house prices on op­ tions facing low income households, on their consequent car dependence, and on vulnera­ bility to energy price rises —R. J. King. 5. Study of the constraints on the residential choices of households in Melbourne, of behavioural responses to such constraints, and of households' expressed preferences relating to residential choices —R. J. King. 6. Review of housing policies in Victoria and preparation of Ihc Viclorian State Government's Green Paper on Housing —R. J. King. 7. Study of the social cost of road accidents in Australia-A. S. Atkins. 8. Assessment of the economic and environmental effects of food packaging in steel cans —A. S. Atkins, B. VV. Crawshaw, S. Mathews. CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 291

12. ENERGY PLANNING 1. Energy analysis, methodology and applications-I). G. Evans. 2. Conversion of coal to liquid fuels—D. G. Evans (with S. R. Siemon and R. S. Yost of the Department of Chemical Engineering). 3. Environmental effects of mining and upgrading Victorian coal —D. G. Evans. 4. Development of energy resources policy — D. G. Evans. F. ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION 1. Survey of training methodology for environmental education teachers in Far-East Asia—B. W. Crawshaw, G. Seddon, D. Stokes. 2. Use of creativity skills in natural systems management — B. W. Crawshaw, R. M. Itami, D. J. Le Grew, G. Seddon, J. D. Waison. G. MISCELLANEOUS 1. Review of environmental dala handling systems—1. D. Bishop.

PUBLISHED WORK Books 1. DAVIS, M. and BOYCE, H. — Directory of Australian Pictorial Resources, Centre for En- vironmenial Studies, University of Melbourne (1980). 2. EVANS, D. G. (ed.) — Petroleum, policies and people. The Australian Institute of Energy, Melbourne (1980). 3. KING, R. J. — Interest rates, energy and house prices: some aspecis of the Melbourne bous­ ing market, 1966-1980, Centre for Environmental Studies, Universiiy of Melbourne (1980). 4. KING, R. J. (principal author) — Green Paper on housing in Victoria, Volume One, Ministry of Housing, Melbourne (19S0). 5. LE GREW, D. J., WATSON, J. D., CRAWSHAW, B. W., ITAMI, R. M. and SEDDON, G. — Creative problem-solving and environmental management. Centre for Environmental Studies, Universiiy of Melbourne (1980). Chapters of Books 6. EVANS, D. G. —Energy balances —the energy costing of energy, in Energy Tomorrow, Oc­ casional Paper No. 5, The University of New South Wales, Sydney (1980). 7. HOOPER, R. .1. and EVANS, D. G.-The ctl'ccl of coal structure on thc dissolution of brown coal in tetralin, in Coal Liquefaction I'undamenluls, ed. D. D. Whitehurst, American Chemical Societv Svmposium Series 139, American Chemical Societv, Washington D.C. (1980). 8. SEDDON, G. —Melbourne's urban streets, in Urban Strategies: Perspectives and Issues, Swinburne College of Technology, Melbourne (1980). Articles 9. KING, R. J.—Some relationships between residential location, travel mode and income in Melbourne. Aust. Road Research. 10(4): 10-20 (1980). 10. KING, R. J. -Melbourne future. Aust. Architecture and Design, I (2): 43-51 (1980). 11. PIKE, .1. P.-Landscape education in Australia. Landscape Australia. 3: 199-206 (1980). 12. SEDDON, G.-Environmental education. Memo, 3 (39): 26-28 (1980). 13. SEDDON, G. — Limitations and virtues. Review of J. O'Brien (ed.). Environment and Science (Univ. of W.A. Press, 1979). Australian Book Review, 21: 20-21 (1980). 14. SEDDON, G. — The people of Perth. Essay review of C. T. Siannagc, The people of Perth: a social historv of Western Australia's capital cilv (Perth Citv Council, Perth, 1979). Westerly, 25 (3): 91-101 (1980). Reports 15. BRADFORD. S. 1... CRAWSl IAW, B. W., and EVANS, D. G. - Environmental effects of possible developments of the brown coal resources of the Gippsland region, Report to thc Victorian Ministry for Conservation (1980). 16. BROWN, T. J., ITAMI, R. M., KING, R. .1. - Landscape principles study for Upper Yarra Valley and Dandenong Ranges, Volume 2: procedures for landscape assessment and manage­ ment. Report to the Upper Yarra Vallev and Dandenong Ranges Authority (1980). 17. CRAWSHAW, B. W., SEDDON, G., and STOKES. Xi.-Survey of environmental educa­ tion teacher training methodology for Par-East Asia, Report to the Division of Science, Technical and Vocational Information, UNESCO (1980). 18. KING, R. J. - Residential location, travel mode and income: the likely effects of changes in housing costs and transport costs in Melbourne, AIR 311-1, Australian Road Research Board," Melbourne (1980). 292 CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

19. KING, R. .1. and McGRF.GOR, A. M.— Australian Housing Research Council: housing research directory. Addendum III, Centre for Environmental Studies, Universitv of Melbourne (1980). 20. MARTIN, R., McGREGOR, A. M., and MATHEWS, S.-Churchill Island master plan: an environmental approach, to the assessment of land use alternatives, Report to thc Victoria Conservation Ttust (1980). 21. SEDDON. G. (principal author)— Report on Kalimantan Tiinur rainforest research project identification mission, Report to the National Institute of Sciences, Government of In­ donesia, and the Australian Development Assistance Bureau (1980). Technical Reports 22. ANDERSON, N., McGREGOR, A. M., McGREGOR, B. and THOMSON, L. -,4 planting guide lor ihe Merri Creek Vallev, Mcrri Creek Co-ordinating Committee, Melbourne (1980). 23. GARVEY. .1., HUNT , S., LESTER, C, THOMAS. W.. TOWNSEND .1., WILLIAMS, B. and WILSON, D. —A discussion paper on aluminium smelling: Alcoa and ils implications. Centre for Environmental Studies, Universiiy of Melbourne (1980). 24. HAVENS. W. H. — Planting design and open space. Garden State Committee, Victoria (1980). 25. STAFFORD, B. (ed.) — Cumberland scenic road realignment study. Centre for Environmen­ tal Sludics, University of Melbourne (1980). THESES PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Landscape Architecture I. IT AMI, R. M. — Scenic quality in Australia: a procedure lo assess and evaluate the visual effects of land-use change. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Theses in Progress 1. ATKINS, A. S. — Economic analysis and modelling of ihe environmental consequences of resource allocation. 2. BACK WELL, D. V. — History and impact of the environmental movement in Australia. 3. BLAKE, A. M. — Planning for urban conservation in N.S.W. and Victoria. 4. GABRIC, A. .1. —Mathematical modelling of I hernial discharges in aquatic environments. MEnvS Theses in Progress 5. BENNETT, S. I':. —An environmental study of settlement patterns and development forces in ihe Cairns region. 6. BLAKE, T . - Project evaluation theory: a critique and reformulation. 7. BRADFORD, S. L. — The environmental effects of brown coal development of the Latrobe Valley, Victoria. 8. DENIS, L. R. —Environmental factors affecting vegetalional zonation in Westernport sullinursh. 9. FITZPAT RICK, C. R.— Water balance sludics and management options for Lysterfield Reservoir. 10. GARVEY, J. L. - The effect of residential development on the recreational potential of the Shire of Mornington. 11. GAVIN, M.- The distribution of the needs and the availability of social welfare in the Melbourne metropolitan area. 12. HUNT", S. G. — The economic, social und environmental aspects involved in the adoption of standards for maximum lead content in petrol. 13. KING. R. L. — The feasibility of lake development following sand mining in the Heather- ton— Dingley special extractive zone. 14. LESTER, C. J. — Management of Crown Lands in the Gippslund Lakes Region. 15. 1.IEW, P. H. —Coastal recreation and management: Port Fuiry. 16. LORENZON, R. ]. — The appraisal of changes in environmental attitudes resulting from nature education activities. 17. McGREGOR, A. M. - Planning for urban catchment management. 18. MAWBEY, J. M. — Quantitative methods for the evaluation of competing land-use. 19. O'HANI.ON, E. M. - Lund-use planning/resource analysis in the Hunter Valley region. 20. PIESSE, R. D. — The use of public land for education in the environment. 21. PII.BEAM. J. V. — Management of coustul reserves- Westernport. 22. RADFORD. T. (St. — Evaluation of designated conservation zones in western metropolitan regions of Pan Phillip Ray. 23. RUSS, P. Ci. — Development ofa transport energy policy for Victoria. 24. SHAW, J. R. — Vertebrates on the southern Mornington Peninsula and their habitat manugemem. CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 293

25. SMITH, J. M. — The recreational carrying capacity of the coast in Westernport. 26. THOMAS, W. O.—An analysis of landscape change in the Shire of Upper Yarra 1845-I9S0. 27. TOWNSEND, J. — Decision making for tlie demolition /preservation of buildings. 28. WHITMORE, M. G. — Identification, evaluation and conservation of historic mining sites. 29. WILLIAMS, B. i. — Land management and analysis. 30. WILLSTEED, P. G. — Analysis ofland-use and development on a residential land area in ihc coastal zone of Ml Eliza. 31. WILSON, D. J. — Development of transport planning policy in relation lo energy availability and price. MLA rch Theses in Progress 32. HUTCHINS, J. G. — Landscape assessment for computer based planning systems. 33. KELLY, A. — Computer applications to highway corridor selection. 34. N1RAN, R — Recreation strategy for the south bayside suburbs. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants and fees have been received as follows: Australian Development Assistance Bureau. Australian Housing Research Council. Australian Research Grants Committee. Australian Road Research Board. BHP. Commonwealth Department of Transport. Department of Minerals and Energy, Victoria. Geelong Regional Commission. Ministry for Conservation. Ministry of Housing. Port of Melbourne Authority. Premier's Department, Victoria. Reserve Bank of Australia. Upper Yarra Valley and Dandenong Ranges Authority. UNESCO. Victoria Conservation Trust. 294 BOARD OF SOCIAL STUDIES

BOARD OF SOCIAL STUDIES

INTRODUCTION There were three highlights in departmental research activity 1980: (i) Comparative evaluation of welfare service models for immigrants. Various models have emerged and new initiatives are being planned. Dr. David Cox has received an A.R.G.C. Grant to undertake a comparative evaluation, (ii) Development of professional and voluntary roles in social work and social welfare. The numerical predominance of women in welfare is a matter of interest. Laurie O'Brien and Cynthia Turner are using historical methods to gain an understanding of their roles, drawing upon Victorian and North American sources, (iii) Family Policy. Dr. Len Tierney has continued his national study of family policy; now in its third year of A.R.G.C. funding. In 1980 he was invited to give one of the three Australian papers at a closed conference on family policy sponsored by the Australian Council of Social Welfare Ministers.

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Issues in relation to the implementation of the Equal Opportunity Act 1977 —C. Turner. 2. Women's participation in welfare in Victoria from the 1930s —an analysis of both profes­ sional and voluntary roles —L. O'Brien and C. Turner. 3. The ideological origins of medical social work in Boston as exemplified in the career of Dr. Richard Clarke Cabot (1868-1939)-L. O'Brien. 4. The school to work transition of migrant youth —D. Cox. 5. Ethnic welfare services —a study of welfare services in Melbourne designed for im­ migrants—D. Cox. 6. The welfare needs of immigrants of a non-Christian origin— D. Cox. 7. Students on their first major fieldwork placement in thc B.S.W. course —M. Hamilton. 8. Development ofa Community Mental Health Centre —W. Healy. 9. Theory and action in social work practice —W. Healy and J. Rimmer. 10. Income maintenance for single parent families —S. Charlesworth. 11. Welfare provisions in Children's Courts in four European countries —S. Charlesworth. 12. Simulation teaching on Family Court processes —S. Charlesworth. 13. Single mothers who keep their children in Australia in the eighties —S. Charlesworth. 14. National survey of faculty in Australian Schools of Social Work —E. Ozanne. 15. Thc natural history of community projects: case studies —J. Rimmer and W. Roberts. PUBLISHED WORK Chapter of Book 1. HEALY, W. —A Task-Focused Time Limited Group, in Perspectives in Australian Social Work, eds. F. Pavlin and others, P. I. T. Publishing, Melbourne (1980). Article 2. O'BRIEN, L. and TURNER, C.-Hospital Almoning: Portrait of the First Decade, Australian Social Work, 32 (4): 7-12 (1979). Reports and Notes 3. ARNOLD, L. and ROBERTS, W. (eds.)-Diversity and Social Justice, Department of Social Studies, University of Melbourne (1980). 4. COX, D. R. — Migration and Integration in the Australian Context, Department of Social Studies, University of Melbourne (1980). 5. COX, D. R. (ed.) — Australia's Immigration Policy in Asia and the Pacific, Department of Social Studies, University of Melbourne (1980). 6. CHARLESWORTH, S.-Commentary on "The Right of the Child to be Consulted and the Role of the Child Advocate" by W. Prendergast in Children of Parents in Conflict (Proc. ofa National Conference, South Australian Deparment of Community Welfare): 119-122(1980). THESIS PASSED FOR HIGHER DEGREE Master of Arts 1. HOLLINGWORTH, P. J. - The Anglican Parish Priest and the Welfare Obligation. THESES IN PROGRESS PhD Thesis in Progress 1. BROWN, T. — The Dictates of Demography: A History of the Role of Local Government in the Development of Social Services in Victoria, 1840-1975. BOARD OF SOCIAL STUDIES 295

2. OZANNE, E. - Institutional Development and Deanship Succession in Graduate Social Work Schools. MS W Theses in Progress 3. FORD, D. — An Examination of Selected Aspects of Family Policy. 4. JAMES, C — Explorations in Referral Theory and Practice. 5. KEATING, T. — Social Program Implementation. 6. MERRY, G.—Anxiety in Sufferers from Retinitis Pigmentosa. 7. MITCHELL, G. — An Evaluation of the Volunteer Program of St. Anthony's, a family welfare agency. 8. NETHERWAY, R.-Effect of Mobility on Naval Families. 9. O'BRIEN, T. — Foster Care— Understanding the role of Foster Parents. 10. OXER, J. — The Role of Ihe Relief Systems ofthe Counsellor in Therapy. MA Theses in Progress 11. MITCHELL, B. - Social Networks of Aboriginal Youth Offenders. 12. RENKIN, P.—Analysis ofa Community Worker at Lake Tyers. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: ARGC: Study of Social Service Systems and Family Policy. ARGC: Study of Migrant Welfare Services in Melbourne. ARCHIVES

RESEARCH TOPICS IN PROGRESS 1. Annotated bibliographic guide to collections in the Universitv of Melbourne Archives — D. L. D. Brand. 2. T. C. Lothian, publisher and publishers' representative, 1909-1950 —C. E. Close. 3. Trade unions and communism: industrial recovery in Australia and Great Britain, 1933-1940-A. P. Reeves. 4. The impact of British migration on the Australian workforce, 1920-1960 —A. P. Reeves. 5. Changing perceptions ofthe role of native flora in the Australian domestic garden profile —J. M. Richmond. MATERIALS RECEIVED A. SOURCE MATERIAL CONCERNING UNIVERSITY HISTORY Records were received from the Central Administration, the Centre for the Study of Higher Education, Physics (RAAF Academy), Chemistry, Germanic Languages (Swedish), History and Philosophy of Science, thc Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research, Civil Engineering, the Student Housing Board, Geology and the Faculty of Economics and Commerce. Personal papers received were those of Mr G. Vasey, Professor G. N. Blainey, Professor C. E. Moorhouse, Professor J. F. Lovering, Mr Ralph McLean, Mr J. F. Richardson, Mr S. Margin- son, Miss G. Kentish, Dr Sophie Ducker, and the late Elizabeth Gasking and Walter Rosenhain. Clubs and societies which donated records were the Choral Society, the Mountaineering Club, thc Victorian Women's Graduate Association and Australian Federation of University Women, the Engineering Students' Club and Baseball Club. Records were also received from thc following affiliated or otherwise associated bodies: Or- mond College, the Victorian Universities Committee and Victorian Universities and Colleges' Committee and the Victorian Universities and Schools Board Mathematics Standing Committee.

B. GENERAL HISTORICAL SOURCE MATERIAL Professor J. Power (local Government Board of Review); Hugh Lennon & Co. show banner; Working Women's Centre; 'Scandinavians in Australia' project material; Sargood Gardiner Ltd. (further accession); Bright Family Papers (a rich collection, 16th-20th century, centred on a Bristol trading family and its interests in many parts of the world including Australia); Gibbs Bright & Co. (also a rich collection of material from an Australian company connected wilh the Bright family); H. Dcsbrowe Annear (plans for M. H. Baillieu residence); Kerry Lovering (urban renewal matters, Kew); George Tibbits (Carlton Association, also original musical scores and cor­ respondence); Bates Smart & McCutcheon (more plans); Professor Emeritus A. R. Chisholm (first World War relics); Victorian Women's Amateur Sports Council; M. Turner Shaw (further notes on an early builder); W. T. Kendall (reminiscences); Camberwcll Citizens' Protest Movement; Western Mining Corporation Holdings Lid. (further accession); BH South Ltd. (further acces­ sion); The Stock Exchange of Melbourne Ltd. (further accession); R. B. Ritchie & Sons Pty. Ltd. (further accession to pastoral collection); Professor R. I. Downing (further personal papers); Women's Section, Sociological Association of Australia & New Zealand; E. E. Adamson (profes­ sional photographic negatives); Australian Agricultural Economics Society; P.L.Q. Norris (solicitor); Corr & Corr (solicitors); Art Workers' Union —Melbourne; Australian Military Forces (copies of notes on military campaigns); Workers' Party; W. A. Osborne (personal papers); Newton and Stephen (family papers). Trade Union and Labour collections include material from the Working Women's Centre, Australian Bank Employees Union, North Bendigo Railway Workshops Shop Committee, Federated Felt Hatters Employees Union, Australian Workers Union —Victorian Branch, Vic­ lorian Trades Union Salaried Officers Association, Federated Confectioners Association of Australia —Victorian Branch; Waterside Workers Federation —Melbourne Branch; United Firefighters Union —Victorian Branch; Federated Rubber Workers —Victorian Branch; Slan Willis; Boilermakers Society —Williamstown Branch; Socialist Parly of Australia, Australian Labor Parly —Footscray and Bendigo Branches; Australian Institute of Marine and Power Engineers, Victorian District; Federated Moulders (Metals) Union, Federal Execuiive—New- South Wales Branch; Friendly Society of Iron Moulders —Newcastle Branch; Wool and Basil Workers Union —New South Wales Branch; Ted Tripp (Victorian Labour College); Australian Transport Officers Federation —Victorian Branch; Amalgamated Engineering Union —Bendigo 296 ARCHIVES 297 and Bendigo 2 Branches; Bendigo Trades Hall Council; E. W. Peters; and the Amalgamated Society of Carpenters and Joiners —Victorian Branch. SUBSTANTIAL GRANTS RECEIVED Grants have been received as follows: Anonymous donation; Vehicle Builders Employees Federation; CRA Ltd.; Australian United Corporation Ltd.; V.U.S.E.B.; Henry Jones (1XL) Ltd.; Citizens Welfare Bureau; Macpherson Smith; United Firefighters Union; Amalgamated Society of Carpenters & Joiners: All towards processing and storing records from these donors. LIBRARY

PUBLISHED WORK Book J. RICHARDSON. W'. D. — Focus on State Libraries: a Report to the Nation, Australian Library Promotion Council (1980). Articles 2. PRICE, R. —Books and sci-tcch students and academics. Aust. Academic and Research Libraries, 7: 232-236 (1980). 3. RICHARDSON, W. D. - Innovation in the 80's: keynote address to A.S.E.T./L.A.A. Na­ tional Conference on Technology in Education, Mav, 1980. A.S.E. T. Yearbook 1980: 61-72. 4. RICHARDSON, W. D.-Into the 1980's-forwards or backwards? Aust. Librarv J., 29: 6-12 (1980). 5. RICHARDSON, W. D. — Libraries and information services in an information society, ln Technological change —impact of information technology, 1980. Information Technology Council: 93-99 (1980). 6. SIEGE1.BAUM, L. —The O'Flahcrty Collection. Aust. Academic and Research Libraries, II: 189-194 (1980). THESES IN PROGRESS 1. PARKER, D. — Logical data analysis for academic library computer data base systems. 2. RIDDETT, K.-The Office of the Dead in French illumination 14th-15th centuries.

298 STUDENT HEALTH SERVICE

PUBLISHED WORK Article I. COLL, J. B. und ALLEN, F. C. L. — Survev of Health problems of Overseas Students. Soc ial Science and Medicine 1980: 627 (1980).'

299 UNIVERSITY ASSEMBLY

INTRODUCTION In 1980 ihe Assembly pursued its investigations into such important aspects of academic ad­ ministration and academic government as the resolution of disputes, student representation in decision-making, continuing education and library funding. Thc transcripts of the Assembly Week forums for 1978 and 1980 were issued as monographs and much further information gathered on the University's policies and practices. INVESTIGATIONS IN PROGRESS 1. Animal Experimentation. 2. Appointments Board. 3. Continuing Education at the University. 4. Deferred and Leave of Absence Students. 5. Disputes Resolving Procedures in the University. 6. New Technology and the University. 7. Sludeni Health Services. 8. Student Representation and Participation 9. Thc University's Libraries. 10. University Staffing. 11. University Theatre.

300 Printed by Brown Prior Anderson Pty Ltd Burwood Victoria

Library Digitised Collections

Title: Research Report, 1980

Date: 1980

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/24105

File Description: Research Report, 1980

Terms and Conditions: © University of Melbourne 2012